Inbox News: February 2026 - Issue 651

Week Four February 2026: Issue 651 (published Sunday February 22 2026)

News items and articles run at the top of this page. Information, local resources, events and local organisations, sports groups etc. are at the base of this page. All Previous pages for you are listed in Past Features

Long-Billed Corella, Careel Bay, February 19, 2026. Photo: AJG/PON. More in: Long-Billed Corella

 

End of Summer Dispersal of birds From Birth Nests + Flying Foxes Feasting on Spotted Gum Blossoms

Pittwater residents, including our local Vet, have been hearing lots of owls at night of late, a classic end-of Summer nocturnal music as these juvenile birds begin finding their way in the world, having grown out of their birth nests.

This Powerful, photographed by PON's Features Photographer Michael Mannington OAM of Community Photography, was spotted in Mona Vale this week.

He's a boy and has been checked by Sydney Wildlife volunteers a few times over recent days. Apparently there are possums in the vicinity and he’s waiting for a dusk feed. He also ranges through Kitchener park as part of his new domain.

Another nocturnal music being heard by those still working late are Flying Foxes feasting on what is blooming - in the PON yard at present that's Pittwater Spotted gums - and they're joined in nocturnal flight by the microbats pair that also live in these same trees.

The birds watched growing up this past Summer are also dispersing or have already gone - off into the greater expanses of blue hills meeting green hills meeting blue skies.

See: Summer BirdFest 2026: Play antics of New Locals - Blue-faced Honeyeaters Breeding In Pittwater or All February 2026 Environment News

It's all classic end-of Summer in Pittwater stuff.

Please slow down at Dusk and Dawn

The powerful owl (Ninox strenua), a species of owl native to south-eastern and eastern Australia, is the largest owl on the continent. It is found in coastal areas and in the Great Dividing Range, rarely more than 200 km (120 mi) inland. 

The powerful owl has a long tail and a small head, giving it an atypical silhouette for an owl and imparting a more hawk-like appearance than any other large owl. The protruding bill and distinct brow ridges enhance the hawk-like appearance of the species.

This species measures 45 to 65 cm (18 to 26 in) in length and spans 112 to 135 cm (44 to 53 in) across the wings. Unlike in a vast majority of owl species, the male is slightly larger than the female on average. Body mass in males has been reported at 0.99 to 2.22 kg (2.2 to 4.9 lb), with 13 males averaging 1.45 kg (3.2 lb), while females can weigh from 1.04 to 1.6 kg (2.3 to 3.5 lb), with an average in 9 females of 1.25 kg (2.8 lb). Among all the owls in the world, the powerful owl is the ninth longest from bill-to-tail, the tenth heaviest and the eighth longest winged. - From Wikipedia and BirdLife Australia

''Majestic is the suitable description.'' - Michael Mannington OAM, February 17, 2026

Generally, this species lives in primary forests with tall, native trees, but can show some habitat flexibility when not nesting. The powerful owl is a typically territorial raptorial bird that maintains a large home range and has long intervals between egg-laying and hatching of clutches. Also, like many types of raptorial birds, they must survive a long stretch to independence in young owls after fledging.

They are an apex predator and are often opportunists, like most predators, but generally are dedicated to hunting arboreal mammals, in particular small to medium-sized marsupials. Such prey can comprise about three-quarters of their diet. 

As insects also form part of their diet, residents are asked to slow down at dusk and dawn as they will frequently feed at the sides of roads and this can lead to impacts with cars - please slow down!

If you do come across wildlife that has been injured or needs help, please contact:

Sydney Wildlife: For 24/7 Emergency Rescue or Advice CALL 9413 4300

WIRES: For emergency rescue support 24/7 please call 1300 094 737 

Both operate 24/7 with local volunteers ready to help our other local residents - the feathered, furry and scaled. Their mission is to rescue and care for sick, injured, and orphaned native wildlife and to safely release them back into the wild

More of MM's photos:

    

 

Minimum age to ride an e-bike to be introduced

On Friday February 20 2026 the NSW Government announced a minimum age to ride an e-bike in NSW is being introduced as part of the Minns Labor Government’s measured and staged reforms aimed at improving safety for riders, pedestrians and the wider community.

NSW will also adopt the European safety and performance standard to ensure e-bikes perform like bicycles, and the current crop of high-powered, illegal motorbikes masquerading as e-bikes are removed from the state’s roads and footpaths.

There are an estimated 760,000 e-bikes in NSW. The rapid growth has brought new opportunities for people to get around and to keep active, but it’s highlighted the need for clearer, more consistent rules to support their safe use.

The government stated the former Liberal-National government allowed e-bikes with power up to 500-watts without introducing a rules framework.

'The reforms being introduced by the Minns Labor Government recognise the law needs to keep pace with the popularity of e-bikes  while ensuring families and riders who have already purchased devices are treated fairly.' the government said

We believe this approach strikes the right balance: improving safety for riders and the wider community, while preserving e-bikes as an accessible and popular form of everyday transport.

Minimum age

Under current NSW Road Rules, a child of any age can ride an e-bike and bicycle riders of any age can carry passengers if the bike’s design allows.

E-bikes are heavier and faster than traditional bicycles, which can increase the force involved in a crash, heighten the risk of serious injury, and make them more difficult to control and manoeuvre.

An expert review led by Transport for NSW will recommend a legal minimum age between 12 and 16 for riding an e-bike in NSW, while also considering whether children and teenagers have the skills, maturity and awareness of potential dangers required to safely carry passengers.

As part of this review there will be consultation with experts in child development and road safety, including the NSW Office for Youth and Young People, and will listen directly to parents and young people before making a final decision on the appropriate age threshold.

Advice and findings will be provided to the Minister for Transport and Minister for Roads by June, with the NSW Government to make a final decision on an age limit and passengers.

Age limit restrictions will build on e-bike reforms already announced by the Minns Government, including:

  • New powers for NSW Police to seize and crush illegal e-bikes.
  • A trial of portable ‘dyno units’ to measure e-bike speed in roadside compliance checks.
  • Tearing up the former Liberal government’s 2023 decision to allow 500-watt e-bikes on NSW roads.
  • Introduced new standards for lithium-ion batteries to reduce the risk of fires associated with e-bikes and e-scooters.

NSW will adopt the EU Safety Standard

NSW will adopt the European safety standard (EN15194) in March this year to ensure e-bikes operate like bicycles, and not motorbikes.

Under this standard, e-bikes must have a maximum power output of 250 watts and power assistance must cut out at 25km/h. No power assistance is delivered at all after 6km/h if a rider is not pedalling the bike.

The standard also includes strict battery, electrical and fire-safety requirements, as well as anti-tampering protections to prevent power and speed limits being altered.

NSW will join only Western Australia in requiring this benchmark, giving riders clearer rules and stronger safety protections.

A Practical Transition

Recognising hundreds of thousands of e-bikes currently in use were purchased legally under the former Liberal National Government’s 2023 rule change, which increased the allowable power from 250 watts to 500 watts, a three-year transition period will apply.

From 1 March 2029, only e-bikes meeting the European standard will be road legal in NSW.

The three-year period reflects the typical lifespan of an e-bike and provides households, retailers and manufacturers with certainty and time to adjust, the government said.

However, after a period of consultation, retailers will be required to clearly specify whether a bike meets the EU standard and is therefore road legal in NSW.

The Government  said it will also work closely with manufacturers to ensure future stock complies with the updated rules.

'The reforms provide clarity and certainty: compliant bikes remain legal and accessible; higher-powered devices will need to meet higher regulatory requirements.

This is a staged, practical reform that recognises the reality on our streets while steadily moving toward a safer and more consistent framework for the future.'

Minister for Transport John Graham said:

“We want children outdoors and active but keeping them safe is paramount.

“I am concerned that we have primary school-aged children trying to control e-bikes that in some cases are heavier than them.

“I acknowledge the concern in the community about groups of teens piling on to fatbikes – often three to a bike – and sometimes breaking simple road rules. This review has been tasked with investigating whether teens have the ability to safely double their friends and how young is too young to be in the saddle of an electric bike.

“We are increasing the powers of NSW Police to seize and crush illegal e-bikes, and the adoption of the EU standard is part of building a safe and clear framework of rules around this popular form of transport.”

“The community has spoken against souped-up motorbikes masquerading as e-bike and this new standard makes clear that e-bikes must perform like bicycles not motorbikes.

“Make no mistake, with more than 750,000 e-bikes on NSW roads, this is a huge challenge to solve, especially after the former Liberal government opened the door to 500-watt e-bikes.”

Minister for Police and Counter-terrorism Yasmin Catley said:

"Police see first-hand the consequences when powerful e-bikes are misused.

"By introducing sensible age settings and cracking down on illegal, high-powered bikes, we are helping police prevent dangerous behaviour before more people are seriously hurt.

“The vast majority of people do the right thing, and these laws are designed to support them.

“This is about getting the balance right so e-bikes remain a useful transport option without putting the public at risk."

Minister for Roads Jenny Aitchison said:

“While there may be some people who would prefer no age restrictions on riders, we believe the safety risks are significant enough that restrictions need to be rolled out.

“We want to make sure riders are physically and cognitively capable to handle e-bikes, so they can be ridden safely within the road rules.

“Age restrictions for young riders will help ensure this can be done and reduce the risk of injury for not just young people but also other road users too.

“We think the risks are significant enough to warrant a change, and now we want to draw on the best evidence and expert advice available to make a call on what the limits could be. As a result, we will make a decision on the age limits after the findings of Transport for NSW’s review and recommendations are handed down.”  

Previously February 2026 announcement:

Illegal e-bikes will be seized-crushed in NSW: e-bike Injury Presentations to NSW Hospitals doubles + That e-bike you bought your teen might be an illegal electric motorbike – and the risks are real

 

Young artists honoured with Theo Batten Youth Art Award

Each year the Theo Batten Youth Art Award, valued at $5,000, honours artistic excellence and innovation among young artists. The award supports recipients in pursuing arts studies at a tertiary level and is named in honour of former local artist Theo Batten, whose legacy continues to inspire the creative spirit of the peninsula.

Respected local artist Amber Boardman selected from a pool of ten remarkable artworks featured in this year’s Out Front 2026 exhibition of HSC Visual Arts student works at Manly Art Gallery & Museum (MAG&M).

This year’s joint winners are:

Jennifer Choi (NBSC Manly Campus) – for Virtual Daydreams, acrylic on canvas

Arta Dehghan (Killarney Heights High School) – for Façades, graphite pencil drawing

Each recipient will receive $2,000 towards their arts studies.

Highly Commended was: Olivia Sammut  (St Luke’s Grammar School) – for Homesick: A Severance, oil paint and oil pastel on canvas receiving $1,000.

Mayor Sue Heins expressed her admiration for the calibre of artists in this year’s exhibition. 

“The Out Front exhibition is a testament to the immense talent present in our local schools, and we are delighted to support these emerging artists as they take the next steps in their creative journeys.'' Mayor Heins said.  

“Congratulations to all the applicants and winners of this year’s Theo Batten Youth Art Award.”

The community is invited to visit the exhibition and vote for their favourite artwork in the KALOF People’s Choice Award.

Out Front 2026 exhibition is on display at MAG&M from 20 February to 5 April 2025 showcasing 25 HSC Visual Arts students works from 21 local secondary schools.

PROGRAM

Out Front 2026: HSC Visual Arts from Sydney’s Northern Beaches
20 February – 5 April 2025

Manly Art Gallery & Museum
West Esplanade Reserve, Manly
Open Tuesday to Sunday, 10am – 5pm
Free entry

The Theo Batten Youth Art Award is an annual prize of $5,000 presented as part of the Higher School Certificate visual arts exhibition Out Front held at Manly Art Gallery & Museum (MAG&M).  The award is shared among Sydney’s Northern Beaches HSC visual arts students chosen to exhibit in the annual exhibition and who are going on to pursue studies in the broad arts field. The prize funds can be used for expenses related to their studies.

Theo Batten (1918-2003) was a celebrated local artist and journalist, winning a Walkley Award in 1972. He trained at the National Art School and was actively involved in the MAG&M Society and the former Peninsula Art Society. A passionate storyteller and advocate for the arts, he established this award to support young artists in furthering their creative education.

Judge’s Comments: artist Amber Boardman

This was a very difficult decision to make as there were so many wonderful pieces. I truly wish I could give the prize to everyone. In the end I decided on these three winners because the most promising work to me includes a mix of technical skill as well as another element that pushes beyond the technical into another area. I sometimes call this "element x", something unexpected in the work that can surprise us viewers.

In this case I believe that Arta Dehghan achieved this terrifically with Facades, by somehow creating strange cavernous spaces within three small graphite drawings. Jennifer Choi's work Virtual Daydreams creates a dizzying composition with acidic bright tones that somehow recreates the overwhelm of our shared digital lives. Olivia Sammut's work is an ambitious large-scale expressive work that employs a wide range of processes and mark-making in the service of personal storytelling.

 

Two Boys And A Boat

Published by NFSA -  From the Film Australia Collection.  Made by the Commonwealth Film Unit in 1958. Directed by Richard Mason. The story of how two boys acquire a V.J. sailing boat by joining a club on the shores of Sydney Harbour and the way in which they are taught to sail their craft in safety

Premier’s Anzac Memorial Scholarship tour applications open

Announced: Monday February 9, 2026

The NSW Government has today announced that up to 18 students from across NSW have the opportunity to be selected to participate in a study tour visiting historic sites in Greece and Crete relating to Australia’s military service during the Second World War.

The Premier’s Anzac Memorial Scholarship (PAMS) is a wonderful opportunity for high school history students to deepen their understanding of Australians at war and gain a richer appreciation of the courage and sacrifice of the nation’s servicemen and servicewomen over the generations.

Locations in Greece include the Commonwealth War Graves Cemetery at Phaleron, the Hellenic War Museum, and the battlefields of Thermopylae and Thebes.

In Crete, the tour will visit sites such as the 6th Australian Division Memorial at Stavromenos, the battlefields of Rethymno, the Melame Memorial and the Souda Bay War Cemetery.

Two PAMS 2025 recipients reflected on their tour to the Republic of Korea and Singapore last year which they said was life changing.

Scarlett Sheridan from Green Point Christian College reflected that the tour was one of the greatest honours of her life, opening her eyes to the sacrifices made by veterans around the world.

Flynn Greenow from Narrabeen Sports High School said he felt a profound sense of connection while standing on the historic battlefields visited during the tour.

The 2026 tour will take place in the Term 3 school holidays departing on Saturday, 26 September and returning to Sydney on Thursday 8 October.

An important change has been introduced to the application process this year, requiring eligible students to submit a five-minute multimedia presentation as part of their online application, along with a letter of recommendation from their school and a parent consent form.

Applications close on Monday, 9 March 2026. For more information and to apply visit: www.veterans.nsw.gov.au/education/premiers-anzac-memorial-scholarship

Minister for Veterans David Harris said:

“The PAMS tour presents a unique opportunity for students from all over New South Wales, and I highly recommend that History and Modern History students in Year 10 and Year 11 consider applying.

“Through this scholarship, recipients will have the opportunity to visit historic sites across Greece and Crete that experienced the conflict first-hand - walking in the footsteps of the Australians who served and honouring their legacy at the very battlefields where their bravery was defined.

“More than 17,000 Australians served in the Greece and Crete campaigns of 1941, standing in defence against advancing German forces. Close to 600 made the ultimate sacrifice, with many more wounded and thousands taken as prisoners of war.

“Their courage and resilience remain an enduring part of our national story, and a lasting bond between Australia and Greece.

“The Minns Labor Government is proud to continue to support this fantastic program and the extraordinary legacy of veterans.”

Scarlett Sheridan, PAMS 2025 Scholar from Green Point Christian College said:

“Finding out I’d received a PAMS scholarship was one of the greatest honours I’ve ever received. It opened my mind to the sacrifices veterans around the world have made.

“Being a PAMS scholar has deepened my understanding of the sacrifice veterans make and the importance of keeping their stories alive. Hearing a Korean veteran thank us for our country’s service will stay with me forever and I am committed to playing my part in honouring all those who have served.

“I was blessed to make lifelong friends and mentored by incredible teachers. Every day offered a new experience.”

Flynn Greenow, PAMS 2025 Scholar from Narrabeen Sports High School said:

“There is a surreal sense of deep connection found amongst the battlefields on which Australians fought and died to protect, which I would struggle to grasp without PAMS.

“Making new friends while experiencing new cultures and learning about Australian military history, which is often overlooked in curriculum discussions, is an experience I will remember and treasure for the rest of my life.”

Commonwealth War Graves Cemetery at Phaleron

Opportunities:

Meet The BONDS Flying Roos Athletes in Sydney!

In the lead-up to the KPMG Sydney Sail Grand Prix on 28 February-1 March, the three-time SailGP Champions, the BONDS Flying Roos, are heading to Brookvale and local fans are invited to come down and meet their homegrown heroes.
Join them at the BONDS store located in Westfield Warringah Mall for your chance to say g’day to the Aussie crew, with surprises in store for the first fans to arrive!

Key details:
  • 📍Where: Westfield Warringah Mall, Shop 2611, Level 1
  • 📅When: Sunday 22 February 2026 
  • ⏰Time: 10:00am-11:00am
What’s in it for fans?
Meet the BONDS Flying Roos crew in the flesh, with an exclusive signing session featuring Tom Slingsby, Tash Bryant, Jason Waterhouse, Sam Newton, Iain Jensen and Tom Needham.
  • 📸Snap a pic with the athletes
  • 🎁Plus other surprises and exciting team giveaways.
Rally your crew and RSVP now, you don’t want to miss this one: www.eventbrite.com/e/meet-the-bonds-flying-roos-athletes-in-sydney-tickets-1981830518430 


International Women’s Day Webinar – Balancing the Scales

Thu 5 March 2026: Online | 7:00pm (AEDT)
Celebrate International Women’s Day with Australian Sailing and join an inspiring online conversation with Tash Bryant, Jessica Sweeney, and Stacey Jackson.

Tash Bryant started out in Optimists at Royal Prince Alfred Yacht Club on Pittwater, Tash progressed through the 29er class, became a Youth World Champion, campaigned the 49erFX, and learned to foil during COVID. She now races internationally as Strategist on the Bonds Flying Roos and was part of the Australian team that won Season 3 of SailGP. As the only woman on board, Tash will share her journey, the challenges she’s faced, and how she’s helping shift the balance in elite sport.

We’ll also hear from Jessica Sweeney, Team Lead for Marine and Coastal Hazards at the Bureau of Meteorology. She leads Australia’s national marine forecasting and warning services and is a former meteorologist for two America’s Cup campaigns and the Volvo Ocean Race. An accomplished ocean navigator, she is a Pacific Cup winner, Round Britain and Ireland Race record-setter, and six-time Sydney to Hobart Yacht Race finisher.

Joining them is Stacey Jackson, an elite offshore sailor with nearly 20 Sydney to Hobart starts and multiple Volvo Ocean Race campaigns. She skippered the first all-female professional crew aboard Wild Oats X to second overall in the 2018 Hobart and is fresh from helping The Famous Project become the first all-female crew to complete a non-stop circumnavigation of the globe in a Jules Verne Trophy campaign in January 2026.

This is a fantastic opportunity to hear first-hand how big dreams can start in small boats — and to feel inspired, empowered and motivated to take your own sailing journey further.

Find out more and register here: https://www.sailing.org.au/events/340409

NASA 2026 is a go!!

Registration now open on Liveheats at: https://liveheats.com/NASA

Sign up, lock in the dates - 1st comp Feb 28th!

Battle of the Bands – Youth Edition: at Palm Beach

Ages 12–17
Registrations opening shortly!
Tune up. Plug in. Rock out. 
For registration, please visit our website: www.plambeachclub.com.au
Registration form available on the What’s On page.
📞 02 9974 5566
Club Palm Beach (Palm Beach RSL)

Financial help for young people

Concessions and financial support for young people.

Includes:

  • You could receive payments and services from Centrelink: Use the payment and services finder to check what support you could receive.
  • Apply for a concession Opal card for students: Receive a reduced fare when travelling on public transport.
  • Financial support for students: Get financial help whilst studying or training.
  • Youth Development Scholarships: Successful applicants will receive $1000 to help with school expenses and support services.
  • Tertiary Access Payment for students: The Tertiary Access Payment can help you with the costs of moving to undertake tertiary study.
  • Relocation scholarship: A once a year payment if you get ABSTUDY or Youth Allowance if you move to or from a regional or remote area for higher education study.
  • Get help finding a place to live and paying your rent: Rent Choice Youth helps young people aged 16 to 24 years to rent a home.

Visit: https://www.nsw.gov.au/living-nsw/young-people/young-people-financial-help

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Quiver

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2026, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Noun

1. a slight trembling movement or sound, especially one caused by a sudden strong emotion - to shake with a slight but rapid motion; vibrate tremulously; tremble. 2. an archer's portable case for holding arrows - A container for carrying arrows, usually made of leather and carried on the back or over the shoulder. The quiver was standard equipment for archers, both hunters and soldiers. 3. A surf quiver is a curated collection of surfboards designed for different wave conditions, ranging from small, weak, to large, powerful, or hollow surf. An ideal, well-rounded quiver typically features a mix of a groveller (small waves), a daily driver (versatile), and a step-up (larger waves) to ensure maximum performance across all conditions. 

From: Middle English: from Old English cwifer ‘nimble, quick’. The initial qu- is probably symbolic of quick movement (as in quaver and quick ).

Archer's: from Middle English: from Anglo-Norman French quiveir, of West Germanic origin; related to Dutch koker and German Köcher . "case for holding arrows," early 14c., from Anglo-French quiveir, Old French quivre, cuivre, probably of Germanic origin, from Proto-Germanic kukur "container" (source also of Old High German kohhari, German Köcher, Old Saxon kokar, Old Frisian koker, Old English cocur "quiver"); ["said to be from the language of the Huns" - Barnhart].

Verb

1. tremble or shake with a slight rapid motion.

From: late 15c., perhaps imitative, or possibly an alteration of quaveren (see quaver), or from quiver (adj.) "active, agile, lively, brisk" (mid-13c.), from Old English cwifer- (in cwiferlice "zealously"), which is perhaps related to cwic "alive" (see quick (adj.)). Compare Middle Dutch kuyveren "to tremble." Related: Quivered; quivering. As a noun, "act or state of quivering," by 1715, from the verb.

Compare:

quaver(v.): from early 15c., quaveren, "to vibrate, tremble, have a tremulous motion," probably a frequentative of cwavien "to tremble, shake, be afraid" (early 13c.), which probably is related to Low German quabbeln "tremble," and possibly of imitative origin. With Germanic verbal suffix indicating repeated or diminutive action. The meaning "sing in trills or quavers, sing with a tremulous tone" is recorded by 1530s. Related: Quavered; quavering.

quick(adj.): from Middle English quik, from Old English cwic "living, alive, animate, characterised by the presence of life" (now archaic), and figuratively, of mental qualities, "rapid, ready," from Proto-Germanic kwikwaz (source also of Old Saxon and Old Frisian quik, Old Norse kvikr "living, alive," Dutch kwik "lively, bright, sprightly," Old High German quec "lively," German keck "bold", from word root gwei- "to live." Sense of "lively, active, swift, speedy, hasty," developed by c. 1300, on notion of "full of life."

‘Learning to be humble meant taming my need to stand out from the group’ – a humility scholar explains how he became more grounded

A need to be seen as the biggest fish may stem from pride and insecurity. ballyscanlon via Getty Images
Barret MichalecArizona State University

“Humble” is not a word my colleagues would use to describe me, especially early in my career.

In fact, when word got around that I was researching humility, I suspect more than a few choked on their coffee.

And even though I have spent over a decade exploring the concept as an attribute and as a practice, it wasn’t until I recently reflected on my own professional challenges that I truly understood how to embrace humility.

I want to share my journey, but first it is important to understand what humility is – and isn’t. It’s been extolled as a virtue for centuries, but it’s often mischaracterized.

In today’s culture, it can be mistaken as a humblebrag, which disguises a boast as modesty – for example, “I really hate talking about myself, but people keep asking how I managed to run a marathon while working full time.” Or it can resemble impostor phenomenon, the persistent experience of feeling intellectually or professionally fraudulent despite clear evidence of competence or success.

But research shows that humble people hold accurate views of their own abilities and achievements. They openly acknowledge their mistakes and limitations and are receptive to new ideas. Overall, they recognize their places within a larger whole and genuinely appreciate the value of others.

Humility doesn’t always earn praise. Sometimes the humble may be seen as meek, subservient or self-abasing.

For instance, many people praised former New Zealand Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern’s empathetic, self-effacing leadership during the COVID-19 pandemic, with an openness and deference to experts. But some critics dismissed it as weak or soft. These negative views show the various ways people “see” humility.

Generally, though, when humility is understood as grounded self-awareness rather than self-erasure, it’s viewed as something worth cultivating and practicing. We see openness, curiosity, acknowledgment of others and a lack of ego in fictional characters like Ted Lasso, hero of the same-titled Apple TV series; Samwise Gamgee in the “Lord of the Rings” books; and Jean-Luc Picard, commander of the USS Enterprise in “Star Trek: The Next Generation.”

Humility is also evident in public figures, such as former President Jimmy Carter, children’s television host Fred Rogers, and Nelson Mandela, the Black nationalist who served as the first Black president of South Africa.

An elderly man in a dark suit stands in front of a church congregation, raising a hand in greeting.
Former U.S. President Jimmy Carter speaks to the congregation at Maranatha Baptist Church before teaching Sunday school in his hometown of Plains, Ga., on April 28, 2019, at age 94. After leaving the White House in 1981, Carter taught Sunday school at the church on a regular basis. Paul Hennessy/NurPhoto via Getty Images

I’m a sociologist with a focus on medical education and health care providers. At Arizona State University’s Edson College of Nursing and Health Innovation, I explore issues including causes of burnout, elements of team-based care and opportunities for emphasizing the human side of health care. In recent years, my work has focused on humility.

From my research and my own experience, I’ve learned that true humility isn’t self-erasure. It’s a sense of security and confidence that your value doesn’t depend on recognition and that you are just one member of a larger system with a multitude of contributors. By removing the need to dominate, humility fosters openness to collaborationinnovation and an awareness of how the systems around us work.

Still, in a world of Instagram likes and LinkedIn accolades, humility can be the virtue everyone seems to admire but few practice It’s the one we say we want – until it requires us to confront the parts of ourselves that crave affirmation.

Climbing the professional ladder

I tend to stand out in a crowd. I’m 6-foot-4, with close-cropped hair, a heavy beard and tattoos. I also push myself to stand out professionally.

Starting in graduate school, I was determined to make my voice heard and sought after. I pursued nearly every opportunity, committee and position that came my way. No role was too small for me to accept.

I strived to present my work in top-tier journals and at conferences, and I cold-called prominent scholars to propose working together. And I constantly shared my findings and thoughts on social media.

Like many workplaces, the academic world has a set of defined success metrics, such as publications, citations of your work, grant funding and teaching evaluations from students. School culture and leadership influence what each college or university considers more or less valuable among those measures. To advance and get promoted, particularly to get tenure, it’s important to learn at an early stage what one’s department, college or university truly prioritizes.

I wanted to get tenure but also to be seen as an active citizen of academia – energetic, outspoken and unafraid to push boundaries. When my department chair described me as having my hair on fire, I took it as a compliment. I called it “making positive noise.”

Initially, the system rewarded that noise. I earned tenure at the University of Delaware and received departmental, college and national awards. I also was appointed to serve as associate dean and to direct a new research center. I felt validated, visible and valuable.

The sociology department at the University of Delaware had a typical academic culture that’s often summarized as “publish or perish.” The most important measures of scholars’ work were writing, publishing their work in respected journals and having other researchers cite those studies. Securing external funding from government, private companies or foundations was valued but was not as high a priority as publishing.

Screen shot of author Barret Michalec's 2019-2026 citations from his Google Scholar profile.
For many academic researchers, their number of publications and the frequency with which other scholars cite their articles are important measures of professional success. Barret Michalec

A new beginning that felt like an end

In 2020 I received a new opportunity at Arizona State University, a much larger school that branded itself as a hub of innovation and entrepreneurship. I was offered the chance to direct the Center for Advancing Interprofessional Practice, Education and Research and to step into the shoes of a leader I deeply admired. I arrived expecting to be a big fish in a bigger pond.

I couldn’t have been more wrong.

I showed up imagining there’d be a bit of buzz around my arrival given my time at the University of Delaware. But reality didn’t match the script: no greeting, office or nameplate marked my place when I arrived.

Early conversations with administrators weren’t about my research or teaching visions – the things that I thought set me apart. Instead, I felt they tended to focus on how much external funding I could raise from foundations and government agencies. My new colleagues often spoke in a shorthand of grant-based acronyms when referring to what projects they were working on, a “language” I was woefully unfamiliar with.

To make matters worse, I arrived during COVID-19, with classes either canceled or taught online and faculty members working mainly from home. The hallway chatter, open doors and spontaneous collaboration that I was accustomed to were absent. I began to feel alienated and disoriented as a scholar.

Even after ASU resumed in-person classes in the fall of 2021, I felt like the silence and distance lingered. No students waited for office hours. I struggled to make connections with my colleagues. I eagerly proposed collaborations when really everyone was just trying to find their footing in this new era of education.

My proposals for new classes and curricular programs hit up against institutional barriers I was unaware of. At one point, a college administrator asked, “How do we get you on other people’s grants?” – a question that I took to imply that they felt my research wasn’t strong enough.

It appeared that my colleagues in Edson College were accustomed to these values and spoke the language. I was a stranger in a strange land. Although I was producing some of my best work, measured in terms of publications and citations, I felt no one seemed interested. I had come from an environment where I felt known and valued to one where I seemed to be a nobody.

I felt as though I needed to staple my resume to my forehead and parade around the hallways asserting, like Ron Burgundy in the movie “Anchorman,” “I’m not quite sure how to put this, but … I’m kind of a big deal. People know me.”

Newsman Ron Burgundy gets a cool reception in a new media market in ‘Anchorman.’

The impact of feeling unseen

For people who have built careers by being highly engaged and visible, suddenly feeling unseen can be devastating. In any profession, a fear that you don’t belong at your workplace can be debilitating and make you question your own value.

I sought advice from peers and college leaders, and even hired a professional coach. Things only worsened. Curricular proposals were stalled or turned down. My center was shuttered in a restructuring, although it was meeting its goals and earning international recognition.

At first, I blamed ASU and Edson College for my feelings of disconnection. I thought the leadership structure and style was dysfunctional; that many colleagues were cold, unfriendly and conformist; and that the college’s stated values were inauthentic.

This series of what I came to call “unacknowledgments” sent me into a personal and professional tailspin. Negativity and self-doubt consumed me, and I truly worried that my career was over. Had I been blackballed? Why did it feel as though no one cared?

When the noise turns inward

I had spent years studying empathy – the ability to understand and feel what someone else is feeling – and how to cultivate it among health care professionals and students in order to support more patient-centered care. To that end, at the University of Delaware I had developed a program designed to foster empathy across health professions. It aimed to help students see one another as collaborators, build shared respect and recognize their collective role on the same health care delivery team.

But when I further analyzed the program’s outcomes from my office at ASU, I realized that empathy wasn’t enough. It could help students feel with others, but it didn’t necessarily help them see themselves, or others, differently.

I realized that what I really wanted the students to develop was humility. This step would require them to recognize their limits, accept that they were fallible, see themselves as part of a larger team and value others’ contributions.

That realization changed my research trajectory – and eventually, my professional life.

Medical personnel in protective gear stand around a surgical patient during a procedure.
Health care often involves teams whose members play varying roles. Here, Dr. Akrum Al-Zubaidi performs a bronchoscopy on patient Orlando Carrasco, with the help of his team, from left, Ana Stefan, R.N., Mike Galloway, respiratory therapist, and anesthesiologist Michael Kessler, M.D., on Aug. 7, 2017, at National Jewish Health in Denver, Colo. Helen H. Richardson/The Denver Post via Getty Images

Research becomes a mirror

Initially, I approached humility solely as a scholar. I examined the history of the concept and gaps in existing research on it, and I analyzed how humility was connected to uncertainty and the impostor phenomenon. I explored how humility could enhance team-based care and developed a new way to define humility among health care professionals in order to promote more collaboration and patient-centeredness.

As my own professional world began to unravel, and as I dived deeper into the concept of humility through my research, something unexpected happened. I realized that humility wasn’t just an idea to study – it was becoming a mirror that made me rethink my own perspective.

Slowly, I began to see how pride and insecurity were entwined in my reactions to my new setting at ASU. I realized that my need to be noticed, and my insistence that others validate my worth, represented my own kind of arrogance.

Perhaps my ambition had been less about contributing and more about gaining external validation. I had lost the selfless wonder and awe that drive scholarly inquiry and curiosity. And now I had to confront what remained when the spotlight dimmed.

Humility, I began to understand, wasn’t just an abstract concept to explore “out there” among others. I needed to hone it internally by thinking beyond myself. By decentering my ego, I realized that I could nurture and sustain curiosity in its own right.

In short, I needed to practice what I was preaching. It wasn’t an easy lesson. I assume that cultivating humility never is.

To that end, I felt that it was essential to develop a program to help build humility “muscles.” In 2024 I developed HIIT for Humility, an online training package for individuals or groups, modeled after the fitness concept of high-intensity interval training. This program provides evidence-based strategies to help users start building “habits of humility,” such as acknowledgment of others and self-awareness.

Just as physical exercise requires consistency to produce results, so does the cultivation of humility. Leaning into HIIT for Humility workouts gradually eased my sense of alienation and defensiveness. I became more appreciative of others, less quick to judge and better able to listen to others’ perspectives. In doing so, I started to feel more confident and secure.

While I still took pride in my work, I began to see that my contributions were not the only ones that mattered. I also found that I could stretch into unfamiliar but necessary tasks, such as working harder to win federal and foundation grants and seeing the value of my colleagues’ contributions to science.

Why am I here?

Only a few years into this process, I can see that ASU and Edson College have unintentionally taught me humility by signaling, often quietly, which contributions are deemed essential and which forms of success carry the most weight. Navigating stalled proposals, shifting priorities and structural reorganizations have required me to recalibrate my ego, expectations and identity.

Not being seen as a “big fish” and being expected to persist without consistent recognition have required me to understand my work as part of a larger system with differing values and, at times, challenging constraints. Shifting to ASU forced me to rethink my identity as a professor and to reevaluate my sense of purpose from the inside out.

A colleague of mine often asks students who he feels are coasting along, “Why are you here?” Lately, I’ve taken that question personally. What is the point of being a professor – writing papers, submitting grant proposals, teaching courses? Why did I choose this path in the first place?

When I feel unseen, unheard or unappreciated, pondering why I’m here helps ground me. For anyone who is struggling to feel visible or valued at work, I strongly recommend considering this simple question.

Over time, I’ve stopped needing to be the big fish in the pond and measuring my worth in titles and awards. I now see that my responsibility as a scholar, teacher and human being is to stay curious, listen more deeply and make space for others’ voices.

Embracing humility, and consistently using my humility muscles, have helped me realize that I’m here to be part of the creative energy of academia, do the work and cultivate curiosity in my students, my peers and myself.The Conversation

Barret Michalec, Research Associate Professor of Nursing and Health Innovation, Arizona State University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Can a rhythm be owned? What a reggaeton lawsuit reveals about how copyright misunderstands music

Anna MonnereauBangor University

A little-known American lawsuit could end up reshaping popular music. A US federal court is preparing to rule on a landmark copyright dispute. At its centre is an interesting question: can a short rhythmic pattern – one that appears in thousands of reggaeton tracks – be owned?

The case, known as the Fish Market dispute, asks whether a looping beat widely associated with reggaeton can be protected by copyright. More than 150 artists and producers have been named as defendants, and around 3,600 songs are implicated.

But the consequences stretch far beyond potential damages. If the claim succeeds, a rhythm that underpins an entire genre could become private property. The lawsuit exposes a long-standing weakness in copyright law, which is its inability to clearly define what makes a piece of music “original”.

Copyright is meant to be straightforward. Original musical works receive legal protection but copies do not. In practice though, music rarely fits this neat, binary logic.

Songs are built from shared elements like rhythms, chord progressions and harmonic patterns. Musicians can reuse, adapt and transform them. These building blocks are how music communicates. But copyright law offers little guidance on which musical elements can be protected, and which belong to everyone.

Unlike literature or visual art, music lacks clear legal definitions for its basic components. There is no settled guidance on whether courts should compare melody, rhythm, harmony, tempo, timbre or pitch, or indeed how much similarity is too much. As a result, judges and juries are left to decide these questions case by case, often without musical expertise.

That uncertainty has made music copyright litigation expensive and unpredictable. Jury trials are particularly risky, and damages can be eye-watering. Two recent American cases show just how inconsistent the system has become.

When courts can’t agree what counts as copying

In 2018, a US jury found that musicians Robin Thicke and Pharrell Williams had infringed Marvin Gaye’s work with their song Blurred Lines, not because of a shared melody or lyrics, but because of a similar “feel” or “vibe”. The decision marked a dramatic expansion of copyright protection, suggesting that a musical mood could be owned. Critics warned this risked allowing artists to monopolise styles rather than specific creative expressions.

By contrast, a 2024 US court ruling in a case involving singer-songwriter Ed Sheeran took the opposite view. The court held that copyright does not protect the basic building blocks of music. Shared rhythms, chord sequences or stylistic elements, it ruled, are part of musical language itself. Protection applies only to concrete expressions such as specific melodies or lyrics.

The Fish Market case magnifies this contradiction and raises the stakes considerably.

The plaintiffs – Steely & Clevie Productions, which represent the musical catalogue of the influential Jamaican dancehall duo Wycliffe “Steely” Johnson and Cleveland Browne – claim that their 1989 instrumental track, Fish Market, introduced the so-called “dem bow” rhythm. This is a distinctive beat, they argue, which forms the backbone of reggaeton. They are seeking copyright protection for that rhythmic pattern.

Steely & Clevie - Fish Market.

If successful, the ruling would grant two rightsholders control over a core musical feature used across a global genre. Unsurprisingly, many musicians and scholars see this as an attempt to claim ownership of reggaeton itself.

They argue that the rhythm predates Fish Market, drawing on long-established Afro-Caribbean and Afro-Cuban traditions such as the habanera beat. Reggaeton, they say, emerged through cultural exchange: from Jamaican dancehall, through Puerto Rico and out into the world. According to this perspective, the plaintiffs are not protecting originality but attempting to privatise a shared cultural inheritance.

Why rhythm is so hard to copyright

Rhythm sits at the heart of the legal problem. It is abstract yet fundamental, short in duration but repeated across a song and deeply tied to cultural identity. Copyright law, designed to compare fixed and discrete works, struggles to evaluate such elements. When courts attempt to isolate rhythm from its musical and cultural context, they risk mistaking convention for originality.

Copyright once played a limited role in musical life. Over time, as recorded music became a major commercial industry, songs increasingly came to be treated as economic assets. Ownership and control moved to the foreground, often at the expense of recognising music as an intellectual and cultural practice rooted in borrowing, influence and exchange.

The dispute around the “dem bow” rhythm lays bare the clash between subjective creativity, economic regulation and the law’s demand for objective rules. That clash is becoming harder to ignore as AI-generated music floods the market, trained on existing works and capable of producing endless stylistic variations. If copyright cannot clearly define originality now, its limits will soon be tested even further.

The reggaeton rhythm on trial is not just a fight over a beat. It reveals a fundamental mismatch between copyright law’s rigid standards and the reality of how music is made.

The Fish Market case offers judges an opportunity to clarify where protection should end, and to recognise the dangers of stretching originality so far that creativity itself becomes collateral damage.The Conversation

Anna Monnereau, PhD Candidate in Music Copyright, Bangor University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The science behind the trend for showering in the dark before bed

MAYA LAB/Shutterstock
Timothy HearnUniversity of CambridgeAnglia Ruskin University

The latest wellness trend and “sleep hack” involves switching off the bathroom light before stepping into the shower. In the dimness, the water feels louder, the day’s visual clutter fades and the hope is that sleep will come more easily. This practice, often called “dark showering”, has spread on social media, with people claiming that washing before bed in near darkness leads to deeper and faster sleep.

There is little research on dark showering as a standalone sleep technique. However, sleep science is clear about two key factors this ritual changes: light and heat. Both can nudge the body toward sleep or keep it alert.

Light is not only for seeing. Bright light in the evening signals to the brain’s internal body clock that it is still daytime. This delays the release of melatonin, a hormone that helps regulate sleep and is often described as the body’s “darkness signal”.

In a laboratory study of 116 adults, typical room lighting between dusk and bedtime reduced early night melatonin levels by about 70% compared with very dim light. Exposure to room light before bed also shortened the total duration of melatonin release by about 90 minutes. Participants reported feeling more alert.

Bathrooms are often the brightest rooms in a home. Overhead lighting and illuminated mirrors are designed for precision tasks that are useful in the morning but less helpful late at night. Turning these lights off, or dimming them, removes a strong signal that it is still daytime.

One experiment exposed volunteers to standard bathroom lighting for just 30 minutes at bedtime. Melatonin levels dropped and self reported alertness increased, even though participants remained in the bathroom.

More recent research supports this. A 2025 crossover trial compared exposure before bed to cool white LED lighting with softer fluorescent lighting at the same brightness. The LED lighting delayed the time it took participants to fall asleep by about ten minutes and left them feeling less sleepy.

Another study of adolescents found that a burst of bright light in the early evening reduced melatonin levels three hours later and delayed the normal rise in sleepiness.

The same pattern appears in studies of screens. A controlled experiment comparing reading on a light emitting e-reader with reading a printed book found that the glowing device delayed the body clock, reduced melatonin and made it take longer to fall asleep.

2023 laboratory study that adjusted the “blue weighted” impact of screens, meaning the part of light most likely to affect the body clock, found that reducing this blue component lessened melatonin suppression and shortened the time needed to fall asleep.

If dark showering replaces time spent under bright bathroom lights or scrolling on a phone, it may help simply by reducing evening light exposure. The benefit will be smaller if the shower is followed by time under full lighting to dry hair, choose clothes for the next day and tidy up.

Darkness also works gradually. Melatonin does not switch on instantly when the lights go out, and a brief shower will not reset a body clock that has been running late for weeks.

Shower water may provide a second benefit. Research on passive body heating, which means warming the body without exercise, has shown that a warm shower or bath taken at the right time can help people fall asleep more quickly.

A 2019 meta analysis of 13 trials concluded that about ten minutes in warm water one to two hours before bedtime shortened the time it took to fall asleep by roughly nine minutes and improved sleep efficiency, the proportion of time in bed actually spent asleep. Warm water widens blood vessels in the hands and feet, helping core body temperature drop afterwards, a key signal for drowsiness.

Dark showering may also help prepare the nervous system for sleep. Low light reduces the brain’s alerting signals and makes it easier to shift from a state of vigilance, often called the “fight or flight” response, into a calmer “rest and digest” state.

One lab study asked volunteers to lie in a bath while sensors monitored their heartbeat. When the water was close to normal body temperature, about 37 to 38 degrees Celsius, the parasympathetic nervous system became more active. This is the part of the nervous system that slows the heart and supports relaxation. Heart rate slowed slightly and heart rate variability increased, a sign the body is adapting and settling.

simpler experiment found a similar effect using only warm foot baths. Young women who soaked their feet in warm water for ten minutes showed an increase in vagal tone within 15 minutes.

Vagal tone refers to signals carried by the vagus nerve, which helps regulate heart rate, breathing and relaxation. Higher vagal tone is linked to steadier breathing, lower stress hormone levels and an easier transition into sleep.

Darkness supports the same process from another angle. Bright, blue rich LED lighting can raise heart rate and reduce vagal tone within minutes. A 2025 systematic review found that dimmer, warmer lighting allows heart rate variability to increase, signalling a calmer nervous system.

Another factor is the sound of running water. A 2024 analysis found that natural sounds such as rainfall or flowing rivers can lower cortisol, a stress hormone, and stabilise heart rate more effectively than silence. Heat, darkness and soft background noise may therefore combine to signal that it is safe to relax.

There are important caveats. No large trial has directly compared dark showers with brightly lit showers while measuring objective sleep outcomes, so the idea is based on combining related findings rather than direct evidence.

People with mobility difficulties may need some light to reduce the risk of slips, and those who experience night-time anxiety may feel uneasy in complete darkness. As with most sleep advice, no single habit is a cure for chronic insomnia. Daytime light exposure, caffeine timing and stress management all play an important role.The Conversation

Timothy Hearn, Lecturer, University of CambridgeAnglia Ruskin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why it’s funnier when you’re not allowed to laugh

michaelheim/Shutterstock.com
Michelle SpearUniversity of Bristol

I don’t think I’ve ever laughed harder than during a church service, when something faintly ridiculous caught my eye. My friend saw it too, and once she started laughing, it became impossible to stop. Years later I’ve tried to explain what was so hilarious, but it seems you had to be there. What was it about the combination of the situation – sometimes referred to as “church giggles” – and shared laughter that made it so funny?

Most people recognise the experience. A solemn setting. Absolute silence. A fleeting visual detail that is, in any other context, only mildly amusing at best. Yet the harder you try to suppress the laugh, the more uncontrollable it becomes. When someone else notices it too, restraint becomes next to impossible.

This kind of laughter that comes from trying not to laugh isn’t confined to religious spaces. It happens in any setting where silence, seriousness and self-control are tightly enforced and uncontrolled laughter is frowned upon.

Rather than being bad manners or a lack of emotional maturity, it tells us something about how the brain behaves under pressure. The science behind it is surprisingly complex.

In highly formal settings – churches, courtrooms, funerals – the brain operates in a state of active inhibition. This is the process by which your brain deliberately suppresses brain activity.

The region most involved is the prefrontal cortex, the thinking and decision-making part at the front of your brain, particularly its medial and lateral areas. These areas handle social judgment, behavioural restraint and emotional regulation.

This part of the brain doesn’t stop emotions from arising. Instead, it works by suppressing their outward expression.

Laughter comes from a distributed network in the brain rather than a single “laughter centre”. The impulse begins in the outer regions of the brain, but the emotional drive comes from deeper structures in the limbic system, the emotional processing centre of the brain.

The limbic system includes the amygdala, an almond-shaped structure that processes emotions and assigns emotional importance to things, and the hypothalamus, which controls automatic body functions like heart rate and breathing. Once laughter gets released, circuits in the brainstem – the base of the brain that connects to the spinal cord – take over and coordinate facial expression, breathing and vocalisation.

This makes laughter difficult to stop voluntarily. The prefrontal cortex normally keeps this response in check, suppressing laughter when it’s socially inappropriate.

When that control weakens – through heightened arousal or shared social cues – laughter emerges as an automatic, reflex-like behaviour. It’s no longer a deliberate act.

In other words, the impulse to laugh and the effort to stop yourself come from different parts of the brain. They’re competing with each other.

When something unexpected or odd catches your eye, your emotional response fires rapidly and automatically. The process to control it takes effort, burns energy, and is prone to failure, especially when you have to maintain it for long periods.

The more firmly you try to exert control, the more the trigger stays active in your attention. Suppression doesn’t erase the thought – it actually rehearses and sustains it.

Laughter isn’t just a response to humour. Neurologically, it also functions as a regulatory reflex – a way of releasing emotional and physical tension.

In constrained environments, your nervous system has few outlets. You can’t move, you can’t speak, you can’t shift position much or signal discomfort.

At the same time, your automatic nervous system becomes slightly activated. Your heart rate increases, your breathing becomes shallower and your muscle tone rises.

This combination lowers the threshold for emotional release. Your body becomes primed to let something out.

Once laughter begins, it recruits automatic motor pathways in the brainstem that you can’t easily interrupt. This is why laughter, once triggered, often feels physically unstoppable.

You’re no longer “deciding” to laugh. The system has taken over and you’re helpless.

The contagion takes hold

For many people, the tipping point isn’t the original trigger. It’s the instant someone else notices it as well.

This is where social neurobiology comes into play. Humans are highly sensitive to subtle social cues: facial tension, changes in breathing, suppressed smiles.

We process these cues rapidly through networks involving the superior temporal sulcus, a groove along the side of the brain that plays a key role in reading other people. Mirror neurons – brain cells that fire both when we act and when we watch others act – also help us pick up on these signals.

Laughing together represents a shared emotional alignment. That shared recognition does two things at once.

It validates your own response (I’m not imagining this). And it removes the sense of solitary transgression (you’re no longer suppressing alone).

The prefrontal control system weakens further. Laughter spreads through emotional contagion.

By this point, the original trigger hardly matters. What you’re laughing at is each other, and the absurdity of trying to regain control.

These moments are often triggered by something visual, but they don’t have to be. A mispronounced word or an unexpected phrase can provoke the same response.

However, visual triggers are especially potent in silent settings. They can’t be interrupted or talked away, and your brain can replay them repeatedly while suppression is in place.

Spoken triggers, by contrast, tend to be shared instantly. Whether laughter erupts depends on how quickly social inhibition can be re-established.

“Inappropriate” laughter is often framed as rudeness or childishness. But from a neurological perspective, it’s a predictable consequence of prolonged emotional suppression in a social species.

The brain is not designed for sustained inhibition without release. When restraint is tight enough – and when someone else is there with you – laughter becomes the escape route. That is why it feels impossible to stop.The Conversation

Michelle Spear, Professor of Anatomy, University of Bristol

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why central bankers look to the ‘stars’ when setting interest rates

James Wheeler/Pexels
Luke HartiganUniversity of Sydney

When the topic of central banks and the outlook for interest rates comes up, economists often turn to the so-called “star” variables to help with their predictions.

What do we mean by star variables? Why they are important to central bankers, and how do they influence interest-rate decisions?

The star variables relate to key concepts in economic models used by central bankers to help them understand how the economy works.

Star variables are named so simply because they are usually labelled with an asterisk to distinguish them from other variables in economic modelling.

Central bankers don’t normally think about the star variables in isolation. Instead, these variables are better thought of as a “constellation” linking economic growth, the labour market and interest rates together with inflation outcomes.

The three north stars

1. Potential output or y*: This is the economy’s maximum sustainable output that can be produced when all resources are fully employed. It is sometimes referred to as the economy’s speed limit. If economic growth is faster than potential, it can put upward pressure on inflation because demand for goods and services is outstripping supply.

The reverse is also true: if the economy is growing below potential, demand is subdued and inflation will likely fall.

Potential output is closely linked to productivity. Boosting productivity lifts the economy’s speed limit – allowing faster economic growth without fuelling inflation. But falling productivity lowers the economy’s speed limit, meaning it can’t grow as fast as previously without causing inflation to rise. This is the problem currently facing Australia.

2. Non-Accelerating Inflation Rate of Unemployment or NAIRU or u*, a concept that became popular in the 1970s. The idea is there is a “natural” rate of unemployment that doesn’t put pressure on wages or inflation.

3. The neutral interest rate or r* is considered to be the level of the central bank’s key interest rate that is not too low (and stimulating demand) and not too high (and restraining demand). It is a useful guide to the stance of the central bank’s monetary policy, or stance on the policy interest rate.

Good in theory, hard to measure in practice

These three interlinked variables are fundamental to how central bankers think about the economy.

But they are also concepts that are not observable, unlike published statistics on inflation or economic growth. They need to be estimated, and that’s where the uncertainty comes in.

In fact, central bankers must use statistical methods originally developed to track spacecraft to estimate them. This is done by detecting the effects these variables have on other variables that are observable, such as inflation, wages growth and the unemployment rate.

In a recent speech, a US Federal Reserve official wondered whether the three variables are “too abstract and elusive to be of practical value”. He concluded:

The short answer is that they play a central role in macroeconomic theory and have important implications for the conduct of monetary policy.[…] When the stars perfectly align, it means the economy has reached an equilibrium where its resources are fully utilized.

How the variables help with setting interest rates

Most central banks focus on maintaining price stability (low and stable inflation). A few, such as the Reserve Bank of Australia and the US Federal Reserve, have dual mandates to maintain price stability and full employment.

The way central bankers put their objectives into practice is influenced by the star variables. Specifying a target for inflation is seen as the best way to achieve price stability. The Reserve Bank’s target is 2–3% over the economic cycle.

Over time, inflation tends to be steady when the unemployment rate is close to the NAIRU. Because of this, central bankers often use the NAIRU as a rough guide to full employment, which is also broadly consistent with the economy operating near potential.

Understanding the central bank’s objectives is important because they tell us where the economy should go. But they don’t tell us what the central bank will do to get there – that is, what policy interest rate setting is needed to achieve its objectives (what economists call the central bank’s “reaction function”).

This is a way of describing how the central bank adjusts its policy interest rate based on differences between current economic conditions and the star variables.

But this is easier said than done. The uncertainties with estimating the star variables, together with the uncertainties in how interest rate changes flow through the economy, makes it difficult for central bankers to know exactly what decision they should make to achieve their objectives.

All this uncertainty is one reason why central bankers are very cautious. Sometimes it is better to do nothing than make a wrong decision and risk losing credibility.The Conversation

Luke Hartigan, Senior Lecturer in Economics, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Ten classic films that used rain to transform a scene

Jane SteventonUniversity of Portsmouth

Water covers over 70% of our planet, so it’s no wonder that it flows through our storytelling. Biblical rain offered divine judgement either in the form of a blessing and rewards, or retribution and vengeance. In Shakespeare’s Twelfth Night, Feste the fool issued the melancholic refrain: “For the rain it raineth every day.” It reminded the audience of the persistence of suffering in life.

Filmmakers worldwide have revered the visual beauty and the metaphorical value of rain on screen, letting it augment many a classic scene, sequence or speech. Technically, rain intensifies mise-en-scène (the overall visual presentation on screen, combining set design, lighting, props and more): it catches backlight and renders air itself visible, creating depth and shimmer.

And as our global weather patterns undergo changes, media researchers have suggested that engagement with cinematic weather conditions like rain can allow for an “ecological meta-narrative” that connects humans (both on and offscreen) with their environment.

Whether depicting solitude, decay, adversity or romantic destined love, rain in movies emotes as much as a character would. Here are ten key moments where rain took a starring role in film – just perfect for watching on a wet day.

1. Singin’ in the Rain (1952)

The famous scene from Singin’ in the Rain.

Few scenes invert bad weather more joyfully than Gene Kelly’s iconic number. After a night of salvaging their disastrous film project, The Duelling Cavalier, actor Don Lockwood (Gene Kelly) realises that he has fallen for the bubbly singer Kathy Selden (Debbie Reynolds). On his ebullient walk home, a legendary song and dance number turns the perceived bad weather on its head with the cheerful refrain: “Come on with the rain, I’ve a smile on my face.”

Kelly reportedly performed the sequence while running a fever, and the scene’s exuberance reframes rain not as obstacle but as liberation. The uplifting choreography sees Kelly splashing through puddles that reflect streetlights, making the urban space of the set design feel elastic and alive.

2. Seven Samurai (1954)

Rain heightens the brutal physical clashes in filmmaker Akira Kurasawa’s Seven Samurai. As the Samurai face their final battle, the rain (which has been used throughout to add mood and tone) is as cruel and violent as any of the antagonists, amplifying the pressure with its muddy, disorientating and visceral presence in the conflict.

Kurosawa was meticulous about weather effects, using wind, dust and rain to choreograph movement within the frame. The downpour turns the battlefield into sludge, erasing clear footing and underscoring the film’s meditation on chaos, class struggle and the cost of collective defence.

3. Breakfast at Tiffany’s (1961)

The downpour in Breakfast at Tiffany’s.

The final reunion scene of Breakfast at Tiffany’s raises the emotional stakes with its unrelenting rain. In a taxi to the airport, Holly Golightly, played by Audrey Hepburn, tries to run away and abandon her emotional commitments to struggling writer Paul Varjak (George Peppard) and the stray cat she’s adopted.

After an incensed Paul watches her throw the cat out into the rain, he exits, determined to rescue the soggy feline. As she tearfully joins him, her character arc is complete. The storm forces Holly quite literally to stop running, confronting the emotional commitments she has tried to evade.

4. Network (1976)

In Network, a New York rainstorm provides the ultimate backdrop for anchorman Howard Beal’s (Peter Finch) unhinged and rain-drenched live rant. The drumming of rain against studio windows suggests a world outside the sealed, commodified space of television as, in a renowned monologue, he berates the news channel’s manipulation and society’s disintegration with the famous line: “I’m as mad as hell, and I’m not going to take this any more.”

5. Point Break (1991)

Point Break’s final rain scene.

In Point Blank, rookie FBI agent Johnny Utah (Keanu Reeves) confronts Bodhi, a bank-robbing surfer played by Patrick Swayze, in the rain. The weather ultimately enables him to evade capture by allowing him to ride one last big wave; something both know he will never survive.

Here, rain acts as a redemptive force. Bodhi seeks exoneration through the only thing he respects – nature.

6. The Shawshank Redemption (1994)

In prison drama The Shawshank Redemption, Andy’s (Tim Robbins) Raquel-Welch cell poster hides a hidden escape shaft, years in the making while he endured time for a crime he didn’t commit.

Wading through a sewer tunnel he finally emerges to a torrential downpour, holding out his arms and facing the heavens in a symbolic act of cleansing, salvation and freedom. Rain here washes away not guilt, but injustice.

7. Four Weddings and a Funeral (1994)

The rain Carrie ‘doesn’t notice’ in Four Weddings.

Rain doesn’t always have to represent high drama. In the Richard Curtis-penned film Four Weddings and a Funeral, American Carrie’s (Andie MacDowall) famously cheesy line, “Is it still raining, I hadn’t noticed?” puts the seal on her romance with bumbling but charming British Charles (Hugh Grant) and secures the star-crossed lovers a future.

The actors were reportedly freezing during the rain rigged shoot. Rigs often rely on using cold water and multiple takes.

8. Magnolia (2000)

Magnolia’s frenzied collective experience of a thunderstorm of frogs will forever capture the imagination of the more surreally minded. In this scene, rain symbolises the universal chaos of life and binds disparate characters into a shared reckoning.

9. The Notebook (2004)

The rainy reunion of The Notebook.

The physical brutality of heavy rain underscores heartbreak, loss and forgiveness in decades-spanning The Notebook as Ryan Gosling and Rachel McAdams’ separated lovers Noah and Allie reunite after family has dictated their separation.

A sweepingly romantic scene in a sleeper hit turned cult favourite, the downpour legitimises emotional excess – tears indistinguishable from rain.

10. Blade Runner (1982)

The demand of three of the most challenging filming elements – smoke, night shoots and rain – had the crew of Ridley Scott’s futuristic dystopian Blade Runner christen the film “Blood Runner” as 50 nights of filming in constant artificial rain took a physical, mental and logistical toll.

Whether depicting disorder or harmony, life-enhancing joy or unprecedented destruction, rain remains a valuable visual medium and narrative tool for filmmakers.

Jane Steventon, Course Leader, BA (Hons) Screenwriting; Deputy Course Leader & Senior Lecturer, BA (Hons) Film Production, University of Portsmouth

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The Biba Story: the fashion brand that lifted a drab postwar Britain into the swinging 60s

Mal JamesUniversity of Edinburgh

First conceived as a mail-order-only company in 1963, known as Biba’s Postal Boutique, the brand captured the revolutionary 1960s and 1970s attitude and style, offering trend-seekers affordable, high-fashion aesthetics and glamour akin to Paris catwalks.

Influenced by art deco, Biba’s covetable mini dresses, luxurious fabrics, rich prints and colour palettes quickly achieved a cult following, embodying the “swinging London” look. Worn by celebrities like Twiggy and Mick Jagger, and film stars like Brigitte Bardot and Raquel Welch, Biba embraced a glamorous and rebellious style that had enormous global influence.

Now, The Biba Story: 1964–1975, a new exhibition at the Dovecot Studios in Edinburgh, is showcasing the iconic fashion brand founded by designer Barbara Hulanicki and her partner Stephen Fitz-Simon.

Expanding from a small chemist shop on Church Street, Kensington, to a seven-storey department store on Kensington High Street, Biba sold a range of goods, from fashion to home products. The brand revolutionised retail with its lifestyle-focused department store and immersive interior opulence, setting a precedent for experiential luxury shopping that continues today.

Sadly, despite its significant impact on fashion and culture, Biba struggled financially and closed in 1975, leaving a lasting legacy as a symbol of the 1960s style revolution.

Historic moments

First seen at the Fashion and Textile Museum in London, The Biba Story communicates an engaging narrative covering the swift rise of Hulanicki’s design brand. It starts by setting the scene with a visual timeline, cleverly plotting the Biba story alongside pivotal historical movements and events, demonstrating the broader societal and cultural context that provided the backdrop to Biba’s fashion reign.

This includes reference to the not-guilty verdict for the legal action brought against Penguin Books, which in 1960 published the unexpurgated version of D.H. Lawrence’s 1932 book Lady Chatterley’s Lover. It caused a huge furore at the time and heralded the more liberal age of the swinging 60s that Biba embraced.

The exhibit also introduces Biba’s first major commercial success – a simple pink and white gingham shift dress paired with a Bardot-style headscarf. This dress, first featured in the Daily Mirror in May 1964, sold a record 17,000 dresses at 25 shillings (£1.25) each, marking the commercial success that swiftly elevated Biba to the iconic status it still retains today.

This evocative exhibition includes a wonderful sequence of drawings, illuminating how Hulanicki started out as a talented fashion illustrator, providing artwork for major magazines like Vogue and Women’s Wear Daily. Offset by the warm decor of plum walls, The Biba Story creates a sublime, high-end feel, further complemented by vintage retro-style lighting.

Here, you really get a nostalgic sense of the 1960s and 1970s, when art nouveau, art deco and modernism combined to create the style for the time.

The exhibition’s collective energy conveys the essence of the Biba aesthetic – it wasn’t just about the clothes, it was a whole lifestyle. Beautifully curated cases of Biba products, from cosmetics to tinned food to matches and branded wine, reveal how Biba was one of the first high street brands to offer more than clothes. Here was an accessible, glamorous and perhaps more indulgent lifestyle to the masses, especially uplifting in a drab post-war Britain.

A section dedicated to Biba textiles highlights the boldness of its patterns and prints offset by the contrasting simplicity of the garments’ designs. Biba was all about functionality over fussiness.

The outfits on display embody a somewhat stringent uniformity infused with a rebellious attitude, transitioning into a slick showcase of classic black dresses that remain timeless and enduring. Here, the exhibition also highlights the desirable body standards of the era, with the Biba look demanding wearers have “long thin arms, flat chests, low waists and straight hips”.

This segment subtly hints at the more problematic influence of fashion in defining body image (and perhaps it’s important to note that most of the clothes on display reflect a very small body shape), offering valuable reflections on the historical evolution of beauty standards and fashion’s continuing role in shaping them.

Bring Oot Your Biba

Especially illuminating, too, are the stories of Biba customers reminiscing about the brand, describing how “there was nothing like Biba in Edinburgh. The colours, the cut, the design, the materials, all fabulous.” Personal stories are melded with the exhibition narrative throughout, and there is a wonderfully touching conclusion titled Bring Oot Your Biba. This showcases the results of an invitation to the people of Scotland to share their Biba memories and purchases, all adding warming generational insights into the treasures of Biba fashions.

Notably, the exhibition ends with a small, beautiful tapestry of the Biba Logo, woven by talented Dovecot Studios apprentice Sophie McCaffrey – a perfect, and fitting wrap to a beautifully curated exhibition.

The Dovecot not only pays a sincere and authentic homage to Biba’s lasting legacy, it immerses the viewer in a real sense of the palpable excitement of the era: change, youth, liberation and opportunity. Many visitors will no doubt feel connected to the nostalgia of Biba’s style, while being reminded of the importance of fashion visionaries like Barbara Hulanicki to our design cultures, identities, and economies. `The Conversation

Mal James, Personal Chair of Fashion Design, University of Edinburgh, Edinburgh College of Art, University of Edinburgh

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Biba was a London fashion store of the 1960s and 1970s. Biba was started and run by the Polish-born Barbara Hulanicki and her husband Stephen Fitz-Simon. 

After the original company closed in 1975, Biba was relaunched several times, independently of Hulanicki. As of 2024 it was a brand of the House of Fraser. The company has been called an early practicer of the fast fashion business model.

Hulanicki worked as a fashion illustrator after studying at Brighton Art College in the late 1950s. In 1961 she married advertising executive Stephen Fitz-Simon and in 1963 they set up a Mail order fashion business selling inexpensive outfits. She named the company Biba's Postal Boutique; Biba was the nickname of her younger sister Biruta.

The company had its first significant success in May 1964 when it offered a pink gingham dress with a hole cut out of the back of the neck with a matching triangular kerchief to readers of the Daily Mirror. The dress had celebrity appeal, as a similar dress had been worn by Brigitte Bardot. By the morning after the dress was advertised in the Daily Mirror, over 4,000 orders had been received. 

Ultimately, some 17,000 outfits were sold. Following this success, a shop was opened at 87 Abingdon Road in Kensington in September 1964. At around this time Anna Wintour, the future editor-in-chief of Vogue, became an employee of Biba as a 15-year-old. Another teenage employee was the future actress Madeline Smith. The artist, novelist and journalist Molly Parkin made hats for Biba, and the actress Katy Manning worked for the company as a model.

A Biba mini-dress, c. 1967-70. Photo: Peloponnesian Folklore Foundation - Own work

How sailing voyages can inspire the next generation of ocean scientists and advocates

Pamela BuchanUniversity of Exeter and Alun MorganUniversity of Plymouth

Setting sail from the busy port of Plymouth in Devon, the tall ship Pelican of London takes young people to sea, often for the first time.

During each nine-day voyage, the UK-based sailing trainees, who often come from socio-economically challenging backgrounds, become crew members. They not only learn the ropes (literally) but also engage in ocean science and stewardship activities.

As marine and outdoor education researchers, we wanted to find out whether mixing sail training and Steams (science, technology, engineering, art, mathematics and sustainability) activities can inspire young people to pursue a more ocean-focused career, and a long-term commitment to ocean care.

Research shows that a strong connection with the ocean can drive people to be active marine citizens. This means they take responsibility for ocean health not only in their own lives but as advocates for more sustainable interactions with the ocean.

Over the past year, we have worked with Charly Braungardt, head scientist with the charity Pelican of London, to create a new theory of how sail training with Steams activities can change the paths that trainees pursue.

Based on scientific evidence, our theory of change models how Steams activities can cause positive changes in personal development and knowledge and understanding of the ocean (known as ocean literacy). It shows how the voyages can develop trainees’ strong connections with the ocean and encourage them to act responsibly towards it.

Tracking change

Surveys with the participants before and after the voyage, and six months later, measure any changes that occur – and how these persist. Through our evaluation, we’re exploring how combining voyages with Steams activities can go beyond personal development to produce deep, long-lasting effects.

Our pilot study has already shown how the sail training and Steams combination helps to develop confidence, ocean literacy and ocean connections.

For example, the boost to self-esteem and feelings of capability that occur on board help young people develop their marine identity – the ocean becomes an important part of a person’s sense of who they are. As one trainee put it: “I think the ocean is me and the ocean will and forever be part of me.”


Swimming, sailing, even just building a sandcastle - the ocean benefits our physical and mental wellbeing. Curious about how a strong coastal connection helps drive marine conservation, scientists are diving in to investigate the power of blue health.

This article is part of a series, Vitamin Sea, exploring how the ocean can be enhanced by our interaction with it.


As crew members, trainees access a world and traditional culture largely unknown to them before the voyage. They learn to live with others in a confined space, working together in small teams to keep watch on 24-hour rotas.

Trainees are encouraged to step out of their comfort zone through activities such as climbing the rigging and swimming off the vessel. Our pilot evaluation found the voyages built the trainees’ confidence and social skills, boosting self-esteem and feelings of capability.

One trainee said: “I’ve felt pretty disappointed in myself not committing to my education or only doing something with minimal effort. But after this voyage, I want to give it my all.”

The Steams voyages encourage the development of scientific skills and ocean literacy through the lens of creative tasks at sea. These activities are led by a scientist-in-residence who provides mentoring and introduces research techniques.

The voyage gives trainees the opportunity to use scientific equipment, ranging from plankton nets and microscopes to cutting-edge technology such as remotely operated vehicles. The Steams activities introduce marine research as a potential career to these young people. One said they wanted to train as a marine engineer at nautical college following the voyage.

Ocean experiences provide a foundation for ocean connection. Trainees experience the ocean in sunshine and in gales, day and night, rolling with the waves and observing marine life in its natural environment.

Citizen science projects such as wildlife surveys and recorded beach cleans also develop their ocean stewardship knowledge and skills. One trainee explained how they have “become more interested [in] our marine life and creative ways to help protect it”.

Over the next 12 months, the information we collect from the voyages will help us to better understand the benefits and contribute to an important marine social science data gap in young people. It is important to understand how to develop young people’s relationships with the ocean, and the knowledge and skills that will empower the next generation of marine citizens.

As one trainee put it: “Being out on the Pelican showed me how vast and powerful the sea is – and how important it is to respect and care for it.”


Don’t have time to read about climate change as much as you’d like?
Get a weekly roundup in your inbox instead. Every Wednesday, The Conversation’s environment editor writes Imagine, a short email that goes a little deeper into just one climate issue. Join the 47,000+ readers who’ve subscribed so far.The Conversation


Pamela Buchan, Research Fellow, Geography, University of Exeter and Alun Morgan, Lecturer in Education, School of Law, Humanities and Social Sciences, University of Plymouth

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Pelican of London is a sail training ship based in the United Kingdom. Built in 1948 as Pelican she served as an Arctic trawler and then a coastal trading vessel named Kadett until 1995. In 2007 an extended conversion to a sail-training ship was completed. 

She was bought by ex-Naval Commander Graham Neilson who transformed her into a tall ship and renamed her Pelican of London. He had already undertaken a similar project with the Training Ship Astrid. Working in Portland Harbour, Dorset, UK, Neilson and his team spent 12 years stripping back the trawler and rebuilding her as a main mast barquentine. A moderate rearrangement of the mainmast standing rigging enables the yards to be braced to half the traditional angle when on the wind, giving the ship unusual windward ability for a square rigger. A trainee on the ship won the 2010 Torbay cup.

Pelican of London

As of 2012, Pelican of London was operated as a sail training vessel for young people, by the charity Adventure Under Sail. Sail Training International ranks it is a Class A tall ship.

Australia's HMB Endeavour, based at the Sea Museum (Australian National Maritime Museum at Darling Harbour) which undertakes similar voyages around Australia with young crews, is currently going through one of its processes of maintenance. Extensive work is being undertaken on Endeavour’s standing rigging.

As the expected lifespan of a ship’s rigging is 10 to 15 years, the time has come to replace the current rigging which was installed in 2010-2011 when the original rig that was built with the ship was replaced. This will mark the third standing rigging constructed and installed upon the vessel. This will secure her ongoing operational life for the next 10 to 15 years. The construction and replacement are expected to be completed before the end of 2026. We'll bring you updates as they come to hand.

As run in October 2025, the STS Young Endeavour, through the RAN, sailed her final circumnavigation of Australia last Spring. 

Commanding Officer Lieutenant Commander Andrew Leupen reflected on the significance of the final circumnavigation.

“I discovered this amazing little ship whilst I was in Sea Training Group as the Fleet Navigating Officer during a workup a couple of years ago,” LCDR Leupen said.

“It was immediately obvious to me that what this ship is doing with the youth of Australia is absolutely incredible.

“This program literally changes 24 lives every two weeks after only 11-13 days at sea. The positive impact we have on these youngsters goes with them back into their communities, to their peer groups, to their families and is an influence on Australian society that is immeasurable but profound.

“The RAN should be very proud of the 37 years of legacy that Young Endeavour has delivered – nearly 16,000 young Australians have come through this ship in that time.

“The Circumnavigation of Australia 2025 will be an adventure that I will reflect on in the years to come. The youth crew that I had the privilege to meet, challenge and watch grow will endure in my memory.

“The next generation is simply inspiring and I just hope that they look back on their voyage with us and dare to be brave, do the unimaginable and be the change they want to see in the world.” While the chapter is closing on Young Endeavour’s Australian circumnavigations, the story is far from over.

The new replacement tall ship is currently under construction in Australia and will take up the mantle of national Sail Training Vessel in the coming years.

The new ship will be a barquentine rig, with square sails rigged on the foremast and fore-and-aft sails rigged on the fore, main and mizzen masts (yes, three masts!). It will accommodate up to 42 youth crew on each voyage. It will also be able to undertake more voyages per year, meaning more young Australians will be able to access this unique development program.

In the meantime, there are still opportunities for young Australians to join the voyage of a lifetime. Applications for the 2026 voyage program are now open at youngendeavour.gov.au. As one youth crew member, Mattesse from Launceston, Tasmania, put it: “It taught me that when you’re surrounded by people who believe in you, you can achieve anything you set your mind to,” he said. “Being brave enough to step over the gangway is the first step towards what will be the best 11 days of your life.”

For the Navy, for the youth of Australia, and for everyone who has sailed aboard, the circumnavigation of Young Endeavour will be remembered not just as a journey around the coastline, but as the final lap of a ship that has inspired generations.

Applications are open now for a 2026 Young Endeavour Youth Scheme voyage. You can apply here:  youngendeavour.gov.au/apply-now

STS Young Endeavour on Sydney Harbour. Photo: Royal Australian Navy (RAN)

Early Mars was warm and wet not icy, suggests latest research

ESA/DLR/FU Berlin (G. Neukum)
Gareth DorrianUniversity of Birmingham

A recent study showed that Mars was warm and wet billions of years ago. The finding contrasts with another theory that this era was mainly cold and icy. The result has implications for the idea that life could have developed on the planet at this time.

Whether Mars was once habitable is a fascinating and intensely researched topic of interest over many decades. Mars, like the Earth, is about 4.5 billion years old and its geological history is divided into different epochs of time.

The latest paper relates to Mars during a time called the Noachian epoch, which extended from about 4.1 to 3.7 billion years ago. This was during a stage in solar system history called the Late Heavy Bombardment (LHB). Evidence for truly cataclysmic meteorite impacts during the LHB are found on many bodies throughout the solar system.

Two obvious scars from this era on Mars are the enormous Hellas and Argyre impact basins; both are well over a thousand miles across and each possesses enough volume to hold all the water in the Mediterranean with room to spare.

One might not imagine such a time being conducive to the existence of fragile lifeforms, yet it is likely to be the era in which Mars was most habitable. Evidence of landforms sculpted by water from this time is plentiful and include dried-up river valleys, lake beds, ancient coastlines and river deltas.

The prevailing climatic conditions of the Noachian are still a matter of intense debate. Two alternative scenarios are typically posited: that this time was cold and icy, with occasional melting of large volumes of frozen water by meteorite impact and volcanic eruptions, or that it was warm, wet and largely ice-free.

Brightening Sun

All stars, including the Sun, brighten with age. In the early solar system, during the Noachian, the Sun was about 30% dimmer than it is today, so less heat was reaching Mars (and all the planets). To sustain a warm, wet climate at this time, the Martian atmosphere would have needed to be very substantial – much thicker than it is today – and abundant in greenhouse gases like CO2.

But when reaching high enough atmospheric pressure, CO2 tends to condense out of the air to form clouds and reduce the greenhouse effect. Given these issues, the cold, icy scenario is perhaps more believable.

One of the main science goals of the Mars 2020 Perseverance Rover, which landed spectacularly in February 2021, is to seek evidence to support either of these two scenarios, and the new paper using data from Perseverance may have done just that.

Perseverance landed at the Martian location of Jezero crater, which was selected as the landing site because it once contained a lake. Views of the crater from orbit show several distinct fan-shaped deposits emanating from channels carved through the crater walls by flowing water. Within these channels are abundant deposits of clay minerals.

The new paper details recent analysis of aluminium-rich clay pebbles, called kaolinite, located within one of the ancient flow channels. The pebbles appear to have been subjected to intense weathering and chemical alteration by water during the Noachian.

While this is perhaps not surprising for a known ancient watery environment, what is interesting is that these clays are strongly depleted in iron and magnesium, and enriched in titanium and aluminium.

This is important because it means these rocks were less likely to have been altered in a hydrothermal environment, where scalding hot water was temporarily released by melting ice caused by volcanism or a meteorite impact.

Instead, they appear to have been altered under modest temperatures and persistent heavy rainfall. The authors found distinct similarities between the chemical composition of these clay pebbles with similar clays found on Earth dating from periods in our planet’s history when the climate was much warmer and wetter.

False colour image of the dried up river delta in Jezero crater, which Perseverance is currently exploring. Nasa

The paper concludes that these kaolinite pebbles were altered under high rainfall conditions comparable to “past greenhouse climates on Earth” and that they “likely represent some of the wettest intervals and possibly most habitable portions of Mars’ history”.

Furthermore, the paper concludes that these conditions may have persisted over time periods ranging from thousands to millions of years. Perseverance recently made headlines also for the discovery of possible biosignatures in samples it collected last year, also from within Jezero crater.

These precious samples have now been cached in special sealed containers on the rover for collection by a future Mars sample return mission. Unfortunately, the mission has recently been cancelled by Nasa and so what vital evidence they may or may not contain will probably not be examined in an Earth-based laboratory for many years.

Crucial to this future analysis is the so-called “Knoll criterion” – a concept formulated by astrobiologist Andrew Knoll, which states that for something to be evidence of life, an observation has to not just be explicable by biology; it has to be inexplicable without it. Whether these samples ever satisfy the Knoll criterion will only be known if they can be brought to Earth.

Either way, it is quite striking to imagine a time on Mars, billions of years before the first humans walked the Earth, that a tropical climate with – possibly – a living ecosystem once existed in the now desolate and wind-swept landscape of Jezero crater.The Conversation

Gareth Dorrian, Post Doctoral Research Fellow in Space Science, University of Birmingham

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Are the costumes for Wuthering Heights accurate? No. Are they magnificent? Absolutely yes

Photo Courtesy Warner Bros. Pictures
Emily BrayshawUniversity of Technology Sydney

Even before the film’s release, the costumes for Emerald Fennell’s Wuthering Heights caused controversy.

Wuthering Heights was first published in 1847 and the story switches back and forth in time between 1801 and the 1770s. But Cathy’s wedding dress references an entirely different era, inspired by a 1951 Charles James haute couture gown. Cathy also appears to be wrapped in cellophane – a material first invented in 1908 – on her wedding night.

These costumes were designed by Jacqueline Durran, who previously won Oscars and BAFTAs for costume design for Anna Karenina (2012) and Little Women (2019), and a third BAFTA for Vera Drake (2005).

Some costume experts have panned Durran’s costumes as anachronistic and visually incoherent. But Vogue described them as “wild and wonderful”. So who’s right?

Designing for film

Costume design is a collaboration; the designer works closely with the director and other production creatives to make a world and bring a story to life.

Costumes must make narrative sense within the world a director is building and communicate the character’s personality and story in each scene.

Often, costumes can seem so natural to a character and their world that you don’t even notice them, like Kathleen Detoro’s designs on Breaking Bad (2008–13).

Costumes can also be scene-stealers because displays of fashion and dress are part of the plot, like Durran’s costumes for Barbie (2023), or Patricia Field’s costumes for Sex and the City (1998–2004).

In Wuthering Heights, Cathy (Margot Robbie) has 50 different costumes, many featuring vintage Chanel jewellery. Other times, she is in ultra shiny, synthetic, plasticised contemporary fabric – such as a black gown that resembles an oil slick.

Production image: Cathy in a white wedding dress and veil.
Cathy’s wedding dress would be more at home in the 20th century than the 18th. Photo Courtesy Warner Bros. Pictures

Heathcliff (Jacob Elordi) has fewer changes, more in keeping with Georgian dress, with his costuming riffing on the cinematic trope of the bad-boy Byronic hero.

With every character, the costumes have a life of their own.

This is not unusual for cinematic adaptations of classic literature, which have featured glamorous, luxurious costumes to attract audiences since the beginning of film history, like Georges Méliès’s Cinderella (1899) and Cecil B. DeMille’s Male or Female (1919).

Designing Wuthering Heights

Fennell’s world of Wuthering Heights is built on a collection of images and cinematic references that span time and space to show the love story is universal.

Fennell also wanted to “make something really disturbing and sexy and nightmarish” rather than faithfully recreating the book.

To do this, she accumulated a huge number of visual references and collaborated with Durran to see how and where these could fit into the film.

Cathy and Edgar sit on a couch. Cathy wears very contemporary sunglasses.
The film draws on 500 years of art and fashion influences. Photo Courtesy Warner Bros. Pictures

Instead of historically accurate costuming, Durran and Fennell created a world of stylised costumes inspired by 500 years of historical dress, contemporary fashions, images from fairy tales and popular culture, and old Hollywood technicolor films from the 1930s to the 1960s, particularly Gone With the Wind (1939) and The Wizard of Oz (1939).

This is part of a broader costuming trend rejecting complete historical accuracy when re-imagining historical eras on screen, such as the alternative Regency world of Bridgerton (2020–) and Guillermo del Toro’s Frankenstein (2025).

‘A collection of memoranda’

After Cathy dies in the book Heathcliff says, “The entire world is a dreadful collection of memoranda that she did exist, and that I have lost her”.

Motifs of hair, skin, bone and teeth are found throughout the film and speak to the physical, visceral nature of Heathcliff and Cathy’s passion. This echoes historical trends for mourning jewellery that featured hair, bones and teeth of deceased loved ones, and foreshadows the film’s ending.

Cathy’s jewellery is her armour. After she marries Edgar Linton (Shazad Latif), her jewellery signals her newfound wealth and security. The majority of Cathy’s costumes are black, white and red, echoing the interiors of her old and new homes, Wuthering Heights and Thrushcross Grange.

Cathy demands Nelly (Hong Chau) tighten her bridal corset, echoing the scars on Heathcliff’s back from a beating he sustained as a child when defending her. But this tightening also signals she is trapped in a loveless cage.

Production image: Heathcliff on a horse
Heathcliff’s costuming riffs off the cinematic trope of the bad-boy Byronic hero. Photo Courtesy Warner Bros. Pictures

Edgar, the nouveau-riche textile merchant, wears suits with a period silhouette but made in contemporary, shiny fabrics; his spoilt, unhinged sister Isabella (Alison Oliver) wears tacky, frilly beribboned gowns and accessories; Heathcliff transforms from rough brute in farming clothes to rakish, Regency-style dandy with a gold tooth.

Not all of the costuming choices work. Cathy’s dirndl-style gowns are more Oktoberfest than “moorcore”. Unlike Cathy’s other costumes which aren’t historically accurate, but are still based on a bygone time, I found the dirndl gowns too similar to a style of traditional dress still worn in Bavaria, Austria and Switzerland, taking us away from the historical fantasy world of Wuthering Heights.

Let it sweep you away

While some will criticise the bold costuming choices, the beauty and skill of Durran’s work on Wuthering Heights are undeniable.

We should embrace Durran’s costumes and their blend of romantic, historical silhouettes and imagery with glossy, gauzy fabrics and sexy, contemporary, high fashion looks.

Production image: Heathcliff and Cathy in mourning blacks.
The costumes aren’t quite historically accurate – but they’re sumptuous. Photo Courtesy Warner Bros. Pictures

Don’t look for historical accuracy in Fennell’s Wuthering Heights. That will lead to disappointment. Instead, let the sensual, opulent costumes, the brash, bold scenography and the chemistry between Robbie and Elordi sweep you away to a sumptuous, imaginary world.The Conversation

Emily Brayshaw, Honorary Research Fellow, School of Design, University of Technology Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Held captive in their own country during World War II, Japanese Americans used nature to cope with their unjustified imprisonment

Japanese Americans incarcerated at Heart Mountain concentration camp in Wyoming took art classes at the craft shop, using what they could find. Tom Parker, War Relocation Authority, Department of the Interior, via National Archives and Records Administration
Susan H. KameiUSC Dornsife College of Letters, Arts and Sciences

With a stroke of a presidential pen, the lives of Izumi Taniguchi, Minoru Tajii, Homei Iseyama and Peggy Yorita irreparably changed on Feb. 19, 1942. On that day, President Franklin D. Roosevelt issued Executive Order 9066, which set in motion their wartime incarceration along with other people of Japanese ancestry who were forcibly removed from their homes in parts of California, Oregon, Washington and Arizona.

To cope with their fear, anger and loss in the turbulent times, they would have to dig deep into their emotional reservoirs of resolve and ingenuity.

Without bringing charges against them or providing any evidence of disloyalty, the U.S. government detained legal Japanese immigrants and their American-born descendants in desolate inland locations during and after World War II, simply because of their ethnicity. Nearly 127,000 people of Japanese ancestry were incarcerated between 1942 and 1947, according to Duncan Ryȗken Williams, director of The Irei Project, which is compiling a comprehensive list of those detained. My grandparents, parents and their families were among them.

As I describe in my book “When Can We Go Back to America? Voices of Japanese American Incarceration during World War II,” they boarded livestock trucks and World War I-era trains guarded by armed U.S. soldiers for destinations that were not disclosed to them. They could only take what they could carry and what they had within themselves.

84 years ago, an executive order mandated sending Japanese Americans to “relocation centers” as a security threat during World War II. Thousands were imprisoned at the Manzanar Relocation Center in the California desert. Recently, some of their descendants returned to play baseball and softball, sports that had given prisoners hope and a sense of normalcy. The reenactment paid tribute to the resilience of the detainees, explains USC history professor Susan H. Kamei.

When the Japanese Americans arrived at temporary detention facilities, euphemistically called “assembly centers,” hastily constructed on fairgrounds, racetracks and other government property, they were shocked to be body-searched, fingerprinted and interrogated. Thousands discovered their living quarters were animal pens or horse stalls. The ones considered lucky were assigned to poorly built barracks. The barracks had only cots, bare light bulbs hanging from the ceilings, and pot belly stoves in the corners; the interiors lacked any partitions.

People stand and sit near beds in an open space with clothes hanging from hooks on the wooden wall.
Japanese Americans incarcerated at assembly centers were quartered in rough barracks. Clem Albers, War Relocation Authority, Department of the Interior via National Archives and Records Administration

Immediately they scavenged wood from vegetable crates and construction debris they found nearby to create privacy within the barracks units and to make furniture and other household furnishings. Displaced from their livelihoods, education and social structure, with nothing to do, they also quickly organized a wide range of activities, including sports, as well as arts and crafts of all kinds. Their resourcefulness born out of necessity converged with the Japanese aesthetic to make functional items beautiful as they sought to make their temporary quarters more livable.

When the prisoners were transferred to long-term detention facilities run by the War Relocation Authority later in 1942, they brought with them what Delphine Hirasuna, an author and descendant of people who had been incarcerated during the war, calls the “art of gaman.” “Gaman” is a Japanese word meaning the dignity and grace to bear the seemingly unbearable. With this philosophy, they created objects of both utility and beauty.

Delphine Hirasuna speaks in 2014 about how Japanese Americans endured their incarceration with grace and even creativity.

Finding beauty in branches, rocks and shells

At the Gila River and Poston camps located on tribal land in the Mojave Desert, incarcerees found that desert wood could be carved, filed and polished to make partitions, household objects and works of art.

Armed soldiers guarded the barbed-wire perimeters from lookout towers, but as the war wore on, the incarcerees were allowed to venture beyond the camp fences. Izumi Taniguchi, then 16 years old from Contra Costa County, California, recalled getting permission to walk outside the Gila River camp boundaries to while away the time.

He remembered, that some people used the ironwood for sculpting. Minoru Tajii, then 18 years old from El Centro, California, held at the Poston camp, described ironwood as “an oil-rich wood, so when you polish it up it comes out very nice, so we go out and find that and bring it back.”

The Poston “sculptoring department” advertised in the camp newsletter “Poston Chronicle” on Jan. 20, 1943, that “anyone with ironwood wishing to learn how to make figures and notions may bring their materials to the department, 44-13-D, and work under the guidance of sculptoring teachers.”

A stone teapot and cup.
A teapot and cup made out of slate by Homei Iseyama, decorated with depictions of pomegranates and leaves evoking his connection with nature as a landscape gardener and bonsai master. Gift of the artist's family via Smithsonian American Art Museum

Homei Iseyama, from Oakland, California, became known for the exquisite teapots, teacups, candy dishes and calligraphy inkwells he carved out of slate stones he found around the Topaz, Utah, camp. Born in 1890, he attended Waseda University in Tokyo before immigrating to the United States in 1914 with dreams of attending art school.

At the Tule Lake camp, located on an ancient lake bed, the incarcerees discovered thick veins of shells that provided material for making art and jewelry. Fusako “Peggy” Nishimura Yorita got very involved in making shell jewelry. As digging for shells became a popular and competitive pastime for the Tule Lake incarcerees, Yorita enlisted her two teenagers and friends to help dig waist-deep holes at sunrise and sift the sand with homemade wire sieves.

A pin with flowers, leaves and a bow.
Peggy Nishimura Yorita composed the flowers and leaves in this corsage pin from shells she found at the Tule Lake concentration camp. Courtesy of the Bain Family Collection via Densho Digital Repository

A 33-year-old single mother, Yorita sold her shell jewellery to make a little money. She also enjoyed the creative endeavour. She recalled: “I was just making new things all the time. And to me, it … was … a wonderful outlet.”

As the incarcerees were allowed to leave the camps, they were given $25 and a one-way bus or train ticket to wherever they were going to rebuild their lives. Many took with them their handcrafted objects, reminders of how they overcame the physical and mental harshness of their detention years.

A small wooden chest of drawers.
The author’s grandfather, Ayatoshi Kurose, made this small tansu chest out of crate wood for her teenage mother in the Heart Mountain, Wyo., camp. Courtesy Susan H. KameiCC BY-NC-ND

When my mother entrusted to me the fragile small tansu chest that her father made for her in camp out of crate wood, she told me that her father had felt sorry for her that she didn’t have anyplace to store her belongings. To improve the appearance of the wood, my grandfather placed a hotplate on the pieces to deepen the grain. My mother appreciated the care he took to carve traditional Japanese scenes onto the panels with a pen knife. She said the chest represented to her the depth of her father’s love.

Eight decades after Roosevelt issued Executive Order 9066, researchers are delving into the traumatic intergenerational impact that the incarceration has had on the camp survivors and their descendants. Memorials such as The Irei Project seek to restore dignity to those who suffered unconstitutional injustices. On Feb. 19, known annually as the Day of Remembrance, Americans can honor them by appreciating their “art of gaman,” testaments to their resilient spirit as they found and created beauty in their wartime environments.The Conversation

Susan H. Kamei, Adjunct Professor of History and Affiliated Faculty, USC Shinso Ito Center for Japanese Religions and Cultures, USC Dornsife College of Letters, Arts and Sciences

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Heart-shaped locket discovery offers rare glimpse into Henry VIII and Katharine of Aragon’s marriage

James ClarkUniversity of Exeter

Henry VIII is not remembered as a loving husband. Any English schoolchild can recount the unpleasant fates of most of his six wives with the rhyme: “Divorced, beheaded, died, divorced, beheaded, survived.” But though the end of his relationships are famous, less is known about Henry in love.

Now, a rare jewel discovered by an amateur detectorist and bought by the British Museum for the national collection may force us to reconsider the king’s brutal reputation.

The jewel is a heart-shaped locket, crafted in gold with red enamel decoration, and attached to a solid gold chain. On the face are the letters H and K linked together by the stems of a Tudor rose and a pomegranate, which was the symbol of Katharine’s Spanish royal family. It is a reasonable deduction that this remarkable jewel was connected directly to Henry and the first of his wives, Katherine of Aragon.

Katherine was the subject of Henry’s first and most shocking divorce, which precipitated England’s breach with the Roman papacy and the transformation of religion which we now know as the Reformation. In many ways Katherine also suffered the worst of the king’s personal cruelty. Although not executed, she was consigned to virtual house-arrest, much of the time separated from her only living child, Mary.

If this was indeed Henry and Katherine’s jewel it could be a vital clue to quite different moment in their relationship, and to a dimension of the king’s character that his otherwise notorious conduct has completely obscured.

In late medieval and Renaissance society, monograms – the linking of people’s initials – were often created to represent a personal connection, a marriage, a betrothal or even a secret love-match. Beneath the linked letters on the locket is the French word “Toujo(u)rs”, meaning “always” – a natural choice for a pledge between lovers. Here, the letters surely stand for Henry and Katherine.

The locket’s flower and fruit decoration seal the royal connection. The pomegranate symbol swept into English public life after the two families were joined through Henry’s marriage. Decorations for the coronation of the king and queen, just two weeks after the wedding, paired the Tudor rose with golden pomegranates. A woodblock print published to mark the occasion under the title A Joyful Meditation to All England, showed Henry and Katherine receiving their crowns under a twin canopy of the flower and the fruit.

Accounts of textiles commissioned for the royal household show dozens of different pieces – upholstery, wall-hangings, and livery to be worn by servants – all featuring the rose and the pomegranate prominently in their design.

Devoted designs

The decoration of the heart pendant is matched in a wide variety of treasures described in Henry’s household inventories. These contain descriptions of a bag of crimson satin, a silver comb case and standing cup all marked in the same way for the king and his queen. These lists also identify several collars or necklaces – described by the archaic term carkeynes – with heart-shaped pendants. One of these, coloured blue, is also inscribed, “H K”.

Henry spent prodigiously on beautiful, bespoke furnishings, but jewellery was his greatest passion. The inventories of his jewels and plate (gold, gilt and silver objets d’art) compiled shortly after his death in January 1547 record almost 4,000 individual pieces.

Portrait of Henry VIII in elaborate gold jewellery
Jewellery was one of Henry VIII’s passions. Portrait by Hans Holbein, the Younger (circa 1497-1543). Thyssen-Bornemisza Museum

This Tudor heart pendant is a prime example of this level of investment. The locket itself is formed from 24-carat gold; the wide chain found with it is weighty and long – more than 40cm. Together they amount to 317 grams of precious metal. It is no wonder that the British Museum’s purchase price was £3.5 million.

It is clear from his wardrobe accounts – which record the purchase of decorative pieces for his household – that Henry took a personal interest in the material and design of many of these pieces. Surviving examples of designs for jewellery drawn by Hans Holbein, the German artist active at Henry’s court in the 1530s and early 1540s, may have come from a pattern book made to influence, or illustrate, the king’s developing tastes. He bought, or commissioned pieces, not only for his own household but also as gifts – often marking the new year – to family members and court favourites.

This may well be the origin of the heart pendant. Since it came to light, it has been spoken of as associated with Henry’s great pageant in the Pas-de-Calais in 1520, the so-called Field of the Cloth of Gold. Here he, Katherine and his court staged a ceremonial meeting with the French King, François I. A great many furnishings from the royal residences and chapels did cross the Channel to decorate the pop-up canvas palace and tents.

But I am convinced the message conveyed by this jewel is not political but profoundly personal. Toujours is an expression of deep, heartfelt attachment. An alternative theory, advanced by the British Museum itself, is that the pendant was made to mark the betrothal in October 1518 of Katherine’s only living child, Princess Mary, aged two, to the eight-month-old heir to the French throne.

But given the presence of pieces of very similar design in the royal household soon after the marriage and coronation, it must be possible that the pendant belongs to the early years of Henry and Katherine’s relationship. At first, she and the king were inseparable. Five months from the wedding she was pregnant. She conceived again each year from 1510 to 1513. One of these pregnancies resulted in a son, named Henry, born in January 1511. He lived for a little under two months.

In the late summer of that year, the king and queen embarked on a progress through the Thames Valley and on into the West Midlands, culminating at Warwick. It was in a Warwickshire field that the detectorist, Charlie Clarke, uncovered the heart pendant in 2019.

Could it be that a jewel gifted to Katherine at the time of the birth of Henry’s longed-for male heir was carried with the royal party – as so many of their personal jewels were – as they made their way into Warwickshire? It gives the locket an edge not just of romance, but of tragedy. Here, perhaps, Katherine was parted from a present that was, already, a memento mori of her lost son.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.The Conversation


James Clark, Professor of Medieval History, University of Exeter

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Henry VIII, Katharine of Aragon and the heart pendant emblazoned with their initials. Walker Art Gallery/Wiki Commons/Birmingham Museums Trust

London, Feb 10 2026 - Henry VIII and Katherine of Aragon's marriage didn't last - he divorced her in 1533 - but a golden heart pendant linked to their union did survive, and has now been secured for permanent display at the British Museum.

In 2019, Charlie Clarke, a 34-year-old café owner who had recently taken up metal detecting as a hobby, discovered a gold pendant and chain in a field in Warwickshire. The heart-shaped pendant, emblazoned with the intertwined initials “H” and “K,” as well as a red-and-white Tudor rose and pomegranate bush, is imagery associated with Henry and his first wife, Catherine of Aragon (also known as Katherine). Both sides bore the inscription “toujours,” a play on the French word for “always.”

The 24-karat-gold heart, complete with the couple's initials in red, and a picture of the Tudor rose and a pomegranate tree, was acquired by the British Museum after it raised £3.5 million to save it from being sold to a private collector.

The gold pendant likely dates to around 1521. Illustration by Meilan Solly / Photos via Birmingham Museums Trust under CC BY 2.0, Wikimedia Commons under public domain

Nessun Dorma (Loosely Woven)

video by Wayne Richmond

Mow for Ol'Mate in March: 

Sunday, 1 March 2026 - 09:00 am to Tuesday, 31 March 2026 - 05:00 pm
It's a simple idea with a big heart: neighbours helping neighbours, right in their own backyards. By mowing a couple of lawns for older members of the community, you're not just tidying up - you're checking in, having a chat and making sure they're safe, supported and doing OK at home.

A freshly mown lawn can mean independence, dignity and peace of mind - and sometimes a reason to to stop, say hello and connect. So, grab a mower in March and be part of something special in the Northern Beaches Community.

Join this amazing community mow-ment today. Register your interest via enquiries@mwpcare.com.au or call 9913 3244.

OR Are you over 65 and would like your lawn mowed? Call our friendly team on 9913 3244 to register your interest.

Contact information
MWP Community Care, email: enquiries@mwpcare.com.au


Victa rotary lawnmower and Mervyn Victor Richardson of Careel Bay, the owner of the company - 1955 - photo by Jack Hickson, Australian Photographic Agency - 01148. Taken by Australian Photographic Agency for account: Graves, Hayes & Baker 1642/55.

Local Seniors Festival Events: 2026

The events to celebrate Seniors are now listed and there's two free events at Mona Vale Library and through Avalon Community Library.

Those in Pittwater are:
  • Family History Workshop: Tuesday 10 March, 2pm - 3:30pm at Mona Vale Library  Book in Here -Free - 15 spots left, make sure you book into the MVL one.
  • Write your memories workshop: Thursday, 19 March 2026 - 10:00 am to 12:00 pm, Avalon Recreation Centre, 59 Old Barrenjoey Road. Bookings essential by Thursday 12 March as numbers strictly limited, phone 8495 5080.
Others in Pittwater include: 
  • Seniors Festival tour of Kimbriki Resource Recovery Centre: Tuesday, 10 March 2026 - 10:00 am to 01:00 pm - free - book in here (opens Feb 11)Visit the HUB at Kimbriki! The HUB houses Peninsula Seniors Toy Repair Group, Bikes4life and Boomerang Bags Northern Beaches. Their volunteers help reduce waste going to landfill through repair and reuse. Afterwards enjoy a guided walk through the Eco House & Garden, a light lunch and a bus tour of the Kimbriki site.
  • Downsizing workshop/talk at Pittwater RSL: $5, March 13
  • Caring for coastline & coffee morning: Sunday, 15 March 2026 - 09:00 am to 11:00 am, Mona Vale Beach - northern end, Surfview Road. - Come along and care for our beautiful coastline with the Friends of Bongin Bongin Bay by sharing a walk along Mona Vale beach. Clean up buckets provided free or just enjoy the foreshore of Bongin Bongin Bay at the north end of Mona Vale Beach car park. Join the group for a coffee afterwards at the Brightside Cafe. A relaxing way to spend a Sunday morning celebrating being a senior. Conducted in conjunction with Surfrider Foundation, Northern Beaches ‘Adopt a Beach’ plastic removal program. Free. No bookings necessary. Just come along on the day.
  • An evening of music with the Northern Beaches Concert Band: Sunday, 15 March 2026 - 05:00 pm to 07:00 pm, Pittwater RSL Auditorium, 82 Mona Vale Road, Mona Vale. - Enjoy a free evening concert by the Northern Beaches Concert Band.  The program includes a mix of classical melodies, engaging concert band works, and popular tunes that are sure to spark memories and smiles.  FREE. No bookings required. Arrive before 5pm to secure a table. Refreshments available for purchase at the venue.
  • Your Side - Support at Home Information Session: Tuesday, 17 March 2026 - 10:30 am to 11:30 am and Tuesday, 17 March 2026 - 12:00 pm to 01:00 pm, Mona Vale Library, Pelican Room, 1 Park Street, Mona Vale. - Support at Home is the new program of government funding you can receive for aged care services in your own home. Anyone living in Australia aged 65 years or over is eligible, whether you are a full or part pensioner or a fully self-funded retiree. Support at Home can give you access to clinical and personal care, mobility aids and services, and help with daily tasks around your home.  In this information session our Aged Care Support Specialists will help you understand the changes in aged care and what Support at Home is. Whether you are currently receiving aged care, or you are trying to get some support set up, either for yourself or your loved ones, we can help.  Our Aged Care Support Specialists will explain what it means for you and help you apply for and access the funding and services you need. Come and meet us, have a cuppa and we will answer all your questions about aged care.  There will be two sessions on the day. Choose the session that best suits your schedule.  Registering for this free event is essential. Secure your spot here.
  • Advanced Care Planning Workshop - Avalon: Thursday, 19 March 2026 - 10:00 am to 12:00 pm, Avalon Recreation Centre, Room 1 59 Old Barrrenjoey Road, Avalon Beach. - Advance care planning involves planning for your future health care. It enables you to make some decisions now about the health care you would or would not like to receive if you were to become seriously ill and unable to communicate your preferences or make treatment decisions. It helps ensure your loved ones and health providers know what matters most to you and respect your treatment preferences. The workshop will be facilitated by local Nurse Practitioner, Kelly Arthurs of ANDCare. Learning topics cover: What is Advance Care Planning and why it is so important to discuss?, What are the most important aspects to consider with Advance Care Planning, Opportunity to reflect, have a conversation, and commence your own Advance Care Planning journey. This FREE workshop is for all members of the community. All attendees are eligible for a follow up personal consultation appointment with the Nurse Practitioner on Tuesday 24, Wednesday 25, Thursday 26 and Monday 30 March in Mona Vale. One-on-one appointments are available at no cost for those eligible for Medicare. Hosted by Sydney North Health Network and Northern Beaches Council, with ANDCare.  FREE - register your spot here.
The rest are listed on the council webpage dedicated to listing these - not all are council initiated events and fees are being charged for some of these, and most are out of Pittwater, but with a bus at your door, it may be well worth heading south or west to be a part of these.


Guesdon-Eady-Broadbent house at Palm Beach circa 1946-47, at 47 Florida Road - that's dad looking incredibly bored on the chaise lounge at the back, probably waiting to go to the beach!  Photo: PON Editor's family albums - Family History.

Even the best writing about science recalls ancient myths

A buff-tailed bumblebee (Bombus terrestris) lands on a Zinnia (Zinnia elegans). Simon Koopmann, via Wikimedia CommonsCC BY-SA
Nanda JaroszUniversity of Sydney

The 15th edition of The Best Australian Science Writing, edited by Zoe Kean and Tegan Taylor, contains 39 essays and stories that “tell tales of the universe that scientists have worked hard to reveal”.

Contributions revolve around pressing issues in the scientific world, such as climate change and ecological crisis, psychology and animal behaviour, the sociology of medicine and data, scientific ethics, and the perils of tech-boosterism.


Review: The Best Australian Science Writing 2025 – edited by Zoe Kean and Tegan Taylor (NewSouth)


But these tales also have a speculative bent. The editors open the anthology with a question: “Gaze into a telescope and what do you see?” They hark back to the Ancient Greek oracle of Delphi, acknowledging foresight as an inherent part of the process of scientific discovery.

The collection unfolds as a homage to the Ancient Greek myths and heroes. It elaborates on the idea that looking to the starry skies can provide the seer with insights into the meaning and value of human life.

The Greek Pantheon

The contributors are largely established journalists, with some from academia and freelance writing backgrounds. But many of them engage with tropes and metaphors rooted in Greek myths.

In his essay Humanoid Robots, for example, Owen Cumming pays homage to the power of classical myths to lend legitimacy to modern inventions. He evokes Talos, the mythical guardian of Crete, as “one of the earliest stories we have about a mechanical being created with human form”.

In the myth, Medea tricks Talos into removing a protective seal on his ankle by promising him immortality. The story reveals the messiness of human-machine hybrids. It invokes the uncanny sensation of simultaneous allure and repulsion that comes from “a robot seeming almost human, but not quite right”.

Other essays don’t make direct reference to Greek myths, but they borrow their themes. Angus Dalton’s contribution remodels the tale of Eros, the Greek god of love, his essay reaching its comedic climax in his description of the rare blooming of the corpse flower “Putricia” at the Royal Botanic Gardens in Sydney.

The necessity of enduring hardship for the fruits of passion and desire is evident in the line: “Putricia’s attendants gaze at her for a moment and, cloaked in the stench of death, do as we always have: hope for new life”.

Amalyah Hart’s contribution on the use of insects in the pursuit of understanding consciousness contains one of the best lines in the collection: “In the insect world, bees have a monopoly on charisma – famously intelligent, admirably cooperative, and cheerfully partnered”.

In Greek mythology, bees are associated with foresight. The god Apollo is said to have received his gift of prophesy from three bee-maidens.

Hart discusses how scientists are experimenting on bees, flies and other insects to understand brain function and the evolution of consciousness. Her contribution shows science mirroring ancient methods, making new discoveries about the nature of our inner world through human-animal interactions.

Lepidopterist Colin Wyatt smuggled butterfly specimens out of Australia. Alec Iverson, Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons

Olivia Congdon’s contribution tells the tale of lepidopterist Colin Wyatt, who “smuggled approximately three thousand butterfly specimens out of Australian museum collections”. Wyatt’s exploits, evocative of Autolycus, the master thief of Greek mythology, continue to plague the scientific study of butterflies.

Any time a scientist names a new species, they must produce a physical specimen (holotype) for the record. Removing or replacing even one of these foundational specimens, as Wyatt did, can alter the biological record of a an entire species, effectively setting the field back by decades, or even permanently in the case of extinct species.

Other contributions that echo Greek myths include Belinda Smith’s essay explaining why some venomous snakes can bite and kill even when they’re dead and decapitated, which recalls the multi-headed Hydra.

Promethean essays

Beyond the individual contributions, the anthology as a whole evokes the foundational myth of Prometheus, which describes the birth of human knowledge and technology. Aeschylus’ play Prometheus Bound tells the story of the Titan Prometheus, who was punished by Zeus for stealing fire from the gods and gifting it to humans, along with the power of knowledge, and was punished by Zeus by being chained to a rock for eternity.

Many of the stories in this anthology consider the perils of scientific and technological hubris. Dyani Lewis’ investigation into the use of biometric data derived from Chinese minority groups, for example, emphasises that “ethical concerns are particularly acute in forensic science because the field has close connections with law enforcement”.

The data is often drawn from blood samples, which are useful for forensic identification and paternity testing. But they can also be used by security forces to track and profile Tibetan populations. Other at risk people include Muslim Uyghurs, whose DNA profiles have been used as part of the passport registration process. Profiling also occurs through facial recognition software, which can distinguish the faces of Uyghurs or Tibetans, populations targeted by the Chinese government for surveillance and mass detention.

Linda McIver’s essay on misinformation advocates a sceptical approach to technological progress, artificial intelligence in particular. As in the myth of Prometheus, scientific progress can seem to come bearing gifts, providing the illusion of knowledge, while masking pitfalls or unexpected consequences.

“Technology,” writes McIver, “is also wildly successful at selling us conspiracy theories, lies about health, lies about people, lies about politics, and lies about climate change, among many, many other lies.”

Matthew War Agius’ story Faster Higher Stronger Doper considers the seemingly innocuous European lugworm (Arenicola marina) as a cautionary tale about sports doping. Worm haemoglobin – the protein that transports oxygen in blood cells – has 39 times more carrying capacity than human blood cells. Transfused into an athlete’s blood stream, worm haemoglobin can improve energy levels. It allows significantly higher quantities of blood cells to move more oxygen around the body, creating a greater aerobic capacity.

It seems no recess of natural biology is safe from exploitation in the pursuit of glory. As Agius writes: “where winning and losing are separated by wafer-thin margins – sometimes requiring a photo finish – the dark arts of performance enhancement are seductive”.

Haemoglobin from the European lugworm can enhance athletic performance. Auguste Le Roux, via Wikimedia CommonsCC BY

Scientific existentialism

The stories in this anthology offer two distinct ways of interpreting the Promethean legacy of scientific progress.

The first is to highlight the dangers of the pursuit of knowledge – the risks of flying, like Icarus, too close to the sun. The second recalls French philosopher Albert Camus’ interpretation of the myth of Sisyphus.

Sisyphus was condemned to toil for eternity, rolling a boulder up a hill only for it to roll back down again. For Camus, the Sisyphean struggle represents the individual’s existential quest for meaning, faced with the essential absurdity of life. Sisyphus, like all of us, must either succumb to nihilism in the face of a meaningless existence, or find a way to accept life’s enduring struggle.

The anthology’s final contribution, written by Tabitha Carvan and titled The Unexpected Poetry of PhD Acknowledgements, is a perfect illustration of this perspective. Her compilation of acknowledgements taken from PhD theses highlights the sheer volume of individuals who make sacrifices in the pursuit of knowledge.

There is a sense of futility to seeing all of these contributions collected together, reduced to a depersonalised mountain of effort. But reading the acknowledgements crystallises the importance of each unique journey, and there are glimpses of universal truths in the expressions of gratitude and loss. “I wish I could be half person you were,” reads one heartfelt acknowledgement. “Words cannot express how much I miss you.”

The cycle continues

The best science writing emphasises the value of the struggle for knowledge ahead of the grandeur of a new discovery.

A good example is the current discourse around the possibility of AGI (artificial general intelligence) and the claims that it will eventually understand, learn and think independently of humans. Much of the commentary is focused on what this will mean for humanity and how to profit from it.

What is more interesting is the extent to which this discourse has created a new desire to understand what it means to be human, to have free will and think independently. People trained in the objective methodologies of the natural and mathematical sciences are grappling with ambiguity, ethics and feeling. Scientists are reentering the subjective realm of the humanities, which they have neglected since the Enlightenment.

To borrow a phrase from novelist Ceridwen Dovey’s story Staying Faithful to Earth, the limits of scientific endeavour necessarily “throw us back upon speculation, symbols, metaphors, visualisations, scientific analogies that work really hard but aren’t quite right”.

Fascination with the gods and heroes of Ancient Greece has persisted across millennia. Modern retellings are attempts to understand the role of wisdom, destiny and power in challenging times. The struggle for scientific knowledge is a human endeavour, one that speaks to the enduring imperative of creating our own meaning from the chaos and indifference of the universe.The Conversation

Nanda Jarosz, Researcher, Environmental Philosophy, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Does exercise really work for osteoarthritis?

FG Trade/Getty Images
Hunter BennettAdelaide University and Lewis IngramAdelaide University

Osteoarthritis is a common degenerative joint disease that causes pain, stiffness and swelling, and reduces your range of motion. It often affects the knees, hips and hands, although it can also occur in other joints throughout the body.

If you’ve been diagnosed with osteoarthritis, your doctor has probably recommended exercise. This has become standard treatment advice in recent years.

However, a new review suggests exercise might not be as beneficial as first thought.

But when you take a closer look at the study, there are reasons to be cautious. So it shouldn’t prompt you to ditch your exercise regimen.

What the review did

The research team conducted an “umbrella review” – an overview of systematic reviews, which collate and analyse the findings from individual studies to answer a specific question. Reviewing previously published systematic reviews provides an even bigger snapshot of a given research topic.

After searching thousands of studies, they included five major systematic reviews (comprised of 100 individual studies, with 8,631 patients) before adding another 28 recent trials (involving another 4,360 patients).

Using this data, they looked at the effect of exercise on knee, hip and hand osteoarthritis, and compared it to several alternatives, including doing nothing, placebo (fake) treatments, education, manual therapy, painkillers, injections and surgery.

What did they find?

Compared to doing nothing and placebos, they found that exercise resulted in small reductions in pain in the hip, knee and hand: between 6 and 12 points on a 100-point scale.

However, exercise did not seem to improve function any more than either of these comparisons.

For knee and hip osteoarthritis, there was evidence that exercise was just as effective at reducing pain and improving function as medicines such as ibuprofen and corticosteroids, which are injected into the joint to reduce inflammation. These also reduced pain by around 5–10%.

The researchers concluded exercise was less effective at improving pain and function than a total joint replacement in people with knee and hip osteoarthritis.

What were the limitations?

First, the authors lumped all types of exercise together. This means strength training, aerobic exercise, stretching, aquatic exercise and tai chi were all considered to be the same.

This is crucial, because we know not all exercise is created equal. Previous reviews have shown, for example, that aerobic exercise might be best for reducing pain and function in people with knee osteoarthritis, while stretching was least effective.

Similarly, the authors didn’t consider the clinical status of the patients. Evidence has shown people with more severe pain and worse function at the start of an intervention see better responses to exercise than those with less pain and good function.

Second, the review treated both supervised and unsupervised exercise the same.

However, research shows supervised training results in much better outcomes than unsupervised – likely because a trainer is there to help push the patient along.

Third, the authors didn’t account for the duration of the exercise, and most study periods were quite short: around 12 weeks.

It’s likely that sticking to an exercise regime over the long term will have better results, leading to a larger scope for improvement than if you just did something for a few weeks.

As such, the results of this review may not accurately reflect the benefits of exercise in people with osteoarthritis who commit to consistent exercise as an ongoing part of their weekly routine (which is often recommended).

Finally, the review didn’t account for the dose of exercise the studies used. Improvements in pain and function seem to increase with total weekly exercise in people with osteoarthritis. One review, for example, found the optimal benefits occurred at around 150 minutes of moderate intensity exercise per week.

These limitations suggest this new review likely undersells the benefits of exercise for osteoarthritis.

Less pain and better physical and mental health

Putting aside the limitations of the review, the small reductions in pain the review reports might still have a positive impact on someone’s life. A 10% reduction in pain could make a meaningful difference to your ability to move around, work, socialise and care for others.

The review also found exercise can reduce pain to the same extent as non-steriodal anti-inflammatory medications and corticosteroids – without the side-effects or the costs.

Exercise can also improve heart healthenhance your mood, help with weight management and reduce the risk of chronic diseases, such as cancer and diabetes.

These factors can have a huge impact on your health and happiness.

What should you do now?

Based on the findings of this new review, you should be confident that any type of exercise will lead to some degree of pain relief.

However, based on prior evidence, it’s likely you can get even greater overall health benefits from exercising if you stick with it.

The best type of exercise is the one that gets done. If you enjoy being outdoors and walking, then this is going to be a great choice as it will improve all aspects of your health as well as reduce pain.

And if pain permits, don’t be afraid to occasionally challenge yourself by upping the intensity to the point where holding a conversation starts to become difficult.

If going to the gym is more your thing, lifting weights will also bring significant overall health benefits – especially if you stick to it long term.The Conversation

Hunter Bennett, Lecturer in Exercise Science, Adelaide University and Lewis Ingram, Lecturer in Physiotherapy, Adelaide University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Pittwater Probus

When: 10:00am, second Tuesday of each month
Phone: 0405 330 613
  • Probus Club of Pittwater is an association for active male members of the community, and for those no longer working full time, wishing to join a club for a new lease of life.
  • Its purpose is to advance intellectual and cultural interests amongst its members and to provide regular opportunities to progress well-being through social interaction and activities, expand interests and enjoy the fellowship of new friends.
  • Our club membership is for men only, however partners are welcome and encouraged at our social events and activities, including our monthly speaker presentations and lunch following each meeting.
Pittwater Probus is a fun and friendship club where you can make new friends, listen to interesting guest speakers and participate in a wide range of activities including special lunches and dinners.

Meetings are held each month at Mona Vale Surf Life Saving Club, commencing at 10:00am on the second Tuesday of the month. Visitors are welcome to the meetings.

Pittwater Probus is a men’s only Probus Club, and wives and partners are encouraged to listen to guest speakers and also join in on our activities and functions.

There is a one-off joining fee of $20 and an annual membership fee of $50. New members are always made welcome.

Wyvern Music Forestville: Alexander Yau – Piano Recital

“Hats off, gentlemen, a genius”
Wyvern Music Forestville proudly presents acclaimed pianist Alexander Yau in a recital celebrating the genius of three of history’s greatest composers: Mozart, Schumann, and Chopin.

The program begins with Mozart’s Sonata in F major, K. 533, a work of crystalline elegance, moving from the spirited Allegro through the lyrical Andante to the buoyant Rondo finale.

Schumann’s Humoreske, Op. 20 follows, a kaleidoscope of moods and emotions, shifting between tenderness, exuberance, and introspection across six contrasting movements. After the interval, Yau turns to Chopin’s majestic Sonata No. 3 in B minor, Op. 58, a pinnacle of Romantic piano literature. From the commanding Allegro Maestoso to the dazzling finale Presto ma non tanto – Agitato, the sonata embodies both poetic depth and virtuosic brilliance.

Alexander Yau, an eminent young Australian pianist, has developed himself as a complete musician, incorporating his many musical talents as a chamber musician, conductor and composer. He is currently Associate Lecturer in Collaborative Piano at the Sydney Conservatorium of Music and casual Principal Pianist at the Sydney Symphony Orchestra. 

This recital offers audiences the chance to experience the inspiration of three great musical masters, brought vividly to life by Alexander Yau.

When: Sunday, 8th March 2026 at 3:00pm
Where: Our Lady of Good Counsel Catholic Church, 9 Currie Rd, Forestville
Tickets: Full:$40, Concession:$30, Students:$25, Children under 16 Free
Enquiries: Wyvern Music Forestville Tel: 9416 5234

AvPals Term 1 2026 Short Courses at Newport

Avalon Computer Pals (AVPALS) helps seniors build and improve their computer and technology skills. AvPals is a not-for-profit organisation run by volunteers. Since 2000, we have helped thousands of seniors from complete beginners to people who just want to improve or update their skills. We offer one to one personal tuition or small group short courses.

Short courses are run at Newport Community Centre every Tuesday afternoon in school terms. Full details of this term’s courses are available at Newport Short Courses and bookings can be made on our Course Bookings webpage.

Find out more at: www.avpals.com

$10.8 million gift establishes new research chair at UNSW

February 17, 2026
by Julia Holman, UNSW

Dr John Sarks AM and Dr Shirley Sarks AM spent decades studying age-related macular degeneration. Photo: Supplied

The gift will enable the establishment of a new Chair dedicated to advancing excellence in ophthalmology and vision science.

UNSW Sydney has received a unique $10.8 million philanthropic commitment from the Sarks Macular Degeneration Research Foundation to establish the Shirley and John Sarks Chair in Age-related Macular Degeneration, strengthening Australia’s capacity to address age-related macular degeneration (AMD) and other blinding eye diseases.

The gift will support the creation of a new Chair to advance ophthalmology and vision science excellence. The role will be filled through an international recruitment process, attracting a world-leading researcher or physician-researcher to UNSW’s Faculty of Medicine & Health.

AMD is the leading cause of irreversible vision loss in developed countries. In Australia, around one in seven people over the age of 50 have signs of the condition, with more than 1.5 million Australians affected - a number expected to grow as the population ages. AMD leads to progressive loss of central vision, making everyday activities such as reading, driving and recognising faces increasingly difficult.

UNSW Sydney Vice-Chancellor and President Professor Attila Brungs said the gift would have a profound and lasting impact on eye and vision research.

“This visionary gift reflects an extraordinary commitment to advancing medical research that drives real progress for all and a profound and lasting impact,” Prof. Brungs said.

“The Shirley and John Sarks Chair in Age-related Macular Degeneration will support UNSW researchers at the forefront of global efforts to better understand, prevent and treat macular degeneration.”
Dr John Sarks AM, now 94, is internationally recognised as a pioneer in ophthalmology and retinal research, and his work has helped shape modern understanding of macular degeneration.

Together with his late wife and long-time research partner, Dr Shirley Sarks AM, he spent decades studying the disease. He said the donation was the culmination of his and his wife’s lifetime dedication to improving sight. The establishment of the Chair also ensures that innovation in the field continues well into the future.

“Macular degeneration remains a major challenge, and there is still much to learn,” Dr Sarks said.

“My hope is that this Chair will support researchers to keep asking difficult questions and to continue pushing towards better treatments and outcomes for patients.”

As part of their lifelong work, Drs Shirley and John Sarks collected hundreds of samples of human eye tissue to better understand the progression of the disease. The collection includes detailed clinical histories and is regarded as one of the most comprehensive and valuable resources of its kind in the world.

UNSW Dean of Medicine & Health Professor Cheryl Jones said the establishment of the Chair offered new hope for the millions of people burdened with sight-related disease, and continued the legacy of the Sarks’ collaborative approach to careful observation, persistence and research.

“The Shirley and John Sarks Chair in Age-related Macular Degeneration will enable UNSW to attract a world-leading expert in a highly specialised and competitive field, strengthening our progress in tackling this debilitating disease,” Prof. Jones said.

Measured deeming rate lift and indexation lessen the blow to pensioners

The measured change in the deeming rate of 0.5% announced by the government today (Friday Feb. 20), timed with indexation, acknowledges that a steeper change was not in the interests of pensioners, National Seniors states.

Deeming rates are used as part of the Age Pension income test; to determine eligibility for the Commonwealth Seniors Health Card; and to determine co-contributions for aged care services.

From 20 March, lower and upper deeming rates will increase by 0.5% to 1.25% for the lower rate and 3.25% for the upper rate. The modest increase keeps the upper rate below the cash rate and well below returns on investments like superannuation and term deposits. This gives pensioners some breathing space in the face of the ongoing cost-of-living crisis.

National Seniors Australia (NSA) Chief Executive Officer Mr Chris Grice said the change is not surprising, but thankfully relatively modest, after the three-year freeze in which interest rates increased from record lows.

“NSA called for any lift to deeming rates to be gradual, modest, and timed with indexation. While the increase will have some impact on pensioners, it could have been worse given interest rates remain stubbornly high,” Mr Grice said.

“We have said consistently and still maintain – any upward change to deeming rates needs to be measured, incremental, and transparent to protect older people.

“If interest rates continue to rise and government reverts quickly to the old method to set deeming rates, there could be significant financial impacts, with lower pensions and higher aged care co-contributions.

“Pensioners with limited savings are still feeling cost of living pressures and need to be supported through measures to help improve their standard of living, such as exempting employment income from the Age Pension income test and additional concessions. NSA will keep fighting for these.”

Deeming rates will increase when indexation is also applied on 20 March. As our indexation estimator and Minister Plibersek has largely confirmed, indexation will result in a $22.20 per fortnight increase in the Age Pension. Our estimator shows that the 0.5% lift in deeming rates will be largely offset by the increase in the pension. By timing the deeming rate increase with indexation, government has lessened the blow. Again, this was something NSA recommended to the Minister.

National Seniors Australia looks forward to reading in full the advice of the Australian Government Actuary, charged with advising Minister Plibersek on how to set rates in the future.

Dementia: how brain resilience, immune health and the menopause play a role in women’s risk

Biological sex has a major influence on brain health. VPLAB/ Shutterstock
Eleftheria KodosakiUCL and Amanda HeslegraveUCL

Women are more likely than men to be diagnosed with dementia. While researchers have some idea of the factors that elevate risk, it’s still not entirely clear why this happens. But a recent study suggests that the menopause could play a key role in increased vulnerability to Alzheimer’s disease.

Researchers at the University of Cambridge analysed brain scans from nearly nearly 125,000 women. They found the menopause is associated with measurable reductions in grey matter (brain areas where information is processed and analysed). They also identified volume reductions in brain regions involved in memory, emotion, attention and decision-making.

These changes were also linked to poorer sleep, increased anxiety and depression and slower reaction times. Importantly, the affected regions overlap with those most vulnerable in Alzheimer’s disease (the most common form of dementia).

This does not mean, however, that menopause causes dementia. But it does suggest that menopause may represent a critical neurological transition – one that can influence brain health trajectories for years or even decades afterwards.

These findings have brought the influence of biological sex on brain health into sharper focus. These findings may also bring us closer to understanding why women are not only at greater risk of Alzheimer’s disease, but a range of other neurological conditions – including multiple sclerosis and depression.

Factors affecting women’s dementia risk

Although women face a higher risk of dementia, their brains often show remarkable resilience.

Throughout much of life, women tend to outperform men on certain verbal memory tasks, and often show greater resistance to early cognitive decline.

But this resilience could be a double-edged sword, masking underlying brain changes for longer.

In Alzheimer’s disease, women often show fewer symptoms early on, despite accumulating signs of the disease in the brain. When symptoms do emerge, decline can appear faster and more dramatic – partly because the brain has already been compensating for damage for years.

There are many other crucial social and biological differences between men and women that may explain why brain health outcomes can vary so broadly, as well.

Cognitive reserve, for instance. This is the brain’s ability to adapt and maintain a certain level of function, even when faced with damage (including that caused by dementia and Alzheimer’s). Education, intellectually demanding work, being socially and physically active and lifelong learning all help build cognitive reserve.

Not only is cognitive reserve shaped by biology, it’s also shaped by social realities. For instance, many women have experienced interrupted education, chronic stress or limited access to healthcare. These factors can quietly erode cognitive reserve over time – even while women continue to function at a high level.

At the same time, strong social networks, emotional intelligence and adaptability, qualities often reinforced in women, may enhance resilience and delay the appearance of symptoms.

Another key factor in dementia risk lies in immune function differences between sexes.

Women generally have stronger immune responses than men. While this protects against infections, it can also increase vulnerability to autoimmune conditions (where the immune system becomes overactive). The immune response can particularly become overactive as women age or during periods of hormonal change.

This heightened immune activity extends to the brain. Chronic neuroinflammation, often caused by a dysregulated immune system, is increasingly recognised as a contributor to Alzheimer’s disease, as well as multiple sclerosis and mood disorders. Women’s stronger immune activation may therefore raise risk for certain brain conditions, especially during periods of hormonal instability – such as menopause.

Chromosomes also matter.

A digital drawing of the X chromosome.
The X chromosome contains many immune-related genes. Phonlamai Photo/ Shutterstock

Women have two X chromosomes, while men have one X and one Y in most cases. Many immune-related genes are located on the X chromosome. But some of these genes are able to escape the usual process that switches off their activity in women.

This can lead to higher expression of immune system and inflammatory genes – potentially increasing susceptibility to autoimmune and neuroinflammatory disorders.

The menopause link

One of the most important insights from the recent Cambridge study concerns brain metabolism.

The brain is an energy-hungry organ. It primarily uses glucose (sugar) as it’s main source of energy.

Oestrogen plays a significant role in how brain cells use glucose. Oestrogen helps brain cells use glucose efficiently, supporting the energy needed for thinking and memory.

But when oestrogen levels fall during the menopause, the brain may become less efficient at generating energy from glucose. This can create a mild, chronic energy shortfall in vulnerable brain regions. Over time, this metabolic stress may increase susceptibility to processes linked to Alzheimer’s.

This metabolic aspect could also help explain why symptoms such as brain fog, fatigue, mood changes and sleep disruption are common during the menopause.

It also offers a possible biological bridge between menopause and later-life neurological conditions, including Alzheimer’s.

Alzheimer’s and other brain disorders develop under different biological conditions in women and men. Studies on brain health, as well as tests, treatments and prevention strategies, must reflect that reality.

Factors such as hormones, metabolism, lifestyle and immune function not only affect how Alzheimer’s and other brain disorders develop, but also how they interact with and affect each other.

But for decades, research has ignored women, with studies investigating women’s issues being underfunded. Clinical trials on brain health have also failed to acknowledge sex as a potential modifying factor.

Some studies have completely excluded women – with peri- and post-menopausal women particularly overlooked. As a result, many of the treatments available (including those which slow dementia) are developed and prescribed without considering how hormonal changes may alter drug metabolism.

The result is a healthcare system poorly equipped to recognise early brain changes in women or to intervene at the most effective time.

Everything we currently know is pointing towards an important message: women’s brains are complex, adaptive and shaped by forces (such as hormonal transitions throughout the lifespan) that medicine is only beginning to acknowledge. Recognising both the risks women face and the resilience they carry is the first step toward more equitable, effective brain care.The Conversation

Eleftheria Kodosaki, Research Fellow in Neuroimmunology, UCL and Amanda Heslegrave, Principal Research Fellow, Neurodegenerative Diseases, UCL

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

SpaceX rocket left behind a plume of chemical pollution as it burnt up in the atmosphere

A 30-second exposure taken from Collm, Saxony, showing a Falcon 9 upper stage re-entering the atmosphere above Berlin, Germany, on 19 February 2025. Gerd Baumgarten
Robyn SchofieldThe University of Melbourne and Robert George RyanThe University of Melbourne

Space junk returning to the Earth is introducing metal pollution to the pristine upper atmosphere as it burns up on re-entry, a new study has found.

Published today in the journal Communications Earth & Environment, the study was led by Robin Wing from the Leibniz Institute of Atmospheric Physics in Germany. Using highly sensitive lasers, he and his team of international researchers observed a plume of lithium pollution, tracking it back to the uncontrolled re-entry of a discarded Space X Falcon 9 rocket upper stage.

This is the first observational evidence that re-entering space debris leaves a detectable, human-caused chemical fingerprint in the upper atmosphere. This was also the first time a pollutant plume from a specific space junk re-entry event has been monitored from the ground.

With many more satellite launches planned for the future, this event won’t be the last. It highlights the urgent need for governments and the space industry to tackle this problem before it gets out of hand.

Three green laser beams, with the Milky Way in the background.
Researchers used highly sensitive lasers at the Leibniz Institute of Atmospheric Physics to detect pollution caused by space debris. Eframir Franco-Diaz

A part of the atmosphere we barely understand

The region that comprises the upper stratosphere, mesosphere, and lower thermosphere (around 80 to 120 kilometres above Earth) is one of the least studied parts of the Earth system. It’s too high for balloons, too low for satellites, and too harsh for aircraft.

Yet this region is crucial for radio and GPS communications, upper atmospheric weather patterns, and stratospheric ozone.

The upper atmosphere is largely unpolluted by humans. But the new space age is injecting growing quantities of metals and other pollutants from satellites, rocket bodies and space debris.

The impact this will have on the stratospheric ozone layer, which is crucial to protecting life on Earth from harmful ultraviolet radiation, is as yet unquantified. But early findings are cause for concern.

For example, research from 2024 suggests aluminium and chlorine emissions related to rocket launches and re-entries may slow the ozone layer’s recovery.

Soot from rocket launches is also likely to cause warming in the upper atmosphere.

Finding lithium with lasers

For the new study, the researchers used a highly sensitive laser-based sensor to detect the fluorescence of trace metals in the mesosphere and lower thermosphere. This is not an off-the-shelf and readily available observation system, but it could be.

On February 20 2025, they captured a clear, sudden enhancement in lithium ions from lithium batteries and human-made metal casings used in satellites. These are quite distinct from natural meteor material.

Using atmospheric trajectory modelling, they traced the timing and altitude of the lithium plume directly to the re-entry path of a discarded Falcon 9 rocket stage as it burnt up through the lower thermosphere into the mesosphere over the Atlantic Ocean, west of Ireland.

Blue and green lasers shining out of the roof of a large building.
Lasers in operation at the Leibniz Institute of Atmospheric Physics. Danny Gohlke

A rapidly escalating problem

The number of satellites in orbit has exploded from a few thousand a couple years ago to roughly 14,000 right now, driven largely by megaconstellations.

There are many more satellites planned. In fact, SpaceX has applied to launch a megaconstellation of up to one million satellites to power data centres in space. Every one of these satellites will eventually re-enter the atmosphere. So too will the rockets that launch them.

Current estimates suggest that by 2030, several tonnes of spacecraft material will burn up in the upper atmosphere every single day.

So far, there is no regulatory framework for these emissions, few monitoring options and limited scientific understanding of the likely impacts.

The new lithium detection demonstrates that pollutants from re-entry are measurable and can be traced back to individual re-entry events. This is an important step when it comes to holding companies involved in space accountable.

International regulatory bodies need to be set up to liaise with governments and scientists to establish monitoring networks and instruments to track changes to our atmosphere from this emerging threat.

As the space industry skyrockets, our efforts to understand, monitor and regulate upper-atmospheric emissions must keep pace.The Conversation

Robyn Schofield, Professor and Associate Dean (Environment and Sustainability in Faculty of Science), The University of Melbourne and Robert George Ryan, Research Fellow in Atmospheric Composition, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

MWP Care Seeking Volunteers

Our business relies on the kindness of strangers...
Looking for a way to give back without giving up your lifestyle?

Become part of our Volunteer IMPACT Club and gain access to exercise classes, social events, Silver Surfers, tables at trivia as well as training and development workshops! Plus – have your petrol re-imbursed!!

Volunteering with MWP fits around your life and your schedule, letting you make a real impact in your local community. Enjoy meeting like-minded people, learning new skills, and knowing that your time is changing lives every day.
Your Time. Your Way. Your Impact. 

Find out more here: mwpcare.com.au/get-involved

‘Not met their duty of care’: new report finds racism is widespread at Australian unis

Fethi MansouriDeakin University

Racism is a “widespread” and “systemic” problem in Australian universities, a major new report has found. According to the Australian Human Rights Commission, about 80% of surveyed Indigenous, Chinese, African, Jewish and Middle Eastern students and staff say they have experienced racism at university.

Race Discrimination Commissioner Giridharan Sivaraman described the findings in the Racism@Uni report as sometimes “harrowing reading”. He added it shows “universities have not met their duty of care”.

What is happening on Australian campuses? And what can be done to fix it?

What did the report find?

This report was commissioned in response to a recommendation from the 2023 Australian Universities Accord final report. It follows an interim report in December 2024 which also found serious problems with racism.

This final report is based on a survey of more than 76,000 students and staff at 42 Australian universities. The survey asked about experiences of racism over the past two years at university. There was also a focus groups with 310 participants. It found:

  • almost 15% of all respondents reported experiencing direct interpersonal racism at university

  • almost 70% reported experiencing indirect racism at university, such as hearing or seeing racist behaviour not aimed at them personally, but directed towards the racial, ethnic, cultural or religious group with which they identify

  • almost 20% of those who did not report experiencing direct or indirect racism at university said they had witnessed racism directed at others at university.

Racism was reported at all universities at similar rates, indicating this is a systemic issue. Students said the racism happened in lectures, tutorials, via marking and elsewhere on campus. Staff said it also happened in meetings and performance reviews. It included being singled out or excluded, racist jokes and comments.

What is the impact?

Some respondents reported their experiences of racism led to them them limiting their participation at university and had negative impacts on their mental health and studies.

Jewish, Israeli, Palestinian, Muslim and Middle Eastern staff and students told researchers they experienced unprecedented levels of racism during the Israel-Hamas war. As a Middle Eastern staff participant shared:

I’ve never seen it worse than this. In terms of suppressing or the fear around expressing views in university if you’re from the Middle East.

A Jewish student similarly shared how things were worse than ever:

I’d encountered antisemitism before, but I had never been scared to be Jewish. In uni, I frequently feel the need to hide my religion.

What are the recommendations?

The report’s 47 recommendations include:

  • a national framework to address racism in universities

  • better training and complaints processes to ensure universities are free from racism

  • more public oversight of racism incidents and anti-racism measures at universities

  • curriculum reform, to embed First Peoples’ knowledges, scholarship and texts across all disciplines

  • targets and accountability measures to improve workforce diversity in unis.

This problem is not new

Events overseas and domestically, such as the devastating war in Gaza and Bondi terrorist attack, have provided the context for much of the recent discussion on the rise of racism. But racism on campuses is by no means exclusively linked to such recent events.

Over the last few decades, many studies and social surveys have reported persistent discrimination against certain racial groups. This includes exclusion from leadership and workforce representation.

This new report rightly acknowledges racism in Australian universities does not just involve interpersonal encounters, but systemic problems. This means power and representation structures need to be changed in higher education.

The report particularly touches on this in its fifth outcome – which seeks to boost diversity in university leadership and workforce.

What do we need to remember?

Of course much will depend now on how government and universities respond to these findings, which are addressed to them both. Federal Education Minister Jason Clare said he would now “consider” the recommendations.

In dealing with racism on university campuses as elsewhere in society, there must be clear guiding principles and laws. These can be applied in relation to all forms of racism, to avoid claims or concerns one form of racism is prioritised over another.

As governance experts argue, trust can be restored in our unis when there is genuine commitment to tackling racism and discrimination in all their forms.

A challenge ahead

Finally, it is absolutely imperative that in the pursuit of a robust anti-racism strategy, universities are also able to to ensure academic freedom and freedom of speech.

This means students and staff are able to express their views on domestic and international affairs without fear of being harassed or prosecuted. As the report notes, “academic freedom must enable robust discussion” while also providing a learning environment free from racism.

This can be difficult in practice. As the report notes,

[universities] face the challenge of creating respectful learning environments while allowing some discomfort in engaging with difficult ideas.

As the report recommends, this can be improved if more students and staff are given anti-racism and cultural competency training.

What do unis do?

In 1987, former education minister John Dawkins observed of universities:

we must ask the institutions themselves what they see as their role in the social, cultural and economic lives of Australians, and ask them to examine how effectively they are discharging their roles.

This question has become even more pressing as our community tackles challenges to social cohesion. This new report raises the stakes even higher. It demands university leadership strikes the right balance between anti-racism and freedom of speech, so legitimacy and trust are both maintained.

Or, as the report notes,

[universities] must be accountable for creating safe environments, free from discrimination, and where academic freedom is balanced with respect.The Conversation

Fethi Mansouri, Deakin Distinguished Professor/UNESCO Chair-holder; Founding Director, Alfred Deakin Institute for Citizenship and Globalisation, Deakin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

A few weeks of X’s algorithm can make you more right-wing – and it doesn’t wear off quickly

Timothy GrahamQueensland University of Technology

A new study published today in Nature has found that X’s algorithm – the hidden system or “recipe” that governs which posts appear in your feed and in which order – shifts users’ political opinions in a more conservative direction.

Led by Germain Gauthier from Bocconi University in Italy, it is a rare, real-world randomised experimental study on a major social media platform. And it builds on a growing body of research that shows how these platforms can shape people’s political attitudes.

Two different algorithms

The researchers randomly assigned 4,965 active US-based X users to one of two groups.

The first group used X’s default “For You” feed. This features an algorithm that selects and ranks posts it thinks users will be more likely to engage with, including posts from accounts that they don’t necessarily follow.

The second group used a chronological feed. This only shows posts from accounts users follow, displayed in the order they were posted. The experiment ran for seven weeks during 2023.

Users who switched from the chronological feed to the “For You” feed were 4.7 percentage points more likely to prioritise policy issues favoured by US Republicans (for example, crime, inflation and immigration). They were also more likely to view the criminal investigation into US President Donald Trump as unacceptable.

They also shifted in a more pro-Russia direction in regards to the war in Ukraine. For example, these users became 7.4 percentage points less likely to view Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy positively, and scored slightly higher on a pro-Russian attitude index overall.

The researchers also examined how the algorithm produced these effects.

They found evidence that the algorithm increased the share of right-leaning content by 2.9 percentage points overall (and 2.5 points among political posts), compared with the chronological feed.

It also significantly demoted the share of posts from traditional news organisations’ accounts while promoting or boosting posts from political activists.

One of the most concerning findings of the study is the longer-term effects of X’s algorithmic feed. The study showed the algorithm nudged users towards following more right-leaning accounts, and that the new following patterns endured even after switching back to the chronological feed.

In other words, turning the algorithm off didn’t simply “reset” what people see. It had a longer-lasting impact beyond its day-to-day effects.

One piece of a much bigger picture

This new study supports findings of similar studies.

For example, a study in 2022, before Elon Musk had bought Twitter and rebranded it as X, found the platform’s algorithmic systems amplified content from the mainstream political right more than the left in six out of the seven countries.

An experimental study from 2025 re-ranked X feeds to reduce exposure to content that expresses antidemocratic attitudes and partisan animosity. They found this shifted feelings towards their political opponents by more than two points on a 0–100 “feeling thermometer”. This is a shift the authors argued would have normally taken about three years to occur organically in the general population.

My own research offers another piece of evidence to this picture of algorithmic bias on X. Along with my colleague Mark Andrejevic, I analysed engagement data (such as likes and reposts) from prominent political accounts during the final stages of the 2024 US election.

Our findings unearthed a sudden and unusual spike in engagement with Musk’s account after his endorsement of Trump on July 13 – the day of the assassination attempt on Trump. Views on Musk’s posts surged by 138%, retweets by 238%, and likes by 186%. This far outstripped increases on other accounts.

After July 13, right-leaning accounts on X gained significantly greater visibility than progressive ones. The “playing field” for attention and engagement on the platform was tilted thereafter towards right-leaning accounts – a trend that continued for the remainder of the time period we analysed in that study.

Not a niche product

This matters because we are not talking about a niche product.

X has more than 400 million users globally. It has become embedded as infrastructure – a key source of political and social communication. And once technical systems become infrastructure, they can become invisible – like background objects that we barely think about, but which shape society at its foundations and can be exploited under our noses.

Think of the overpass bridges Robert Moses designed in New York in the 1930s. These seemed like inert objects. But they were designed to be very low, to exclude people of colour from taking buses to recreation areas in Long Island.

Similar to this, the design and governance of social media platforms also has real consequences.

The point is that X’s algorithms are not neutral tools. They are an editorial force, shaping what people know, whom they pay attention to, who the outgroup is and what “we” should do about or to them – and, as this new study shows, what people come to believe.

The age of taking platform companies at their word about the design and effects of their own algorithms must come to an end. Governments around the world – including in Australia where the eSafety Commissioner has powers to drive “algorithmic transparency and accountability” and require that platforms report on how their algorithms contribute to or reduce harms – need to mandate genuine transparency over how these systems work.

When infrastructure become harmful or unsafe, nobody bats an eye when governments do something to protect us. The same needs to happen urgently for social media infrastructures.The Conversation

Timothy Graham, Associate Professor in Digital Media, Queensland University of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Too many satellites? Earth’s orbit is on track for a catastrophe – but we can stop it

Astronomer’s view of a star obscured by streaks from Starlink satellites. Rafael Schmall/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY
Gregory RadisicBond University and Samantha LawlerUniversity of Regina

On January 30 2026, SpaceX filed an application with the US Federal Communications Commission for a megaconstellation of up to one million satellites to power data centres in space.

The proposal envisions satellites operating between 500 and 2,000 kilometres in low Earth orbit. Some of the orbits are designed for near-constant exposure to sunlight. The public can currently submit comments on this proposal.

SpaceX’s filing is just the latest among exponentially growing satellite megaconstellation proposals. Such satellites operate with a single purpose and have short replacement life cycles of about five years.

As of February 2026, approximately 14,000 active satellites are in orbit. An additional 1.23 million proposed satellite projects are in various stages of development.

The approval process for these satellites focuses almost entirely on the limited technical info companies have to submit to regulators.

Cultural, spiritual, and most environmental impacts aren’t taken into account – but they should be.

The night sky will drastically change

At this scale of growth, the night sky will change permanently and globally for generations to come.

Satellites in low Earth orbit reflect sunlight for about two hours after sunset and before sunrise. Despite engineering efforts to make them less bright, truck-sized satellites from many megaconstellations look like moving points in the night sky. Projections show future satellites will significantly increase this light pollution.

In 2021, astronomers estimated that in less than a decade, 1 in every 15 points of light in the night sky would be a moving satellite. That estimate only included the 65,000 megaconstellation satellites proposed at the time.

Once deployed at a scale of millions, the impacts on the night sky may not be easily reversed.

While the average satellite only lasts about five years, companies design these megaconstellations for nearly continuous replacement and expansion. This locks in a continuous, industrialised presence in the night sky.

All this is causing a space-based “shifting baseline syndrome”, where each new generation accepts a progressively more degraded night sky. Criss-crossing satellites become the new normal.

And for the first time in human history, this shifting baseline means kids today won’t grow up with the same night sky every previous generation of humanity had access to.

A comic showing Earth satellites at different points in time.
The ConversationCC BY-SA

Houston, we have a ‘mega’ problem

Concerns over the sheer volume of proposed satellites come from many sides.

Scientific concerns include bright reflections and radio emissions from satellites that will disrupt astronomy.

Industry experts also note traffic management and logistical concerns. There’s currently no form of unified space traffic management in the same way that exists in aviation, for example.

Megaconstellations also increase the risk of Kessler syndrome, a runaway chain reaction of collisions. There are already 50,000 pieces of debris in orbit that are ten centimetres or larger. If satellites stopped all collision avoidance manoeuvres, the latest data shows we can expect a major collision in 3.8 days.

Major cultural concerns abound, too. Satellite light pollution will negatively impact Indigenous uses of the night sky for longstanding oral traditions, navigation, hunting, and spiritual traditions.

Launching so many satellites uses up vast amounts of fossil fuels, damaging the ozone layer. After the satellites have served their purpose, the end-of-life plan is to burn them up in the atmosphere. This poses another environmental concern – depositing vast quantities of metals into the stratosphere, causing ozone depletion and other potentially harmful chemical reactions.

All this feeds into legal concerns. Under international space law, countries – not companies – are liable for harm caused by their space objects.

Space lawyers are increasingly trying to understand if international space law can actually hold corporations or private individuals accountable. This is especially important as the risk of damage, death or permanent environmental damage grows.

We can no longer ignore the gaps in regulation

Currently, the main regulations concerning satellite proposals are technical, such as deciding which radio frequencies they will use. At national levels, regulators focus on launch safety, lessening environmental impacts on Earth, and liability if something goes wrong.

What these regulations don’t capture is how hundreds of thousands of bright satellites change the night sky for scientific study, navigation, Indigenous teaching and ceremony, and cultural continuity.

These are not traditional “environmental” harms, nor are they technical engineering concerns. They’re cultural impacts that fall into a regulatory blind spot.

This is why the world needs a Dark Skies Impact Assessment, as proposed by space lawyers Gregory Radisic and Natalie Gillespie.

It’s a systematic way to identify, document, and meaningfully consider all the impacts of a proposed satellite constellation before it goes ahead.

How would such an assessment work?

First, evidence must be gathered from all stakeholders. Astronomers (both amateur and professional), atmospheric scientists, environmental researchers, cultural scholars, affected communities, and industry all bring their perspectives.

Second, it’s essential to model any cumulative effects of the satellites. Assessments should analyse how constellations will change night sky visibility and skygloworbital congestion, and the risk of casualties on the ground.

Third, it will define clear criteria for when unobstructed sky visibility is critical for science, navigation, education, cultural practice, and shared human heritage.

Fourth, it must include mitigation pathways such as brightness reduction, orbital design changes, and deployment adjustments to lessen harm. This should include incentives for using as few satellites as possible for a given project.

Finally, the findings must be transparent, independently reviewable, and directly tied to licensing and policy decisions.

It’s not a veto tool

A Dark Skies Impact Assessment doesn’t prevent space development. It clarifies trade-offs and improves decision making.

It can lead to design choices that reduce brightness and visual interference, orbital configurations that lessen cultural impact, earlier and more meaningful consultation, and cultural considerations where harm can’t be avoided.

Most importantly, it ensures that communities affected by satellite constellations aren’t finding out about them after approval has already been granted and bright lights crawl across their skies.

The question is not whether the night sky will change – it’s already changing. Now is the time for governments and international institutions to design fair processes before those changes become permanent.The Conversation

Gregory Radisic, Fellow at the Centre for Space, Cyberspace and Data Law; Senior Teaching Fellow, Faculty of Law, Bond University and Samantha Lawler, Associate Professor, Astronomy, University of Regina

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Australia plans to sell off defence land to developers – but could it deliver homes instead?

The St Kilda training depot in Melbourne, one of the Defence Department sites earmarked for sale. Defence Department
Katherine SundermannMonash University

The federal government plans to sell A$3 billion of Department of Defence properties on prime land across Australia, including Paddington in Sydney, St Kilda in Melbourne and Victoria Barracks in Brisbane.

The sales may help the budget in the short term, but at the time of a housing crisis, is this using public land in the best way?

Instead of selling these sites outright, the federal government could take a lead in redeveloping the land to deliver more affordable homes and long-term value for our cities.

It wouldn’t be the first time government has played this role. There are lessons to be learned from a 1990s urban redevelopment programme called Building Better Cities, which redeveloped Ultimo and Pyrmont in Sydney among other sites.

A quick fix, or a lost opportunity?

Australia’s housing crisis is one of the most urgent challenges facing federal and state governments. At the same time, the federal government plans to sell more than 60 publicly owned defence sites across the country.

Selling land can bring a quick boost to revenue. But public land is a limited resource, so we need to make sure we are getting public value from it. Once it is sold, governments lose control of how it is used in the future.

Many of the sites listed for private sale are located in capital cities, often close to jobs, public transport and services.

They range from the small, such as two office buildings on Grattan Street, Carlton, to the large, such as the 127-hectare Defence site in Maribyrnong, in Melbourne’s inner west. Locations like this are where homes are most needed. But redevelopment is not always easy, as the sites may have contaminated land or heritage buildings.

Selling these sites to private developers with limited conditions may maximise short-term revenue for defence purposes. Housing will likely be delivered.

But rather than selling land unrestricted to the private market, the government has other options to deliver better outcomes for current and future generations.

Government as master developer

One option is the federal government could transfer ownership of the sites to state governments, as long as they follow an agreed process. Government development agencies, such as Renewal SA or Hunter and Central Coast Development Corporation, would act as master developer.

These agencies work with the community to establish a vision for the future of each site. This could include social and affordable housing, employment and community uses and open space.

Then the federal and state governments would fund upfront any land remediation, public transport, streets and open spaces. This sets up what is required to make a liveable neighbourhood, and de-risks the process for private developers. Then smaller sites are sold to private developers or community housing providers at a higher value, with the government retaining that profit.

With government as custodians of the redevelopment process, high quality neighbourhoods are delivered, with more affordable housing. A project such as Bowden in Adelaide, led by Renewal SA, is a great example.

Back to the 1990s

If this level of government vision and coordination seems a stretch, it’s worth considering we have done it before. The Building Better Cities program of the 1990s invested federal and state money into 26 places around Australia, including Ultimo-Pyrmont in Sydney, Subiaco in Perth and Kensington Banks in Melbourne.

The program focused on improving the urban development process and the quality of urban life. It included the redevelopment of land no longer required by state and federal governments.

Not only did the program create high-quality places to live, it also improved Australia’s economic growth over the following decades. The $268 million investment in the transformation of industrial wasteland at Honeysuckle in Newcastle encouraged $768 million in private investment and led to over $2 billion in direct and indirect economic benefit by 2012.

Long-term leases

There are other ways for government to guide the transformation of these smaller sites in the defence portfolio. One option is to set up a long-term ground lease, to enable the delivery of homes but retain the land for future generations.

The Victorian government has shown the potential of this approach with its ground lease model, with the first neighbourhoods completed in 2024 on public housing land in Brighton, Flemington and Prahran.

Through a development agreement, private developers build affordable, social and private housing on public land. The land and buildings return to government after a 40-year period.

Alternatively, the federal government could set minimum affordable housing or sustainability requirements with the sale of sites, to support better outcomes.

Finance Minister Katy Gallagher has mentioned that sales will consider remediation, heritage and community impacts. But the focus is on achieving “market value” for the land, rather than any broader ambition.

What happens next?

Now that the defence land has been declared surplus to needs, it will go to the Department of Finance’s Property Clearing House.

This process allows other government departments to buy a site before it is sold on the open market.

Let’s hope the government sees the bigger social and economic benefits in leading the strategic transformation of these sites, rather than a short-term cash fix.The Conversation

Katherine Sundermann, Senior Lecturer in Urban Planning and Design, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

And see PON report running this Issue: Sale of Bulk of HMAS Penguin Site Approved - Pristine Angophora Forest Likely to be Destroyed, Wildlife Killed, Another People's Parkland stolen: Pittwater Annexe will be retained

A worker was sacked over his side hustle. Here are 5 tips for employees with second gigs

Olia Danilevich/Pexels
Kerry BrownEdith Cowan University

recent case before the Fair Work Commission has revealed the limits of being able to work a second job when you are employed full time.

An employee was sacked for holding a second job, which he says he had fully disclosed to his employer. The worker took his case to the Fair Work Commission, claiming he was unfairly dismissed by his employer.

Dismissal is the termination for a breach of conditions of employment. An employee may go to the Fair Work Commission and make a claim of “unfair dismissal”. The commission then considers the legal aspects of the situation and makes a decision or ruling on the merits of the case.

The Fair Work Commission ruled the dismissal was not unfair, citing two key points:

  • the employee was running a side business in an area similar to their main job
  • running their own business caused the employee to spend his normal work time on his second job.

When is it OK to run a side hustle?

Some employers do not allow employees to hold a second job or run a side business, and include this requirement in the letter of offer for a new job.

Others specify an employee must ask permission to hold a second job. The employer can then decide if the other job may affect the worker’s safety and wellbeing. This includes being too tired to do your main job, or if it creates competition with their business.

Second jobs can take various forms ranging from formal to informal jobs.

A side job is a formal type of employment and usually has regulated times for work and required tasks. These can be jobs such as working in restaurants and bars or teaching classes in the evening after normal daytime working hours.

side hustle is an informal activity from which you earn money and is undertaken alongside your full-time job.

This might be in the gig economy or an online business.

Side hustles are entrepreneurial and flexible and can be as simple as turning a hobby or interest into a paid gig, such as selling refurbished furniture, playing in a band, dog walking or teaching yoga in your spare time.

Practical tips to avoid crossing the line

1) Read your letter of offer when you started your job. If it contains a statement prohibiting you from taking on a side hustle, you cannot undertake a second job.

If your letter of offer states you need to ask permission to take on a side hustle, let your employer know.

2) Make sure your side hustle doesn’t operate in competition to your main job.

3) As an employee, your loyalty to your employer matters. Taking on a side hustle may take your attention and support away from the main business that is paying you.

4) Your side job can’t spill over into your main job. There is a reasonable expectation you will totally focus on your full-time job during your agreed working hours.

5) It is not just your employer’s time that can’t be used: you should not use any of your employer’s resources to carry out your side hustle, either.

How many hours do people work in their second job?

While it’s hard to separate out data just on side hustles, the Australian Bureau of Statistics reports almost 1 million people hold more than one job. That’s out of a workforce of 10 million full-time workers.

The bureau says employees with multiple jobs worked about eight hours each week in their second job, and they worked slightly fewer hours than single job holders, putting in around 30.5 hours a week in their main job.

These figures may be the tip of the iceberg, because multiple job holders include people with second jobs, as well as side hustle workers.

Motivations for the side hustle or side job

An increase in the number of people holding multiple jobs over the past five years has mirrored the increase in cost of living, especially driven by higher housing prices.

The rise of the side hustle has also been attributed to the greater use of digital platforms, such as ride share, food delivery and holiday homes, and the consequent highly flexible work options created by the gig economy.

While financial issues loom large in why people have second jobs, other reasons include:

Some employers allow their employees to take on side gigs so they don’t lose them, and to give them increased motivation for their main jobs.

So if your passion project, great idea or hobby can be converted to a paid side hustle – and you can do it in your own time around your main job without creating competition with your employer – there should be a clear path for you to try something different.The Conversation

Kerry Brown, Professor of Employment and Industry, School of Business and Law, Edith Cowan University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

EU-US: Is social media addictive? How it keeps you clicking and the harms it can cause

Quynh HoangUniversity of Leicester

For years, big tech companies have placed the burden of managing screen time squarely on individuals and parents, operating on the assumption that capturing human attention is fair game.

But the social media sands may slowly be shifting. A test-case jury trial in Los Angeles is accusing big tech companies of creating “addiction machines”. While TikTok and Snapchat have already settled with the 20-year-old plaintiff, Meta’s CEO, Mark Zuckerberg, is due to give evidence in the courtroom this week.

The European Commission recently issued a preliminary ruling against TikTok, stating that the app’s design – with features such as infinite scroll and autoplay – breaches the EU Digital Services Act. One industry expert told the BBC that the problem is “no longer just about toxic content, it’s about toxic design”.

Meta and other defendants have historically argued that their platforms are communication tools, not traps, and that “addiction” is a mischaracterisation of high engagement.

“I think it’s important to differentiate between clinical addiction and problematic use,” Instagram chief Adam Mosseri testified in the LA court. He noted that the field of psychology does not classify social media addiction as an official diagnosis.

Tech giants maintain that users and parents have the agency and tools to manage screen time. However, a growing body of academic research suggests features like infinite scrolling, autoplay and push notifications are engineered to override human self-control.

Video: CBS News.

A state of ‘automated attachment’

My research with colleagues on digital consumption behaviour also challenges the idea that excessive social media use is a failure of personal willpower. Through interviews with 32 self-identified excessive users and an analysis of online discussions dedicated to heavy digital use, we found that consumers frequently enter a state of “automated attachment”.

This is when connection to the device becomes purely reflexive, as conscious decision-making is effectively suspended by the platform’s design.

We found that the impulse to use these platforms sometimes occurs before the user is even fully conscious. One participant admitted: “I’m waking up, I’m not even totally conscious, and I’m already doing things on the device.”

Another described this loss of agency vividly: “I found myself mindlessly opening the [TikTok] app every time I felt even the tiniest bit bored … My thumb was reaching to its old spot on reflex, without a conscious thought.”

Social media proponents argue that “screen addiction” isn’t the same as substance abuse. However, new neurophysiological evidence suggests that frequent engagement with these algorithms alters dopamine pathways, fostering a dependency that is “analogous to substance addiction”.

Strategies that keep users engaged

The argument that users should simply exercise willpower also needs to be understood in the context of the sophisticated strategies platforms employ to keep users engaged. These include:

1. Removing stopping cues

Features like infinite scroll, autoplay and push notifications create a continuous flow of content. By eliminating natural end-points, the design effectively shifts users into autopilot mode, making stopping a viewing session more difficult.

2. Variable rewards

Similar to a slot machine, algorithms deliver intermittent, unpredictable rewards such as likes and personalised videos. This unpredictability triggers the dopamine system, creating a compulsive cycle of seeking and anticipation.

3. Social pressure

Features such as notifications and time-limited story posts have been found to exploit psychological vulnerabilities, inducing anxiety that for many users can only be relieved by checking the app. Strategies employing “emotional steering” can take advantage of psychological vulnerabilities, such as people’s fear of missing out, to instil a sense of social obligation and guilt if they attempt to disconnect.

Vulnerability in children

The issue of social media addiction is of particular concern when it comes to children, whose impulse control mechanisms are still developing. The US trial’s plaintiff says she began using social media at the age of six, and that her early exposure to these platforms led to a spiral into addiction.

growing body of research suggests that “variable reward schedules” are especially potent for developing minds, which exhibit a heightened sensitivity to rewards. Children lack the cognitive brakes to resist these dopamine loops because their emotional regulation and impulsivity controls are still developing.

Lawyers in the US trial have pointed to internal documents, known as “Project Myst”, which allegedly show that Meta knew parental controls were ineffective against these engagement loops. Meta’s attorney, Paul Schmidt, countered that the plaintiff’s struggles stemmed from pre-existing childhood trauma rather than platform design.

The company has long argued that it provides parents with “robust tools at their fingertips”, and that the primary issue is “behavioural” – because many parents fail to use them.

Our study heard from many adults (mainly in their 20s) who described the near-impossibility of controlling levels of use, despite their best efforts. If these adults cannot stop opening apps on reflex, expecting a child to exercise restraint with apps that affect human neurophysiology seems even more unrealistic.

Potential harms of overuse

The consequences of social media overuse can be significant. Our research and recent studies have identified a wide range of potential harms.

These include “psychological entrapment”. Participants in our study described a “feedback loop of doom and despair”. Users can turn to platforms to escape anxiety, only to find that the scrolling deepens their feelings of emptiness and isolation.

Excessive exposure to rapidly changing, highly stimulating content can fracture the user’s attention span, making it harder to focus on complex real-world tasks.

And many users describe feeling “defeated” by the technology. Social media’s erosion of autonomy can leave people unable to align their online actions – such as overlong sessions – with their intentions.

A ruling against social media companies in the LA court case, or enforced redesign of their apps in the EU, could have profound implications for the way these platforms are operated in future.

But while big tech companies have grown at dizzying rates over the past two decades, attempts to rein in their products on both sides of the Atlantic remain slow and painstaking. In this era of “use first, legislate later”, people all over the world, of all ages, are the laboratory mice.The Conversation

Quynh Hoang, Lecturer in Marketing and Consumption, Department of Marketing and Strategy, University of Leicester

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Maitland Rutherford tobacconist shut down for the second time after breaching closure orders

​NSW Health announced on 13 February 2026 it has taken action to close a tobacco retailer in Rutherford for the second time after it was found to be in breach of their 90-day closure order for selling illicit tobacco and vapes.

NSW Health Inspectors were supported by NSW Police to inspect the store following reports the retailer was not complying with the three-month closure order first issued by NSW Health in January this year. 

During the targeted operation, Inspectors seized more than 280,000 illicit cigarettes, almost 38kg of loose leaf tobacco, more than 8200 vaping devices with an estimated street value of more than $570,000 product. 

The enforcement action was taken following a breach of the closure order. 

There is the possibility of significant financial penalties and imprisonment for offences for breaching closure orders. 

A NSW Local Court can issue a long-term closure order of up to one year if it is satisfied that illicit tobacco or illegal vaping goods have been or are likely to be sold, or if tobacco or non-tobacco smoking products are sold or are likely to be sold without a license.

The long-term closure orders are part of the NSW Government’s tough new laws to disrupt the supply of illicit tobacco and vaping goods across the state.

Under the laws, NSW Health also has substantial powers to make short-term closure orders of up to 90 days for premises selling illicit tobacco, illegal vaping goods, or selling tobacco without a license.

NSW Health Inspectors, together with NSW Police, have now closed down a total of 66 premises since the laws came into effect in November 2025

Additional reforms under the new legislation include:
  • ​a new offence for the possession of a commercial quantity of illicit tobacco with a maximum penalty of over $1.5 million and 7 years' imprisonment, or both
  • new penalties for the sale of illicit tobacco with a maximum penalty of over $1.5 million and 7 years' imprisonment, or both
  • new lease termination powers for landlords where a closure order is in place
  • new nation-leading offences for falsely claiming to be licensed, resisting seizure, and attempting to retake seized products.
The NSW Government is aware the sale of illicit tobacco and vaping products continues to evolve, with some retailers attempting to obscure and avoid the enforcement activities of NSW Health Inspectors, by using QR codes and social media communications to facilitate the ongoing sale of illicit tobacco to customers, after a closure order has been issued.  

NSW Police and NSW Health are working together to identify these methods and pivot their enforcement strategies to shut down this activity.  

As part of ongoing efforts to strengthen compliance and enforcement of tobacco and vaping goods laws, the NSW Government recently announced the addition of thirty additional full-time equivalent tobacco Inspectors. The new Inspectors brings the dedicated state-wide team to a total of 78 staff.

Between 1 January 2026 to 31 January 2026, NSW Health Inspectors have conducted 131 inspections, seizing around 560,000 cigarettes and 98kg of other illicit tobacco products and over 6000 illegal vaping goods with a combined estimated street value of around $830,000.​

Members of the public can lodge complaints about retailers they believe are doing the wrong thing via the complaints portal on the NSW Health website.​

More information on closure orders and penalties can be found on the NSW Health website: www.health.nsw.gov.au/tobacco/Pages/tobacco-retailing-laws

Cheaper medicines for people living with cystic fibrosis

Announced: Monday February 16 2026
The Australian Government is delivering more support for Australians with cystic fibrosis (CF) with a new medicine listing on the Pharmaceutical Benefits Scheme (PBS).
 
Vanzacaftor with tezacaftor and with deutivacaftor (Alyftrek®) will be listed for the first time to treat cystic fibrosis in people who have at least one mutation in the CF transmembrane conductance regulator (CFTR) gene which is responsive to treatment.
 
The listing will give more than 2,650 CF patients access to a new treatment which would otherwise cost them around $250,000 a year, will now cost a maximum of $25 per script, or just $7.70 with a concession card.
 
CF is an incurable genetic disease which causes an abnormal amount of thick and sticky mucous in the lungs, digestive and other systems. Over time, this can cause irreversible damage to lungs and other organs.
 
This latest listing builds on better, more affordable access to CF medicines through the PBS since 2022, including making Trikafta® and Orkambi® available through the PBS for younger children and people with rare CFTR mutations.
 
These medicines together with improved treatment and care, have increased the life expectancy for people with CF from 47 to 60 years in the past two decades.
 
In addition to expanding access to life‑changing medicines, the Australian Government is also strengthening Australia’s research capability into the disease.
 
In 2025, the Australian Government delivered and investment of almost $280 million in health and medical research into CF and other chronic and complex conditions.
 
This investment through the National Health and Medical Research Council and Medical Research Future Fund programs underscores the government’s continued commitment to improving health outcomes including for people living with cystic fibrosis.
 
The Hon Mark Butler MP, Minister for Health and Ageing and Minister for Disability and the National Disability Insurance Scheme, stated:
 
“Alyftrek’s PBS listing is great news for hundreds of Australians who live with rare mutations of CF.
 
“It will give them access to a more effective treatment which until now would have cost $250,000 a year – an impossible price for most people.
 
“The government subsidy applied through the PBS will reduce the cost to a maximum of $25 per script.
 
“As a result, these people will be able to lead longer and better-quality lives.”
 
Dr Jo Armstrong, CEO Cystic Fibrosis Australia stated:
 
“This is a landmark moment for our community and a powerful demonstration of what can be achieved when we advocate together as a strong, united national peak body. It shows that when our collective voice is heard, real progress follows.
 
“This is more than a listing. It sets a new horizon for innovative cystic fibrosis therapies being made available to Australians, in record time, strengthening treatment options and accelerating access for people who need them most.
 
“For people and families living with cystic fibrosis, this announcement brings relief, reassurance and hope. Affordable access through the PBS reduces financial pressure, supports better long-term health, and represents a significant step forward for equity in our healthcare system, regardless of postcode or income.”

Cheaper medicines for chronic kidney disease and psoriasis

Announced: Monday February 16, 2026
Australians with chronic kidney disease and psoriasis will now have access to cheaper medicines for each condition, on the Pharmaceutical Benefits Scheme (PBS).

Dapagliflozin (Forxiga®) will be expanded on the PBS to include a larger number of Australians living with chronic kidney disease.

Chronic kidney disease is a serious condition where the kidneys lose their ability to filter waste, which can lead to complications like heart disease and kidney failure.

This expansion provides more Australians living with chronic kidney disease access to this important treatment, helping reduce strain on the kidneys and slow disease progression.

Around 65,000 Australians are expected to benefit from this listing each year.

Without the PBS subsidy, patients could pay more than $670 per script.

Calcipotriol and betamethasone dipropionate (Wynzora®) will be listed for the first time for the treatment of chronic stable plaque-type psoriasis vulgaris.

Plaque psoriasis is a long-term skin condition that causes raised, red, scaly patches that can be itchy and uncomfortable, often affecting daily life and confidence.

Wynzora® helps slow the overgrowth of skin cells while betamethasone reduces inflammation and irritation. Together, they can help clear plaques, relieve symptoms and improve quality of life for people living with psoriasis.

In 2024, over 141,000 patients accessed a comparable treatment through the PBS.

Without subsidy patients might pay $65 per script.

PBS listing means eligible patients will pay a maximum of $25 per script, or just $7.70 with a concession card.

Since July 2022, the Australian Government has approved extra funding for 399 new and amended listings on the PBS.
The Hon Mark Butler MP, Minister for Health and Ageing and Minister for Disability and the National Disability Insurance Scheme, stated:
“The medicines we’re listing are life changing for people with distressing and even deadly conditions.

“The Albanese Government is committed to ensuring Australians can access the medicines they need at an affordable price.

“Without the PBS, Australian patients would pay thousands of dollars instead of the newly reduced maximum of $25 per script, or just $7.70 for those who hold a concession card.”

Weight-loss drug ‘support supplements’: do they address nutrient deficiencies, or are they just another fad?

Inside Creative House/Shutterstock
Jordan BeaumontSheffield Hallam University

Weight-loss injections have rapidly moved from specialist clinics to social media feeds and high-street pharmacies. Known as GLP-1 medications, they were originally developed to support those with type 2 diabetes but are now widely used to support weight loss.

These medicines mimic a hormone called glucagon-like peptide-1, which helps regulate appetite and blood sugar. By slowing digestion and increasing feelings of fullness, they often lead people to eat less and lose weight.

Evidence suggests they can support weight loss, at least in the short term. But as use has grown, so have questions about possible unintended effects on nutrition and overall health.

recent review of evidence suggests that some people taking GLP-1 medications may not be getting enough key nutrients. These include vitamins A, C, D, E and K, dietary fibre and minerals such as iron, calcium, magnesium, zinc and copper.

Nutritional deficiencies occur when the body does not receive enough of a nutrient to function properly. Estimates of how common these deficiencies are in those using GLP-1 medications vary widely. Some research suggests that more than 20% of people may be at risk within the first year of starting GLP-1 medications, while other studies indicate the impact may be much smaller, affecting less than 1% of users.

As concern about potential deficiencies has grown, so has a new market. Supplement companies are launching “GLP-1 support” products that claim to offset side-effects such as muscle loss and vitamin deficiencies by providing the “right” nutrients for people using these medications.

But do people taking GLP-1 medications actually need these supplements?

The use of vitamin and mineral supplements has long been debated in nutrition science. Evidence supporting their benefits in generally healthy people who already eat a balanced diet is limited. Supplements can be helpful for people who are deficient in a specific nutrient.

For example, many people in the UK are at risk of vitamin D deficiency during the winter months because there is less sunlight, which the body needs to produce vitamin D. However, if someone already gets enough of a nutrient from their diet, taking extra supplements usually has little or no additional benefit.

A tablet with the inscription Vitamin D in the centre of an illustration of the sun
Due to reduced sunlight, it is difficult for the body to produce sufficient vitamin D between October and March in the UK, making supplementation a recommended way to maintain bone, muscle and immune health. Fida Olga/Shutterstock

Much of the research linking GLP-1 medications to nutrient deficiencies is observational. These studies studies look for patterns and associations in data but cannot prove cause and effect. In other words, they can show that two things occur together but cannot confirm that one causes the other. This means we cannot yet say for certain that GLP-1 medications directly cause nutrient deficiencies.

Even so, the concern is reasonable. GLP-1 medications often lead to reduced food intake. Eating less food can also mean consuming fewer essential nutrients, which increases the risk of deficiencies over time.

So can these potential deficiencies be addressed without expensive specialist supplements? Often, yes. Small dietary changes may be enough. Eating a range of nutrient-dense whole foods, including fruit and vegetables, whole grains, nuts and seeds, dairy or fortified alternatives, and lean or plant-based proteins, can help maintain adequate nutrient intake.

If supplements are needed, standard vitamin and mineral products available on the high street are often sufficient. There is rarely any need to pay premium prices for products marketed specifically for GLP-1 users. The evidence used in marketing for these products is often weak.

Selective science

While there is some evidence to support the use of certain supplements in specific situations or for certain groups, many GLP-1 support supplements contain ingredients that are not clearly linked to the needs of people taking these medications. These products are often described as “science-backed” or “evidence-based,” but the research behind these claims is frequently selective. Much of it has not been carried out in people using GLP-1 medications at all.

For instance, many GLP-1 support supplements include biotin, a vitamin often promoted for improving hair and skin health. However, the evidence supporting this claim is weak. There is also no strong research showing that biotin offers specific benefits for people taking GLP-1 medications. Most people already get enough biotin from their everyday diet. This means there is no clear evidence that adding more through supplements will help.

Amber bottle of biotin vitamin B7 dietary supplement capsules with 10,000 mcg dosage on wooden table, health and wellness product in natural outdoor setting, blurred family background and sunlight
While biotin (vitamin B7) is heavily marketed for improving hair, skin and nail health, scientific evidence supporting its efficacy in healthy people is limited and inconclusive. Gabriele Paoletti/Shutterstock

Nutritional and lifestyle support for people using GLP-1 medications should be tailored to personal needs and goals. This approach is often described as personalised care. It recognises that people differ in their diets, health status and risk of deficiency. Guidance suggests that support should be personalised to meet individual needs to meet specific needs, ideally with advice from a qualified healthcare professional such as a registered dietitian or nutritionist. This is particularly important for anyone at higher risk of nutrient deficiency.

Where deficiencies are identified or likely, support may include small dietary changes or the use of standard supplements. However, this does not justify the routine use of expensive GLP-1 support supplements. These products are unlikely to offer benefits beyond those provided by basic, affordable supplements. A higher price does not guarantee higher quality or effectiveness.

The key message is simple. Supplements are most useful when someone has a confirmed deficiency or cannot meet their nutritional needs through diet alone. Taking supplements without a clear need is unlikely to provide any benefit and may simply be a waste of money.The Conversation

Jordan Beaumont, Senior Lecturer in Food and Nutrition, Sheffield Hallam University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Four foods that can help improve your cholesterol and boost heart health

Diet can play a key role in preventing heart disease. Marian Weyo/ Shutterstock
Ioannis ZabetakisUniversity of Limerick

Cholesterol has long been seen as a key culprit in cardiovascular disease. While it’s true that cholesterol does play a role, not all cholesterol is bad for us.

There are two main types of cholesterol.

The first type is low-density lipoprotein or LDL cholesterol. This is often referred to as the “bad” cholesterol because it causes fat to collect in the arteries as plaques. This makes it harder for blood to pump throughout the body, leading to greater risk of a heart attack or stroke.

The second type is high-density lipoprotein (HDL) cholesterol — often referred to as “good” cholesterol.

HDL cholesterol has two key roles in the body. It removes excess bad cholesterol from the tissues and arteries and returns it to the liver so it can be removed from the body. HDL cholesterol also protects the artery walls so there’s less risk of a blockage forming.

Boosting HDL

The ratio of LDL to HDL in a person’s body is related to their cardiovascular disease risk. If you have a higher ratio of HDL to LDL, your cardiovascular disease risk will be lower. But if you have a lower ratio of HDL to LDL, you’ll have a higher risk of cardiovascular disease.

Fortunately, it’s possible to shift this ratio and increase HDL cholesterol levels. This can be achieved by exercising, quitting smoking and managing your weight, for example.

Certain foods can also improve HDL ratios.

The main way that diet helps boost HDL ratios is by reducing inflammation. Inflammation is a key problem in cardiovascular disease.

Inflammation makes it possible for blood platelets to stick together in our arteries at a much higher rate. This makes it difficult for the HDL cholesterol to do its job, which increases risk of blood clots forming and raises likelihood of heart disease.

A digital drawing depicting cholesterol plaques on the artery wall, blocking blood flow.
HDL helps prevent bad cholesterol from building up. NPW-STUDIO/ Shutterstock

By eating anti-inflammatory foods, it makes it easier for HDL cholesterol to do its job of sweeping away excess LDL cholesterol. Here are four examples you can include in your diet:

1. Fruits and vegetables

Research shows that people who have diets high in fruits and vegetables have higher HDL cholesterol levels and a better total cholesterol ratio. They also have lower blood pressure and healthier blood sugar levels, all of which can be supportive to heart health.

Fruits and vegetables exert their positive effects by trapping free radicals.

Free radicals are highly reactive, unstable molecules that can cause damage to cells and trigger inflammation in the body. By preventing inflammation, this makes it possible for HDL cholesterol to continue doing its job of removing bad cholesterol and protecting the arteries.

2. Oily fish and olive oil

Oily fish (such as salmon, sardines and tuna) and olive oil are rich in a type of fat called “polar lipids”.

These lipids are able to reach the bloodstream more quickly compared to other types of fat, allowing them to reduce inflammation and prevent the aggregation of platelets more effectively.

Cell and animal studies have shown that a diet rich in the polar lipids from oily fish is effective in preventing blood clots from forming. This effect can help cholesterol ratios stay balanced, meaning cardiovascular disease risk is lower.

3. Fermented dairy

Fermented dairy products, such as yoghurt, kefir and cheese, can all have a positive effect on HDL levels.

During fermentation, the lipids are broken down into smaller compounds that have a greater anti-inflammatory effect than milk. They can also be metabolised faster by the body.

Fermented dairy products are also rich in polar lipids, which means that they can considerably reduce cardiovascular risk.

Research found that for every 20g of fermented dairy products people consumed each day, there was a modest reduction in cardiovascular disease risk.

4. Red wine

Finally, red wine is completely misunderstood. According to the latest research, moderate consumption of red wine (the equivalent of one to two small glasses per day) is linked with better HDL ratios.

Wine reduces inflammation when consumed in small quantities because it contains polar lipids. However, if wine intake is high, the negative, pro-inflammatory effect of alcohol outstrips the positive effect of the lipids.

This is why it’s important only to drink small amounts and in moderation – otherwise, alcohol can have many negative effects on the body. Indeed, the World Health Organization has said there is no safe level of alcohol consumption as the negatives, such as increased cancer risk even from light drinking, outweigh any positives.

Non-alcoholic wines also contain polar lipids. Research suggests that polar lipid extracts from non-alcoholic beverages have comparable benefits on preventing the formation of blood clots as their alcoholic counterparts.

Inflammation is a key factor in heart disease. By eating foods that reduce inflammation in the body, it’s possible to look after your heart health and lower cardiovascular disease by improving the ratio of HDL to LDL in the body.The Conversation

Ioannis Zabetakis, Associate Professor, Food Chemistry, University of Limerick

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

55,000 extra social housing homes are being built. But a new study shows that boom still falls short

Hal PawsonUNSW Sydney

Thanks to an unprecedented lift in public funding in the 2020s, an extra 55,000 new, good quality homes around Australia will be available to people on the lowest incomes by 2030. That’s almost triple the increase of 20,000 homes in the previous decade.

Residents in these modern “social” homes will generally pay only 25% of their income in rent. Social housing refers to government-subsidised homes, with below market rents.

You’d think federal and state politicians would be shouting about an extra 55,000 social homes by 2030 from those new rooftops.

But, surprisingly, there are no official projections on how many more total dwellings we’ll have in coming years, thanks to recently boosted investment.

For the first time, our new research fills this gap. It shows that even with the recent investment boom, we’re still not building enough to cut the backlog of need – leaving hundreds of thousands of Australians without an adequate, affordable home.

What’s being built vs demolished

Up until now, we’ve known how many social homes Australia has at the end of each year. Remarkably, though, there is still no national data series tracking social housing in greater detail: showing the balance between annual construction, acquisitions and losses.

Filling this gap, our new research reveals around 70,000 new “social” homes are due to built across Australia during the 2020s – a number not seen since the 1980s.

However, many new social housing projects involve replacing ageing public housing. So, along the way, 15,000 older homes will also be lost, mainly when large public housing estates in Sydney and Melbourne are demolished.

After allowing for these demolitions and sales, we found Australia’s total stock of social housing will increase by a total of 55,000 by 2030. That’s up 13% compared to what we had in 2020.

Who’s building the most?

A substantial share of this new housing comes from the Albanese government’s headline initiative, the Housing Australia Future Fund.

The fund is set to deliver 20,000 new social homes by 2029 (as well as 20,000 more “affordable” units targeted at low-income renters).

Strikingly, though, we found even more social housing will be delivered by state and territory government-funded programs across the decade. They’re projected to contribute about two-thirds (64%) of all social housing construction from 2020 to 2030.

Overall, the standouts have been Tasmania and Victoria. Between 2020 and 2025, they each built enough to increase the overall share of social housing within their states.

Victoria led the way in 2020, announcing its Big Housing Build program to initially construct 12,000 dwellings. More than three-quarters of them are social housing, while the rest are affordable rentals.

Since then, most states have followed suit, although generally on a smaller scale.

In the Australian Capital Territory and New South Wales, new construction barely exceeded stock losses in the first half of the decade. In NSW, substantially ramped-up spending is only now flowing through.

In South Australia, more public housing units were sold or demolished than new social homes added.

Historically, state governments have generally invested in new social housing through the proceeds of land and property sales, or as a matching contribution alongside Commonwealth funds.

So it’s quite a big deal that, since 2020, most states have stepped up to do a lot more.

Why Australia is not keeping up

While we’re building far more than we did from 2000 to 2020, it’s still not enough.

Australia’s 13% increase in social housing this decade matches projected national household growth to 2030. In other words, what we’re building as a nation now is only enough to stop the share of social housing in Australia shrinking further.

Currently the sector accounts for only about 4% of all occupied dwellings in Australia, down from 6% in the mid-1990s.

In contrast, the average across similar wealthy OECD nations is 7%.

437,000 reasons to build more

Social housing plays a vital role in the housing system. It prevents and resolves homelessness. It also minimises harms including re-offending, and helps stabilise the wider housing market.

The projected net increase of 55,000 dwellings by the end of the decade is striking. Yet it pales alongside the estimate that 437,000 households had an “unmet need” for social housing on census night in 2021. That unmet need means they were either homeless at the time, or very low-income renters in rental stress.

The revival of public investment in social housing this decade is a notable policy reversal. But greater action is needed.

Our report finds we need clearer, more consistent rules for social housing providers and residents. These rules have remained neglected for decades.

More importantly, none of the current programs – state, territory or federal – come with committed funding beyond 2030. Australian governments need to extend recent investment into the next decade and beyond at similar, or expanded, levels.

The post-1990s history of social housing in Australia has seen gradual decline, punctuated by occasional bursts of activity, like the Rudd-era response to the global financial crisis of 2008.

For the future, we need assurance that stated government commitments are being met. That means starting to officially, transparently track social housing construction in more detail at a national level.

Thanks to Peter Mares for his input into this story.The Conversation

Hal Pawson, Emeritus Professor of Housing, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Angus Taylor defeats Sussan Ley by hefty margin of 34-17 as Liberal leader

Michelle GrattanUniversity of Canberra

Angus Taylor has defeated Sussan Ley for Liberal leader by a hefty margin of 34-17, giving him strong authority to try to improve the fortunes of the debilitated federal opposition.

The meeting. starting at 9am and lasting under an hour,  first carried a motion to spill the leadership by 33-17, a much higher gap than had been expected. There was one informal vote.

The new deputy leader is Jane Hume, defeating Ted O'Brien - who has been shadow treasurer under Ley - by 30-20 in the final ballot. Eliminated in earlier ballots were Dan Tehan and Melissa Price.

Hume is a moderate and Taylor a conservative, so the new leadership team has gender balance as well as factional balance. Taylor and Hume, who was finance spokeswoman under Dutton, worked closely together during the last term and developed a good relationship.

Hume was left off the frontbench by Ley and became a big critic of her.

Hume reportedly told colleagues she would not seek the post of shadow treasurer, a pitch that improved her support, especially as having the deputy in the Senate had not happened since Fred Chaney in 1989-90.

There is speculation the shadow treasurer post could go to Victorian frontbencher Tim Wilson, who is currently industrial relations spokesman.

Momentum moved strongly to Taylor – who on Wednesday resigned from the frontbench to bring on the challenge – in the 24 hours before the vote. The size of the margin reflects the party’s desire to have a decisive outcome.

Ley, the federal Liberals’ first female leader, has had only nine months in the leadership but has suffered a devastating decline in the opinion polls. She is the second shortest serving Liberal leader, after Alexander Downer in 1994-95.

Ley fought to the end, running against Taylor even though she came under some pressure not to contest if the spill was carried.

Ley walked into the meeting with a group of supporters including Andrew Bragg, Andrew McLachlan, Melissa Price, Tim Wilson, Andrew Wallace, Anne Ruston, Paul Scarr, Richard Colbeck, Melissa McIntosh and Maria Kovacic.

Taylor entered parliament in 2013. He was energy minister in the Morrison government and shadow treasurer in opposition under Peter Dutton. He was shadow defence minister under Ley. He would have preferred to have delayed for a few months his challenge to Ley, but the timetable was effectively brought forward by pressure from Andrew Hastie, who wanted to challenge but found he did not have the numbers.

Labor immediately put out an attack ad against Taylor, saying he had worked from “day one” to undermine the first female Liberal leader.

Ley later announced she would quit parliament, which will mean a byelection in her regional New South Wales seat of Farrer – and early challenge for Taylor.

This story has been updated.The Conversation

Michelle Grattan, Professorial Fellow, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Who is Angus Taylor and could he cut it as opposition leader?

Michelle GrattanUniversity of Canberra

Angus Taylor has all the on-paper qualifications to be opposition leader. But there are big questions over how well he could do the job, when a miracle worker is needed to lift the struggling Liberal Party from its existential crisis.

Taylor’s political story so far is regarded by many observers and not a few colleagues as one of unfulfilled promise.

If he wins the leadership, he would take over with the party at its lowest, considered to have no prospect of victory at the 2028 election. The first realistic chance for Taylor, now 59, of becoming prime minister would be 2031 – a very long time to survive as opposition leader in this poll-driven era.

Taylor is a Rhodes scholar, with strong qualifications in economics, and an impressive business career behind him, which include having been a director at Port Jackson Partners, a business consultancy firm.

Rod Sims, also a Port Jackson director at the time (and later head of the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission) describes Taylor as “extremely intelligent. He was very, very good at what he did, advising boards of some of the largest companies on corporate strategy”.

Few would doubt Taylor, when elected for the NSW regional seat of Hume in 2013, had his eyes on the ultimate prize, a view reinforced by glowing publicity at the time.

Over the years, however, several personal controversies dogged him, ranging from questions over alleged illegal clearing of protected grassland by a company in which his family had a financial interest (he denied any wrongdoing) to the use of a mysterious and misleading document (which he could never explain) to attack Sydney Lord Mayor Clover Moore.

In his maiden speech, condemning political correctness, he made an inaccurate claim about living in the same corridor at Oxford University as feminist writer Naomi Wolf, later to be embarrassed when she said she wasn’t at the university at the time. When in trouble he never seemed able to find his way out of it cleanly.

Taylor’s frontbench experience includes serving as minister for industry, energy and emissions reduction in the Morrison government and as shadow treasurer in Peter Dutton’s opposition.

His time in the latter post wasn’t happy. He struggled against Treasurer Jim Chalmers. According to Niki Savva in her book Earthquake, Dutton thought Taylor a “terrible retail politician who produced policies that could not be sold or explained to the public”.

Taylor wanted the opposition to respond to the government’s 2025 budget tax cuts with an alternative tax policy. But Dutton rejected that, and the opposition went into the election (disastrously) giving the government a big break on the tax issue.

Former Liberal treasurer Peter Costello told The Australian’s Troy Bramston, “At the last election, [the Liberals] got themselves into a position where they were proposing to increase income taxes, run bigger deficits, no real plan to reduce debt”.

Regardless, Taylor as leader would be most comfortable talking about the evils of debt and deficit. But today’s voters no longer care so much about those, and want government to do more, not less.

One economist who has observed Taylor over the years describes him as “very smart and a very good economist”, not a hardline dry but with a market approach of the Howard-Costello era. “He’s in the right party – if it were the party of 20 years ago”. But things have changed.

“I’d be stunned if the times suited Angus Taylor,” this source says. “Would we see the Angus Taylor of his convictions, or Angus Taylor pushed around by the populism of the moment? How would he battle One Nation? That’s hard to do from the viewpoint of market economics.”

In economics Taylor is in the Liberal mainstream, but on climate policy he’s been something of a weather vane.

In his business career he was very alive to the climate change issue and a supporter of renewables. But years later, he was against Malcolm Turnbull’s attempt to bring in a National Energy Guarantee (the NEG), a plan to reduce emissions while ensuring the reliability of the grid. Under Scott Morrison he advocated the net zero by 2050 target. In opposition he was one of those opposing it, walking shoulder to shoulder with Andrew Hastie and other conservatives into the party meeting ahead of the dumping of the Liberal commitment to the target.

Turnbull says pointedly, “Angus’ views on energy were more enlightened when he was working for Rod Sims [at Port Jackson] and supported an economy wide carbon price”.

One of Taylor’s strongest supporters is former MP Craig Laundy, who was a close ally of Turnbull.

Laundy entered parliament at the same time as Taylor, and they’ve kept in touch in recent years. When Laundy had ministerial responsibility for deregulation and Taylor oversaw digital policy. Laundy found him “very good to work with”.

Laundy rejects the perception of some that Taylor has a “born to rule” attitude. “It’s harsh and unfair. He was always a very good communicator and I think [if he is leader] he will surprise many on the upside of how he will connect with the community across the board,” Laundy says.

In his personality Taylor is self-confident but reserved. One source notes a certain vulnerability – a nervousness before a speech, afterwards wondering how it went.

Many disagree with Laundy’s assessment that Taylor communicates well, and even fans see a need for improvement. A former parliamentary colleague says, “Like a lot of really bright guys, Angus can sometimes get into over-analysis of things”.

Certainly if he were opposition leader, how well he could communicate with women would be crucial. His views on quotas mean he would likely start with a handicap in the eyes of many women.

He said last year:“We absolutely need more women in the party at every level, whether it’s members of our branches, whether it’s on our executives, whether indeed it is as members of parliament, and I think there’s a huge job for us, [but] I have never been a supporter of quotas”.

One prominent Liberal woman outside the parliamentary party, who likes Taylor personally, says he is a “caricature of a Liberal male – males who have managed to progressively alienate women from the Liberal party”.

Another muses:“He’s very handsome, well read, tall and a good farmer – but entirely lacking in charisma. How can that be possible?”

As leader Taylor would have to reach out across the party in a way he has never needed to before. “Retail politics” can be as important within a party – especially a fractured one – as with the electorate.

As the most senior member of the conservative faction, Taylor saw himself as the logical opposition leader after the 2025 election. In a serious misjudgement, he encouraged the defection from the Nationals of Jacinta Nampijinpa Price as his potential deputy. Taylor lost to Ley (25-29); Price then did not put up her hand.

He assumed Ley would fail, although he did not want to bring on a challenge this soon. But when the pushy Hastie started to force the issue, Taylor was clear: it was his turn next.The Conversation

Michelle Grattan, Professorial Fellow, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

After ‘code brown’, how long before the pool is safe again? Water quality experts explain

dole777/Unsplash
Ian A. WrightWestern Sydney University and Katherine WarwickWestern Sydney University

There’s little worse as a pool lifeguard than hearing the words “code brown” come through your radio. For swimmers on a hot day, there’s also little worse than being told to immediately get out of the water because there’s poo floating in the pool.

During hot summers, public pools in Australia are often crowded with families and children. The risk of “code brown” incidents at your local pool is probably substantial.

So how is a public pool cleaned after poo or vomit accidentally ends up in the water – and how long before it’s safe to get back in?

The short answer is: it depends. Let’s dive in.

The dangers of poo in the pool

Contaminated swimming pools are hazardous for swimmers. They have been linked to outbreaks of “crypto”, short for cryptosporidiosis. It’s a highly contagious gastric illness and has unpleasant symptoms including diarrhoea, stomach cramps, fever, nausea and vomiting.

New crypto cases are monitored as it’s a notifiable disease in Australia. If multiple cases are traced to a swimming pool, the pool will be closed for extra cleaning and chlorine treatment.

There are other pathogens, such as viruses, that can infect swimmers using pools exposed to poo or vomit incidents. For example, one study in the United States found rapid onset vomiting and diarrhoea (acute gastroenteritis) affect 28% of swimmers who’d used a norovirus-contaminated swimming pool.

Dealing with an ‘aquatic incident’

Responses for a code brown or vomit follow the official health guidelines for public swimming pools under state or territory public health laws.

However, the specific protocol for the staff will also differ depending on the age of the pool, the type of filtration system, chemicals used for disinfecting the water, and … the type of the poo.

Broadly speaking, if a solid stool or vomit is found, the pool is closed and the poo or vomit must be scooped out using a pool scoop or bucket. Then, it should be discarded down the sewer.

When all the particulates have been removed, a pool vacuum is placed in the water for additional cleaning, and the chlorine concentration is raised for an extended period to disinfect the entire pool.

A pool can be reopened once all of the water has been through the pool’s filtration system. This is known as pool “turnover”. How long this takes depends on the age of the pool and its filtration system. Older pools may take eight hours or longer, but newer pools can be as quick as 25 minutes.

Generally, when staff have followed all the proper guidelines, you can assume the water is safe to swim again when the pool is reopened.

Sometimes, you need superchlorination

The protocol changes for loose stool or diarrhoea. The pool is still closed to the public and the particles are scooped out as best as possible.

Then, the chlorine levels are raised and kept at a higher-than-normal level for a bit over a day. This is called shock superchlorination. After this the chlorine levels fall back to safe swimming levels, the other pool chemicals are rebalanced, and the pool reopened.

Chlorine is one of the most common types of disinfectants used in public swimming pools. You might hear lifeguards talk about free chlorine and total chlorine when referring to pool water quality.

Free chlorine is the “active” part of chlorine. Once it makes contact and kills potentially harmful germs (such as bacteria, protozoa or virus), the chlorine is “inactivated” upon reacting with various compounds, and turns into combined chlorine.

In fact, that strong chlorine smell around swimming pools comes from combined chlorine products called chloramines. These are produced when free chlorine reacts with substances such as urine or perspiration in the water.

Lifeguards also monitor pool water quality throughout the day, performing manual checks and keeping an eye on automatic measurements.

On busy days chlorine might be checked every three hours to ensure levels are maintained within specific ranges to maintain optimal pool water quality. This is known as “balancing the water”.

Don’t go to the pool when sick

It’s important to take precautions when visiting a pool to ensure that you and everyone around you stays healthy during and after your visit.

The best way to do this is to not visit the pool if you’re feeling unwell or have had diarrhoea in the past two weeks, or if you have been diagnosed with cryptosporidiosis or infections such as E. coli, shigella or viruses.

Swimming can be fun and exciting for kids who might forget about a bathroom break. Parents should take their babies and toddlers to the toilet every 20–30 minutes to prevent accidents from occurring.

For babies and toddlers, swim nappies are encouraged to prevent accidental code browns. However, the disposable option are usually not effective at containing urine or poo. Reusable swim nappies are a far better option, designed to provide a snug fit.

If you see a poo or vomit at the pool, get out of the water and tell a lifeguard or staff member immediately. Then, follow all directions given by staff members and seek medical attention if you feel unwell in the days following the incident.The Conversation

Ian A. Wright, Associate Professor in Environmental Science, Western Sydney University and Katherine Warwick, PhD Candidate, Western Sydney University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

A new diagnosis of ‘profound autism’ is on the cards. Here’s what could change

Kelsie BoultonUniversity of SydneyMarie Antoinette HodgeUniversity of Sydney, and Rebecca SutherlandUniversity of Sydney

When it comes to autism, few questions spark as much debate as how best to support autistic people with the greatest needs.

This prompted The Lancet medical journal to commission a group of international experts to propose a new category of “profound autism”.

This category describes autistic people who have little or no language (spoken, written, signed or via a communication device), who have an IQ of less than 50, and who require 24-hour supervision and support.

It would only apply to children aged eight and over, when their cognitive and communication abilities are considered more stable.

In our new study, we considered how the category could impact autism assessments. We found 24% of autistic children met, or were at risk of meeting, the criteria for profound autism.

Why the debate?

The category is intended to help governments and service providers plan and deliver supports, so autistic people with the highest needs aren’t overlooked. It also aims to re-balance their under-representation in mainstream autism research.

This new category may be helpful for advocating for a greater level of support, research and evidence for this group.

But some have raised concerns that autistic people who don’t fit into this category could be perceived as less in need and excluded from services and funding supports.

Others argue the category doesn’t sufficiently emphasise autistic people’s strengths and capabilities, and places too much emphasis on the challenges that are experienced.

What did we do?

We conducted the first Australian study to examine how the “profound autism” category might apply to children attending publicly funded diagnostic services for developmental conditions.

Drawing on the Australian Child Neurodevelopment Registry, we examined data from 513 autistic children assessed between 2019 and 2024. We asked:

  • how many children met the criteria for profound autism?
  • were there behavioural features that set this group apart?

Because we focused on children at the time of diagnosis, most (91%) were aged under eight years. We described these children as being “at risk of profound autism”.

What did we find?

Around 24% of autistic children in our study met, or were at risk of meeting, the criteria for profound autism. This is similar to the proportion of children internationally.

Almost half (49.6%) showed behaviours that were a safety risk, such as attempting to run away from carers, compared with one-third (31.2%) of other autistic children.

These challenges weren’t limited to children who met criteria for profound autism. Around one in five autistic children (22.5%) engaged in self-injury, and more than one-third (38.2%) showed aggression toward others.

So, while the category identified many children with very high needs, other children who didn’t meet these criteria also had significant needs.

Importantly, we found the definition of “profound autism” doesn’t always line up with the official diagnostic levels which determine the level of support and NDIS funding children receive.

In our study, 8% of children at risk of profound autism were classified as level 2, rather than level 3 (the highest level of support). Meanwhile, 17% of children classified as level 3 did not meet criteria for profound autism.

Our concern

We looked at children when they first received an autism diagnosis. Children were aged 18 months to 16 years, with more than 90% under the age of eight years.

This aligns with our earlier research, showing the average age of diagnosis in public settings is 6.6 years.

From a practical perspective, our biggest concern about the profound autism category is the age threshold of eight years.

Because most children are already assessed before age eight, introducing this category into assessment services would mean many families would need repeat assessments, placing additional strain on already stretched developmental services.

Second, modifications will be needed if this criteria is going to be used to inform funding decisions as it didn’t map perfectly onto level 3 support criteria.

On balance, however, our results suggest the profound autism category may provide a clear, measurable way to describe the needs of autistic people with the highest support requirements.

Every autistic child has individual strengths and needs. The term “profound autism” would need to be promoted with inclusive and supportive language, so as to not replace or diminish individual needs, but to help clinicians tailor supports and obtain additional resources when needed.

Including the category in future clinical guidelines, such as the national guideline for the assessment and diagnosis of autism, could help ensure governments, disability services and clinicians plan and deliver supports.

What can you do in the meantime?

If you’re concerned your child requires substantial support, here are some practical steps you can take to ensure their needs are recognised and addressed:

Explain your concerns

Not all clinicians have experience working with children with high support needs. Be as clear as possible about behaviours that affect your child’s safety or daily life, including self-injury, aggression or attempts to run away. These details, while difficult to share, help give a clearer picture of your child’s support needs.

It can also be a challenge to find and access clinicians with appropriate expertise. Another potential benefit of having a defined category is that it can better help families navigate care.

Ask about support for the whole family

Our studies show that many caregivers want more support for themselves but don’t always ask. Talk with clinicians about supports for yourself as well, including respite, or family support groups.

Reach out

Coming together with other carers and families can reduce your own isolation and normalise many of the unique challenges you face. Connecting with like-minded people can provide a supportive, empathetic and empowering community.

Plan for safety

For children with high support needs, prioritise safety planning with your child’s care team. This can include strategies to reduce risks, as well as planning how best to support your child’s interactions with health, education and disability services over time.The Conversation

Kelsie Boulton, Senior Research Fellow in Child Neurodevelopment, Brain and Mind Centre, University of SydneyMarie Antoinette Hodge, Clinical Lecturer, University of Sydney, and Rebecca Sutherland, Lecturer & Speech Pathologist, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Runners, flat shoes or bare foot – what should I wear to lift weights?

Victor Freitas/Pexels
Hunter BennettAdelaide University

If you go to the gym often, you might have been told you shouldn’t lift weights in runners.

The common belief is it is bad for your performance and can lead to injuries.

But is this really the case? Let’s unpack the science.

What your feet are doing when you lift

Your feet are key to exercising safely and effectively.

When you walk and run, they act like a springs and help propel you forward with each step. Your feet also help you maintain balance by supporting your weight.

When you lift any amount of weight (for example, doing compound exercises such as squats) your feet are working hard to keep you stable – even if you’re not thinking much about them.

Researchers have also suggested having a stable foot helps you push more efficiently into the ground. This may increase the amount of weight you can safely lift.

But what you wear on your feet may also contribute to this.

Can’t I just wear runners?

Unsurprisingly, given their name, running shoes are designed specifically to improve your performance and protect your feet while running.

They generally have a raised heel, a thick, cushioned sole to absorb shock, and a “rocker” shape that helps you roll from your heel to your toe. These features help reduce the impact of running on your body.

But in the gym, this cushioned sole may absorb the force you create when lifting weights, making you feel less stable, strong, and powerful. This is likely why some people may say you shouldn’t lift weights in running shoes.

Some people may be concerned this can lead to weightlifting injuries.

One 2016 study found wearing running shoes for exercises like squats can change how your ankle and knee joints move. But there is no peer-reviewed evidence linking these changes to injury.

Man prepares to lift weights in a gym.
Weightlifting shoes may help you perform certain gym exercises. Victor Freitas/Pexels

What are my other options?

Aside from running shoes, there are three other shoe types people generally wear while lifting weights: minimalist (sometimes called “barefoot”), flat or weightlifting shoes.

Minimalist shoes are designed to simulate being barefoot. They have thin soles with almost no cushioning, and aim to let the foot interact with the ground as if you were not wearing shoes at all. Flat sneakers designed for casual wear, such as Vans or Converse, also have thin soles without cushioning.

As a result, these types of shoes may be a good choice for lifting weights because they will be more stable than runners.

In contrast, weightlifting shoes are designed to improve how you perform in the gym.

They typically have a raised heel and a solid, stiff sole without any give, often made of wood or hard plastic. This helps you stay stable at the bottom of a deep squat, which is particuarly useful for movements such as squats, cleans and snatches.

But how do these different shoes stack up?

Studies looking at the impact of footwear on gym performance is largely limited to the squat and deadlift, probably because these are focused on leg strength.

One study from 2020 comparing running and weightlifting shoes found the latter helped people squat with a more upright torso and more flexibility in their knees.

This can take stress off the lower back and make your leg muscles work harder, which is the main purpose of the exercise.

Similarly, research from 2016 showed people wearing weightlifting shoes felt more stable when squatting. This suggests they may be a better option for that specific exercise.

2018 study focused on people performing deadlifts. It found running shoes reduced how quickly people could push force into the ground compared to when they wore only socks. This may suggest that they were more stable without running shoes.

However, this difference was small and has not been consistently replicated in other studies.

So what shoes should I wear?

That ultimately depends on your personal goals and situation.

Weightlifting shoes might be your best bet when doing squats. But if you mainly stick to deadlifts, flat shoes may slightly boost your performance. That is if your goal is to lift as much weight as possible.

However, if you are an Olympic weightlifter who needs to get into a deep squat position for competition, weightlifting shoes are the ideal option.

For everyone else, what shoes you wear may not matter as much. So wear whatever is most comfortable and keep lifting those weights.The Conversation

Hunter Bennett, Lecturer in Exercise Science, Adelaide University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Play reduces stress and lifts wellbeing – and adults benefit as much as children do

Getty Images
Scott DuncanAuckland University of Technology and Melody SmithUniversity of Auckland, Waipapa Taumata Rau

Somewhere along the way to adulthood, time to play fades away. We tend to trade silliness and imagination for seriousness and busyness.

Yet there is clear evidence that adults benefit from playfulness just as children do.

Research shows that adults who engage in playful activities tend to cope better with stressexperience more positive emotions, show greater resilience when facing challenges, and report higher levels of life satisfaction.

Our research with New Zealand families highlights how supporting unstructured play can help adults feel less stressed and more connected, while also normalising playfulness in everyday family life.

In a world that demands constant busyness, play offers essential qualities we are at risk of losing: spontaneity, togetherness and the freedom to have fun.

Play in adulthood can look different from play in childhood. It is less about toys or games and more about how we approach everyday experiences.

Adult play can be physical, social, creative or imaginative. It might involve movement, music, humour, storytelling, problem-solving or simply doing something for the pleasure of it.

What makes an activity playful is not its form, but the mindset behind it: curiosity, openness and a willingness to engage without a fixed outcome. For adults, play is often woven into hobbies and moments of exploration that sit outside work and obligation.

The benefits of play in adult life

recent study suggests a potential neurobiological pathway between playfulness and cognitive health in older adults.

At its core, play provides a space to reset, allowing us to step outside pressure and performance. In doing so, it supports not only stress regulation, but sustains emotional balance and quality of life across adulthood.

The value of playfulness also goes beyond the individual. Playful engagement in social contexts helps build shared emotional resources, shaping how people interact and cope together over time.

Playfulness in adults is also associated with higher emotional intelligence, including stronger ability to perceive and manage emotions in social situations. Observational studies further show that adults who engage playfully are more empathetic, reciprocal and positive in their interactions with others, reinforcing social connection and belonging.

Importantly, play has a unique ability to cut across age boundaries. When adults and children play together, even if unrelated, differences in age, role and status tend to fade, replaced by shared enjoyment and interaction.

Research suggests these inter-generational play experiences can strengthen relationships, support wellbeing and reduce age-based stereotypes. Play becomes a shared language, bridging age divides that are often reinforced by modern living.

As our work highlights, unstructured play remains both possible and meaningful in contemporary life, with families reporting benefits for children’s development as well as family cohesion and shared wellbeing. These findings suggest play can function as an ordinary, rather than exceptional, feature of family and community life.

Making room for play in everyday life

If play matters across the lifespan, the spaces we inhabit need to support it.

Yet most public environments continue to treat play as something designed primarily for children. Research in urban design suggests the most effective playful environments for adults are those that don’t announce themselves as playgrounds, but instead embed playful possibilities into everyday settings.

Features such as oversized steps, stepping stones, interactive seating or winding paths can invite exploration, balance and movement. In some cities, this extends to adult-sized play elements integrated into public space, such as musical swings that turn routine movement into playful interaction.

Despite these examples, play-oriented design remains the exception rather than the norm, with most public play infrastructure still concentrated in children’s spaces. Designing cities that invite adult play as part of everyday life could be a valuable investment in inclusion, social connection and population wellbeing.

Environments that support play are not just physical, but social. Just as urban design can invite or discourage playful movement, social norms shape whether play feels acceptable in adult life.

When play is treated as embarrassing, indulgent or something to apologise for, it quickly disappears. But when playful behaviour is visible and unremarkable, it becomes easier for others to participate.

Play has long been treated as something separate from adult life, confined to childhood or reserved for rare moments of leisure. Yet the evidence suggests playfulness continues to matter well beyond early development.

Reframing play as a legitimate part of adult life opens up new ways of thinking about wellbeing across the lifespan.The Conversation

Scott Duncan, Professor of Population Health, Auckland University of Technology and Melody Smith, Professor of Health Science, University of Auckland, Waipapa Taumata Rau

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Amazon’s Ring wanted to track your pets. It revealed the future of surveillance

Ring
Dennis B. DesmondUniversity of the Sunshine Coast

As a career counterintelligence officer for the US Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) and Defense Intelligence Agency, I worked inside a fully integrated intelligence system.

Signals intelligence from the National Security Agency guided investigations. Satellite imagery from the National Reconnaissance Office provided visibility into hostile environments. Human intelligence came through Defense Intelligence Agency channels.

These streams were strengthened by reporting from domestic and foreign partners. It was a closed, tightly controlled system.

But things have changed. Now private companies are supplying “intelligence as a service” to government entities and others – and as the Amazon-owned Ring doorbell camera company found out when it advertised a new feature last week, the change is not without controversy.

The rise of private intelligence

For most of the 20th century, intelligence remained the exclusive domain of nation states. Collection systems were expensive and specialised. They were protected by strict classification rules designed to safeguard sources and methods.

Intelligence agencies controlled the entire life cycle: human spying, signals interception, satellite surveillance, analysis, and dissemination to decision-makers. This created a closed command economy, where states maintained their own capabilities with legal oversight and institutional tradecraft.

A plane flying over a building.
Marine One flying over Defense Intelligence Agency headquarters in Washington DC. Dennis DesmondCC BY

Today, that monopoly is eroding. It’s being replaced by a commercial intelligence marketplace operating alongside – and increasingly inside – government security structures.

The shift began in the late 20th century as open-source intelligence became more valuable. This happened with the rise of online forums, social media platforms and commercial satellite imagery.

Companies entered this market, scraping images from the web and content from social media sites. Clearview AI, perhaps the most well known, entered this market in 2017 – offering to identify people based on photos from social media.

Businesses quickly recognised the opportunity. Intelligence could be produced commercially, packaged, and sold.

The surveillance economy

At the same time, a broader surveillance economy emerged. It was driven by private companies, not governments.

Acoustic gunshot detection systems illustrate this convergence. Originally designed for military force protection, these sensors are now deployed across cities, providing real-time alerts to police. In Australia, this has manifested itself with hardware store chain Bunnings incorporating facial recognition technology from Hitachi.

Uncrewed aerial vehicles – better known as drones – have followed a similar pattern. Once limited to military reconnaissance, sensor-equipped drones are now widely available commercially. Parts of the battlefield surveillance grid have migrated into civilian life.

Perhaps the most significant shift comes from everyday consumer technology. Internet-connected door cameras, home security systems, and other “Internet of Things” devices now form a vast, privately owned sensor network. This is likely to grow, as products such as Meta’s planned facial-recognition smart glasses hit the market.

Real intelligence value but real privacy concerns

These systems were never intended as intelligence tools. Yet their intelligence value is undeniable.

In the recent case of the kidnapping of Nancy Guthrie in Arizona, for example, Nest door camera footage helped reconstruct movements and identify a possible kidnapper. The data was captured passively, through daily digital life.

This is intelligence collection by proxy. It is constant, ambient, and privately owned.

Amazon Ring’s attempt to launch its “Search Party” program demonstrates the tension.

Framed as a community safety feature, the program proposed using AI to scan neighbourhood camera footage to locate missing pets.

Concern escalated when Ring explored partnering with Flock Safety, whose automated license plate reader networks are widely used by law enforcement. Linking home surveillance cameras with other tracking systems signalled the emergence of a fully integrated commercial intelligence network.

Public backlash was swift – especially after the capability was advertised during the Super Bowl. Critics argued the pet-recovery narrative masked the normalisation of mass surveillance.

Facing mounting privacy concerns, Ring ultimately abandoned the partnership.

Intelligence as a service

Commercial surveillance partnerships continue to expand. Networked cameras and license plate readers equipped with AI-powered object recognition enable vehicle tracking across jurisdictions.

Data brokers feed into this ecosystem too. They sell credit histories, utility records, and behavioural data to government clients.

Taken together, these developments represent “intelligence as a service”. Governments now buy cyber threat reporting, commercial sensor data, facial recognition, and behavioural analytics through subscriptions and data-sharing agreements. Intelligence production has become scalable, modular and market-driven.

This transformation raises serious governance questions. Commercial intelligence providers often operate under far looser legal restrictions. They allow agencies to circumvent data privacy laws.

Consumer-generated data, door cameras, vehicle telemetry and biometric identifiers can often be used by investigators without the need for a warrant. This complicates privacy protections and civil liberties safeguards.

None of this makes state intelligence services obsolete. Governments still retain unique authorities: human espionage, covert action, offensive cyber operations, and classified technical collection.

However, these capabilities now operate within a broader intelligence supply chain. Also in the mix are satellite firms, data brokers, AI analytics companies, and cyber intelligence vendors.

Questions for the future

The integration of commercial surveillance and artificial intelligence is likely to deepen.

Technology leaders envision a near future where cameras on homes, vehicles and public infrastructure feed constant video into AI systems. Citizens and police alike would operate under continuous algorithmic observation. Automated reporting would aim to shape behaviour.

The privatisation of intelligence is neither temporary nor accidental. It is the outcome of technological diffusion, data proliferation, and commercial innovation meeting demand from national security and law enforcement.

The question is not whether intelligence as a service will expand. It will.

The real question is different. What happens to national sovereignty, democratic oversight, and personal privacy when the power to collect and analyse intelligence no longer belongs solely to the state? What happens when it belongs to private actors willing to sell it?The Conversation

Dennis B. Desmond, Lecturer, Cyberintelligence and Cybercrime Investigations, University of the Sunshine Coast

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Coles accused of ‘utterly misleading’ discounts as major court case kicks off

Jeannie Marie PatersonThe University of Melbourne

Coles has appeared before the Federal Court in Melbourne, as hearings for a high-stakes case launched against the supermarket by Australia’s consumer watchdog officially begin.

The Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (ACCC) is alleging Coles misled consumers with “illusory” discounts between February 2022 and May 2023.

The watchdog alleges that in this period, Coles temporarily increased the prices of “at least 245 different products”, then placed them on “Down Down” promotions which were:

higher than, or the same as, the price at which each product had ordinarily been offered for sale.

In opening arguments on Monday, head counsel for the ACCC, Garry Rich SC, described the supermarket’s conduct as “utterly misleading”.

While Coles’ legal team only addressed the court for a short time on Monday, barrister John Sheahan KC said Coles customers were aware of price movements before making purchases.

Coles has signalled it will argue the price increases in question represented a genuine response to surging costs.

So, what exactly is at stake for one of Australia’s largest supermarket giants?

Behind the allegations

The ACCC alleges Coles offered misleading discounts on a wide range of products over the relevant period – ranging from Colgate toothpaste to Sanitarium Weet-Bix cereal.

In its court filing, the ACCC provides the example of a 16 pack of Strepsils Throat Lozenges Honey & Lemon. According to the ACCC, this product had been for sale on a “Down Down” promotion at a price of A$5.50 for at least 649 days.

The ACCC says on 12 October 2022, Coles increased the price to $7 for 28 days, then reduced it back to $6 on a “Down Down” promotion, 9% higher than the previous price of $5.50.

What does ‘Down Down’ mean?

In making this accusation, the ACCC is emphasising the overall impression created in the mind of the reasonable consumer was that the price drop related to a price set more than a short period before.

It argues consumers should be able to take the “Down Down” campaign at face value, without scrutinising the fine print price change or researching prices over the recent history.

Notably, the ACCC is arguing that the conduct by Coles was “planned”. In other words, that the allegedly misleading representations were deliberate.

Under Australian Consumer Law, conduct can be misleading without being intentional. However, if the ACCC can show that the conduct was indeed planned then an inference that the conduct was also misleading is easier to establish. Additionally, intentional misleading representations are likely to attract a larger penalty.

What might Coles argue?

By contrast, Coles’ case is likely to rest on two things. First, its right to raise prices, especially in response to what Coles has said were “significant cost increases”, including:

a surge in global commodity prices, and in the cost of packaging, freight, utilities and international shipping.

And second, that the “Down Down” price on the ticket was, strictly speaking, accurate – there was a price reduction from the shelf, just not a reduction compared to the historical, pre-increase price.

So it is a legal battle with potentially significant consequences for all parties.

separate action by the ACCC against Woolworths, also alleging “illusory” discounts, will be heard later this year.

Clearly the outcome of the case against Woolworths will be influenced by what happens in the Coles litigation.

What’s at stake?

If Coles is found to have made the alleged misleading representations, any penalties will be determined by the court in a separate hearing. However, the amounts are potentially significant.

The maximum penalty could be $50 million per contravention, or more.

By comparison, in 2024, Qantas was ordered to pay $100 million for misleading consumers by accepting bookings for flights that had already been cancelled.

Separately, the Federal Court last year ordered Optus to pay $100 million after the telco admitted it had engaged in unconscionable conduct involving aggressive debt collection and mis-selling to vulnerable customers.

The big issues at play

A supermarket such as Coles is entitled to raise prices.

But the question raised by this case is whether it is misleading under consumer law to advertise a discount on a product that has only briefly risen in price, using a well recognised promotion strategy, without disclosing that not so long before, it was even cheaper.

In other words, can consumers rely on the headline of a “Down Down” discount to tell them they are getting a deal? Or should they be scrutinising the fluctuations in retail pricing more carefully and shopping around?

The case continues on Tuesday.The Conversation

Jeannie Marie Paterson, Professor of Law (consumer protections and credit law), The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.

Week Three February 2026: Issue 651 (published Sunday February 15 2026)

 

Bayview + Mona Vale + Brookvale Bricks: Makers Mark Every run of 10 Thousand

These two bricks were gifted to us decades ago by Charles Benko. Charles stated he got these ones from Brookvale Bricks, when they were still around.

He explained the markings on these bricks, which are marked with a pipe in one case, and two thumbprints to make a heart or harp in the other, is made when the maker had completed  run of 10 thousand of them. They would place a personal insignia in that 10 thousandth one made to mark the end of a run.

Charles who lived at the back of Manly near Condamine street, and was a Hungarian who spoke of Auschwitz – his wife was French (Suzanne ?), came to Australia after World War Two. He passed away aged 99 years back now, but his gift of old Brookvale bricks, and stories of our area in the late 1940's and early 1950's, prompted a look into brick making in our area.

Bricks have been a part of what was needed in Sydney since the first colonists landed here, hoping for a better life than that left behind.

This is a sketch of 'Brickfield Hill' in Sydney - near today's Surry Hills (and Hyde Park). The sketch is dated 1796 - and is among the great records held by the State Library of NSW, many of which have been digitised and area available online.

Bayview- Mona Vale Brickworks

The bricks that were used in the Rock Lily at Mona Vale are said to have come from a brickworks at the Bayview-Church Point end of Pittwater road by the Austin family:


Rock Lily circa 1895 - 1900 - Christmas postcard. 


Rock Lily Hotel [Narrabeen] from State Library of NSW Album: Portraits of Norman and Lionel Lindsay, family and friends, ca. 1900-1912 / photographed chiefly by Lionel Lindsay. Image No.: a2005211h - Auguste and Justine Leontine Briquet are on front entranceway

NB: when it was being demolished/renovated in 1988:


This photo taken on October 9th, 1988 of the renovation of the structure shows the original creamy bricks that were made at the Bayview brickworks of  of J W Austin. Photo and information courtesy Avalon Beach Historical Society president Geoff Searl OAM. 

An anecdote recorded by a resident of then, Mr Wheeler, tells us the location:

Continuing our old-time journey, the coach climbs a hill, and on the left was once a fine brick-kiln and drying sheds. Bricks of superior quality were made by J. Austin. I remember seeing Mr Symonds, an elderly gentleman, at a gypsy tea near Church Point in the year  1900; he was associated with Austin at the brickworks.  

Near this spot, overlooking the water, were the residences of P. Taylor, W. G. Geddes, C. Bennett and Sir Rupert Clarke.  

This has brought us to the twelfth mile-post from Manly. Along the road bordered with trees the coach descends to Figtree Flat, also known as Cape’s Flat, and the orchard of W.  J.  R.   Baker, with “Killarney” cottage lying between the two. This flat with its green  sward was a favourite picnic ground. The annual school picnic and distribution of prizes were held there on November 9 each year, the birthday of the then Prince of Wales (later King Edward VII.).  


                                                                           Fig Tree Flat (Capes Flat), Bayview circa 1900 - 1910

Fig Tree Flat La Corniche Bayview circa 1900 - 1910

BYRA Clubhouse is on 'Fig Tree Flat/Cape's Flat' today: the 'Fig Tree' name comes form a large fig tree that was once here - people used to gather under it for church services before the Church Point chapel was built. The other name 'Cape' stems from an early land owner, and teacher, who sold his holding.

Baker’s orchard has long since disappeared. It comprised six acres of peaches, nectarines and other summer fruits, and two acres of  oranges. The orangery was situated high up at the apex of the orchard. A row of quince and peach trees flanked the fence next to  "Killarney." As Baker also kept poultry, it will be seen that Bayview was once a thriving poultry-farming and fruit-growing district.  - - Extract from The Early Days of Bayview, Newport, Church Point and McCarr’s Creek, Pittwater By J. S. N. WHEELER. Journal and proceedings / Royal Australian Historical Society, Vol. 26 Part. 4 (1940) Pages 88, 7905 wordsCall Number N 994.006 ROY Created/ Published Sydney : The Society, 1918-1964. Appears In Journal and proceedings, v.26, p.318 (ISSN: 1325-9261) Published 1940-08-01. Available Online: HERE

Austin's store in Pittwater road, Mona Vale, was made from their own bricks, and built around 1913 - and then run by the Savage family - section from Panorama of Mona Vale, New South Wales, [picture] / EB Studios National Library of Australia PIC P865/125 circa between 1917 and 1946] and sections from made larger to show detail.

The Rock Lily also had a Brickworks at the back of the premises, which shows up in this 1925 private sale of the land lithograph:

Vol-Fol 2762-161 - Rock Lily's last 5 acres being sold:

NB: what is called above 'Gordon road' is today's Mona Vale road - it was then called 'Gordon road as it was the 'road to Gordon' - earlier there had been a 'Lane Cove Road' for a section of this, as it was 'the road to Lane Cove'.

A 1923 description of the Rock Lily Brickworks:

Auguste Briquet, who married Justine, the daughter of Leon Houreaux who originally built and owned the Rock Lily back in the 1880's, passed away - and she began trying to sell off some of the DIY ventures he had gone into - in 1926, at Newport, for example:


Auguste and Justine Briquet inside the Rock Lily. From State Library of NSW Album: Portraits of Norman and Lionel Lindsay, family and friends, ca. 1900-1912 / photographed chiefly by Lionel Lindsay. Image No.: a2005209h and below: a2005210h

Another local brick-maker was George Brock, who stated his own brickworks to build the now gone 'Oaks' on Mona Vale Beach, which was rebuilt in the early 1920's and took on the name it had after Mr. Brock as 'La Corniche'.

Both James Booth and Samuel Stringer, residents of Mona Vale who lived around today's Village Park, worked on the construction for this resort. Mr Stringer had a few problems when he was sourcing bricks from elsewhere:

TO BRICKLAYERS-Wanted, PRICE per thousand. Particulars by letter or personally from S. STRINGER,  Mona Vale, via Manly.  Advertising. (1904, March 16). The Sydney Morning Herald(NSW : 1842 - 1954), p. 5. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article14606738

DISTRICT COURT. (Before Judge Heydon.)

DISPUTE AS TO BRICKS. Moore v Stringer.

Mr. H. C. G. Moss appeared for the plaintiff, and Mr. Carter Smith for the defendant. This was an action brought by Ellen Moore, of Manly Vale, Manly, wife of James Arthur Moore,  against Samuel  Stringer, sen., of Mona Vale, near Manly, to recover the value of 7050 bricks, alleged to have been used by the defendant without plaintiff's authority. The defence was that the plaintiff's husband had been paid for the bricks, and had given defendant a receipt, but plaintiff contended that her husband had no authority in the matter. His Honor said It was quite clear that the bricks were the property of Mrs. Moore, and not of her husband. Verdict for plaintiff, £10, but no order made as to costs. DISTRICT COURT. (1905, February 8). The Sydney Morning Herald (NSW : 1842 - 1954), p. 5. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article14672752

"Mr. Stringer bought 6 adjoining blocks of land in Park Street Mona Vale for 125 pounds, which formed section 1 of the Mona Vale Estate. The vendor was Hon. Louis Francis Heydon and the sale was transacted on 21/07/1902. On 23/10/1903 Stringer borrowed 200 pounds from Heydon “for the purpose of building on the land”. Building is thought to have commenced in 1904.  He also built the imitation sandstone cottage next to Dungarvon, No. 26 Park Street. In 1922 Stringer was over 70 years old and sold up Mona Vale and moved to Hurstville. He died in 1931." - Guy & Joan Jennings – Mona Vale Stories (2007) 


Dungarvon as it was a few years back - on Park Street Mona Vale

'Brock's'  1907, showing what would become the Barrenjoey Road.

'Brock's' circa 1907, from beach front


An 1904 report states:

There is an Art Gallery Also in the buildings, where Mr. Brock, junior, plies his capable brush. The walls are  covered with his pictures, all showing marked talent. On the way from America, the land of novelty, is A Sculpturing Machine, which a skilled operator can make facsimiles of a human face simultaneously. From the photographs of the it is a wonderful affair, costing a pounds. The marble busts can turned out very fast and cheap,—say 5 or 6 hours for about a pound a piece' quite knocks out hand work—but it requires a hand to guide the rapidly cutting chisels, and the hand of an artist in order for good results. A sculptor, however, can with one of these machines of much better work than with the hand only. The instruments that do the out- resemble somewhat the little cutters dentists use to bore out teeth for stopping. They have only to be moved over the marble slowly and the lifelike image is graven. When the tram was started from Manly Mr. Brock put on about 200 Men to get the place ready, but when that fine project fell in pieces he took most of the men off again. He keeps a brick kiln going constantly, and there are always men employed building.

Some day " The Oaks " will be the name of one of the finest health resorts in the world,-meantime it is a most comfortable and beautiful home. 

“THE OAKS,” (1904, September 3). The Mosman Mail (NSW : 1898 - 1906), p. 4. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article247008613 

Extracts from one from 1910, when the state government had decided to run the place, says:

THE GREAT IDEA. And the idea was this: To build a huge village upon the drained lands of the estate, dominated by a magnificent clubhouse, and to sink £25,000 in the realisation of this immense scheme. To prove a financial success, access by tram to the estate was the one thing absolutely necessary. And this the Government had promised. The Man with the Idea set about the carrying out of his .purpose on a splendid scale. On the site he erected his own brickworks for the manufacture of the bricks and tiles: he bought a timber area at Erina Creek, on the Hawkesbury River, installed a timber mill and a planing machine as well, and so cut, freighted, and treated his own timber on the spot. He worked his own quarry, drawing from it all the needful stone, drained the swamp, obtained a regular water supply by the construction of a great brick and cement tank,' 20Ct. wide and 14ft. deep, and Installed a complete sewerage system. And all the while the promised tram was creeping out from Manly, slowly but surely. By the time it had reached Curl Curl, 12 months after its start, the walls of a mansion, or rather of a group of mansions, at Mona Vale were roof high, and the great idea was flowering in wood and stone and brick towards completion and perfection. 


BROCK'S ESTATE FROM THE HYDRO.


ANOTHER VIEW OF THE HYDRO.

WHERE TO SPEND THE WEEK END. (1910, December 25). The Sun : Sunday Edition (Sydney, NSW : 1910), p. 11. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article231015197


La Corniche circa 1911

A report from 1912, when a fire destroyed much of the main building, tells us:

AN UNLUCKY BUILDER.

man who was before his time.

The total destruction of the beautiful "La Corniche," better known as Brock's Mansion', at Mona Vale, in the early hours of this morning robs the naturally beautiful tourist journey from Manly to Pittwater of one of its, leading attractions. This magnificent pile of buildings, with Its charming surroundings, has always excited the admiration of the traveller, and the story of Its building by Mr. Brock, and its passing out or his hands after all his Napoleonic' work, has, always won- the stranger's keen sympathy. Mr. Brock gave the best years of his life to the realisation of his Idea to provide a high-class hotel on the lines of a great country home on this unrivalled site, which provides all the delights of ocean, lagoon, and green hills. His-choice of a spot could not have been Improved on with Its glorious ocean views, and after great work in levelling and draining what was a great swamp he evolved a fine polo ground and racecourse on the flat. Six years ago there were no less than 44 polo ponies on the ground. 

When Mr. Brock started the buildings he set up his own brickyards and sawmills. Everything he used came from his district In this connection he showed his patriotism by employing only local labor, and for several years he was a benefactor to the neighborhood, his expenditure going Into many thousands.

It may he said that before Mr. Brock started his great undertaking he had the assurance of the Government then in power that the tram to Pittwater would be constructed at once. He went on with his work, spent many thousands, and just when he was within reach of his goal his money ran out, and he lost all his claims to the property, and the results of his labor for years. AN UNLUCKY BUILDER. (1912, January 8). The Sun (Sydney, NSW : 1910 - 1954), p. 1. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article222004175 


Ruins of "Brock's Mansions," at Mona Vale, destroyed by fire on Monday morning. The fate of the handsome pile of buildings is a grim finale to the financial tragedy that overtook the plucky builder, Mr. G. S . Brock, in its erection. No title (1912, January 10 - Wednesday). The Sun (Sydney, NSW : 1910 - 1954), p. 1 (FINAL EXTRA). Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article222002216

as 'La Corniche' [exterior view] circa 1920 - 1927 Image No.: a105577, courtesy State Library of NSW circa 1920-25

An earlier form of Mona Vale SLSC, when it was Mona Vale Alumni during 1930-31, used this premises as their weekend base. As can be seen below, the place was still used as a resort for visitors:

After Brock's Manion was finished, a few years on, another prominent brick-person came to Mona Vale and built brick cottages where land was later resumed to build Pittwater High School. The site for the school was resumed in 1961.

Top photo: Bay View Road Mona Vale circa 1900-1905(current day Pittwater road right to Bayview and Church Point) looking north from Mona Street. St John's Church can be seen to the left of the photo - this had been moved there from the Mona Vale north headland in 1888. By 1904 the wooden church had deteriorated to such an extent that it had to be demolished and a small stone church was built by James Booth on the present site at 1624 Pittwater Road Mona Vale, much closer to the village centre and was built in 1906 and opened in 1907. The residents raised funds by holding entertainments in the now demolished 'Booths Hall' at Mona Vale as well as by other means.

The cottage at the right front, which appears to have a turret, is actually James Shaw's house on the hillside above the corner of Cabbage Tree and Bayview roads. The two Cabbage Tree Palms marked the old border between Bayview and Mona Vale.


Above; the Bayview road looking south towards Mona Vale.  Mona Vale was once called 'Rock Lily'; people born in the area even into the 1920's had their birthplace recorded as 'Rock Lily'. Images from State Library of NSW and State Library of Victoria

Mark Horton, whose family have lived in the Mona Vale and Bayview areas for four generations, shared:

'The land in the top photo, right hand side, is the stretch of Bayview Road, now Pittwater Road running past the now Pittwater High School site. The houses on the right were on the Pittwater High School site and were demolished in an early morning clandestine action by the Department of Education in the early 1970s. Instead of preserving a bit of local history on the school site two houses with historic significance were demolished. The area where they stood is still green space.'

Guy and Joan Jennings 'Mona Vale Stories' (Arcadia Publishing Newport NSW, 2007) records:

On the eastern side of Bayview Road here were three cottages. They were built by Tom Arter who was commissioned by the Esbank Estate in Lithgow to build them as Show Houses. Tom's grandson, George Johnson, recalls that the bricks came from the Wilcox family in Bassett Street, however a Mr. Shreinert remembers the bricks coming from the kiln near the Rock Lily (hotel). The roofing iron was delivered by steamer to Bayview Wharf. There is some evidence to suggest the cottages were let for short term holidays. However for most of the time they were associated with a number of permanent residents'.

The northern most at 1686 Bayview road was called 'Eskbank', a name that came from an old house at Lithgow. This is the cottage that Louisa Dunbar came to in 1909 after the death of her husband, with he three children. She ran the bakery there until the Maiseys took over around 1913. The Maiseys stayed until their father George died in 1931 and most of the family returned to Parramatta. Henry 'Joe' Johnson and his family became the residents during 1938-1940 and he worked as a groundsman at Bayview Golf Course for 47 years.

The family that spent the most time in the house were the Lewis' who bought the property in 1946 and stayed until 1973 when they sold to Mr and Mrs Symonds who planned to restore the home. It was demolished in suspicious circumstances in 1978.

The middle cottage, No. 1682, was owned by Sam, and Mabel Perry from around 1916 until the 1960's when it was taken by the Education Department and demolished.

The southernmost cottage, No. 1678, closest to the corner of Mona Street, was first owned by Richard and Margaret Reid. The next resident was John Thomas Hewitt, policeman and Shire Councillor who later owned the Mona Vale Hotel site, where they built a home, and acreage along present day Golf Avenue. This was then taken over by the Shreinert  family who at one time ran refreshment rooms here.

In 1961-62 the Education Department resumed around 2 acres each from the three homes; Lewis', Perrys and Shreinerts, leaving around half an acre to each house. When Mabel Perry passed away her house and remaining and were sold to the Education Department and the house was quickly demolished. By 1973 both the Lewis' and Shreinerts were weary of living surrounded by the school yard with no proper fences. The Shreinerts sold to the Education Department, and as recorded above, they sold to the Symonds, who also found the site too much and also sold.'

Local lore states that, keen to stop a heritage listing for this last cottage, which it was of course, the Department knocked down Eskbank on the October long weekend of 1978.

The land resumptions, officially published in the NSW Government Gazette, shows 15 acres were resumed at first - all part of the land bought by the Mona Vale Land Company from the Darley estate. More in: Pittwater High School Alumni 1963 To 1973 Reunion For 2023: A Historic 60 Years Celebration + Some History

The Warringah Shire Council took money for people taking sand to make bricks with, although when they had their own plans to reclaim land at Bayview to form parks, they began to change what they would allow and when - it's worth noting that the state government also had to approve such leases as the estuary is 'Crown Land' or more accurately, crown waters:

BRICKS FROM SAND

Warringah Shire Council decided last night to grant a special lease to Composite Brick Pty. Ltd. for the dredging of sea sand at Bayview, Pittwater.

The sand will be used to make clay-cement bricks. It will be taken from areas in the Newport channels that have been silted up by previous dredgings.

The Council rejected a proposal that a special lease be granted for an area at the head of the bay which the company is willing to reclaim by dredging. The company wanted to build a factory on the reclaimed land. BRICKS FROM SAND (1947, September 3). The Sydney Morning Herald (NSW : 1842 - 1954), p. 4. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article18041363 

Brookvale Brickworks at Beacon Hill

Brookvale Brick works actually was at Beacon Hill. These brickworks used clay from quarries on Beacon Hill which became a medium density housing development after its closure in 1996.

Section from Beacon Hill to Brookvale panorama, circa 1900-1909 courtesy NSW Records and Archives

We tracked down an article from around this era to find out how they were making bricks then - this one was published in 1879 - 

Aaron Broomhall tells us:

''The Brookvale Brickworks has a fascinating history dating back to around 1885, when William Hews established his brickworks at the corner of Bantry Bay Road and Warringah Road. The Hews family, the first permanent residents of Frenchs Forest, used high-quality kaolin clays to create bricks that helped build many of Manly’s earliest structures.

Brookvale Brickworks, later owned by the Austral Brick Company Limited in 1975,  produced distinctive Brookvale Clinker Sandstock bricks until its closure in 1995. Clay and shale were sourced from Beacon Hill and transported on a miniature tramway to the brickworks.''

Warringah Shire Council records tell us:

''Hews bricks were hand made in moulds and fired in kilns for about 72 hours, using timber from the nearby bush. One man could make 12 to 13 hundred bricks a day! The bricks were transported by horse and dray to Manly, Narrabeen and The Spit, where they were loaded onto a punt and shipped to Mosman and the city.

The workers were housed in small cottages, slab huts and dormitories. The Forest soon become a thriving community with the addition of a tennis court, cricket ground and pavilion.

Workers at Brookvale Brickworks 1914

Hews Brickworks circa 1909

As the kilns consumed a huge amount of local timber, the brickworks impacted much of the surrounding bushland, already heavily logged by James French's sawmills. Hews Brickworks operated until World War I, when the essential clay was finally exhausted.

A small part of the Hews’ family land is now the site of Brick Pit Reserve with most occupied by the Northern Beaches Hospital. A plaque in the reserve honours the Aboriginal inhabitants and also commemorates the pioneers of Frenchs Forest.''

This tells us a run of 10 thousand bricks - and the makers mark - would have been around a week's work.

Mr. Hews was also a Warringah Shire Councillor - the first council chambers in Brookvale was built from his bricks, as were many of the homes in Manly. 

He passed away in 1917 and is at rest i Manly Cemetery but Brookvale Bricks continued.

Four other locals who recall the works tell us:

''The football fields at the top of Beacon Hill are still sometimes referred to as "the brick pits". (On the left opposite Macca's on Willandra Road).'' and;

''And when they lit the kiln, the noise would rumble along Alfred rd Narraweena.'' and;

''Hence Hews Parade in Belrose where the President hotel was.'' and;

''Brookvale Brickworks and district has been photographed in this 1930 aerial. Includes the railway line from the clay quarry. Seems to show the railway passing underneath what is now Warringah Road. The Clay Tanks transported to the brickworks carried 4 tons of clay in each wagon. '':

We also tracked down a few mentions from the newspapers of the past about this brick factory. 

IN 1932: 

BRICKS FALL ON WORKMEN.

Albert Kemsley, 47, of Hay-street, Collaroy, and Robert Riddle, 39, of Pittwater-road, Brookvale, had remarkable escapes from death or serious injury yesterday, when a stack of about 3000 bricks fell about them at the Brookvale Brickworks. The men were half buried in the bricks and were struck by many of them, but they suffered only cuts and abrasions. The Manly Ambulance took them to Manly Hospital.CASUALTIES. (1934, September 25). The Sydney Morning Herald (NSW : 1842 - 1954), p. 10. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article17115213 

NRS-4481-3-[7/16056]-St21365. Title; Government Printing Office 1 - 26927 - Mixing Plant: Warringah Road, Frenchs Forest [From NSW Government Printer series - Man Roads]. Contents Date Range; 01-01-1938 to 31-12-1938, courtesy NSW Records and Archives

Fire in 1947:

Fireball a few years later:

BROOKVALE BRICKWORKS DAMAGED BY FIREBALLThis picture shows the path of a fireball which severely damaged a brickworks at Brookvale yesterday. ' (Story page' 3.) BROOKVALE BRICKWORKS DAMAGED BY FIREBALL. (1952, August 14). The Sydney Morning Herald (NSW : 1842 - 1954), p. 1. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article18277490 

At Brookvale a fireball struck a brickworks chimney at 6.10 a.m., and partly wrecked four brick kilns. Striking with a series of bomb-like blasts, it demolished a wooden structure 200feet square and hurled sheets of iron from it up to 200yards away. The works, in Federal Parade, Brookvale, are owned by Brickworks Ltd., Castlereagh Street, city. Only one man, Bill Bass, of Sydenham Road, Brook-vale, was on duty at the time. He was working in the first kiln. Bass jumped under a work-bench as bricks and sheets of iron fell around him. Scores of people in the Brookvale area reported seeing a flash in the sky. A spokesman for the company said last night that at least £3,000 worth of damage had been done to the kilns. They would be out of production for about a week. Willy-willy Rips Tiles And Iron From House Roofs. (1952, August 14). The Sydney Morning Herald (NSW : 1842 - 1954), p. 3. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article18277544

In 1959:

We also tracked down a bit of a history of brickmaking in Sydney, as run here in the Australian journal 'Building' in 1935:

This one form 1959 records fossils being found at the Brookvale/Beacon Hill brickpits - see right hand column:

Brookvale Brickworks circa 1950.Photo: Aaron Broomhall - and looks like a  Warringah Shire Council one too


Rock Lily Hotel of Leon Houreux - built from locally made bricks from album, Box 14: Royal Australian Historical Society : photonegatives, ca. 1900, courtesy state Library of NSW


The Brock Estate - brochure Front page, 1907 Item No.: c046820078, Mona Vale Subdivisions, Courtesy State Library of NSW

James Baker's Mona Vale Food Store circa 1910-1912 - on today's Pittwater road heading out to Bayview, was made from local bricks - they sold it in 1919:

MONA VALE-PITTWATER Old established General Store and Freehold, JUNCTION STORE, Pittwater and Newport roads Modern brick building, large shop, 5 rooms, stabling, etc TORRENS. Raine and Horne auctioneers. Advertising (1919, March 6). The Sydney Morning Herald (NSW : 1842 - 1954), p. 10. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article15828225 

References

  1. Pittwater Restaurants You Could Stay At The Rock Lily Hotel – Mona Vale (2021 updated version) - 2015 version
  2. John W. Stone - Profile (photographer)
  3. Pittwater Roads II: Where the Streets have Your Name - Bayview
  4. Roads In Pittwater: The Bay View road (becomes Pittwater road in 1950's)
  5. McCarr's Creek to Church Point to Bayview Waterfront Path - a 2018 longer stroll
  6. The Riddles of The Spit and Church Point: Sailors, Rowers, Builders
  7. The Oaks - La Corniche 
  8. Guy and Joan Jennings, Mona Vale Stories. Arcadia Publishing, Newport NSW, 2007.
  9. Taramatta-Turrimetta-Turimetta Park, Mona Vale - officially opened in 1904
  10. Pittwater Roads II: Where The Streets Have Your Name - Mona Vale, Bongin Bongin, Turimetta and Rock Lily
  11. Early Mona Vale Constable owned Mona Vale Hotel site: some history
  12. Section Of A Squire Mural From Dungarvon, Mona Vale, held In Private Collection + a few notes about his focus on in situ Aboriginal Sculptures & local burial grounds of First Nations Peoples
  13. Pittwater High School Alumni 1963 To 1973 Reunion For 2023: A Historic 60 Years Celebration + Some History
  14. St. John's Anglican Church Mona Vale- Celebrating Its 150th Year In 2021 (History insights)
  15. NSW Records and Archives
  16. TROVE - National Library of Australia
  17. Pittwater Council, Mona Vale Library History Unit

Glenroy

George Johnson was born at the family house of 1891 Pittwater Road. His grandfather, Mr Arter, was a Lithgow businessman who came to live in the house near Waterview Street in the early-1890s with his family . Georges mother Mary had looked after the house and heryounger siblings when her mother passed away.

Mr Arter had built three cottages in the area of Bayview Road (now Pittwater Road) which were named Esbank, Lithgow and Bowenfields. After the three cottages were built Mr Arter continued to work as a bricklayer in the district working on the Rock Lily as well as Austin's
Stone.

On the other side of the family George's paternal grandfather married Louisa Oliver of the pioneering Pittwater family. George recalls how he and his brother would leave Mona Vale at 4.00am and walk behind their grandfather's horse and cart which carried wood for the bakery's oven or building materials for building at Manly. After lunch of half a loaf of bread and cheese each, the boys would ride the cart back home with the groceries.

When George was 4 years old he attended Mona Vale Public School, which was held in a cottage in Park Street. He was six when the school moved to it's new building in 1912 and he recalled a fire in 1918 in which the school had to temporarily locate to La Corniche while the school was being repaired.

George's father, George E. worked as a labourer in the Mona Vale area and is also named as a carter in the Sands directory between 1926 and 1933. On his property in Pittwater Road he also grew flowers which he sold to the local florist at Manly Wharf. He was the first
labourer on the Maintenance Department of the Warringah Shire Council. As the shire extended as far as St. Ives, he would travel there by sulky and camped overnight filling the potholes in the dirt road with a shovel and a wheelbarrow. He also cut the sandstone that was used by James Booth to build St. John's Church at 1624 Pittwater Road. The 'Glenroy' house is opposite St. Johns Church on Pittwater Road. - Pittwater Council Mona Vale Heritage Inventory, Study Number B71 - 16/07/2014.


School Sports day at Kitchener Park, 1912 - photos courtesy Olga Johnson.

Information Provided As Mrs. Hawkins Talked With Mr. George Johnson, for Mona Vale St. John's Church records

31.7.78 (Pittwater High School)

Mr. Johnson was born at 1891 Pittwater Rd., in 1907. His grandfather Mr. Arter, who built houses A, B and C lived with Mr. Johnson’s parents and the rest of the family, at that address. Mr. Arter continued to work as a bricklayer in the district, working on the Rock Lily and the general store, at the site of the present paper shop. (Mr. Johnson has a picture or the two storied building.) 

Mona Vale circa 1905 - looking towards Bayview. Mona Street runs off to the bottom right of this picture. To the left is St John's Church of England which was moved from Mona Vale headland, where it had been installed on the Boulton's Farm

Mr. Arter was a Lithgow businessman who came to live near the corner of Waterview St., Mona Vale, with his family. Mary Arter (Mr. Johnson’s mother had looked after her younger brothers and sisters from the age of 12 or 14, after their mother died. Mr. Johnson showed me his parent’s marriage certificate, showing the date of marriage 26/8/1903, and Mary’s age as 21 years. Mr. Johnson believes houses A, B, C were built prior to Mary’s marriage. Mrs. F. Lewis told Mr. & Mrs. Johnson that Mary said she was 17 when House A was built. Mr. Johnson recalls the bricks for the houses were obtained from Wilcox in Bassett St. area, and later from Mona Vale Rd. 

Mr. Johnson’s paternal grandfather, who married Louisa Oliver, built the first house at Church Point. This house has been restored and re-decorated. Mr. Johnson has a photo of his grandfather, and he recalls how he and his brother would leave Mona Vale at 4.00am and run or walk behind grandfather’s horse and cart, as it carried wood for baker’s ovens or for building at Manly. After lunch of half a loaf of bread each with cheese, the boys enjoyed the cart ride back as groceries were carried back. 

Mr. Johnson’s mother’s sister was married to Mr. John Oliver who, in an affidavit, described how residents flocked to the wharves when the steamers arrived and unloaded their supplies. The steamer carrying the tin used in the roof of houses A,B,C, would have been unloaded at the Bayview wharf, alongside the present William’s Marine. Mr. Johnson remembers the steamer’s whistle alerted everyone to the approach of the steamers. Mr. John Oliver worked for Mr. Geddes and mentions the ships “Hawkesbury”, “Narara” and “Erringhi”. Mr. Oliver was concerned to maintain the cemetery at Church Point- site of the Methodist Church. 

John Oliver lived in the timber cottage at 1624 Pittwater Rd. after his father George. John later built where the Vet is now located.

Mr. Johnson’s father worked as a labourer in the Mona Vale area. On his property along Pittwater Rd. he grew flowers which he sold to the florist at Manly Wharf. He was the first labourer on the Maintenance Dept. of Warringah Shire Council. As the Shire extended to St. Ives, he would ‘travel to St. Ives by sulky, and camp overnight to enable him to maintain the road by filling in the holes in the dirt road, using a shovel and wheelbarrow. Mr. Johnson’s father cut the stone for the building of St. John’s Church at 1624 Pittwater Rd. There are two headstones in the churchyard, originally from the cemetery of the first St. John’s Pittwater on the Mona Vale headland off Grandview Pde. (1871-1888).

(Mr Geddes owned property on “Brick Yard Hill” ½ mile from Wharf, east towards Bayview).

Mr. Johnson has a postcard (as above), dated 1906, showing Pittwater Rd., Mona Vale with the three brick houses on the right, two houses and a wooden Church on the left of the road. Two of the brick houses were named “Esbank” and “Lithgow” (“Bowenfels” may have been the name of the third.) The two wooden houses were occupied by Wilsons and Aldridges. He cannot recall the occupant of the third wooden house. There are two tall cabbage tree palms on either side of the road, opposite house A.

There is a line or telegraph poles on the left-hand side of the road. Mr. Shaw built boats and launched them at the nearby creek. The black berry patch at the right of the picture, is the spot where the girl Godbolt was bitten by a snake, and ran home to near Loquat Valley School. Her mother treated her and she was away from school for four days. As a boy, Mr. Johnson’s Sunday Sport was killing black snakes with a stick in the swamp where the Bayview golf links are now located.

When four years old, Mr. Johnson attended the Mona Vale public School in the old house which still stands next to the lane off Park St. Mr. Morrison was the teacher. When he was Six, Mr. Morrison was the first teacher in the stone Mona Vale School. After the School burnt down, classes moved to La Corniche, with a new teacher and his wife. Mr. Ross and Miss Giddely were teachers when Mona Vale School was rebuilt. The house with the attic at 28 Park St. was built by Mr. Stringer, possibly at the same time as Brock’s was built. (later known as La Corniche).

As a boy, Mr. Johnson and his father used to do odd labouring jobs for Mr. Arter. Mr. Johnson believes Mr. Arter built the Bakery at the same time as the house. There was one baker before Andrieson. When Mr. Johnson was about 14, he worked for Mr. Andrieson, and recalls that young Jack Andrieson playfully tripped him as he ran from the Bakery to the house, with the result that he landed face down in his tray of hot buns. There was no license needed for making or selling bread in those days, but occasionally an inspector checked the weights of the bread. When 16, he worked for Mr. Maisey and he had a photo of himself with the bread cart, when the bakery was operating in Bungan St. Mr. F. Lewis recalls that Mrs. Shreinert Snr. used to serve teas in the side room at House b, before her son was married. The three houses were known as Show places in the district.

The Marshalls & Connelly were two families who lived along the present Mona St., north of Pittwater High School. Homers Dairy was located north of Bassett St. 

In the early 1900’s Mr. Boulton was digging wells on a Newport property, and when he heard the lady owner wanted to sell, he said he’d found gold there. Coal shafts were dug uneventfully off Walters Rd. and also at Lane Cove Rd., Ingleside.

Mr. Johnson has an aerial photo -1906- of Bayview wharves, many of which no longer exist.

(The George Johnson’s lived opposite St John’s – George’s parents lived on the corner).

 Above and Below: Panorama of Mona Vale, New South Wales, [picture] / EB Studios National Library of Australia PIC P865/125 circa between 1917 and 1946] and sections from made larger to show detail.

Above: Section showing Tennis courts - Below: Section showing Cricket Pitch 

The small shed in the middle of the Village Park (Village Green) is the ambulance station

First-Ever Release of Captive-Bred Mallee Emu-wrens Back Into the Wild

Video by Zoos South Australia, published Feb. 6, 2026

Seventeen tiny birds have taken a giant step for conservation.

For the first time in history, captive-bred Mallee Emu-wrens have been released back into the wild in South Australia’s mallee. Once feared locally extinct after devastating bushfires, this endangered species has now returned thanks to years of careful planning, science-led breeding and genuine collaboration.

This landmark conservation milestone is the result of a multi-year partnership between Zoos SA, the Murraylands and Riverland Landscape Board, and the National Parks and Wildlife Service SA, with guidance from the Threatened Mallee Bird Conservation Action Plan Steering Committee.

Filmed from the breeding aviaries at Monarto Safari Park to a carefully selected mallee release site, this story follows the journey from early husbandry trials to the moment these 4–6 gram birds take flight into spinifex habitat where they belong. What began as a question of whether the species could survive in human care has become a powerful proof of concept for threatened species recovery.

This first release marks a critical step toward re-establishing a South Australian population of Mallee Emu-wrens and provides a blueprint for future conservation translocations across the Murray–Darling Depression.

Small birds. Big collaboration. Real hope for a species on the brink.

 

illegal e-bikes to be seized-crushed in NSW

Announced: Monday February 9, 2026

Illegal e-bikes will be seized and crushed to stop the use of high-powered and doctored bikes that perform more like motorbikes than bicycles.

The Minns Labor Government has stated it is determined to remove illegal electric motorbikes masquerading as e-bikes from NSW roads and paths, and is giving NSW Police expanded powers to do so.

''This reform draws a clear line: we want young people outdoors, active and enjoying their communities but we will not tolerate illegal, high-powered e-motorbikes putting lives at risk.'' the government said

'Strengthened seizure and crushing powers for NSW Police will target the growing number of throttle-only, high-powered e-motorbikes that are fuelling anti-social behaviour, community frustration and serious injuries.

So-called “fat bikes” and other throttle-only devices like those ridden across the Sydney Harbour Bridge in a recent social media stunt are not legal e-bikes under NSW law and will be able to be seized and crushed under this new legislation.'

The Minns Labor Government is also investing in a number of ‘dyno units’ that measure whether the power output of an e-bike is beyond the legal maximum.

The portable test units can determine whether the e-bike’s power assistance cuts out completely at 25km/h as per the current law in NSW.

If an e-bike is found to be non-compliant at the roadside, Police will be empowered to crush the bike to ensure it does not return to the road.

This will simplify the current seizure laws, which were designed with high-powered cars and motorbikes in mind, and require a lengthy and resource-intensive court process to remove them permanently.' the government stated

As Transport for NSW and NSW Police develop the new seizure laws, they will be looking at the simple seizure and disposal laws already in place in Western Australia.

Police in WA have confiscated and crushed dozens of bikes since adopting tougher laws.

Parents urged to check it's not an illegal electric motorbike

Not all e-bikes sold in shops are legal on our streets. The NSW Government is asking parents to double-check before buying an e-bike for their child.

Many devices being marketed as e-bikes are in fact illegal electric motorbikes, with throttle operation without pedalling above 6km/h, excessive power output or modified speed limiters.

If a device does not meet NSW’s legal definition of a pedal-assisted e-bike, it can be seized and crushed even if it was bought in error.

These changes are the start of a broader package of reforms to make sure e-bikes are safe, legal and fit for use on public roads and paths, while still supporting responsible riding and active transport.

This can only happen when bikes behave like bikes, not motorbikes.

Further measures will be announced in coming weeks to strengthen safety, improve enforcement and give parents, riders and communities a clear and safe set of rules they can have confidence in.

Minister for Transport John Graham said:

“We’ve heard loud and clear the concern in the community about souped-up e-bikes and the anti-social behaviour that seems to go hand in hand with them.

“Riders and owners of illegal e-bikes should now hear us loud and clear: If you are breaking the rules, and your bike does not meet the very clear specifications of a pedal-assisted e-bike, expect it to be removed from your possession and crushed.

“Illegal bikes will end up as a twisted wreck so they can’t rejoin the road.  We will ensure e-bikes behave as bicycles not motorbikes.

“This reform goes far past the NSW Liberals’ idea for tiny number plates that validates and entrenches the most dangerous e-bikes..

“Labor will ban these dangerous electric motorbikes while the Liberals have pledged to licence them.”

See December 2025 report: NSW Coalition Announces it will introduce license plate scheme for e-bikes if elected: Pittwater MP Scruby Urges they back her Bill for same

On June 5 2025 Pittwater MP Jacqui Scruby had tabled a Notice in the NSW Parliament to move—

That a bill be introduced for an Act to amend the Road Transport Act 2013, the Road Rules 2014 and other legislation to provide for the regulation of the sale, ownership and use of e-bikes; and for related purposes.

Ms Scruby's Road Legislation Amendment (E-Bike Regulation) Bill 2025 Long Title reads:

An Act to amend the Road Transport Act 2013, the Road Rules 2014 and other legislation to provide for the regulation of the sale, ownership and use of e-bikes; and for related purposes.

See: Scruby-Scamps Bring Community Together to Tackle E-Bike Safety - August 2025

Ms Scruby reiterated this when the state government backed up changes the federal government were announced.

See: Maximum legal power output of e-bikes in NSW to be reduced to 250 watts - Federal Government reinstating EN-15194 standard: Scamps Welcomes changes, Scruby calls for NSW to lead with e-bike licensing and registration

The Coalition stated in a release in December: ''In an Australian first, this election commitment will mandate low-cost registration for specific categories of e-bike riders, enabling better enforcement against unsafe behaviour and addressing mounting community concern.''

''This commitment follows months of extensive consultation by the NSW Liberals and Nationals, including last year’s Parliamentary inquiry into e-bike safety. ''

''Stakeholders such as local councils, police and community groups have consistently raised concerns around the risks posed by the unregulated use of these devices along with the inability to enforce standards in a practical way.''

''The Government’s recent reforms are a start but have focused solely on e-bike technology while failing to address genuine concerns around rider behaviour.

The NSW Liberal and Nationals state they have identified two key considerations for any reform: 

  1. Improving the quality and safety of e-bikes, and 
  2. Addressing rider behaviour. 

The proposed licensing scheme would require a government issued license plate to be attached to an e-bike when used by: 

  • Riders who are under the age of 18; 
  • Riders who use e–bikes for a commercial purpose; and 
  • Commercial shared service schemes. 

Riders aged 18 and over who use a privately-owned e-bike be exempt from the scheme.

The Coalition plan also includes new penalties for non-compliance, alongside expanded safety education to ensure young riders understand the risks associated with e-bike technology and how to use these devices safely in the community.

On Monday incumbent NSW Police Minister Yasmin Catley said:

"Today, we’re drawing a line in the sand. Illegal, high-powered e-bikes aren’t harmless fun and anyone thinking they can slip under the radar should take this as their final warning. If your bike does not meet the rules, it will be destroyed.

"We’re backing police with the tools they need. These safeguards are about making sure the e-bikes on our roads are legal and safe, and about stopping dangerous bikes from being handed back only to pop up again next week. If a bike breaks the rules, it’s gone for good.

"I want to remind people that this isn't just a police responsibility. We all have a role to play, especially parents, in making sure kids are riding legal e-bikes and not being put at risk.

"If you buy, or allow a child to ride, a high-powered e-bike that doesn’t meet the rules, you’re not just gambling with their safety, you’re gambling with the bike too and there will be no exceptions."

Minister for Roads Jenny Aitchison said:

“This is a crackdown, plain and simple.

“Let’s not forget, this is not just a problem for the city, communities across regional NSW are dealing with illegal e-bikes being ridden at dangerous speeds on footpaths, local roads and town centres, and too many people are being seriously injured.

“People deserve to feel safe walking, riding or driving in their own communities – whether they live in Sydney, the Hunter, the North Coast, Riverina or the Far West – and that means drawing a hard line between a bicycle and an illegal e-bike.”

e-bikes safety information and more available at: www.transport.nsw.gov.au/roadsafety/bicycle-riders/ebikes

 

Premier’s Anzac Memorial Scholarship tour applications open

Announced: Monday February 9, 2026

The NSW Government has today announced that up to 18 students from across NSW have the opportunity to be selected to participate in a study tour visiting historic sites in Greece and Crete relating to Australia’s military service during the Second World War.

The Premier’s Anzac Memorial Scholarship (PAMS) is a wonderful opportunity for high school history students to deepen their understanding of Australians at war and gain a richer appreciation of the courage and sacrifice of the nation’s servicemen and servicewomen over the generations.

Locations in Greece include the Commonwealth War Graves Cemetery at Phaleron, the Hellenic War Museum, and the battlefields of Thermopylae and Thebes.

In Crete, the tour will visit sites such as the 6th Australian Division Memorial at Stavromenos, the battlefields of Rethymno, the Melame Memorial and the Souda Bay War Cemetery.

Two PAMS 2025 recipients reflected on their tour to the Republic of Korea and Singapore last year which they said was life changing.

Scarlett Sheridan from Green Point Christian College reflected that the tour was one of the greatest honours of her life, opening her eyes to the sacrifices made by veterans around the world.

Flynn Greenow from Narrabeen Sports High School said he felt a profound sense of connection while standing on the historic battlefields visited during the tour.

The 2026 tour will take place in the Term 3 school holidays departing on Saturday, 26 September and returning to Sydney on Thursday 8 October.

An important change has been introduced to the application process this year, requiring eligible students to submit a five-minute multimedia presentation as part of their online application, along with a letter of recommendation from their school and a parent consent form.

Applications close on Monday, 9 March 2026. For more information and to apply visit: www.veterans.nsw.gov.au/education/premiers-anzac-memorial-scholarship

Minister for Veterans David Harris said:

“The PAMS tour presents a unique opportunity for students from all over New South Wales, and I highly recommend that History and Modern History students in Year 10 and Year 11 consider applying.

“Through this scholarship, recipients will have the opportunity to visit historic sites across Greece and Crete that experienced the conflict first-hand - walking in the footsteps of the Australians who served and honouring their legacy at the very battlefields where their bravery was defined.

“More than 17,000 Australians served in the Greece and Crete campaigns of 1941, standing in defence against advancing German forces. Close to 600 made the ultimate sacrifice, with many more wounded and thousands taken as prisoners of war.

“Their courage and resilience remain an enduring part of our national story, and a lasting bond between Australia and Greece.

“The Minns Labor Government is proud to continue to support this fantastic program and the extraordinary legacy of veterans.”

Scarlett Sheridan, PAMS 2025 Scholar from Green Point Christian College said:

“Finding out I’d received a PAMS scholarship was one of the greatest honours I’ve ever received. It opened my mind to the sacrifices veterans around the world have made.

“Being a PAMS scholar has deepened my understanding of the sacrifice veterans make and the importance of keeping their stories alive. Hearing a Korean veteran thank us for our country’s service will stay with me forever and I am committed to playing my part in honouring all those who have served.

“I was blessed to make lifelong friends and mentored by incredible teachers. Every day offered a new experience.”

Flynn Greenow, PAMS 2025 Scholar from Narrabeen Sports High School said:

“There is a surreal sense of deep connection found amongst the battlefields on which Australians fought and died to protect, which I would struggle to grasp without PAMS.

“Making new friends while experiencing new cultures and learning about Australian military history, which is often overlooked in curriculum discussions, is an experience I will remember and treasure for the rest of my life.”

Commonwealth War Graves Cemetery at Phaleron

 

ARTEXPRESS is back!

ARTEXPRESS 2026
5 February – 26 April 2026
Art Gallery of New South Wales
Naala Badu building
Lower level 2

Free

The Art Gallery of New South Wales proudly presents ARTEXPRES 2026, the much-anticipated annual exhibition celebrating exceptional artworks by students who studied Visual Arts in the 2025 New South Wales Higher School Certificate (HSC).

Now in its 43rd year at the Art Gallery of New South Wales – the principal venue for ARTEXPRESS – the 2026 exhibition features the outstanding work of 51 student artists, selected from a cohort of 9074 students who completed the 2025 HSC Visual Arts course, showcasing the diversity of creativity from government and non-government schools across regional, remote and metropolitan New South Wales.

Launched on the evening of Wednesday February 4 with a special ceremony for artists and their families, ARTEXPRESS 2026 offers a compelling snapshot of the ideas, curiosities and concerns shaping the lives of young Australians. The exhibition reveals deeply personal explorations of identity, culture, family and the environment, alongside thoughtful engagement with the issues that matter to young people. The student works demonstrate remarkable technical skill and creative ambition across an extensive range of artistic practices.

Various expressive forms from the HSC Visual Arts curriculum are represented, including ceramics, collection of works, documented forms, drawing, graphic design, painting, photomedia, printmaking, sculpture, textiles and fibre, and time-based forms.

For the first time, ARTEXPRESS is presented in the Art Gallery’s Naala Badu building this year, placing the work of these young artists in dialogue with leading contemporary artists.

Art Gallery of New South Wales director Maud Page said: ‘Young people are central to the future of both art and the Art Gallery. Presenting ARTEXPRESS 2026 is an exhilarating reminder of the creative intelligence and confidence that will shape Australian art in the years to come. These works are thoughtful, generous and often fearless, offering insight into how young artists see themselves and the world around them.

‘We also celebrate and recognise the teachers, families and communities across the state who have supported these students to reach this point. We are proud to share these works with our audiences and to celebrate this significant moment in the creative journeys of the next generation of New South Wales artists,’ Page said.

ARTEXPRESS is presented by the Art Gallery in partnership with the NSW Department of Education and the NSW Education Standards Authority (NESA).

NESA chief executive officer Paul Martin said: ’ARTEXPRESS at the Art Gallery of New South Wales is a celebration of artistic talents in schools across New South Wales. Congratulations to the hundreds of students nominated and to those who have been selected for exhibition. It is a huge honour to have your work hung in a gallery such as this – and graduates should celebrate that exposure and recognition of their talents.

‘Thank you to the teachers of New South Wales who supported these young people and nurtured their talents. Arts education in NSW plays an important role in cultivating expression and creative and critical thinking in our broader communities,’ Martin said. 

Since 1989, the Art Gallery has been the principal venue for ARTEXPRESS, displaying bodies of work by students from across New South Wales. Many former exhibitors have gone on to distinguished careers, including Archibald Prize 2025 winner Julie Fragar (ARTEXPRESS 1995).

ARTEXPRESS 2026 is now on display at the Art Gallery of New South Wales in the Neilson Family Gallery in Naala Badu until 26 April 2026. Entry is free.  

ARTEXPRESS 2026 exhibitions in New South Wales:  

  • Art Gallery of New South Wales – 4 February to 26 April
  • Hazelhurst Arts Centre, Gymea – 9 February to 12 April
  • Maitland Regional Art Gallery – 21 February to 19 April
  • Broken Hill City Art Gallery – 1 May to 26 July
  • Glasshouse Regional Gallery, Port Macquarie – 9 May to 19 July
  • Wagga Wagga Art Gallery – 23 May to 26 July
  • Western Plains Cultural Centre, Dubbo – 15 August to 4 October
  • Bondi Pavilion Gallery – 24 August to 24 October
  • Hawkesbury Regional Gallery – 28 August to 18 October 

The Art Gallery of New South Wales is the principal venue for ARTEXPRESS 2026, and the exhibition is presented in association with the NSW Department of Education, Arts Unit, and the NSW Education Standards Authority (NESA).

All works from all years are here. Works on display this year from HSC 2025 students include:

Clara O'Reilly
Return to Mt Victoria

My body of work represents our family getaway in Mount Victoria, with exterior views of the home and surrounding landscape supported by a series of interiors. My intention in this work is to convey time spent with family as well as our love for the Australian bush. My compositional choices, such as using the window as a framing device, communicate how this second home is a place of familiarity and respite. Relief printmaking methods allowed for the plates to be re-used, just as were turn again and again, and the rich naturalistic palette references seasonal shifts of weather and light.

Influencing artists:

  • Cressida Campbell
  • Jennifer Keeler-Milne
  • Dianne Fogwell
  • David Frazer

School: Northern Beaches Secondary College, Mackellar Girls Campus

ARTEXPRESS year: 2026

HSC year: 2025

Clara O'Reilly's  'Return to Mt Victoria'.

Out Front 2026 celebrates the next generation artists

In related HSC Arts News, the return of the highly anticipated annual exhibition, Out Front 2026, will run from 20 February to 5 April 2025 at Manly Art Gallery & Museum (MAG&M).

Showcasing the exceptional achievements of 25 HSC Visual Arts students from 21 local secondary schools, this exhibition highlights MAG&M’s commitment to supporting young creatives and enriching community connections.

Mayor Sue Heins has expressed her admiration for the students’ work.

“Once again, our students have amazed us with their ingenuity and artistic skill. Out Front is a wonderful celebration of the creativity nurtured in our schools and the dedication of our teachers.

“It’s inspiring to see young artists bravely tackling big issues—identity, transformation and our environment—through their art. Their passion and fresh perspectives truly reflect the spirit of our community,” Mayor Heins said.

Now in its third decade, Out Front 2026 provides an invaluable platform for emerging talent to display their works in a professional gallery setting. This year’s exhibition features an exciting mix of painting, sculpture, photography, collage and mixed media installations, all boldly addressing contemporary themes relevant to today’s youth.

A highlight of the event is the presentation of two prestigious awards. The Theo Batten Youth Art Award, valued at $5,000, honours artistic excellence and innovation and will be announced on opening night. The KALOF People’s Choice Award invites the community to vote for their favourite artwork, celebrating both peer and public recognition and strengthening ties between students, families, educators and the wider community.

The public is warmly invited to attend the exhibition and the opening on Friday 20 February, from 6–8pm, officially opened by Mayor Sue Heins. Join in for a lively celebration of local creativity, meet the talented young artists and connect with fellow supporters of the arts. Entry is free.

PROGRAM

Out Front 2026
20 February – 5 April 2025

Manly Art Gallery & Museum
West Esplanade Reserve, Manly
Open Tuesday to Sunday, 10am – 5pm
Free entry

Exhibition opening night
Friday 20 February, 6–8pm
To be opened by  Mayor Sue Heins
RSVP link

 Picture: Jennifer Choi, Virtual Daydreams, Acrylic on canvas, NBSC Manly Campus pt1

 

The Bull: The Surf Legend Who Walked Away From Everything

Film By Eric Ebner, published Feb 2026
A secret spot in Baja California, hundreds of miles from civilization. A old milk van converted into the perfect surfing mobile. A 67-year old man, at the peak of his physical fitness and in line with mother nature every step of the way. "The Bull" is the story of San Diego surfing legend Glen Horn and his journey to an unconventional lifestyle..
  • Winner- "Best Picture" Short Film Category- Carolina Surf Film Festival
  • Winner- "Best Documentary" Short Film Category- Florida Surf Film Festival
  • Winner- "Audience Award"- Portuguese Surf Film Festival
  • Winner- "Filmmaker Award, Audience Appreciation" - Save the Waves Film Festival Tour

Opportunities:

Meet The BONDS Flying Roos Athletes in Sydney!

In the lead-up to the KPMG Sydney Sail Grand Prix on 28 February-1 March, the three-time SailGP Champions, the BONDS Flying Roos, are heading to Brookvale and local fans are invited to come down and meet their homegrown heroes.
Join them at the BONDS store located in Westfield Warringah Mall for your chance to say g’day to the Aussie crew, with surprises in store for the first fans to arrive!

Key details:
  • 📍Where: Westfield Warringah Mall, Shop 2611, Level 1
  • 📅When: Sunday 22 February 2026 
  • ⏰Time: 10:00am-11:00am
What’s in it for fans?
Meet the BONDS Flying Roos crew in the flesh, with an exclusive signing session featuring Tom Slingsby, Tash Bryant, Jason Waterhouse, Sam Newton, Iain Jensen and Tom Needham.
  • 📸Snap a pic with the athletes
  • 🎁Plus other surprises and exciting team giveaways.
Rally your crew and RSVP now, you don’t want to miss this one: www.eventbrite.com/e/meet-the-bonds-flying-roos-athletes-in-sydney-tickets-1981830518430 


International Women’s Day Webinar – Balancing the Scales

Thu 5 March 2026: Online | 7:00pm (AEDT)
Celebrate International Women’s Day with Australian Sailing and join an inspiring online conversation with Tash Bryant, Jessica Sweeney, and Stacey Jackson.

Tash Bryant started out in Optimists at Royal Prince Alfred Yacht Club on Pittwater, Tash progressed through the 29er class, became a Youth World Champion, campaigned the 49erFX, and learned to foil during COVID. She now races internationally as Strategist on the Bonds Flying Roos and was part of the Australian team that won Season 3 of SailGP. As the only woman on board, Tash will share her journey, the challenges she’s faced, and how she’s helping shift the balance in elite sport.

We’ll also hear from Jessica Sweeney, Team Lead for Marine and Coastal Hazards at the Bureau of Meteorology. She leads Australia’s national marine forecasting and warning services and is a former meteorologist for two America’s Cup campaigns and the Volvo Ocean Race. An accomplished ocean navigator, she is a Pacific Cup winner, Round Britain and Ireland Race record-setter, and six-time Sydney to Hobart Yacht Race finisher.

Joining them is Stacey Jackson, an elite offshore sailor with nearly 20 Sydney to Hobart starts and multiple Volvo Ocean Race campaigns. She skippered the first all-female professional crew aboard Wild Oats X to second overall in the 2018 Hobart and is fresh from helping The Famous Project become the first all-female crew to complete a non-stop circumnavigation of the globe in a Jules Verne Trophy campaign in January 2026.

This is a fantastic opportunity to hear first-hand how big dreams can start in small boats — and to feel inspired, empowered and motivated to take your own sailing journey further.

Find out more and register here: https://www.sailing.org.au/events/340409

NASA 2026 is a go!!

Registration now open on Liveheats at: https://liveheats.com/NASA

Sign up, lock in the dates - 1st comp Feb 28th!

Battle of the Bands – Youth Edition: at Palm Beach

Ages 12–17
Registrations opening shortly!
Tune up. Plug in. Rock out. 
For registration, please visit our website: www.plambeachclub.com.au
Registration form available on the What’s On page.
📞 02 9974 5566
Club Palm Beach (Palm Beach RSL)

Play Women's Social or Competitive Cricket with Cromer!

Cromer Cricket Club is now seeking women, aged 16+, who want to play cricket in the February 2026 commencing CNSW Women's Metro Competition. This is the only peninsula cricket club that offers an opportunity for girls who can no longer play in the junior clubs due to being almost all grown up.

CCC states their Women's Cricket division is fun for all ages, and a great way to make new friendships or rekindle your old ones, no skills or experience required, just fun!

''Cromer Cricket Club currently fields teams in the Twilight Women's Cricket League. It's a fun social competition with soft balls and no pads required, perfect for beginners!

We are also fielding a team in the new CNSW Women's Metro Competition, a senior traditional cricket competition for female players, the first of its kind. Register now to be part of history!''

Contact Kelvin (registrar@cromercricket.com.au) or Nick (president@cromercricket.com.au) for more info.

CNSW Women's Metro Competition

  • Senior Women's competition for ages 16+ 
  • Sunday afternoon games
  • Mix of 30 over and T20 games
  • Registration includes playing shirt and hat
  • Free for Saturday players
  • Half-season registration available
  • Whether you're 16 or 60, we've got a place for you!
  • A great opportunity to make new friends!
  • A whole heap of fun! 
  • Register now for 2026!

Register here: www.cromercricket.com.au/womens

To inspire you to get involved, a few notes form the past on women's cricket in Australia, with local connections, including the first Australia-England matches.

Pittwater Peninsula Netball Club

2026 season - let's go! Registrations are open until early February.


Netball NSW Online Privacy Policy: Don't Post Pictures of Others without asking 


Avalon Bulldogs Announcement: Female Tackle Teams Kicking Off in 2026!

After huge growth in our Girls Tag program, the Doggies are looking at launching our first-ever female tackle teams  and we’re calling for Expressions of Interest now!

Players: U13s, U14s, U15s, U17s & Opens (Possible U11s if we get the numbers)
Staff Needed: Coaches, Managers, League Safe / First Aid
This is your chance to be part of a massive moment for the Bulldogs and help build the future of women’s footy on the Beaches.
Email; info@avalonbulldogs.com.au with heading 'Female Tackle Teams'.

Get involved. Make history. Go the Doggies!

History in the Making: Female Tackle Coming to the Sharks in 2026! 

We’re excited to announce the Narrabeen Sharks’ first-ever female tackle teams for 2026!
After the success of our girls’ tag program, we’re ready to take the next step — creating pathways for female players from grassroots to the NRLW. 

We’re calling for Expressions of Interest for:
Players – U13s, U14s, U15s, U17s & Opens (plus a possible U11s if enough interest)
Coaches, Managers & Trainers (Level 1, League First Aid, League Safe)

This is your chance to be part of club history and help grow the women’s game at the Sharks!
Contact: president.narrabeensharks@gmail.com to register your interest today.

Financial help for young people

Concessions and financial support for young people.

Includes:

  • You could receive payments and services from Centrelink: Use the payment and services finder to check what support you could receive.
  • Apply for a concession Opal card for students: Receive a reduced fare when travelling on public transport.
  • Financial support for students: Get financial help whilst studying or training.
  • Youth Development Scholarships: Successful applicants will receive $1000 to help with school expenses and support services.
  • Tertiary Access Payment for students: The Tertiary Access Payment can help you with the costs of moving to undertake tertiary study.
  • Relocation scholarship: A once a year payment if you get ABSTUDY or Youth Allowance if you move to or from a regional or remote area for higher education study.
  • Get help finding a place to live and paying your rent: Rent Choice Youth helps young people aged 16 to 24 years to rent a home.

Visit: https://www.nsw.gov.au/living-nsw/young-people/young-people-financial-help

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Mind

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Noun

1. the element of a person that enables them to be aware of the world and their experiences, to think, and to feel; the faculty of consciousness and thought. 2. a person's ability to think and reason; the intellect. 3. A person's attention - being able to understand something or their will or determination to achieve something.

Verb

1. be distressed, annoyed, or worried by.  2. regard as important; feel concern about. 3. Look after or take care of temporarily - eg: babysitting. 4. Be inclined to do something. 5. used to urge someone to do something...''mind you brush your teeth so they don't get rotten and fall out...''

From Old English gemynd ‘memory, thought’, of Germanic origin, from an Indo-European root meaning ‘revolve in the mind, think’, shared by Sanskrit manas and Latin mens ‘mind’.

6 tips to survive and thrive in your first year of university

Photo by RDNE Stock project/Pexels
Sophia WatersUniversity of New England

University study is a major commitment and is quite different to high school. This big new phase of life can feel both daunting and exciting.

But many first years don’t have anyone they can ask for advice on transitioning from school to uni, or may be the first in their family to go to uni.

Reaping the benefits of uni doesn’t happen through hope or just turning up to lectures – you need to ask questions, and be an active, independent learner.

Over the last two decades, I have taught thousands of first year students from various disciplinary backgrounds. I regularly teach a large first year academic writing class, and have designed and managed undergraduate arts courses for nearly half a decade. Providing these evidence-based tips in the early weeks of study helps students take control and set them up for success.

Uni lecturers generally expect students to devote ten to 15 hours of study to each subject each week.

If you’re enrolled in three or more subjects, your studies are almost equivalent to a full-time job.

You might spend this time:

  • reading the subject materials (study guides, textbook chapters, set readings)
  • going to lectures
  • attending tutorials/seminars/workshops
  • working on assessment tasks
  • reading widely and reflecting on what you’ve read
  • regularly checking online learning management systems (such as Blackboard, Moodle or Canvas) for updates and discussion.

So, what do you need to know to survive and thrive as a first year at uni?

1. Do the readings before class, and attend

Reading ahead of time will help you get familiar with what will be taught and identify tricky things to listen out for.

Prepare some questions on these trouble spots to ask in class. It’s likely your classmates will have the same queries.

Just because you have newfound independence, or haven’t done the readings, does not mean it’s OK to skip class.

Showing up helps you stay informed about the subject content and housekeeping, like due dates and how to tackle assignments. Some classes require you to attend or participate to pass.

Going to lectures and tutorials, and having dedicated study hours gives structure and purpose to your day, which help you adjust to university life and stay on track.

2. Keep up. It’s easier than catching up

The study timetable outlines what topics and readings will be covered weekly. Put that timetable somewhere you can see it often. Letting your readings and work pile up can become pretty scary. Missing lectures and ignoring your work will make life harder than it needs to be.

Much of uni study success is about being organised. Your lecturers will have devised the most appropriate order in which to teach you new information.

Prioritise your readings and remember you might have to read them a few times to grasp the content – this is normal in academia.

3. Take notes in class and on your textbooks

This means you can record your interpretation and understanding of what the lecturer is saying while it’s being said.

Your understanding of a topic is really tested when you paraphrase it into your own words.

Once you’ve made your in-class notes, write them up while they’re fresh in your mind. To improve retention, opt for handwriting these rather than typing. You might have to block out some time directly after class for this.

Your textbook and readings are not designed to remain pristine. Write notes in the margins, circle important words and phrases, and use sticky notes.

4. Use positive reframing

When you’re working through new material, it’s easy to succumb to the overwhelm and start directing a lot of negative energy towards it.

Rather than “I can’t do this” and “This is too hard”, try “I can’t do this yet and “This is challenging. It’ll be such an achievement when I nail it.”

Learning a new skill involves shifting from controlled processing to automatic processing. Initially it takes lots of time and mental effort to develop a new skill. With practice, it gets easier.

Your time at uni is about more than just achieving good marks. It is about cultivating your curiosity.

5. Keep a glossary of terms and practise what you’ve learnt

Each week you’ll be learning new terms and concepts. Keeping a log of these as you learn them, giving a brief definition and example or two, will make revision easier.

Work these new terms into your assignments to show your marker you’ve engaged with the subject materials.

Some subjects have weekly exercises and activities to help you understand and consolidate the topic. Take these seriously and use them to revise.

6. Know what’s expected

Yes, you need to know when assignments are due. But you also need to know the university policies and guidelines around things such as asking for an extension, plagiarism, AI use, and conduct. If in doubt, ask your lecturers.

Overall, self-reliance and independence are crucial.

Part of becoming a good student is about taking responsibility for your learning, showing initiative and independence.The Conversation

Sophia Waters, Senior Lecturer in Writing, University of New England

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Worried AI means you won’t get a job when you graduate? Here’s what the research says

August De Richelieu/ Pexels
Lukasz SwiatekUNSW Sydney

The head of the International Monetary Fund, Kristalina Georgieva, has warned young people will suffer the most as an AI “tsunami” wipes out many entry-level roles in coming years.

Tasks that are eliminated are usually what entry-level jobs do at present, so young people searching for jobs find it harder to get to a good placement.

Georgieva is not alone. Other economic and business experts have warned about AI taking entry-level jobs.

As young people prepare to start or continue their university studies, they may be feeling anxious about what AI means for their job prospects. What does the current research say? And how can you prepare for a post-AI workforce while studying?

The situation around the world

At the moment, the impact of AI is uneven and depends on the industry.

A 2025 report from US think tank the Brookings Institution suggests, in general, AI adoption has led to employment and firm growth. Most importantly, AI has not led to widespread job loss.

At the same time, consulting firm McKinsey notes many businesses are experimenting with AI and redesigning how they work. So, some organisations are seeking more technically skilled employees.

Crucially, AI is affecting each industry differently. So, we might see fewer entry-level jobs in some industries, but more in others, or growth in specialist roles.

For example, international researchers have noted agriculture has been a slow adopter of AI. By contrast, colleagues and I have found AI is being rapidly implemented in media and communications, already affecting jobs from advertising to the entertainment industries. Here we are seeing storyboard illustrators, copywriters and virtual effects artists (among others) increasingly being replaced by AI.

So, students need to look carefully at the specific data about their chosen industry (or industries) to understand the current situation and predicted trends.

To do this, you can look at academic research about AI’s impacts on industries around the world, as well as industry news portals and free industry newsletters.

Get ready while studying

Students can also obviously build their knowledge and skills about AI while they are studying.

Specifically, students should look to move from “AI literacy” to “AI fluency”. This means understanding not just how AI works in an industry, but also how it can be used innovatively in different contexts.

If these elements are not already offered by your course, you can look at online guides and specific courses offered by universities, TAFE or other providers.

Students who are already familiar with AI can keep expanding their knowledge and skills. These students can discover the latest research from the world’s key publishers and keep up to date with other AI research news.

For students who aren’t really interested in AI, it’s still important to start getting to grips with the technology. In my research, I’ve suggested getting curious initially about three key things: opportunities, concerns and questions. These three elements can be especially helpful for getting across industry developments: how AI is being used, what issues it’s raising, and which impacts still need to be explored.

Free (online) courses, such as AI For Everyone and the Elements of AI, can help familiarise virtually anyone with the technology.

Strengthening other skills

All students, no matter how familiar they are with AI, can also concentrate on developing general competencies that can apply across any industry. US researchers have pinpointed six key “durable skills” for the AI age:

  • effective communication, to engage with others successfully

  • good adaptability, to respond to workplace, industry and broader social changes

  • strong emotional intelligence, to help everyone thrive in a workplace

  • high-quality creativity, to work with AI in innovative ways

  • sound leadership, to help navigate the challenges that AI creates

  • robust critical thinking, to deal with AI-related problems.

So, look for opportunities to foster these skills in and out of class. This could include engaging in teamwork, joining a club or society, doing voluntary work, or getting paid work experience.

Don’t forget ethics

Finally, students need to consider the ethical issues this new technology creates. Research suggests AI is bringing about changes in ethics across industries and students need to know how to approach AI dilemmas.

For example, they need to feel confident tackling questions about when to use and not use AI, and whether the technology’s environmental impacts outweigh its benefits in different situations.

Students can do this through focused discussions with classmates, facilitated by teachers to tease out the issues. They can also do dedicated courses on AI ethics.The Conversation

Lukasz Swiatek, Lecturer, School of Arts and Media, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Deep-sea fish larvae rewrite the rules of how eyes can be built

Maurolicus muelleri viewed under fluorescent light. Dr Wen Sung Chung
Fabio CortesiThe University of Queensland and Lily FoggUniversity of Helsinki

The deep sea is cold, dark and under immense pressure. Yet life has found a way to prevail there, in the form of some of Earth’s strangest creatures.

Since deep-sea critters have adapted to near darkness, their eyes are particularly unique – pitch-black and fearsome in dragonfish, enormous in giant squid, barrel-shaped in telescope fish. This helps them catch the remaining rays of sunlight penetrating to depth and see the faint glow of bioluminescence.

Deep-sea fishes, however, typically start life in shallower waters in the twilight zone of the ocean (roughly 50–200 metres deep). This is a safe refuge to feed on plankton and grow while avoiding becoming a snack for larger predators.

Our new study, published in Science Advances, shows deep-sea fish larvae have evolved a unique way to maximise their vision in this dusky environment – a finding that challenges scientific understanding of vertebrate vision.

The nightmare of seeing in the twilight zone

The vertebrate retina, located at the back of the eye, has two main types of light-sensitive photoreceptor cells: rod-shaped for dim light and cone-shaped for bright light.

The rods and cones slowly change position inside the retina when moving between dim and bright conditions, which is why you temporarily go blind when you flick on the light switch on your way to the bathroom at night.

While vertebrates that are active during the daytime and predominantly inhabit bright light environments favour cone-dominated vision, animals that live in dim conditions, such as the deep sea or caves, have lost or reduced their cone cells in favour of more rods.

However, vision in twilight is a bit of a nightmare – neither rods nor cones are working at their best. This raises the question of how some animals, such as larval deep-sea fishes, can overcome the limitations of the cone-and-rod retina not only to survive but even to thrive in twilight conditions.

Two small fish against a black background.
Deep-sea fish, such as Maurolicus muelleri and Maurolicus mucronatus live in an environment that is cold, dark and under immense pressure. Dr Wen Sung Chung

Starting where the fish start

To understand how newly born deep-sea fishes see, we had to start where they do: in the twilight zone of the ocean.

We caught larval fish from the Red Sea using fine-meshed nets towed from near the surface to a depth of around 200m. This way we got hold of three different species – the lightfish (Vinciguerria mabahiss) and the hatchetfish (Maurolicus mucronatus), both members of the dragonfishes, and a member of the lanternfishes, the skinnycheek lanternfish (Benthosema pterotum). Next, we studied what their photoreceptor cells looked like on the outside and how they were wired on the inside.

First, we used high-resolution microscopy to examine the cells’ shape in great detail. Then we investigated retinal gene expression to identify which vision genes were activated as the fish grew. Finally, we got some experts in computational modelling of visual proteins on board to simulate which wavelengths of light these tiny fishes may perceive.

By combining all the approaches, we were able to piece together a picture of how these animals see their world. This sounds relatively simple, but working with deep-sea fishes is anything but easy.

While these animals are generally thought of as monsters of the deep, in reality, most reach only about the size of a thumb – even when fully grown. They are also very fragile and difficult to get.

Working with larval specimens that are only a few millimetres long is even more difficult. However, by leveraging support from the deep-sea research community, we were fortunate enough to combine specimens from multiple research expeditions to piece together an unusually complete picture of visual development in these elusive animals.

A small black fish with an open mouth and a lure on its head.
Anglerfishes are often depicted as the giant monsters of the deep, but in reality they are relatively. small, around the size of a hand at best. Dr Wen-Sung Chung

So, what did we discover?

For decades, scientists have thought that, as vertebrates grow, the development of their retina follows a predictable pattern: cones form first, then rods. But the deep-sea fish we studied do not follow this rule.

We found that, as larvae, they mostly use a mix-and-match type of hybrid photoreceptor. The cells they are using early on look like rods but use the molecular machinery of cones, making them rod-like cones.

In some of the species we studied, these hybrid cells were a temporary solution, replaced by “normal” rods as the fish grew and migrated into deeper, darker waters.

However, in the hatchetfish, which spends its whole life in twilight, the adults keep their rod-like cone cells throughout life, essentially building their entire visual system around this extra type of cell.

Our research shows this is not a minor tweak to the system. Instead, it represents a fundamentally different developmental pathway for vertebrate vision.

Biology doesn’t fit into neat boxes

So why bother with these hybrid cells?

It seems that to overcome the visual limitations of the twilight zone, rod-like cones offer the best of both worlds: the light-capturing ability of rods combined with the faster, less bright-light sensitive properties of cones. For a tiny fish trying to survive in the murky midwater, this could mean the difference between spotting dinner or becoming it.

For more than a century, biology textbooks have taught that vertebrate vision is built from two clearly defined cell types. Our findings show these tidy categories are much more blurred.

Deep-sea fish larvae combine features of both rods and cones into a single, highly specialised cell optimised for life in between light and darkness. In the murky depths of the ocean, deep-sea fish larvae have quietly rewritten the rules of how eyes can be built, and in doing so, remind us that biology rarely fits into neat boxes.The Conversation

Fabio Cortesi, ARC Future Fellow, Faculty of Science, The University of Queensland and Lily Fogg, Postdoctoral Researcher, Helsinki Institute of Life Science, University of Helsinki

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What a Renaissance plate reveals about a woman who shaped literary history

The plate made for Isabella d’Este-Gonzaga in 1524. V&ACC BY-NC-ND
Maria Clotilde CamboniUniversity of Oxford

The expression is: “handed to you on a silver plate”. But a recent breakthrough came to me on a painted ceramic one. Following the clues on that plate led me to solve a small historical puzzle: who once owned a Renaissance manuscript now held in Paris.

Known as a maiolica, the plate features three different imprese: that is, emblems used during the Renaissance as personal badges. Under a coat of arms is a music scroll bearing pauses and rests; on a balustrade in the foreground, the Latin motto Nec spe nec metu (neither by hope nor by fear), and, repeated twice, the most unassuming of all: a Latin numeral, XXVII.

I had seen that number years earlier, inside an embellishment on the first page of a manuscript at Paris’ Bibliothèque nationale de France, not far from where the plate was being shown, on a temporary loan from the V&A to the Al Thani Collection Foundation. The manuscript was a partial copy of a lost one, and I had been trying to figure out where it came from.

The coat of arms and the different imprese were all Isabella d’Este’s (1474–1539), Marchioness of Mantua, daughter of Duke Ercole I d'Este of Ferrara and Eleanor of Aragon. The answer was suddenly obvious: the Parisian manuscript was originally in her personal library.

pencil portrait of Isabelle d'Este
Portrait d'Isabelle d'Este by Leonardo da Vinci (1499). Louvre

Despite marrying at just 16, Isabella was an extremely well-educated woman. This likely helped her to play her part in ruling Mantua, especially when her husband Francesco Gonzaga was away fighting in the Italian wars and then taken prisoner. She also had considerable personal financial resources, and was free to spend her money as she wished, enabling her to become the most significant female collector of the Italian Renaissance.

A patron of the arts, Isabella was portrayed in medals, paintings and drawings by several artists, including Leonardo da Vinci. To house her antiquities and artworks, she adapted some rooms within her apartments. One of them was known as her studiolo, a room dedicated to private reading and writing. Many leading artists were commissioned paintings to adorn it, as well as her new apartment in Mantua, where she moved after her husband’s death in 1519.

Isabella’s considerable library was also housed there. A partial inventory drawn up after her death reveals that it was more akin to the libraries of Renaissance elite men than courtly women. It consisted mostly of contemporary books and secular works, instead of inherited volumes and religious texts, and it contained an unusually high proportion of handwritten books.

During her lifetime, Isabella used at least eight different imprese. These could be marks of possession, as seen with the Parisian manuscript and the V&A plate, as well as the other 23 surviving pieces of its dinner service. However, they were also intended to convey coded messages.

A Renaissance impresa contained some sort of personal statement, concerning its bearer’s situation, philosophy, aspirations, personal qualities. Unlike coats of arms, which were inherited, it expressed nothing related to family lines or social standing, could be used by anyone who decided to design one and altered or discarded at will.

Since its true meaning required interpretation, an impresa was often ambiguous. Isabella’s pauses and rests on a musical scroll could signify silence, a traditionally feminine virtue, but also, being symmetrical, a visual representation of the principle of balance – not unlike her Latin motto. Whatever its meaning, it was one of those Isabella chose to adorn the gowns she wore for special occasions, namely, her brother Alfonso’s wedding to Lucrezia Borgia in 1502.

Painting of gods being looked up to by men
One of the many paintings commissioned for Isabella’s studiolo, Parnassus by Andrea Mantegna (1496–1497). Louvre

The marchioness did not appreciate overly complicated explanations of her imprese. In 1506, when the author Mario Equicola wrote a booklet on her Latin motto, she stated in a letter to the noblewoman who was protecting him at the time that “we did not have it created with as many mysteries as he has attributed to it”.

Isabella’s Latin motto was, unusually, reused by others, including one of her sons and a Spanish king. Not so the enigmatic XXVII. Its presence on the first page of the Parisian manuscript is therefore proof of Isabella’s ownership.

Other evidence was already known. The Parisian manuscript is a partial copy of the lost Raccolta Aragonese, an anthology of rare early Italian poetry, gifted by the statesman Lorenzo de’ Medici to Federico d’Aragona, son of the king of Naples, around 1477. The last sovereign of his dynasty, Federico went into exile in France with his books.

After his death, most of them passed to his widow, who settled in Ferrara under the protection of Isabella’s family. Her letters reveal that in January 1512 she managed to borrow the collection:

“The book of the first vernacular poets that Your Majesty was so good as to lend me I will hold in all due respect and reverence, and it will not fall into the hands of anyone else. As soon as I have finished with it, I will send it back to Your Majesty, whom I thank for her great humanity toward me.”

Isabella was not lying. She wanted the book because of the rarity of its contents, and she liked to be the sole or near-sole owner of texts. We could already hypothesise that she had commissioned a copy, and we now know this to be true. Thanks to her initiative, these rare poems enjoyed wider circulation; but this is a result neither she nor her correspondent could have anticipated.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.The Conversation


Maria Clotilde Camboni, Honorary Research Fellow, History, University of Oxford

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Communal bathing was a public good. Then it got hijacked by wellness culture

Sergey Mironov/Getty
Jennifer E. ChengWestern Sydney University and Michelle O'SheaWestern Sydney University

Bathhouses are making a wave in Australia and overseas. And it’s not an isolated trend; it reflects the broader advancement of the global wellness economy, which some reports suggest is outpacing even IT and sport in growth.

The Australian wellness sector, too, is booming. According to a report from the Global Wellness Institute, Australia has one of the world’s fastest-growing wellness economies, growing at an annual rate of 7.5% from 2019 to 2023 – with bathhouses, thermal springs, ice baths and saunas playing a key role.

Bathing together for leisure

Despite consumers’ recent heightened interest in saunas and bathhouses, these activities have a long history.

In Finland, sauna bathing – where water is thrown on hot stones to release steam – is a ritual believed to date back as far as 7000 BC.

Saunas are an important part of daily life in Finland, where it will generally snow for several months of the year. Alessandro Rampazzo/Anadolu via Getty Images

One of the first known saunas took the form of a pit dug into the ground. In this “pit sauna”, a pile of stones at the bottom was heated with a campfire.

Sweat houses from the Bronze Age have also been found in Britain and Ireland, as well as ancient Islamic civilisations, and among Indigenous groups in Mexico and North America.

Aerial view of remnants of an ancient Roman bath structure.
Remnants of an ancient Roman bath complex uncovered by archaeological excavations in Elazig, Turkey. The structure covers an area of 75 square meters and dates back about 1,700 years to the Late Roman Period. Ismail Sen/Anadolu via Getty Images

The practice of onsen (hot spring) bathing in Japan also has a history dating back more than 2,000 years.

In Australia, First Nations peoples have bathed in rock pools, waterholes, and billabongs for millennia, viewing fresh and salt water alike as vital cultural, spiritual and agricultural resources.

These ancient bathing practices stand in stark contrast to the modern bathing culture taking over our cities.

The Australian context: indecency and necessity

Sea bathing had become popular in Europe by the 18th century, prior to Australia’s colonisation. In England, Queen Victoria (1819–1901) further popularised the activity by bathing regularly on the Isle of Wight, getting changed in a wooden cart called a “bathing machine” to preserve modesty.

An old engraving shows women swimming in the ocean behind wooden bathing machines.
A 19th century engraving by British artist William Heath, ‘Mermaids at Brighton’ shows women swimming in the ocean behind their bathing machines. Wikimedia

It was also in Britain during Queen Victoria’s lifetime that swimming for sport – as opposed to relaxation, military training or survival – became common practice. Bathing for leisure and hygiene has a much longer history than swimming for sport.

In 1810, New South Wales governor Lachlan Macquarie prohibited the “indecent and improper custom […] of soldiers, sailors and inhabitants of the town” bathing at the government wharf and dock yard in Sydney.

Subsequently, Ralph Darling, NSW governor from 1825 to 1831, had one of the country’s first private bathing houses constructed by Woolloomooloo Bay. Successive governors’ families are thought to have made regular use of the bathing house in the summers.

Melbourne City Baths opened in 1860 and remains operational today. The complex’s original purpose was to discourage people from bathing in the polluted Yarra River, which was believed to have caused an epidemic of typhoid fever. Alongside the “swimming” baths, facilities at the site originally included slipper baths (freestanding tubs) and later included Jewish mikvah (ritual) baths and Turkish baths.

A black and white photo of the front exterior of Melbourne City Baths.
A 1914 picture of the exterior of Melbourne City Baths, located on 420 Swanston St, Carlton. State Library of Victoria

Municipal baths were a key feature of daily life in early Melbourne, as many houses had little provision for private bathing. As of 1943, hot-water systems were installed in just 2% of homes in inner Melbourne, while more than a quarter of residents were still boiling water on stove tops for bathing.

From the late 1940s, however, many homes began installing gas or electric hot-water systems. And by the early 1960s the majority of Australian households had access to running hot water for washing and bathing. This contributed to the decline of public baths.

Historically, access to public baths wasn’t equal for all. Women’s access to the Melbourne City Baths was restricted to just a few hours a day until a major redevelopment in 1904.

The facility was also initially gender-segregated and had “second-class” (working class) patrons relegated to the basement, with first class amenities on the floor above. Mixed-gender bathing was introduced in 1947.

Bathing gets a glow up

Today’s urban bathhouses are sites where water, architecture and shared experience intersect. They typically feature heated pools, cold pools, spas and steam rooms, with purported health benefits for attendees.

The efficacy of using spa-based therapy as a form of treatment is increasingly being studied in various contexts, including for post-operative recovery. Recent research has shown it to be promising, demonstrating potential in reducing inflammation, alleviating pain and promoting motor recovery.

In one study of about 500 sauna users, reduced stress, reduced muscle pain and improved sleep and social connection were among the key therapeutic benefits cited by respondents.

More research is needed to establish the full potential therapeutic uses of spa-based therapies.

From connection to capitalism

The current bathhouse culture taking hold in Australia and New Zealand has emerged in part, as an antidote to pandemic isolation.

Many bespoke spa facilities market themselves as spaces for reconnection – and are proving to be popular (and healthier) alternatives to pubs, bars and nightclubs.

But developing these spaces demands significant investment. Industry experts report construction costs of about A$5–6 million for bathhouses, and $3–4 million for sauna clubs. They are also expensive to operate, manage and clean – and visitors can often expect to pay hefty entry prices.

Something we already have

Despite the desirability of contemporary bathhouses, these spaces are hardly egalitarian. Their focus is turning a profit.

One could instead visit one of the existing 1,300 public aquatic centres in Australia, many of which have spa, sauna and steam room facilities. A casual visit to most of these costs A$10–$20. So why are so people forking out more than twice the amount for a luxury bathhouse?

A young boy and girl in bath robes put on their goggles next to an indoor pool.
Most public aquatic centress today offer spa, sauna and/or steam room facilities, for a fraction of the price of luxury bathhouses. Getty Images

In 2016, writer and translator Jamie Mackay suggested bringing back public bathhouses could help combat the isolation many city dwellers face by creating spaces for people to come together. He saw bathhouses as truly public places — affordable, flexible and open to all — unlike today’s upscale spa and wellness centres.

Dalva Lamminmäki, a doctoral researcher of sauna culture at the University of Eastern Finland, observes that the resurgence of saunas sometimes neglects a core element of what makes the sauna experience meaningful: that the “sauna is a place of equality”.

Luxury bathouses, meanwhile, could be viewed as yet another case of neoliberal commercialism.The Conversation

Jennifer E. Cheng, Researcher and Lecturer in Sociology, Western Sydney University and Michelle O'Shea, Senior Lecturer, School of Business, Western Sydney University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How bird poo fuelled the rise of Peru’s powerful Chincha Kingdom

Islands off the coast of Peru are home to millions of seabirds. Their droppings were an important fertiliser for Indigenous people in the Andes. Jo Osborn
Jo OsbornTexas A&M UniversityEmily MiltonSmithsonian Institution, and Jacob L. BongersUniversity of Sydney

In 1532, in the city of Cajamarca, Peru, Spanish conquistador Francisco Pizarro and a group of Europeans took the Inca ruler Atahualpa hostage, setting the stage for the fall of the Inca Empire.

Before this fateful attack, Pizarro’s brother, Pedro Pizarro, made a curious observation: other than the Inca himself, the Lord of Chincha was the only person at Cajamarca carried on a litter, a carrying platform.

Why did the Lord of Chincha occupy such a high position in Inca society? In our new study published in PLOS One, we find evidence for a surprising potential source of power and influence: bird poo.

A potent and precious resource

Chincha, in southern Peru, is one of several river valleys along the desert coast fed by Andean highland waters, which have long been key to irrigation agriculture. About 25 kilometres out to sea are the Chincha Islands, with the largest guano deposits in the Pacific.

Seabird guano, or excrement, is a highly potent organic fertiliser. Compared to terrestrial manures such as cow dung, guano contains vastly more nitrogen and phosphorus, which are essential for plant growth.

On the Peruvian coast, the Humboldt/Peru ocean current creates rich fisheries. These fisheries support massive seabird colonies that roost on the rocky offshore islands.

Rocky island covered in white bird droppings.
Seabirds use coastal islands to build their nests, and find food nearby in the rich fisheries of the Peruvian current. Jo Osborn

Thanks to the dry, nearly rainless climate, the seabird guano doesn’t wash away, but continues to pile up until many meters tall. This unique environmental combination makes Peruvian guano particularly prized.

Our research combines iconography, historic written accounts, and the stable isotope analysis of archaeological maize (Zea mays) to show Indigenous communities in the Chincha Valley used seabird guano at least 800 years ago to fertilise crops and boost agricultural production.

We suggest guano likely shaped the rise of the Chincha Kingdom and its eventual relationship with the Inca Empire.

Lords of the desert coast

The Chincha Kingdom (1000–1400 CE) was a large-scale society comprising an estimated 100,000 people. It was organised into specialist communities such as fisherfolk, farmers and merchants. This society controlled the Chincha Valley until it was brought into the Inca Empire in the 15th century.

Given the proximity of historically important guano deposits on the Chincha Islands, Peruvian historian Marco Curatola proposed in 1997 that seabird guano was an important source of Chincha’s wealth. We tested this hypothesis and found strong support.

A biochemical test

Biochemical analysis is a reliable way to identify the use of fertilisers in the past. One experimental 2012 study showed plants fertilised with dung from camelids (alpacas and llamas) and seabirds show higher nitrogen isotope values than unfertilised crops.

Maize cobs on a grey background
Archaeological maize cobs were collected from sites in the Chincha Valley for isotopic analysis. C. O'Shea

We analysed 35 maize samples recovered from graves in the Chincha Valley, documented as part of an earlier study on burial practices.

Most of the samples produced higher nitrogen isotope values than expected for unfertilised maize, suggesting some form of fertilisation occurred. About half of the samples had extremely high values. These results are so far only consistent with the use of seabird guano.

This chemical analysis confirms the use of guano on pre-Hispanic crops.

Imagery and written sources

Guano – and the birds that produce it – also held broader significance to the Chincha people.

Our analysis of archaeological artefacts suggests the Chincha people had a profound understanding of the connection between the land, sea and sky. Their use of guano and their relationship with the islands was not just a practical choice; it was deeply embedded in their worldview.

Carved wooden paddle decorated with red, green, and yellow paint, featuring a line of small figures at the top and animal carvings down the center.
This decorated wooden object from Chincha, which has been interpreted as either a ceremonial paddle or digging stick, depicts seabirds and fish alongside human figures and geometric designs. The Met Museum, 1979.206.1025.

This reverence is reflected in Chincha material culture. Across their textiles, ceramics, architectural friezes and metal objects, we see repeated images of seabirds, fish, waves, and sprouting maize.

These images demonstrate the Chincha understood the entire ecological cycle: seabirds ate fish from the ocean and produced guano, guano fed the maize, and the maize fed the people.

This relationship may even be reflected today through local Peruvian place names. Pisco is derived from a Quechua word for bird, and Lunahuaná might translate to “people of the guano”.

Poo power

As an effective and highly valuable fertiliser, guano also enabled Chincha communities to increase crop yields and expand trade networks, contributing to the economic expansion of the Chincha Kingdom.

We suggest fisherfolk sailed to the Chincha Islands to acquire guano and then provided it to farmers, as well as to seafaring merchants to trade along the coast and into the highlands.

Chincha’s agricultural productivity and growing mercantile influence would have enhanced its strategic importance for the Inca Empire. Around 1400 CE, the Inca incorporated the Chincha after a “peaceful” capitulation, creating one of the few calculated alliances of its kind.

Although the “deal” made between Chincha and Inca remains debated, we suggest seabird guano played a role in these negotiations, as the Inca state was interested in maize but lacked access to marine fertilisers. This may be why the Lord of Chincha was held in such high esteem that he was carried aloft on a litter, as Pedro Pizarro noted.

The Inca came to value this fertiliser so much they imposed access restrictions on the guano islands during the breeding season and forbade the killing of guano birds, on or off the islands, under penalty of death.

Our study expands the known geographic extent of guano fertilisation in the pre-Inca world and strongly supports scholarship that predicted its role in the rise of the Chincha Kingdom. However, there is still much to learn about how widespread it was, and when this practice began.The Conversation

Jo Osborn, Assistant Professor of Anthropology, Texas A&M UniversityEmily Milton, Peter Buck Postdoctoral Fellow, Smithsonian Institution, and Jacob L. Bongers, Tom Austen Brown Postdoctoral Research Associate, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why Aristotle would hate Valentine’s Day – and his five steps to love

Janset Özün ÇetinkayaUniversity of Nottingham and Ian James KiddUniversity of Nottingham

Valentine’s Day is traditionally a time of heart-shaped balloons, overpriced roses and fully-booked restaurants. Couples kiss and hold hands, smiling selfies celebrate a day of public displays of devotion.

Why do so many of us feel such pressure to offer grand gestures, buy pricey gifts, and go through elaborate displays of affection? Presumably, to prove our love. Valentine’s Day is a showy, one-day-a-year demonstration that promises to do just that.

For the ancient Greek philosopher Aristotle (384-322BC), however, this approach misunderstands the nature of love. For him, the true form of love wasn’t intense passion or grand gestures on one day of the year. Instead, it’s a steady commitment to help your beloved grow into their best version through everyday practices of care.

Aristotle wrote extensively about love, friendship and their place in a good life. His main book on ethics, the Nicomachean Ethics (350BC) – affectionately named after his son – is a classic work on virtue and happiness.

As a keen observer of human life, Aristotle’s philosophy was based on a real understanding of human beings – our emotions, needs, habits and the ways we live alongside each other. Humans are social animals, he argued, so we must live in a society and work toward a common good. More than this, we are “pairing” creatures. Coupling and sharing a life matters deeply. Interestingly, he believed this means learning to love ourselves, as well as others.

The five steps to love

Aristotle said we should love ourselves the most. This could sound like a celebration of narcissism, a gospel for the selfie age. But Aristotle meant that truly loving someone means loving them as another self, extending our self-love to another – a process with five parts.

First, loving yourself means desiring and promoting your own good. Do the same for your loved one. Desire and promote whatever is in their interest. Second, work for their own safety and security as you would your own. Third, self-love means enjoying your own company and taking pleasure in reminiscing about past times and looking forward to good times to come. Desire and enjoy their company, too, in a shared life of interests, commitments and hopes.

Painting of a woman looking in a mirror
Psyche by Berthe Morisot (1876). Aristotle believed you should love a partner as yourself. Thyssen-Bornemisza Museum

Fourth, make sure your desires are rational, and only desire things that are part of a “fine and noble life” – a life that is virtuous, rational and filled with meaningful relationships. Fifth, openly express and experience your pains and pleasures. Consistently pursue what brings you pleasure and avoid whatever brings pain. For your beloved, recognise and share in their pains and pleasures, as if they were your own.

Love, Aristotle says, comes from the sense that the lover is “mine”. If that sounds icky to a modern ear, the point isn’t about ownership. When I say “my beloved is mine”, I mean “we belong together in a shared life”. I do not own my finger, it belongs to my hand, which is a part of me. Likewise, I don’t own my beloved, but they belong to our loving relationship, of which I, too, am part.

Love, friendship and skill

Aristotle also described lovers as friends – not any old good friends but each other’s other halves. Like friends, lovers hang out, have each other’s back and support one another. As lovers, they treat each other as a part of themselves. Aristotle thinks it’s a big red flag if your lover doesn’t care as much about your feelings and needs as their own, no matter how grand their gestures and gifts.

Love was not a passive feeling for Aristotle, but a practice requiring skill. A lover, he argues, makes themselves better for their beloved, unlike a carpenter who makes a table for himself. Loving is a practice of constant self-improvement for the sake of another person. Being a good lover means striving to be a better person, so that you and your beloved bring out the best in each other.

For Aristotle, love is not about how your Valentine makes you feel on a single night of the year. Gifts and gestures are nice, but the real proof of love is nothing you can buy. Loving another as much and as well as you love yourself is the real proof, one that takes time and practice. To quote Aristotle, “one swallow does not make spring” – nor does one magical night really show our love.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.The Conversation


Janset Özün Çetinkaya, Teaching Associate in Philosophy, University of Nottingham and Ian James Kidd, Assistant Professor of Philosophy, University of Nottingham

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Forget flowers: lovers in 18th- and 19th-century Ireland exchanged hair

Only a Lock of Hair by John Everett Millais (1857-1858). Manchester Art GallertCC BY-NC
Leanne CalvertUniversity of Limerick

In 18th- and 19th-century Ireland, it was common for courting couples to exchange gifts to mark their developing relationships. Many of these items are familiar gifts today: books, cards, items of clothing, jewellery and sweet treats. Others, however, are less familiar. In fact, some of the gifts exchanged by couples in the past might give many today the dreaded ick – especially those items of the hairier variety.

While you might be familiar with the tradition of mourning hairwork jewellery that was made and worn to remember deceased loved ones in the Victorian era, hairy tokens were traditionally a gift exchanged between couples in love. In my new book, Pious and Promiscuous: Life, Love and Family in Presbyterian Ulster, I explore the tradition of gift-giving among courting couples in Ulster – from hairy tokens to food and clothing. The book reveals for the first time the personal stories that shaped the rituals of Presbyterian family life in 18th- and 19th-century Ulster.

Watercolour of a man being kissed by his lover in a kitchen
Batchelor’s Fare, Bread, Cheese, and Kisses, by Thomas Rowlandson (1813). Met Museum

Gift-givers thought deeply about what to gift that special someone. Items exchanged in courtship were carefully chosen because different gifts had different meanings. Whereas shirts were understood to symbolise friendship, items like gloves – which covered the hands and fingers – were associated with marriage.

Those on the receiving end also had to consider whether or not to accept these tokens. Accepting a gift from a would-be suitor indicated that the receiver shared their romantic interest. Refusing a gift communicated the opposite. The tradition of gift-giving could also be used to break off relationships. When a relationship failed, people were expected to return any gifts that they had received.

The most special token that a person could gift was their hair. As a physical piece of a person that would outlast their human life, a lock of hair symbolised immortal love. Locks of hair were generally gifted by women to men and sometimes at the request of their male suitors.

Men might write to their beloveds and request that they enclose a lock of hair in their next letter as a token with which to remember them. Locks of hair could be tied into neat plaits and fashioned with a ribbon, enabling the lock to keep its shape. Hair could also be pressed into jewellery or placed in the back of miniatures.

The recipients of these hairy tokens would engage with them both physically and sensorially. Locks of hair could be rubbed, stroked, sniffed and gazed upon as the recipient thought about the person who had sent it. Given their size, these little hairy tokens could also be secreted inside of clothes and worn next to the heart, or placed under a pillow and slept upon, enabling the recipient to dream of its hairy bestower.

A hairy fetish

Some people appear to have had a real appetite, perhaps even a fetish, for hairy gifts and tokens. Robert James Tennent (1803–80), a middle-class man who came of age in 19th-century Belfast, is one such example. Catalogued among his papers at the Public Record Office of Northern Ireland, Belfast, is an extraordinary archive of hairy treasures, each seemingly representing a woman with whom he had some sort of romantic connection.

What makes Tennent’s collection so intriguing is its size. It contains 14 locks of hair, each wrapped individually in a small handmade envelope. At one time the collection may have been even larger. Among the items is an envelope, now empty, bearing the label “Hair”, which possibly held a lock of hair that has since been lost.

The hair itself varies dramatically in colour, condition and care: wisps of fine blonde hair; neatly tied plaits of brown hair, fashioned with pink string; and unshapen masses of dark hair streaked with grey. The collection also contains a broken ring.

In 2022, I published a paper on Tennent’s hairy treasures in which I theorised that he kept and curated the collection as a trophy cabinet of his past romantic (and sexual) adventures. I argued that the collection served the purpose of a handmade and homemade pornographic archive that Tennent could revisit to transport himself back to pleasured memories and experiences.

Evidence for this view is inscribed in the collection itself. Twelve of the locks are labelled, telling us the name of the woman to whom the hair belonged. We can identify ten women in total. Eleven of the locks are also dated, recording the day, month and year that they were received by Tennent. The collection was assembled between 1818 and 1827, when Tennent was between 15 and 24 years of age.

Tennent’s archiving efforts betray his philandering lifestyle when a younger, unmarried man. There is a considerable overlap in the dates that the different locks of hair were collected. In fact, at least two locks of hair were received into his collection at the same time that Tennent was courting his future wife, Eliza McCracken. The pair were involved in a rather bumpy courtship from 1826, eventually marrying in 1830.

Whereas item nine in the collection labelled “Hair of Lucretia Belfast” is dated December 13 1826, item 15, belonging to Ellen Lepper, is dated June 26 1827. A lock of McCracken’s hair is also included in Tennent’s collection; a partly unrolled plait of brown hair bears the label: “Eliza, Where is the Bosom friend dearer than all.”

That Tennent returned to these tokens to revisit his bachelorhood is suggested by the physical state of some of the items too. A lock of hair attributed to Miss Catharine Louise Lawless (dated November 10/11 1820), may have once been tied into a neat little plait. It is likely that the plait has come undone overtime due to excessive touch.

So, if you find yourself stumped, browsing the shelves this Valentine’s Day for the perfect gift for your other half, perhaps the answer lies atop of your head. Hairy tokens might not suit everyone’s taste today, but they remind us that love and how we express it has always been intensely personal.

From locks of hair twisted into plaits and encased in jewellery to chocolate hearts and handwritten love notes, the tokens we give carry meaning and memory. Love and affection, then as now, is an expression of our intimate sides and can occasionally be a little hairy.

Leanne Calvert, Assistant Professor in Irish History, University of Limerick

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Unpacking Bad Bunny’s Superbowl show – an alternative joyful vision for America

EPA/John G. Mabanglo
Consuelo Martinez ReyesMacquarie University

Puerto Rican singer Bad Bunny (Benito Antonio Martínez Ocasio) made history this weekend as the first Superbowl halftime headliner to sing only in Spanish – that too at a moment when the United States is facing a hostile anti-immigration climate.

The show’s message of love and togetherness has reverberated across countries and cultures. It is also chock-full of symbolism and messaging that represents an alternative America to the one taking shape under Donald Trump.

Bad Bunny performed in the halftime show of the Super Bowl between the New England Patriots and the Seattle Seahawks. Chris Torres/EPA

A fiesta celebrating Puerto Rican culture

The performance took place in a noticeably Puerto Rican setting. Fresh coconuts and piragua (snow cone) carts led the way to domino players and boxers (Puerto Rico is the world’s largest contributor of boxing champions per capita).

Bad Bunny opens with the viral hit Tití me preguntó (Tití asked me). He walks through a crew wearing costumes typical of Puerto Rican peasants, with traditional straw pava hats and string ropes for belts.

This sugarcane field set is a nod to an important aspect of Caribbean history, wherein sugarcane plantations represent a shared history of slavery. At the same time, they signify an immediate link to land, hard work, national identity, and Puerto Rico’s agricultural roots.

The nation’s sugarcane industry was aggressively changed under Operation Bootstrap, a series of economic projects pushed by the US federal government from around 1947. This encouraged the establishment of factories, and private and foreign investment, to the detriment of the island’s economy and infrastructure. It provoked mass unemployment and migration to the US and, by the 1950s, had forever changed Puerto Ricans’ way of life.

While some audiences criticised the choice to sing the songs Tití me preguntó and Yo perreo sola (I twerk alone), due to their sexual lyrics, others lauded their inclusion as a form of LGBTQIA+ inclusivity. These were followed by the party-pleasers Safaera, Eoo, Party and Voy a llevarte pa PR.

Lady Gaga made a surprise appearance, singing a salsa-style version of her hit song Die with a Smile, atop a stage replica of the famous El Morro fortress in San Juan.

Gaga wore a light blue dress of the same shade that once featured in Puerto Rico’s original flag. This flag, however, was banned in 1948 under an American gag law (which ended in 1957) that tried to stifle the island’s independence movement.

During Gaga’s song, the scene of a live wedding (yes, the couple actually got married) cements Benito’s message of togetherness.

A bride and groom had their wedding held live onstage. AP/Frank Franklin II

A show loaded with symbolism

Apart from matching the wedding theme, the prominence of white clothing in the show reflects a reality of Caribbean daily life, wherein white was often worn to combat the harsh heat.

It also recalls various attire customarily worn in local music genres such as bomba and plena, as well as in Afro-Cuban religious traditions such as santería.

Benito’s own white shirt is emblazoned with the name “Ocasio” and the number 64. This is an homage to his late-uncle, who was born in 1964. The tribute offers a tender lesson on Spanish naming customs, as well as the cultural importance of family.

At one point, we see Benito hand his recently-won Grammy trophy (his album Debí Tirar Más Fotos was the first-ever Spanish-language album to win Album of The Year) to kid actor Lincoln Fox. Viewers were quick to point out Fox’s resemblance to Liam Conejos, the five-year-old boy whose detention by ICE agents last month caused national outrage.

Ricky Martin sang the heavily political track Lo que le pasó a Hawaii (What happened to Hawaii). This song pleads for Puerto Rico to not share a similar fate to Hawaii – the last state to join the union, at the cost of significant cultural loss, land, language and tradition.

Martin is framed by sparks coming from electrical poles in the background. They symbolise Puerto Rico’s poor electrical infrastructure, which was worsened in the aftermath of hurricanes María and Irma in 2017, and the electrical grid’s privatisation in 2021.

The show closes on a lighter note, with songs that highlight Puerto Ricanness. The track Café con Ron (Coffee with rum) takes the audience back to island customs, and the opening cañaveral (sugarcane fields).

Meanwhile, DtMF/Debí tirar más fotos (I should have taken more photos) evokes nostalgia for the past, and serves as a reminder of intercontinental unity.

Behind the crowd of pleneros (Puerto Rican drum players), a background screen reads: “The only thing more powerful than hate is love” – a direct challenge to the the anti-immigration policies currently permeating the US.

Benito also pays tribute to iconic reggaeton predecessors with the inclusion of tracks by Tego Calderón, and Daddy Yankee’s 2004 hit Gasolina, among others.

Freedom in the face of oppression

President Donald Trump described the event as “one of the worst, EVER!” and a “slap in the face” to the US. I never thought I would agree with Trump, but a slap in the face it was – one that reminded us all of the fabric of American culture.

Bad Bunny’s performance not only provided visibility to the significant Latinx/Latine population that holds the US together, it also served as evidence that accommodating to Anglo culture is no longer a requirement to fit in – especially for younger generations.

The halftime show served as a source of pride for Latine people around the world. John G. Mabanglo/EPA

As Bad Bunny pronounced the famous line “God Bless America” – going on to list multiple countries and territories, including Puerto Rico – he imparted a lesson all Spanish-speakers have been given at least once in our lives. For us, “America” is not limited to the land that lies between Canada and Mexico, but rather extends across continents.

Benito’s geography lesson ends with the parting words “seguimos aquí” (we are still here) which, due to the Spanish language’s use of the present tense as future, can also be translated into “we will continue to be here”. A powerful message indeed.The Conversation

Consuelo Martinez Reyes, Senior Lecturer in Spanish and Latin American Studies, Macquarie University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The Bull: The Surf Legend Who Walked Away From Everything

Film By Eric Ebner, published Feb 2026
A secret spot in Baja California, hundreds of miles from civilization. A old milk van converted into the perfect surfing mobile. A 67-year old man, at the peak of his physical fitness and in line with mother nature every step of the way. "The Bull" is the story of San Diego surfing legend Glen Horn and his journey to an unconventional lifestyle..
  • Winner- "Best Picture" Short Film Category- Carolina Surf Film Festival
  • Winner- "Best Documentary" Short Film Category- Florida Surf Film Festival
  • Winner- "Audience Award"- Portuguese Surf Film Festival
  • Winner- "Filmmaker Award, Audience Appreciation" - Save the Waves Film Festival Tour

Mow for Ol'Mate in March: 

Sunday, 1 March 2026 - 09:00 am to Tuesday, 31 March 2026 - 05:00 pm
It's a simple idea with a big heart: neighbours helping neighbours, right in their own backyards. By mowing a couple of lawns for older members of the community, you're not just tidying up - you're checking in, having a chat and making sure they're safe, supported and doing OK at home.

A freshly mown lawn can mean independence, dignity and peace of mind - and sometimes a reason to to stop, say hello and connect. So, grab a mower in March and be part of something special in the Northern Beaches Community.

Join this amazing community mow-ment today. Register your interest via enquiries@mwpcare.com.au or call 9913 3244.

OR Are you over 65 and would like your lawn mowed? Call our friendly team on 9913 3244 to register your interest.

Contact information
MWP Community Care, email: enquiries@mwpcare.com.au


Victa rotary lawnmower and Mervyn Victor Richardson of Careel Bay, the owner of the company - 1955 - photo by Jack Hickson, Australian Photographic Agency - 01148. Taken by Australian Photographic Agency for account: Graves, Hayes & Baker 1642/55.

Local Seniors Festival Events: 2026

The events to celebrate Seniors are now listed and there's two free events at Mona Vale Library and through Avalon Community Library.

Those in Pittwater are:
  • Family History Workshop: Tuesday 10 March, 2pm - 3:30pm at Mona Vale Library  Book in Here -Free - 15 spots left, make sure you book into the MVL one.
  • Write your memories workshop: Thursday, 19 March 2026 - 10:00 am to 12:00 pm, Avalon Recreation Centre, 59 Old Barrenjoey Road. Bookings essential by Thursday 12 March as numbers strictly limited, phone 8495 5080.
Others in Pittwater include: 
  • Seniors Festival tour of Kimbriki Resource Recovery Centre: Tuesday, 10 March 2026 - 10:00 am to 01:00 pm - free - book in here (opens Feb 11)Visit the HUB at Kimbriki! The HUB houses Peninsula Seniors Toy Repair Group, Bikes4life and Boomerang Bags Northern Beaches. Their volunteers help reduce waste going to landfill through repair and reuse. Afterwards enjoy a guided walk through the Eco House & Garden, a light lunch and a bus tour of the Kimbriki site.
  • Downsizing workshop/talk at Pittwater RSL: $5, March 13
  • Caring for coastline & coffee morning: Sunday, 15 March 2026 - 09:00 am to 11:00 am, Mona Vale Beach - northern end, Surfview Road. - Come along and care for our beautiful coastline with the Friends of Bongin Bongin Bay by sharing a walk along Mona Vale beach. Clean up buckets provided free or just enjoy the foreshore of Bongin Bongin Bay at the north end of Mona Vale Beach car park. Join the group for a coffee afterwards at the Brightside Cafe. A relaxing way to spend a Sunday morning celebrating being a senior. Conducted in conjunction with Surfrider Foundation, Northern Beaches ‘Adopt a Beach’ plastic removal program. Free. No bookings necessary. Just come along on the day.
  • An evening of music with the Northern Beaches Concert Band: Sunday, 15 March 2026 - 05:00 pm to 07:00 pm, Pittwater RSL Auditorium, 82 Mona Vale Road, Mona Vale. - Enjoy a free evening concert by the Northern Beaches Concert Band.  The program includes a mix of classical melodies, engaging concert band works, and popular tunes that are sure to spark memories and smiles.  FREE. No bookings required. Arrive before 5pm to secure a table. Refreshments available for purchase at the venue.
  • Your Side - Support at Home Information Session: Tuesday, 17 March 2026 - 10:30 am to 11:30 am and Tuesday, 17 March 2026 - 12:00 pm to 01:00 pm, Mona Vale Library, Pelican Room, 1 Park Street, Mona Vale. - Support at Home is the new program of government funding you can receive for aged care services in your own home. Anyone living in Australia aged 65 years or over is eligible, whether you are a full or part pensioner or a fully self-funded retiree. Support at Home can give you access to clinical and personal care, mobility aids and services, and help with daily tasks around your home.  In this information session our Aged Care Support Specialists will help you understand the changes in aged care and what Support at Home is. Whether you are currently receiving aged care, or you are trying to get some support set up, either for yourself or your loved ones, we can help.  Our Aged Care Support Specialists will explain what it means for you and help you apply for and access the funding and services you need. Come and meet us, have a cuppa and we will answer all your questions about aged care.  There will be two sessions on the day. Choose the session that best suits your schedule.  Registering for this free event is essential. Secure your spot here.
  • Advanced Care Planning Workshop - Avalon: Thursday, 19 March 2026 - 10:00 am to 12:00 pm, Avalon Recreation Centre, Room 1 59 Old Barrrenjoey Road, Avalon Beach. - Advance care planning involves planning for your future health care. It enables you to make some decisions now about the health care you would or would not like to receive if you were to become seriously ill and unable to communicate your preferences or make treatment decisions. It helps ensure your loved ones and health providers know what matters most to you and respect your treatment preferences. The workshop will be facilitated by local Nurse Practitioner, Kelly Arthurs of ANDCare. Learning topics cover: What is Advance Care Planning and why it is so important to discuss?, What are the most important aspects to consider with Advance Care Planning, Opportunity to reflect, have a conversation, and commence your own Advance Care Planning journey. This FREE workshop is for all members of the community. All attendees are eligible for a follow up personal consultation appointment with the Nurse Practitioner on Tuesday 24, Wednesday 25, Thursday 26 and Monday 30 March in Mona Vale. One-on-one appointments are available at no cost for those eligible for Medicare. Hosted by Sydney North Health Network and Northern Beaches Council, with ANDCare.  FREE - register your spot here.
The rest are listed on the council webpage dedicated to listing these - not all are council initiated events and fees are being charged for some of these, and most are out of Pittwater, but with a bus at your door, it may be well worth heading south or west to be a part of these.


Guesdon-Eady-Broadbent house at Palm Beach circa 1946-47, at 47 Florida Road - that's dad looking incredibly bored on the chaise lounge at the back, probably waiting to go to the beach!  Photo: PON Editor's family albums - Family History.

New appointments to the aged care quality and safety council

February 6, 2026
The Australian Government has appointed new Chair, Deputy Chair and members of the Aged Care Quality and Safety Advisory Council, which supports Australia’s independent regulator of aged care.

Ms Leanne Kearins commenced a four-year term as Chair in January. She brings a wealth of health and aged care experience to the role, having previously served in executive roles at Queensland’s Health Quality and Complaints Commission, Seqwater and Actrua. She currently sits on the board of the Older Persons Advocacy Network and chairs its Finance, Audit and Risk Committee.

The current Chair, Ms Margot Richardson, will serve in the new position of Deputy Chair for an interim 4-month period while an ongoing appointment is finalised. 

Ms Fiona Cornforth and Professor Edward Strivens have been appointed as new members to the Advisory Council, while Mr Andrew Brown and Ms Julie Dundon have been re-appointed as members, all for four-year terms. 

Together, they bring a wealth of experience from the public, private, health and aged care sectors, including regulation, administrative reviews, investigations, education, leadership governance, nutrition and dietetics, food services and geriatric medicine.

The Council provides advice and makes recommendations to the Aged Care Quality and Safety Commissioner, the Aged Care Complaints Commissioner and the Minister for Aged Care and Seniors on the operations of the national aged care regulator.  

For more information on the work of the Aged Care Quality and Safety Commission, visit www.agedcarequality.gov.au.
Minister for Aged Care and Seniors, Sam Rae stated:

“I congratulate Ms Kearins on her appointment as Chair of the Aged Care Quality and Safety Advisory Council and look forward to her leadership of this important body.

“The Aged Care Quality and Safety Advisory Council provides invaluable advice to Government and the Aged Care Quality and Safety Commissioner and Complaints Commissioner to ensure the rights of older people accessing aged care services are upheld and their safety, health and wellbeing always come first.

“As we continue to embed the new Aged Care Act across the sector, the role of the Advisory Council will be more important than ever. I welcome the opportunity to work with Ms Kearins and new Council members as they support the Commission to uphold the rights of older Australians.”

Meanjin has been resurrected by QUT, in a clever move

Angela GlindemannRMIT University

Literary journal Meanjin has been resurrected. The 85-year-old journal will return to its origins in Brisbane, where it was founded in 1940 by editor Clem Christesen.

Its new home is QUT, where the journal will complement the university’s creative writing program. It could be good timing for QUT to take custody of a national literary treasure: a report this week revealed enrolments in Australia’s creative arts programs, including QUT’s, are in decline. Could Meanjin be a future drawcard?

Meanjin closed late last year after its former publisher, Melbourne University Publishing (MUP), withdrew its funding on “purely financial grounds” in September. It ran its (then) final issue in December, and its two staff – editor Esther Anatolitis and deputy editor Eli McLean – were made redundant. The closure sparked widespread condemnation.

There was a petition, protests and countless horrified articles, quoting acclaimed authors like Peter Carey. As Crikey reported, “multiple foundations, university figures and organisations approached MUP to explore ways to save the journal, but these attempts were all rebuffed”.

Professor Warren Bebbington, chair of MUP, acknowledged the publisher had been approached to acquire Meanjin by many organisations. But, he said, “QUT’s understanding of the journal’s legacy surpassed those of the other expressions of interest received”.

a man with a sign 'purely for financial grounds', a man reading, two other people
Melbourne-based poet Pi O reading to a 2025 protest against Meanjin’s closure, outside the offices of Melbourne University Press. Julienne van Loon

Ben Eltham, who reported on Meanjin’s closure for The Conversation, has called the magazine’s return “a victory for everyone who fought to save this vital masthead for the future of Australian literature”.

A new custodian

Meanjin’s name comes from a Yuggera word for central Brisbane. Yagarabul and Gabi Gabi Elder Gaja Kerry Charlton contextualised this language in a 2023 article.

The magazine operated in Melbourne from 1945, when the University of Melbourne invited Christesen to relocate the journal there. In 2007, it moved to Melbourne University Publishing.

Eltham called the explanation – “purely financial grounds” – for shuttering Meanjin “callous and actuarial”. As many have pointed out, literary journals are not known as profitable ventures. Former editor Sophie Cunningham told the Sydney Morning Herald Christesen had even self-funded the magazine at times.

QUT describes itself as Meanjin’s “custodian”. This word has a slightly different connotation to “publisher”. Indeed, the language of custodianship was widely used in commentary on the closure, including by its departing editors.

What next for Meanjin?

QUT states it will appoint an editorial board “to ensure Meanjin’s independence, values and standards are maintained”. It will recruit an editor through “a national competitive search”.

However, some specifics are yet to be clarified. This includes the future of the magazine’s cultural and literary advisory board, which supported the editor on several critical factors, notably First Nations matters. These were a priority of the journal in recent years. Anatolitis told Crikey neither she nor this board were notified nor formally consulted about the decision before the public announcement.

QUT plans to “take time to thoughtfully re-establish the journal in Queensland”. It will “consider how to most effectively reinvigorate Meanjin, respecting the journal’s founding vision and literary legacy while enhancing its relevance and rebuilding of readership to ensure a viable future”.

Creative arts enrolments down

New education research shows enrolments in Australia’s tertiary creative arts courses declined by as much as 50% from 2018 to 2023.

QUT is among the worst affected. Enrolments in its creative arts courses dropped around 43% over this period, which saw 48 Australian creative arts degree programs discontinued.

The study’s report called for “urgent deliberate policy reform” – including changing “policy messages sent to students and institutions”. It linked the creative arts problem to the 2021 introduction of Job-Ready Graduates, a scheme that substantially increased the cost of Australian arts and creative courses.

Being the new home of a well-respected literary journal might be the right message at the right time for QUT’s School of Creative Arts. Especially if it tilts towards being a “custodian” – and away from commercial restrictions implied by “viable”.

‘Viable future’ and important responsibility

What does the phrase “viable future” mean – especially in close proximity to a comment on readership numbers? After all, Christesen founded the journal in wartime, citing in his first editorial that “in an age governed by the stomach-and-pocket view of life”, there is a duty to talk poetry.

In 2013, Robyn Annear noted in the Monthly that “the absence of literary magazines would discommode contributors far more than readers”. Of course, many of these readers are also writers – a point former Overland editor Jeff Sparrow made back then.

A 2024 Creative Australia research report into literary journals also leaned towards communities of writers, rather than reader numbers, in discussing cultural value. Journals, it explained, provide a space that supports experimentation, diversity in voices and writing community.

Writing for The Conversation shortly after Meanjin’s axing, publishing researchers Julienne van Loon, Millicent Weber and Bronwyn Coates estimated that more than 10,000 people had gained literary workforce skills through associations with the journal. Sampling volumes from 1954 to 2024, they estimated 34 writers and 12 publishing professionals, on average, had contributed to each issue.

Like other institutions that continue to support literary journals around the country, QUT takes on an important responsibility in reviving this 85-year-old publication, “in an age governed by the stomach-and-pocket view of life”.The Conversation

Angela Glindemann, PhD Candidate, Creative Writing, RMIT University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Funny, tender, goofy – Catherine O'Hara lit up the screen every time she showed up

Ben McCannAdelaide University

Catherine O’Hara, the beloved actor and comedian who has died aged 71, occupied that rare position in contemporary screen culture: a comic actor, a cult figure and a mainstream star.

Her work spanned more than 50 years, from improv sketch comedy to Hollywood features and off-beat TV classics.

She was celebrated for her unmatched comic timing and chameleon-like character work. Her roles were often absurdist and quirky, but they hid a razor-sharp humour.

Born and raised in Toronto in a close-knit Irish Catholic family, O’Hara was one of seven siblings. She once remarked humour was part of her everyday life; storytelling, impressions and lively conversation helped hone her comedic instincts.

After high school, she worked at Toronto’s Second City Theatre, a famed breeding ground for comedy talent, and sharpened her deadpan improvisational skills.

Big break

O’Hara’s break came with Second City Television (SCTV), a sketch comedy series that rivalled Saturday Night Live in creativity and influence. Alongside contemporaries Eugene Levy, John Candy, Rick Moranis and Martin Short, she defined her distinctly smart, absurdist comedic voice.

O’Hara was not merely a performer on SCTV; she was also a writer, winning an Emmy Award for her contributions. This dual role shaped her career-long sensitivity to rhythm, language and character construction.

Unlike sketch performers who rely on repetition or catchphrases, O’Hara’s humour emerged with a different comedic logic. Audiences laughed not because the character was “funny”, but because the character took herself so seriously.

Though briefly cast on Saturday Night Live in the early 1980s, O’Hara chose to stay with SCTV when it was renewed, a decision she later described as key in letting her creative career flourish where it belonged.

The transition to film

By the mid-1980s, O’Hara was establishing herself as a screen presence. She appeared in Martin Scorsese’s offbeat black comedy After Hours (1985), and showcased her comic range in Heartburn (1986).

In 1988, she landed what would become one of her most beloved film roles: Delia Deetz in Tim Burton’s left-field Beetlejuice (1988).

Delia – a pretentious, New York art-scene social climber – allowed O’Hara to combine physical comedy and imbecilic dialogue (“A little gasoline … blowtorch … no problem”).

Burton once noted

Catherine’s so good, maybe too good. She works on levels that people don’t even know. I think she scares people because she operates at such high levels.

She went on to play Kate McCallister, the beleaguered mother in the holiday blockbusters Home Alone (1990) and Home Alone 2: Lost in New York (1992). Audiences loved the fact that this rather thinly written role became the films’ beating heart.

Working with Christopher Guest

Another distinctive phase of O’Hara’s career was her work with writer-director Christopher Guest on a series of largely improvised mockumentaries that have become cult classics.

Three standouts were Waiting for Guffman (1996), where she plays a desperate local performer in a small-town theatre troupe, and A Mighty Wind (2003), where she teamed up with old pal Levy as an ageing folk duo.

Her best turn came in Best in Show (2000), in which she and Levy played a couple competing in a national dog show. Her character Cookie Fleck remains one of the finest examples of improvised comedy on film.

Her relentless monologues about former lovers are objectively inappropriate, yet O’Hara delivers them with such earnest enthusiasm that they become strangely compelling.

Her gift for improvisation glittered in these films: these eccentric characters were often laugh-out-loud funny – but O’Hara never mocked them.

Late success

She returned to TV in Six Feet Under (2001–05) and guest appearances on The Larry Sanders Show (1992–98) and Curb Your Enthusiasm (1999–2024). More recently, she appeared in prestige shows such as The Last of Us (2023–) and The Studio (2025–).

But it was the role of Moira Rose, the eccentric, ex-soap opera star in the Canadian sitcom Schitt’s Creek (2015–20), created by Eugene Levy and his son Dan, that would become O’Hara’s most significant late career move. And what a role it was!

Written for O’Hara’s unique talents, Moira was a larger-than-life character with a bizarre, unforgettable vocabulary, dramatic mood swings and a wardrobe that became nearly as famous as the character herself.

Feminist media scholars have noted the rarity of such complex roles for older women, particularly in comedy, making O’Hara’s performance culturally significant.

The show became a global streaming blockbuster during COVID lockdowns and O’Hara’s multi-award-winning performance became a social media phenomenon, spawning memes and viral clips.

There are so many standout moments – her drunken meltdown after losing her wigs, her audition for The Crows Have Eyes 3 and the show’s moving finale where she performs Danny Boy at Alexis’s graduation.

An enduring legacy

O’Hara had a remarkable ability to play flamboyant, self-absorbed characters who were often uproariously funny.

Many comedians and actors have cited O’Hara as an influence for her fearlessness, her ability to blend absurdity with emotional truth, and her steadfast commitment to character integrity. She influenced performers like Tina Fey, Maya Rudolph, Kate McKinnon and Phoebe Waller-Bridge.

O’Hara also refused to chase conventional stardom. Rather than choosing projects designed to flatten her eccentricities, O’Hara favoured collaborative environments that valued creativity over control.

For her, comedy was always an art of intelligence, empathy and generosity.The Conversation

Ben McCann, Associate Professor of French Studies, Adelaide University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Seniors & Australia's largest fee-free ATM network join forces to keep cash

February 9 2026
National Seniors and Australia’s largest fee-free ATM network have announced they have joined forces to ensure cash remains an accessible and viable payment option.

The partnership between National Seniors Australia (NSA) and atmx has been forged to help those who may be digitally excluded or who prefer the security and familiarity of cash.


During the past five years across Australia, bank branches have declined by around 1,500; between June 2024 and June 2025, they have declined by 155. Between June 2024 and June 2025, around 300 bank-owned ATMs have closed – a decline of around 6%.

“As cash use declines, so does the number of access points available to withdraw it,” NSA Chief Executive Officer Mr Chris Grice said.

“Bank closures and ATM removals impact older people who are less inclined to bank online or travel to another branch. For people in regional areas, travelling to another branch may not be feasible. The removal of these points to access cash, and complete other financial transactions, needs to be considered with older people – and others in mind, to ensure they can access cash just as they always have.

“Keeping cash accessible and accepted is important to all Australians as a means of basic payment, a backup in emergencies, and for the stability of the broader financial system – we thank atmx for its support.”

It’s a position shared by atmx General Manager Mr Con Tsiknis who said as digital payments become increasingly dominant, there is a growing need to ensure cash remains a viable and accessible payment option for all Australians, especially seniors who rely on it for everyday transactions.

“Cash is an essential part of Australia’s economy. atmx believes free-fee access to cash is a right, not a privilege, which is why our rapidly expanding fleet of ATMs across metropolitan and regional Australia, including in areas affected by bank closures, offers fee-free withdrawals and deposits for consumers with one of the 25 financial institutions partnered with the atmx network. These consumers can access cash without additional cost,” Mr Tsiknis said.

“atmx is proud to partner with NSA as together we raise awareness among communities, retailers, and policymakers about the importance of maintaining and expanding cash infrastructure – and keeping cash.” 

The damaged Gaza War Cemetery highlights ongoing risk to soldier graves in conflict zones

Graves of unknown soldiers at the Gaza War Cemetery. Riyaah/WikimediaCC BY
Nicole TownsendUNSW Sydney

Nearly two years after the Australian government was first notified that war graves in Gaza and surrounding areas had been damaged as a result of conflict, new evidence has confirmed the extent of destruction.

In a recent update, the Commonwealth War Graves Commission – the intergovernmental body responsible for commemorating all Commonwealth war dead from the two world wars – has confirmed damage to both the Gaza War Cemetery and Deir El Balah War Cemetery is “extensive”.

And a recent Guardian report outlined new evidence indicating the Israel Defence Forces (IDF) “bulldozed” graves in the Gaza War Cemetery’s southern corner.

This includes the graves of Australian and British personnel who died in the two world wars. It has been reported that the graves of up to two dozen New Zealanders are also affected, along with Canadians killed during peacekeeping operations in the 1950s and ‘60s. Reports indicate that Indian plots have also been heavily damaged.

The Guardian reported that:

After being shown satellite images of the cemetery, the Israel Defence Forces said that it had been forced to take defensive measures during military operations.

“At the relevant time, the area in question was an active combat zone,” an army spokesperson said.

More broadly, the fate of these sites highlights the continued risk to war graves in modern conflict zones.

Anzacs in Gaza

The Gaza War Cemetery contains more than 3,400 Commonwealth burials.

The news that more than 250 Australians are interred in Gaza may surprise some Australians.

Yet, Australians have a long history of military service in the region, from the world wars to the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan.

As part of British efforts to push Ottoman Turkish forces out of Palestine, for instance, Australian mounted troops (cavalry) fought in three major battles in Gaza between March and November 1917.

The second battle was particularly costly. In three days, the British suffered more than 6,000 casualties, 500 of whom were killed, including more than 100 Australians. These Australians were buried across the two cemeteries in what is now the Gaza Strip.

A section of the Gaza War Cemetery (Donor Imperial War Graves Commission) Australian War Memorial

Australian forces later returned to the Middle East in the second world war.

While Gaza was not the site of fighting this time around, it was the location of the Australian theatre headquarters, which oversaw Australian operations in the region. It was also home to several hospital units.

This means many of the Australians buried in the area’s two war cemeteries died because of accident, injury or illness, not in battle.

Among the burials at Gaza War Cemetery are 23 New Zealanders. A further 13 New Zealanders are interred at Deir El Belah War Cemetery.

Orderly R. Sanderson swabs Private G. Trudgeon, a patient at the 2/1st Australian General Hospital, based at Gaza Ridge, circa March 1940. Australian War Memorial

A broader challenge

The destruction of war graves in Gaza has rightly received global attention. But this isn’t the first time Australian and Commonwealth war dead have been dragged into contemporary conflicts.

If we look first at Gaza, the two war cemeteries were damaged in both 2006 and 2009 amid fighting in the area.

The damage caused by the 2006 operations saw the Israeli government financially compensate the Commonwealth War Graves Commission.

But this issue is not unique to Gaza, nor to the Middle East. The Commonwealth War Graves Commission cares for more than 1.1 million separate graves across more than 23,000 locations, in 150 countries and territories.

Some of these are in active conflict zones, or otherwise volatile areas. This includes sites in Libya, Syria, Iraq, Lebanon, Iran, Yemen, Sudan and Somalia. Each of these is classed as a “challenging location”. Access is often restricted or prohibited, and many sites are at risk of damage through fighting or vandalism.

For instance, Iraq’s Habbaniya War Cemetery, where three Australian airmen are interred, was “severely damaged” during the two Gulf wars. Only in 2020 could the Commonwealth War Graves Commission finish reconstruction of the cemetery.

In 2012, war cemeteries at Benghazi in eastern Libya were desecrated twice. This included hundreds of plots, with 50 Australian headstones damaged in one incident.

Further east, Yemen’s Maala Cemetery was damaged during fighting between 2014 and 2015. Located in a particularly dangerous area, the cemetery – where 11 Australians are buried – remains off-limits and mostly destroyed.

In other instances, the danger is so great that locations are used to commemorate casualties interred elsewhere. An example is the Mogadishu African War Cemetery in Somalia, where political instability forced the Commonwealth War Graves Commission to erect memorial headstones at Kenya’s Nairobi War Cemetery.

War cemeteries will remain in danger

Given ongoing conflict and instability in Yemen, Somalia and Gaza, it is unlikely any restorative works will be possible any time soon.

And the Commonwealth War Graves Commission’s chief of staff, Peter Francis, acknowledged in October 2024 that cemetery rebuilding would not be prioritised as part of reconstruction in Gaza, given the scale of destruction across the broader Gaza Strip.

There is also the financial factor, with reconstruction of the Gaza War Cemetery alone estimated to cost around £5 million (about A$9.6 million). The figure is likely much higher now, given the scale of destruction since this 2024 estimate.

All this reflects the difficulties the Commonwealth War Graves Commission encounters in trying to mark, record and maintain graves and commemorative sites.

As troubling as this situation is, particularly for affected families, it is a difficult reality: war cemeteries will remain in danger amid active unrest and conflict.The Conversation

Nicole Townsend, Lecturer in War Studies, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Where are Europe’s oldest people living? What geography tells us about a fragmenting continent

Florian BonnetIned (Institut national d'études démographiques)Carlo Giovanni CamardaIned (Institut national d'études démographiques)France MesléIned (Institut national d'études démographiques), and Josselin ThuilliezCentre national de la recherche scientifique (CNRS)

For over a century and a half, life expectancy has steadily increased in the wealthiest countries. Spectacular climbs in longevity have been noted in the 20th Century, correlating with the slump in infectious illnesses and advances in cardiovascular medicine.

However, for some years now, experts have been obsessing over one question: when is this slick mechanism going to run out of steam? In several western countries, gains in life expectancy have become so slight, they are practically non-existent.

Some researchers see this as a sign that we are heading toward a ‘biological human longevity ceiling’ while others estimate that there is still room for improvement.

Looking at national figures alone cannot be a decider. Behind a country’s average life expectancy lies very contrasted, region-specific realities. This is what the findings of our study that was recently published in Nature Communications revealed. Analysing data collected between 1992 and 2019, it focuses on 450 regions in western Europe bringing together almost 400 million inhabitants.

A European study on an unprecedented scale

To complete our research project, we collected mortality and demographic data from offices for national statistics across 13 western European countries including Spain, Denmark, Portugal and Switzerland.

We began by harmonising the original data, a task that proved crucial because the regions differed in size, and data offered varying amounts of detail according to each country.

Then we recalculated the annual gain in life expectancy at birth for each region between 1992 and 2019, an indicator, which reflects mortality across all ages. Sophisticated statistical methods allowed us to pick out the main underlying trends, regardless of short-term fluctuations caused by the heatwave in 2003, or virulent, seasonal flu outbreaks between 2014-2015, for instance. 2019 is the cut-off date for our analyses because it is still too early to know whether the coronavirus pandemic has a long term effect on these trends or if it was limited to 2020-2022.

The results we obtained provide us with an unprecedented panorama of regional longevity trajectories across Europe over an almost 30-year period, from which we draw three findings.

First finding: Human longevity has not hit its limits

The first message to emerge from the study is that: the limits of human longevity have still not been reached. If we concentrate on regions that are life expectancy champions (indicated in blue on the chart below), we note that there is no indication of progress decelerating.

Evolution of life expectancy in vanguard and lagging regions in Western Europe, 1992–2019. The red line (and blue, respectively) represents the mean life expectancy at birth of regions belonging to the top decile (and inferior, respectively) of the distribution. The black line indicates the average of all of 450 regions. The minimal and maximal values are represented by specific symbols corresponding to the regions concerned. Florian BonnetFourni par l'auteur

These regions continue to demonstrate around a two and half month gain in life expectancy per year for men, and approximately one and a half month gain in life expectancy for women, at an equivalent rate to those observed in previous decades. In 2019, they include regions in Northern Italy, Switzerland and some Spanish provinces.

For France, Paris and its surrounding Hauts-de-Seine or Yvelines areas (pertaining to both men and women), featured alongside the Anjou region and areas bordering with Switzerland (only applicable to women). In 2019, life expectancy reached 83 for men, and 87 for women.

In other words, despite recurrent concerns nothing presently indicates that lifespan progression has hit a glass ceiling; prolonging life expectancy remains possible. This is a fundamental result which counters sweeping, alarmist statements: there is room for improvement.

Second finding: regional diversity since the mid 2000s

The picture looks bleaker when considering regions with ‘lagging’ life expectancy rates, indicated in red on the chart. In the 1990s and in the early 2000s, these regions saw rapid gains in life expectancy. Progress was much faster here than anywhere else, leading to a convergence in regional life expectancy across Europe.

This golden age, accumulating a fast rise in life expectancy in Europe and a reduction in regional disparities came to an end towards 2005. In the most challenged regions, whether it be East Germany, Wallonia in Belgium or certain parts of the United Kingdom, life expectancy gains significantly dropped, practically reaching a standstill. In women, no regions in France featured among them, but in men, they included some departments in the Hauts-de-France.

Longevity in Europe is ultimately divided into vanguard regions that continue to progress on one side, and on the other side, lagging regions where the dynamic is running out of steam and is even reversed. We are experiencing a regional discrepancy that contrasts with the catch-up momentum in the 1990s.

Third finding: the decisive role of mortality at ages 55-74

Why such a shift? Beyond age-specific life expectancy, we sought to gain a better understanding of this spectacular change by analysing how mortality rates have evolved for each age bracket.

We can state that regional divergence can neither be explained by the rise in infantile mortality (which remains very slight) nor by the rise in mortality in the over 75 age range (which continues to decelerate everywhere). It mainly stems from mortality around age 65.

In the 1990s this demonstrated a rapid drop, thanks to access to cardiovascular treatments and changes in risk-taking behaviour. But since the 2000s, this upturn has slowed. In some regions, in the last few years, the risk of dying between 55 and 74 years old is on the rise, as shown in the maps below.

Annual percentage changes in the probability of dying between ages 55 and 74 for men (left) and women (right) in 450 regions across western Europe between 2018 and 2019. Florian BonnetFourni par l'auteur

This is particularly true for women living in France’s Mediterranean coastal regions (indicated in pale pink). It’s also the case for most of Germany. However, these intermediary ages are crucial for the life expectancy gain dynamic, because a large number of deaths occur here. Stagnation or a leap in mortality between ages 55 and 74 is enough to break the overall trend.

Even though our study does not allow us to pinpoint the precise causes explaining such preoccupying progress, recent documentation provides us with some leads which should be scientifically tested in the future. Among these are risk-taking behaviour, particularly smoking, drinking alcohol and poor nutrition, or a lack of physical exercise, which are all factors that manifest at these ages.

Incidentally, the economic crash in 2008 accentuated regional variations across Europe. Some regions suffered durably seeing the health of their populations compromised, while further growth was recorded in other regions with a concentration of highly qualified employment. These factors remind us that longevity isn’t just about advances in medicine; it can also be explained by social and economic factors.

What’s next?

Our report offers a dual message. Yes, it’s possible to increase life expectancy. Europe’s regional champions are proof of this, as they continue to demonstrate steady growth without showing any signs of plateauing. However, this progress does not apply to everyone. For fifteen years, part of Europe has been lagging behind, largely due to a rise in mortality around 65 years.

Even today, the future of human longevity seems to depend less on the existence of a hypothetical biological ceiling than on our collective ability to reduce gaps in life expectancy. Recent trends lead us to believe that Europe could well end up as a two-tier system, setting apart a minority of areas that keep pushing the boundaries of longevity and a majority of areas where gains dwindle.

In actual fact, the question is not only how far can we extend life expectancy, but which parts of Europe are eligible.


For further reading

Our detailed results, region by region, are available in our interactive online application.



A weekly e-mail in English featuring expertise from scholars and researchers. It provides an introduction to the diversity of research coming out of the continent and considers some of the key issues facing European countries. Get the newsletter!The Conversation


Florian Bonnet, Démographe et économiste, spécialiste des inégalités territoriales, Ined (Institut national d'études démographiques)Carlo Giovanni Camarda, Docteur, spécialiste des méthodes de prévision (mortalité, longévité, etc.), Ined (Institut national d'études démographiques)France Meslé, Démographe, Ined (Institut national d'études démographiques), and Josselin Thuilliez, Economiste, Directeur de recherche au CNRS, Centre national de la recherche scientifique (CNRS)

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Amid an Olympic boom, it’s risky timing to lift a ban on developers’ political donations

Yee-Fui NgMonash University

Queensland is a step closer to lifting a ban on political donations from property developers – despite a corruption watchdog’s warning that doing so in a A$7 billion Olympics building boom could raise “risks of undue or improper influence”.

Last Friday, a parliamentary committee with a majority of Liberal National members tabled a report supporting the state government’s proposed electoral law overhaul.

Among a raft of changes, the proposed law would undo a nearly decade-old ban on property developers donating to state political candidates. The current ban on developer donations to local government elections would remain.

Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria and the Australian Capital Territory all currently ban donations from property developers. South Australia has gone further, last year banning all political donations.

With billions in taxpayers’ dollars being spent on the Games, what’s the argument for lifting the ban? And does it stand up?

Billions in development underway

Between now and the opening ceremony of the 2032 Brisbane Olympics, at least A$7 billion will be spent on Olympic and Paralympic games infrastructure across Queensland, from new stadiums to athlete villages. Some $3.4 billion of that is federal funding – meaning all Australian taxpayers are chipping in.

Facing major challenges to meet that deadline, the Liberal National government passed laws to fast track approvals on Games infrastructure. That means they’re not subject to standard planning and environmental laws.

In a submission to the parliamentary committee, Queensland’s Crime and Corruption Commission warned of “increased risks of actual or perceived corruption” tied to political donations in the lead up to the Olympics.

There is concern that the reintroduction of property developer donations could exacerbate real and/or perceived risks of undue or improper influence, particularly as developer interests align closely with major projects.

Why are developers treated differently?

But when does trying to guard against corruption cross the line into impeding people’s freedom of political communication?

A decade ago, property developer and former Newcastle mayor Jeff McCloy challenged the validity of NSW laws capping political donations and banning donations from property developers.

In 2015, a majority of High Court judges upheld the validity of NSW’s ban on property developer donations, noting in their judgement there was:

an apparently strong factual basis for the perception of a risk of corruption and undue influence as the result of political donations from property developers.

A series of seven reports and a position paper of the New South Wales Independent Commission Against Corruption (ICAC) has identified corruption and other misconduct in the handling of property development applications since 1990, and the existence of a large measure of public concern over the influence which property developers have hitherto exercised over state and local government members and officials.

That history is an example of why property developers’ donations have come under more scrutiny than others and face tighter restrictions in some parts of Australia.

Why did Queensland bring in a ban?

Queensland’s ban on donations from property developers was introduced by the Labor government in 2018. It followed a Crime and Corruption Commission investigation that exposed widespread corruption, non-compliance with election funding rules, and undisclosed conflicts of interest by local government officials.

Following that investigation, mayors, councillors and council officers in Queensland faced dozens of criminal charges.

Then anti-corruption commissioner Alan MacSporran said local government was a “broken” system, and “a hotbed of perceived corruption”.

The Queensland anti-corruption body had previously conducted investigations on developer donations and conflicts of interest in 1991, 2006 and 2015, showing this had become a systemic problem at a local government level.

The Crime and Corruption Commission report only recommended banning political donations at a local government level. But the then Labor state government took it a step further, arguing if it was “good enough for one level of government, it’s good enough for all levels of government”.

Looking ahead

The LNP has long argued the ban wasn’t recommended at a state level, unfairly stigmatises developers, and was really about Labor creating an uneven playing field for electoral donations.

However, there has been a long history of corruption in Australia directly relating to property developers. Any weakening of political finance regulation increases the risk of both actual and perceived corruption in government.

The LNP government has a clear majority to pass this bill. There’s every sign it will go ahead.

But the bill still has to be voted on in state parliament. This gives the Queensland government time to reconsider its approach, both to preserve the integrity of its electoral system and to protect public perceptions of the 2032 Brisbane Olympics.The Conversation

Yee-Fui Ng, Associate Professor, Faculty of Law, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.


Australians living with disability at risk of exploitation by NDIS providers breaching consumer laws: ACCC

February 10, 2026
Participants in the National Disability Insurance Scheme (NDIS) are being targeted by NDIS providers’ deceptive advertising practices and other behaviours banned by consumer law, a new report has found. Whilst these practices are not universal, the scale and types of complaints we’re hearing about is concerning.

Working in a taskforce with the National Disability Insurance Agency (NDIA) and NDIS Quality and Safeguards Commission, the ACCC has identified trends of problematic conduct that may breach the Australian Consumer Law, including instances of providers wrongly charging for essential disability support products that were not supplied as agreed and falsely claiming services or products are ‘NDIS-approved or eligible for NDIS funding’, when this is not the case.

The ACCC is particularly concerned about several key issues in NDIS markets:
  • False and misleading advertising by providers
  • Providers not honouring consumer guarantees protections
  • Issues with contracts, such as providers failing to provide clear written contracts or including unfair terms
  • Providers charging for products or services not supplied or delayed
  • Concerns about misleading claims in relation to Specialist Disability Accommodation
  • Impacts on First Nations NDIS participants
  • Scams affecting NDIS participants.
“Conduct can be particularly harmful given products and services sought or acquired may be essential for Australians who experience a disability to participate in everyday life,” ACCC Deputy Chair Catriona Lowe said.

“Harm can range from financial loss and life-limiting impacts, to compromising the safety and physical wellbeing of NDIS participants. Such conduct is completely unacceptable and the ACCC will continue to work with taskforce agencies to protect NDIS participants, educate and hold providers that continue to do the wrong thing accountable.”

Since 2024 the ACCC has prioritised improving compliance with the Australian Consumer Law by businesses that provide NDIS-funded supports, and, alongside the NDIA and NDIS Commission, has expanded its efforts to address misconduct and increase awareness of the laws relating to NDIS provider conduct.

ACCC enforcement action
The ACCC has taken proactive enforcement action in this period, instituting legal proceedings against a provider for alleged breaches of the Australian Consumer Law in 2024. In addition, Bedshed and Thermomix paid infringement notices issued by the ACCC for allegedly making misleading claims about NDIS endorsements.

Support provider Mable Technologies provided a court-enforceable undertaking to the ACCC after admitting using unfair contract terms, in breach of the Australian Consumer Law.

“We have achieved positive outcomes to improve protections for NDIS participants and continue to investigate other potential misconduct,” Ms Lowe said.

“NDIS providers should be aware that we are closely monitoring and responding to how they advertise and supply their products and services to consumers,” Ms Lowe said.

The ACCC is also working closely with state and territory consumer protection agencies, sharing intelligence and coordinating work and jointly enforcing the Australian Consumer Law.

“We are also working closely with other taskforce agencies in ensuring information is referred to the responsible agency to act on at an early stage,” Ms Lowe said.

To assist in raising awareness, we will also be publishing a summary of the Report on our website with printable factsheets for both participants and providers.

If an NDIS participant thinks a business has made false or misleading statements about products or services, including whether they are funded by the NDIS, or if they consider their consumer rights have not been met, they can make a report to the ACCC.

Further information for NDIS participants and providers is available on the ACCC website.

Background
The NDIS provides funding to eligible people with disability. Since 2024, the ACCC has prioritised improved compliance with the Australian Consumer Law by businesses that supply NDIS-funded supports, known as providers.

The two main regulators responsible for delivering the NDIS are:
  • The NDIA which sets participants with plans and funding, provides price guidance for supports, processes claims, and investigates alleged fraud within the scheme.
  • The NDIS Commission which registers and regulates NDIS providers.  It also monitors providers’ compliance with the NDIS Code of Conduct and practice standards, and receives and responds to concerns, complaints and reportable incidents about providers.
The Australian Consumer Law applies to all transactions between NDIS participants and providers. The ACCC and other Australian Consumer Law regulators can investigate NDIS related dealings where there is a potential breach of the Australian Consumer Law.

On 17 December 2023, the government established the Fair Pricing and Australian Consumer Law Taskforce consisting of the ACCC, the NDIA, and the NDIS Commission. The Taskforce was established to address harms affecting participants, including potentially paying higher prices for goods or services compared to non-NDIS consumers, and conduct by providers that may breach the Australian Consumer Law. 

Serious incidents in childcare centres are still rising. Why?

Erin HarperUniversity of Sydney

The number of “serious incidents” in Australian early childhood services – including long daycare – is increasing. According to a new Productivity Commission report, there were 160 such incidents per 100 services in 2024-25. This is up from 148 and 139 in the previous two years.

A serious incident is one that seriously compromises the health, safety or wellbeing of a child. This includes serious injury or illness requiring medical attention, any event where emergency services attended, a child going missing or being locked in or out of the premises. It can also include abuse or the death of a child.

The figures come amid continuing concern about safety in early childhood services around Australia. Last week, regulators reported a family daycare had been shut down after knives and poison were kept within reach of kids in Sydney; while in South Australia, the regulator warned of supervision “blind spots”.

Why are we seeing this increase? What does it mean for families and educators?

How do we get these figures?

Under the Education and Care Services National Regulations, services must report all serious incidents to the relevant state or territory regulatory authority.

So these Productivity Commission figures come via the national agency for childcare safety and quality (the Australian Children’s Education and Care Quality Authority).

In its most recent report in December 2025, the national agency reported an increase across almost every kind of serious incident. The most commonly reported incident type was “injury, illness, or trauma”, which accounted for 77.7% of serious incident reports.

Why aren’t we seeing a drop?

The latest figures predate the slew of recent child safety reforms across the sector. So it may take time for us to see a change in annual data reporting.

We also have numerous state and national inquiries still underway. And further reforms are yet to be implemented. This includes mandatory child safety and child protection training for all staff, volunteers, and students.

In fact, the increase is not a surprise. Data released by the national agency has shown a persistent increase in serious incident reports, which are currently up 62% from 2016-17 (the earliest available report on these figures). There have also been particularly marked increases over the last five years.

What is less clear is what is causing this increase and how to fix it.

Are people becoming more aware?

The latest rise may indicate the sector is becoming more transparent, as opposed to more dangerous.

With the recent increase in public scrutiny and subsequent policy changes around child safety – including shorter time frames for mandatory reporting and restrictions on the use of digital devices – services, educators, and even families may be more likely to report serious incidents when they occur.

If this is so, a stronger reporting culture would be a welcome outcome.

Or are services under stress?

On the other hand, Australian and international research shows safety risks increase when educators and services are operating under strain.

Our research shows staff in the early childhood sector face heavy workloads and unpaid hours. There are also longstanding concerns about increasing regulatory demandshigh staff turnover and educator burnout.

What about management?

Research indicates management (or who is running a service) is a key factor when it comes to quality.

Although the national agency’s reports do not let us compare serious incident rates of for-profit versus not-for-profit services, for-profits tend to provide lower quality services for children, and have been less likely to improve their rating under the national quality framework.

On top of this, publicly available data from the third quarter of 2025 (the most recent we have), shows private for-profit services are more likely to be “working towards the national quality standard” on children’s health and safety than other early childhood provider types.

This is why the steady increase in large for-profit providers in Australia is a significant concern.

So is childcare safe or not?

Despite the awful revelations about abuse in the sector, the OECD notes that early childhood services are generally safer than un-regulated care. This includes care by relatives, babysitters or privately employed nannies. This is because services such as long daycare are regulated by a national quality framework and standards.

The difficulty is there is such variation in quality across the sector. Current regulatory systems also have significant gaps. For example, many services wait more than four years between assessment visits. In some states, time between visits can extend to ten years.

A 2025 independent report found several NSW services were on a secret government list as “very high risk” but were publicly rated as “meeting” national quality standards.

As of November 2025, families can now access new content on the Starting Blocks website to check the compliance history of their service. This includes when a service was last visited by a regulatory authority, and any formal breach notifications over the last two years.

Will the recent and upcoming reforms be enough?

The current debate about safety and quality are still largely reactive and risks-based. For example, shutting down unsafe providers and training educators to spot potential abuse.

We need more focus on the broader factors – such as educator working conditions, workforce quality and management capability – which research shows will lift quality and boost safety overall.

If services have well-trained staff and supportive working conditions, they are more likely to provide both safety and quality for children.The Conversation

Erin Harper, Lecturer, School of Education and Social Work, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Australian sport still has a gender-based violence problem. Our new guide might help tackle it

Davide Aracri/Unsplash
Kirsty ForsdikeLa Trobe UniversityAurélie PankowiakVictoria UniversityMary WoessnerVictoria UniversityNatalie GaleaUniversity of Sydney, and Samantha MarshallLa Trobe University

Research shows gender-based violence in sport is widespread: between a quarter and three-quarters of women within sport report experiencing some form of psychological, physical or sexual violence during their sporting lives.

These experiences happen across all levels of sport and affect not only athletes but also coaches, officials, volunteers and administrators.

And too often, when those affected try to speak up, systems fail them.

Our research team recently examined how reports of gender-based violence in sport are currently experienced and managed.

Based on what we found, we designed a new resource to help sporting organisations handle issues that arise and support victims.

What is gender-based violence in sport?

Gender-based violence can include sexist jokes, humiliation, exclusion from leadership roles, coercive coaching practices, sexual harassment and assault.

These behaviours are often normalised or minimised in sport but their impact is serious: women leave sport, their health is affected, teams dissolve, talent is lost and trust in sporting institutions is eroded.

What our research found

We examined how reports of gender-based violence in sport are currently managed.

We reviewed policies, interviewed women and gender-diverse people who had disclosed gender-based violence in sport, and also interviewed people working in national and state sport integrity and safeguarding roles.

We found policies related to violence in sport to be legalistic, inaccessible and almost entirely gender-blind.

Women and gender-diverse participants shared uncertainty about who to approach, what the process would entail and whether they would be believed.

Some felt re-traumatised by systems meant to support them. One woman told us:

[the sport] never followed any of their own written processes around safety and supporting us. They made promises and then actively went against them. They pretty much gaslit us the whole way.

The people we interviewed said they stayed engaged when listened to, believed and offered choices. When dismissed or blamed, many left – not just the organisation, but sport.

A clear message emerged from those working in integrity and safeguarding roles: many want to do the right thing but are often constrained by unclear policies, limited guidance and support and a lack of training.

They described feeling overwhelmed, unsure of what steps to take and concerned about their organisation’s reputation or getting it wrong.

One person working in integrity and safeguarding roles said:

I’ll be quite candid with you […] they’re protecting the business. They’re not protecting the member.

Another sad:

One time I got one [a report] and I had to run out the door here to throw up. It was just so terrible.

Where current systems fall short

In Australia, Sport Integrity Australia responds to breaches of integrity through the National Integrity Framework and its complaints handling system.

But our research shows when it comes to gender-based violence against adults, significant gaps remain.

While Sport Integrity Australia’s suite of policies include the “safeguarding of children and young people” there is no equivalent for adults.

Also, Sport Integrity Australia can only implement its policies with sports that signed up to its national framework, and only if the issue being reported occurred after the sport signed up.

This means in many cases, gender-based violence against an adult will fall outside of its policies.

In these cases, responsibility falls back to sporting organisations – many of which are under-resourced, unclear about their role or ill-prepared to respond.

For women and gender-diverse people, this often results in confusion, inadequate or inconsistent responses and an increased risk of ongoing harm.

In the absence of sufficient national policy, sport organisations must therefore be better prepared to respond to and address gender-based violence, from the grassroots to elite levels.

Why disclosures so often go wrong

Our research shows reports of gendered violence go wrong not because people don’t care but because systems are not designed with victim-survivors in mind.

Policies are frequently written to protect organisations rather than support those who experience harm.

Reporting pathways mimic legal and criminal justice pathways rather than trauma-informed practices.

Power imbalances – between athletes and coaches, volunteers and boards, players and administrators – are not acknowledged or addressed.

At the same time, those tasked with responding are often unsupported.

Integrity managers, volunteers and administrators told us they regularly absorb traumatic stories without adequate supervision or specialist support and without the ability to address the root causes of the issue. This increases the risk of burnout and turnover.

A practical roadmap for safer responses

In response we developed a practical, evidence-based toolkit designed to help sporting organisations at every level respond better when gender-based violence is reported.

This new guide translates research and best-practice principles from health, trauma and violence-prevention sectors into the sport context in ways that are easy to understand and implement.

It sets out five core principles for good responses:

  • making reporting easy

  • having clear and fair policies

  • supporting choice and autonomy

  • responding with care and respect

  • committing to ongoing improvement.

It provides concrete tools such as scripts for responding to disclosures, checklists for organisational readiness and a clear roadmap outlining what a good response looks like from first disclosure through to follow-up and review.The Conversation

Kirsty Forsdike, Principal Research Fellow and Associate Professor, La Trobe Rural Health School, La Trobe UniversityAurélie Pankowiak, Research Fellow, Institute for Health and Sport, Victoria UniversityMary Woessner, Associate professor, Victoria UniversityNatalie Galea, Senior Research Fellow, University of Sydney, and Samantha Marshall, PhD Candidate, La Trobe University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

ASIC action sees FIIG Securities ordered to pay $2.5 million over cyber security failures

Announcement made: February 9, 2026
Australian fixed-income specialist, FIIG Securities Limited (FIIG), has been ordered to pay $2.5 million in pecuniary penalties after ASIC brought a case against the firm for failures to protect thousands of clients from cyber security threats for more than four years.

FIIG’s failures worsened a 2023 cyber-attack which saw around 385 gigabytes of confidential information stolen and highly sensitive client data leaked onto the dark web – including driver’s licences, passport information, bank account details and tax file numbers.

FIIG notified some 18,000 clients that their personal information may have been compromised.

FIIG admitted that it failed to comply with its Australian Financial Services (AFS) licence obligations and that adequate cyber security measures – suited to a firm of its size and the sensitivity of client data held – would have enabled it to detect and respond to the data breach sooner. It also admitted that complying with its own policies and procedures could have supported earlier detection and prevented some or all of the client information from being downloaded.   

The Federal Court today ordered FIIG to pay a $2.5 million penalty and pay $500,000 towards ASIC’s costs. The Court also ordered FIIG to undertake a compliance programme involving the engagement of an independent expert to ensure its cyber security and cyber resilience systems are reasonably managed.  

ASIC Deputy Chair Sarah Court said, ‘Cyber-attacks and data breaches are escalating in both scale and sophistication, and inadequate controls put clients and companies at real risk.  

‘ASIC expects financial services licensees to be on the front foot every day to protect their clients. FIIG wasn’t – and they put thousands of clients at risk. 

‘In this case, the consequences far exceeded what it would have cost FIIG to implement adequate controls in the first place. 

‘This is the first time the Federal Court has imposed civil penalties for cyber security failures under the general AFS licensee obligations, setting a clear licence-to-operate expectation for robust cyber resilience.

‘Clients entrust licensees with sensitive and confidential information, and that trust carries clear responsibilities. 

FIIG’s cyber security failures between 13 March 2019 to 8 June 2023 included examples where it did not: 
  • allocate the necessary financial resources to have suitably qualified and experienced people available, or implement adequate technological resources to manage cyber security
  • implement adequate cyber security measures, including multi-factor authentication for remote access users, strong passwords and access controls for privileged accounts, appropriate configuration of firewalls and security software, regular penetration testing and vulnerability scanning
  • have a structured plan to ensure key software systems were being updated to address security vulnerabilities
  • have qualified IT personnel monitoring threat alerts to identify and respond to cyber-attacks
  • provide mandatory cyber security awareness training to staff, and 
  • have an appropriate cyber incident response plan that was tested at least annually. 
‘Entities that fail to maintain proper cyber security controls risk regulatory action by ASIC and exposure to malicious exploitation,’ the Deputy Chair said.

ASIC expects AFS licensees to prioritise cyber-resilience and invest in people, systems and governance which are fit-for-purpose for entity size and the sensitivity of client information held.

Background
FIIG provides retail and wholesale investors with access to fixed income investments and bond financing. As an AFS licensee, FIIG plays an important role in providing custodial and trading services, maintaining records of client investments, and holding funds and fixed income investments on behalf of its clients. At the time of non-compliance, FIIG held approximately $3 billion in client assets under management.

ASIC identified cyber-attacks, data breaches and/or inadequate operational resilience and crisis management within its 2026 key issues outlook, and expects AFS licensees to prioritise and invest in systems that protect their customers and maintain integrity in the financial system.

This case was ASIC’s second cyber security enforcement action. In May 2022, the Federal Court ruled AFS licensee, RI Advice, had breached its license obligations to act efficiently and fairly when it failed to have adequate risk management systems to manage its cyber security risks (22-104MR).

ASIC filed civil proceedings against financial advice business Fortnum Private Wealth Limited in July 2025, alleging it failed to properly manage and mitigate cyber security risks (25-143MR).

FIIG has admitted it failed to comply with its AFS licence obligations by:
  • failing to take all necessary steps to ensure its financial services were provided efficiently, honestly and fairly, including by not having adequate measures in place to protect clients from the risks and consequences of a cyber incident
  • failing to have available adequate financial, technological and human resources to comply with its obligations and support adequate cyber security measures, and 
  • failing to have an adequate risk management system manage or mitigate cyber security risks to FIIG and its clients. 
ASIC’s regulatory resources include further information about cyber security and cyber resilience:  
ASIC also recommends organisations and investors to consider advice from the Australian Signals Directorate’s (ASD) Australian Cyber Security Centre.    

The ASD provides easy to understand advice about what to do when organisations and investors suffer a data breach via their Report and recover webpage.

Reforms to enable NSW GPs to diagnose ADHD from March

February 11, 2026
The NSW Government has announced that from next month, GPs can begin training to diagnose attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) as part of the next phase of the Government's landmark reforms to make it easier, faster and more affordable for families to access care.

The Minns Government states nearly 600 general practitioners have expressed their interest in undertaking training to be able to diagnose and treat ADHD from March.

'With a focus on improving access to healthcare in regional, rural and remote areas, GPs working in areas of greatest need will be prioritised for training.' the government said in a release

'More than 800 GPs have been trained to fill repeat ADHD medication scripts as part of the first phase of reforms. This has enabled ADHD patients to be prescribed essential medication via their GPs saving patients and their families a trip to see a psychiatrist or paediatrician. 

Since 1 September 2025, over 5000 patients have benefitted from the new arrangement, with increased access and over 18,000 scripts filled thanks to this important change.'

Previously, most people seeking ADHD care had to navigate a costly and overloaded non-GP specialist system, experiencing long wait times and high fees which could delay treatment, particularly for children.

These delays can impact children's development, such as poorer academic progress, and later impact employment opportunities and mental health.

Applications for GPs wishing to enrol in stage two of the reform remain open, however training spots are limited, so those interested are being encouraged to act soon. Training costs will be covered by NSW Health, with a remuneration package available to those who complete the training. A waiting list will also be maintained for future training opportunities.

GPs can also apply to become a continuation prescriber.

GPs will continue to make specialist referrals, and escalate care, as required to ensure patients are receiving the treatment they need, when and where they need it.

More information is available at ADHD care in general practice, and GPs with any questions are encouraged to contact MOH-ADHDreforms@health.nsw.gov.au

Minister for Health Ryan Park stated:

“With nearly 600 GPs already expressing their interest to receive training to diagnose ADHD, and over 800 already trained to prescribe ongoing medication, these reforms are expanding capacity to support the greater health system.

“Accessing ADHD diagnosis services in regional and rural communities is a challenge. As part of this next step, we're prioritising training of GPs in the bush so families can get the care they need closer to home.

“We know the impact high quality ADHD care can have on family wellbeing, we are deeply committed to ensuring children in metro and regional NSW are not left behind.

“If you'd like to speak to a doctor about ADHD diagnosis, I encourage you to discuss with your regular GP to understand if they will provide this assessment."

Quotes attributable to Minister for Mental Health Rose Jackson:

“Feedback from everyone involved in these reforms so far has been incredibly positive, with some going as far as saying it's been life-changing for managing their treatment.

“We're incredibly excited to move to the next stage where GPs can undertake training to actually diagnose ADHD. It's the next step in building a system where ADHD care is based on need, not income.

“We have already worked to reduce long waiting lists just to refill scripts – now we're helping reduce the stress and anxiety many feel while waiting for an ADHD diagnosis."

RACGP NSW & ACT Chair Dr Rebekah Hoffman said:

“The evidence indicates up to 10% of children, and 6% of adults, live with ADHD. This is a common condition that can be diagnosed and managed well by a specialist GP with appropriate training.

“The reforms announced by the NSW Government will make a huge difference to thousands of patients in our state. Access to an ADHD diagnosis and ongoing care is very often lifechanging.

“ADHD affects many aspects of a person's life and health – their sleep, their education, how they interact with others. GPs are specialists in whole-of-person care, and are well-placed to help patients with ADHD to thrive at school, in university, at work, and at home."

21-year-old ADHD patient and psychology graduate Lucia Porteus said:

“What helped me most to overcome the challenges of ADHD was not just medication, but also the continued access to treatment and support I received from my ADHD coach, my school, my paediatricians, my GPs and my family.

“The support I received helped me to graduate with a Bachelor of Psychological Science from UNSW, and I'm currently looking at completing post-grad or honours to help people with disabilities and mental health issues to succeed, too.

“I know I have been lucky. Many of my peers have struggled to access medication or a diagnosis for ADHD because of costs and long wait lists, but this new policy will remove such barriers for so many people."

NSW government increases funding to $12.8 million to support animal welfare enforcement

Announced: February 10, 2026
The Minns Labor Government today announced two of the state’s key animal welfare organisations, the Royal Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals (RSPCA) NSW and Animal Welfare League (AWL) NSW, will receive $12.8 million towards their enforcement and compliance activities to better protect cats, dogs, livestock and other animals across the state.

Over the past two financial years, the NSW Government has provided $25.3 million to these organisations to help them carry out animal welfare enforcement activities.

An additional $300,000 has been provided this financial year as part of the Government’s continuing improvements to animal welfare standards across NSW.

The funds will support animal welfare inspectors who play a crucial role in enforcing the state’s animal welfare laws allowing them to investigate animal cruelty complaints, protect vulnerable animals from harm or distress and provide care and shelter for seized animals.

The NSW Government has introduced several measures to improve animal welfare including banning puppy farms, enhanced financial and performance reporting for the RSPCA NSW and AWL NSW, and reformed legislation to prevent people convicted of animal cruelty offences from keeping and breeding animals.  

The Government also recently announced proposed new offences for leaving dogs in hot vehicles, tougher animal fighting laws and banning the use of painful dog prong collars.

The Government states changes made to animal welfare laws represent the most comprehensive reform to the state’s animal welfare laws in years, recognising the need for modern legislation to align with community expectations.

The RSPCA and AWL funding applications were assessed in accordance with the requirements of the NSW Grants Administration Guide and recommended by an expert panel.

These grants support these organisations which carry out Prevention of Cruelty to Animals Act 1979 enforcement and compliance activities for the current 2025-2026 financial year.

Minister for Agriculture Tara Moriarty said:

“We recognise the importance of the compliance work the Animal Welfare League NSW and RSPCA NSW deliver and value the long-standing relationships we have with them to achieve better outcomes for animals.

“The welfare of animals is a key priority for the NSW Government, and this substantial funding directly supports the vital work of our animal welfare partners on the ground.

“We continue to work with stakeholders, advocates and the community to improve animal welfare and to build a better and stronger framework of animal protection. “

Animal Welfare League NSW chief executive officer Stephen Albin said:

“We welcome the funding announcement for our Inspectorate Services that are playing a critical role in protecting animals and enforcing the laws to prevent cruelty.

“The funding will support our expansion of services in both the Sydney metropolitan area and regional centres.

“Our inspectors have received an increase in the number of cruelty complaints, and this funding will also assist us meet that demand.

“Every animal deserves to find a loving home; this funding and other government initiatives are assisting our team on the ground deliver on this mission.”

NSW Government moves to permanently reward safe drivers

February 10, 2026
The Minns Labor Government has announced it is backing safer choices on NSW roads, introducing a Bill to Parliament today to make the demerit point reward program permanent – part of a record $2.8 billion road safety investment.

See: Road Transport Amendment (Demerit Points Reduction) Bill 2026 - and Second Reading Speech LA in HANSARD

Once passed, the reform will make the Demerit Point Reward Program a permanent feature of the state’s demerit point system, allowing eligible unrestricted licence holders to have one demerit point removed after remaining offence-free for a continuous 12-month period.

The reform builds on a successful trial delivered as an election commitment and reflects the Government’s clear view that lasting road safety comes from changing behaviour – not just punishing people after something has gone wrong.

Since the trial began in 2023, more than two million NSW demerits points have been removed, proving motorists can drive safely over time, with thousands more eligible drivers from the final year of the trial to have points returned later this year.

Legislating to make the program permanent is another example of the Minns Government backing common-sense on NSW roads and recognising the millions of motorists who choose safer, more responsible driving every day.

The reform is not a replacement for enforcement.

Penalties, fines, licence suspensions and police action remain firmly in place for dangerous and repeat offenders. This reform works alongside those measures by giving drivers a clear incentive to slow down, follow the rules and stick to safer habits.

Only unrestricted licence holders are eligible. Learner and provisional drivers remain excluded under the Graduated Licensing Scheme, reflecting their higher risk profile and lower demerit thresholds.

Drivers must also maintain an active licence and remain free of relevant offences for the full 12-month reduction period for a demerit point to be removed.

Minister for Roads, Jenny Aitchison said:

“For too long, road safety has relied almost entirely on penalties and enforcement, and while those tools remain absolutely essential, on their own they don’t always change behaviour for the long term.

“We believe the best approach is a clear carrot and stick – strong penalties for dangerous behaviour, combined with a real incentive for drivers who do the right thing and stay offence-free.

“This reform reflects a fair, practical approach to road safety that works with drivers while still holding people accountable.

“Let’s not forget, road safety isn’t about choosing between enforcement or education – we need both.

“We’re investing a record $2.8 billion over four years in road safety – safer roads, better infrastructure, stronger enforcement and education – and we will rule nothing out when it comes to saving lives.

“Most drivers want to do the right thing. This program gives people who’ve made mistakes in the past a real reason to change their behaviour and keep doing better.

“If you break the rules, the penalties apply – fines, points and suspensions are still there.

“But if you slow down, follow the rules and drive safely over time, that effort is recognised, and we think that balance gives us the best chance of changing behaviour and saving lives.”

Japan’s rock star leader now has the political backing to push a bold agenda. Will she deliver?

Adam SimpsonAdelaide University

Japanese Prime Minister Sanae Takaichi has delivered her Liberal Democratic Party (LDP) a landslide victory in the parliamentary elections she called shortly after taking office.

Now that she has consolidated her power in Japan’s legislature (called the Diet), the big question is what she will do with it.

Since her ascent to the prime ministership in a parliamentary vote in October, the ultra conservative Takaichi has upended the normally staid Japanese political system.

She has connected with younger voters like no other Japanese leader in recent history with her savvy social media presenceiconic fashion sense and diplomatic flair. (In a literal rock-star moment, she showed off her drumming skills in a jam session with South Korea’s leader.)

Japanese Prime Minister Takaichi Sanae and South Korean President Lee Jae Myung on the drums together.

Takaichi has cannily taken advantage of the honeymoon phase of her leadership by calling a snap election to gain more power in the Diet before there’s a dip in her popularity.

However, voters will now expect to see a return on their investment, and Takaichi faces the much more daunting task of delivering on her promises. Improving living standards in a country with a rapidly shrinking workforce and ageing population without mass immigration will test her political skills much more than winning an election.

An unlikely election victory

Although Takaichi’s LDP has been in government for most of Japan’s post-war history, it has recently experienced a string of poor election results.

In 2024, it lost the lower house majority it held with its then-coalition partner, Komeito, after a series of corruption scandals. Then, last year, the coalition lost its majority in the upper house, leaving the government hanging by a thread.

The party began its remarkable turnaround following then-Prime Minister Shigeru Ishiba’s resignation in September in the wake of those electoral setbacks.

Many pre-election polls predicted a sizeable victory for the LDP and its new coalition partner, Nippon Ishin (the Japan Innovation Party). Takaichi also received a boost with an endorsement from US President Donald Trump. Although the Japanese public views Trump unfavourably, they also know the US is their ultimate security guarantor against China, in addition to Japan’s largest export destination.

Nevertheless, there were some doubts about whether Takaichi’s popularity, particularly among younger voters, would translate into votes.

In the end, her electoral gold dust rubbed off on the rest of her party. Despite freezing temperatures and record snow in places, the LDP has been comfortably returned to office with a vastly increased majority in the lower house. The coalition now has a two-thirds super-majority, which means she can override the upper house to push through her legislative agenda.

A more assertive posture on China?

Since becoming prime minister, the hawkish Takaichi has taken an assertive position towards China.

In November, she angered Beijing by saying Japan could intervene militarily to help protect Taiwan in the face of a potential Chinese invasion. This resulted in vicious Chinese attacks on Takaichi that continued into the new year.

While the Japanese public is divided over whether to come to Taiwan’s aid in any conflict with China, there is now strong support for Takaichi’s pledge to increase the defence budget to 2% of GDP by this March, two years ahead of schedule.

In December, the Cabinet approved a 9.4% increase in defence spending to achieve this objective, focusing on domestic production and advanced capabilities (cyber, space, long-range strikes).

In response to rising threats from China, North Korea and Russia, Takaichi’s government also plans to revise Japan’s core security and defence strategies this year.

Economic woes front and centre

As much as defence matters, Takaichi will ultimately be judged by the public when it comes to economic policy.

The public is increasingly concerned about rising inflation and stagnant wages leading to falling living standards.

A vivid illustration of this: the price of rice has doubled since 2024, hitting a new high last month. Public anger over rising rice prices even brought down the farm minister last year.

Inflation has been above the Bank of Japan’s 2% target for 45 straight months. And though nominal wages have recently picked up, real incomes have been decreasing for the last four years.

Takaichi has made tackling the cost of living a priority. She has vowed to suspend Japan’s 8% food tax for two years. And last year, her government announced a massive US$135 billion (A$192 billion) stimulus package, including subsidies for electricity and gas bills.

However, these policies will increase the government’s budget deficit, adding to the country’s already sky-high public debt levels.

And last month, Japanese government bond prices collapsed after Takaichi called the election, with the markets predicting a LDP win would result in looser fiscal policy and higher government debt.

The Bank of Japan is unlikely to intervene to support the bond market in any future crisis, which will leave the government with higher borrowing costs, further increasing public debt.

Japan also faces enormous challenges related to its shrinking population and workforce.

It is too early to know whether Takaichi has the answers to these challenges. But she now has the power, authority and freedom to boldly pursue her policy agenda. Now she will need to deliver the kind of change the electorate expects.The Conversation

Adam Simpson, Senior Lecturer in International Studies in the School of Society and Culture, Adelaide University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

In the Australian outback, we’re listening for nuclear tests – and what we hear matters more than ever

ANU Media
Hrvoje TkalčićAustralian National University

Tyres stick to hot asphalt as I drive the Stuart Highway from Alice Springs northward, leaving the MacDonnell Ranges behind. My destination is the Warramunga facility, about 500 kilometres north – a remote monitoring station I’ve directed for the Australian National University for nearly 19 years, and one of the most sensitive nuclear detection facilities on Earth.

When I started exploring Earth’s inner core in 1997, I had no idea my calling would lead me here, or that I’d spend years driving this highway through the red expanse of the Australian outback.

And today, as the New START treaty curbing the US and Russian nuclear weapons programs expires, the work we do in the red centre has become more important than ever before.

A giant telescope pointed at Earth’s centre

Located 37km southeast of Tennant Creek – or Jurnkkurakurr, as it’s known in the local Warumungu language – Warramunga consists of what might generously be called a demountable building, surrounded by sensors lined up across 20km of savannah, covered by red soil and long, white spinifex grass.

The facility operates two sophisticated arrays. One consists of 24 seismometers detecting vibrations through Earth, the other eight infrasound sensors picking up ultra-low-frequency sound waves inaudible to human ears.

When North Korea detonated its largest nuclear device in September 2017 – about 7,000km away – our instruments captured it clearly. Warramunga detected all six of North Korea’s declared nuclear tests, and our data was among the first to reach the International Data Centre in Vienna.

Aerial photo showing buildings in a red, scrubby landscape.
The Warramunga station is near Tennant Creek in the Northern Territory. NearmapCC BY

The geological stability and remoteness mean we detect events that might be masked elsewhere. When a wild brumby gallops past our sensors, we pick it up. When a nuclear bomb is tested on the other side of the world, we definitely know about it. We can distinguish it from an earthquake because of the different kinds of vibrations it produces.

Warramunga detects more seismic events than any other station in the global network. With multiple instruments in a carefully designed configuration, far from the coast and human activity, you have something like a giant telescope pointed at the centre of Earth.

An unusual partnership

Warramunga’s story began in 1965 when Australia and the United Kingdom jointly established it for nuclear test detection during the Cold War. In 1999, it was upgraded and later certified as a primary station in the Comprehensive Nuclear-Test-Ban Treaty Organization’s International Monitoring System.

The CTBTO, headquartered in Vienna, operates a global network of more than 300 facilities designed to detect any nuclear explosion anywhere on Earth. Australia hosts 21 of these facilities – the third-largest number globally.

But Warramunga is unique. It’s operated by a university on behalf of both the CTBTO and the Australian government, located on Warumungu Country. The location of sensors was determined in consultation with Traditional Owners to ensure the instruments would not interfere with sacred sites.

The Research School of Earth Sciences at the Australian National University in Canberra has managed Warramunga for more than 50 years, and we still do.

Life at the station

The station requires constant attention. Two dedicated technicians drive from Tennant Creek to the array each morning. By the time they arrive, the Sun is already high above the red land across which the array’s elements and termite mounds are spread.

They keep a careful watch on the world’s earthquakes and explosions, enduring extreme heat, dust, flies, fires, floods, thunderstorms and the occasional visit from wildlife. They ensure data flows continuously via satellite to Vienna.

After one infrastructure reconstruction, we found two large goannas wrapped around a seismometer, having decided to spend their nights in the firm embrace of our equipment. You don’t learn about this kind of challenge in Vienna’s United Nations offices.

Metal devices on red soil
Detectors at Warramunga. Hrvoje TkalčićCC BY

From Canberra, I coordinate between the on-site team, the Australian government, and our partners at the CTBTO. At least once a year, I make the drive up the Stuart Highway to Warramunga, checking equipment and discussing challenges with the technicians.

I also meet regularly with colleagues at the United Nations in Vienna. Managing this facility means bridging two worlds: the practical realities of maintaining sensitive equipment in a harsh environment and the international diplomacy of nuclear verification.

Why it matters now

For more than 30 years, the world has observed a de facto moratorium on nuclear explosive testing. The last US test was in 1992. Russia’s was in 1990.

This norm has been crucial in limiting nuclear weapons development. Verification systems such as Warramunga make this possible, because would-be violators know any significant nuclear explosion will be detected.

But this system faces its greatest challenge in decades. In October 2025, President Donald Trump announced the United States would begin testing nuclear weapons “on an equal basis” with Russia and China.

Days later, President Vladimir Putin directed Russian officials to prepare for possible nuclear tests. If this moratorium collapses, it opens the door to a new era of nuclear arms racing.

This is when verification becomes most crucial. The CTBTO’s network doesn’t just detect violations – its existence deters them. If the world knows a country has carried out a nuclear test and tried (but failed) to hide it, the testing country will face political consequences.

A hidden contribution

Warramunga’s data also helps researchers understand earthquakes, study Earth’s deep interior, such as the solid inner core, and track phenomena from meteorite impacts to Morning Glory clouds – extraordinary atmospheric waves travelling 1,400km from Cape York, first scientifically documented with Warramunga’s infrasonic array in the 1970s.

What strikes me after nearly two decades is how this unique partnership represents a remarkable example of academic institutions contributing directly to global security.

Few people realise that a university research school operates one of the world’s most crucial nuclear verification facilities. It’s an arrangement that brings together fundamental scientific research with practical obligations under international treaties – a model for how researchers can engage with pressing global challenges.

As nuclear rhetoric intensifies globally, the quiet technical work in the Australian outback gains new significance. Nuclear test monitoring is essential to deter would-be nuclear nations – and that’s a mission worth maintaining, even from the remote red centre of Australia.The Conversation

Hrvoje Tkalčić, Professor, Head of Geophysics, Director of Warramunga Array, Australian National University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why scrapping a key health promotion agency makes little economic sense

Mariusz Zając/Pexels
Jaithri AnanthapavanDeakin UniversityGary SacksDeakin University, and Vicki BrownDeakin University

News the world’s first independent health promotion agency – Australia’s own VicHealth – is to be abolished has been called “incomprehensible” and “a disaster” that places democracy at risk.

VicHealth is the agency that’s been behind successful quit smoking and skin cancer campaigns, among others.

Then came the push – including from experts in public health, and political parties – to save the almost-40 year-old agency.

The Victorian government has said absorbing VicHealth into the state’s health department is needed to help repair the budget. But, from an economic perspective, this looks like a bad call.

We receive funding from VicHealth, or have done so in the past.

Here’s why health promotion is worth more than every dollar invested.

Prevention is better than cure

Health promotion involves empowering people and communities to make healthier choices and create supportive environments. It aims to address the broad drivers of health, reduce inequities and improve overall wellbeing. One key aim is to prevent disease from arising in the first place.

In Australia, more than one-third of our total disease burden is preventable. Modifiable risk factors such as overweight and obesity, tobacco use and poor diets cost the health system A$38 billion dollars each year.

Preventable chronic (long-term) illness also reduces workforce productivity. This creates a substantial economic burden well beyond health.

Given these health and economic costs, there’s a strong case for governments to invest more in preventing disease.

This is already recognised in the National Preventive Health Strategy 2021–2030, which recommends increasing spending on health promotion and disease prevention to 5% of the health budget. Currently it accounts for less than 2%.

There is clear evidence prevention can deliver a strong return on investment.

For example, we analysed 16 obesity prevention initiatives and found 11 policies would likely deliver substantial health gains while also saving long-term health-care costs.

Such policies include sugary drink taxes and restrictions on marketing of unhealthy foods.

Broader research shows health promotion initiatives demonstrate returns of around $2.20 for every dollar spent.

Back to VicHealth

VicHealth was initially funded through tobacco tax revenue. It started out with a focus on reducing smoking rates, and famously bought out tobacco sponsorship in sports and the arts.

Over the years, the agency has funded landmark prevention efforts such as Quit and SunSmart. More recently, it has partnered with communities and organisations to also address unhealthy diets, physical inactivity and alcohol use.

Today, VicHealth takes a broader perspective to health promotion. This approach recognises that individual risk factors are shaped by the commercial and economic systems in which we live. The focus is on health and equity being prioritised alongside economic prosperity.

Evaluations of programs that were initially supported by VicHealth clearly demonstrate the agency’s value. For example, Quitline in Victoria produces a return of $1.24 for every dollar spent (calculated from values in this economic evaluation).

Victorian investment in SunSmart has achieved a return of $2.22 per dollar. When productivity was taken into account, the SunSmart program was estimated to prevent $713 million in productivity losses in 1988–2011.

The scale of the potential benefits of VicHealth supported initiatives outweighs its relatively modest annual budget of about $47 million.

It can take time for prevention efforts to pay off

Despite the great potential for prevention initiatives to improve health and save money, Australian governments have consistently under-invested in them.

One big reason comes down to timing of costs and benefits. Prevention requires upfront investment while the benefits may only be realised many years later.

One study estimated an initial investment of $1.2 billion (inflated to 2024 values) and total spending of $7.6 billion would be required to implement 23 of the most cost-effective prevention initiatives.

These initiatives included a wide range of measures such as cancer screening programs, vaccinations and education campaigns.

Importantly, the study showed these interventions could avoid over $19 billion (in 2024 values) in health-care spending.

Short-term budget cycles can make it hard for government to commit to these high-value interventions.

This is a key reason why independent health promotion agencies, such as VicHealth, are typically better placed to ensure sustained and stable funding for programs and initiatives that deliver longer-term health and economic returns.

Disease prevention is political, and goes beyond health

Australian governments have previously made bold attempts at investing in prevention.

The Australian National Preventive Health Agency was established to oversee an $872 million investment to address modifiable risk factors for disease. However, a change in government more than a decade ago resulted in the withdrawal of this funding and dismantling of the agency.

So we need an independent body that operates at arms length to government if we are to focus on best practice prevention initiatives, without the impact of changes in governments and their shifting priorities.

The Victorian government has proposed to integrate VicHealth’s prevention activities within the state’s health department. But many prevention initiatives operate outside the health sector.

For example, school-based initiatives and community-led campaigns typically include involvement from multiple government departments, local councils, as well as community and commercial organisations.

So an independent health promotion agency, such as VicHealth, is ideally placed to lead these collaborations across sectors.

The urgent need to focus on prevention

Australia’s spending on health and aged care is set to soar, rising from 6.2% of GDP in 2022–23 to 10.8% by 2062–63.

The Productivity Commission has flagged the fiscal pressures this will create. Among its recommendations are supporting disease prevention and early intervention, with an independent advisory board and a dedicated prevention fund.

At a time when independent, well-funded prevention efforts are being recommended, disinvesting a world-leading health promotion agency makes little economic sense.The Conversation

Jaithri Ananthapavan, Associate Professor in Health Economics, Deakin UniversityGary Sacks, Professor of Public Health Policy, Deakin University, and Vicki Brown, Research Fellow, Deakin Health Economics, Deakin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The truth about energy: why your 40s feel harder than your 20s, but there may be a lift later on

Michelle SpearUniversity of Bristol

Some of us remember having more energy in our 20s. We could work late, sleep badly, have a night out, recover quickly and still feel capable the next day. By our 40s, that ease has often gone. Fatigue feels harder to shake. It’s tempting to assume this is simply the ageing process – a one‑way decline.

The truth is that the 40s are often the most exhausting decade, not because we are old, but because several small biological changes converge at exactly the same time that life’s demands often peak. Crucially, and optimistically, there is no reason to assume that energy must continue to decline in the same way into our 60s.

Energetic 20s

In early adulthood, multiple systems peak together.

Muscle mass is at its highest, even without deliberate training. As a metabolically active tissue, muscle helps regulate blood sugar and reduces the effort required for everyday tasks. Research shows that skeletal muscle is metabolically active even at rest and contributes substantially to basal metabolic rate (the energy your body uses just to keep you alive when you’re at rest). When you have more muscle, everything costs less energy.

At the cellular level, mitochondria – the structures that convert food into usable energy – are more numerous and more efficient. They produce energy with less waste and less inflammatory byproduct.

Sleep, too, is deeper. Even when sleep is shortened, the brain produces more slow‑wave sleep, the phase most strongly linked to physical restoration.

Hormonal rhythms are also more stable. Cortisol, often described as the body’s stress hormone, melatonin, growth hormone and sex hormones follow predictable daily patterns, making energy more reliable across the day.

Put simply, energy in your 20s is abundant and forgiving. You can mistreat it and still get away with it.

Exhausting 40s

By midlife, none of these systems has collapsed, but small shifts start to matter.

Muscle mass begins to decline from the late 30s onwards unless you exercise to maintain it. This in itself is a top tip – do strength training. The loss of muscle is gradual, but its effects are not. Less muscle means everyday movement costs more energy, even if you don’t consciously notice it.

Mitochondria still produce energy, but less efficiently. In your 20s, poor sleep or stress could be buffered. In your 40s, inefficiency is exposed. Recovery becomes more “expensive”.

Sleep also changes. Many people still get enough hours, but sleep fragments. Less deep sleep means less repair. Fatigue feels cumulative rather than episodic.

Hormones don’t disappear in midlife – they fluctuate, particularly in women. Variability, not deficiency, disrupts temperature regulation, sleep timing and energy rhythms. The body copes better with low levels than with unpredictable ones.

Then there is the brain. Midlife is a period of maximum cognitive and emotional load: leadership, responsibility, vigilance and caring roles. The prefrontal cortex – responsible for planning, making decisions and inhibition – works harder for the same output. Mental multitasking drains energy as effectively as physical labour.

This is why the 40s feel so punishing. Biological efficiency is beginning to shift at exactly the moment when demand is highest.

A business woman hard at work at her desk.
Midlife is often a time of maximum cognitive load. Krakenimages/Shutterstock.com

Hopeful 60s

Later life is often imagined as a continuation of midlife decline; however, many people report something different.

Hormonal systems often stabilise after periods of transition. Life roles may simplify. Cognitive load can reduce. Experience replaces constant active decision‑making.

Sleep doesn’t automatically worsen with age. When stress is lower and routines are protected, sleep efficiency can improve – even if total sleep time is shorter.

Crucially, muscle and mitochondria still adapt surprisingly well into later life. Strength training in people in their 60s, 70s and beyond can restore strength, improve metabolic health and increase subjective energy within months.

This doesn’t mean later life brings boundless energy, but it often brings something else: predictability.

Good news?

Across adulthood, energy shifts in character rather than simply declining. The mistake we make is assuming that feeling tired in midlife reflects a personal failing, or that it marks the start of an unavoidable decline. Anatomically, it is neither.

Midlife fatigue is best understood as a mismatch between biology and demand: small shifts in efficiency occurring at precisely the point when cognitive, emotional and practical loads are at their highest.

The hopeful message is not that we can reclaim our 20-year-old selves. Rather, it is that energy in later life remains highly modifiable, and that the exhaustion so characteristic of the 40s is not the endpoint of the story. Fatigue at this stage is not a warning of inevitable decline; it is a signal that the rules have changed.The Conversation

Michelle Spear, Professor of Anatomy, University of Bristol

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

ADHD prescriptions are up tenfold, with the wealthiest kids most likely to be medicated

Phil Boorman/Getty Images
Brenton ProsserAustralian National University and Yogi VidyattamaUniversity of Canberra

The number of young people in Australia prescribed medication for attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) increased more that tenfold in 20 years, our new research shows, while it is no longer most prevalent in poorer areas.

Children living in the lowest socioeconomic postcodes used to have the highest rates of ADHD prescriptions. But this has flipped, with kids from wealthier families now most likely to be prescribed.

So does this mean ADHD prescription depends on how much your parents earn?

Not quite. Overall, the variation in prescription levels has narrowed around the national average over the last 20 years. But there is a stark difference between the most and least wealthy postcodes.

What is ADHD?

ADHD is the most commonly diagnosed disorder among Australian children. While symptoms vary from person to person, it’s associated with hyperactive and/or inattentive behaviours that cause challenges at home, school or work.

The most common approved treatment for ADHD is psychostimulant drugs.

What we studied

Our research team went back through two decades of national data from 2003 to 2022. We looked at official prescription records from Australia’s Pharmaceutical Benefits Scheme (PBS), which subsidises medication.

We wanted to find out how prescription rates change and differ between states and territories. We also wanted to know whether living in a wealthy or disadvantaged postcode plays a role in accessing prescription.

To look at ADHD prescriptions by postcode, we used an established way of comparing postcodes by calculating something called a “standardised medication ratio”.

If a postcode had the national average rate of prescriptions, its score was 1.0. Higher than one means more prescriptions than average, lower means fewer.

What we found

Between 2003 and 2022, the number of children aged 5–17 on ADHD medication increased from 20,147 people (0.5% of the youth population) in 2003 to 246,021 young people (or 4.2%) in 2022.

The biggest jump was in 2020 and 2021 during the COVID pandemic, when prescriptions spiked, especially for older teens (15–17 years), up by 2.1 percentage points from 3.1% in 2020 to 5.2% in 2022.

Lockdowns seem to have pushed more families to get help or at least start paying more attention to neurodivergence and learning issues.

Back in the 1990s, your chances of getting ADHD medication really depended on where you lived or how much your parents earned.

Some states, such as Queensland and Western Australia, were prescribing more than others. As our data shows, rates were higher still in Western Australia and Tasmania in 2003.

When standardising for populations (adjusting for the number of children living in a postcode), we can see how this trend varied by state and territory over the 20 years.

Over time the differences have narrowed.

This suggests clinicians are becoming more consistent in how they diagnose and treat ADHD. This is largely the result of the efforts to standardise best practices across the nation and remove the big variations of 20 years ago.

As some states and territories expand prescription to GPs, robust training and standardisation will be vital to avoid some of the past inconsistencies.

So how does wealth come into it?

For a long time in Australia, it was the kids in the most disadvantaged areas who were more likely to be prescribed ADHD medications.

This may have been because behaviour symptoms can stand out more when schools and families have fewer resources to manage them.

But this pattern has flipped. These days, it’s the wealthiest postcodes – the top 10% – where kids are most likely to be prescribed medication.

In 2003, richer areas were least likely to have kids medicated for ADHD, with a ratio of 0.612 (remembering that 1.000 is the national standard). By 2021, they’d climbed all the way to the top with a ratio of 1.245.

At the time, seven of ten deciles had ratios between 0.948 and 1.039, while the lowest 10% of postcodes had a ratio of 0.708.

Why the switch?

It probably has a lot to do with access. Twenty years ago, we did not see today’s level of demand and the health system could largely cover the demand.

Now, getting a diagnosis can take multiple specialist appointments, psychological assessments and possibly months on a waiting list. The poorest families might face longer waits or may not pursue diagnosis and medication at all if it feels out of reach.

However this data shows that, on average, most postcodes now sit close to the national average. So, it’s only the very top and very bottom income groups that have flipped in twenty years.

The limits of the data

It’s important to note a few caveats. The data only includes prescriptions filled in the PBS system. That means prescriptions from the private medical system are not included, which means the trend in the highest postcodes may be even higher.

The study also couldn’t look at the influence of culture or ethnicity, since the data was anonymous.

And while stimulants are mainly prescribed for ADHD, a tiny number are used to treat other conditions (such as narcolepsy).

Diagnostic guidelines have shifted over the years, most notably when guidelines changed to allow diagnosis of ADHD and autism in 2013, but this did not result in a notable jump in prescriptions in our study.

The real growth came steadily over time, then sped up around COVID since 2020.

Importantly, the study didn’t look at how many repeat prescriptions were taken each year or compare individual postcodes to the national rate, so it does not speak to whether ADHD is being overdiagnosed or overmedicated in some postcodes.

What does it all mean?

Our findings show more people are accepting ADHD and getting help. This points to better acceptance of neurodivergence, more consistent care, and a society trying help all its kids thrive in new and changing times.

More standardised practices and consistent care means we’re moving away from the “postcode lottery” effect, where treatment depends too heavily on where you live.

However, the flip in highest diagnosis ratios from the poorest postcodes to the richest means we still need to look closely at access and equity of treatment. The Conversation

Brenton Prosser, Partner, Government & Public Sector, Providence / Honorary Fellow, Australian National University and Yogi Vidyattama, Associate Professor, Faculty of Business, Government and Law, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Was the violent Sydney protest avoidable, and what can police and demonstrators learn?

Simon BronittUniversity of Sydney

The police role as a “thin blue line” between public order and chaos was tested in Sydney’s CBD on Monday night.

Videos have captured the violent clashes between police and some of the thousands of protesters who gathered at the Town Hall to protest the presence of Israeli President Isaac Herzog in Australia.

One video shows a police officer repeatedly punching a man lying prone on the street, his hands pinned behind him.

New South Wales Premier Chris Minns has defended the actions of the police in Sydney, saying they faced an “impossible situation”.

No doubt, there will be investigations into the legality and reasonableness of the police response. But what’s also needed to prevent a repeat of Monday’s violence is a rethink of police training and protocols in NSW that are explicitly based on a respect for human rights, or what policing scholars call “human rights policing”.

Chaos erupting at the Sydney protest outside Town Hall as police clash with demonstrators.

‘Major event’ declaration

The NSW government declared Herzog’s visit to be a “major event” under state law. This gave police sweeping powers to issue move-on orders, close specific locations and search people in a designated area of the city. Essentially, it created a protest exclusion zone.

These laws, which exist in many jurisdictions, are typically used to ensure public order during major political and sporting events, such as Queensland’s prototype Major Events Act enacted before the 2014 G20 summit in Brisbane and the 2018 Commonwealth Games on the Gold Coast.

While these acts restrict otherwise lawful peaceful protests, they are limited in both time and place.

In Sydney, the NSW Supreme Court rejected a challenge to the government declaration just minutes before Monday’s protest was due to take place.

This suggested that, in the eyes of the state government and the court, public order and safety outweighed the rights of protesters, in this instance, to march through the CBD as they wished.

But the expanded legal powers of the police in these situations do not render declared public spaces “human rights-free zones”.

And public order was clearly not maintained in Sydney since the situation at Town Hall quickly devolved into violence.

So what went wrong? And how does policing need to change?

How policing in these situations can work

Policing is especially challenging in cases where two or more opposing groups seek to exercise the same rights to protest in the same public space, or the location or size of a protest raises concerns about public safety or potentially interferes with other lawful rights.

The G20 summit and Commonwealth Games in Queensland, both of which took place without significant incidents of disorder, show how this can be successfully done. These events provide a model for human rights policing – what worked well, and why.

My international review of policing the G20 summit and other major events a decade ago, conducted with two leading policing scholars, David Baker and Philip Stenning, was based on extensive empirical research. It identified several important lessons:

1) Police play a key role in upholding human rights. Balancing competing interests requires respectful dialogue between police and protest organisers and other affected community stakeholders before an event takes place

2) Framing police powers expressly within a statutory human rights framework is desirable. However, Queensland police’s own policies, practices and training were key to upholding human rights. As the public safety policy manual stated:

When possible, police will attempt to negotiate with all groups wanting to march or to use a particular space. In managing the use of public space, police will be impartial, and will use their discretion to facilitate the lawful activities of all parties

3) Policing protests also benefits from the presence of independent legal observers. They can assist in clarifying the rights and responsibilities of protesters, and help de-escalate tense situations.

Senior police officials said there had been discussions with the Palestine Action Group before Monday’s protest, in which they encouraged protesters to move to Hyde Park outside the exclusion zone.

However, there is always a risk that dialogue between police and protest organisers ahead of a demonstration does not work as planned. There can be miscommunication, mistrust and unexpected departures from agreed plans and protocol.

Large protests also attract diverse groups of people that organisers have no control over, including those who willingly engage in violent confrontations with police or opposing groups.

That said, allowing time for proper dialogue with protest organisers and community representatives can help anticipate potential flashpoints and identify the points when police will have to intervene. This dialogue can generate better understanding of:

  • when police give protesters a reasonable direction to disperse from an area

  • what constitutes a “reasonable time” to leave that area

  • what legal steps (arrest and removal) might be taken by police against those who refuse to comply

  • the range of “reasonable force” police will use to disperse crowds or arrest those who don’t comply.

Reasonable force generally depends on the situation. Above all, physical force and deployment of pepper spray must be consistent with police training and policies, and as with any coercive powers, should be used as a matter of last resort.

What needs to be done?

Proportionate and accountable policing needs to be founded in a respect for human rights to the maximum extent possible.

But it’s also important to note that human rights are rarely absolute. As a result, a person’s freedom to protest may legitimately be restricted in the interest of public safety and to safeguard the rights of others (such as using or moving freely in public spaces).

So, is human rights policing, then, practical or realistic?

NSW policymakers should examine how policing practice has changed in jurisdictions that have enacted human rights legislation (notably the United Kingdom, ACT, Victoria and Queensland).

These laws delineate when and how people’s rights to engage in peaceful public protest should be protected, and when and how far they can be restricted on public safety grounds.

The NSW government should also prioritise a reconsideration of the Human Rights Bill introduced to parliament late last year.

And learning lessons from the policing of major events in Queensland a decade ago would help move towards a more robust model of human rights policing and prevent a repeat of Monday’s violent disorder.The Conversation

Simon Bronitt, Professor of Law, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Isaac Herzog visit: protesters lose challenge to sweeping special police powers. What now?

Maria O'SullivanDeakin University

The NSW Supreme Court has dismissed a challenge to the extraordinary powers given to police to disrupt protests against Israeli President Isaac Herzog’s visit to Sydney this week.

The decision was handed down late Monday, minutes before a planned protest was scheduled to start through Sydney’s central business district, from Town Hall to Parliament.

Given the urgency of the challenge, Justice Robertson Wright did not hand down reasons.

The decision means protesters attending the demonstration on Monday evening or in the days ahead could be searched by police and face fines of up to $5,500 for not complying with police orders.

What was the case about?

The challenge was brought by the Palestine Action Group in response to the NSW government declaration that Herzog’s visit would qualify as a “major event” under the Major Events Act of 2009.

This declaration is significant because it grants police additional powers to move people on, close specific locations, search people inside a designated area, and issue orders to prevent disruption or risks to public safety.

The declaration zone encompasses the Sydney CBD and stretches out to the eastern suburbs.

The major event declaration zone for Herzog’s visit to Sydney. NSW government

It is important to note that Hyde Park was not affected by the order. But the protesters wanted to gather at Town Hall, as Palestine Action Group organiser Josh Lees explained:

We assert our right to protest at Sydney Town Hall because it is the most visible town square that we have in this city for a peaceful assembly and demonstration. We will not be shunted off to some park — out of sight, out of mind — on a dark weeknight. That is not consistent with a genuine right to protest.

The group’s challenge was made on three grounds:

  • Herzog’s visit does not constitute an “event” under the relevant legislation
  • the designation is unreasonable
  • it was made for an “improper purpose” of suppressing a protest.

Determining an ‘event’ under the law

It is important to understand that the designation of the “major event” area for Herzog’s visit was not made by the NSW parliament. Rather, as is usual in these cases, it was made by the tourism minister, Stephen Kamper, under the Major Events Act.

This legislation was aimed at keeping public order during major sporting or music events. Although the act has been used to expand policing powers for large government meetings, such as the 2018 ASEAN–Australia Special Summit, this week’s action is reportedly the first time it has been used solely for the visit of a foreign dignitary.

The act also specifically states that it cannot be used to “declare an industrial or political demonstration or protest to be a major event”. The government’s declaration does not mention protests, however – it declares the major event to be the “Israeli presidential visit”.

The plaintiffs argued the Major Events Act requires the declaration to specify a time, location and who is participating in the “event”.

Although the declaration included a map of the area covered by the declaration and a four-day time period from February 9–12, the plaintiffs argued it lacked precise locations and participants.

This was problematic as it infringed on the public’s fundamental rights of expression and assembly.

Infringing on people’s rights

For various reasons, the plantiffs did not use the implied freedom of political communication as the basis for their challenge.

But they did question the impact on people’s human rights through what is known as the “principle of legality”. Put simply, this principle requires courts to presume that any law passed by the state will not infringe on human rights – unless there are clear words to that effect in the law or it is implied.

The judge, in dismissing the challenge, presumably did not agree with these arguments.

Nor did Justice Wright apparently agree with the plaintiffs’ assertion the declaration was unreasonable and had an improper purpose – to suppress a protest. This would have been difficult to prove, given the minister had cited public order and security concerns in his decision, which could be viewed as a proper purpose.

Broader implications of the ruling

The case raises legal questions about the extent to which a government can restrict protests to a particular area (like Hyde Park) in the name of public order.

In its press release , the government said:

These arrangements are not a ban on protests or marches. People retain the right to express their views lawfully.

On one hand, there is an argument that people should be able to choose where they want to protest to maximise impact.

An argument could also be made that some balance is required between the right to protest and the need to maintain public safety or order. Indeed, during the hearing, Justice Wright suggested the exclusion of Hyde Park from the declaration may have legitimately achieved this balance.

This will be relevant to another challenge due to be heard before the NSW Supreme Court on February 26 to the government’s restrictions on protests following a terror attack. This power was given to police in legislation passed immediately after the Bondi terror attack in December.

Given protests will continue to occur in all states in the face of restrictions like these, it will become increasingly important for the courts to clarify this question about how to find the right balance and ensure freedom of expression is not curtailed.The Conversation

Maria O'Sullivan, Associate Professor of Law, Member of Deakin Cyber and the Centre for Law as Protection, Deakin University, Deakin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Victims have told us the worst of Epstein’s crimes for decades – and they are still being ignored

Lindsey BlumellCity St George's, University of London

As the US Department of Justice published 3.5 million pages of the Epstein files, deputy US attorney Todd Blanche indicated that the deluge of documents wouldn’t lead to additional criminal charges. Victims want “to be made whole”, he said, but that “doesn’t mean we can just create evidence or that we can just kind of come up with a case that isn’t there”.

Given the scale of the revelations, and the fact that millions of files haven’t been released, that statement seems incredible. But beyond this, survivors of Jeffrey Epstein’s abuse have come forward for years to tell their stories, and have not received justice.

In an interview in September 2025, six Epstein survivors stated that the Department of Justice had not contacted them in the process of reviewing the files.

Not only have Epstein survivors been shut out from the process, the department revealed the identities and personal information of survivors in the publicly released 3.5 million pages. Survivor Danielle Bensky told news outlets she found her name and personal information in the files. Such an error is gross negligence and incompetence that silences and endangers victims.

Of course, not all people named in the files sexually abused or were complicit in the sexual abuse of girls and young women. But this moment is an echo of how authorities have reacted to Epstein’s survivors for 30 years.

As the political and financial scandals emerge, politicians have called for a “victim-centred” approach. But as people react with shock to the revelations in the files, it’s clear that the voices and experiences of the victims are still being ignored.

Decades of evidence

Survivors of Epstein’s abuse had been speaking out for years before the public became fascinated by Epstein’s crimes and the famous men in his network.

In 1996, Maria Farmer reported to the New York Police Department and the FBI that Epstein and Ghislaine Maxwell had violently groped her. She was 25 at the time, and later found out her 16-year-old sister Annie had also been violated by Epstein. The FBI failed to investigate, and abuse of girls continued.

Victims’ rights lawyer Brad Edwards has represented over 200 of Epstein’s survivors. In 2008, Edwards told a federal judge that Epstein might be the “most dangerous sexual predator in US history”.

That same year, Epstein was handed a sweetheart deal of being charged with solicitation of prostitution only, instead of child sexual abuse or trafficking. This resulted in a 13-month stint at a minimum security facility, which he left 12 hours per day on most days to “work” at his foundation. He was required to register as a sex offender, though not tried as one.

In Florida, child sexual abuse cases can recommend up to life imprisonment for guilty convictions. Human sex trafficking in Florida can result in up to 30 years imprisonment. Of course, convictions can be complicated – but both child sexual abuse and human sex trafficking are serious crimes associated with extended prison sentences.

The latest files showed that many powerful people in Epstein’s network – Peter Mandelson, for example – were not deterred by him registering as a sex offender in 2008.

At the time, the New York Times headlined its story “Financier Starts Sentence in Prostitution Case”. While factually correct, such an approach arguably downplayed Epstein’s sexual abuse of girls and young women.

Few journalists were courageous enough to explicitly name Epstein’s crimes for what they were. One exception was a 2006 opinion piece by journalist Eliza Cramer of The Palm Beach Post, who wrote: “He was over 50. And they were girls. 14, 15, 16, 17-year-old-girls. That should count for something – the difference between prostitution and pedophilia.”

By 2009, at least a dozen civil lawsuits had been filed against Epstein. In 2010, flight logs obtained through the suits showed several high-powered men, including politicians, celebrities, academics and CEOs, flying on Epstein’s jets.

Justice denied

It took another nine years and many more civil suits before Epstein was arrested on July 6 2019 for sex trafficking and sex trafficking conspiracy. He faced up to 45 years in prison if convicted.

Survivors again came forward publicly to tell their stories, like Courtney Wild, Virginia Roberts Giuffre and Jennifer Araoz, who were 14 and 15 when first recruited to “massage” Epstein. All three came from difficult backgrounds, and all three claimed to have eventually been raped by Epstein. They were adults by the time they finally saw their abuser behind bars.

Survivors were denied justice once again when Epstein was found dead in his jail cell in August 2019. But that didn’t stop them from speaking out in 2021 during Ghislaine Maxwell’s trial, which ended in a 20-year sentence for sex trafficking girls.

The fallout from the latest revelations has again put survivors secondary to the actions of powerful men. Mandelson, who maintained a friendship with Epstein after his 2008 conviction, initially declined to apologise to Epstein’s victims and distance himself from any knowledge of the financier’s sex crimes.

Andrew Mountbatten-Windsor, who in 2022 settled a civil sexual assault case from Giuffre without an admission of liability, has only in the last few months lost his royal titles. And only with this latest batch of revelations has finally left his royal residence.

Giuffre’s memoir was released October 2025, months after she died. A line in her book sums up our responsibility to stop ignoring the survivors: “I know this is a lot to take in. The violence. The neglect. The bad decisions. The self-harm. Imagine if a trauma reel like this played in your head all the time, as it does mine … but please don’t stop reading.”

The sexual abuse and sex trafficking of girls and young women detailed by the survivors is harrowing. Removing a few titles or losing a job will never be adequate justice for the crimes committed, nor for the sidelining of victims for so many years.The Conversation

Lindsey Blumell, Lecturer in Journalism, City St George's, University of London

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Indonesia’s leader is going after critics with a vengeance. This could complicate relations with Australia

Tim LindseyThe University of Melbourne

Indonesian President Prabowo Subianto waited decades for his chance to lead the country. The controversial former general finally won the office on his third attempt in a 2024 landslide election.

Since then, Prabowo has wasted little time moving against Indonesia’s fragile democracy, accelerating a process that began under his predecessor, Joko “Jokowi” Widodo.

As Australia and Indonesia grow closer, this matters. The two neighbours agreed on an important bilateral security treaty in November, and it is expected to be formally signed in the coming days during Prime Minister Anthony Albanese’s trip to Indonesia.

Yet, the countries seem to be moving further apart when it comes to freedom of speech and respect for civil society. This could complicate matters for Albanese, particularly as Prabowo ramps up his crackdown on critics of his administration.

Distaste for democracy

Indonesia’s vulnerable democratic system has been under repeated attack from government for most of the last decade. Under the administrations of Widodo and now Prabowo, a laundry list of actions have been taken to chip away at it. To name just a few:

  • the independence of the once-feared anti-corruption commission (KPK) has been profoundly compromised

  • blatant efforts have been made to stack the Constitutional Court

  • the army has been invited back into civil administration, with laws passed to make it possible

  • nepotistic appointments have been made to high public offices, including ministries, the central bankthe courts and even the vice presidency

  • unconstitutional laws prohibiting criticism of the government have been reinstated

  • laws have passed allowing the government to ban civil society organisations without judicial intervention

  • a new proposal has been made to end direct elections of local government heads.

Many predicted these events. Prabowo has never made secret his distaste for democracy and enthusiasm for the authoritarian New Order regime of Soeharto, his former father-in-law.

In fact, Gerindra, Prabowo’s political party, still has as its No. 1 objective reinstating the old constitution under which Soeharto ruled. This would mean dumping most of the key democratic reforms of the past 30 years.

But recent developments suggest the dismantling of democratic freedoms is speeding up. Prabowo seems to be using the Soeharto playbook to move against those who oppose what he is doing – mainly pro-democracy activists.

Increasing attacks on critics

It’s not hard to understand why. Prabowo’s grand ruling coalition now includes almost every party in the legislature – all of them right or centre-right – and political discourse rarely involves detailed policy debates.

This means civil society – in particular, Indonesia’s tiny but vibrant activist community – has become the only real source of opposition.

After Soeharto’s fall, activist NGOs emerged as key drivers of reform, progressive policy and government monitoring in Indonesia. At times, they partnered with government to deliver new policy initiatives. But under Jokowi, NGOs also led massive demonstrations against regressive policies.

Now, Prabowo’s administration has identified them as the enemy.

In August, huge protests broke out after politicians voted to give themselves extravagant allowances. A brutal police response then triggered wild violence against authorities across the archipelago. These riots shook the ruling elite to the core.

In response, the government came down heavily on civil society activists. It blamed them for the riots, even though they were mostly a spontaneous popular response to abusive actions by the authorites. Prabowo, however, said activists were engaging in “treason and terrorism”.

Thousands were arrested and, detainees claim, some were tortured. Hundreds now face trial for subversion and incitement. This has tied up the small activist groups working frantically to defend their colleagues.

Prabowo has also used the Soeharto-era approach of associating his critics with shadowy foreign enemies. He has railed against “foreign intervention” he says is intended to “divide the country”. He claims there are “foreign lackeys” backed by foreign powers “that do not want to see Indonesia prosper”.

Last year, Prabowo even accused the highly-respected news outlet Tempo of being a foreign stooge because it won a grant from the Media Development Investment Fund, a not-for-profit linked to George Soros.

This week, he claimed to have unspecified proof that foreign forces were behind the August riots.

A draconian new law against ‘foreign propaganda’

“Let the dogs bark,” Prabowo told a press conference last March in response to his critics. “We will keep moving forward. We are on the right path”.

But, in reality, Prabowo is determined to stop the barking. His government has now proposed a law against disinformation and foreign propaganda that could revive Soeharto-era media controls and censorship.

A so-called “academic draft” putting forth the rationale for the law says Indonesia needs “a comprehensive and integrated legal instrument to prevent, detect, and counter disinformation and foreign propaganda”. It alleges that disinformation and foreign propaganda is being “powered by social media, artificial intelligence and transnational networks” of malicious actors.

If this law is passed in the form the draft suggests, it could be used to ramp up the government’s crackdown on civil society groups. Activists and journalists could potentially be charged with offences of spreading “foreign propaganda”.

The draft also proposes restricting “foreign capital” to stop the threat posed by so-called foreign agents.

Many civil society groups in Indonesia are affiliated with international NGOs, such as Amnesty and Transparency. Many others receive funding from overseas aid organisations, including Australia’s, or private philanthropists. Most depend on these streams of income to pay wages and day-to-day expenses. They would collapse without this funding.

It’s not clear what exactly “foreign capital restrictions” means. But it could cast a wide net over all activist groups, as well as foreign organisations working in Indonesia that have an online presence.

Indonesians targeted in Australia

But the net may reach even further than this. The draft suggests the law would apply across borders. This could effectively target government critics based overseas, including in Australia.

Despite the dramatic decline in Indonesian studies in our schools and universities, Australia is still a major global centre for research on Indonesia. Indonesian critics of different regimes in Jakarta have sought sanctuary in Australia over the decades, and many thousands of Indonesians have studied here.

Australia is also home to a small but active Indonesian diaspora community. In August, they held their own demonstrations in cities across Australia in support of the protests in Indonesia.

As Prabowo’s administration moves Indonesia closer to becoming a “new New Order”, where opposition is routinely met with repression and censorship prevails, Australia’s role as a hub for open dialogue, free speech, analysis and criticism of Indonesia will become even more important.

We can be sure this will be no more welcome in Prabowo’s Indonesia than it was under Soeharto. Then, Australian academics and journalists were often denied entry and critical articles sometimes led to a freeze in diplomatic relations.

Today, however, the Indonesian government has coercive digital capabilities, which it can deploy against its critics in the diaspora. To make matters worse, Australia and Indonesia have an active extradition agreement. Theoretically, it might be deployed against Indonesians in Australia who have fallen afoul of the proposed disinformation and foreign propaganda law.

Indonesia is the dominant economic and political force in Southeast Asia, and an emerging global player. It is crucial to Australia’s defence strategies and an important partner on immigration, trade and education.

This means Canberra must have a good working relationship with Jakarta. Agreements about trade and defence are part of that, as is the constant flow of ministerial visits between the two countries.

But all that will become way more difficult to manage if this xenophobic new law is passed and used to stifle free speech and target legitimate criticism of the government.The Conversation

Tim Lindsey, Malcolm Smith Professor of Asian Law and Director of the Centre for Indonesian Law, Islam and Society, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Forget grand plans. These small tweaks can add meaning to your life

Quốc Bảo/Pexels
Trevor MazzucchelliCurtin University

The start of the year often comes with attempts at big life changes that we’re hoping will make us feel more grounded, fulfilled or in control. Maybe you’ve decided it’s time to change careers, move overseas or run a marathon.

But lasting meaning rarely comes from dramatic reinvention. It’s shaped by what we do, consistently. Behavioural science tells us meaning is constructed one reinforcing action at a time.

In other words, meaning isn’t something you discover after a long search. It’s something you build, one small, worthwhile action after the other.

So how exactly does all this work? And what types of worthwhile actions are we talking about?

The meaning of meaning

In psychology, “meaning” refers to the sense that life is coherent, purposeful and connected to what you care about.

People who experience more meaning tend to report better wellbeing, lower stress and depression, and greater resilience when life becomes difficult.

When meaning is low, people can feel unanchored or adrift, even if nothing is going objectively “wrong”.

Life tends to feel meaningful when we spend time doing things that matter to us and that offer some sense of reward. This is not necessarily excitement, but a quiet feeling of “that was worth doing”. Helping a friend, learning something small, progressing a task, or sharing a moment of connection can all leave us more grounded and alive.

These experiences are examples of positive reinforcement – behaviours that give something back, such as energy, pride, satisfaction or connection. Over time, these small rewards strengthen the patterns that help life feel purposeful.

By contrast, when we mainly act to avoid discomfort – cancel plans, withdraw when anxious or overwhelmed, delay tasks that matter – we get a moment of relief, but lose access to the experiences that enrich life.

A more helpful pattern is to take small steps even when motivation is low. Sending the message, starting the job or stepping outside are small beginnings that often spark the satisfaction or hope we were waiting for.

Why one-off boosts don’t last

The hedonic treadmill helps explain why one-off, feel-good moments rarely create lasting meaning. Psychologists use this term to describe our tendency to quickly return to our usual emotional baseline after positive events.

We adapt quickly to pleasurable things and events: buying something new, ticking off a goal, going on a short holiday. A burnt-out worker might feel better after a weekend away, but the effect fades as soon as Monday returns.

Special moments are still valuable. They create memories and punctuate the year. But they don’t change our lives unless paired with small, consistent shifts in everyday routines, setting boundaries, and the ways we invest in our relationships.

Meaning depends on diverse sources

Wellbeing is more stable when supported by a range of small, ongoing sources of reinforcement. If all your sense of purpose rests on work, one relationship, or a single pursuit – like sport – then stress in that single area can shake your wellbeing.

But when meaning draws on several domains – friendships, learning, creativity, physical activity, contribution, family, nature, spirituality – you have more points of stability.

The encouraging part is meaning doesn’t depend on perfect motivation or major life changes. It’s shaped by small behaviours you can start at any time.

So what actually works?

These three research-backed steps can help build more meaning into your life.

1. Look back before moving forward

Before setting goals, reflect on the previous year. Ask:

  • what am I proud of or grateful for?

  • what lifted my energy or sense of purpose?

  • what drained it?

  • what did I avoid that actually mattered?

This helps you recognise which behaviours, relationships and routines quietly sustained you, and where your portfolio may have become too narrow.

2. Pick two or three areas that matter to you

Meaningful change rarely comes from grand resolutions. A steadier approach is to choose two or three life areas that matter – improving health, deepening a relationship, learning something new, contributing to community life, or strengthening parenting routines – and identify one small, realistic action in each. The aim isn’t to overhaul everything, but to gently broaden your sources of reward.

Schedule only the first step: a short walk, reading a page, sending a message, writing a paragraph, practising for five minutes. Early on, the greatest achievement is simply starting, no matter how small.

Be kind to yourself. Illness, stress, fatigue and competing demands will disrupt your plans. What matters is returning, gently and repeatedly, to the behaviours that reflect who you want to be.

3. Arrange your environment so the right behaviours are easy

Use cues to help you start. Lay out walking clothes the night before, keep your journal on your pillow, put reminders where you’ll see them.

Reduce friction. Keep essentials in predictable places, move distractions out of sight and maintain a workable space. The goal is to make meaningful behaviour smooth and frustration-free.

Anchor new habits to old ones:

  • read a page before your morning coffee

  • stretch before checking emails

  • journal for three minutes before brushing your teeth.

These pairings shift the burden from willpower onto routine.The Conversation

Trevor Mazzucchelli, Associate Professor of Clinical Psychology, Curtin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

‘I wish I could fall asleep and never wake up’: even passive suicidal thoughts are a worry. Here’s how to respond

Rian A. Saputro/Unsplash
Maddison CretharUniversity of the Sunshine Coast and Daniel HermensUniversity of the Sunshine Coast

Suicide is the leading cause of death among Australians aged 15 to 49. Approximately one in eight Australians have seriously considered suicide.

These numbers highlight why it’s crucial to understand the different ways suicidal thoughts – also known as suicidal ideation – can show up in everyday conversations.

Researchers once assumed people move along a single continuum from early thoughts to more concrete plans and actions. However, recent research suggests there are substages within this continuum, and people might flip-flop between different types of suicidal thoughts.

Suicidal thoughts can be active or passive. But what’s the difference, and how should we respond when we hear loved ones talking this way?

Passive versus active

Passive suicidal ideation involves thinking about death or not wanting to live, without intention to act and engage in suicidal behaviour.

These thoughts can sound like:

I don’t want to live, but I don’t want to die.

I wish I could fall asleep and never wake up.

My life is not worth living.

I don’t want to be here, but I don’t want to be dead.

I wish I could just disappear.

Everyone would be better off if I wasn’t around.

Active thoughts, in contrast, include thoughts about ending one’s life with some degree of intent or planning. These thoughts can sound like:

I’m having thoughts about how I would end my life.

I’m going to kill myself.

But the two categories are not always clear cut.

Researchers have tried to group related questions to reveal core themes of suicidal thinking but have struggled to articulate an exact distinction between passive and active ideation.

Research published in 2023 found some thoughts – such as “I wish I were dead” or “maybe I should kill myself” – may represent both active and passive ideation.

Passive and active thoughts often co-occur and each independently predicts suicide attempts.

Recognising the signs

These thoughts can be difficult to recognise – in yourself, or in a loved one.

People may not openly express them, or may not know how to put these thoughts into words and ask for help.

Regardless of whether thoughts are passive or active, certain patterns suggest increasing risk.

Warning signs include:

  • thoughts becoming more frequent or intrusive
  • increased hopelessness or despair
  • creating plans to end one’s life or preparing to act, and
  • engaging in risky behaviour.

There may also be behavioural changes, such as:

  • shifts in sleep and eating habits
  • withdrawing socially
  • losing interest in hobbies
  • irritability
  • decreased academic or work performance, or
  • a person putting their affairs in order.

More than two thirds of people who die by suicide do not engage with mental health professionals in the year prior to their death.

This underlines the crucial role of friends, family and peers.

What should I do if I hear someone talking this way?

First, thank the person for trusting you. Then get curious, listen more than you talk and identify patterns in what they are describing.

Ask about the frequency, intensity and controllability of their thoughts, and whether they are doing anything to prepare to act on them.

Asking about suicide does not put the idea in someone’s head.

Ask questions such as:

How long have you been having these thoughts?

When do these thoughts occur?

How would you rate the intensity of these thoughts?

Do you have a plan to act on these thoughts?

Importantly, passive thoughts are not “safer thoughts.”

They are often a warning sign the person is in significant distress and may move into more active planning if they do not receive support.

Talking about suicidal thoughts can reduce stigma and encourage people to get help.

The National Australian Suicide Prevention Strategy 2025–2035 recognises the importance of a whole-of-community response to suicide prevention, with specific emphasis on laypeople recognising and responding to suicidal distress.

The Black Dog Institute provides a four-step guide for suicide prevention that can help structure your response.

First, directly ask if they are having thoughts of suicide.

Second, listen and take what they are saying seriously, and check their safety to ensure there is nothing they can use to harm themselves.

Third, get help. If someone’s life is in immediate danger, call 000, call a helpline such as Lifeline (13 11 14), or take them to the emergency department; if they are not in immediate danger, help them make an appointment with a GP or psychologist or call a helpline.

Fourth, follow up and check on the person. Let them know you care about them and ask how often would be appropriate to check in with them.

Of course, suicide is complex. Warning signs are not always apparent in the moment. If you have lost someone to suicide, please know you are not responsible for their death. Their decision was shaped by many factors beyond just one person’s control.

No feeling is final

Crisis does eventually pass. While it may not feel possible in the moment, remind the person that things will not stay this way forever and that help is available.

Passive or active, thoughts of suicide are a sign of deep distress.

When we notice and respond with calm curiosity, compassion and practical support, we may help save a life.

If this article has raised issues for you, or if you’re concerned about someone you know, call Lifeline on 13 11 14.The Conversation

Maddison Crethar, PhD Candidate, Youth Mental Health, University of the Sunshine Coast and Daniel Hermens, Professor of Youth Mental Health & Neurobiology, University of the Sunshine Coast

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.

Week Two February 2026: Issue 651 (published Sunday February 8 2026)

 

Flowering Now: Pittwater Spotted Gum Trees

Photo taken at Careel Bay, Friday February 6, 2026:


Spotted Gums of Pittwater at Palm Beach

These great tall trees grow along the ridge overlooking the Pittwater estuary at Palm Beach, up high on the ridge where you can see the beach from the other side. They were planted over twenty five years ago now and have grown very tall. Spotted gums, if they get enough rain, will grow on average between 4 metres in high rainfall areas and 2.5 metres each year. This makes them what are called ‘fast growing’ trees. They need between 650mm to 1050mm of rain each year to grow this tall and strong so fast.

All plants have another name other then the one we give them which comes from either the Greek or the Latin language. This way of describing a plant so others may recognise it has been used since people first tried describing and naming plants. The words used as ‘names’ communicates the parts, places and even the height, colour or other history associated with the plant.

This is not the same as when plants are named after the people who ‘discovered’ them. This ‘naming’ is in English and is a person paying tribute to a grower of roses for example ‘Mrs Partridge’s blue rose’ or a ‘Granny Smith’ which was named after a lady in Eastwood (now one of Sydney’s suburbs) called Maria Ann Smith who developed this yummy green apple by chance when a wild apple and a domestic one accidentally seeded a new apple. Every year now the granny smith apple is celebrated as the Granny Smith Festival and will be again this year on October 20th, 2013. See here for details.

A few examples of Latin plant words used in plant names:

abyssinica = from Abysinnia (Ethiopia) (North Africa)
acaulis = stemless
aestivalis = flowering in spring
bellidifolia = with leaves like those of a daisy
borealis = from the north
bulbifera = bearing bulbs
caerulea = blue
caespitosa = dense
campanulata = campanulate, like a bell
campestris = of the field

The Latin name given to our Pittwater Spotted Gums is Corymbia maculate and if we look at these two words we see:  Corymbia is from Latin: corymbus, cluster, ie the floral cluster and maculate is from the Latin word maculosus, meaning ‘spotted’ (referring to the spotted pattern on the irregularly-shed bark). So you can see how names in this way can describe a plant.

This species was first formally described by English Botanist William Jackson Hooker in 1844, and given the name Eucalyptus maculata. The specific name maculata is derived from the Latin word maculosus, meaning "spotted" (referring to the spotted pattern on the irregularly-shed bark). The species was transferred to the genus Corymbia by K.D.Hill & L.A.S.Johnson in 1995 when further examination of our eucalypts showed distinct differences in leaves, flowers and stalks.
The word ‘eucalypts’ is from Greek words ευ (eu) "well" and καλυπτος (kalyptos) "covered",  and refers to the operculum on the calyx that initially conceals the flower.

Tree groves have always been special places and when you see a row of these giants or stared up at one until your neck is craned back you can understand why they inspire stories, poems and songs.

One poem you may have heard, which was written by Alfred Joyce Kilmer, an American journalist, editor and poet, is ‘Trees’.

Trees (1913)
I think that I shall never see
A poem lovely as a tree.
A tree whose hungry mouth is prest
Against the earth's sweet flowing breast;
A tree that looks at God all day,
And lifts her leafy arms to pray;
A tree that may in Summer wear
A nest of robins in her hair;
Upon whose bosom snow has lain;
Who intimately lives with rain.
Poems are made by fools like me,
But only God can make a tree.

You can probably make up your own stories while sitting under or strolling among such trees. Late afternoon or early morning light makes dew drops cast haloes of rainbows over even the smallest blade of grass, or the sound and sight of the wind soughing through the tree crowns may help you to make up your own dance! 

We took these photographs of some of our own Pittwater Spotted gums for you earlier this week and hope you enjoy looking at them and that they may inspire a few stories of your own. We had a bit of fun inspired by being among these wonderful big trees; see below.

The Enchanted Grove of the Old Spotted Gums 

There is an enchanted grove we know
Where the spotted gums grow very tall
They’re not as tall as they were hundreds of years ago
But neither are they small

Interlaced branches overhead,
Colourful flowers at bush edge,
Pittwater gleaming before us
Resplendent in late Autumn sun

We stand here stolid
Whisper of many years past
Watch you skip between our trunks
Gaze up at our living masts

As dusk gilds us gold
We sing songs from seas of old
And shift our roots through
The beach each child has brought home on their sandy feet

Home by the bush and the sea
Home by the estuary
We've heard the children laugh in the golden dusks
Seen them grow tall and strong like us

We are the spotted gums of Pittwater
In our arms are cradled every son and daughter
We are home to the possum and bandicoot
A perch for every owl that hoots

AJG, 2013

Australian Woodland Birds - Feeding behaviour of Varied Sittellas in the Capertee Valley

By Birds In Back Yards TV, November 2025

This video shows the relationship between Varied Sittellas (Daphoenositta chrysoptera), Australian gum trees (tribe Eucalypteae) and their resident insects and spiders. The footage of foraging sittellas was collected in May 2025 in the Capertee Valley (NSW, Australia). The filming site was a covenanted property with open forest, woodland and revegetated areas (trees planted 1995 - 2013). This land and the valley generally greatly contribute to the conservation of woodland birds, many of which are declining, threatened or endangered. 

Varied Sittellas are found in eucalypt forests and woodland across much of mainland Australia. In NSW, however, their conservation status is listed as Vulnerable as their population size has apparently declined over the last several decades. These sedentary birds are highly dependent on treed areas and therefore cleared land can be a barrier to their movement. Habitat can also be degraded by small-scale clearing for roads, verges and fence-lines, and removal of standing or fallen timber. Degraded or remnant woodland can lead to Noisy Miner dominance, which has an adverse effect on Varied Sittellas.  

Varied Sittellas are arboreal insectivores who forage in groups through stands of gum trees, moving from the outer branches to the base of the trunk, often in a spiralling fashion whereby they sometimes hang upside down with their large strong feet. They rarely forage on the ground but we have seen them on decaying fallen timber and old fence posts. They prefer rough-barked trees such as stringybarks and ironbarks. At the filming site, we often observe them on Rough-barked Apple (Angophora floribunda) and Yellow Box (Eucalyptus melliodora), which offer plenty of bark crevices for their long slightly upturned bill. They also glean arthropods from peeling bark on smooth-bark species such as Slaty Box (Eucalyptus dawsonii) and Blakely’s Red Gum (Eucalyptus blakelyi), and from cracks and hollows in dead branches. 

In the case of the footage shown here, most of the trees visited by the sittellas were planted in the 1990s. A very tangible outcome of habitat restoration efforts! Note the presence of other birds as heard in the video. They include Mistletoebird (e.g. 0.13 mark), Spotted Pardalote, Jacky Winter, Restless Flycatcher, Pied Currawong, Willie Wagtail, Noisy Friarbird, Superb Fairywren and Little Corella.

Filmed, edited and produced by Darren and Thalia Broughton. 

 

Milla Coco Brown - Lucas Hickson Win 2026 Kim Burton Pro Junior 

Milla Coco Brown (AUS) has claimed her second Pro Junior victory in a row, her fourth overall. Credit: WSL / Paul Danovaro

MEREWETHER BEACH, Newcastle, NSW (Sunday, February 1, 2026)

Report by WSL

Today, Milla Coco Brown (AUS) and Lucas Hickson (AUS) won the Kim Burton Pro Junior, the opening event of the 2026 season for the World Surf League (WSL) Australia/Oceania Junior Qualifying Series (JQS). Merewether Beach delivered fun surf in the two-to-three-foot range for the second event in the 40th anniversary celebrations of Surfest Newcastle. The conditions set the stage for the region’s best juniors to compete for valuable ranking points as the race toward qualification for the 2026 WSL World Junior Championships officially began.

Milla Coco Brown (AUS) claimed her second Pro Junior victory in a row, her fourth overall. Credit: WSL / Paul Danovaro 

The successful run of Milla Coco Brown (AUS) continued today as the 18-year-old from Pittwater's Bungan Beach Boardriders claimed her fourth Pro Junior victory. After winning the Let’s Surf Lake Mac Pro Junior for a second time to close out the 2025 Australia/Oceania JQS season, Brown made it back-to-back Pro Junior wins to move to the top of the rankings for the new year. Between the two events, she also helped lead Australia to team gold at the ISA World Junior Championship in Peru, earning the silver medal in the U/18 division. Now, Brown is primed in her campaign to compete in the WSL World Junior Championships for the first time.

"Thanks to Kim Burton for putting on such a good event and the girls for a fun Final," Brown said. "I'm pretty happy to win. It was pretty fun, but tough conditions, so I was stoked to lock back into comp mode after free surfing for a couple of months. Good way to kick off 2026."

A strong southerly change blew through ahead of the men’s Semi-finals, seeing the women’s Final open as largely a battle of single turns. Brown took command from the start with two rides in the 4-point range, before finding a long open face that allowed her to unleash down the line and post a 6.67. A back-up 6.00 from an aggressive single turn provided a 12.67 heat total that closed the door on her opponents.

 

ARTEXPRESS is back!

ARTEXPRESS 2026
5 February – 26 April 2026
Art Gallery of New South Wales
Naala Badu building
Lower level 2

Free

The Art Gallery of New South Wales proudly presents ARTEXPRES 2026, the much-anticipated annual exhibition celebrating exceptional artworks by students who studied Visual Arts in the 2025 New South Wales Higher School Certificate (HSC).

Now in its 43rd year at the Art Gallery of New South Wales – the principal venue for ARTEXPRESS – the 2026 exhibition features the outstanding work of 51 student artists, selected from a cohort of 9074 students who completed the 2025 HSC Visual Arts course, showcasing the diversity of creativity from government and non-government schools across regional, remote and metropolitan New South Wales.

Launched on the evening of Wednesday February 4 with a special ceremony for artists and their families, ARTEXPRESS 2026 offers a compelling snapshot of the ideas, curiosities and concerns shaping the lives of young Australians. The exhibition reveals deeply personal explorations of identity, culture, family and the environment, alongside thoughtful engagement with the issues that matter to young people. The student works demonstrate remarkable technical skill and creative ambition across an extensive range of artistic practices.

Various expressive forms from the HSC Visual Arts curriculum are represented, including ceramics, collection of works, documented forms, drawing, graphic design, painting, photomedia, printmaking, sculpture, textiles and fibre, and time-based forms.

For the first time, ARTEXPRESS is presented in the Art Gallery’s Naala Badu building this year, placing the work of these young artists in dialogue with leading contemporary artists.

Art Gallery of New South Wales director Maud Page said: ‘Young people are central to the future of both art and the Art Gallery. Presenting ARTEXPRESS 2026 is an exhilarating reminder of the creative intelligence and confidence that will shape Australian art in the years to come. These works are thoughtful, generous and often fearless, offering insight into how young artists see themselves and the world around them.

‘We also celebrate and recognise the teachers, families and communities across the state who have supported these students to reach this point. We are proud to share these works with our audiences and to celebrate this significant moment in the creative journeys of the next generation of New South Wales artists,’ Page said.

ARTEXPRESS is presented by the Art Gallery in partnership with the NSW Department of Education and the NSW Education Standards Authority (NESA).

NESA chief executive officer Paul Martin said: ’ARTEXPRESS at the Art Gallery of New South Wales is a celebration of artistic talents in schools across New South Wales. Congratulations to the hundreds of students nominated and to those who have been selected for exhibition. It is a huge honour to have your work hung in a gallery such as this – and graduates should celebrate that exposure and recognition of their talents.

‘Thank you to the teachers of New South Wales who supported these young people and nurtured their talents. Arts education in NSW plays an important role in cultivating expression and creative and critical thinking in our broader communities,’ Martin said. 

Since 1989, the Art Gallery has been the principal venue for ARTEXPRESS, displaying bodies of work by students from across New South Wales. Many former exhibitors have gone on to distinguished careers, including Archibald Prize 2025 winner Julie Fragar (ARTEXPRESS 1995).

ARTEXPRESS 2026 is now on display at the Art Gallery of New South Wales in the Neilson Family Gallery in Naala Badu until 26 April 2026. Entry is free.  

ARTEXPRESS 2026 exhibitions in New South Wales:  

  • Art Gallery of New South Wales – 4 February to 26 April
  • Hazelhurst Arts Centre, Gymea – 9 February to 12 April
  • Maitland Regional Art Gallery – 21 February to 19 April
  • Broken Hill City Art Gallery – 1 May to 26 July
  • Glasshouse Regional Gallery, Port Macquarie – 9 May to 19 July
  • Wagga Wagga Art Gallery – 23 May to 26 July
  • Western Plains Cultural Centre, Dubbo – 15 August to 4 October
  • Bondi Pavilion Gallery – 24 August to 24 October
  • Hawkesbury Regional Gallery – 28 August to 18 October 

The Art Gallery of New South Wales is the principal venue for ARTEXPRESS 2026, and the exhibition is presented in association with the NSW Department of Education, Arts Unit, and the NSW Education Standards Authority (NESA).

All works from all years are here. Works on display this year from HSC 2025 students include:

Clara O'Reilly
Return to Mt Victoria

My body of work represents our family getaway in Mount Victoria, with exterior views of the home and surrounding landscape supported by a series of interiors. My intention in this work is to convey time spent with family as well as our love for the Australian bush. My compositional choices, such as using the window as a framing device, communicate how this second home is a place of familiarity and respite. Relief printmaking methods allowed for the plates to be re-used, just as were turn again and again, and the rich naturalistic palette references seasonal shifts of weather and light.

Influencing artists:

  • Cressida Campbell
  • Jennifer Keeler-Milne
  • Dianne Fogwell
  • David Frazer

School: Northern Beaches Secondary College, Mackellar Girls Campus

ARTEXPRESS year: 2026

HSC year: 2025

Clara O'Reilly's  'Return to Mt Victoria'.

Out Front 2026 celebrates the next generation artists

In related HSC Arts News, the return of the highly anticipated annual exhibition, Out Front 2026, will run from 20 February to 5 April 2025 at Manly Art Gallery & Museum (MAG&M).

Showcasing the exceptional achievements of 25 HSC Visual Arts students from 21 local secondary schools, this exhibition highlights MAG&M’s commitment to supporting young creatives and enriching community connections.

Mayor Sue Heins has expressed her admiration for the students’ work.

“Once again, our students have amazed us with their ingenuity and artistic skill. Out Front is a wonderful celebration of the creativity nurtured in our schools and the dedication of our teachers.

“It’s inspiring to see young artists bravely tackling big issues—identity, transformation and our environment—through their art. Their passion and fresh perspectives truly reflect the spirit of our community,” Mayor Heins said.

Now in its third decade, Out Front 2026 provides an invaluable platform for emerging talent to display their works in a professional gallery setting. This year’s exhibition features an exciting mix of painting, sculpture, photography, collage and mixed media installations, all boldly addressing contemporary themes relevant to today’s youth.

A highlight of the event is the presentation of two prestigious awards. The Theo Batten Youth Art Award, valued at $5,000, honours artistic excellence and innovation and will be announced on opening night. The KALOF People’s Choice Award invites the community to vote for their favourite artwork, celebrating both peer and public recognition and strengthening ties between students, families, educators and the wider community.

The public is warmly invited to attend the exhibition and the opening on Friday 20 February, from 6–8pm, officially opened by Mayor Sue Heins. Join in for a lively celebration of local creativity, meet the talented young artists and connect with fellow supporters of the arts. Entry is free.

PROGRAM

Out Front 2026
20 February – 5 April 2025

Manly Art Gallery & Museum
West Esplanade Reserve, Manly
Open Tuesday to Sunday, 10am – 5pm
Free entry

Exhibition opening night
Friday 20 February, 6–8pm
To be opened by  Mayor Sue Heins
RSVP link

 Picture: Jennifer Choi, Virtual Daydreams, Acrylic on canvas, NBSC Manly Campus pt1

 

Club Chronicles: Billy Cart Blowouts in Longy Carpark

by Surfing NSW

Long before e-bikes and surfskates, Long Reef Boardriders ran a mid-winter billy cart blowout where OH&S unapproved contraptions sent it down the carpark hill in a landmark event.

Eyewitness reports: stacks, gravel slides and concrete rash.

Engineering highlights: Wheeled kayaks, old boards on skate trucks and armchairs that had no business being in motion.

It got so iconic it turned into a full meet-up with clubs up and down the Peninsula.

Got a club story like this and the imagery to match? Hit the link in our story to drop your shenanigans and images for this series. We all know there’s more to NSW club culture than immense surfing talent. 

Film: Sarge

 

NSW Women of the Year 2026 finalists announced

Announced: Wednesday February 4, 2026

The NSW Government is celebrating 31 remarkable women and girls whose leadership, resilience and community spirit have earned them a place as finalists in the 2026 NSW Women of the Year Awards.

Now in its 14th year, the awards program shines a light on extraordinary individuals across the state who are improving lives, driving innovation, strengthening communities and inspiring future generations.

Recipients in each of the five award categories will be revealed at the Women of the Year Awards ceremony on Thursday 5 March at the International Convention Centre, Sydney. This is the flagship event of NSW Women’s Week 2026, held from Monday 2 March to International Women’s Day on Sunday 8 March.

The 2026 Women of the Year Awards finalists are:

NSW Premier’s Woman of Excellence

  • Professor Tracey O’Brien AM – Lane Cove LGA
  • Clare Pearson – The Hills Shire LGA

NSW Aboriginal Woman of the Year

  • Dr Aunty Rhonda Radley – Port Macquarie–Hastings LGA
  • Adjunct Professor Nicole Turner – Port Stephens LGA
  • Sharon Winsor – Mid‑Western Regional LGA

NSW Community Hero

  • Carolyn Campbell-McLean – Parramatta LGA
  • Ruby Riethmuller – Northern Beaches LGA
  • Gidget Foundation Australia Founders Group:
    • Alexandra Berthold – Ku-ring-gai LGA
    • Libby Bowditch – Northern Beaches LGA
    • Jacqui Cotton – Northern Beaches LGA
    • Stephanie Hughes – Waverley LGA
    • Lou Hunter – North Sydney LGA
    • Kim Mouret – Northern Beaches LGA
    • Simone Short – Mosman LGA
    • NSW Regional Woman of the Year
  • Jo Marshall – Upper Lachlan Shire LGA
  • Amy Riddle – Coffs Harbour City LGA
  • Jenny Worrell – Clarence Valley LGA

NSW Young Woman of the Year (16–30 years)

  • Miranda McGufficke – Snowy Monaro Regional LGA
  • Layne Paull – Central Coast LGA
  • Milli Weaver – Randwick City LGA
  • Dr Mithila Zaheen – Cumberland LGA

The Ones to Watch (7–15 years)

  • Imali Bamji – Hunters Hill LGA
  • Piper Clarke – Shoalhaven LGA
  • Hafsa Faizan – Liverpool LGA
  • Emma Hoskins – Blacktown LGA
  • Amalia Carolyn Howard – Dubbo LGA
  • Elly Ings – (Mona Vale) Northern Beaches LGA
  • Hannah Orr – Goulburn Mulwaree LGA
  • Ruvi Pooliyadde – Blacktown LGA
  • Shanvi Govinda Raju – Penrith LGA
  • Ivy Walker – Hornsby LGA

Learn more about the NSW Women of the Year Awards 2026 and finalists by visiting NSW Women of the Year Awards 2026 Finalists

Find out what other events are taking place during NSW Women’s Week 2026 at NSW Women's Week 2026 | NSW Government. The NSW Women of the Year Awards ceremony will be livestreamed for everyone to celebrate these inspirational women and girls.

Premier Chris Minns said:

“Every finalist represents the strength and diversity that defines New South Wales.

“These women are changing the lives of those around them - not for recognition, but because they believe in lifting up their communities.

“I congratulate all of the finalists and commend them for going above and beyond in their respective fields.”

Minister for Women Jodie Harrison said:

“Women and girls across New South Wales are making a difference right across our state and these awards recognise their invaluable contributions.

“This year we receive an incredible number of nominations, every one of them showcasing a story of grit, compassion and remarkable achievement.

“Our 2026 finalists come from all corners of New South Wales and their work spans health, community services, business, culture, education and advocacy. Their contribution enriches our communities and sets an example for girls and women everywhere.”

Member for Manly, James Griffin MP said the annual awards play an important role in recognising the heroic women making positive contributions across NSW every day.

“These finalists are inspiring role models who reflect the diversity, talent and dedication of women right across New South Wales. Their work makes a real difference in the lives of others and deserves to be recognised and celebrated.” 

Since 2012 these annual awards have recognised the women and girls whose determination, bravery, skill and passion has inspired their communities and others to achieve great things. 

In the NSW Community Hero category, finalists from the Manly to Barrenjoey peninsula include mental health advocate and founder of Womn-Kind, Ruby Riethmuller as well as founding members of Gidget Foundation Australia Kim Mouret, Libby Bowditch and Jacqui Cotton.

In ‘The Ones to Watch’ (7-15 years) category, Elly Ings has been nominated for her commitment to advancing Aboriginal education and strengthening the role of First Nations perspectives in her school community.  

“I’m incredibly proud to see so many residents named among this year’s finalists. Their tireless work and advocacy across a diverse range of incredibly important fields is making a tangible difference to many in our community, and their recognition is richly deserved,” said Mr Griffin. 

Ruby Riethmuller
Girls wellbeing champion
Was a 2026 NSW Young Australian of the Year Nominee

Ruby Riethmuller believes that young people who live in regional, rural and remote Australia should have the same opportunity to access mental health support as their city peers. Born and raised on a farm in regional New South Wales, Ruby understands the isolation and lack of services that many young people face – particularly girls aged 16 to 24.  

Putting advocacy into action, in 2020 Ruby founded Womn-Kind. Womn-Kind is a leading youth mental health organisation transforming the way young people access wellbeing education and support. Focused on adolescent girls and gender-diverse youth, Womn-Kind delivers innovative, low-intensity services through school workshops, a pioneering social wellness app (the Womn-Kind App.), podcast and partnerships with schools, community groups and government. With an emphasis on accessibility and prevention, the organisation has already supported more than 30,000 young people, providing daily support to over 7,000 users across Australia and 37 countries. Ruby also serves as Deputy Commissioner (Lived Experience) at the Mental Health Commission of NSW. Ruby embodies resilience, initiative and an unwavering commitment to uplifting others.

Ruby has helped young people talk about their experiences and communities see mental health as a shared responsibility. Beyond mental health, Ruby believes in empowering youth leadership and has put this into action through founding the Womn-Kind National Youth Leadership Panel. 

So far Womn-Kind has supported over 30,000 young people, with more than 7,000 young people engaging with Womn-Kind online every day. 

Elly Ings
Age: 14

Elly is dedicated to advancing Aboriginal education and strengthening the role of First Nations perspectives in her school community. Her leadership is evident through her coordination of camps and expeditions to culturally significant and educational sites, including Taronga Zoo, where students engage in learning that connects them to culture, land and community. Through her professionalism, passion and vision, Elly is shaping sustainable programs with long-lasting impact. Elly also coordinates school-wide activities for important events, ensuring that First Nations voices and traditions are respectfully acknowledged and celebrated.

The founders of Gidget Foundation Australia: Alexandra Berthold, Libby Bowditch, Jacqui Cotton, Stephanie Hughes, Lou Hunter, Kim Mouret and Simone Short

For 24 years, these incredible women have worked to improve mental health support for parents in NSW. In 2001, Simone's sister and their friend, Louise (nicknamed Gidget), experiencing postnatal depression, lost her battle for mental health wellness. Following this tragedy, they set out to make a difference in Gidget’s honour by increasing awareness of the illness and support for parents. Today, Gidget Foundation Australia provides parents with accessible, timely and specialist care. The foundation has established 39 Gidget Houses and delivered a total of 108,704 appointments to support 12,705 families. The founders are still actively involved, demonstrating dedication that has had a direct impact on perinatal mental health awareness, education and support in NSW.

Opportunities:

Newport Breakers Womens Rugby: Feb. 10 Training - bring your boots + a Friend

Training starts this week. Bring your boots and bring a friend!

REGISTER TO PLAY: https://www.newportrugby.com.au/

NASA 2026 is a go!!

Registration now open on Liveheats at: https://liveheats.com/NASA

Sign up, lock in the dates - 1st comp Feb 28th!

Safer Internet Day 2026

Pittwater Online News supports @eSafetyOffice Safer Internet Day Tuesday 10 February 2026. We rely on the internet for almost everything in our lives, so online safety is more important than ever.  We’ll be kicking off our year with conversations about [how our staff] can stay safe online.

What will you be doing to help create safer, more positive online spaces? 

Safer Internet Day is a global day of action dedicated to raising awareness of online safety. On this page, you’ll find everything you need to make online safety visible in your school, workplace or community. Visit: eSafety.gov.au/SID

Battle of the Bands – Youth Edition: at Palm Beach

Ages 12–17
Registrations opening shortly!
Tune up. Plug in. Rock out. 
For registration, please visit our website: www.plambeachclub.com.au
Registration form available on the What’s On page.
📞 02 9974 5566
Club Palm Beach (Palm Beach RSL)

Fix our Feeds

The social media feeds that once connected us are now driving us apart. Social media algorithms are flooding young men’s feeds with radical misogynistic content, inciting real-world harm.

We’re calling on the Australian Government to act, and introduce an opt-in feature for social media algorithms so we can bring affirmative consent to our screens, and turn our feeds on and off at will.

Add your name to the Open letter, and more information available at: www.teachusconsent.com/fix-our-feeds

This has already been signed by Mackellar MP, Dr. Sophie Scamps, Warringah MP Zali Steggall and Wentworth MP Allegra Spender.

Independent MP Allegra Spender states:
''Great to see Chanel Contos in Sydney, and talk about the “Fix Our Feeds” campaign by @teachusconsent.

It’s simple but brilliant idea - social media algorithms should be opt-in, not forced upon us - so we have a real choice over what we’re shown.

Giving people the ability to switch off the algorithm would help reduce the spread of misinformation, misogyny, extremism and harmful body image content.

If this is something you would like to support, sign the open letter to Anthony Albanese at teachusconsent.com and share their campaign with your friends.''

The Teach Us Consent site states:

Systematic radicalisation
It takes just 23 minutes for a social media  mimicking a 16-18 year old boy to be fed misogynistic content, regardless of the account’s viewing preferences.

Misogynistic content is rife
73% of Gen Z social-media users have  misogynistic content online, with 70% saying they believe misogynistic language and content are increasing. This rises to 80% for women.

Sexual violence is increasing
Instances of reported sexual assault have  by 10% in the last year in Australia. This accompanies a  in the overall reporting rate.

Chanel explains:

Play Women's Social or Competitive Cricket with Cromer!

Cromer Cricket Club is now seeking women, aged 16+, who want to play cricket in the February 2026 commencing CNSW Women's Metro Competition. This is the only peninsula cricket club that offers an opportunity for girls who can no longer play in the junior clubs due to being almost all grown up.

CCC states their Women's Cricket division is fun for all ages, and a great way to make new friendships or rekindle your old ones, no skills or experience required, just fun!

''Cromer Cricket Club currently fields teams in the Twilight Women's Cricket League. It's a fun social competition with soft balls and no pads required, perfect for beginners!

We are also fielding a team in the new CNSW Women's Metro Competition, a senior traditional cricket competition for female players, the first of its kind. Register now to be part of history!''

Contact Kelvin (registrar@cromercricket.com.au) or Nick (president@cromercricket.com.au) for more info.

CNSW Women's Metro Competition

  • Senior Women's competition for ages 16+ 
  • Sunday afternoon games
  • Mix of 30 over and T20 games
  • Registration includes playing shirt and hat
  • Free for Saturday players
  • Half-season registration available
  • Whether you're 16 or 60, we've got a place for you!
  • A great opportunity to make new friends!
  • A whole heap of fun! 
  • Register now for 2026!

Register here: www.cromercricket.com.au/womens

To inspire you to get involved, a few notes form the past on women's cricket in Australia, with local connections, including the first Australia-England matches.

Pittwater Peninsula Netball Club

2026 season - let's go! Registrations are open until early February.


Netball NSW Online Privacy Policy: Don't Post Pictures of Others without asking 


Avalon Bulldogs Announcement: Female Tackle Teams Kicking Off in 2026!

After huge growth in our Girls Tag program, the Doggies are looking at launching our first-ever female tackle teams  and we’re calling for Expressions of Interest now!

Players: U13s, U14s, U15s, U17s & Opens (Possible U11s if we get the numbers)
Staff Needed: Coaches, Managers, League Safe / First Aid
This is your chance to be part of a massive moment for the Bulldogs and help build the future of women’s footy on the Beaches.
Email; info@avalonbulldogs.com.au with heading 'Female Tackle Teams'.

Get involved. Make history. Go the Doggies!

History in the Making: Female Tackle Coming to the Sharks in 2026! 

We’re excited to announce the Narrabeen Sharks’ first-ever female tackle teams for 2026!
After the success of our girls’ tag program, we’re ready to take the next step — creating pathways for female players from grassroots to the NRLW. 

We’re calling for Expressions of Interest for:
Players – U13s, U14s, U15s, U17s & Opens (plus a possible U11s if enough interest)
Coaches, Managers & Trainers (Level 1, League First Aid, League Safe)

This is your chance to be part of club history and help grow the women’s game at the Sharks!
Contact: president.narrabeensharks@gmail.com to register your interest today.

Financial help for young people

Concessions and financial support for young people.

Includes:

  • You could receive payments and services from Centrelink: Use the payment and services finder to check what support you could receive.
  • Apply for a concession Opal card for students: Receive a reduced fare when travelling on public transport.
  • Financial support for students: Get financial help whilst studying or training.
  • Youth Development Scholarships: Successful applicants will receive $1000 to help with school expenses and support services.
  • Tertiary Access Payment for students: The Tertiary Access Payment can help you with the costs of moving to undertake tertiary study.
  • Relocation scholarship: A once a year payment if you get ABSTUDY or Youth Allowance if you move to or from a regional or remote area for higher education study.
  • Get help finding a place to live and paying your rent: Rent Choice Youth helps young people aged 16 to 24 years to rent a home.

Visit: https://www.nsw.gov.au/living-nsw/young-people/young-people-financial-help

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Sport

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Noun

1. an activity involving physical exertion and skill in which an individual or team competes against another or others for entertainment. 2. a person who behaves in a good or specified way in response to teasing, defeat, or a similarly trying situation. 3. Biology; an animal or plant showing abnormal or striking variation from the parent type, especially in form or colour, as a result of spontaneous mutation.

Verb

1. wear or display (a distinctive item). 2. play in a lively, energetic way.

From: late Middle English (in the sense ‘pastime, entertainment’): shortening of disport. Originates from early 15c., sporte, "pleasant pastime, activity that brings amusement; joking, foolery;" a shortening of disport "activity that offers amusement or relaxation; entertainment, fun" (c. 1300), also "a pastime or game; flirtation," also pleasure taken in such activity (late 14c.); from Anglo-French disport, Old French desport, deport "pleasure, enjoyment, delight; solace, consolation; favour, privilege," which is related to desporter, deporter "to divert, amuse, please, play" - the Middle English disporten (c. 1300), shortened via apheresis from the Old French desporter. It literally means "to carry away" (the mind from serious matters). Word Root in des- ("away") and porter ("to carry"), it originally meant leisure, amusement, or diversion, with the modern meaning of physical exercise appearing around the 1520s. 

Older sense are preserved in phrases such as in sport "in jest, by way of diversion" (mid-15c.). The meaning "game involving physical exercise" is recorded by 1520s. The sport of kings (1660s) originally was war-making. Other, lost senses of Middle English disport were "consolation, solace; a source of comfort." In 16c.-17c. it could mean "sexual intercourse, love-making."

In reference to persons, sport is by 1690s in a now obsolete meaning "subject of mirth or derision, laughing-stock." The sense of "man who lives by gambling and betting on races" is by 1861; the meaning "good fellow; lively, sociable person" is attested from 1881 (as in be a sport, by 1913), perhaps suggesting sportsmanlike conduct. (Old) sport as a modern familiar form of address to a man is by 1905 in American English colloquial.

Sport(verb) From c. 1400, sporten, "take pleasure, enjoy or amuse oneself," from Old French desporter, deporter "to divert, amuse, please, play; to seek amusement," etymologically "carry away" (the mind from serious matters), from des- "away" (see dis-) + porter "to carry," from Latin portare. Compare disport (v.), which is the older form. 

The restricted sense of "amuse oneself by active exercise in open air or taking part in some game" is from late 15c. The meaning "display, show off, exhibit" is by 1712; specifically as "to wear" by 1778.

Milan Cortina Winter Olympics: history, new events and Australian medal chances

Vaughan CruickshankUniversity of TasmaniaBrendon HyndmanCharles Sturt University, and Tom HartleyUniversity of Tasmania

This year’s Winter Olympics will be held in northern Italy, starting on Friday.

They will be the most spread out in history: the two main competition sites – Milan and the winter resort of Cortina d'Ampezzo – are more than 400 kilometres apart.

Some 3500 athletes from 93 countries will compete in 16 sports for 245 gold medals.

What’s happening at the 2026 games?

Events are organised into broad categories, including ice sports (such as figure skating and curling), skiing and snowboarding (including moguls and halfpipe), Nordic events (such as cross-country and ski jumping) and sliding events (including skeleton and luge).

For the Milan Cortina games, the program has added eight new events designed to increase variety and gender parity.

The most significant addition is the sport of ski mountaineering, often referred to as “skimo”.

An explainer graphic for how ski mountaineering works.
Winter Olympic Games/The ConversationCC BY-SA

The sport requires competitors to ski uphill, transition to walking up steep climbs and then descend on skis.

The program will be the most gender-balanced winter games to date, with 47% women participation mainly thanks to the introduction of women’s double luge and a women’s large hill event in ski jumping.

While the Winter Olympics have been held in 21 cities in 13 different countriesclimate change may limit the number of future host locations.

How the Winter Olympics began

The first Winter Olympics were held in Chamonix, France in 1924.

Current events such as figure skating and ice hockey were actually included in the Summer Olympics in 1908 and 1920.

Following the success of these events, and support from the father of the modern Olympics Baron Pierre de Coubertin, the International Olympic Committee (IOC) decided to hold a separate winter competition in 1924.

This competition was known as the “Winter Sports Week of the 8th Olympiad” and was retroactively recognised as the first Winter Olympics in 1926.

Many of the early Winter Olympics were held in the same year as the summer games – and in the same country.

While the Summer and Winter Olympics have not been held in the some country since 1936, they were held in the same year until 1992.

The IOC then altered their schedule so the summer and winter games were held on alternating even-numbered years.

IOC officials hoped this change would increase the importance of the winter games, which had been regarded as less important than the summer event.

This decision meant the 1994 Winter Olympics in Lillehammer, Norway, were held only two years after the 1992 winter games in Albertville, France.

The next Olympics were the 1996 Summer Olympics, then the 1998 Winter Olympics.

This alternating format continues to this day.

In 1924, 258 athletes from 16 nations came together in Chamonix, France, for what later became the first Winter Olympics.

Australia at the Winter Olympics

Australia’s first winter Olympian was speed skater Ken Kennedy in 1936.

Since then, Australia has competed in every Winter Olympics and its team has grown from one athlete in 1936 to more than 50 in recent games.

Speed skater Colin Coates has represented Australia at the most winter games: six times between 1968 and 1988.

It took 58 years for Australia to claim its first Winter Olympic medal in 1994Steven Bradbury, Richard Nizielski, Andrew Murtha and Kieran Hansen won bronze in the 5,000m short track speed skating relay.

Bradbury also famously won Australia’s first Winter Olympic gold medal in the 1,000m speed skating in 2002.

Australia has won 19 Winter Olympic medals, including six gold.

It has achieved most success in freestyle skiing events such as aerials and mogul, led by multiple medal winners Alisa Camplin and Lydia Lassila.

Australia’s medal chances in 2026

Australia heads into these games with realistic medal chances in a small number of sports where it has consistently punched above its weight. This may seem surprising for a country better known for beaches than snow but targeted investment and athlete pathways have paid off.

Australia’s strongest gold medal hope is in freestyle skiing moguls, a fast downhill event where athletes ski over steep bumps while performing two jumps.

Jakara Anthony, who won gold in Beijing in 2022, has dominated international competitions since then, regularly winning World Cup events – the highest level of competition outside the Olympics.

Aerial skiing has also emerged as a genuine medal opportunity for Australia.

Laura Peel has continued her strong international form with recent World Cup gold, while Danielle Scott has also topped the podium this season.

With two athletes consistently winning at the highest level outside the Olympics, Australia is a genuine podium contender in this discipline.

Snowboarding also offers strong chances.

In snowboard halfpipe, riders launch out of a giant ice channel and perform aerial tricks while being judged on height, difficulty and style. Scotty James has been among the world’s best for almost a decade and has won multiple World Championship medals.

Australia is also building serious depth through younger athletes such as Valentino Guseli, who has already claimed World Cup gold and is emerging as a genuine podium contender.

In women’s monobob, Bree Walker’s recent World Cup gold shows Australia is now a genuine contender in one of the games’ newer disciplines.

In skeleton, where athletes race head-first down an icy track at speeds exceeding 120 kilometres per hour, Jaclyn Narracott won silver in 2022 – Australia’s first sliding sport medal. Another podium finish is possible for her.

Beyond these core medal prospects, sports such as short track speed skating could also feature in Australia’s medal mix if athletes peak at the right time, with potential for 2026 to rival Australia’s most successful Winter Olympics to date.The Conversation

Vaughan Cruickshank, Senior Lecturer in Health and Physical Education, University of TasmaniaBrendon Hyndman, Associate Professor of Education and Associate Dean (Academic), Faculty of Arts and Education, Charles Sturt University, and Tom Hartley, Lecturer in Health and Physical Education, University of Tasmania

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

A new comet was just discovered. Will it be visible in broad daylight?

The Great Comet of 1680 over Rotterdam. Lieve Verschuier/Rotterdam Museum
Jonti HornerUniversity of Southern Queensland

A newly discovered comet has astronomers excited, with the potential to be a spectacular sight in early April.

C/2026 A1 (MAPS) was spotted by a team of four amateur astronomers with a remotely operated telescope in the Atacama desert on January 13.

It quickly became apparent the newly discovered object was a member of a group called the Kreutz sungrazing comets. These include many of the brightest and most spectacular comets ever seen.

Comet MAPS is moving on an extreme, highly elongated orbit around the Sun, and is diving towards a fiery date with our star. In early April the comet will pass within just 120,000km of the Sun’s surface.

If the comet survives, it could become a spectacular sight in the evening sky in early April. It may even become visible in broad daylight as it swings closest to the Sun – unless it falls apart before then.

So what makes these sungrazers so exciting, and what can we expect?

Fragments of a mega-comet

Over the past 2,000 years, a series of spectacular comets have graced our skies. Without fanfare, they appear seemingly from nowhere, shining remarkably close to the Sun in the sky. Some even become bright enough to be visible in broad daylight.

Historically, the brightest comets often become known as “Great Comets”. The Great Comet of 1965 – C/1965 S1 (Ikeya-Seki) – was the brightest comet of the 20th century. Discovered just one month before its closest approach to the Sun, it got as bright as the full Moon, and was easily visible with the naked eye during the day.

A greenish vertical streak in an orange sky.
Comet Ikeya-Seki, captured on October 29 1965. Roger Lynds/NOIRLab/NSF/AURACC BY

The Great Comet of 1882, C/1882 R1, was even more impressive. At its brightest, it was a hundred times brighter than the full Moon, dazzling in the sky for several months.

We now know that all these bright comets from the last two millennia – the Kreutz sungrazing family – share a common origin. At some point in the past (potentially in the 3rd or 4th century BCE), a giant cometary nucleus, more than 100km in diameter, came perilously close to the Sun’s surface. Some time after that close approach, far from the Sun, that comet split into two major fragments and shed lots of smaller pieces.

A few hundred years later, in the 3rd century CE, those pieces returned as they journeyed on their long orbit around the Sun. Reports from 363 CE suggest there may even have been multiple comets visible with the naked eye in broad daylight at the same time. Those returning pieces again fragmented.

In the eleventh century, the two largest remaining pieces of the ancient mega-comet swung by again, becoming the Great Comets of 1106 and 1138. Once again, the pieces fragmented – and the products of those fragmentations have been seen as a series of comets through the past two centuries.

A white streak in a purplish starry sky.
The Great Comet of 1882, as seen from South Africa. Sir David Gill/South African Astronomical Observatory

We’ve been due for a big one

Today, the Kreutz sungrazing family contains a vast number of smaller comets which fall apart en-route towards the Sun, as well as larger pieces that can put on a fantastic show.

NASA’s Solar and Heliospheric Observatory, SOHO, has spotted thousands of Kreutz fragments over the years – tiny icebergs just metres or tens of metres across. Larger fragments swing by more rarely.

A bright vertical streak seen above the curve of Earth's horizon from space.
Comet Lovejoy seen from the International Space Station, December 22 2011. NASA

The most recent larger Kreutz sungrazer was visible in 2011. Discovered by Queensland astronomer Terry Lovejoy, the comet barely survived its close approach to the Sun, becoming as bright as the planet Venus in late December 2011.

According to the predictions of Czech-American astronomer Zdeněk Sekanina, we could potentially see two large, show-stopping sungrazers in the coming decades, with one potentially arriving in the next couple of years.

That comet would be a sibling to the Great Comets of 1965 and 1882, and a fragment of the Great Comet seen by Chinese observers in 1138.

Enter comet MAPS

Which all brings us to the newly discovered comet C/2026 A1 (MAPS). It’s moving on an orbit typical of Kreutz sungrazing comets, and already holds one record. At the time of its discovery, comet MAPS was farther from the Sun than any previous newly discovered sungrazer.

The technical discovery image of comet MAPS. Copyright MAPS 2026

That suggests it might be a larger-than-usual fragment – perhaps.

The previous holder of this record was comet Ikeya-Seki in 1965, which proved to be the brightest of the 20th century. However, technology has moved on significantly in the past 70 years, and it seems very unlikely the nucleus of comet MAPS is as large as that of Ikeya-Seki. In turn, that makes it unlikely comet MAPS will be as bright.

Nevertheless, the fact we’ve caught it so early means it’s either a reasonably large Kreutz fragment, or it’s currently in outburst – already falling apart. Fortunately, recent observations have shown it steadily brightening, which points to the former theory.

What can we expect from the new comet?

Overall, it’s too soon to tell. If – and that’s a big if – the comet survives its closest approach to the Sun (known as perihelion), it could put on a great show in early to mid-April.

If it holds together, it might get bright enough to be visible in broad daylight. Even if that doesn’t happen, the SOHO spacecraft will provide great images of the comet.

Comet MAPS is en route to graze our Sun. NASA JPL Small-Body Orbit Viewer

In the days following perihelion, the comet will move into the evening sky. Thanks to its orbit, like all Kreutz comets it will be far easier to see from the southern hemisphere.

If the comet survives until perihelion, then fragments as it passes the Sun, it could brighten suddenly and unexpectedly. A late break-up might therefore be the best-case scenario for a dazzling show.

For now, we watch and wait.The Conversation

Jonti Horner, Professor (Astrophysics), University of Southern Queensland

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Lainie Anderson’s novels about a real pioneering policewoman invite us to play historical detective

Kate Cocks and her pioneering South Australian women’s police force. State Library South Australia
Sue TurnbullUniversity of Wollongong

It’s 1917 and policewoman Fanny Kate Boadicea Cocks is patrolling the parks of Adelaide, armed with a five-foot cane. She’s there to protect women from harm by enforcing a “three foot rule” to keep amorous couples at a safe distance from each other.

When not on morality police duties, she likes to shop in the recently opened Moore’s department store on Victoria Square, with its grand marble staircase, and its piano serenading the well-heeled clientele with cheery wartime songs.

This might seem like a fanciful premise for a historical crime fiction series. But Miss Kate Cocks, as she was usually known, did in fact exist. (So did Moore’s department store, before it was gutted by fire in 1948.) Cocks was the first woman police officer in the British Empire to be paid at the same rate as her male colleagues and granted similar powers of arrest.

In fact, she was the first policewoman in South Australia, which in 1894 became the first state to grant women the vote and the right to stand for parliament. (A year after New Zealand became the first country in the world to give women the vote.)


Review: The Death of Dora Black; Murder on North Terrace – by Lainie Anderson (Hachette)


Journalist and novelist Lainie Anderson discovered Cocks while randomly scrolling through her Twitter feed during the COVID pandemic. She then applied to the University of South Australia to do a PhD on Miss Cocks, aiming to make her the protagonist in a popular crime novel. This resulted in a two-book deal.

a woman with crimped short grey hair and a beaded necklace
Kate Cocks. Wakefield Press

Anderson’s (still embargoed) thesis addressed the challenge, and ethics, of turning a real woman into a fictionalised character. Whatever her concerns might have been, The Death of Dora Black and Murder on North Terrace are fine additions to feminist historical crime fiction: perhaps best exemplified by the Miss Phryne Fisher mysteries written by the late Kerry Greenwood.

Indeed, Miss Cock’s fictional offsider, the indomitable Constable Ethel Bromley, is somewhat reminiscent of Phryne. Ethel is also wealthy and beautiful. She, too, entertains a lover and practices birth control. As one of Ethel’s aunts admiringly tells her: “You are our future selves”.

It’s a clever ploy, placing the “paradoxical” real-life character of Miss Cocks, with her reverence for motherhood and perplexing opposition to birth control and abortion, in a close working relationship with a character who embraces views much more in keeping with contemporary beliefs about women’s rights. This juxtaposition effectively stages a dialogue between past and present attitudes.

“In my opinion, a mother is the nearest thing to God upon this earth, because she, too, creates,” Cocks – who, in real life, founded a refuge for babies after her retirement – told The Advertiser in 1936. “That is why I am so opposed to all the abortive practices nowadays.”

But importantly, what Kate and Ethel share is their desire to protect women.

Revealing fashion and complex characters

While women may have achieved more control over their bodies since 1917, both The Death of Dora Black and Murder on North Terrace deal with crimes involving rape and domestic violence. Sadly, the persistence of these crimes today suggests the times may not have changed as much as we might hope.

Death of Dora Black book cover, with magpie illustration, rings in beak

The Death of Dora Black begins with the discovery of a young woman’s body under the jetty at Glenelg beach. The only clues are two small vials of opium and an expensive art nouveau purse. This is the motivating crime that will drive the primary narrative. However, it’s the incidental characters and descriptions of Adelaide that give these books their depth and heft.

Then, we are introduced to Miss Cocks as she shops in Moore’s department store for a pair of new shoes exactly the same as her old ones, but in a different colour. At five foot six inches, Miss Cocks is taller than the average woman of the time, and as “neat as a pin” in a “light green, ankle-length silk frock with an understated ruffle at the throat and a fitted waist”. Anderson’s fashion notes are precise – and revelatory in terms of what they might tell us about the characters.

Miss Cocks appears to be a 41-year-old, straight-laced, buttoned-up spinster. However, she is also a product of both her time and social circumstances – and all the more complex for that.

Ethel, on the other hand, is 27, exuberant and prone to wearing military-inspired outfits with much higher hemlines. She has also been learning jujitsu to great effect, having flattened a “mountain of a man” at the Port Adelaide docks who was pestering her. She would like to be a detective.

Over the course of the two books, set in January and September of 1917, respectively, Miss Cocks and Ethel’s working relationship deepens. As we are told in the second book, they develop “an unspoken appreciation of one another’s strengths and a sympathetic acceptance of their weaknesses” through their shared experiences, and the challenges they face together.

Murder ‘a welcome distraction’

The two female police officers are required to work an overwhelming 60 hours a week, with one Sunday off in every six. For the most part, this work is routine and exhausting. It involves daily trips to the Adelaide Railway Station to meet unaccompanied, vulnerable young women and ensure their future safety; walking the city’s parklands to catch couples in flagrante; and patrolling the suburbs to monitor domestic disputes. The murders they become involved in are something of a welcome distraction.

Murder on North Terrace book cover, with magpie illustration, beak dripping blood

In Murder on North Terrace, this involves the death of the South Australian Art Gallery’s head in front of a controversial painting he has championed. Miss Cocks, meanwhile, is facing domestic crime of a different order involving a man who locks his wife in a truck every night to prevent her entering the house.

Anderson skilfully blends truth and fiction. The controversial painting, Sowing New Seed by William Orpen, did indeed exist. It caused quite a stir at the time, as did the case of the wife padlocked in the truck. Only the murder in the gallery is a fiction.

Real – and ever present – is the backdrop of the first world war. (This is also the backdrop of Anderson’s debut novel, Long Flight Home, also based on historical research and real people.) From the pianist in Moore’s department store playing Pack Up Your Troubles on repeat, to the returned soldiers in Victoria Square, “broken men with missing limbs and lost hope”, the impact of the war on the inhabitants of Adelaide is a constant theme.

In Murder on North Terrace, the war moves centre stage. Miss Cocks and Ethel are now on duty at the Cheer-Up Hut in Elder Park, a home away from home for new recruits and 300 recently returned South Australian soldiers.

As they watch a young amputee threaten to throw himself off a balcony and into the arms of a young woman he has just met, they are once again presented with forces beyond their control: including love, lust and the notorious six o’clock swill – not to mention a predatory rapist.

At least Ethel gets to play the detective, if only briefly. She also receives a marriage proposal – which completely confounds her, since this would mean resigning from the job she loves. Ethel may be a fictional character, but there’s a hard truth here. My own mother experienced it in 1937, when she was forced to give up her job in the United Kingdom as a result of a similar marriage bar.

Given the ongoing dialogue between fact and fiction, if I have any criticism to make of The Death of Dora Black and Murder on North Terrace, it is that they should have come with a map of Adelaide in 1917. I keenly wanted to trace Miss Cocks and Ethel’s movements through the city as they went about their business of saving women and solving crime.

Publishers take note: there’s the opportunity for a crime walk here. There, readers might investigate for themselves the relationship between the real and the imaginary that Anderson so effectively blurs. At the same time, she gives us a compelling portrait of what life might have felt like in Adelaide at that time.

Such is the power of good crime fiction that touches the heart as well as the mind – while inspiring a desire to play history detective.The Conversation

Sue Turnbull, Honorary Professor of Communication and Media Studies, University of Wollongong

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Australia once enshrined white superiority. These 10 trailblazers helped shift our attitudes to race

Wikimedia, National Library of Australia, National Archives of Australia, State Library of New South Wales, The Conversation
Angela WoollacottAustralian National University

In early 20th century Australia, Indigenous people were denied citizenship and the nation had a racially exclusive immigration policy. Most people not only accepted the “White Australia” policy but openly identified with its assumption of white supremacy. Popular culture was replete with overtly racist terms and images.

Even after World War II, as Australians began to focus on their region and nearby colonies threw off their imperial rulers, acceptance of “White Australia” continued for many.

Yet from the late 1940s, some Australians began to question the racial inequality on which colonialism relied. By 1975, when the Whitlam government passed the Racial Discrimination Act, racially exclusive immigration had been jettisoned and First Nations people had legal equality, albeit not parity.

Such a profound shift in popular consensus did not occur spontaneously. Here are ten key Australians who prodded the country to question its own thinking on race.

1. H.V. ‘Doc’ Evatt

In early 1945, as Minister for External Affairs and Attorney-General, Dr H.V. Evatt (1894–1965) co-led the Australian deputation to the United Nations’ founding conference. He helped to shape the UN Charter dealing with colonies, requiring their development towards independence.

As president of the third session of the UN General Assembly, on 10 December 1948, Evatt presided over the adoption of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights.

His niece, lawyer and jurist Elizabeth Evatt, recalled that her Uncle Bert held the idea of human rights close to his heart and saw the declaration as the first step in a process. She also pointed to Australia’s role in formulating Chapter XI of the UN Charter, calling it a stimulus to decolonisation.

As a supporter of White Australia, Evatt was inconsistent as a critic of colonialism. But his role in the adoption of the declaration, which is so often invoked in support of human rights and equality, should be a matter of pride in this country.

2. Jessie Street

Jessie Street (1889–1970) was a leading feminist in the 1940s and the only woman on the Australian delegation to the 1945 UN conference. Street helped to insert the phrase “the equal rights of men and women” in the preamble of the UN Charter. She also pushed for a commission to be established to deal with the status of women.

Street and other women delegates fought to include the word “sex” in the Universal Declaration of Human Rights statement. Respect for human rights was to be without distinction as to race, sex, language, or religion.

She knew Evatt and praised his influential work at the early UN. But unlike Evatt, she had no reservations about condemning colonialism. In the mid–1950s, Street investigated the conditions of Indigenous Australians for the London Anti-Slavery Society, writing an important report and working with Indigenous activists such as Pearl Gibbs.

Jessie Street at the United Nations. National Library of Australia

In 1964, Street visited Ghana, then led by socialist President Kwame Nkrumah. It wasn’t only his socialist program she admired, nor his commitment to gender equality. She also applauded his vision of redressing the historical wrongs of imperialism, slavery and exploitation, and praised his “burning resentment against race discrimination and other aspects of the old colonial regime”.

3. Pearl Gibbs

Pearl Gambanyi Gibbs (1901-1983), whose maternal ancestry was Ngemba or Muruwari, helped to organise the Aborigines Progressive Association, the 1938 Day of Mourning protestthe Australian Aborigines’ Leaguethe Aboriginal-Australian Fellowship, and the Federal Council for the Advancement of Aborigines and Torres Strait Islanders.

She played a vital role in the movement leading to the 1967 Referendum, which would include Indigenous people in the census and empower the Commonwealth government to legislate for them. Gibbs was an advocate for workers, one of Australia’s leading human rights activists and a link between the women’s and Aboriginal rights movements.

Pearl Gibbs pictured in 1955. State Library of New South Wales

Gibbs saw and articulated the structural nature of colonial oppression within Australia. In 1941, she gave a radio address, arranged by the Theosophical Society of Sydney. Identifying proudly as “a quarter-caste Aborigine”, she condemned “153 years of the white man’s and white woman’s cruelty and injustice and unchristian treatment”.

She pointed to segregation in picture halls, churches and elsewhere, urging: “When I say that we are Australia’s untouchables you must agree with me”.

4. Faith Bandler

Faith Bandler’s father was from Ambrym (in what is now Vanuatu), brought to work on the Queensland sugar plantations. Her mother was half-Indian and half-Scottish. While not Indigenous, Bandler (1918–2015) knew racism all too well.

Faith Bandler, oil painting by Elsa Russell ca. 1957, ML1175. Mitchell Library, State Library of New South Wales and courtesy Louise Havekes

After serving in the Women’s Land Army, in the postwar years she joined politically progressive circles in bohemian Sydney. She became a prominent advocate for racial equality.

By 1956, Gibbs and Bandler had begun the Aboriginal-Australian Fellowship, an organisation dedicated to campaigning for Indigenous rights. Bandler became general secretary of its successor. She played a key role in the 1967 Referendum and, as her biographer Marilyn Lake contends, the meaningful achievement of equal citizenship for Aboriginal people.

In an interview, Bandler explained that her activism was influenced by her childhood experiences of racism, and knowledge of its global, structural dimensions:

[T]he stories my father told me of his treatment, being kidnapped from the islands and working on the canefields as a slave, did influence my thinking […] I knew about the slave trade, and we always sang the slave songs in the evenings […] So I knew, even as a very young kid, that black people somehow had their place, and it was in the place of serving white people.

5. Charles Duguid

Dr Charles Duguid (1884-1986) was a prominent campaigner for Aboriginal rights from the 1930s onwards. Duguid founded Ernabella mission, for the Pitjantjatjara people in northwest South Australia in 1937. This mission was regarded as extraordinarily progressive in its cultural sensitivity and efforts to preserve language and customs.

Charles Duguid, circa 1936. National Library of Australia

Duguid advocated publicly for the significance of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, quoting from its preamble: “Disregard and contempt for human rights have resulted in barbarous acts which have outraged the conscience of humankind”. He then observed: “From 1788 to 1900 this happened all too often in Australia.”

Duguid often drew comparisons between Australia and South Africa. More than once, Duguid finished an address with the ominous remark: “Asia is looking on”. The statement called into question Australia’s regional standing among both its colonised and newly independent neighbours.

6. Kylie Tennant

Kylie Tennant (1912–1988), one of Australia’s most prominent writers in the mid-20th century, was known especially for her socialist realist portrayals of the hardships of the working class and unemployed – occasionally referred to as Australia’s John Steinbeck.

Kylie Tennant. Wikimedia Commons

Tennant was hailed by the Times Literary Supplement and won praise from George Orwell. In the late 1950s, she used her public platform to draw attention to the terrible consequences of colonialism for Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people in the far north. Her books Speak You So Gently and All the Proud Tribesmen sold well nationally and internationally.

Tennant’s determined use of humour as a vehicle to show all of her characters – Indigenous and settler – as individuals with personalities was undergirded by her awareness of racism, not least on the part of some government officials and mining company prospectors. Condemning discrimination and abysmal living conditions, Tennant evoked the richness of Indigenous cultures and community life.

Her travel writing and fiction brought First Nations people in the north to metropolitan attention – as she had done in the 1930s and early 1940s with the unemployed and the very poor.

7. Don Dunstan

Don Dunstan in 1968. Wikimedia Commons

Don Dunstan (1926-1999) was a democratic socialist South Australian Labor MP, a national political figure and cultural celebrity. As Premier of SA from 1967–68 and 1970–79, Dunstan pioneered legislative and policy reform establishing Aboriginal land rights and prohibiting discrimination.

In 1957, he gained international attention as an outspoken critic of British colonialism in Cyprus. In 1960–61, Dunstan served as president of the Federal Council for the Advancement of Aborigines and Torres Strait Islanders. In 1965, he played a key role in the removal of the White Australia policy from the federal ALP platform. In June 1969, he said, as reported in the Tribune:

Australia cannot continue to be lumped in most people’s minds with South Africa as a country basing its policies on racial discrimination […] Outside Australia, people who have heard of us for the most part don’t know much about our country but there is one thing they all know – the White Australia Policy.

In the late 80s and the 90s, he was president of the Mandela Foundation of Australia and presided over the Australian branch of the Movement for Democracy in Fiji, while being a leading voice for Australia to become a republic.

8. Oodgeroo Noonuccal

Studio portrait of Lance Corporal Kathleen Walker (Oodgeroo Noonuccal) taken in 1942. Wikimedia Commons

Oodgeroo Noonuccal (Kath Walker) (1920–1993) was a poet and Indigenous rights activist. Noonuccal grew up on Minjerribah/North Stradbroke Island. She became a domestic servant before joining the Australian Women’s Army Service in World War II. A player and advocate for women’s cricket, she worked as a stenographer and house cleaner.

Her political skills were first honed in the Communist Party, which she left before becoming a writer. From the 1960s, Walker/Noonuccal was celebrated for her powerfully evocative poetry and as an internationally prominent political figure fighting for Aboriginal rights.

In 1969, Walker told the Journalists’ Club in Sydney that missionaries

have convinced themselves they are Christianising the Aboriginal but in truth they continue to brutalise the black man by trying to turn him into a black white man.

The old government policy of assimilation had done nothing to help Aboriginal people, and the new policy of integration was merely a word change: “At present, Aboriginals are given the rights to live upon the rubbish dumps of the white society”.

Noonuccal received many awards and accolades, and was recognised for founding her Indigenous learning centre Moongalba on Minjerribah.

9. Charles Perkins

Charles Perkins (1936–2000) was born on an Aboriginal reserve near Mparntwe/Alice Springs. His strongest memory was

the fact that we just weren’t allowed into Alice Springs, which was only 2 miles away. Often we used to go for walks towards Alice Springs and look over the hills […] and the white people for us, well, they were like moon-men I suppose.

Charles Perkins. Image courtesy of the National Archives of Australia. NAA: A6135, K29/1/82/35.

Later he was sent to an institution for Aboriginal boys in Adelaide for schooling. He worked as a fitter and turner, prior to becoming a professional soccer player, a career that took him to England.

His activism began in the mid-1950s as a young man in Adelaide. While studying at University of Sydney, he hit national headlines in 1965 when he led the Freedom Ride student protest against segregation and discrimination in New South Wales country towns.

Perkins’ path-breaking career as a public servant culminated as secretary of the Department of Aboriginal Affairs. The photo above, of Perkins speaking at the Tent Embassy while he was secretary, captures his ability to balance activism and senior administration. Long a powerful national voice on Aboriginal rights, in the 1990s he served on the Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Commission.

10. Roberta Sykes

Roberta Sykes (1943-2010) was the daughter of an Australian mother and African–American father. Of her childhood in Townsville in the 1940s-50s, Sykes would recall:

As children, we were overwhelmed with the history, images and successes of white people to the extent that we could not have been blamed for doubting our own existence and worth and the existence and worth of all, and any, other Black people.

Roberta Sykes (detail from image of Sykes being interviewed on the TV show GTK, 1973). National Archives of Australia. National Archives of Australia.

Forced out of school early by racism, she became a nurse, before working as a journalist. She helped to found the Aboriginal Medical Service in Redfern, and the Aboriginal Tent Embassy, among many other entities. In the early 1970s, as a prominent activist for Aboriginal rights, Sykes was invited to speak on racism, rights and colonialism in countries including the UK, New Zealand and Papua New Guinea.

She earned her PhD at Harvard University, held positions in academia and as a consultant, and was awarded the 1994 Australian Human Rights Medal. In 1986, in her Australia Day address to the National Press Club, she condemned the fact that “Australian Aborigines were still living under siege almost 200 years after white people arrived on their land”.


These ten Australians collaborated on many fronts. Evatt and Street worked together at the UN from 1945 to 1949. Tennant wrote the first biography of Evatt. Street connected with Gibbs and Bandler to ignite the movement for constitutional change that resulted in the 1967 referendum.

Duguid and Dunstan worked in the 1959 campaign against the death penalty conviction of Arrernte man Rupert Maxwell Stewart. Dunstan — who was something of a mentor to Perkins — and Noonuccal were both invited delegates to a historically important convention on racism held by the World Council of Churches in London in 1969.

Noonuccal and Sykes, while different generations, bonded as Black women from Queensland, both poets and activists. The ten’s connections were links in vital intellectual and political networks, whose webs spread outwards and crossed the country.

Of course, the work of this cohort alone did not change Australia, and many other individuals could – and perhaps should – be added to such a list. But these ten each made singular contributions to the formidable task of changing a nation’s mind.The Conversation

Angela Woollacott, Distinguished Professor Emerita, History, Australian National University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why preferential voting is superior to first past the post

Adrian BeaumontThe University of Melbourne

The South Australian state election will be held on March 21. Preferential voting will be used to elect members for all 47 single-member lower house seats. This is the same system as used for federal House of Representatives elections.

Some Australian conservatives are advocating Australia return to first past the post (FPTP), but a conservative government introduced preferential voting in 1918 to stop vote splitting between two conservative parties. Right-wing preferences helped the Coalition maintain its grip on power from 1949 to 1972. Preferential voting is far superior to FPTP.

After Labor’s landslide at the May 2025 federal election, some right-wingers have complained that preferential voting gave Labor too many seats. They want Australia to revert to FPTP, where there are no preferences. In FPTP, the candidate with the most votes wins the seat.

National primary votes at the election were 34.6% Labor, 31.8% Coalition, 12.2% Greens, 6.4% One Nation and 15.0% for all Others. After preferences, Labor defeated the Coalition by 55.2–44.8 and won 94 of the 150 House of Representatives seats (63% of seats). In both two-party and seat share, this was Labor’s biggest win since 1943.

While Labor’s margin expanded after preferences, they won the national primary vote by 2.8%. Analyst Kevin Bonham said that on primary votes, Labor would have won 86 seats to 57 for the Coalition (actual 94 to 43). Labor’s primary votes were much more efficiently distributed than the Coalition’s.

Labor won a disproportionate seat share at the election, but this occurs with single-member systems, particularly with a blowout result. Those complaining about Labor’s big majority should advocate switching to proportional representation, not FPTP.

The United Kingdom 2024 election was held using FPTP. Labour won 411 of the 650 seats (63% of seats) on 33.7% of the national vote. This occurred primarily because Labour’s vote share was ten points ahead of the second placed Conservatives.

A brief history of preferential voting in Australia

Prior to 1918, federal elections used FPTP. In 1918, there was a byelection for Swan that was contested by the Nationalists (a predecessor of the Liberals), the Country Party (a predecessor of the Nationals) and Labor.

Labor won this byelection with 34.4%, to 31.4% for the Country Party and 29.6% for the Nationalists. With the combined vote for the two conservative options adding to 61.0%, it was clear a different system would have given the Country Party the win.

After this byelection, the Nationalist government introduced preferential voting, resulting in Labor losing the Corangamite byelection in 1918 to a Victorian Farmers candidate by 56.3–43.7, despite Labor winning the primary vote by 42.5–26.4 with 22.9% for the Nationalists.

Originally preferential voting was introduced to allow the two conservative parties (now Liberals and Nationals) to compete against each other without splitting the conservative vote and giving Labor wins it didn’t deserve. There are still “three-cornered” contests now where the Liberals, Nationals and Labor all contest the same seat.

This Wikipedia page gives national primary votes for Labor, the Coalition and all Others, the Labor and Coalition estimated two-party share and House seats won by Labor, Coalition and others at elections from 1910 to 2022.

Until the 1990s, the combined primary votes for the major parties was around 90% in most elections. This means that other than in three-cornered contests, preferences had limited impact. There were high Other votes in 1931, ‘34, '40 and '43, with the first three cases due to a Labor split (New South Wales Lang Labor).

In the first two of these cases, Labor was far behind on primary votes and made up some ground on preferences, but the Coalition still won easily. In 1940, Labor trailed by 3.7% on primary votes but won the two-party vote by 50.3–49.7. However, the Coalition formed government with the support of two independents until those independents sided with Labor in 1941.

In 1943, there was a split within the Coalition, and other preferences favoured the Coalition, reducing Labor’s primary vote lead of 26.9 points to 16.4 points after preferences.

In 1955, a Labor faction split from Labor and became the Democratic Labor Party (DLP), directing preferences to the Coalition. From 1955 until the DLP’s demise in 1974, it dominated the third party vote, and so overall preferences in this period assisted the Coalition.

The DLP helped the Coalition to have the longest period of one-party government from 1949 to 1972. Labor was estimated to have won the two-party vote in 1954, 1961 and 1969, but the Coalition won a majority of House seats.

Since 1987, preferences have favoured Labor, allowing it to overturn primary vote deficits to win the two-party vote in 1987, 2010 and 2022. First the Democrats and then the Greens assisted Labor after preferences. One Nation’s first rise at the 1998 election didn’t stop overall preferences from favouring Labor.

The only time Labor formed government while losing the two-party vote occurred in 1990, when they won a majority of seats despite losing by 50.1–49.9. Labor lost the election in 1998, even though it won the two-party vote by 51.0–49.0.

Some recent polls have One Nation surging into second place behind Labor, ahead of the Coalition. On current polling, there are more right-wing sources of preferences than left-wing sources, so overall preference flows could favour the right at the next federal election, whether it’s One Nation or the Coalition that benefits most.

In early elections, some seats were often uncontested, meaning only one candidate nominated for that seat. No votes were counted in such seats, so national primary votes will be distorted by the exclusion of these seats.

Why preferential voting is superior to FPTP

At the 2025 election, Labor’s Ali France defeated Liberal leader Peter Dutton in his seat of Dickson by 56.0–44.0. But Dutton had more primary votes than France, winning 34.7% of the primary vote to 33.6% for France, with 12.2% for a teal independent, 7.6% for the Greens and 4.2% for One Nation.

FPTP gives a massive benefit to the side of politics (left or right) that has its vote more concentrated with one party or candidate. In the two 1918 byelections, the left vote was concentrated with Labor, and in Dickson 2025 the right vote was concentrated with Dutton. Preferential voting is far fairer by allowing all candidates’ votes to eventually count.

In FPTP, many voters need to choose between supporting the candidate they most prefer even if that candidate is uncompetitive, and voting for the candidate best placed to keep someone they dislike out. Votes for uncompetitive candidates are effectively wasted in FPTP.

Labor may have won Dickson under FPTP as some of the teal and Greens voters would probably have voted for Labor tactically to beat Dutton. But voters shouldn’t need to make these choices.

Parliaments require majorities to function. The party winning the most seats does not necessarily form government, for example Labour formed government after the 2017 New Zealand election even though the conservative National won the most seats.

In the UK, the Conservatives needed to form alliances with other parties after winning the most seats but not a majority at the 2010 and 2017 elections. Preferential voting is closer to parliamentary systems than FPTP.The Conversation

Adrian Beaumont, Election Analyst (Psephologist) at The Conversation; and Honorary Associate, School of Mathematics and Statistics, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

AC/DC in surgery and lo-fi beats in the office: what the science says about working to music

Vitaly Gariev/Unsplash
Emery SchubertUNSW Sydney

Phil is in prep for surgery. As the anaesthetic is about to be administered, the anaesthetist says: “Oh, and by the way, during the procedure the surgical team will be listening to the hard rock classic, You Shook Me All Night Long.”

Does Phil say, “STOP! I’m getting out of here”?

Perhaps he shouldn’t. According to one study, by listening to AC/DC during surgery, doctors can improve their performance. Use of music in operating theatres has had mixed results but the study – which looked at young surgeons working on laparoscopic procedures at a hospital in Dresden while listening to various different kinds of background music – found background music reduced surgeons’ anxiety. And who wants an anxious surgery team, right?

Particularly for boring, repetitive jobs, music can help. Locking into the beat (psychologists call this “rhythmic entrainment”) means your actions sync with the beat of the music, which can make routine tasks feel smoother and faster.

Put melody and beat together and, after a bit of practice, you too might be working like this postal officer – who even supplies his own melody.

When else does music help you at work?

Background music often doesn’t help with memory and language tasks, such as reading comprehension and reading speed, especially when the music contains lyrics. When you’re processing words, extra words supplied by the song are competing for attention.

Difficult, complex tasks are also hindered by music.

But what about that surgery team? Aren’t they performing among the highest-stakes tasks of all? The key is expertise. An experienced medical professional typically carries a lower “cognitive load” for familiar procedures, leaving mental bandwidth to spare. In those circumstances, a bit of music might steady the nerves without crowding out attention.

But personality matters: people on the shy or introverted side are more likely to find background music distracting than extroverts who thrive on stimulation.

The music genre matters, too. Jazz standards might help one person focus, and drive another around the bend, while the latest K-pop hits might do no more than help you procrastinate from that already overdue task.

And volume matters. Not too soft, and the music can cover up or “mask” unwanted, unpredictable, distracting noise like office chatter, café clatter, library whispers, or (heaven help you), shopping centre din. The goal isn’t loudness; it’s control over your soundscape.

Why is music such a popular work companion?

Music occupies your ears. That leaves your eyes – and your hands – free to get on with the job.

Music can sometimes support tactile and kinaesthetic work, such as our postal worker cancelling stamps with a beat and a ditty. He was able to watch what he was doing, while singing and stomping away.

Intriguingly, even though music is a sound signal, the ear can deal with the auditory airwaves containing other sounds more gracefully than the eye can with visuals. Trying to work while listening to music is very different than trying to work while watching television. This holds true even when you need to be listening to something as part of your work.

A woman wearing headphones sits at a laptop.
Task type and individual preference both matter. Julio Lopez/Unsplash

Our brains are surprisingly good at separating simultaneous sound sources. This ability is called “auditory scene analysis”: the brain’s way of separating mixed sounds into distinct sources – like picking out one voice in a noisy room.

So audio tasks – such as listening to instructions or taking dictation – can still be performed with background music, though performance may be somewhat reduced compared with silence. But the ear can juggle streams in a way the eye often can’t.

Music also provides us with joy. Music can spark powerful experiences – belonging, awe, tenderness, thrills – states that can boost mood and motivation. That’s why some people can’t help plugging in.

If music ever starts to get in the way of focused work, another strategy is to take a “music break”: get a quick hit of your favourite tracks to elevate mood, then return to the task refreshed.

Putting it into practice

If you want to experiment, try this quick checklist:

  • match the music to the task: embrace rhythm for repetitive or motor tasks; favour instrumentals for reading, writing or anything word heavy

  • mind the lyrics: words in your music compete with words in your head

  • keep it moderate: play music at a volume enough to mask distractions, not enough to dominate attention

  • know thyself: if you’re easily overstimulated, keep sessions short or choose calmer genres such as lo fi, ambient or soft classical

  • use breaks strategically: if music distracts while you work, save it for short “fuel up” breaks to restore mood and focus.

But there is no hard and fast rule. Recall our hard rock–loving surgeons? No lo-fi for them. But for the record, the surgery went just fine with the gentler Beatles classic, aptly titled Let It Be. And music’s not for everyone. For some, the surest way to stay tuned in to work is to not tune in at all.The Conversation

Emery Schubert, Professor, Empirical Musicology Laboratory, School of the Arts and Media, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Brisbane dinosaur fossil is Australia’s oldest

February 2, 2026

Professor Bruce Runnegar with the fossil he found almost 70 years ago. Photo credit: The University of Queensland.

University of Queensland research has confirmed Brisbane’s only dinosaur fossil is Australia’s oldest, dating back to the earliest part of the Late Triassic period 230 million years ago.

The 18.5-centimetre footprint (pictured below) was discovered by a teenager at Petrie’s Quarry at Albion in 1958 but remained unstudied for more than 60 years.

Dr Anthony Romilio from UQ’s Dinosaur Lab said the footprint set in stone proved dinosaurs were present in Australia a lot earlier than previously recognised.

“This is the only dinosaur fossil to be found in an Australia capital city and shows how globally significant discoveries can remain hidden in plain sight,” Dr Romilio said.

“Subsequent urban development has made the original site inaccessible, leaving this footprint as the only surviving dinosaur evidence from the area.

“It’s likely the dinosaur was walking through or alongside a waterway when it left the footprint before it was then preserved in sandstone, which was cut millions of years later to construct buildings across Brisbane.

“Without the foresight to preserve this material, Brisbane’s dinosaur history would still be completely unknown.”

The footprint was made by a small, two-legged dinosaur, likely an early sauropodomorph, which is a primitive relative of later long‑necked dinosaurs.

Dr Romilio said based on its size, the animal stood roughly 75 to 80 centimetres tall at the hip and weighed about 140 kilograms.

Dr Anthony Romilio used software to recreate a cast of what the dinosaur footprint would have looked like. Photo credit: The University of Queensland.

Study co-author and UQ Honorary Professor Bruce Runnegar was the teenager who collected the fossil during a visit to the quarry with school friends and has kept it since.

“At the time, we suspected the marks might be dinosaur tracks, but we couldn’t have imagined their national significance,” Professor Runnegar said.

Professor Runnegar went on to study a Bachelor of Science and PhD at UQ and then to teach palaeontology at the University of New England at Armidale and University of California, Los Angeles, where he showed the Brisbane fossil to students.

“It was a great example of a special kind of trace fossil because the footprint was made in sediment by a heavy animal,” he said.

“When I saw Dr Romilio’s ability to reconstruct, analyse and map dinosaur footprints, I decided to reach out to have the fossil formally documented.

“More than 60 years after we found it, it’s extraordinary to see it recognised as Australia’s oldest dinosaur fossil.”

The fossil is now housed at the Queensland Museum where it will be available for ongoing research.

The research is published in Alcheringa.

Epiaceratherium itjilik: The rhino that lived in the Arctic

Danielle FraserCarleton University

Paleontologists at the Canadian Museum of Nature have recently been studying the skeletal remains of a rhinoceros. This might not sound remarkable at first, but what makes these remains fascinating is that they were found on Devon Island in the Canadian Arctic.

Today, mammals inhabit nearly every corner of the Earth. In Asia, Europe and North America, mammals arrived via three routes, one over the Bering Strait and two over the North Atlantic.

The Bering Land Bridge is the best known, having enabled the arrival of humans in North America approximately 20,000 years ago and shaped the population genetics of animals such as bears, lions and horses.

Less well known are the two routes that traversed the North Atlantic, one from the Scandinavian Peninsula over Svalbard and Greenland, and another from Scotland over Iceland to Greenland and the Canadian Arctic.

However, it has typically been thought that land animals could not have crossed the North Atlantic by the Early Eocene, a period around 50 million years ago when the Earth’s climate was warmer.

However, the Arctic rhino’s remains provide tantalizing evidence that land mammals were able to traverse the North Atlantic using frozen land bridges much more recently than the Early Eocene.

A rhinoceros in the Arctic

Danielle Fraser explains her team’s research on the Arctic rhinoceros. (Canadian Museum of Nature)

The new species of rhinoceros was discovered from a nearly complete specimen collected from the Haughton Formation of Devon Island in Nunavut — lake sediments formed in an asteroid impact crater that likely date to the Early Miocene, around 23 million years ago.

The sediments of the Haughton Formation preserve plants, mammals and birds, among others. The majority of the rhinoceros was collected in the 1980s by paleontologist Mary Dawson and her team, with additional collections by paleontologists Natalia Rybczynski, Marisa Gilbert and their team in the 2010s.

The rhinoceros lacked a horn, which is common among extinct rhinos. It is remarkable, however, in possessing features of much more ancient forms, like teeth of forms many millions of years older. It also has a fifth toe on the forefoot, which is rare among rhinoceroses.

Anatomical comparison and evolutionary analysis suggest the specimen belongs to an existing genus, Epiaceratherium, found only in Europe and western Asia. In naming the new species, the team consulted with Jarloo Kiguktak, an elder from the nearest Indigenous community to the Haughton Crater, Aujuittuq (Grise Fiord). Together, they named it Epiaceratherium itjilik. Itjilik is an Inuktitut word meaning frost or frosty, an homage to the Arctic setting where the specimen was found.

Most surprisingly, the team’s evolutionary analysis placed E. itjilik closest to the European species of Epiaceratherium. This indicates that its ancestors likely crossed from Europe to North America via the North Atlantic at some point during the late Eocene period around 33-38 million years ago.

Bio-geographic analyses further revealed a surprisingly high number of rhinoceros crossings over the North Atlantic directly between Europe and North America, some in the last 20 million years. While a finding of such a recent crossing via the North Atlantic has often been considered unlikely, emerging geological evidence tells a different story.

How did rhinos get to the Arctic?

Today, land animals are impeded from crossing between Europe and North America by several deep, wide waterways. The Faroe Islands, Iceland and Greenland are separated by the Faroe-Bank Channel, Faroe Shetland Channel and the Denmark Strait. Between the Scandinavian Peninsula, Svalbard and Greenland are the Barents Sea and Fram Strait. It is believed that land animals could traverse at least one of these areas only up until the Early Eocene about 50 million years ago.

Recent studies, however, are starting to paint a more complex picture of North Atlantic geological change. Estimates for the timing of formation of the various channels that now break up North Atlantic land masses are highly variable.

Mathematical modelling suggests a highland connected Svalbard to northern Europe as recently as the 2.7 million years ago. An array of new data also suggest the Fram Strait was shallow and narrow until the Early Miocene, around 23 million years ago. The Faroe-Shetland channel may have opened between 50 and 34 million years ago, while the Iceland-Faroe Channel and Denmark Strait were submerged later, 34 to 10 million years ago.

This suggests that rhinoceroses could have walked on land for at least part of their journey across the North Atlantic. They could possibly have swum the relatively short distances between land masses but the team hypothesized that seasonal sea ice may also have facilitated their movement.

Seasonal ice

More than 47 million years ago, the Arctic Ocean and surrounding regions were ice-free all year. Ocean cores collected from the Arctic Ocean — samples of mud, sand and organic material drilled from the seafloor — contain evidence of ice-rafted debris during the Middle Eocene, approximately 47 to 38 million years ago. This indicates the presence of seasonal ice.

Another ocean core collected between Greenland and Svalbard also contains ice-rafted debris originating from across the Arctic dating from between 48 to 26 million years ago. What is emerging, therefore, is the possibility that land animals crossed the North Atlantic by a combination of routes formed over land and seasonal ice.

Vertebrate fossils from the islands that once comprised the North Atlantic land bridges are extremely rare. Given that much of the land bridges are now submerged, direct evidence for how animals spread across the North Atlantic may be lost.

Bio-geographic studies like the one conducted by the team at the Canadian Museum of Nature highlight how discoveries in the Arctic are reshaping what we know about mammal evolution. These insights further our understanding of how animals moved across our planet.The Conversation

Danielle Fraser, Head & Research scientist, Palaeobiology, Canadian Museum of Nature & Adjunct Research Professor, Department of Biology, Carleton University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

From statement sleeves to the codpiece: 5 fashions which should come back from Tudor England

Portrait of Elizabeth I of England, 1588. Woburn Abbey/Wikimedia Commons
Grace Waye-HarrisAdelaide University

There are few dynasties in history as well-known as the Tudors. From Henry VIII’s six wives to Elizabeth I’s defeat of the Spanish Armada, the Tudors continue to capture imaginations.

While sex, power and public execution provide endless entertainment, if you ask me, the enduring popularity of the Tudors is down to one factor – their magnificent fashion.

Dress was serious business in Tudor England. Clothing was its own language with each textile, colour and style carrying a different meaning. This allowed people to display their identity, status, and even send political messages.

From the Elizabethan Ruff to Henry VIII’s codpiece, here are five Tudor fashions which should make a comeback.

1. The linen shift

Sounds like a boring place to start, but the linen shift was a staple in every Tudor wardrobe.

Linen was inexpensive, breathable and could be laundered daily. Contrary to popular belief, the Tudors were obsessed with cleanliness and hygiene. Linen absorbs sweat, bodily fluids and was believed to protect the skin from diseases such as the plague. Wearing and changing your linen shift daily was the best way to stay clean and protected from infection.

A linen shirt with blue embroidery around the collar and cuffs.
The collar on this linen shift, from around 1540, was larger so it could be seen under the outer garments. ©Victoria and Albert Museum, LondonCC BY-NC

A fashionable trend of the Tudor period saw the collar on the linen shift become larger so it could be seen under the outer garments. A clean collar demonstrated that you could afford to change your shift and therefore had good hygiene.

You know what they say, cleanliness is close to godliness.

2. The ruff

If there is a single item of clothing that is most redolent of the Tudors, it’s the ruff.

The ruff was a pleated collar made from linen or lace and given its iconic stiff shape with starch. During the reign of Elizabeth I, large lace ruffs became an elaborate status symbol because they were difficult to set and impractical to wear which meant you had to have a lot of servants helping you.

Oil painting: a woman in a silver dress with a very ornate ruff.
Large, impractical ruffs – like the one in this 1615 portrait of a woman, possibly Elizabeth Pope – were a status symbol in Tudor England. Yale Center for British Art

For Elizabeth I, the ruff was a significant source of power. The queen’s opulent ruffs commanded deference and situated her as the ultimate object in any room. In Elizabeth’s court, people came to her, not the other way around.

Dior gave the ruff a modern twist in their 2025 Fall–Winter collection, so it looks like they are already making a comeback.

3. Statement sleeves

In the Tudor period, sleeves were a separate garment that were attached while getting dressed in the morning. This allowed the wearer to pair them with different outfits and play around with fabrics, colours and styles.

The most popular style was the trumpet sleeve. This sleeve was narrow at the top of the arm and dramatically expanded in a cone shape over the elbow. A second sleeve would then appear underneath at the forearm.

Oil painting: a young Elizabeth in a red dress.
This painting of Elizabeth I before her accession is dated between 1546 and 1547. The sleeves give the outfit a dramatic and voluminous appearance. Royal Collection/Wikimedia Commons

This gave any outfit a dramatic and voluminous appearance with layers of luxurious textiles. See how this beautiful design looked on a young Elizabeth I.

A modern take on statement sleeves would be a great way to spice up any outfit.

4. Decorative techniques

Tudor tailors used a range of decorative techniques when making clothes. Paning, pinking and cutwork were just some of the more elaborate modes of garment construction but the most common was slashing.

Slashing involved cutting small slits into outer garments of velvet to reveal an inner layer of white silk. The layering and contrast of different colours not only created a striking and vibrant image but showed off your ownership of expensive textiles.

Oil painting of Henry VIII in a power stance.
In this portrait of Henry VIII from between 1540–1547, you can see slashing on his doublet and sleeves. Walker Art Gallery/Wikimedia Commons

You can see slashing on Henry VIII’s doublet (jacket) and sleeves in his famous portrait.

In 1991, this technique inspired Vivienne Westwood to produce the collection Cut and Slash, so it definitely has a place in the modern era.

5. The codpiece

Ok, this one is a bit of fun… but for Henry VIII the codpiece was no laughing matter. Starting out as a small triangular piece of material, by the early 16th century the codpiece had evolved into a padded, stiff and bejewelled item symbolic of virility and fertility.

Toxic masculinity was all the rage during the Tudor period, and Henry VIII was under immense pressure to maintain absolute control through his superior machismo.

As the king aged, his vigour waned and his failure to produce a male heir sent him into a crisis of masculinity. The display and exaggeration of his manhood through the codpiece was Henry’s only means of reasserting his masculine identity and fecundity.

Henry’s 1540 tournament armour gives a clear indication of just how exaggerated the codpiece became.

One thing is for sure, fashion in Tudor England was not a flippant pursuit. If the ever-enduring legacy of the Tudors can teach us anything, it’s that we should always dress to impress.The Conversation

Grace Waye-Harris, Early Career Researcher in History, Adelaide University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Men rule the Grammys as women see hard drop in wins at 2026 awards

Luba KassovaUniversity of Westminster

In her acceptance speech for best pop vocal album at the 68th Grammy Awards ceremony last night, Lady Gaga shone a light on the challenges that women face in studios. “It can be hard,” she said. “So, I urge you to always listen to yourself and … fight for your songs, fight for yourself as a producer. Make sure that you are heard, loudly,” she continued, placing the onus on women to take control of the fight for equality in music.

Many well-established and new female superstars were indeed heard loudly last night in the broadcast, which clearly made sure to display gender balance in front of the camera. However, when it comes to awards, nominations and the wider industry the picture is much different.

Working with my business partner, strategist Richard Addy, I looked at gender representation across all 95 of this year’s Grammy categories. Our analysis reveals that women and female bands sustained a dramatic fall in winners compared to last year. They received less than a quarter of all Grammys (23%), a 14 percentage point drop from last year’s high of 37% and the lowest level since 2022.

This fall has been partly a reflection of women’s declining recognition as Grammy nominees. Women’s representation peaked at under a third (28%) of all nominations last year, and this year just one in four nominations (24%) were given to women.

Despite Lady Gaga’s encouraging words for women to own their music as producers, their fight for a seat at the producers’ table is yet to yield results. Since its introduction 51 years ago, no woman has ever won the coveted Grammy for producer of the year, non-classical. Last year, Alissia became only the tenth woman to even earn a nomination in the category but lost out to Daniel Nigro. This year, all five nominees were male.

Addy and I have previously conducted a year-long data-led investigation of over 9,700 Grammy nominations and over 2,200 wins between 2017, revealing that it takes a village of men to raise a superstar, female or male. The winners of record, album and song of the year – three of the four most coveted Grammy awards – typically come on stage to collect their trophy alone.

In reality, however, they share their award with numerous producers, engineers and mixers, who are overwhelmingly male. So music icons like Beyoncé or Taylor Swift collecting their individual awards masks the male dominated structures behind these wins. For example, Bad Bunny, this year’s album of the year winner, has received it alongside 12 male producers, songwriters and technicians who were not on stage with him.

Despite women’s consistently high visibility at the Recording Academy nominee announcements and broadcasts over the year, their recognition across the Grammys has remained peripheral compared to men’s. Since 2017, 76% of nominations and wins across all categories have been awarded to men. By contrast, women have been nominated for and won only one in five Grammys in the same period.

Research consistently shows that the reasons women remain marginalised in the Grammys and in music more generally, are deeply structural and multifaceted.

Although the Recording Academy’s mission is to advance a strong culture of diversity, inclusion, belonging and respect in the music industry, women remain marginalised as Recording Academy members. The proportion of Grammy voting members who are women has grown from 21% (2018) to 28% (2024). But this growth rate will only deliver gender parity in 2051.

This slow growth is likely linked to 69% of voting members being songwriters, composers, producers and engineers, roles in which women’s marginalisation has repeatedly been reported to be highest. For example, the latest Inclusion In the Recording Studio report from from USC Annenberg Initiative revealed the overall ratio of men to women songwriters in Billboard Hot 100 year-end charts across 13 years is 6.2 to 1.

Our assessment of 67 academic papers and reports in our report, The Missing Voices of Women in Music and Music News, revealed that gender discrimination, sexual harassment and sexual violence consistently hinder women’s success in music, as do pay gaps, women’s cultural exclusion from the “boys club” and limited discovery and promotional opportunities. According to Be The Change: Gender equity in music, a 2024 report from consultancy Midia based on research conducted across 133 countries 60% of women in the music industry have experienced sexual harassment while one in five women have survived sexual assault.

The evidence points to a reality in which no matter women’s talent or determination to succeed, they will only be able to do so if the music industry changes. Until then, we are unlikely to see women achieving recognition parity at the Grammys or any other music awards.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.

__The Conversation

Luba Kassova, PhD Candidate, Researcher and Journalist, University of Westminster

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

I studied 10 years of Instagram posts. Here’s how social media has changed

Antoine Beauvillain/Unsplash
T.J. ThomsonRMIT University

Instagram is one of Australia’s most popular social media platforms. Almost two in three Aussies have an account.

Ushering in 2026 and what he calls “synthetic everything” on our feeds, Head of Instagram Adam Mosseri has signalled the platform will likely adjust its algorithms to surface more original content instead of AI slop.

Finding ways to tackle widespread AI content is the latest in a long series of shifts Instagram has undergone over the past decade. Some are obvious and others are more subtle. But all affect user experience and behaviour, and, more broadly, how we see and understand the online social world.

To identify some of these patterns, I examined ten years’ worth of Instagram posts from a single account (@australianassociatedpress) for an upcoming study.

This involved looking at nearly 2,000 posts and more than 5,000 media assets. I selected the AAP account as an example of a noteworthy Australian account with public service value.

I found six key shifts over this timeframe. Although user practices vary, this analysis provides a glimpse into some larger ways the AAP account – and social media more broadly – has been changing in the past decade.

Reflecting on some of these changes also provides hints at how social media might change in the future, and what that means for society.

1. Media orientations have shifted

When it launched in 2010, Instagram quickly became known as the platform that re-popularised the square image format. Square photography has been around for more than 100 years but its popularity waned in the 1980s when newer cameras made the non-square rectangular format dominant.

Instagram forced users to post square images for the platform’s first five years. However, the balance between square and horizontal images has given way to vertical media over time.

On the AAP account that shift happened over the last two years, with 84.4% of all its posts now in vertical orientation.

A chart shows the mix of media types by orientation that were posted to the AAP's Instagram account between 2015 and 2025.
The use of media in vertical orientation spiked on the AAP Instagram account in 2025. T.J. Thomson

2. Media types have changed

As with orientations, the media types being posted have also changed. This is due, in part, to platform affordances: what the platform allows or enables a user to do.

As an example, Instagram didn’t allow users to post videos until 2013, three years after the platform started. It added the option to post “stories” (short-lived image/video posts of up to 15 seconds) and live broadcasts in 2016. Reels (longer-lasting videos of up to 90 seconds) came later in 2020.

Some accounts are more video-heavy than others, to try to compete with other video-heavy platforms such as YouTube and TikTok. But we can see a larger trend in the shift from single-image posts to multi-asset posts. Instagram calls these “carousels”, a feature introduced in 2017.

The AAP went from publishing just single-image posts in the first years of the account to gradually using more carousels. In the most recent year, they accounted for 85.9% of all posts.

A graph shows the different types of media posts published on the AAP's Instagram account between 2015 and 2025.
Following the introduction of carousel posts on Instagram in 2017, the AAP account’s use of them peaked in 2025 with 85.9% of all posts. T.J. Thomson

3. Media are becoming more multimodal

A typical Instagram account grid from the mid-2000s had a mix of carefully curated photographs that were clean, colourful and simple in composition.

Fast-forward a decade, and posts have become much more multimodal. Text is being overlaid on images and videos and the compositions are mixing media types more frequently.

A grid of 15 Instagram posts show colourful photos, engaging use of light, and strategic use of camera settings to capture motion.
A snapshot of an Instagram account’s grid from late 2015 and early 2016 showed colourful photos, engaging use of light, and strategic use of camera settings to capture motion. @australianassociatedpress

There are subtitles on videos, labels on photos, quote cards, and “headline” posts that try to tell a mini story on the post itself without the user having to read the accompanying post description.

On the AAP account, the proportion of text on posts never rose above 10% between 2015 and 2024. Then, in 2025, it skyrocketed to being on 84.4% of its posts.

A grid of 15 Instagram posts show text overlaid on many of the photos or text-only carousel posts.
In 2025, posts on Instagram had become much more multimodal. Instead of just one single photo, the use of carousel posts is much more common, as is the overlaying of words onto images and videos. @australianassociatedpress

4. User practices change

Over time, user practices have also changed in response to cultural trends and changes of the platform design itself.

An example of this is social media accounts starting to insert hashtags in a post comment rather than directly in the post description. This is supposed to help the post’s algorithmic ranking.

A screenshot of an Instagram post shows a series of related hashtags in a comment.
Many social media users have started putting hashtags in a comment rather than including them in the post description. @australianassociatedpress

Another key change over this timeframe was Instagram’s decision in 2019 to hide “likes” on posts. The thinking behind this decision was to try to reduce the pressure on account owners to make content that was driven by the number of “like” interactions a post received. It was also hypothesised to help with users’ mental health.

In 2021, Instagram left it up to users to decide whether to show or hide “likes” on their account’s posts.

5. The platform became more commercialised

Instagram introduced a Shop tab in 2020 – users could now buy things without leaving the app.

The number of ads, sponsored posts, and suggested accounts has increased over time. Looking through your own feed, you might find that one-third to one-half of the content you now encounter was paid for.

6. The user experience shifts with algorithms and AI

Instagram introduced its “ranked feed” back in 2016. This meant that rather than seeing content in reverse chronological order, users would see content that an algorithm thought users would be interested in. These algorithms consider aspects such as account owner behaviour (view time, “likes”, comments) and what other users find engaging.

An option to opt back in to a reverse chronological feed was then introduced in 2022.

Screenshot of the Instagram interface where a friend has sent a message describing shenanigans at a tram stop.
Example of a direct message transformed into AI images with the feature on Instagram. T.J. Thomson

To compete with apps such as Snapchat, Instagram introduced augmented reality effects on the platform in 2017.

It also introduced AI-powered search in 2023, and has experimented with AI-powered profiles and other features. One of these is turning the content of a direct message into an AI image.

Looking ahead

Overall, we see more convergence and homogenisation.

Social media platforms are looking more similar as they seek to replicate the features of competitors. Media formats are looking more similar as the design of smartphones and software favour vertical media. Compositions are looking more multimodal as type, audio, still imagery, and video are increasingly mixed.

And, with the corresponding rise of AI-generated content, users’ hunger for authenticity might grow even more.The Conversation

T.J. Thomson, Associate Professor of Visual Communication & Digital Media, RMIT University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Olives have been essential to life in Italy for at least 6,000 years – far longer than we thought

Emlyn DoddSchool of Advanced Study, University of LondonMacquarie University

How far back does the rich history of Italian olives and oil stretch? My new research, synthesising and reevaluating existing archaeological evidence, suggests olive trees have been exploited for more than 6,000 years. The first Italian olive oil was produced perhaps 4,000 years ago.

The olive was central to ancient life in Italy. Wild and domesticated olives provided edible fruit. By the mid-first millennium BCE into the Roman period, olive oil was used in cooking, medicine, ritual and hygiene.

Table olives are rich in calories, lipids, vitamins and minerals, and high in calcium. Olive wood is dense, and was used in crafting, construction and for fuel. The waste from pressing olives (pomace) was also a remarkably popular domestic and industrial fuel source in antiquity, burning at a higher temperature for longer and with less smoke than charcoal.

Uses of the olive tree and its fruit were diverse.

During the early Roman Empire (around the first century CE) it is possible Rome’s immediate hinterland produced 9.7 million litres of olive oil per year.

Today, Italy remains among the top olive producing regions in the Mediterranean.

A deep history of olive exploitation

Evidence from ancient pollen shows that olive trees were present in Italy during the Pleistocene, more than 11,000 years ago. These were likely wild olives.

In order to think about exploitation and cultivation, it is important to discern human interaction with the plant and its fruit.

Olive tree charcoal, suggestive of human exploitation, has been found in Mesolithic layers from the seventh and sixth millennia BCE (8,000 years ago) in Sicily and Apulia in the south of Italy.

In northern Italy, the Arene Candide cave in Liguria revealed olive charcoal along with quern stones and sickle blades, possibly used for rudimentary olive harvesting and processing. People at this time began to shape the landscape of wild olive trees by using wood for fuel, collecting wild fruit or pruning off branches for fodder.

A photograph of a cave.
The Arene Candide cave in Liguria, where olive charcoal and tools were found dating to the sixth millennium BCE. Capricornis crispus/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY-SA

An exponential increase in evidence occurs in the Neolithic (6000–3500 BCE), hinting at more intensive use of the olive tree.

But our earliest olive stones, which provide more convincing evidence of olive fruit consumption, are not found in an occupation context until the Middle Neolithic (around 5000–4000 BCE). Much of this early material comes from Calabria, Apulia and Sardinia, with only limited glimpses in central Italy and the Veneto.

Despite accumulating evidence, no conclusive signs yet exist for the Neolithic production of olive oil in Italy.

The earliest olive oil in Italy?

Organic residue analysis has detected plant oils, perhaps from olives, in an Early Bronze Age (2000 BCE) large clay storage jar (pithos) from Castelluccio, Sicily. But there remain challenges in our ability to discern between different types of oils using this technique, and preservation in the Mediterranean is rarely ideal.

A sand coloured jar.
Bronze Age ceramic storage jar (pithos) perhaps used to store olive oil, found at Castelluccio, Sicily. Fabrizio Garrisi/Wikimedia Commons

More potential indicators for olive oil have been found in ceramic storage jars from Broglio di Trebisacce, Calabria, and Roca Vecchia, Apulia, in the mid-second millennium BCE.

The Bronze Age also saw olive cultivation expand into marginal lands where the wild olive did not grow, for example at Tufariello, Campania, around 1700 BCE. There was clearly significant interest in the exploitation of olives in Bronze Age Italy, which likely included the production of oil at least on a small scale.

Iron Age developments

Italian regions experienced different trajectories around 1000 BCE. Parts of southern Italy show declines in olive cultivation, perhaps linked to changing economic and cultural events. Sites on the Ionian and Adriatic coast maintain olive charcoal, stones, oil residues and even imprints of olive leaves on ceramics.

Possibly the earliest stone rotary olive millstone in the Mediterranean was discovered at Incoronata, Basilicata, dating to the seventh century BCE.

The invention of rotary mills signalled an important change in processing power and efficiency. Mills crushed olives, separating skin from flesh before they were pressed for oil. Although they are generally thought to originate in the Aegean, where examples from the sixth and fifth centuries BCE exist, the find from Incoronata might instead suggest a central Mediterranean origin.

A grey bowl with two grey presses sitting on a wooden dowel.
Reconstructed stone rotary olive mill (trapetum) originally from Boscoreale, now at Pompeii. Heinz-Josef Lücking/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY-SA

Recent research demonstrates external cultures, like Phoenicians or Greeks, were not solely responsible for the introduction of olive cultivation or oil production. This follows similar conclusions reached for viticulture and winemaking in Italy.

Cultural exchange through trade and colonisation brought different knowledge, technology and ideas of production around oleiculture and oil production, creating forums for local innovation.

These forces energised already-intensifying cultivation. By around 600–500 BCE, Etruscan communities began to play a key role in the systematic establishment of groves and the use of olives in central Italy.

Roman consolidation and scaling up

The Roman period saw olive cultivation pushed well past its natural bioclimatic limits. Olive trees were grown at higher altitudes, latitudes and in more arid regions.

Production occurred across much of the Italian peninsula, even in subalpine regions and marginal lands.

Archaeological and ancient environmental material illustrate a substantial oil-producing habit and emerging market in Roman Republican and Imperial Italy – perhaps on a larger scale than previously thought.

Some oil production facilities may have had four or more presses. This illustrates exceptional processing scale, such as the elite villa of Vacone in central Italy.

A facility in Apulia, used from the first century BCE onwards, had an oil cellar with perhaps 47 enormous clay jars (dolia), potentially storing 25,000–35,000 litres.

Oil production also occurred at a smaller-scale in urban centres and isolated rural locations. The discovery of a production site at Case Nuove, Tuscany, provides a rare glimpse into modest scale olive processing using rudimentary technologies.

As analytical and scientific techniques improve, the ancient history of olive oil in Italy will continue to evolve, pushing our knowledge further back in time and adding new detail and nuance.The Conversation

Emlyn Dodd, Senior Lecturer in Classical Studies, Institute of Classical Studies, School of Advanced Study, University of LondonMacquarie University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Mow for Ol'Mate in March: 

Sunday, 1 March 2026 - 09:00 am to Tuesday, 31 March 2026 - 05:00 pm
It's a simple idea with a big heart: neighbours helping neighbours, right in their own backyards. By mowing a couple of lawns for older members of the community, you're not just tidying up - you're checking in, having a chat and making sure they're safe, supported and doing OK at home.

A freshly mown lawn can mean independence, dignity and peace of mind - and sometimes a reason to to stop, say hello and connect. So, grab a mower in March and be part of something special in the Northern Beaches Community.

Join this amazing community mow-ment today. Register your interest via enquiries@mwpcare.com.au or call 9913 3244.

OR Are you over 65 and would like your lawn mowed? Call our friendly team on 9913 3244 to register your interest.

Contact information
MWP Community Care, email: enquiries@mwpcare.com.au


Victa rotary lawnmower and Mervyn Victor Richardson of Careel Bay, the owner of the company - 1955 - photo by Jack Hickson, Australian Photographic Agency - 01148. Taken by Australian Photographic Agency for account: Graves, Hayes & Baker 1642/55.

Deals done and dollars secured but what about stranded patients?: National Seniors

February 2, 2026
National Seniors Australia (NSA) has questioned at what cost states and territories agreed to the $25 billion for state
and territory public hospitals secured in Friday’s national cabinet meeting.

See PON Inbox News- Feb. 2026 update this week and January 2026 report:
Northern Beaches Hospital to Transition to  Northern Sydney Local Health District (NSLHD) on April 29 2026 - Dee Why Medicare Urgent Care Clinic Now open - Bed Block Surges in NSW Hospitals - ED performance improves but more to do: BHI reports 

Premiers, chief ministers, and the Prime Minister agreed to $24.4 billion in federal payments for hospitals through the National Health Reform Agreement and more than $600m in further spending for the public system. But earlier promises of $2 billion for aged care to speed up the discharge of older people stuck in hospital appears to have disappeared.

NSA Chief Executive Officer Mr Chris Grice said while increased funding for hospitals is always welcome, the funding agreement will not help older people receive the care they need outside of the hospital system unless some of this “new” money is used to fund aged care homes in suitable locations for those with specific needs.

“The number of days older people languish in hospital unnecessarily has been steadily increasing. Recent data shows
more than 4,000 people have waited more than 35 days for admission to residential aged care or for support at home
but hundreds more have waited for several months,” Mr Grice said.

“For people with complex needs, such as dementia, hospital environments are inappropriate, they can be highly stressful and exacerbate symptoms. Long-term hospital stays can put patients at greater risk of acquiring infections, take a toll on loved ones, and have flow-on impacts for the hospital and health system contributing to delays in access for all.

“The states and territories flaunted stranded patients to secure more money for hospitals. Now NSA would like to see states and territories use some of that funding to address the root cause of the problem and to start building the necessary bricks and mortar now, especially given the $2 billion promised for aged care has been forgotten.

“The only state or territory without a significant stranded patient issue is Victoria, which has invested in public aged care services for many years, including in regional areas and for people with high needs, such as dementia. This has resulted in lower numbers of older people stranded in hospitals.

“NSA would like to see the establishment of a taskforce across all levels of government to develop targeted solutions to ensure the needs of older people stranded in hospital are prioritised within the aged care system by addressing shortfalls in aged care services.

“Sure, a deal was struck and federal funding secured, but it has come at the cost to thousands of stranded patients whose plights have been forgotten.

“This isn’t a deal only about dollars – it’s about older people who built this country, shaped our communities, and who deserve aged care support and a place to call home.''

Pittwater Probus

When: 10:00am, second Tuesday of each month
Phone: 0405 330 613
  • Probus Club of Pittwater is an association for active male members of the community, and for those no longer working full time, wishing to join a club for a new lease of life.
  • Its purpose is to advance intellectual and cultural interests amongst its members and to provide regular opportunities to progress well-being through social interaction and activities, expand interests and enjoy the fellowship of new friends.
  • Our club membership is for men only, however partners are welcome and encouraged at our social events and activities, including our monthly speaker presentations and lunch following each meeting.
Pittwater Probus is a fun and friendship club where you can make new friends, listen to interesting guest speakers and participate in a wide range of activities including special lunches and dinners.

Meetings are held each month at Mona Vale Surf Life Saving Club, commencing at 10:00am on the second Tuesday of the month. Visitors are welcome to the meetings.

Pittwater Probus is a men’s only Probus Club, and wives and partners are encouraged to listen to guest speakers and also join in on our activities and functions.

There is a one-off joining fee of $20 and an annual membership fee of $50. New members are always made welcome.

Wyvern Music Forestville: Alexander Yau – Piano Recital

“Hats off, gentlemen, a genius”
Wyvern Music Forestville proudly presents acclaimed pianist Alexander Yau in a recital celebrating the genius of three of history’s greatest composers: Mozart, Schumann, and Chopin.

The program begins with Mozart’s Sonata in F major, K. 533, a work of crystalline elegance, moving from the spirited Allegro through the lyrical Andante to the buoyant Rondo finale.

Schumann’s Humoreske, Op. 20 follows, a kaleidoscope of moods and emotions, shifting between tenderness, exuberance, and introspection across six contrasting movements. After the interval, Yau turns to Chopin’s majestic Sonata No. 3 in B minor, Op. 58, a pinnacle of Romantic piano literature. From the commanding Allegro Maestoso to the dazzling finale Presto ma non tanto – Agitato, the sonata embodies both poetic depth and virtuosic brilliance.

Alexander Yau, an eminent young Australian pianist, has developed himself as a complete musician, incorporating his many musical talents as a chamber musician, conductor and composer. He is currently Associate Lecturer in Collaborative Piano at the Sydney Conservatorium of Music and casual Principal Pianist at the Sydney Symphony Orchestra. 

This recital offers audiences the chance to experience the inspiration of three great musical masters, brought vividly to life by Alexander Yau.

When: Sunday, 8th March 2026 at 3:00pm
Where: Our Lady of Good Counsel Catholic Church, 9 Currie Rd, Forestville
Tickets: Full:$40, Concession:$30, Students:$25, Children under 16 Free
Enquiries: Wyvern Music Forestville Tel: 9416 5234

AvPals Term 1 2026 Short Courses at Newport

Avalon Computer Pals (AVPALS) helps seniors build and improve their computer and technology skills. AvPals is a not-for-profit organisation run by volunteers. Since 2000, we have helped thousands of seniors from complete beginners to people who just want to improve or update their skills. We offer one to one personal tuition or small group short courses.

Short courses are run at Newport Community Centre every Tuesday afternoon in school terms. Full details of this term’s courses are available at Newport Short Courses and bookings can be made on our Course Bookings webpage.

Find out more at: www.avpals.com

Star power lineup confirmed for 2026 Premier's Gala Concerts: to be Live Streamed

Updated: January 27, 2026
A glittering lineup of performers are set to grace the stage for the NSW Seniors Festival Premier’s Gala Concerts at Darling Harbour.

Free tickets to the concerts, billed as a highlight of the Seniors Festival, were available to all New South Wales Seniors from Tuesday 27 January. The theme for the 2026 NSW Seniors Festival is ‘Live life in colour’. 

Tickets for the Premier's Gala Concerts 2026 are now sold out. If you were unable to secure tickets or simply can't make it in person, the concerts will also be live-streamed, so you can enjoy the performances from wherever you are. 

The Concert will be live-streamed on Thursday, 12 March, 2:45pm - 4:30pm AEDT


This year’s outstanding line-up features:
  • Dami Im – internationally acclaimed singer-songwriter
  • Nathan Foley – celebrated vocalist and performer
  • Jay Laga’aia – beloved entertainer and actor
  • Olivia Fox – rising star on the Australian music scene
  • Tarryn Stokes – powerhouse vocalist and winner of The Voice Australia 
Last year and again this year, the Premier’s Gala Concerts sold out with close to 32,000 tickets issued.

The NSW Seniors Festival Expo will also be returning in 2026 with exhibitors offering services and support to seniors, including interactive workshops, food and fitness tips.

Minister for Seniors Jodie Harrison said:
“The Premier’s Gala Concerts always generate significant excitement from seniors across New South Wales and this year’s event is shaping up to be unforgettable.

“Older people in New South Wales make an outstanding contribution to our communities and these concerts are about giving back and valuing them.

“The Seniors Festival expo is only a stone’s throw away from the concerts, with exhibitors offering everything from health and travel information to hands-on activities, technology support, and creative workshops.”

Dami Im, performer said:

“I’m absolutely thrilled to be part of this year’s Premier’s Gala Concerts. The NSW Seniors Festival is such a special occasion, and I’m excited to perform for this beautiful audience. It’s going to be a wonderful couple of days filled with music, fun, and celebration!”

Jay Laga’aia, performer said:

"What an exciting time of the year! Seniors are such a valuable part of our community and it's an honour to bring joy to so many at the Premier’s Gala Concerts. We’ve got amazing performers, a brilliant band, beautiful dancers, and more. I can’t wait to bring a little old school vibe to a beautiful gathering.”

Milan Cortina Winter Olympics: history, new events and Australian medal chances

Vaughan CruickshankUniversity of TasmaniaBrendon HyndmanCharles Sturt University, and Tom HartleyUniversity of Tasmania

This year’s Winter Olympics will be held in northern Italy, starting on Friday.

They will be the most spread out in history: the two main competition sites – Milan and the winter resort of Cortina d'Ampezzo – are more than 400 kilometres apart.

Some 3500 athletes from 93 countries will compete in 16 sports for 245 gold medals.

What’s happening at the 2026 games?

Events are organised into broad categories, including ice sports (such as figure skating and curling), skiing and snowboarding (including moguls and halfpipe), Nordic events (such as cross-country and ski jumping) and sliding events (including skeleton and luge).

For the Milan Cortina games, the program has added eight new events designed to increase variety and gender parity.

The most significant addition is the sport of ski mountaineering, often referred to as “skimo”.

An explainer graphic for how ski mountaineering works.
Winter Olympic Games/The ConversationCC BY-SA

The sport requires competitors to ski uphill, transition to walking up steep climbs and then descend on skis.

The program will be the most gender-balanced winter games to date, with 47% women participation mainly thanks to the introduction of women’s double luge and a women’s large hill event in ski jumping.

While the Winter Olympics have been held in 21 cities in 13 different countriesclimate change may limit the number of future host locations.

How the Winter Olympics began

The first Winter Olympics were held in Chamonix, France in 1924.

Current events such as figure skating and ice hockey were actually included in the Summer Olympics in 1908 and 1920.

Following the success of these events, and support from the father of the modern Olympics Baron Pierre de Coubertin, the International Olympic Committee (IOC) decided to hold a separate winter competition in 1924.

This competition was known as the “Winter Sports Week of the 8th Olympiad” and was retroactively recognised as the first Winter Olympics in 1926.

Many of the early Winter Olympics were held in the same year as the summer games – and in the same country.

While the Summer and Winter Olympics have not been held in the some country since 1936, they were held in the same year until 1992.

The IOC then altered their schedule so the summer and winter games were held on alternating even-numbered years.

IOC officials hoped this change would increase the importance of the winter games, which had been regarded as less important than the summer event.

This decision meant the 1994 Winter Olympics in Lillehammer, Norway, were held only two years after the 1992 winter games in Albertville, France.

The next Olympics were the 1996 Summer Olympics, then the 1998 Winter Olympics.

This alternating format continues to this day.

In 1924, 258 athletes from 16 nations came together in Chamonix, France, for what later became the first Winter Olympics.

Australia at the Winter Olympics

Australia’s first winter Olympian was speed skater Ken Kennedy in 1936.

Since then, Australia has competed in every Winter Olympics and its team has grown from one athlete in 1936 to more than 50 in recent games.

Speed skater Colin Coates has represented Australia at the most winter games: six times between 1968 and 1988.

It took 58 years for Australia to claim its first Winter Olympic medal in 1994Steven Bradbury, Richard Nizielski, Andrew Murtha and Kieran Hansen won bronze in the 5,000m short track speed skating relay.

Bradbury also famously won Australia’s first Winter Olympic gold medal in the 1,000m speed skating in 2002.

Australia has won 19 Winter Olympic medals, including six gold.

It has achieved most success in freestyle skiing events such as aerials and mogul, led by multiple medal winners Alisa Camplin and Lydia Lassila.

Australia’s medal chances in 2026

Australia heads into these games with realistic medal chances in a small number of sports where it has consistently punched above its weight. This may seem surprising for a country better known for beaches than snow but targeted investment and athlete pathways have paid off.

Australia’s strongest gold medal hope is in freestyle skiing moguls, a fast downhill event where athletes ski over steep bumps while performing two jumps.

Jakara Anthony, who won gold in Beijing in 2022, has dominated international competitions since then, regularly winning World Cup events – the highest level of competition outside the Olympics.

Aerial skiing has also emerged as a genuine medal opportunity for Australia.

Laura Peel has continued her strong international form with recent World Cup gold, while Danielle Scott has also topped the podium this season.

With two athletes consistently winning at the highest level outside the Olympics, Australia is a genuine podium contender in this discipline.

Snowboarding also offers strong chances.

In snowboard halfpipe, riders launch out of a giant ice channel and perform aerial tricks while being judged on height, difficulty and style. Scotty James has been among the world’s best for almost a decade and has won multiple World Championship medals.

Australia is also building serious depth through younger athletes such as Valentino Guseli, who has already claimed World Cup gold and is emerging as a genuine podium contender.

In women’s monobob, Bree Walker’s recent World Cup gold shows Australia is now a genuine contender in one of the games’ newer disciplines.

In skeleton, where athletes race head-first down an icy track at speeds exceeding 120 kilometres per hour, Jaclyn Narracott won silver in 2022 – Australia’s first sliding sport medal. Another podium finish is possible for her.

Beyond these core medal prospects, sports such as short track speed skating could also feature in Australia’s medal mix if athletes peak at the right time, with potential for 2026 to rival Australia’s most successful Winter Olympics to date.The Conversation

Vaughan Cruickshank, Senior Lecturer in Health and Physical Education, University of TasmaniaBrendon Hyndman, Associate Professor of Education and Associate Dean (Academic), Faculty of Arts and Education, Charles Sturt University, and Tom Hartley, Lecturer in Health and Physical Education, University of Tasmania

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Lainie Anderson’s novels about a real pioneering policewoman invite us to play historical detective

Kate Cocks and her pioneering South Australian women’s police force. State Library South Australia
Sue TurnbullUniversity of Wollongong

It’s 1917 and policewoman Fanny Kate Boadicea Cocks is patrolling the parks of Adelaide, armed with a five-foot cane. She’s there to protect women from harm by enforcing a “three foot rule” to keep amorous couples at a safe distance from each other.

When not on morality police duties, she likes to shop in the recently opened Moore’s department store on Victoria Square, with its grand marble staircase, and its piano serenading the well-heeled clientele with cheery wartime songs.

This might seem like a fanciful premise for a historical crime fiction series. But Miss Kate Cocks, as she was usually known, did in fact exist. (So did Moore’s department store, before it was gutted by fire in 1948.) Cocks was the first woman police officer in the British Empire to be paid at the same rate as her male colleagues and granted similar powers of arrest.

In fact, she was the first policewoman in South Australia, which in 1894 became the first state to grant women the vote and the right to stand for parliament. (A year after New Zealand became the first country in the world to give women the vote.)


Review: The Death of Dora Black; Murder on North Terrace – by Lainie Anderson (Hachette)


Journalist and novelist Lainie Anderson discovered Cocks while randomly scrolling through her Twitter feed during the COVID pandemic. She then applied to the University of South Australia to do a PhD on Miss Cocks, aiming to make her the protagonist in a popular crime novel. This resulted in a two-book deal.

a woman with crimped short grey hair and a beaded necklace
Kate Cocks. Wakefield Press

Anderson’s (still embargoed) thesis addressed the challenge, and ethics, of turning a real woman into a fictionalised character. Whatever her concerns might have been, The Death of Dora Black and Murder on North Terrace are fine additions to feminist historical crime fiction: perhaps best exemplified by the Miss Phryne Fisher mysteries written by the late Kerry Greenwood.

Indeed, Miss Cock’s fictional offsider, the indomitable Constable Ethel Bromley, is somewhat reminiscent of Phryne. Ethel is also wealthy and beautiful. She, too, entertains a lover and practices birth control. As one of Ethel’s aunts admiringly tells her: “You are our future selves”.

It’s a clever ploy, placing the “paradoxical” real-life character of Miss Cocks, with her reverence for motherhood and perplexing opposition to birth control and abortion, in a close working relationship with a character who embraces views much more in keeping with contemporary beliefs about women’s rights. This juxtaposition effectively stages a dialogue between past and present attitudes.

“In my opinion, a mother is the nearest thing to God upon this earth, because she, too, creates,” Cocks – who, in real life, founded a refuge for babies after her retirement – told The Advertiser in 1936. “That is why I am so opposed to all the abortive practices nowadays.”

But importantly, what Kate and Ethel share is their desire to protect women.

Revealing fashion and complex characters

While women may have achieved more control over their bodies since 1917, both The Death of Dora Black and Murder on North Terrace deal with crimes involving rape and domestic violence. Sadly, the persistence of these crimes today suggests the times may not have changed as much as we might hope.

Death of Dora Black book cover, with magpie illustration, rings in beak

The Death of Dora Black begins with the discovery of a young woman’s body under the jetty at Glenelg beach. The only clues are two small vials of opium and an expensive art nouveau purse. This is the motivating crime that will drive the primary narrative. However, it’s the incidental characters and descriptions of Adelaide that give these books their depth and heft.

Then, we are introduced to Miss Cocks as she shops in Moore’s department store for a pair of new shoes exactly the same as her old ones, but in a different colour. At five foot six inches, Miss Cocks is taller than the average woman of the time, and as “neat as a pin” in a “light green, ankle-length silk frock with an understated ruffle at the throat and a fitted waist”. Anderson’s fashion notes are precise – and revelatory in terms of what they might tell us about the characters.

Miss Cocks appears to be a 41-year-old, straight-laced, buttoned-up spinster. However, she is also a product of both her time and social circumstances – and all the more complex for that.

Ethel, on the other hand, is 27, exuberant and prone to wearing military-inspired outfits with much higher hemlines. She has also been learning jujitsu to great effect, having flattened a “mountain of a man” at the Port Adelaide docks who was pestering her. She would like to be a detective.

Over the course of the two books, set in January and September of 1917, respectively, Miss Cocks and Ethel’s working relationship deepens. As we are told in the second book, they develop “an unspoken appreciation of one another’s strengths and a sympathetic acceptance of their weaknesses” through their shared experiences, and the challenges they face together.

Murder ‘a welcome distraction’

The two female police officers are required to work an overwhelming 60 hours a week, with one Sunday off in every six. For the most part, this work is routine and exhausting. It involves daily trips to the Adelaide Railway Station to meet unaccompanied, vulnerable young women and ensure their future safety; walking the city’s parklands to catch couples in flagrante; and patrolling the suburbs to monitor domestic disputes. The murders they become involved in are something of a welcome distraction.

Murder on North Terrace book cover, with magpie illustration, beak dripping blood

In Murder on North Terrace, this involves the death of the South Australian Art Gallery’s head in front of a controversial painting he has championed. Miss Cocks, meanwhile, is facing domestic crime of a different order involving a man who locks his wife in a truck every night to prevent her entering the house.

Anderson skilfully blends truth and fiction. The controversial painting, Sowing New Seed by William Orpen, did indeed exist. It caused quite a stir at the time, as did the case of the wife padlocked in the truck. Only the murder in the gallery is a fiction.

Real – and ever present – is the backdrop of the first world war. (This is also the backdrop of Anderson’s debut novel, Long Flight Home, also based on historical research and real people.) From the pianist in Moore’s department store playing Pack Up Your Troubles on repeat, to the returned soldiers in Victoria Square, “broken men with missing limbs and lost hope”, the impact of the war on the inhabitants of Adelaide is a constant theme.

In Murder on North Terrace, the war moves centre stage. Miss Cocks and Ethel are now on duty at the Cheer-Up Hut in Elder Park, a home away from home for new recruits and 300 recently returned South Australian soldiers.

As they watch a young amputee threaten to throw himself off a balcony and into the arms of a young woman he has just met, they are once again presented with forces beyond their control: including love, lust and the notorious six o’clock swill – not to mention a predatory rapist.

At least Ethel gets to play the detective, if only briefly. She also receives a marriage proposal – which completely confounds her, since this would mean resigning from the job she loves. Ethel may be a fictional character, but there’s a hard truth here. My own mother experienced it in 1937, when she was forced to give up her job in the United Kingdom as a result of a similar marriage bar.

Given the ongoing dialogue between fact and fiction, if I have any criticism to make of The Death of Dora Black and Murder on North Terrace, it is that they should have come with a map of Adelaide in 1917. I keenly wanted to trace Miss Cocks and Ethel’s movements through the city as they went about their business of saving women and solving crime.

Publishers take note: there’s the opportunity for a crime walk here. There, readers might investigate for themselves the relationship between the real and the imaginary that Anderson so effectively blurs. At the same time, she gives us a compelling portrait of what life might have felt like in Adelaide at that time.

Such is the power of good crime fiction that touches the heart as well as the mind – while inspiring a desire to play history detective.The Conversation

Sue Turnbull, Honorary Professor of Communication and Media Studies, University of Wollongong

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.


Rich boomer’ stereotype needs to go as new research shows 1 in 4 older Australians living in poverty: COTA Report

February 4 2026
The stereotype of older Australians as uniformly wealthy is not just wrong – it’s fuelling ageism that hurts people of all ages, new research shows.

The 2025 State of the Older Nation report released today reveals that while many older Australians report feeling more positive about their own lives, the data reveals a starkly uneven reality.


One in four older Australians is living in poverty, almost half have felt lonely in the past week, and 38 per cent say they have experienced one or more forms of ageism since turning 50 – a trend that appears to be growing.

The research also shows older Australians in regional areas are being left behind, facing compounding pressures from rising living costs, reduced access to services, and social isolation.

COTA Australia – the leading advocacy organisation for older people – CEO, Patricia Sparrow says the findings should put an end to the ‘rich boomer’ narrative that continues to dominate public debate and drive poor policy.

“The lazy stereotype of the ‘rich boomer’ needs to be put to rest,” Ms Sparrow said. “This research shows a very different reality – one where one in four older Australians is living in poverty.

“For every older Australian living comfortably, there’s another counting every dollar, skipping meals, or even putting off healthcare.”

Ms Sparrow said the data exposes a sharp intragenerational divide – particularly in financial security, housing, health and connection – that directly challenges the popular narrative of older Australians as uniformly wealthy, secure and comfortable.

“The real divide isn’t between generations – it’s within them,” Ms Sparrow said.

“While some older Australians are doing well, many are not, and a significant minority are struggling with poverty, insecurity and declining wellbeing.

“This divide matters – not just for older people, but for Australia as a whole. Ageism that flattens older Australians into a single stereotype doesn’t just misrepresent reality; it drives poor policy and harms people of every age.

“Policy built around stereotypes will always fail the people at the margins, and right now, too many older Australians are being pushed to the margins.

Ms Sparrow said the findings of the latest State of the Older Nation report should prompt action from the Federal Government to deliver a long-term, comprehensive action plan for Australia’s ageing population.

The State of the Older Nation report found that just under half of those over 50 years don’t feel valued by society or politicians, and just over half don’t believe government policies meet the needs of people as they age.

“What’s required now is a ten-year, whole-of-government plan for an ageing Australia that deals with the real pressures people face as they get older.”

“An ageing population shouldn’t be treated as a crisis to manage. It should be planned for properly, with clear responsibility and long-term investment.

“If we don’t plan properly now, we’ll lock in inequality and instability for decades to come.”

The State of the Older Nation is a nationally representative biennial survey of Australians over 50, conducted by SEC Newgate. This is the fourth report of its kind in the series.

COTA Chairperson the Hon. Christopher Pyne will address the findings of the SOTON report in a National Press Club address today. 

Key State of the Older Nation findings.
The full summary report can be downloaded HERE
  • More than three quarters (76%) of older Australians rated their quality of life at 7 or higher out of 10. This represents a significant increase from the past two surveys, now approaching pre-COVID levels (78% in 2018).
  • While things seem more positive at the personal, individual level, almost half the older Australians surveyed (48%) felt things are getting worse for older Australians at a general level, primarily due to cost-of-living pressures and associated impacts on affordability of healthcare, aged care and housing.
  • Older people don’t tend to feel that their value as an older person is fully appreciated by society or politicians, with nearly half (46%) agreeing they are less valued now than when they were younger.
  • Just over half (54%) agreed that government policies do not meet the needs of people their age, and nearly two-in-five (38%) older Australians report experiencing one or more forms of ageism since turning 50, in a trend that appears to be growing.
  • There is a clear gender gap in workforce participation. 39% of women aged 50+ are in the workforce compared to 47% of men. This continues disparity continues beyond retirement age with 19% of men aged 67 or above are still working, vs just 10% of women.
  • Ageism is a key deterrent preventing older Australians from wanting or being able to re-enter the workforce, with 36% reporting they do not want to return to the workforce due to ageism barriers.
  • One-in-seven either delayed or skipped taking medicines for cost reasons, with prescription medicines most likely to be skipped. Women (17%) were more likely than men (11%) to skip medicines due to cost reasons, along with renters (26%) and those experiencing poverty (235%).
On Wednesday 4 February at 6pm at Parliament House, Canberra, Co-Chairs of the Parliamentary Friends of Seniors and Ageing,Rebekha Sharkie MP, Dr Mike Freelander MP and Senator the Hon. Richard Colbeck, welcomed everyone to the Parliamentary Friends Group launch and introduced the State of the Older Nation 2025 report, direct from The Hon. Christopher Pyne’s address on the SOTON25 report at the National Press Club earlier in the day.

COTA Australia’s State of the Older Nation 2025 report (SOTON25) was presented as part of the launch and was introduced by CEO of COTA Australia, Ms Patricia Sparrow.  COTA Australia’s Independent Chair, the Hon Christoher Pyne addressed the report with the audience and Minister Sam Rae, Minister for Aged Care and Seniors, also attended and spoke about the age care reforms.

The evening was well attended and a series of videos, prepared for COTA Australia by SEC Newgate will be available on the SOTON25 website page.  The videos are authentic interviews of Older Australian’s views and experiences of ageing, ageism and societal opinions.

The launch of the SOTON25 report is a nationally reresentative survey of older Australians prepared by SEC Newgate for COTA Australia and is the fourth in the SOTON series.

The overall story revealed in this wave’s survey results is more positive than the past two waves of the State of the Older Nation, noting that the 2021 wave was conducted during the height of the COVID pandemic and the late 2022-early 2023 wave when Australians were still experiencing the
effects of the pandemic.

However, while there are signs of optimism, the survey findings also show that not all older Australians share this positive experience and outlook. Issues including pervasive ageism, financial insecurity and poverty, low confidence in using technology, and difficulty accessing essential services undermine quality of life for many older Australians.

The report reinforces the need for government, employers and service providers to recognise and value the individual circumstances, needs and interests of all older Australians.


Photo L-R : The Hon. Christopher Pyne, Dr Mike Freelander MP, Patricia Sparrow, CEO, COTA Australia and Rebekha Sharkie MP.

Local Seniors Festival Events: 2026

The events to celebrate Seniors are now listed and there's two free events at Mona Vale Library and through Avalon Community Library.

Those in Pittwater are:
  • Family History Workshop: Tuesday 10 March, 2pm - 3:30pm at Mona Vale Library  Book in Here -Free - 15 spots left, make sure you book into the MVL one.
  • Write your memories workshop: Thursday, 19 March 2026 - 10:00 am to 12:00 pm, Avalon Recreation Centre, 59 Old Barrenjoey Road. Bookings essential by Thursday 12 March as numbers strictly limited, phone 8495 5080.
Others in Pittwater include: 
  • Seniors Festival tour of Kimbriki Resource Recovery Centre: Tuesday, 10 March 2026 - 10:00 am to 01:00 pm - free - book in here (opens Feb 11)Visit the HUB at Kimbriki! The HUB houses Peninsula Seniors Toy Repair Group, Bikes4life and Boomerang Bags Northern Beaches. Their volunteers help reduce waste going to landfill through repair and reuse. Afterwards enjoy a guided walk through the Eco House & Garden, a light lunch and a bus tour of the Kimbriki site.
  • Downsizing workshop/talk at Pittwater RSL: $5, March 13
  • Caring for coastline & coffee morning: Sunday, 15 March 2026 - 09:00 am to 11:00 am, Mona Vale Beach - northern end, Surfview Road. - Come along and care for our beautiful coastline with the Friends of Bongin Bongin Bay by sharing a walk along Mona Vale beach. Clean up buckets provided free or just enjoy the foreshore of Bongin Bongin Bay at the north end of Mona Vale Beach car park. Join the group for a coffee afterwards at the Brightside Cafe. A relaxing way to spend a Sunday morning celebrating being a senior. Conducted in conjunction with Surfrider Foundation, Northern Beaches ‘Adopt a Beach’ plastic removal program. Free. No bookings necessary. Just come along on the day.
  • An evening of music with the Northern Beaches Concert Band: Sunday, 15 March 2026 - 05:00 pm to 07:00 pm, Pittwater RSL Auditorium, 82 Mona Vale Road, Mona Vale. - Enjoy a free evening concert by the Northern Beaches Concert Band.  The program includes a mix of classical melodies, engaging concert band works, and popular tunes that are sure to spark memories and smiles.  FREE. No bookings required. Arrive before 5pm to secure a table. Refreshments available for purchase at the venue.
  • Your Side - Support at Home Information Session: Tuesday, 17 March 2026 - 10:30 am to 11:30 am and Tuesday, 17 March 2026 - 12:00 pm to 01:00 pm, Mona Vale Library, Pelican Room, 1 Park Street, Mona Vale. - Support at Home is the new program of government funding you can receive for aged care services in your own home. Anyone living in Australia aged 65 years or over is eligible, whether you are a full or part pensioner or a fully self-funded retiree. Support at Home can give you access to clinical and personal care, mobility aids and services, and help with daily tasks around your home.  In this information session our Aged Care Support Specialists will help you understand the changes in aged care and what Support at Home is. Whether you are currently receiving aged care, or you are trying to get some support set up, either for yourself or your loved ones, we can help.  Our Aged Care Support Specialists will explain what it means for you and help you apply for and access the funding and services you need. Come and meet us, have a cuppa and we will answer all your questions about aged care.  There will be two sessions on the day. Choose the session that best suits your schedule.  Registering for this free event is essential. Secure your spot here.
  • Advanced Care Planning Workshop - Avalon: Thursday, 19 March 2026 - 10:00 am to 12:00 pm, Avalon Recreation Centre, Room 1 59 Old Barrrenjoey Road, Avalon Beach. - Advance care planning involves planning for your future health care. It enables you to make some decisions now about the health care you would or would not like to receive if you were to become seriously ill and unable to communicate your preferences or make treatment decisions. It helps ensure your loved ones and health providers know what matters most to you and respect your treatment preferences. The workshop will be facilitated by local Nurse Practitioner, Kelly Arthurs of ANDCare. Learning topics cover: What is Advance Care Planning and why it is so important to discuss?, What are the most important aspects to consider with Advance Care Planning, Opportunity to reflect, have a conversation, and commence your own Advance Care Planning journey. This FREE workshop is for all members of the community. All attendees are eligible for a follow up personal consultation appointment with the Nurse Practitioner on Tuesday 24, Wednesday 25, Thursday 26 and Monday 30 March in Mona Vale. One-on-one appointments are available at no cost for those eligible for Medicare. Hosted by Sydney North Health Network and Northern Beaches Council, with ANDCare.  FREE - register your spot here.
The rest are listed on the council webpage dedicated to listing these - not all are council initiated events and fees are being charged for some of these, and most are out of Pittwater, but with a bus at your door, it may be well worth heading south or west to be a part of these.


Guesdon-Eady-Broadbent house at Palm Beach circa 1946-47, at 47 Florida Road - that's dad looking incredibly bored on the chaise lounge at the back, probably waiting to go to the beach!  Photo: PON Editor's family albums - Family History.


 Dad at Aunt Rosemary's house at Palm Beach house, circa 1948-9, 47 Florida Road. Photo: our family albums.

With a shortage of aged-care beds, discharging patients stranded in hospital is harder than it sounds

David Sacks/Getty Images
Hal SwerissenLa Trobe University

The Australian government has finalised a A$220 billion hospital funding deal with the states and territories.

A key part of the negotiation was $2 billion designed to help hospitals move more than 3,000 patients stranded in hospital waiting for discharge to a more appropriate aged-care facility.

However this wasn’t included in the final agreement. Instead, the states will need to dip into their overall funding allocation to pay for any changes.

Being stuck in hospital is not good for older people or their families. Stranded older people are at risk of getting an infection in hospital. Their families are under pressure to find and agree to long-term support.

It’s also bad for hospitals, which end up allocating scarce resources to patients who could be much more efficiently looked after in a residential care facility or with home support.

This results in unhappy patients and families, much higher health-care costs, and longer waits for others who need hospital care.

So how did we get into this situation? And what might happen next?

Why are patients stranded?

Most older people waiting for discharge need a pathway to rehabilitation and ongoing support. That includes transition care to facilities such as rehabilitation centres or units and ongoing support at home, or residential care.

About 60% of older patients discharged from hospital through transition care go home; the remainder need residential care.

Discharge is more likely to be delayed when this transition care is unavailable or poorly planned, and there is a shortage of home and residential care.

The broader problem is the disconnect between the Commonwealth-run aged care and disability programs and the state and territory-run public hospital system.

Rising demand and long waits

Demand for aged care is increasing dramatically as more people reach older age. The proportion of population aged 65 and over has increased from 14.7% to 17.3% over the past decade and it is projected to increase to 19.3% over the next.

At any one time, about one-quarter of those aged 65 and over use either home care or residential care.

But the supply of support at home and residential care has not kept up with growing demand. Despite the introduction of a new aged care system in November last year, unacceptably long waiting times for aged care support at home and residential care persist.

In 2024-25, the average waiting time for a home care package for eligible older people was a staggering 245 days, double what it was a year earlier.

The wait for residential care was little better. On average older people eligible for residential care waited for 162 days.

Shifting costs to patients

The Commonwealth is determined to reign in the cost of its long-term care programs for older people and people with disabilities.

Government has been unwilling to consider levies, taxes and insurance models to underwrite the costs of aged care.

Instead, it has introduced a user-pays model. So at the same time as waiting times have increased, out-of-pocket costs have risen.

With the new aged care model introduced last November, for residential care:

  • the maximum cost of buying or renting a place has increased by nearly 40%

  • the lifetime cap on out-of-pocket costs has increased by about 60%

  • part-pensioners and self funded retirees must now pay a new “hotelling” contribution

  • providers are increasingly charging optional extra service fees.

For the new Support at Home program, all new users, including full pensioners, will now pay mandatory out-of-pocket contributions for everyday services such as cleaning, laundry and gardening, and independent living support including showering and toileting.

The cost of these services has also gone up. Most providers are now charging around A$100 per hour for cleaning services.

It’s not as simple as just ‘adding more beds’

The Commonwealth has put its faith in a highly centralised and quasi-market model to manage the system.

Effectively, the Commonwealth funds and regulates aged care from Canberra, and lets the local market of providers and consumers sort out the price of services and where they are provided. The Commonwealth has no direct involvement in their planning or management.

The result is a postcode lottery of fragmented home and residential care providers. These are difficult to navigate and have little connection to hospital services.

About a quarter of the 700 residential care providers report they are breaking even or making a loss. Their return-on-investment isn’t sufficient to encourage enough capital investment to address the shortfall of 10,000 aged care beds per year.

Meanwhile, cost pressures are driving increasingly larger “big box” corporatised institutional facilities to maximise their profits.

Without either a low-cost capital investment fund from the government or higher returns on investment, providers will be unwilling to take the risk of investing in new beds to meet the shortfall.

The Commonwealth is betting that increased charges for residential aged care users will improve the return on investment and encourage new building.

Home-care providers are also feeling squeezed

Similarly, around 25% of support at home providers report breaking even or losing money and putting up their hourly rates to make ends meet.

For the increasing number of self-funded retirees, these costs are high and may discourage them from using home care when they need it.

What might happen next?

It’s unclear the new user-pays model will deliver the necessary uplift in return on investment to increase the supply of aged care services in the near future.

If it doesn’t, some of the hospital agreement funding will need to be used to increase the supply of residential and home care.

Western Australia is already taking action to encourage more investment in residential care. Whether others do so remains to be seen.

The states may also invest funds in their own transition care, hospital-in-the home and rehabilitation facilities to ease pressure on hospitals.The Conversation

Hal Swerissen, Emeritus Professor of Public Health, La Trobe University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Silver and gold hit record highs – then crashed. Before joining the rush, you need to know this

Zlaťáky.cz/PexelsCC BY
Angel ZhongRMIT University and Jason TianSwinburne University of Technology

The start of 2026 has seen gold and silver surge to record highs – only to crash on Friday.

Gold prices peaked above US$5,500 (A$7,900) per ounce for the first time on Thursday, well above previous highs. But by the end of Friday, it had dropped to around US$5068 (A$7,282).

Silver had been making gains even faster than gold. It hit more than US$120 (A$172) per ounce last week, marking one of its strongest runs in decades, before crashing on Friday to US$98.50 (A$141.50).

So what’s behind those surges and falls? And what should everyday investors know about the risks of investing in precious metals right now?

Why gold has been hitting new highs

Gold is the classic safe haven: an asset people buy to protect their savings when worried about financial risks.

With international political tensions rising, trade war threats, shifting signals about where interest rates are heading and a potential changing world order, investors are seeking assets that feel stable when everything else looks shaky.

Friday’s crash in gold and silver was sparked by financial markets reacting to early news of Donald Trump’s nomination of Kevin Warsh as chair of the US Federal Reserve. The US central bank plays a key role in global financial stability.

Central banks around the world have been buying gold at a rapid pace, reinforcing its reputation as a place to park value during periods of uncertainty.

But it’s not just big institutions moving the market. In Australia and overseas, retail investors – individuals buying and selling smaller amounts for themselves – have played a part too.

Those individuals have been increasingly treating gold, silver and other precious metals as a hedge against so much uncertainty, as well as a momentum play – trying to buy in to keep up with others.

As prices have trended upward, more everyday investors have bought in, especially through gold exchange-traded funds (ETFs), which make it simple to gain exposure without storing physical gold bullion.

What’s been driving silver’s surge

While gold was grabbing headlines for much of 2025, silver has been the real showstopper. Before Friday’s fall, the metal had surged more than 60% in just the past month, far outpacing gold’s still impressive run of around 30%.

Unlike gold, silver has a split personality. Industrial uses are driving up demand for silver. It’s critical for clean energy technologies including solar panels, electric vehicles (EVs), and semiconductors.

This dual appeal – as a safe haven, but also as an in-demand industrial commodity – is drawing investors who see multiple reasons for prices to keep climbing.

Every solar panel contains about 20 grams of silver. The solar industry consumes nearly 30% of total global demand for silver.

EVs also use 25–50 grams each, and AI data centres need silver for semiconductors.

The kicker? The silver market has run a supply deficit for five consecutive years. We’re consuming more than we’re mining, and most silver comes as a byproduct of other metals. You can’t simply open more silver mines.

Individual buyers have piled into silver

One of Australia’s most popular online investment platforms for retail investors is CommSec, with around 3 million customers.

Bloomberg tracking of CommSec trades shows how much retail purchases of silver ETFs in particular have spiked higher in the past year.

Over the past year, gold ETF trades on CommSec grew 47%, with cumulative net buying reaching A$158 million. That reflects gold’s established role in portfolios.

Yet despite attracting slightly lower total investment overall at A$104 million, silver trading activity exploded by far more: it’s been 1,000% higher than the year before.

This means retail investors made far more frequent, smaller trades in silver. This is classic momentum-chasing behaviour, as everyday investors piled into an asset showing dramatic price gains.

The pattern is unmistakable: while gold remains the anchor, silver has become the speculative play.

Its lower per-ounce price, industrial demand narrative, and social media buzz make it particularly accessible to retail investors seeking exposure to the precious metals rally, at a much lower price than gold.

The risks every investor needs to know

The data shows Australian retail investors have been buying as prices rise. But this “fear of missing out” approach comes with serious risks.

Volatility cuts both ways. From February 2025 to just before Friday’s sharp drop, the price of silver had surged 269%. But even before that fall, silver’s spectacular gain had come with 36% “annualised volatility” (which measures how much a stock price varies over one year). That was nearly double gold’s 20% volatility over the same period.

What does that mean in practice? As we’ve just seen, what goes up fast can come down quickly too.

Buying high is dangerous. When retail investors pile in after major price increases, they often end up buying near the top. Professional investors and central banks have been accumulating gold and silver for years, at much lower prices.

No income, higher risk. Unlike shares or bonds, metals don’t pay dividends or interest. Your entire return depends on prices rising further from already elevated levels. And as the past few days have shown, the potential for sharp drawdowns is substantial.

Keep it modest. Financial advisers typically recommend precious metals comprise 5–15% of a diversified portfolio. After such extraordinary price volatility, that guideline matters more than ever.


Disclaimer: This article provides general information only and is not intended as financial advice. All investments carry risk.The Conversation

Angel Zhong, Professor of Finance, RMIT University and Jason Tian, Senior Lecturer, Swinburne University of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Whooping cough cases are at their highest level in 35 years – so why the surge?

LSO Photo/Getty Images
Archana KoiralaUniversity of Sydney

Australia is battling its biggest rise in whooping cough cases in 35 years.

During 2024 and 2025 Australia recorded 82,513 whooping cough cases – the highest number since monitoring began in 1991.

Also known as pertussis or the “100-day cough”, whooping cough is a potentially fatal respiratory illness which causes severe coughing episodes.

It spreads from one person to another and is particularly deadly among infants.

So why the surge? And how can you protect yourself and your loved ones?

What is whooping cough?

Whooping cough is a respiratory infection caused by the bacteria Bordetella pertussis.

Transmission occurs through close contact with infected people such as via coughing and sneezing.

Early symptoms include runny nose or sore throat. This is called the “catarrhal phase” and can look similar to a common cold.

A persistent cough comes next, and typically lasts between six and ten weeks.

This leads to intense bouts of coughing, with babies and children often making high-pitched “whoop” sounds when they breath in. This is where the term “whooping cough” comes from.

Whooping cough can be very severe in newborn babies and infants. About one in 125 babies with whooping cough aged below six months dies from pneumonia or brain damage.

Household contacts and carers often pass the illness onto infants, with parents the source of infection in more than 50% of cases. Infants can also pick up an infection from siblings and health-care workers.

Complications in older children and adults include interrupted sleep and pneumonia, a lung infection which can require hospitalisation. Patients can even sustain rib fractures from coughing so hard.

Antibiotics, when given early, can stop disease progression.

However after the cough is established, which is when most people realise they are infected, antibiotics have little effect on the disease’s progression.

But, there’s a vaccine for it?

Yes. The whooping cough vaccine is given as a combination vaccine with diphtheria and tetanus.

In Australia, this vaccine is part of routine infant and childhood immunisation schedules. A booster dose is also given to Year 7 students.

Pregnant women are advised to vaccinate every pregnancy to boost the production and transfer of antibodies to their unborn baby. This also helps protect infants who are too young to be immunised.

2025 study from Denmark found vaccination during pregnancy to be 72% effective against laboratory confirmed whooping cough.

Although infants are most vulnerable to whooping cough, it can cause infection across all ages and put a large strain on the health-care system, especially for adults aged over 50.

To protect themselves and limit spread of the disease, adults should get vaccinated every ten years.

Australia’s national vaccine regulator checks the safety of whooping cough vaccines each year. Ongoing monitoring over many years shows these vaccines are safe and continue to protect people of all ages.

But low immunisation rates among children and adolescents remain a concern, with new data showing Australia’s 2024-25 childhood immunisation rate was the lowest in a decade.

Only about one-fifth of adults 50 years and older are up to date with the whooping cough vaccine. This means they have had a booster within the last ten years.

Why are there so many cases right now?

Whooping cough is a challenging disease to control because immunity, acquired through immunisation or natural infection, wanes over time. This gives rise to whooping cough epidemics every two to three years.

Whooping cough is most commonly diagnosed using PCR testing of a throat swab. This usually involves visiting a GP to get the swab sent to a lab, and then waiting for the results. This method has been routinely used since the early 2000s.

In 2024, 57,257 whooping cough cases were detected in Australia. This included a case where a child with an antibiotic-resistant infection required intensive care support.

This represents the highest notification rate since records began in 1991. And it reflects a true increase in the prevalence, as well as awareness and testing, of whooping cough.

The 2024 surge in cases was likely due, at least in part, to COVID public health restrictions which disrupted the usual epidemic cycle.

During this time, many children didn’t get the normal immune “boost” after being vaccinated and exposed to the bacteria. This left them more vulnerable to infection, particularly when authorities lifted social distancing restrictions.

Whooping cough was also widespread in 2025 with 25,256 cases reported that year. All age groups were affected, but notification rates were highest among school-aged and preschool-aged children.

Unfortunately, whooping cough isn’t going away anytime soon. However, timely vaccination across all ages is vital to curb its spread and protect vulnerable populations. The Conversation

Archana Koirala, Paediatrician and Infectious Diseases Specialist; Clinical Researcher, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

RBA raises interest rates as inflation pressures remain high

Stella HuangfuUniversity of Sydney

The Reserve Bank of Australia (RBA) has lifted the cash rate by 25 basis points to 3.85%, adding to pressure on households and businesses. While the move was widely expected by markets and most economists, the Reserve Bank says inflation risks remain too high to be comfortable.

The RBA said inflation “picked up materially” in the second half of 2025. Governor Michele Bullock told a press conference:

Based on the data we have seen and the conditions here and around the world, the board now thinks it will take longer for inflation to return to target and this is not an acceptable outcome.

The rate rise reflects concern that inflation will not return to the RBA’s 2–3% target range until June 2027, according to the bank’s updated forecasts also released today.

Stronger than expected economic growth means capacity pressures are rising and keeping inflation higher than expected. Progress could stall unless interest rates are pushed a little higher.

It was the first rate increase since November 2023, and followed three cuts in 2025 when inflation was cooling.

Policy set for a year ahead

In the lead-up to the meeting, there appeared to be a gap between market expectations and the RBA’s own comments. Markets and many economists focused on the latest inflation data, which showed a renewed uptick, particularly in prices for services. That data strengthened the case for a rate rise at this meeting.

The RBA, however, has repeatedly emphasised it does not set policy based on short-term movements in inflation.

That message has been reflected in recent meeting minutes and reinforced in a January ABC interview with Andrew Hauser, the RBA’s deputy governor. He said interest rate decisions are guided by where inflation is expected to be in about a year’s time – not where it has been over the past quarter or two.

Today’s decision suggests that, on that forward-looking view, the RBA became less comfortable with the inflation outlook. Rather than a temporary overshoot, the path back to the 2-3% inflation target will take longer than previously thought.

What’s driving inflation?

The latest consumer price index (CPI) figures help explain the Reserve Bank’s caution. Trimmed mean inflation – the RBA’s preferred underlying measure – was 3.3% in the year to December, up from 3.2% in the year to November. That puts underlying inflation clearly above the target range.



More importantly, recent inflation pressures have been led by services prices. Costs related to rents, insurance, health and education have continued to rise, reflecting domestic pressures such as wages and business operating costs.

In its statement, the RBA pointed to stronger demand and ongoing capacity constraints as key concerns:

Private demand is growing more quickly than expected, capacity pressures are greater than previously assessed and labour market conditions are a little tight.

Services inflation tends to fall slowly. Unlike petrol or food prices, it does not usually reverse quickly once it picks up. For the RBA, this persistence increases the risk inflation could remain above target for longer than hoped.

Why the RBA moved now

Faced with these risks, the bank appears to have concluded that waiting would have been the bigger gamble. If inflation stayed above target for too long, or if expectations began to drift higher, the RBA could later be forced into sharper and more disruptive rate rises.

By lifting the cash rate to 3.85% now, the Reserve Bank is trying to stay ahead of the problem. A modest move today may reduce the chance of more aggressive action later.

Australia is out of step

This decision also puts Australia out of step with several other major economies.

In the United States, the Federal Reserve cut interest rates three times in 2025 and is signalling further cuts are likely this year. The European Central Bank has moved even faster, cutting rates eight times between June 2024 and June 2025 to boost growth.

By contrast, Australia’s inflation challenge appears more domestically driven, particularly through persistent services inflation. That helps explain why it is moving in the opposite direction to many of its global peers.

Credibility and what comes next

The quick turnaround after the last rate cut in August may raise questions about the RBA’s earlier judgement. But inflation risks remain tilted to the upside.

The board judged that inflation is likely to remain above target for some time and it was appropriate to increase the cash rate target.

For households and businesses, the message is clear. Borrowing costs and mortgage repayments are rising again.

What happens next will depend largely on whether services inflation begins to cool and whether wage growth shows clearer signs of moderation.

If inflation resumes a steady decline towards the target band, this increase could be a one-off rise. If not, the RBA has signalled it is prepared to do more.

For now, the message from the Reserve Bank is simple: inflation is lower than it was, but still too high for comfort – and interest rates are likely to stay higher for longer until that changes.The Conversation

Stella Huangfu, Associate Professor, School of Economics, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

ASIC flags $40 million in refunds after review of risky financial products

Adrian LeeDeakin University

Australia’s corporate regulator has secured refunds of A$40 million to more than 38,000 investors in risky financial products, following a review of the industry.

The Australian Securities and Investments Commission (ASIC) raised concerns that marketing of high-risk products known as “contracts for difference” or CFDs, failed to clearly explain the risks involved.

This is just ASIC’s latest intervention in more than 15 years of ongoing concern with the potential harm of CFDs to retail investors.

Fine-tuning the marketing of these complex financial products to a suitable audience remains an unfinished task for the regulator.

What are CFDs?

In its report, ASIC said thousands of Australians lose money trading CFDs every year. In 2023-34, over 133,000 people, or 68% of retail clients, lost more than $458 million.

Contracts for difference are a type of financial instrument known as derivatives because they follow the price of an underlying asset, such as stocks, the Australian dollar, and other financial products.

They are traded “over-the-counter” (meaning not on a public exchange) on platforms run by CFD providers.

Investors can profit from both upward or downward movements in financial assets with CFDs. Unlike buying shares, investors need only pay a fraction of the price (the margin) up front to enter into a CFD to track a financial product, with the hope of making a profit.

CFDs are leveraged products, which means an investor is borrowing money to speculate on the price of an asset. A small price change in the underlying stock or commodity can have an amplified effect by increasing the gain – or the loss – on the CFD.

For example, this can be as little as paying $1 upfront to gain the same trading power as $100.

Let’s say you buy a CFD on one Apple share. As you only need to pay a fifth of the Apple stock for the CFD, you can buy five Apple CFDs for the price of one Apple share. So if the price of Apple rises by $1, you could make $5. But if it falls by $1, you could lose $5 dollars.

CFDs are therefore popular with investors as they can trade many financial instruments (betting on rises or falls) and magnify their trading power.

The downside is that trading on margin also amplifies losses if the market goes against the bet that a price will rise or fall. This has led to financial distress and cases of attempted self-harm.

ASIC has been particularly concerned about issuers offering “margin discounts” to clients on particular trades, to reduce the amount or “margin” that the investor pays up front.

This contravenes ASIC’s 2021 product intervention order. ASIC published a further warning to CFD issuers in 2024 to stop this practice.

The complexity and risk of CFDs has meant they are effectively banned in the United States. In Singapore, prospective traders need to pass a customer knowledge assessment before they are allowed to trade CFDs.

Who are the products being marketed to?

CFDs are not for the faint of heart and would only suit investors who are very knowledgeable and have a large appetite for risk. Despite this, retail investors (regular people) are the dominant market targeted by CFDs issuers in their marketing and advertising.

In ASIC’s recent report, the regulator found that CFD issuer websites misled consumers.

Some examples were promoting the underlying instruments, such as shares or commodities, rather than actual CFDs, and overstating the benefits of trading CFDs and understating the risks.

ASIC has forced 46 issuers to rewrite their websites by removing misleading content and making them clearly state that they are offering CFDs, among other changes. One issuer amended 1,000 web pages.

ASIC chair Joe Longo last week floated the idea of banning advertising for high-risk financial products, which would also include CFDs.

The underlying concern is that unsophisticated investors are being attracted to complex financial products that carry great risk of financial loss.

Indeed, ASIC’s report found that only 32% of retail clients made money from CFDs after fees. Of those that traded the most per month (over 50 trades), only 19% were profitable after fees.

Fears vulnerable investors still slipping through the cracks

The key difference is between retail and wholesale clients.

Wholesale clients are generally institutions or sophisticated investors, highly experienced and more likely to trade complex derivatives and make a profit. Wholesale clients are defined in law based on certain tests.

Wholesale clients also lose some of the consumer protections that apply to retail investors, such as receiving product disclosure statements and having access to dispute resolution.

Yet, ASIC found that even wholesale clients lost money, with only 30% making profits.

This raises concerns for ASIC of whether some retail clients were misclassified as wholesale clients by the CFD issuers.

So, it is not the laws that need changing, which clearly define sophisticated investors. What is needed is more scrutiny of how issuers misclassify potentially vulnerable investors.

The statistics are concerning as this means the large majority of investors are losing money trading CFDs, driven largely by paying fees. On the flip side, this means CFD issuers are profiting from some of these losses as they earn the fees.

This raises questions of whether CFD issuers are attracting suitable clientele through advertising, as the losses by investors seem excessive. This suggests that advertising should carry warning labels, similar to advertising for other risky activities, such as sports betting.

Walking a fine line

CFDs have existed for over two decades, with a market that is predominantly comprised of retail investors.

ASIC has managed the fine balance of permitting their access, while regulating issuers on their marketing and operations without banning them outright. Potential investors would be wise to do their own homework to carefully assess the costs and risks of CFDs before wading into the market.The Conversation

Adrian Lee, Associate Professor in Property and Real Estate, Deakin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Our study shows younger siblings spend more time on screens than big sisters and brothers

Atlantic Ambience/ Pexels
Danusha JayawardanaMonash UniversityGawain HeckleyLund University, and Nicole BlackMonash University

Where kids are born in a family can be important. But it is not just about who gets more grown-up privileges or parental pressure.

Research tells us firstborn children, on average, tend to do better on a range of outcomes. This includes doing better at school and being more likely to be top managers when compared to those born later.

In our new study, we looked at what impact birth order might have on how children spend their time. Both on their own and with their parents.

This revealed differences in terms of screen use and time spent enriching their intellectual development.

Our research

In our study, we used survey data from around 5,500 Australian children aged two to 15. The data comes from the Longitudinal Study of Australian Children, a nationally representative survey.

This included detailed 24-hour diaries, which recorded how children spent their time from waking up to going to sleep. They specified if activities were done with parents or independently.

We grouped activities into “sleep”, “school time”, “enrichment activities”, “screen time” and “physical activities”.

Enrichment activities are outside of school activities that help intellectual development. For example, reading, homework, playing board games or learning a musical instrument.

We then compared the diaries of firstborn children to later-born children from different families born in the same year, living in the same neighbourhoods, with similar socioeconomic backgrounds. All families had two or three children.

There is no similar data (such as time use records over years) available on siblings within the same family to capture and compare what siblings were doing at the same age.

Other studies looking at different outcomes (such as academic achievement) have shown birth order comparisons within a family are extremely similar to birth order comparisons across different families, once you adjust for family size, as we have done in our study.

So, it is likely our results would be similar to actual sibling comparisons within a family.

Younger kids get more screens

When compared to firstborn children, second- and thirdborn children spend an extra nine and 14 minutes, respectively, per day having screen time.

While this may sound modest, it represents a 7–10% increase compared to the average daily screen time of firstborns. Over the course of a week it is between about one and 1.5 hours.

This extra screen time also comes at the cost of other activities. In particular, later-born children spent 11 to 18 minutes less per day on enrichment activities, an 11–20% reduction compared to older siblings in the study.

We found no consistent differences between older and younger siblings when it came to time spent on other activities, such as school, physical activity or sleep.

Looking across age groups, the effects are generally greater for 10–14-year-old children. This suggests early adolescence is a period where particular attention is needed.

To check whether these patterns extend beyond Australia, we repeated the analysis using time-use diaries from a sample of children in the United States. The results were similar.

Why is this happening?

One common explanation for differences between first and subsequent children is parental time. As families grow, parents have less time and attention to foster subsequent children’s development.

However, this may not be the whole story. Our study showed later-born children did spend less time on enrichment activities with their parents. But about half of the difference comes from later-born children spending less time on enrichment activities on their own.

Screen time shows a similar pattern. The increase among later-born children is largely explained by activities they do alone, rather than with parents or siblings.

So this also reflects differences in children’s own choices or opportunities, not just direct parental involvement. For example, a younger sibling may have more freedom to choose to play video games rather than do their homework.

Of course parenting may still play an important role here. Our study shows later-born children face fewer rules around screen use, such as limits on programs or time, and are less likely to feel their parents expect them to follow rules. This may in part reflect parents’ desire for fairness in allowing similar use of screens for siblings at any given time, rather than at specific ages.

What does this mean?

The differences we find may seem small on any given day.

But they can add up over time. As our 2024 study showed, spending more time on screens and less time on reading, homework or other learning activities can lead to gaps in academic skill development over childhood, as measured by lower NAPLAN test scores.

The increase in solo screen time for later-born children is particularly concerning, because it may expose children to inappropriate content online.

What can we do?

First, recognising later-born children on average spend more time on screens and less time on enrichment activities than firstborns can be helpful for informing parenting strategies.

Second, it shows spending quality time with later-born children, actively encouraging enrichment activities, and keeping consistent rules around screen time all matter.

Finally, this suggests broader policies, such as the social media limits for under 16s, could help equalise opportunities for later-born children to learn and grow.The Conversation

Danusha Jayawardana, Research Fellow in Health Economics, Monash UniversityGawain Heckley, Researcher in Health Economics, Lund University, and Nicole Black, Associate Professor of Health Economics, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

New data show where the parties got their money from in the lead-up to the 2025 election

The ConversationCC BY-SA
Kate GriffithsGrattan Institute and Matthew BowesGrattan Institute

Australia’s political parties set new records in funds raised and spent in the lead-up to the 2025 federal election. Now, nine months later, Australians finally get a look at who funded the parties’ election campaigns.

Data released today reveal that big money matters in Australian elections, and political donations remain highly concentrated among a small number of powerful individuals and interest groups.

The big spenders

Money matters in Australian elections because it helps spread political messages far and wide. The Coalition substantially outspent Labor in the year leading up to the 2025 election, declaring $212 million in expenditure compared with Labor’s $160 million. In fact, the two major parties together spent three quarters of a total $489 million in 2024–25. These figures include electoral communication, as well as party operating expenses and salaries, but there is no breakdown.

Clive Palmer’s Trumpet of Patriots party came in third, declaring $53 million in expenditure, well below the $123 million and $89 million his United Australia Party spent in the 2022 and 2019 election campaigns, respectively. The Greens declared $40 million and One Nation just $3 million in expenditure in 2024–25.

Australia’s political parties collectively exceeded their 2022 election budgets in 2025, raising $490 million, compared with $402 million in the lead-up to the 2022 election, and coming very close to the half-a-billion mark for the first time.

The Coalition has long led the fundraising “arms race” between the major parties, with Labor taking a substantive lead only once on record – in the lead-up to the 2007 election that saw Kevin Rudd’s Labor Party defeat John Howard’s Coalition government.

The big donors

So who’s stumping up these whopping sums? A few big donors dominate the picture.

Clive Palmer’s Mineralogy – which donated almost exclusively to the Trumpet of Patriots – was by far the largest donor in the 2024–25 financial year. While Palmer’s $54.3 million in donations this electoral cycle is lower than his record-breaking intervention in 2022, it still shows the substantial sway a single donor can have in an election year.

Climate 200 was the second-largest donor over the period, with the organisation making $6.6 million in donations to a range of independent candidates and campaign groups. Donors to Climate 200 – including Scott Farquhar, William Taylor Nominees, and Mike Cannon-Brookes – were among those stumping up the largest individual donations.

One new player this cycle was Coal Australia, a lobby group founded in 2024 to represent coal mining interests. The group made more than $4 million in donations to electoral campaign groups such as Australians for Prosperity, and Jobs for Mining Communities.

The single biggest donation to the Coalition came from philanthropist Pam Wall, who gave $5.2 million to the Liberal Party of South Australia in 2024–25, in memory of her late husband, Ian Wall. Other major donors to the Coalition included the Cormack Foundation (an investment arm for the Liberal Party), Oryxium Investments (linked to the Lowy family), and DoorDash Australia.

Labor’s single biggest donor was Labor Holdings (an investment arm of the party), which donated $4 million, followed by the Mining and Energy Union ($3.3 million). SA Progressive Business, a fundraising arm of the Labor Party, donated $1.4 million.

Anthony Pratt’s paper and packaging company Pratt Holdings made big donations to both Labor and the Coalition, as it has done in previous years, with Labor benefiting to the tune of $2 million, and the Coalition $1 million.

What about the rest of the money?

There’s a lot of hidden money in Australian politics. Declared donations made up only a quarter of political parties’ total income in 2024–25. Public funding made up another quarter, and “other receipts” a further 20%. That leaves about 30% ($144 million) in undisclosed private funds.

The Coalition’s funding is a little more murky: 36% of Coalition income in 2024–25 was undisclosed, compared with 23% for Labor. Only donations bigger than $16,900 need to be declared under the current rules, so substantial donations remain hidden.

Reform is coming, but there’s still more to do

Fortunately, the rules are changing soon to provide much more transparency. From July 1 this year, the donations disclosure threshold will be lowered to $5,000, and donations data will be released much more quickly. Donations will be required to be disclosed within seven days during an election period, and at other times, within 21 days following the month the gift was received.

That means Australians will finally know who’s donating while policy issues – and elections – are still “live”.

The new rules also introduce caps on donations and electoral expenditure, helping to reduce the influence of money in politics. But the new rules unfairly advantage major parties over independents and new entrants.

The new total cap of $90 million for electoral expenditure by a political party is too high, keeping too much money in politics. And the per-seat spending cap of $800,000 is too low, advantaging incumbents over new entrants. There is also a loophole in the design of the donations cap that advantages major parties by allowing the cap to apply separately to each branch of a party.

The new legislation should be reviewed and amended to close the loopholes before the next federal election.The Conversation

Kate Griffiths, Democracy Deputy Program Director, Grattan Institute and Matthew Bowes, Senior Associate, Economic Prosperity and Democracy, Grattan Institute

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

New legislation to crackdown on ‘factories of hate’

February 3, 2026
The NSW Government has announced it will today introduce legislation into Parliament to strengthen councils’ enforcement powers to shut down unlawful places of worship.

The legislation is a crackdown on ‘factories of hate’ which are unlawfully promoting hate, intimidation and dividing our community.

It will seek to bolster existing powers by increasing fines for illegal places of public worship and give councils the power to cut off their water and power if they breach planning laws and ignore orders to cease.

The Local Government and Other Legislation Amendment (Places of Public Worship) Bill 2026 will support the implementation of measures announced last month in response to the antisemitic terror attack in Bondi on 14 December by amending the Local Government Act 1993 and Environmental Planning and Assessment Regulation 2021.

The proposed legislation will:
  • Allow councils to issue development control orders to stop activities on premises that breach planning laws or pose a risk to public health and safety.
  • Double existing penalty notice fines from $3,000 to $6,000 for individuals and from $6,000 to $12,000 for corporations.
  • Enable councils to apply to the Land and Environment Court for orders directing utility providers of water, electricity and gas to cut off services to hate preaching venues if they fail to comply with an order.
  • Increase the maximum existing failure to comply penalties from $11,000 to $110,000 for individuals and from $22,000 to $220,000 for corporations.
The changes will also be complemented by amendments to the Planning System SEPP that introduce a new requirement for local councils to consult with NSW Police on community safety matters before approving a development application for a new place of public worship, including approving changes to the use of an existing place of public worship.

These measures build on previous legislation to combat hate including new offences for inciting racial hatred and displaying Nazi symbols at Jewish places and additional protections for people seeking to attend their place of worship.

Premier of New South Wales Chris Minns said:

“These reforms give councils another practical tool to stop unlawful premises being used to spread hate and intimidation.

“If a place of worship is operating outside the law and dividing the community, councils will now have real power to shut it down.”

Minister for Planning and Public Spaces Paul Scully said:

“There’s no place for factories of hate in NSW. These changes are a practical step the Minns Labor Government are taking to stop hate preachers in their tracks.

“By strengthening enforcement powers and giving NSW Police visibility of development applications for places of public worship we are taking additional steps to keep our communities safe.”

Minister for Local Government Ron Hoenig said:

“All sectors of the NSW government are working together to implement and enforce these changes which will safeguard and protect our communities.

“Freedom of religion is a fundamental right in NSW but that freedom does not extend to operating unlawfully or putting community safety at risk and this legislation will make sure councils have strong powers to shut down unlawful places of public worship manifesting hate.”

Stronger conduct rules for NSW schools, with explicit ban on hate speech: NSW Government

February 3, 2026
All NSW school staff, including principals and school leaders, will be subject to strengthened conduct requirements that explicitly prohibit hate speech, under reforms announced today by the Minns Labor Government.

The government stated the changes 'close a clear gap in existing guidance, which does not adequately address the incitement of hate speech, and make unequivocally clear that engaging in hate speech will not be tolerated by any NSW school'.

The changes will come into effect immediately and will apply across more than 3,000 government, independent and Catholic schools and will tighten the rules governing the conduct of all school staff, including school leaders.

Hate speech will be explicitly prohibited in the Codes of Conduct set out by all school sectors and will now apply to all members of school staff.

These changes to the rules follow the new hate speech legislation passed by both the state and Commonwealth governments and build on the Minns Government’s recent legislation to strengthen laws against hate speech and hate crimes, making clear that there is no place for extremism or vilification in our classrooms or our state.

A review into the process to assess a fit and proper person - the legal test required for school leadership - is currently underway to investigate if it is fit for purpose and whether the current standards meet community expectations.

Under the new arrangements, expectations around acceptable conduct will be made clearer in the school registration manuals.

NESA is updating its rules in early Term 1, 2026, which will require all schools to prohibit hate speech in their Codes of Conduct for all people employed at the school.

Premier of New South Wales Chris Minns said:

“Until now, the rules haven’t been clear enough. Schools should be places where young people feel safe, respected and supported, not exposed to hate or extremism.

“These changes make it absolutely clear that hate speech has no place in any NSW classroom, from any staff member, in any school and it gives the regulator clear guidelines to act.”

Deputy Premier and Minister for Education and Early Learning Prue Car said:

“The vast majority of principals and teachers in NSW schools do an incredible job. They are committed to our students and their education.

“These common sense changes are about maintaining this high standard and giving parents peace of mind.

“When parents send their children to school in NSW, they can know they’re learning in a safe and supportive environment.”

NSW is ditching good character references in sentencing. Will the rest of the country follow?

Vicki LowikCQUniversity Australia and Amanda-Jane GeorgeBond University

New South Wales is set to become the first jurisdiction in the country to end the use of good character references in the sentencing of convicted criminals.

The government will introduce a bill this week to amend the state’s sentencing laws. The amendment will stop people submitting references of their “good character” to lobby for more lenient sentences.

References attesting to the convicted criminal’s prospects for rehabilitation and their likelihood of reoffending will still be permitted.

The move acknowledges the potential re-traumatisation faced by victims when unsubstantiated character references from family and friends are submitted for consideration during sentencing hearings. Victims have stated the process can make them think the courts don’t care about or take seriously the harm they have experienced.

It’s a decision that aligns with expert evidence, so might other states follow suit?

What is a good character reference, exactly?

Good character references are letters presented to a court during the process of sentencing someone convicted of a crime. They are often provided by friends and family members, though references may be sought from employers, priests and other respected community members.

The references usually describe how the person is a valuable family or community member, has a good work record and no criminal history.

Character evidence can help a judge more fully understand the person they are sentencing and decide if they can be rehabilitated. Demonstrated prior good character enables the judge to ensure the appropriateness and fairness of the sentence.

But contemplating the subjective opinions of non-professionals regarding the possibility of rehabilitation can be problematic.

Such references have promoted people being sentenced for sexual assault and rape as having “high moral values”, being a “kind-hearted, loving father” or having a “good work ethic”.

Since 2009, NSW hasn’t allowed good character references for child sexual offenders who used their position of influence to gain access to victims.

But two sexual abuse victims, Harrison James and Jarad Grice, have led a campaign for more substantial change. Called Your Reference Ain’t Relevant, the campaign protested against convicted child sex offenders being able to produce glowing character references to reduce their sentence.

What does the evidence say?

The Australian Law Reform Commission has been reviewing justice responses to sexual violence. In its 2025 final report, the commission said it received submissions describing the provision of good character references for convicted sexual violence offenders as a “problematic” practice.

The commission noted the NSW Sentencing Council was reviewing the use of character evidence. It said the outcome of the NSW process would inform any suggestions for future reforms at a national level.

The New South Wales Sentencing Council’s report was released on February 1. It recommended legislation to prevent the court from using evidence that goes solely to a finding of good character. This legislation, however, may permit the court to consider other relevant evidence in sentencing.

The report states “there is no settled definition of what good character is, or what it reflects”. The council said the concept “has been criticised as being vague and incoherent […] lacking a settled definition”.

The council’s recommendations go beyond child sexual offences. They apply to all convicted offenders.

And for NSW at least, they would overrule a 2001 High Court decision allowing character to be considered in providing “some leniency” in sentencing.

Will other states do the same?

A report by the Queensland Sentencing Advisory Commission into the sentencing of sexual assault and rape recommended that some types of good character evidence be limited. It said good character evidence should only be used to assist the court in deciding on the rehabilitation or the potential recidivism of the convicted criminal.

The report recommended that courts have the option, depending on the nature or seriousness of an offence, to disregard character references when determining sentencing.

In September 2025, Queensland parliament passed legislation addressing the recommendations. The references can now only be considered to inform a judge’s assessment of the likelihood of rehabilitation or recidivism.

But as some frontline sexual assault services submitted in consultations this left open ways to circumvent the rule. Friends and family could provide references mentioning the prospects of rehabilitation.

So while there’s some movement on the issue in Queensland, if the NSW recommendations are to lead the way in nationwide reform, the task will not be easy.

Significant differences exist between the states. This is because apart from Commonwealth offences, criminal law remains primarily a state matter. This has produced divergent offence labels, maximum penalties and sentencing regimes.

Even on the specific issue of character evidence in child sexual offence proceedings, there are substantial differences in laws and contexts across the country.

These contrasts in approach to legislating the use of good character references in sentencing will, as observed by the Law Council of Australia, likely result in similar cases attracting different outcomes in different states.

But sometimes it just takes one bold attempt at reform to inspire action in others. As advocates have succeeded in NSW, it’s likely others will attempt similar change. State and territory governments have been put on notice.The Conversation

Vicki Lowik, Adjunct Research Fellow, School of Nursing, Midwifery and Social Sciences, CQUniversity Australia and Amanda-Jane George, Associate professor, Bond University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

New ASIC Chair

February 3, 2026
ASIC Chair Joe Longo has welcomed the appointment of Sarah Court as the agency’s incoming Chair.

Mr Longo said Ms Court would bring deep regulatory expertise to the role from her career of public service.

‘Sarah is an exceptional regulator with a strong record in enforcement that demonstrates her integrity and impact,’ Mr Longo said.

‘Her work as ASIC’s Deputy Chair has been instrumental to the success of the agency’s structural transformation that has strengthened our enforcement posture and work, leading to better outcomes for consumers and a fairer financial system.

‘ASIC will be in very capable hands under her leadership.

‘Over the coming months, I will support Sarah, the Commission and all our staff to ensure a smooth and orderly transition.’

Sarah Court commences as ASIC Chair on 1 June 2026.

ASIC proposes updates to legislative instruments about financial reporting

ASIC is seeking feedback on its proposals to remake three legislative instruments relating to financial reporting relief and allow another instrument to sunset.

The three legislative instruments, which are due to sunset on 1 April 2026, are:
  • ASIC Corporations (Rounding in Financial/Directors' Reports) Instrument 2016/191
  • ASIC Corporations (Electronic Lodgment of Financial and Sustainability Reports) Instrument 2016/181, and
  • ASIC Corporations (Disregarding Technical Relief) Instrument 2016/73.
We have determined these instruments are operating effectively and continue to form a necessary and useful part of the legislative framework. The effect of these instruments will remain unchanged when remade.

As part of this work, we are proposing to withdraw Regulatory Guide 28 Relief from dual lodgement of financial reports (RG 28), which provides redundant guidance about dual lodgement relief.

ASIC is also seeking feedback on a proposal to allow ASIC Corporations (Offer Information Statements) Instrument 2016/76 to sunset on 1 April 2026. Offer information statements (OIS) are rarely used, and it is unlikely that a financial report in an OIS would cover a period other than 12 months.

The four instruments impacted are part of the draft proposed instrument consolidation at Attachment B to Report 813 Regulatory simplification (REP 813). We are considering feedback on this and will provide an update later in 2026.

Providing feedback
Submissions should be sent to rri.consultation@asic.gov.au by 5pm AEDT on 27 February 2026.


Background
Under the Legislation Act 2003, all legislative instruments automatically sunset after 10 years, unless ASIC takes action to preserve them.

ASIC Instrument 2016/191 allows entities to round amounts presented in financial reports and directors’ reports to the nearest thousand dollars.

ASIC Instrument 2016/181 allows entities listed on the securities exchanges operated by ASX Limited, National Stock Exchange of Australia Limited and Sydney Stock Exchange Limited to lodge financial reports, sustainability reports and directors’ reports electronically with the market operator without having to lodge the reports with ASIC.

ASIC Instrument 2016/76 enables the period for the financial report included in an offer information statement to be longer or shorter than 12 months by up to seven days.

ASIC Instrument 2016/73 allows entities to prepare a disclosure document or product disclosure statement for ‘continuously quoted securities’ under sections 713 and 1013FA of the Corporations Act 2001 (Corporations Act) and to lodge ‘cleansing notices’ under sections 708A and 1012DA of the Corporations Act (even when the entity, its director or auditor are covered by ASIC instruments). The coverage of these instruments would disqualify the securities from being ‘continuously quoted securities’.

RG 28 sets out dual lodgement arrangements available under the redundant ASIC Class Order [CO 98/104].

ASIC is Australia’s corporate, markets and financial services regulator.

ASIC proposes updates to legislative instruments about financial reporting: feedback open until Feb. 28

ASIC is seeking feedback on its proposals to remake three legislative instruments relating to financial reporting relief and allow another instrument to sunset.

The three legislative instruments, which are due to sunset on 1 April 2026, are:
  • ASIC Corporations (Rounding in Financial/Directors' Reports) Instrument 2016/191
  • ASIC Corporations (Electronic Lodgment of Financial and Sustainability Reports) Instrument 2016/181, and
  • ASIC Corporations (Disregarding Technical Relief) Instrument 2016/73.
We have determined these instruments are operating effectively and continue to form a necessary and useful part of the legislative framework. The effect of these instruments will remain unchanged when remade.

As part of this work, we are proposing to withdraw Regulatory Guide 28 Relief from dual lodgement of financial reports (RG 28), which provides redundant guidance about dual lodgement relief.

ASIC is also seeking feedback on a proposal to allow ASIC Corporations (Offer Information Statements) Instrument 2016/76 to sunset on 1 April 2026. Offer information statements (OIS) are rarely used, and it is unlikely that a financial report in an OIS would cover a period other than 12 months.

The four instruments impacted are part of the draft proposed instrument consolidation at Attachment B to Report 813 Regulatory simplification (REP 813). We are considering feedback on this and will provide an update later in 2026.

Providing feedback
Submissions should be sent to rri.consultation@asic.gov.au by 5pm AEDT on 27 February 2026.

Puzzling slow radio pulses are coming from space. A new study could finally explain them

Artists impression of the white dwarf in GPM J1839-10 interacting with its companion star, producing a powerful radio beam. Danielle Futselaar
Csanád HorváthCurtin University and Natasha Hurley-WalkerCurtin University

Cosmic radio pulses repeating every few minutes or hours, known as long-period transients, have puzzled astronomers since their discovery in 2022. Our new study, published in Nature Astronomy today, might finally add some clarity.

Radio astronomers are very familiar with pulsars, a type of rapidly rotating neutron star. To us watching the skies from Earth, these objects appear to pulse because powerful radio beams from their poles sweep our telescopes – much like a cosmic lighthouse.

The slowest pulsars rotate in just a few seconds – this is known as their period. But in recent years, long-period transients have been discovered as well. These have periods from 18 minutes to more than six hours.

From everything we know about neutron stars, they shouldn’t be able to produce radio waves while spinning this slowly. So, is there something wrong with physics?

Well, neutron stars aren’t the only compact stellar remnant on the block, so maybe they’re not the stars of this story after all. Our new paper presents evidence that the longest-lived long-period transient, GPM J1839-10, is actually a white dwarf star. It’s producing powerful radio beams with the help of a stellar companion, implying others may be doing the same.

Pulsars emit powerful beams of radio waves from their poles, which sweep across our line of sight like a lighthouse. Joeri van Leeuwen

Enter white dwarf pulsars

Like neutron stars, white dwarfs are the remnants of dead stars. They’re about the size of Earth, but with an entire Sun’s-worth of mass packed in.

No isolated white dwarf has been observed to emit radio pulses. But they have the necessary ingredients to do so when paired with an M-type dwarf (a regular star about half the Sun’s mass) in a close two-star system known as a binary.

In fact, we know such rapidly spinning “white dwarf pulsars” exist because we’ve observed them – the first was confirmed in 2016.

Which raises the question: could long-period transients be the slower cousins of white dwarf pulsars?

More than ten long-period transients have been discovered to date, but they’re so far away and embedded so deep in our galaxy, it’s been difficult to tell what they are. Only in 2025 were two long-period transients conclusively identified as white dwarf–M-dwarf binaries. This was quite unexpected.

However, it left astronomers with more questions.

Even if some long-period transients are white dwarf–M-dwarf binaries, do they radiate in the same way as the faster white dwarf pulsars? And are the long-period transients only visible at radio wavelengths doomed to be a mystery forever?

What we needed is a model that works for both, and a long-period transient with enough high-quality data to test it on.

A uniquely long-lived example

In 2023 we discovered GPM J1839-10, a long-period transient with a 21-minute period. It was the second-ever such discovery, but unlike its predecessor or those found since, it is uniquely long-lived. Pulses were found in archival data going back as far as 1988, but only some of the times that they should have been detected.

As it’s 15,000 light-years away, we can only see it in radio waves. So we dug deeper into this seemingly random, intermittent signal to learn more.

We watched GPM J1839-10 in a series dubbed “round-the-world” observations. These used three telescopes, each passing the source to the next as Earth rotated: the Australian SKA Pathfinder or ASKAP, the MeerKAT radio telescope in South Africa, and the Karl G. Jansky Very Large Array in the United States.

Radio data recorded in the ‘round-the-world’ observations. Five consecutive orbits are stacked to align the heart-beat pattern. The colour represents the telescope used. Author provided

The intermittent signal turned out to not be random at all. The pulses arrive in groups of four or five, and the groups come in pairs separated by two hours. The entire pattern repeats every nine hours.

Such a stable pattern strongly implies the signal is coming from a binary system of two bodies orbiting each other every nine hours. And knowing the period also helps us work out their masses, which all adds up to being a white dwarf–M-dwarf binary.

Checking back, not only were the archival detections consistent with the same pattern, but we were able to use the combined data to refine the orbital period to a precision of just 0.2 seconds.

A heartbeat pattern

Radio data alone tells us GPM J1839-10 is definitely a binary system. What’s more, the peculiar heartbeat of its pulses gives clues to its nature in a way that’s only possible from looking at radio signals.

Inspired by a previous study on a white dwarf pulsar, we modelled GPM J1839-10 as a white dwarf generating a radio beam as its magnetic pole sweeps through its companion’s stellar wind. The varying alignment of the binary bodies with our line-of-sight throughout the orbit accurately predicts the heartbeat pattern.

We can even reconstruct the geometry of the system, such as how far apart the stars must be, and how massive they are.

All told, GPM J1839-10 has the potential to be the missing link between long-period transients and white dwarf pulsars.

Animation of the model. The white and red spheres are the white dwarf and M-dwarf. The arrow represents the white dwarf’s rotating magnetic moment. The yellow cone is the radio beam whose activity depends on the alignment of the white dwarf’s magnetic moment with the M-dwarf. Below is the radio flux density detected on Earth. Author provided

Armed with our model, other astronomers have already been able to detect variability at our measured periods in high-precision optical data, despite not being able to distinguish the binary pair.

Research is ongoing on exactly how the emission physics works, and how the broader range of long-period transient properties fit together. However, this is a crucial step towards understanding.The Conversation

Csanád Horváth, PhD Candidate, Radio Astronomy, Curtin University and Natasha Hurley-Walker, Radio Astronomer, Curtin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why regularly taking laxatives over the long term can be a bad idea

Photo by Anna Shvets/Pexels
Vincent HoWestern Sydney University

If you’ve ever been constipated you may have tried laxatives. They’re easy to get without a prescription and often help get things moving.

Certainly a lot of people use laxatives and some older people are very reliant on them to help with bowel function.

But you might have heard it’s not a good idea to take them over the long term. Even though serious complications from chronic laxative use are rare, they do happen. That’s why, whenever possible, long-term laxative use should be guided and monitored by a doctor.

Types of laxatives

There are five main types of laxatives (all are oral):

  1. bulk-forming laxatives (also known as fibre laxatives), which absorb water to form a soft, bulky stool and prompt normal contraction of bowel muscles. Common brands include Metamucil and Benefiber

  2. osmotic laxatives, which draw water into the colon to allow easier passage of stool. Common brands include Osmolax, Actilax and Movicol

  3. stool softeners such as docusate (brand name Coloxyl), which acts like a detergent and allows fat and water to mix in with hard stool – this makes it softer and easier to pass

  4. stimulant laxatives, which trigger rhythmic contractions of the bowel muscle. Common brands include Dulcolax, Bisalax and Senna

  5. lubricant laxatives, which coat the bowel and soften the stool. A common brand is Parachoc.

Starting a laxative

Before starting a laxative you should try dietary and lifestyle changes such as:

  • eating more foods with fibre in them, such as kiwifruit, corn, oats and brown rice
  • drinking more water
  • doing more exercise.

But if constipation persists, you might think about a laxative. Consider starting with gentler options, such as the bulk-forming laxatives or stool softeners, and implement those dietary and lifestyle changes listed above.

It’s a good idea to see your local doctor when starting a laxative; constipation may be a sign of something more concerning, especially if there are other symptoms such as rectal bleeding.

Your doctor can also advise whether laxatives might interact with any other medications you take.

Do laxatives cause a ‘lazy colon’?

Probably not. So where does this idea come from?

case report published in the 1960s described bowel changes in a patient who had been taking stimulant laxatives for more than 40 years.

When the colon was examined, doctors noticed a reduced number of key cells in the colon. This sparked concern about whether long-term use of stimulant laxatives could result in damage to the gut, culminating in a “lazy colon” (also known as a cathartic colon). This is when the colon becomes an inert tube with no real muscle function to push along stool.

However, a later review of more than 70 publications describing 240 cases of stimulant laxative abuse found no cases of cathartic colon reported. Researchers concluded the prior cathartic colon cases might have been linked to a laxative called podophyllin that is now no longer recommended.

review of 43 publications on the safety of stimulant laxatives discovered many of the studies were of poor quality, with small sample size. Confounding factors, such as medications and age, were often not being taken into account.

It found no good evidence chronic use of stimulant laxatives damages the gut.

That said, there are other good reasons not to take laxatives regularly and over the long term unless advised by a doctor who is monitoring your progress.

Gut symptoms and electrolytes

Laxative abuse is when someone takes laxatives to lose weight through frequent and repeated use of laxatives.

The most common symptom of laxative abuse is diarrhoea, which can mean abdominal cramps, nausea, vomiting and weight loss.

But laxative abuse can also disrupt the body’s electrolytes.

The main electrolyte in poo is potassium. As the body loses more and more potassium through diarrhoea, you can end up with lower blood potassium levels.

This can lead to:

  • generalised muscle weakness
  • heart complications
  • changes in heart rhythm
  • in extreme cases, stopping your heart beat, which can lead to death.

A 2020 systematic review of case reports found that laxative abuse can cause mild to severe cases of cardiac complications.

Laxative abuse can also lower other electrolytes, such as calcium and magnesium, leading to painful muscle contractions. Occasionally the kidney can be severely affected by chronic laxative abuse.

If you take just the recommended dose of laxatives, though, the risk of serious electrolyte complications is extremely low.

Depression, dementia and mental health

Two UK studies that examined a data set of approximately half a million participants found regular laxative use was associated with a higher risk of developing depression and dementia.

One theory is chronic laxative abuse could alter what’s known as the microbiome-gut-brain-axis (the way microbiota and the brain communicate) and lead to a higher risk of conditions such as depression and dementia.

Laxative abuse is commonly associated with eating disorders, so it’s important anyone found to be abusing laxatives also undergo a comprehensive mental health assessment. A plan might be needed to address the broader problem.

Safe when taken properly

Laxatives are obtained easily without a prescription and are very widely used in the community. They are certainly helpful for treating chronic constipation.

However, they can cause side effects such as diarrhoea and electrolyte imbalances. Long-term use and overuse can lead to problems.

It’s always a good idea to consult your doctor before starting laxatives, especially if you have other medical issues or are taking other medications.The Conversation

Vincent Ho, Associate Professor and Clinical Academic Gastroenterologist, Western Sydney University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Does coffee raise your blood pressure? Here’s how much it’s OK to drink

Olga Pankova/Getty Images
Clare CollinsUniversity of Newcastle

Coffee first entered human lives and veins over 600 years ago.

Now we consume an average of almost two kilos per person each year – sometimes with very specific preferences about blends and preparation methods. How much you drink is influenced by genes acting on your brain’s reward system and caffeine metabolism.

Coffee can raise your blood pressure in the short term, especially if you don’t usually drink it or if you already have high blood pressure.

But this doesn’t mean you need to cut out coffee if you have high blood pressure or are concerned about your heart health. Moderation is key.

So how does coffee affect your blood pressure? And if yours is high, how much is OK to drink?

What is high blood pressure?

Blood pressure is the force blood exerts on artery walls when your heart pumps. It’s measured by two numbers:

  • the first and biggest number is systolic blood pressure, which is the force generated when your heart contracts and pushes blood out around your body

  • the lower number, diastolic blood pressure, is the force when your heart relaxes and fills back up with blood.

Normal blood pressure is defined as systolic blood pressure of less than 120 millimeters of mercury (mm Hg) and diastolic blood pressure of less than 80 mm Hg.

Once your numbers consistently reach 140/90 or more, blood pressure is considered high. This is also called hypertension.

Knowing your blood pressure numbers is important because hypertension doesn’t have any symptoms. When it goes untreated, or isn’t well-controlled, your risk of heart attacks and strokes increases, and existing kidney and heart disease worsens.

About 31% of adults have hypertension with half unaware they have it. Of those taking medication for hypertension, about 47% don’t have it well-controlled.

How does coffee affect blood pressure?

Caffeine in coffee is a muscle stimulant that increases the heart rate in some people. This can potentially contribute to an irregular heartbeat, known as arrhythmia.

Caffeine also stimulates adrenal glands to release adrenaline. This makes your heart beat faster and your blood vessels to constrict, which increases blood pressure.

Blood caffeine levels peak between 30 minutes and two hours after a cup of coffee. Caffeine’s half-life is 3–6 hours, meaning blood levels will reduce by about half during this time.

The range is due to age (kids have smaller, less mature livers so can’t metabolise it as fast), genetics (people can be fast or slow metabolisers) and whether you usually drink it (regular consumers clear it faster).

The impact of caffeine on blood pressure from coffee (and cola, energy drinks and chocolate) varies. Research reviews report increases in systolic blood pressure of 3–15 and a diastolic blood pressure increase of 4–13 after consumption.

The effect of caffeine also depends on a person’s usual blood pressure. An increase in blood pressure may be more risky if you have hypertension and existing heart or liver disease, so it’s best to discuss your coffee consumption with your doctor.

What else is in coffee?

Coffee contains hundreds of phytochemicals: compounds that contribute flavour, aroma, or influence health and disease.

Phytochemicals that directly affect blood pressure include melanoidins, which regulate the body’s fluid volume and activity of enzymes that help control blood pressure.

Quinic acid is another phytochemical shown to lower systolic and diastolic blood pressure by improving the lining of blood vessels, allowing them to better accommodate blood pressure rises.

Can coffee cause hypertension?

In a review of 13 studies that included 315,000 people, researchers examined associations between coffee intake and the risk of hypertension.

During study follow-up periods, 64,650 people developed hypertension, with the researchers concluding coffee drinking was not associated with an increased risk of developing the condition.

Even when they examined data by gender, amount of coffee, decaffeinated versus caffeinated, smoking or years of follow-up, coffee was still not associated with an increased risk of developing hypertension.

The only exceptions suggesting lower risk were for five studies from the United States and seven low-quality studies, meaning those results should be interpreted with caution.

A separate Japanese study followed more than 18,000 adults aged 40–79 years for 18.9 years. This included about 1,800 people who had very high blood pressure (grade 2-3 hypertension), with systolic blood pressure of 160 or above or diastolic blood pressure of 100 or above.

Here, risk of dying from cardiovascular disease, including heart attack or stroke, was double among those drinking two or more cups of coffee a day compared to non-drinkers.

There were no associations with death from cardiovascular disease for those who had either normal blood pressure or mild (grade 1) hypertension (systolic blood pressure 140–159 or diastolic blood pressure 90–99).

The bottom line

There is no need to give up coffee. Here’s what to do instead:

  1. know your blood pressure, health history and which food and drinks contain caffeine

  2. consider all factors that influence your blood pressure and health – family history, diet, salt and physical activity – so you can make informed decisions about what you consume and how much you move

  3. be aware of how caffeine affects you and avoid it before having your blood pressure measured

  4. avoid caffeine in the afternoon so it doesn’t affect your sleep

  5. aim to moderate your coffee intake by drinking four cups or less a day or switching to decaf

  6. if you have systolic blood pressure of 160 or above or diastolic blood pressure of 100 or above, consider limiting to one cup a day, and talk to you doctor. The Conversation

Clare Collins, Laureate Professor in Nutrition and Dietetics, University of Newcastle

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why is my migraine worse in summer?

K8/Unsplash
Lakshini GunasekeraMonash University and Elspeth HuttonMonash University

For people with migraine, summer can be a double-edged sword. You may be able to relax more, sleep in, enjoy the sunshine, and spend time with family and friends.

But other factors – such as glare, heat, and changes to sleeping and diet – can make migraine attacks more likely or more severe.

Migraine is a disabling neurological disorder affecting 5 million Australians. In addition to a throbbing headache, it can cause hypersensitivity to light, sound, smells or movement.

Triggers for attacks vary from person to person and seasonal changes don’t affect everyone. But if you find your migraine attacks are worse or more likely in summer, knowing why can help you prepare.

The effect of hot weather

Normally when it is hot, you sweat more to regulate your core temperature. Your body becomes cooler when sweat evaporates off your body.

In summer when the air is hotter and there is more humidity, your brain’s hypothalamus causes blood vessels close to the skin to dilate so that heat can escape.

But people with migraine often have hypersensitive nerves and blood vessels. When blood vessels dilate in the heat, it can irritate nearby nerves and cause inflammation, which the migraine brain interprets as pain. This is due to the brain’s stress response, not an infection.

Dehydration

Sweating helps regulate your core body temperature, cooling you down as the sweat evaporates off your skin. But when the air is hot and humid, it’s harder for the sweat to evaporate and cool us down.

This can lead to dehydration – another potent trigger.

Why is dehydration so bad?

Imagine your brain like a sponge that is floating in spinal fluid within your skull. If you are dehydrated, the brain shrinks like a dry sponge and pulls on the attachments to the skull, which can trigger pain.

If you are well hydrated, the brain can expand to fill the space within the skull so there is less “pulling” and therefore less pain.

Sensitivity to light

For many people with migraine, glare is more than a minor annoyance – bright lights and reflection can cause pain and trigger attacks.

When light enters the back of the eye, special cells (retinal ganglion cells) process this signal and send messages to the brain’s sensory centre (the thalamus).

In migraine, these sensory pain pathways involving the thalamus are hypersensitive. Any extra light – or flickering or moving lights – is perceived as pain, rather than merely brightness, and can also lead to dizziness.

Glare also reduces the contrast of incoming light signals, so the brain’s visual centre (the visual cortex) needs to work extra hard to process signals. Certain wavelengths can also be harder to process (including blue and fluorescent light, or sunlight reflecting off screens). This can cause pain.

Disrupted routines

The migraine brain does not like change. But longer days in summer can mean changes to our routines.

Changes that might trigger a migraine include sleeping at inconsistent times on holidays, skipping or delaying meals, or changes in stress levels. This means new stress, increased stress – or even relaxing after a stressful period.

Changes in sensory information that the brain processes can also worsen migraine. This may include new smells (such as sunscreen or insect repellent), louder noises (excited children on holidays), and brighter light or glare.

Even exercising more than usual may be a trigger for some people.

Thunderstorms

Pollen, humidity and thunderstorms trigger allergy flares in people with asthma, hayfever and eczema. This makes the immune system release chemicals called histamine, which can trigger migraine attacks in some people.

Asthma and allergy action plans are doubly important for wellbeing in this group.

Sudden changes in air pressure (in aeroplanes and during storms) can also be a strong trigger for some people. Your friend who says they can predict the weather by their migraine symptoms may be right.

Know your triggers

Regardless of the season, being prepared is the key.

Keep a diary of your headache days and impacts of weather (temperature, humidity, glare) or activities (for example, how much you’re socialising or exercising). Headache neurologists can use this data to give you a targeted migraine plan.

In summer, you can also:

  • plan outings for cooler days of the week or times of day

  • limit sun and pack a hat and sunglasses. Lenses that are polarised or FL41-tinted may help beat glare

  • carry water bottles and electrolyte-rich fluids to avoid dehydration

  • set phone alarms so that you go to bed and wake up at consistent times

  • try to maintain regular balanced meals, without excess sugar, alcohol and processed foods.

Taking care of your medication

It’s also important to plan and correctly store your migraine medication, especially if you’re going on a trip. You should:

  • take acute migraine medications with you and make sure they’re up-to-date

  • check your scripts are current and you have repeats left

  • protect medications from heat. Don’t store them in the glovebox or bag in the sun for long periods. Injectable medications should be stored in the fridge below 4°C until use.

When travelling, you may need to adjust timing of doses or use a cooler bag to keep medication cool.

If you think you’re sensitive to seasonal changes, it’s best to talk to your neurologist about a migraine management plan. This can help you identify and manage key triggers and prevent and treat acute attacks.The Conversation

Lakshini Gunasekera, PhD Candidate in Neurology, Monash University and Elspeth Hutton, Head, Headache Service Alfred Health & Monash Neuroscience Headache Group, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The government wants to track your medicines – here’s why

Megan PrictorThe University of Melbourne

On Wednesday, the federal government announced plans to reform how medications are dispensed and tracked, aiming to reduce unsafe use, stockpiling and “doctor shopping”.

This will include two stages. First, the government will require all online and telehealth prescribers to upload information about a patient’s prescribed medications to their My Health Record.

Second, the government plans to develop a National Medicines Record – an over-arching database to register and monitor all current prescriptions.

So, how would this work? While some detail is still lacking, here’s what we know.

Why is this needed?

An increasing number of Australians take multiple medications. Recent research analysing prescribing patterns in Australia estimates almost two million of us took five or more regular medicines in 2024.

While multiple medicines are often needed to manage multiple conditions, there are risks of adverse effects.

And when a clinician prescribes medication or a pharmacist dispenses it without a full understanding of the patient’s current medications, it can lead to harmful interactions between them.

This can make a patient sicker and often lands them in hospital. An estimated 1.5 million people in Australia experience some kind of harmful side effect from using medicine each year.

Those at particular risk are older adults taking numerous medications, as well as those transitioning between health-care settings (such as going into hospital or returning home).

Sometimes patients also stockpile medications, including through consulting multiple doctors, known as “doctor shopping”. For example, they might do this to obtain extra supplies of addictive pain medication.

How does it work right now?

Currently, there is no centralised, mandatory register that records all of the medicines a person is prescribed and dispensed.

Instead, prescribing information may be siloed in hospital and aged care systems, general practice records and those of online telehealth providers such as Instant Scripts, 13SICK and Hola Health.

This can prevent any single doctor or pharmacist from having clear, comprehensive information about a patient’s medications.

Some health-care practitioner and pharmacy bodies have criticised the online prescribing industry, in particular, for contributing to inappropriate prescribing and medication misuse.

For high-risk medications such as opioids, there is already a Real Time Prescription Monitoring system. Victoria has a similar system called SafeScript, but this doesn’t record the full range of prescription medications.

Announcing the reforms, Health Minister Mark Butler referred to an Australian woman who died from an overdose after stockpiling her medicine. He explained her parent’s advocacy prompted the government to address the lack of a comprehensive medicines record.

What will change?

First, the government will require online and telehealth prescribing platforms to add information to the My Health Record system about prescribed medications. This will include information about the clinical reasoning for prescribing.

My Health Record is a government-run platform providing a secure, online collection of a patient’s health information. Both patients and their treating health-care professionals can access it.

So any medication or related clinical information uploaded by a prescriber would be accessible via My Health Record, to the patient as well as to their health-care providers and pharmacists.

Many general practices already upload this information, but online prescribing platforms may not. Organisations representing pharmacists have long called for this kind of change.

Will it work?

In theory, it is a step forward. The challenge is that the My Health Record system remains under-used. One in 10 Australians have no My Health Record (the system is opt-out).

For the millions of Australians who do have a My Health Record, usage is increasing. But many still have never accessed their own record.

It is also not clear whether, and how, a patient’s access to their own My Health Record would reduce medication harm (particularly if the patient is deliberately stockpiling medication).

Almost all GPs, pharmacies and public hospitals are registered for My Health Record and have used the system. But data shows pharmacies are mainly using it to upload information rather than looking at records others have uploaded.

Overall, ensuring that all medicines information is available on the My Health Record is a positive step.

But it does not mean that the information will be accessed (or understood) by others who are prescribing and dispensing medication to a patient.

Indeed, sadly, the warnings that were placed by hospital services on the My Health Record of the young woman who died from an overdose were not accessed by telehealth services nor pharmacies prescribing and supplying her with medication.

What’s ahead?

As a second step, the government says it will design and build a National Medicines Record. This would be an overarching platform linked to My Health Record and other digital health systems, to register all current prescriptions.

At this stage, detail is lacking, but health-care practitioner and pharmacy bodies are broadly supportive.

consultation is underway.

If this article has raised issues for you, or if you’re concerned about someone you know, call Lifeline on 13 11 14.The Conversation

Megan Prictor, Associate Professor in Health Technology Law, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.

Week One February 2026: Issue 651 (published Sunday February 1 2026)

Summer BirdFest 2026: Play antics of New Locals

The fledglings from this years 'newbies' have begun turning up in local yards and trees as they learn to fly and feed, as taught by their parents - and even which branches in trees to land on so they don't slide down onto the trunk!

This family of galahs, where mum and dad have had two girls and one boy this Season, showed up in mid-January with the little boy grabbing a Norfolk Pine frond in his beak and waving at one of his sisters - who didn't seem that interested in either waving it around too, or playing tug-of-war - so he dropped it. He was also then seen peering down the umbrella hole in the outdoor table - clearly something of interest down there.

Check out this Norfolk Pine frond - Do you want to play?:

I spy, with my galah eye, something beginning with....:

Mumma galah patiently watching her youngsters - note the colour of her eyes:

Witnessing young local wildlife playing is a great reminder of the other residents of Pittwater and that these other family units, and their individual members, all have personalities and a propensity for play, for living each other - as seen in the numerous sulphur-crested cockatoo 'tribes' that get around together and groom each other or even call warnings to each other when a sea eagle flies overhead.

It's a great time for birdwatching with all these kinds of bird families and family groups out and about - teaching young ones which are the food trees and where drinking water may be found, and seeing their children playing with each other.

BirdLife Australia states:

'Galahs form permanent pair bonds, although a bird will take a new partner if the other one dies. The nest is a tree hollow or similar location, lined with leaves. Both sexes incubate the eggs and care for the young.

There is high chick mortality in Galahs, with up to 50% of chicks dying in the first six months. Galahs have been recorded breeding with other members of the cockatoo family, both in the wild and captivity. These include the Sulphur-crested Cockatoo, C. galerita.

Breeding season is from February – July, in the north and from July – December, in the south.'

Female Galahs are easily distinguished from males by their distinct reddish-pink or light pink irises. In contrast, mature male Galahs have dark brown or blackish eyes. This colour difference is a reliable way to sex adult birds, though both sexes have dark brown eyes as juveniles. Females' eyes begin to lighten from brown to pink/red as they mature, typically around 6 months to 3 years old.

The term galah is derived from gilaa, a word found in Yuwaalaraay and neighbouring Aboriginal languages of southeast Australia. First Known Use: 1862. 

Galahs are about 35 cm (14 in) long and weigh 270–350 g. They have a pale grey to mid-grey back, a pale grey rump, a pink face and chest, and a light pink mobile crest. Juveniles have greyish chests, crowns, and crests.

Juvenile plumage changes as they mature

Little Corella juvenile pair:

Both Galahs (Eolophus roseicapilla) and Sulphur-crested Cockatoos (Cacatua galerita)are known for their highly social, intelligent, and, above all, playful nature, which is central to their behaviour in the wild. Often seen in large, noisy flocks, these birds engage in frequent, acrobatic antics that have earned them a reputation as "clowns" of the Australian bush. 

Key aspects of their playful and natural behaviour include:

  • Acrobatic Play: Galahs and Cockatoos are known to hang upside down from branches, slide down wires, and perform complex aerial manoeuvres.
  • "Playing the Fool": They often exhibit behaviours described as chaotic or mischievous, such as tumbling and wrestling with each other on the ground or, during windy conditions, playing in the branches.
  • Social Interaction: As deeply social birds, they use these games to strengthen bonds within their flock, which can consist of hundreds or even thousands of individuals.
  • Foraging and Foraging-related Play: They spend much of their time on the ground foraging for food, but also use their beaks to strip bark and leaves, which is believed to be a form of entertainment in addition to foraging.
  • Lifelong Bonds: Both Cockattos and Galahs form lifelong, monogamous pairs and often perform synchronised movements and affectionate behaviours together. Additionally, flocks form a family and have been witnessed mourning a bird that has been killed. A flock usually stays in the same area year round.
  • Intelligence: Their playful, curious, and often noisy nature is a sign of their high intelligence. 

The 'galah' name has even entered the Australian vernacular as a term for a "silly person" or a "clown," directly referencing these clownish and chaotic antics. 

Other unusual sightings of bird bubs and others movements across Pittwater and the peninsula and surrounds, per Eremaea Birdlines (Interesting and unusual bird observations) BirdLife Australia - include:

  • Streaked Shearwater at Long Reef Aquatic ReserveHighlight of a three and a half hour seawatch from Long Reef this morning was a Streaked Shearwater heading south with the large numbers of Wedge-tailed and Short-tailed Shearwaters,also a few Flesh-footed Shearwaters headlng south as well. - Michael Ronan 26/1/2026
  • Glossy Black Cockatoo at Ku-ring-gai Chase National Park-Apple Tree BayAmazing count of 11 flew out of casuarinas ahead of us as we kayaked down the "north" side of Cowan Creek. They flew across the creek then headed downstream at height, all in quite close formation. Seen and heard well, their call being quite unmistakable. No camera with me in the kayak unfortunately. eBird checklist - Cameron Ward 15/1/2026
  • Buff-banded Rail at Scotland IslandAdult and chick in yard of house not far from Tennis Court Wharf. - Ted Nxon 19/1/2026
  • Glossy Black Cockatoos at Manly Warringah War Memorial Park--Incl Manly DamThree cockatoos. Looks like one is a juvenile. This is the second time we have seen this group in the last couple of weeks. - Ben Wicks 5/1/2026
  • Red Knot, Tawny Grassbird at Long Reef Aquatic ReserveRed Knot feeding on the edge of the sandspit with the smaller waders a bit after low tide (approx 2:30pm) but was flushed to the far end by some non-birders and did not come back to the sandspit. Tawny Grassbird was first heard singing and then seen skulking in scruffy shrubs just up the hill from the access track before it starts climbing. - Tom Wilson 1/1/2026

We were also very fortunate to play host to a family of Blue-faced honeyeaters in the PON yard this Summer - details below.

Tawny Grassbird, Megalurus timoriensis. Photo: Aviceda

Buff-banded Rail (Gallirallus philippensis), the mum, in Careel Creek

The dad. 

Cockatoo social contact takes the form of grooming: gently touching and cleaning the feathers of other cockatoos of the group:

Cockie yelling!:

Rainbow lorikeets have had around 1-3 bubs this year in the PON yard tree hollows - there have been around 9-11 juveniles seen in recent weeks:

Blue-faced honeyeaters Breeding In Pittwater

On the morning of Friday January 30 2026 these two fledglings and their parents were spotted bathing and drinking then drying off in the PON yard at Careel Bay.

Marita Macrae of the Pittwater Natural Heritage Association (PNHA) who has hosted many Bird Walks in Pittwater for decades, stated that it’s very unusual to see those birds here, and breeding too!, but not the first time though.

Blue-faced honeyeater (Entomyzon cyanotis), juvenile/fledgling pair in PON yard, Jan. 30 2026 - they're wet as they just had a bath/drink in one of the 4 birdbaths in the PON yard - each at a compass point and at least 1 under shade as sun shifts during the day. They are calling for food from parents birds it would seem.

The Blue-faced honeyeater (Entomyzon cyanotis), also colloquially known as the banana-bird, is a passerine bird of the honeyeater family, Meliphagidae. It is the only member of its genus, and it is most closely related to honeyeaters of the genus Melithreptus. 

The Blue-faced Honeyeater is a large black, white and golden olive-green honeyeater with striking blue skin around the yellow to white eye. The crown, face and neck are black, with a narrow white band across the back of the neck. The upperparts and wings are a golden olive green, and the underparts are white, with a grey-black throat and upper breast. The blue facial skin is two-toned, with the lower half a brilliant cobalt blue. Juvenile birds are similar to the adults but the facial skin is yellow-green and the bib is a lighter grey. This honeyeater is noisy and gregarious, and is usually seen in pairs or small flocks. It is known as the Banana-bird in tropical areas, for its habit of feeding on banana fruit and flowers.

Three subspecies are recognised.:

  • E. c. albipennis was described by John Gould in 1841 and is found in north Queensland, west through the Gulf of Carpentaria, in the Top End of the Northern Territory, and across into the Kimberley region of Western Australia. It has white on the wings and a discontinuous stripe on the nape. The wing-patch is pure white in the western part of its range, and is more cream towards the east. It has a longer bill and shorter tail than the nominate race. The blue-faced honeyeater also decreases in size with decreasing latitude, consistent with Bergmann's rule. Molecular work supports the current classification of this subspecies as distinct from the nominate subspecies cyanotis.
  • E. c. cyanotis, the nominate form, is found from Cape York Peninsula south through Queensland and New South Wales, into the Riverina region, Victoria, and southeastern South Australia.
  • E. c. griseigularis is found in southwestern New Guinea and Cape York, and was described in 1909 by Dutch naturalist Eduard van Oort. It is much smaller than the other subspecies. The original name for this subspecies was harteri, but the type specimen, collected in Cooktown, was found to be an intergrade form. The new type was collected from Merauke. This subspecies intergrades with cyanotis at the base of the Cape York Peninsula, and the zone of intermediate forms is narrow. The white wing-patch is larger than that of cyanotis and smaller than that of albipennis. Only one bird (from Cape York) of this subspecies was sampled in a molecular study, and it was shown to be genetically close to cyanotis.

Adult bird of Subspecies cyanotis feeding, south-eastern Australia, feeding. Photo: Benjamin444

The Blue-faced Honeyeater is found in tropical, sub-tropical and wetter temperate or semi-arid zones. It is mostly found in open forests and woodlands close to water, as well as monsoon forests, mangroves and coastal heathlands. It is often seen in banana plantations, orchards, farm lands and in urban parks, gardens and golf courses.

The Blue-faced Honeyeater is found in northern and eastern mainland Australia, from the Kimberley region, Western Australia to near Adelaide, South Australia, being more common in the north of its range. They are considered sedentary in the north of its range, and locally nomadic in the south. It is not found in central southern New South Wales or eastern Victoria now. This species is also found in Papua New Guinea.

Around Wellington in central New South Wales, birds were once recorded over Winter months, and were more common in autumn around the Talbragar River. Birds were present all year round near Inverell in northern New South Wales, but noted to be flying eastwards from January to May, and westwards in June and July.

The Blue-faced Honeyeater feeds mostly on insects and other invertebrates, but also eats nectar and fruit from native and exotic plants. It forages in pairs or noisy flocks of up to seven birds (occasionally many more) on the bark and limbs of trees, as well as on flowers and foliage. These flocks tend to exclude other birds from the feeding area, but they do feed in association with other species such as Yellow-throated Miners and Little Friarbirds.

In late November- early December 2025 we began hearing an unusual call from the Norfolk Pine next door. Having heard a pair of Australasian Figbirds (Sphecotheres vieilloti) that return each Spring to nest ion that same tree, at first it was thought these had returned as we heard them calling each other in early November from the tree and across the perimeter of the Careel Bay Playing fields. However, soon after they arrived again, the male was found killed near the road alongside the Careel Bay dog park. The pair did not breed here this year - we're not sure what happened to his female mate. 

Each Spring this pair of Australasian Figbirds(Sphecotheres vieilloti) returned to build a nest and make babies in the Norfolk pine alongside us. There is food in our garden for them and no cats, at least none that can get that high up.


Females have grey skin around the eye and lack distinctive head markings. They are brown-green above and dull-white below, streaked with brown. Both sexes have a blackish bill. 

Then we began hearing another pair of parents call across the yard and park trees, a bird call we hadn't heard before, and realise now it must have been the blue-faced honeyeater pair.

The Blue-faced honeyeater's call is a repeated, penetrating 'woik'; 'weet weet weet' at daybreak; also squeaks uttered during flight and softer 'hwit hwit' calls. Others who have heard them liken their calls to Miner birds songs.

The Blue-faced Honeyeater is one of the first birds heard calling in the morning, often calling 30 minutes before sunrise, although here it is joined by the magpie family that nests in the same tree.

Their nest was dislodged from that tree over the weekend of January 17-19, when hard winds accompanied the rain storms, and blew into the yard. 

Fortunately, the fledglings were strong enough to fly.

Most nests are made on the abandoned nests of Grey-crowned Babblers, Noisy, Silver-crowned and Little Friarbirds, Noisy Miner, Red Wattlebird, Australian Magpie, Magpie-Lark and, rarely, butcherbirds or the Chestnut-crowned Babbler. Sometimes the nests are not modified, but often they are added to and relined. If a new nest is built, it is a neat round cup of rough bark, linked with finer bark and grass.

Birding forums from the past 3 years state Blue-faced Honeyeaters (Entomyzon cyanotis) are increasingly sighted in the Sydney region, particularly in Western Sydney, the Barrenjoey peninsula, and near Hawkesbury, often in residential areas with flowering trees. While traditionally found further north, they are now resident in suburban Sydney, favouring areas like Ermington, Richmond, and Nurragingy Reserve - and clearly Palm Beach and Careel Bay this year - and a first for us!

 

Sierra Kerr - The First Female Backflip: Surfing Australia

Published January 30 2026

Go behind the scenes as Sierra Kerr stomps the world’s first female backflip, joined by an all-star lineup featuring World Champion Molly Picklum and fellow Aussies Morgan Cibilic, Dane Henry, Oscar Berry, Liam O’Brien, George Pittar and Leihani Zoric. 

Alongside the Surfing Australia High Performance Program coaches, the crew lock into a run of ground-breaking aerial sessions at URBNSURF Sydney. NB: Language Warning

 

Scheriya seals her future in the waterproofing industry

“There’s so much opportunity in the waterproofing industry and TAFE NSW really opened my eyes to it.” - Scheriya Cuello, TAFE NSW student

A former childcare worker has made an unlikely career shift to waterproofing, part of an army of TAFE NSW-trained waterproof technicians. They are helping to address the leading cause of building defects across the state.

Glenfield’s Scheriya Cuello, 26, completed an Early Childhood Education and Care traineeship through TAFE NSW after leaving school. However, she had always harboured ambitions to do a blue-collar trade.

“My dad and grandad were both in construction and I’ve always enjoyed home DIY projects,” Ms Cuello said.

“There was always a sense that females don’t belong in the trades but that’s been changing in recent years so I decided to make a change.”

Ms Cuello enrolled in a Certificate III in Construction Waterproofing at TAFE NSW Macquarie Fields, attending one day a week while working as a sheet membrane waterproofer.

Now a sales rep for waterproofing, flooring and concreting repair company Bayset, Ms Cuello hopes to use the skills learned at TAFE NSW and on the job to eventually open her own waterproofing business.

“There’s so much opportunity in the waterproofing industry and TAFE NSW really opened my eyes to it,” she said. “As building compliance codes get stricter, the industry will continue to grow and that’s great for anyone wanting to enter the industry.”

Anyone performing residential waterproofing work valued over $5000 in labour and materials must hold a relevant trade licence, making it a regulated trade occupation in the state.

A report by the Strata Community Association of NSW revealed more than a quarter (27 per cent) of all strata buildings had defects relating to waterproofing, making it the most prevalent cause of building defects. Meanwhile, across all defect cases in NSW Fair Trading, waterproofing appeared in 34.4 per cent of disputes, making it nearly three times more frequent than electrical defects.

TAFE NSW Macquarie Fields waterproofing teacher Rob Rose said waterproofing was playing an increasingly critical role in the construction industry.

“It’s arguably the most important of the construction trades because of the amount of defects out there and the cost to rectify them,” Mr Rose said.

“Building classification laws are tightening and every building requires some form of waterproofing. It’s created huge demand for waterproofing professionals.

“Scheriya was a great student, very attentive and meticulous, and I have no doubt she’ll have a successful career in the industry.”

TAFE NSW Macquarie Fields is the only TAFE NSW campus in the state to offer the qualification.

Opportunities:

Battle of the Bands – Youth Edition: at Palm Beach

Ages 12–17
Registrations opening shortly!
Tune up. Plug in. Rock out. 
For registration, please visit our website: www.plambeachclub.com.au
Registration form available on the What’s On page.
📞 02 9974 5566
Club Palm Beach (Palm Beach RSL)

Fix our Feeds

The social media feeds that once connected us are now driving us apart. Social media algorithms are flooding young men’s feeds with radical misogynistic content, inciting real-world harm.

We’re calling on the Australian Government to act, and introduce an opt-in feature for social media algorithms so we can bring affirmative consent to our screens, and turn our feeds on and off at will.

Add your name to the Open letter, and more information available at: www.teachusconsent.com/fix-our-feeds

This has already been signed by Mackellar MP, Dr. Sophie Scamps, Warringah MP Zali Steggall and Wentworth MP Allegra Spender.

Independent MP Allegra Spender states:
''Great to see Chanel Contos in Sydney, and talk about the “Fix Our Feeds” campaign by @teachusconsent.

It’s simple but brilliant idea - social media algorithms should be opt-in, not forced upon us - so we have a real choice over what we’re shown.

Giving people the ability to switch off the algorithm would help reduce the spread of misinformation, misogyny, extremism and harmful body image content.

If this is something you would like to support, sign the open letter to Anthony Albanese at teachusconsent.com and share their campaign with your friends.''

The Teach Us Consent site states:

Systematic radicalisation
It takes just 23 minutes for a social media  mimicking a 16-18 year old boy to be fed misogynistic content, regardless of the account’s viewing preferences.

Misogynistic content is rife
73% of Gen Z social-media users have  misogynistic content online, with 70% saying they believe misogynistic language and content are increasing. This rises to 80% for women.

Sexual violence is increasing
Instances of reported sexual assault have  by 10% in the last year in Australia. This accompanies a  in the overall reporting rate.

Chanel explains:

Play Women's Social or Competitive Cricket with Cromer!

Cromer Cricket Club is now seeking women, aged 16+, who want to play cricket in the February 2026 commencing CNSW Women's Metro Competition. This is the only peninsula cricket club that offers an opportunity for girls who can no longer play in the junior clubs due to being almost all grown up.

CCC states their Women's Cricket division is fun for all ages, and a great way to make new friendships or rekindle your old ones, no skills or experience required, just fun!

''Cromer Cricket Club currently fields teams in the Twilight Women's Cricket League. It's a fun social competition with soft balls and no pads required, perfect for beginners!

We are also fielding a team in the new CNSW Women's Metro Competition, a senior traditional cricket competition for female players, the first of its kind. Register now to be part of history!''

Contact Kelvin (registrar@cromercricket.com.au) or Nick (president@cromercricket.com.au) for more info.

CNSW Women's Metro Competition

  • Senior Women's competition for ages 16+ 
  • Sunday afternoon games
  • Mix of 30 over and T20 games
  • Registration includes playing shirt and hat
  • Free for Saturday players
  • Half-season registration available
  • Whether you're 16 or 60, we've got a place for you!
  • A great opportunity to make new friends!
  • A whole heap of fun! 
  • Register now for 2026!

Register here: www.cromercricket.com.au/womens

To inspire you to get involved, a few notes form the past on women's cricket in Australia, with local connections, including the first Australia-England matches.

Pittwater Peninsula Netball Club

2026 season - let's go! Registrations are open until early February.


Netball NSW Online Privacy Policy: Don't Post Pictures of Others without asking 


Avalon Bulldogs Announcement: Female Tackle Teams Kicking Off in 2026!

After huge growth in our Girls Tag program, the Doggies are looking at launching our first-ever female tackle teams  and we’re calling for Expressions of Interest now!

Players: U13s, U14s, U15s, U17s & Opens (Possible U11s if we get the numbers)
Staff Needed: Coaches, Managers, League Safe / First Aid
This is your chance to be part of a massive moment for the Bulldogs and help build the future of women’s footy on the Beaches.
Email; info@avalonbulldogs.com.au with heading 'Female Tackle Teams'.

Get involved. Make history. Go the Doggies!

History in the Making: Female Tackle Coming to the Sharks in 2026! 

We’re excited to announce the Narrabeen Sharks’ first-ever female tackle teams for 2026!
After the success of our girls’ tag program, we’re ready to take the next step — creating pathways for female players from grassroots to the NRLW. 

We’re calling for Expressions of Interest for:
Players – U13s, U14s, U15s, U17s & Opens (plus a possible U11s if enough interest)
Coaches, Managers & Trainers (Level 1, League First Aid, League Safe)

This is your chance to be part of club history and help grow the women’s game at the Sharks!
Contact: president.narrabeensharks@gmail.com to register your interest today.

Financial help for young people

Concessions and financial support for young people.

Includes:

  • You could receive payments and services from Centrelink: Use the payment and services finder to check what support you could receive.
  • Apply for a concession Opal card for students: Receive a reduced fare when travelling on public transport.
  • Financial support for students: Get financial help whilst studying or training.
  • Youth Development Scholarships: Successful applicants will receive $1000 to help with school expenses and support services.
  • Tertiary Access Payment for students: The Tertiary Access Payment can help you with the costs of moving to undertake tertiary study.
  • Relocation scholarship: A once a year payment if you get ABSTUDY or Youth Allowance if you move to or from a regional or remote area for higher education study.
  • Get help finding a place to live and paying your rent: Rent Choice Youth helps young people aged 16 to 24 years to rent a home.

Visit: https://www.nsw.gov.au/living-nsw/young-people/young-people-financial-help

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Chord

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Noun

1. a group of (typically three or more) notes sounded together, as a basis of harmony. 2. a straight line joining the ends of an arc. 3. Engineering; each of the two principal members of a truss. 4. Anatomy; variant spelling of cord. 5. Literary; a string on a harp or other instrument.

Verb

1. play, sing, or arrange notes in chords.

From 1590's Middle English cord, from accordThe spelling change in the 18th century was due to confusion with chord [2.]. The original sense was ‘agreement, reconciliation’, later ‘a musical concord or harmonious sound’; the current sense dates from the mid 18th century.

English cord as a shortening of accord is attested from mid-14c.; cord meaning "music" is attested in English from late 14c. The spelling with an -h- is first recorded c. 1600, from further confusion with chord (n.2) and perhaps also classical correction. Originally two notes sounded simultaneously; of three or more from 18c.

chord(n.2): "structure in animals resembling a string," 1540s, alteration of cord (n.), by influence of Greek khorde "gut-string, string of a lyre, tripe," from PIE root *ghere- "gut, entrail."  Meaning "string of a musical instrument" is from 1660s (earlier this was cord). The geometry sense "straight line intersecting a curve" is from 1550s; figurative meaning "feeling, emotion" first attested 1784, from the notion of the heart or mind as a stringed instrument.

Compare Accord:

Noun: 1. agreement or harmony. 2. an official agreement or treaty.

Verb: 1. give or grant someone (power, status, or recognition). 2. (of a concept or fact) be harmonious or consistent with.

Noun from Old English acordian, from Old French acorder ‘reconcile, be of one mind’, from Latin ad- ‘to’ + cor, cord- ‘heart’; influenced by concord. From late 13c., "agreement, harmony of opinions," accourd, acord, from Old French acorde, acort "agreement, alliance," a back-formation from acorder "reconcile, agree, be in harmony" (see accord (v.) below). Meaning "will, voluntary impulse or act" (as in of one's own accord) is from mid-15c.

Verb version from Old English, early 12c., accorden, "come into agreement," also "agree, be in harmony," from Old French acorder "agree, be in harmony" (12c.), from Vulgar Latin accordare "make agree," literally "be of one heart, bring heart to heart," from Latin ad "to" cor (genitive cordis) "heart" (used figuratively for "soul, mind"), from word root.

In Western music theory, a chord is a group of notes played together for their harmonic consonance or dissonance. The most basic type of chord is a triad, so called because it consists of three distinct notes: the root note along with intervals of a third and a fifth above the root note. Chords with more than three notes include added tone chords, extended chords and tone clusters, which are used in contemporary classical music, jazz, and other genres.

Chords are the building blocks of harmony and form the harmonic foundation of a piece of music. They provide the harmonic support and coloration that accompany melodies and contribute to the overall sound and mood of a musical composition. The factors, or component notes, of a chord are often sounded simultaneously but can instead be sounded consecutively, as in an arpeggio.

Chord (geometry): A chord (from the Latin chorda, meaning "catgut or string") of a circle is a straight line segment whose endpoints both lie on a circular arc. If a chord were to be extended infinitely on both directions into a line, the object is a secant line. The perpendicular line passing through the chord's midpoint is called sagitta (Latin for "arrow"). More generally, a chord is a line segment joining two points on any curve, for instance, on an ellipse. A chord that passes through a circle's center point is the circle's diameter.

Animation on never giving up on your dreams:  The Necktie - by Jean-François Lévesque

A mixture of puppet and hand-drawn animation, The Necktie is the story of Valentin and his quest to find meaning in his life. Stuck in a dead-end job, he has forgotten all about the things that used to bring him joy. Years pass, and boredom replaces all his aspirations and hope for the future. It is only on his 40th birthday, when he rediscovers an old accordion hidden in the depths of his closet, that he regains his lust for life.

This animated short film won the following awards:

  • -Jutra Award for Best Animated Short Film - Prix Iris, Canada, 2009
  • -Fabrizio Bellochio Prize for Social Content - I Castrlli Animati Festival, Italy, 2009
  • -Youth Jury Prize for Best Animated Short - Festival de Cinéma des 3 Amériques, France, 2009
  • -Best Short Film Award / Audience Prize - Montreal World Film Festival, Canada, 2009

Can shoes alter your mind? What neuroscience says about foot sensation and focus

Your shoes might not necessarily free your mind. ksana-gribakina/iStock via Getty Images Plus
Atom SarkarDrexel University

Athletic footwear has entered a new era of ambition. No longer content to promise just comfort or performance, Nike claims its shoes can activate the brain, heighten sensory awareness and even improve concentration by stimulating the bottom of your feet.

“By studying perception, attention and sensory feedback, we’re tapping into the brain-body connection in new ways,” said Nike’s chief science officer, Matthew Nurse, in the company’s press release for the shoes. “It’s not just about running faster — it’s about feeling more present, focused and resilient.”

Other brands like Naboso sell “neuro-insoles,” socks and other sensory-based footwear to stimulate the nervous system.

It’s a compelling idea: The feet are rich in sensory receptors, so could stimulating them really sharpen the mind?

As a neurosurgeon who studies the brain, I’ve found that neuroscience suggests the reality is more complicated – and far less dramatic – than the marketing implies.

Close links between feet and brain

The soles of the feet contain thousands of mechanoreceptors that detect pressure, vibration, texture and movement.

Signals from these receptors travel through peripheral nerves to the spinal cord and up to an area of the brain called the somatosensory cortex, which maintains a map of the body. The feet occupy a meaningful portion of this map, reflecting their importance in balance, posture and movement.

Footwear also affects proprioception – the brain’s sense of where the body is in space – which relies on input from muscles, joints and tendons. Because posture and movement are tightly linked to attention and arousal, changes in sensory feedback from the feet can influence how stable, alert or grounded a person feels.

This is why neurologists and physical therapists pay close attention to footwear in patients with balance disorders, neuropathy or gait problems. Changing sensory input can alter how people move.

But influencing movement is not the same thing as enhancing cognition.

Proprioception is the sense of where your body is in space.

Minimalist shoes and sensory awareness

Minimalist shoes, with thinner soles and greater flexibility, allow more information about touch and body position to reach the brain compared with heavily cushioned footwear. In laboratory studies, reduced cushioning can increase a wearer’s awareness of where their foot is placed and when it’s touching the ground, sometimes improving their balance or the steadiness of their gait.

However, more sensation is not automatically better. The brain constantly filters sensory input, prioritizing what is useful and suppressing what is distracting. For people unaccustomed to minimalist shoes, the sudden increase in sensory feedback may increase cognitive load – drawing attention toward the feet rather than freeing mental resources for focus or performance.

Sensory stimulation can heighten awareness, but there is a threshold beyond which it becomes noise.

Can shoes improve concentration?

Whether sensory footwear can improve concentration is where neuroscience becomes especially skeptical.

Sensory input from the feet activates somatosensory regions of the brain. But brain activation alone does not equal cognitive enhancement. Focus, attention and executive function depend on distributed networks involving various other areas of the brain, such as the prefrontal cortex, the parietal lobe and the thalamus. They also rely on hormones that modulate the nervous system, such as dopamine and norepinephrine.

There is little evidence that passive underfoot stimulation – textured soles, novel foam geometries or subtle mechanical features – meaningfully improves concentration in healthy adults. Some studies suggest that mild sensory input may increase alertness in specific populations – such as older adults training to improve their balance or people in rehabilitation for sensory loss – but these effects are modest and highly dependent on context.

Put simply, feeling more sensory input does not mean the brain’s attention systems are working better.

Blurred shot of the legs and shoes of three people running
How you move in your shoes might matter more for your cognition than the shoes themselves. Elena Popova/Moment via Getty Images

Belief, expectation and embodied experience

While shoes may not directly affect your cognition, that does not mean the mental effects people report are imaginary.

Belief and expectation still play a powerful role in medicine. Placebo effects and their influence on perception, motivation and performance are well documented in neuroscience. If someone believes a shoe improves focus or performance, that belief alone can change perception and behavior – sometimes enough to produce measurable effects.

There is also growing interest in embodied cognition, the idea that bodily states influence mental processes. Posture, movement and physical stability can shape mood, confidence and perceived mental clarity. Footwear that alters how someone stands or moves may indirectly influence how focused they feel, even if it does not directly enhance cognition.

In the end, believing a product gives you an advantage may be the most powerful effect it has.

Where science and marketing diverge

The problem is not whether footwear influences the nervous system – it does – but imprecision. When companies claim their shoes are “mind-altering,” they often blur the distinction between sensory modulation and cognitive enhancement.

Neuroscience supports the idea that shoes can change sensory input, posture and movement. It does not support claims that footwear can reliably improve concentration or attention for the general population. If shoes truly produced strong cognitive changes, those effects would be robust, measurable and reproducible. So far, they are not.

Shoes can change how we feel in our bodies, how you move through space and how aware you are of your physical environment. Those changes may influence confidence, comfort and perception – all of which matter to experience.

But the most meaningful “mind-altering” effects a person can experience through physical fitness still come from sustained movement, training, sleep and attention – not from sensation alone. Footwear may shape how the journey feels, but it is unlikely to rewire the destination.The Conversation

Atom Sarkar, Professor of Neurosurgery, Drexel University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

It’s easy making green: Muppets continue to make a profit 50 years into their run

Jared Bahir BrowshUniversity of Colorado Boulder

A variety show that’s still revered for its absurdist, slapstick humor debuted 50 years ago. It starred an irreverent band of characters made of foam and fleece.

Long after “The Muppet Show”‘s original 120-episode run ended in 1981, the legend and legacy of Miss Piggy, Fozzie Bear, Gonzo and other creations concocted by puppeteer and TV producer Jim Henson have kept on growing. Thanks to the Muppets’ film franchise and the wonders of YouTube, the wacky gang is still delighting, and expanding, its fan base.

As a scholar of popular culture, I believe that the Muppets’ reign, which began in the 1950s, has helped shape global culture, including educational television. Along the way, the puppets and the people who bring them to life have earned billions in revenue.

Johnny Carson interviews Muppet creator Jim Henson, Kermit and other Muppets on the ‘Tonight Show’ in 1975, ahead of one of an early ‘The Muppet Show’ pilot.

Kermit’s origin story

Muppets, a portmanteau of marionette and puppet, first appeared on TV in the Washington, D.C., region in 1955, when Henson created a short sketch show called “Sam and Friends” with his future wife, Jane Nebel.

Their motley cast of puppets, including a lizardlike character named Kermit, sang parody songs and performed comedy sketches.

Henson’s creations were soon popping up in segments on other TV shows, including “Today” and late-night programs. Rowlf the Dog appeared in Canadian dog food commercials before joining “The Jimmy Dean Show” as the host’s sidekick.

After that show ended, Rowlf and Dean performed on the “Ed Sullivan Show,” where Kermit had occasionally appeared since 1961.

Rowlf the Dog and Jimmy Dean reprise their schtick on the ‘Ed Sullivan Show’ in 1967.

From ‘Sesame Street’ to ‘SNL’

As Rowlf and Kermit made the rounds on variety shows, journalist Joan Ganz Cooney and psychologist Lloyd Morrisett were creating a new educational program. They invited Henson to provide a Muppet ensemble for the show.

Henson waived his performance fee to maintain rights over the characters who became the most famous residents of “Sesame Street.” The likes of Oscar the Grouch, Cookie Monster and Big Bird were joined by Kermit who, by the time the show premiered in 1969, was identified as a frog.

When “Sesame Street” became a hit, Henson worried that his Muppets would be typecast as children’s entertainment. Another groundbreaking show, aimed at young adults, offered him a chance to avoid that.

“Saturday Night Live’s” debut on NBC in 1975 – when the show was called “Saturday Night” – included a segment called “The Land of Gorch,” in which Henson’s grotesque creatures drank, smoked and cracked crass jokes.

“The Land of Gorch” segments ended after “Saturday Night Live’s” first season.

‘Saturday Night Live’s’ first season included ‘Land of Gorch’ sketches that starred creatures Jim Henson made to entertain grown-ups.

Miss Piggy gets her closeup

“The Muppet Show” was years in the making. ABC eventually aired two TV specials in 1974 and 1975 that were meant to be pilots for a U.S.-produced “Muppet Show.”

After no American network picked up his quirky series, Henson partnered with British entertainment entrepreneur Lew Grade to produce a series for ATV, a British network, that featured Kermit and other Muppets. The new ensemble included Fozzie Bear, Animal and Miss Piggy – Muppets originally performed by frequent Henson collaborator Frank Oz.

The Muppet Show” parodied variety shows on which Henson had appeared. Connections he’d made along the way paid off: Many celebrities he met on those shows’ sets would guest star on “The Muppet Show,” including everyone from Rita Moreno and Lena Horne to Joan Baez and Johnny Cash.

“The Muppet Show,” which was staged and shot at a studio near London, debuted on Sept. 5, 1976, in the U.K, before airing in syndication in the United States on stations like New York’s WCBS.

As the show’s opening and closing theme songs changed over time, they retained a Vaudeville vibe despite the house band’s preference for rock and jazz.

The Muppets hit the big screen

“The Muppet Show” was a hit, amassing a global audience of over 200 million. It won many awards, including a Primetime Emmy for outstanding comedy-variety or music series – for which it beat “Saturday Night Live” – in 1978.

While his TV show was on the air, Henson worked on the franchise’s first film, “The Muppet Movie.” The road film, released in 1979, was another hit: It earned more than US$76 million at the box office.

“The Muppet Movie” garnered two Academy Award nominations for its music, including best song for “Rainbow Connection.” It won a Grammy for best album for children.

The next two films, “The Great Muppet Caper,” which premiered in 1981, and “The Muppets Take Manhattan,” released in 1984, also garnered Oscar nominations for their music.

As ‘The Muppet Movie’ opens, Statler and Waldorf tell a security guard of their heckling plans.

‘Fraggle Rock’ and the Disney deal

The cast of “The Muppet Show” and the three films took a break from Hollywood while Henson focused on “Fraggle Rock,” a TV show for kids that aired from 1983-1987 on HBO.

Like Henson’s other productions, “Fraggle Rock” featured absurdist humor – but its puppets aren’t considered part of the standard Muppets gang. This co-production between Henson, Canadian Broadcast Corporation and British producers was aimed at international markets.

The quickly conglomerating media industry led Henson to consider corporate partnerships to assist with his goal of further expanding the Muppet media universe.

In August 1989, he negotiated a deal with Michael Eisner of Disney who announced at Disney-MGM Studios an agreement in principle to acquire The Muppets, with Henson maintaining ownership of the “Sesame Street” characters.

The announcement also included plans to open Muppet-themed attractions at Disney parks.

But less than a year later, on May 16, 1990, Henson died from a rare and serious bacterial infection. He was 53.

At the end of ‘Fraggle Rock’s’ run, its characters look for new gigs.

Of Muppets and mergers

Henson’s death led to the Disney deal’s collapse. But the company did license The Muppets to Disney, which co-produced “The Muppet Christmas Carol” in 1992 and “Muppet Treasure Island” in 1996 with Jim Henson Productions, which was then run by Jim’s son, Brian Henson.

In 2000, the Henson family sold the Muppet properties to German media company EM.TV & Merchandising AG for $680 million. That company ran into financial trouble soon after, then sold the Sesame Street characters to Sesame Workshop for $180 million in late 2000. The Jim Henson Company bought back the remaining Muppet properties for $84 million in 2003.

In 2004, Disney finally acquired The Muppets and most of the media library associated with the characters.

Disney continued to produce Muppet content, including “The Muppet’s Wizard of Oz” in 2005. Its biggest success came with the 2011 film “The Muppets,” which earned over $165 million at the box office and won the Oscar for best original song “Man or Muppet.”

Muppets Most Wanted,” released in 2014, earned another $80 million worldwide, bringing total global box office receipts to over $458 million across eight theatrical Muppets movies.

The ‘Muppet Show’ goes on

The Muppets continue to expand their fandom across generations and genres by performing at live concerts and appearing in several series and films.

Through these many hits and occasional bombs, and the Jim Henson Company’s personnel changes, the Muppets have adapted to changes in technology and tastes, making it possible for them to remain relevant to new generations.

That cast of characters made of felt and foam continue to entertain fans of all ages. Although many people remain nostalgic over “The Muppet Show,” two prior efforts to reboot the show proved short-lived.

But when Disney airs its “The Muppet Show” anniversary special on Feb. 4, 2026, maybe more people will get hooked as Disney looks to reboot the seriesThe Conversation

‘The Muppet Show’ will be back – for at least one episode – on Feb. 4, 2026.

Jared Bahir Browsh, Assistant Teaching Professor of Critical Sports Studies, University of Colorado Boulder

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Submarine mountains and long-distance waves stir the deepest parts of the ocean

NOAA Office of Ocean Exploration and Research, 2019 Southeastern U.S. Deep-sea Exploration
Jessica KolbuszThe University of Western Australia

When most of us look out at the ocean, we see a mostly flat blue surface stretching to the horizon. It’s easy to imagine the sea beneath as calm and largely static – a massive, still abyss far removed from everyday experience.

But the ocean is layered, dynamic and constantly moving, from the surface down to the deepest seafloor. While waves, tides and currents near the coast are familiar and accessible, far less is known about what happens several kilometres below, where the ocean meets the seafloor.

Our new research, published in the journal Ocean Science, shows water near the the seafloor is in constant motion, even in the abyssal plains of the Pacific Ocean. This has important consequences for climate, ecosystems and how we understand the ocean as an interconnected system.

Enter the abyss

The central and eastern Pacific Ocean include some of Earth’s largest abyssal regions (places where the sea is more than 3,000 metres deep). Here, most of the seafloor lies four to six kilometres below the surface. It is shaped by vast abyssal plains, fracture zones and seamounts.

It is cold and dark, and the water and ecosystems here are under immense pressure from the ocean above.

Just above the seafloor, no matter the depth, sits a region known as the bottom mixed layer. This part of the ocean is relatively uniform in temperature, salinity and density because it is stirred through contact with the seafloor.

Rather than a thin boundary, this layer can extend from tens to hundreds of metres above the seabed. It plays a crucial role in the movement of heat, nutrients and sediments between the pelagic ocean and the seabed, including the beginning of the slow return of water from the bottom of the ocean toward the surface as part of global ocean circulation.

Observations focused on the bottom mixed layer are rare, but this is beginning to change. Most ocean measurements focus on the upper few kilometres, and deep observations are scarce, expensive and often decades apart.

In the Pacific especially, scientists have long known that cold Antarctic waters flow northward, along topographic features such as the Tonga-Kermadec Ridge and the Izu-Ogasawara and Japan Trenches.

But the finer details of how these waters interact with seafloor features in ways that intermittently stir and reshape the bottom layer of the ocean has remained largely unknown.

A bright pink, soft coral attached to a grey seafloor mount.
Deep sea ecosystems are under immense pressure from the ocean above. NOAA Photo Library

Investigating the abyss

To investigate the Pacific abyssal ocean, my colleagues and I combined new surface-to-seafloor measurements collected during a trans-Pacific expedition with high-quality repeat data about the physical features of the ocean gathered over the past two decades.

These observations allowed us to examine temperature and pressure all the way down to the seafloor over a wide range of latitudes and longitudes.

We then compared multiple scientific methods for identifying the bottom mixed layer and used machine learning techniques to understand what factors best explain the variations in its thickness.

Rather than being a uniform layer, we found the bottom mixed layer in the abyssal Pacific varies dramatically. In some regions it was less than 100m thick; in others it exceeded 700m.

This variability is not random; it’s controlled by the seafloor depth and the interactions between waves generated by surface tides and rough landscapes on the seabed.

In other words, the deepest ocean is not quietly stagnant as is often imagined. It is continually stirred by remote forces, shaped by seafloor features, and dynamically connected to the rest of the ocean above.

Just as coastal waters are shaped by waves, currents and sediment movement, the abyssal ocean is shaped by its own set of drivers. However, it is operating over larger distances and longer timescales.

Underwater mounts on the seafloor covered in gold minerals.
Topographic features of the seafloor intermittently stir and reshape the bottom layer of the ocean. NOAA Photo Library

Connected to the rest of the world

This matters for several reasons.

First, the bottom mixed layer influences how heat is stored and redistributed in the ocean, affecting long-term climate change. Some ocean and climate models still simplify seabed mixing, which can lead to errors in how future climate is projected.

Second, it plays a role in transporting sediment and seabed ecosystems. As interest grows in deep-sea mining and other activities on the high seas, understanding how the seafloor environment changes, and importantly how seafloor disturbances might spread, becomes increasingly important.

Our results highlight how little of the deep ocean we actually observe.

Large areas of the abyssal Pacific remain effectively unsampled, even as international agreements such as the new UN High Seas Treaty seek to manage and protect these regions.

The deep ocean is not a silent, static place. It is active, connected to the oceans above and changing. If we want to make informed decisions about the future of the high seas, we need to understand what’s happening at the very bottom in space and time.The Conversation

Jessica Kolbusz, Research Fellow, School of Biological Sciences, The University of Western Australia

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Friday essay: how hard is it to govern?

Michelle GrattanUniversity of Canberra

Is governing harder in the 2020s than in earlier decades? The instinctive, and popular, answer would be “of course it is”. While that’s also a correct answer, we should insert some qualifications.

Making the right or best decisions, especially in times of actual or looming crisis, has always been difficult. Consider the choices facing decision-makers, in Australia and abroad, during the Great Depression, when there was less understanding of how financial and economic systems worked than contemporary policymakers possess.

Consider also the choices that confronted leaders in past wars. Wartime prime minister John Curtin, grappling with decisions on which hung the lives of thousands of Australian troops, paced The Lodge grounds at night. And what of the challenges facing public health authorities trying to cope with the influenza epidemic that followed the first world war, compared with responding to the COVID pandemic in a time when vaccines could be developed quickly?

While keeping history in mind, however, it is undoubtedly true that contemporary governments face extraordinary changes and complexities. These come from many sources.

More demands for the provision of services. An interconnected world but fragmented public squares. Populations in democratic countries that have lost trust in government and in many other institutions. The rise of populism and the desire for instant answers to political and economic problems that do not lend themselves to easy, if any, solutions.

Modern travel, communications and technology have facilitated governing, as well as bringing their own challenges. Easier, faster and more comfortable travel means greater opportunities for face-to-face interaction, while imposing its own burdens. Email and “virtual” meetings have transformed interactions.

The internet is a massive information hub, the scale of which was beyond imagination only decades ago. It is also a monster that disseminates misinformation and disinformation on an industrial scale, and facilitates political intimidation.

Past reforms ‘not easy at the time’

Comparing the Bob Hawke and Anthony Albanese eras, “It’s become a truism of Australian politics that important economic reform peaked in the 1980s and 1990s. Sometimes the first two terms of John Howard’s government […] are given credit as well”, John Daley, of the Grattan Institute, wrote in Gridlock: Removing barriers to policy reform, in 2021. That report looked at the fate of a plethora of reforms the institute proposed between 2009 and 2019, finding more than two thirds of them had not been adopted.

In Australia, the Hawke–Keating government is often looked upon as a sort of “gold standard” for a reforming Labor government. It is unfair to measure a first-term administration against one that lasted several terms, and especially one that has been so mythologised. All the same, some critics have argued the Albanese government in its initial term was not pitching its aspiration high enough – let alone anything like as high as that earlier government.

Leaving aspiration aside, there is the other question. Was it easier in the Hawke–Keating days for a government to get things done – in particular, really difficult things? The answer is, almost certainly. But let us not romanticise the view through the rear vision mirror. Ken Henry, a public servant and Keating staffer during those days, told the National Press Club in 2025, “these reforms of the 80s and 90s mostly enjoy broad business and political support today, but they were not easy at the time”.

Moreover, some observers see downsides. “In recent months, there’s been a lot of breathless praise for the reforms of the 1980s and 1990s. But where did some of those reforms lead?” ABC economics writer Gareth Hutchens wrote in 2025. “Some eventually led to appalling scandals that ended in royal commissions (banking, aged care, Robodebt). Changes to Australia’s labour market in that period contributed to the rise of underemployment and precarious work.”

Much momentum for Australia’s economic reforms in the 1980s, stretching into the 1990s, was imposed from outside. Australia was under pressure from external forces to open its economy to the world. This produced winners and losers, but in many cases the losers (whether from tax changes, or slashing tariffs) could, where considered necessary, be compensated. This didn’t prevent pain, but it could ameliorate some of it.

‘More pessimistic, fractious and negative’

By the time of the Albanese government, much of the big reform had been done, or tried. The public had become pain-averse; the drag of “reform fatigue” had been canvassed for years. Trust in government, declining for decades, was down again after a brief revival during the pandemic.

The more difficult territory – such as improving productivity, which had languished for years – proved to be harder to navigate than some of the landmark changes under Hawke, Keating and the early days of John Howard. With a tight budgetary situation, there wasn’t money to compensate losers – and there was less tolerance for policies where some people would lose.

By the 2020s the community had grown more pessimistic, fractious and negative, uncertain where the country was headed. The 2025 Edelman Trust Barometer’s Australian report highlighted the extent of “grievance”.

It found 62% of Australians had a moderate or high sense of grievance. (This was defined as a belief by the person that government and business make their lives harder and serve narrow interests, and that wealthy people benefit under the system while ordinary people struggle.)

Fewer than one in five people believed things would be better for the next generation. Nearly two thirds (64%) worried that government leaders purposely mislead by saying things they know are false or are gross exaggerations. The barometer found a “zero sum” mindset increasingly permeating Australian society:

Those Australians with high grievances are twice as likely to feel that ‘what helps people who don’t share my politics will come at a cost to me’ compared with those with low grievances.

An environment marked by distrust and grievance makes governing difficult, let alone the pursuit of reform. Moreover, the modern plethora of well-resourced interest groups will be positioned to exploit grievance – indeed that is often central to their business models. Social media is god’s gift to those fanning grievances.

On the whole, people are more trustful if they feel they have agency – the opportunity for a voice, however small. The increasing professionalisation of politics, and the thinning out of the memberships and power within the major parties have further weakened the connection between citizens and the political process.

In today’s world, for multiple reasons, fewer people are “joiners” of parties, or other organisations. At the same time, the major parties give less encouragement to the political amateurs who want to be involved.

‘Cartel parties’

As late as the 1980s and early 1990s, ALP rank-and-file members had some clout, with the party’s national conference fights over policy (for example, uranium mining and export, reform of the banking system, privatisation) carrying weight. Progressively, however, the extra-parliamentary Labor Party membership declined in importance (with the exception that it gained a 50% say in choosing the parliamentary leader).

This is in line with an international trend. John Daley and Rachel Krust write in their Institutional Reform Stocktake (2025) that “major parties around the world have increasingly become ‘cartel parties’ in which members promise each other the benefits of government patronage, part of the machinery of government operated by a professional political class”. As modern ALP national conferences became much bigger in size, they took on the nature of stage-managed rallies, losing policy teeth.

At the 2025 election, for the second time running, only about two thirds of electors voted number one for Labor or the Coalition. The loss of faith in the major parties has been accompanied by people seeking agency in part through the “community candidate” movement.

Independent candidates (“teals” but others, too) have attracted large numbers of enthusiastic followers. The number of House of Representatives crossbenchers swelled in the 2020s, compared with the preceding decades.

This fragmentation, however, does not necessarily promote reform. Crossbenchers can sometimes achieve change by advocacy on particular issues, or by using positions of power to extract concessions (for example, in the Senate). To achieve transformational change, however, may require a government with a substantial, or at least a comfortable, majority. We saw this with Howard’s GST reform, when a big majority went to near defeat.

The “localism” reflected in the community candidate movement has been matched to a degree in the big parties, which often feel the need to preselect a “local champion”, such as someone who has served as mayor, from the particular electorate, making it hard to get policy-oriented “high flyers” into seats, especially when these days fewer seats are “safe” for the party.

The electoral cycle as ‘permanent campaign’

Short federal parliamentary terms – a flexible three years – are not conducive to bringing in potentially unpopular policies. Addressing the British Labour conference in 2025, Albanese noted that in the United Kingdom, which has five-year terms, they had “the most valuable resource for any Labor Government” – time.

Both sides of politics acknowledge the handicap of short terms, but by now have accepted that terms cannot in practice be lengthened, because (on recent history) it would seem impossible to pass the required referendum.

Terms could be made fixed by legislation, however there has not been the bipartisan will for that. (After the 2025 election, the Special Minister of State, Don Farrell, did ask the parliamentary Joint Standing Committee on Electoral Matters to examine fixed four-year terms and increasing the size of the parliament.)

But the problem is not just the short length of terms. The electoral cycle has progressively become the “permanent campaign” with the government, especially the prime minister, seemingly never off the election trail, physically or mentally. This may have become so entrenched that longer terms might not significantly change things.

The contemporary phenomenon of the “continuous campaign” is reinforced by the frequency of opinion polling, and the attention given to it. It shapes much of the media discourse, and the use of it by the parties themselves means their eyes are, much of the time, on what the “focus groups” are saying. These trends were present in the 1980s but had reached new heights by the 2020s.

Leaders ‘crucial’ in driving reform

Much of the Hawke–Keating Government’s success in achieving economic reform was that it could harness the power and co-operation of the trade unions. The formal “Accord” between the government and unions meant the government could achieve trade-offs with the union movement – wage restraint in return for “social wage” benefits (Medicare, for example, and later a national superannuation contribution scheme).

The union movement of the day covered a much larger proportion of the workforce and had some impressive leaders who were willing to sign up to the government’s often controversial reform projects.

The Albanese government delivered significantly to the unions in its first term, including support for wage rises and a raft of changes to industrial laws, but it did not get offsets. The coverage of the union movement had shrunk drastically, and its leadership was not of the 1980s–90s calibre.

It is hard to recall how different the media landscape was in the Hawke–Keating years. This was the time before social media, and when the mainstream media were more influential for a government that wanted to drive change and achieve ambitious policy outcomes.

As a reforming treasurer, Keating was able to skilfully win influential parts of the media to his causes. Keating used to say, with his typical exaggeration, “if I’ve got the top five journalists in the press gallery supporting a policy, I’ve got the country”.

In the 2020s, not only are the media splintered every which way by the growth of social media, but traditional media are also increasingly polarised and less influential, especially with younger voters who obtain their information elsewhere.

The new round-the-clock, digital media environment has brought extra pressures on governing. How to sell measures has become almost as important in formulating policy as the substance. More generally, the government feels it imperative to fill the media space, which requires deploying ministers to the extensive round of morning TV and radio programs, interviews on the news channels through the day, evening current affairs, Sunday shows, and the like.

Arguably, the extent of the media burden on ministers takes away from the time and attention they can focus on detailed policy work.

Reform in any age requires leaders who can identify what needs to be done; grasp the policy challenges; are able and willing to be bold; and can persuade the public. The centrality of leadership in driving reform is crucial. In Hawke, Labor had a leader who could draw on strong personal popularity and was willing to spend political capital (although not be profligate with it – he acted as a restraining hand on his treasurer).

Albanese in his first term was a much more cautious brand of leader, mostly unwilling to exceed what he saw as his mandate. He also had a thin majority. Effective leadership must extend beyond the leader. Keating as treasurer was willing to stretch the boundaries. Albanese’s treasurer, Jim Chalmers, began his career by studying Keating attentively, but is still to be seriously tested himself.

Importantly, the Cabinet of the Hawke–Keating era was deep in its talent and its ambition. Its expenditure review committee was exceptionally hard-working. While the dynamics of the Albanese Cabinet are more opaque, there is not the breadth of talent or common reform purpose of its predecessor.

With Labor’s massive 2025 victory, calls immediately redoubled for the government to set its sights high. Slow economic growth, flatlined productivity and an uncertain external environment added to the push.

Stakeholders dusted off their reform proposals. A roundtable on “productivity”, which the treasurer immediately branded an “Economic Reform” Roundtable, was summoned by the government. That was the easy part.

Whether Albanese’s second-term government would have the will to significantly break the reform “gridlock” will be quite another matter. The prime minister might be a restraining hand on those inclined to hasten too fast.


This is an edited extract from The First Albanese Government, edited by John Hawkins, Michelle Grattan and John Halligan (New South), published on February 1.The Conversation

Michelle Grattan, Professorial Fellow, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

A brief history of sugar

Still Life by Edward Hartley Mooney (1918). Manchester Art GalleryCC BY
Seamus HigginsUniversity of Nottingham

A few thousand years ago, sugar was unknown in the western world. Sugarcane, a tall grass first domesticated in New Guinea around 6000BC, was initially chewed for its sweet juice rather than crystallised. By around 500BC, methods to boil sugarcane juice into crystals was first developed in India.

One of the earliest references to sugar we have dates to 510BC, when Emperor Darius I of what was then Persia invaded India. There he found “the reed which gives honey without bees”.

Knowledge of sugar-making spread west to Persia, then across the Islamic world after the 7th century AD. Sugar reached medieval Europe only via trade routes. It was extremely expensive and used more like a spice. Indeed, in the 11th century Crusaders returning home talked of how pleasant this “new spice” was.

It was the supply potential of this “new spice” in the early 16th century that encouraged Portuguese entrepreneurs to export enslaved people to newly discovered Brazil. There, they rapidly started growing highly profitable sugar cane crops. By the 1680s, the Dutch, English and French all had their own sugar plantations with enslaved colonies in the Caribbean.

In the 18th century, the increasing popularity of tea and coffee led to the widespread adoption of sugar as a sweetener. In 1874, prime-minister William Gladstone abolished a 34% tax on sugar to ease the costs of basic food for workers. Cheap jam (one-third fruit pulp to two-thirds sugar) began to appear on the table of every working-class household. The growing demand for sugar in Britain and Europe encouraged further growth and profit, earning the name “white gold”.

Painting of a woman carrying sugar cane
Getting in the Sugar Cane, River Nile by Frederick Trevelyan Goodall (1875). Grundy Art GalleryCC BY

Britain’s per capita sugar consumption skyrocketed from four pounds in 1704 to 90 pounds by 1901. While slavery was eventually abolished, the supply of cheap labour was sustained by new flows of indentured workers from India, Africa and China.

Britain’s naval blockade of Napoleonic France at the start of the 19th century prodded the French to seek an alternative to Caribbean sugar supplies. It gave birth to the European sugar beet industry.

Sugar beet is a biennial root crop grown for its high sucrose content, which is extracted to produce table sugar. The 20th century has seen this traditionally heavily subsidised and tariff-protected industry grow to produce approximately 50% of Europe’s sugar. This includes the UK’s consumption, which is now around 2 million tons of beet (60%) and cane sugar (40%) annually.

Delights and dangers

In 1886, Atlanta’s prohibition laws forced the businessman and chemist John Pemberton to reformulate his popular drink, Pemberton’s Tonic French Wine Coca. He replaced the alcohol with a 15% sugar syrup and added citric acid. His bookkeeper, Frank Robinson, chose a new name for the drink after its main ingredients – cocaine leaves and kola nuts – and created the Coca-Cola trademark in the flowing script we know today.

In 1879, Swiss chocolatier Daniel Peter invented the world’s first commercial milk chocolate using sweetened condensed milk developed by his neighbour, Henri Nestlé. Milk chocolate, which contains about 50-52 grams of sugar per 100 grams, has now become a global favourite for its sweet taste and creamy texture.

Chocolate and cola have since solidified their status as global staples in the realm of fizzy drinks and sweet treats and have become essential indulgences for people worldwide.

In 1961, an American epidemiologist Ancel Keys appeared on the cover of Time magazine for his “diet-heart hypothesis”. Through his “seven countries” study, he found an association between saturated fat intake, blood cholesterol and heart disease. Keys remarked: “People should know the facts. Then, if they want to eat themselves to death, let them.”

An advert for Cocoa-Cola from 1961.

With competing scientific advice John Yudkin, founder of the nutrition department at Queen’s College, published an article in the Lancet. He argued that international comparisons do not support the claim that total or animal fat is the main cause of coronary thrombosis, highlighting that sugar intake has a stronger correlation with heart disease.

He published his book, Pure, White and Deadly, in 1972. It highlighted the evidence linking sugar consumption to increased coronary thrombosis and its involvement in dental caries, obesity, diabetes and liver disease. He ominously noted: “If only a small fraction of what is already known about the effects of sugar were to be revealed about any other material used as a food additive, that material would promptly be banned.”

The British Sugar Bureau dismissed Yudkin’s claims about sugar as “emotional assertions”, and the World Sugar Research Organisation called his book “science fiction”. In the 1960s and 1970s, the sugar industry promoted sugar as an appetite suppressant and funded research that downplayed the risks of sucrose, while emphasising dietary fat as the primary driver of coronary heart disease.

Scientific debate over the relative health effects of sugar and fat continued for decades. In the meantime, governments began publishing dietary guidelines advising people to eat less saturated fats and high-cholesterol foods. An unavoidable consequence of this was that people began eating more carbohydrates and sugar instead.

Official dietary guidelines did not begin to clearly acknowledge the health risks of excessive sugar consumption until much later, as evidence accumulated toward the end of the 20th century.

In my new book, Food and Us: the Incredible Story of How Food Shapes Humanity I explore the fact that sugar is a relatively new addition to our diet. In just a short period of 300 years, or 0.0001% of our food evolution, sugar has become ubiquitous in our food supply. It has even evolved its own terms of endearment and affection for people, such as sugar, honey and sweetheart.

However, the global addiction to sugar poses significant and interconnected challenges for public health, the economy, society and the environment. The pervasive nature of sugar in processed foods, combined with its effects on the brain’s reward system, creates a cycle of dependency that is driving a worldwide crisis of diet-related diseases and straining health systems.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.


This article features references to books that have been included for editorial reasons, and may contain links to bookshop.org. If you click on one of the links and go on to buy something from bookshop.org The Conversation UK may earn a commission.The Conversation

Seamus Higgins, Associate Professor Food Process Engineering, Chemical & Environmental Engineering, University of Nottingham

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Did a tsunami hit the Bristol Channel four centuries ago? Revisiting the great flood of 1607

Simon HaslettBath Spa UniversitySwansea University

People living on the low-lying shores of the Bristol Channel and Severn estuary began their day like any other on January 30 1607. The weather was calm. The sky was bright.

Then, suddenly, the sea rose without warning. Water came racing inland, tearing across fields and villages, sweeping away the homes, livestock and people in its path.

By the end of the day, thousands of acres were underwater. As many as 2,000 people may have died. It was, quite possibly, the deadliest sudden natural disaster to hit Britain in 500 years.

More than four centuries later, the flood of 1607 still raises a troubling question. What, exactly, caused it?

Most early explanations blamed an exceptional storm. But when my colleague and I began examining the historical evidence more closely in 2002, we became less certain that this was the full picture. For one, eyewitness accounts tell a more unsettling story.

The flood struck on January 30 1607 – or January 20 1606, according to the old Julian calendar, which was still in use at that time. The flood affected coastal communities across south Wales, Somerset, Gloucestershire and Devon, inundating some areas several miles inland. People at the time were no strangers to storms or high tides – but this was different.

Churches were inundated. Entire villages vanished. Vast stretches of farmland were ruined by saltwater, leaving communities facing hunger as well as grief. Memorial plaques in local churches and parish documents still mark the scale of the catastrophe.

Much of what we know about how the event unfolded comes from chapbooks, which were cheaply printed pamphlets sold in the early 17th century. These accounts describe not just the damage, but the terrifying speed and character of the water itself.

One such pamphlet, God’s Warning to His People of England, describes a calm morning suddenly interrupted by what witnesses saw approaching from the sea:

Upon Tuesday 20 January 1606 there happened such an overflowing of waters … the like never in the memory of man hath been seen or heard of. For about nine of the morning, many of the inhabitants of these countreys … perceive afar off huge and mighty hilles of water tombling over one another, in such sort as if the greatest mountains in the world had overwhelmed the lowe villages or marshy grounds.

Our interest in the event arose from reading that account. It gives a specific time for the inundation – around nine in the morning – and emphasises the fair weather and sudden arrival of the floodwaters.

From a geographer’s perspective, this description is striking. Sudden onset, wave-like forms and an absence of storm conditions are not typical of storm surges. To us, the language was reminiscent of eyewitness accounts of tsunamis elsewhere in the world. This suggested a tsunami origin for the flood should be evaluated.

Until the early 2000s, few researchers seriously questioned the storm-surge explanation. But as we revisited the historical sources, we began to ask whether the physical landscape might also preserve clues to what happened in 1607. If an extreme marine inundation had struck the coast at that time, it may have left geological evidence behind.

In several locations around the estuary, we identified a suite of features with a chronological link to the early 17th century: the erosion of two spurs of land that previously jutted out into the estuary, the removal of almost all fringing salt marsh deposits, and the occurrence of sand layers in otherwise muddy deposits

These features point to a high-energy event. The question was what kind?

Testing the theory

To explore this further, we undertook a programme of fieldwork in 2004. We examined sand layers and noted signatures of tsunami impact such as coastal erosion, and analysed the movement of large boulders along the shoreline. Boulder transport is particularly useful, as it allows estimates of the wave heights needed to move them.

Some fieldwork was filmed for a BBC documentary broadcast in April 2005, which featured other colleagues too. It included an argument for a storm, but also another suggesting it isn’t fanciful to consider that an offshore earthquake provided the trigger.

Our results were published in 2007, coincidentally the 400th anniversary of the flood. In parallel, colleagues published a compelling model supporting a storm surge. The scientific debate, rather than being resolved, intensified.

An updating of wave heights based on boulder data using refined formula was published in 2021, suggesting a minimum tsunami wave height of 4.2 metres is required to explain the coastal features – whereas, according to the calculations, storm waves of over 16 metres would be required. This is perhaps unlikely within the relatively sheltered Severn estuary.

The low-lying coasts around the Bristol Channel remain vulnerable to flooding. Storm surges occur regularly, though usually with more limited effects. Climate change is now increasing the risk through rising sea levels and more intense weather systems.

Tsunamis, by contrast, are rare. A report by the UK government’s Department for Environment, Food & Rural Affairs found it unlikely that the 1607 flood may have been caused by one. However, it also noted that offshore southwest Britain is among the more credible locations for a future tsunami, triggered by seismic activity or submarine landslides.

This distinction matters. Storm surges can usually be forecast. Tsunamis may arrive with little or no warning.

Scholarly and public interest in the flood has not waned. In November 2024, a Channel 5 documentary brought together several strands of recent research, concluding that the jury is still out on the flood’s cause.

That uncertainty should not be seen as a failure. Evaluating competing explanations is essential when trying to understand extreme events in the past – especially when those events have implications for present-day risk.

Whether the flood of 1607 was driven by storm winds, unusual tides or waves generated far offshore, its lesson is clear. Coastal societies ignore rare disasters at their peril.

The sea has come in before. And it will do so again.The Conversation

Simon Haslett, Pro Vice-Chancellor and Professor of Physical Geography, Bath Spa UniversitySwansea University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Section from a woodcut from the title page of ‘Lamentable newes out of Monmouthshire’ in Wales, an English-language news book of 1607. The Granger Collection/Alamy

Rethinking Troy: how years of careful peace, not epic war, shaped this bronze age city

Stephan BlumUniversity of Tübingen

Imagine a city that thrived for thousands of years, its streets alive with workshops, markets and the laughter of children, yet that is remembered for a single night of fire. That city is Troy.

Long before Homer’s epics immortalised its fall, Troy was a place of everyday life. Potters shaped jars and bowls destined to travel far beyond the settlement itself, moving through wide horizons of exchange and connection.

Bronze tools rang in busy workshops. Traders called across the marketplace and children chased one another along sun‑warmed footpaths. This was the real heartbeat of Troy – the story history has forgotten.

Homer’s late eighth‑century BC epic poems, the Iliad and the Odyssey, fixed powerful images in western cultural memory: heroes clashing, a wooden horse dragged through city gates, flames licking the night sky. Yet this dramatic ending hides a far longer, far more remarkable story: centuries of cooperation embedded in everyday social organisation. A story we might call the Trojan peace.

This selective memory is not unique to Troy. Across history, spectacular collapses dominate how we imagine the past: Rome burning in AD64Carthage razed in 146BC and the Aztec capital Tenochtitlán falling in AD1521. Sudden catastrophe is vivid and memorable. The slow, fragile work of maintaining stability is easier to overlook.

The Trojan peace was not the absence of tension or inequality. It was the everyday ability to manage them without society breaking apart, the capacity to absorb pressure through routine cooperation rather than dramatic intervention.

When catastrophe outshines stability

Archaeology often speaks loudest when something goes catastrophically wrong. Fires preserve. Ruins cling to the soil like charcoal fingerprints. Peace, by contrast, leaves no single dramatic moment to anchor it.

Its traces survive in the ordinary: footpaths worn smooth by generations of feet; jars repaired, reused and handled for decades, some still bearing the drilled holes of ancient mending. These humble remnants form the true architecture of long‑term stability.

Troy is a textbook example. Archaeologists have identified nine major layers at the site, some of which are associated with substantial architectural reorganisation. But that isn’t evidence of destruction. Rather it simply reflects the everyday reality of a settlement’s history: building, use, maintenance or levelling, rebuilding and repetition.

Instead, I argue that Troy’s archaeological record reveals centuries of architectural continuity, stable coastal occupation and trade networks stretching from Mesopotamia to the Aegean and the Balkans – a geography of connection rather than conflict.

The only evidence for truly massive destruction that can be identified dates to around 2350BC. Against the broader archaeological backdrop, this stands out as a rare, fiery rupture – one dramatic episode within a much longer pattern of recovery and continuity.

Whether sparked by conflict, social unrest or an accident, it interrupted only briefly the long continuity of daily life – more than a thousand years before the events portrayed by the poet Homer in his tale of the Trojan war were supposed to have taken place.

But what actually held Troy together for so long? During the third and second millennia BC, Troy was a modest but highly connected coastal hub, thriving through exchange, craft specialisation, shared material traditions and the steady movement of ideas and goods.

The real drivers of Troy’s development were households, traders and craftspeople. Their lives depended on coordination and reciprocity: managing water and farmland, organising production, securing vital resources such as bronze and negotiating movement along the coast. In modern terms, peace was work, negotiated daily, maintained collectively and never guaranteed.

When crises arose, the community adapted. Labour was reorganised, resources redistributed, routines adjusted. Stability was restored not through force, but through collective problem solving embedded in everyday practice.

This was not a utopia. Troy’s stability was constrained by environmental limits, population pressure and finite resources. A successful trading season could bring prosperity; a failed harvest could strain systems quickly. Peace was never about eliminating conflict, but about absorbing pressure without collapse.

Satellite image of the bronze age citadel of Troy.
Satellite image of the bronze age citadel of Troy. Over more than two millennia, successive phases of construction accumulated at the same location, forming a settlement mound rising over 15 metres above the surrounding landscape. University of Çanakkale/Rüstem AslanCC BY

Archaeologically, this long-term balance appears as persistence: settlement layouts maintained across generations, skills refined and passed down, and gradual expansion from the citadel into what would later become the lower town. These developments depended on negotiation and cooperation, not conquest, revealing practical mechanisms of peace in the bronze age.

Why we remember the war

Stories favour rupture over routine. Homer’s Iliad was never a historical account of the bronze age, but a poetic reflection of heroism, morality, power and loss. The long, quiet centuries of cooperation before and after were too distant – and too subtle – to dramatise.

Modern archaeology has often followed the same gravitational pull. Excavations at Troy began with the explicit aim of locating the battlefield of the Trojan war. Even as scholarship moved on, the story of war continued to dominate the public imagination. War offers a clear narrative. Peace leaves behind complexity.

Reexamining Troy through the lens of peace shifts attention away from moments of destruction and towards centuries of continuity. Archaeology shows how communities without states, armies, or written law sustained stability through everyday practices of cooperation. What kept Troy going was not grand strategy, but the quiet work of living together, generation after generation.

The real miracle of Troy was not how it fell – but for how long it endured. Rethinking the cherished narrative of the Trojan war reminds us that lasting peace is built not in dramatic moments, but through the persistent, creative efforts of ordinary people.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.


This article features references to books that have been included for editorial reasons, and may contain links to bookshop.org. If you click on one of the links and go on to buy something from bookshop.org The Conversation UK may earn a commission.The Conversation

Stephan Blum, Research Associate, Institute for Prehistory and Early History and Medieval Archaeology, University of Tübingen

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

In ancient Mesopotamia, what was a ziggurat?

The ziggurat of Ur is in modern-day Iraq. حسن/Unsplash
Eva Anagnostou-LaoutidesMacquarie University and Michael B. CharlesSouthern Cross University

A ziggurat (also spelled ziqqurat) was a raised platform with four sloping sides that looked like a tiered pyramid.

Ziggurats were common in ancient Mesopotamia (roughly modern Iraq) from around 4,000 to 500 BCE.

Unlike the Egyptian pyramids, they were not places of royal burials, but temples dedicated to the patron deity of a city.

How were they made?

Stone was relatively rare in Mesopotamia, so ziggurats were mainly made of sun-dried mudbricks coated with limestone and bitumen (a sticky, tar-like substance).

Their sides were decorated with grooved stripes and were often plastered with lime mortar or gypsum and glazed in various colours.

Unlike the pyramids, they had no internal chambers. The actual shrine was at the top of the structure where the god resided. It was accessible by steps and was believed to be a meeting point between heaven and earth.

Ziggurats towered over the centre of ancient Mesopotamian cities; as archaeological evidence indicates, they were typically built next to the palace or the temple of a city’s patron god to stress the role of the god in supporting the king.

How the Anu ziggurat became the White Temple

The Anu ziggurat, the oldest known, was built at Uruk (modern-day Warka, about 250 kilometres south of Baghdad) by the Sumerians around 4,000 BCE. (The Sumerians were an ancient people, among the first known to have established cities, who lived roughly in the area of modern Iraq, between the Tigris and Euphrates rivers.)

This ziggurat was dedicated to Anu, their sky god. Sometime between 3,500 and 3,000 BCE, the so-called White Temple was built on top of it.

The White Temple, approximately 12 metres high, was so named because it was entirely whitewashed inside and out. It must have shone dazzlingly in the sun.
The Sumerian culture was eventually taken over by the Akkadian Empire, followed by the Babylonian and Assyrian Empires. Throughout the rise and fall of empires, ziggurats continued to be built in the Ancient Near East.

In fact, the word ziggurat comes from the Akkadian verb zaqâru, meaning “to build high”.

Other famous ziggurats

Assyrian kings built an impressive ziggurat in their capital, Nimrud (about 30 kilometres south of Mosul). This ziggurat was dedicated to Ninurta, a Sumerian and Akkadian god of war and victory.

Ninurta’s father, the god Enlil, was worshipped at the ziggurat of the sacred city Nippur, in modern-day Iraq.

The Babylonian king Nebuchadnezzar II dedicated the ziggurat Etemenanki to the Babylonian king of gods, Marduk. The name Etemenanki means the Temple of the Foundation of Heaven and Earth.

Etemenanki was located north of a different temple called the Esagil, which was Marduk’s main temple in Babylon.

Etemenanki likely inspired the story of the Tower of Babel in the Old Testament. Genesis 11 refers to a “tower” built of mud bricks instead of stone, which was intended to reach the heavens.

The building, perceived as an act of human pride, angered God, who caused the people to speak different languages and scattered them across the Earth.

According to the Greek historian Herodotus, Marduk often chose a woman to spend the night with him in the top-most shrine of his ziggurat.

The text has been often understood to refer to a “sacred marriage” rite involving the sexual union of a woman with the god.

However, it seems more likely to have been an incubation rite, when the god’s will is revealed to someone sleeping in a sacred place.

Constant preservation

Because of the relative lack of durability of mud bricks, ziggurats required constant preservation.

Etemenanki in Babylon had to be rebuilt several times until Alexander the Great ordered his soldiers to destroy it in 323 BCE so as to rebuild it from scratch.

However, Alexander’s premature death (historians continue to debate what he died of) meant the task had to be completed by his successors. But whether the rebuilding task was ever completed is uncertain.

Better preserved ziggurats include the Ziggurat of Ur (in the region of modern-day Tell el-Muqayyar in Iraq). The powerful king, Ur-Nammu, dedicated this ziggurat to the moon god, Nanna or Sîn, around 2100 BCE.

Another example is the ziggurat of Chogha Zanbil in modern Iran, which was built around 1250 BCE. It now stands only 24.5 metres tall, instead of the original estimated 53 metres.

The ChoghaZanbil Ziggurat, Khuzestan Province, Iran
Another example of a famous ziggurat is the one of Chogha Zanbil in Iran. Sam Moghadam Khamseh/Unsplash

A lasting influence on architecture

Ziggurats influenced architecture long after their demise, including the new tiered “skyscrapers” of the art deco era in the 20th century.

Modern ziggurats ended up dotting the New York skyline.

The Empire State building sits against the New York skyline.
The Empire State Building is quite ziggurat-like. Kit Suman/Unsplash

And, if you look closely, you’ll see that there’s a fair amount of ziggurat about the Empire State Building.

These modern examples serve as a fascinating reminder of a design and construction language that goes back to the Middle East over six millennia ago.The Conversation

Eva Anagnostou-Laoutides, Associate Professor in Ancient History, Australian Research Council Future Fellow, Macquarie University and Michael B. Charles, Associate Professor, Management Discipline, Faculty of Business, Arts and Law, Southern Cross University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

A red Moon, a blue Moon, a supermoon and more: your guide to the southern sky in 2026

Izhar Khan / AFP
Nick LombUniversity of Southern Queensland

What will we see in the southern sky in 2026? A total eclipse of the Moon (at a convenient time), a blue Moon and a supermoon, the two brightest planets close together, and Jupiter disappearing behind the Moon in the daytime.

All except one of these events can be seen with the unaided eye, even in light-polluted cities.

In addition to these special events, we will see the annual procession of meteor showers and the nightly parade of constellations. Though best seen from a dark country location, the most interesting of these can still be seen from cities.

Here are some of the year’s highlights.

March, May and December: the Moon

An eclipse of the Moon (or lunar eclipse) will take place on the evening of Tuesday March 3. During the eclipse, the full Moon moves into the shadow of Earth and is likely to turn a red or coppery colour.

This is because sunlight is bent or refracted by Earth’s atmosphere onto the Moon. The bent light is red – it is the glow of sunrises and sunsets from around the globe.

Lunar eclipses are safe to watch with the unaided eye and offer a good opportunity for nighttime photography. For successful images, the camera or phone needs to be able to take timed exposures and should be firmly supported on a tripod or similar.

Seen from Australia’s south-east, totality (when the Moon is completely obscured) will occur between 10:04pm and 11:03pm local time. From Brisbane the times are an hour earlier, while from Perth the times are three hours earlier. From Aotearoa New Zealand totality will begin just after midnight.

Another lunar event is a “blue Moon” on Sunday May 31. This is a name sometimes given to the second full Moon in a single calendar month. This happens, on average, once every two or three years.

The final Moon event is a “supermoon” on Christmas eve, Thursday December 24. This occurs when a full Moon falls when the Moon is at the closest point to Earth in its monthly orbit.

This means the full Moon appears a little larger than usual. The supermoon looks most spectacular at moonrise, as an illusion in our brains magnifies the effect when the Moon is close to the horizon.

April, June and November: planets

Before dawn on the mornings of April 19–22, the planets Mercury, Mars and Saturn will form a tight bunch in the sky. Look towards the east.

A simulated view of the night sky with three planets clustered together.
Mercury, Mars and Saturn form a tight bunch in the sky at 5am on April 20 – look to the east. Stellarium

On the evenings of Tuesday June 9 and Wednesday June 10, the two brightest planets, Venus and Jupiter, pass within three moon-widths of each other from our point of view.

On Tuesday November 3, the crescent Moon will pass in front of Jupiter. Although this happens during the day, it will be visible with a pair of binoculars. (Note: do not point binoculars at the Sun! Children must be fully supervised.)

Times vary across Australia and New Zealand. From Sydney, the bright edge of the Moon covers Jupiter at 10:40am and Jupiter reappears at the dark edge at 11:39am.

The crescent moon with a planet drawn above and below.
The disappearance of Jupiter behind the Moon and its reappearance in the daytime sky of November 3 2026. Stellarium/Nick LombCC BY

December: meteor shower

Before dawn on mornings in mid-December, there is a favourable opportunity to view the Geminid meteor shower, one of the best such showers during the year. The shower occurs when the Earth runs into a stream of dust left behind by a rocky asteroid called Phaethon.

As the dust particles burn up in the atmosphere 100km or so above our heads, brief streaks of light called meteors can be seen. This year there is a good chance to see them, as the Moon will not brighten the sky.

This year, the peak of the shower is predicted for the early morning of Tuesday December 15. To see the meteors, try to find the darkest spot you can, and look towards the north as shown below. The meteors will appear to radiate from a point near Castor, in the Gemini constellation.

Stars above the horizon, showing two labelled Castor and Pollux
The night sky as seen from Toowoomba at 4am on 15 December 2026. The stars Castor and Pollux in the constellation Gemini are seen high to the north. Stellarium

January and December: Taurus

Many of the constellations in the European tradition, visible from the northern hemisphere, were named in ancient times. Explorers and astronomers venturing south of the equator in the 18th century named most of the rest.

Previously, I have discussed the well-known constellations Orion and Scorpius and the Southern Cross and Sagittarius. For 2026, I want to talk about the zodiac constellation of Taurus, the Bull.

The best way to find Taurus is to extend a line downwards from the three stars of Orion’s belt until you reach a bright reddish star called Aldebaran.

Aldebaran sits in an inverted V-shaped group of stars. This is the Bull’s head, upside down for us as it was named in the northern hemisphere. The other stars in the group are part of a cluster called the Hyades.

Stars with connecting lines.
The main stars of the constellation of Taurus, the Bull. Nick LombCC BY

Another cluster in Taurus is the Pleiades. This is named the Seven Sisters, not just in the European tradition, but by cultures around the world, including First Nations people of Australia.

With the unaided eye, most people can only see six stars in this compact cluster, but hundreds can been seen through a telescope. In 2025 astronomers found the Pleiades likely contains 20 times as many stars as previously thought.


The information in this article comes from the 2026 Australasian Sky Guide. The guide has monthly star maps and more information to help with viewing and enjoying the night sky from Australia and Aotearoa New Zealand.The Conversation

Nick Lomb, Adjunct Professor, Centre for Astrophysics, University of Southern Queensland

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Beach swimming was once banned in Australia. How did it become a treasured pastime?

Sophie Peng/Unsplash
Anna ClarkUniversity of Technology Sydney

While the beach and swimming culture might feel like an intrinsic part of “Australianness”, this hasn’t always been the case. For many of us, swimming lessons, school swimming carnivals and weekends at the beach are defining childhood memories.

That deep connection to beach swimming helps explain why our responses to the Sydney region’s recent shark attacks and health concerns over South Australia’s algal bloom crisis feel like a form of collective grieving.

Swimming at the beach is seen as healing. It brings us together and connects people to the natural world. Yet our apparently intrinsic swimming identity is something that’s emerged over time. Our attitudes to swimming and beach-going have shifted according to social values and politics.

The “beach bodies” we celebrate as healthy and desirable would have been unthinkable in the 19th century, when sea bathing was a furtive, private affair for colonial Australians. Daytime public bathing was widely banned until around the early 1900s, when restrictions began to lift. And even when we did eventually hold swimming races, our first swimmers were hardly Olympic standard.

Meanwhile, a recent study by Royal Surf Lifesaving Australia warns that swimming culture might be on the retreat: fewer children are competing in swimming carnivals, or even have competence in the water. Drowning deaths increased last summer and swimming ability is falling “below minimum standards”, the report argues: 48% of Year 6 students and 84% of year 10 students are not meeting expected benchmarks for their age.

My research shows that Australia’s swimming culture didn’t evolve by accident: it was actively nurtured by swimming advocates and public education programs. A concerted public effort will be required to boost swimming skills and water safety once more.

Swimmers and paddlers at Bondi, circa 1900. State Library New South Wales

Danger, modesty and bans

While most settler-colonial Australian coast dwellers in the 19th century viewed ocean bathing as essential for hygiene, being in the water also channelled all sorts of panics.

The ocean was a place where you drowned when ships went down, got taken by sharks, or simply succumbed to its depths. The beach was perilous. It took people.

Fear of the water also had a moral element. Bathing was necessary, but done in private and with modesty.

The swimming and diving feats of First Nations men and women were frequently commented on by colonists and observers. Aboriginal people “are bold and surprisingly expert, both in swimming and diving”, wrote William Govett in the Saturday Magazine in 1836.

In 1843, the missionary James Backhouse described Aboriginal women in Lutruwita (Tasmania) diving for crayfish “often using the long stems of the kelp to enable them to reach the bottom; these they handle as dextrously as a sailor would a rope in descending”.

And in Lieutenant William Dawes’ famous Dharug wordlist from 1790-91, we get the term “bóg’i” – to bathe or swim. (It’s a word still used today: “bogey holes” are features at Bronte Beach and Newcastle, where people can safely enjoy an ocean dip.)

Aboriginal Australians spearing fish and diving for shellfish, New South Wales, ca. 1817. Joseph Lycett, National Library of Australia

But in 1810, Governor Lachlan Macquarie banned public bathing in and around Sydney Cove. The colonial bathing prohibition was extended in 1838 to all towns in New South Wales, “for the maintenance of the public peace and good order”. It was incorporated into the Colony’s Police Act:

it shall not be lawful for any person to bathe near to or within view of any public wharf quay bridge street road or other place of public resort within the limits of any of the towns aforesaid between the hours of six o'clock in the morning and eight in the evening.

To avoid prosecution, women and men discretely bathed behind privacy screens and segregated areas, away from public gaze, or at dawn and dusk, until the daytime bathing bans were lifted in the early decades of the 1900s.

Some people in the colonies could and did swim. Swimming races and demonstrations were held in places designated for segregated swimming, like Robinson’s Baths in Sydney’s Woolloomooloo Bay, or St Kilda Baths in Melbourne, during the middle decades of the 1800s.

Swimming races and demonstrations were held at places like the St Kilda Baths (pictured in 1910). State Library Victoria

Yet these carnivals were largely for entertainment and betting, rather than universal rites of passage. And mixed bathing continued to be scorned and policed until the turn of the 20th century.

During one Sydney competition in 1852, only two men entered the 100-yard race, and neither contestant swam overarm until the final few metres of the race, briefly accelerating their more sedate sidestroke.

Over the course of the 1800s, values about morality and modesty gradually shifted as views around gender, health and fitness changed – along with ideas about leisure and pleasure.

An 1860 news story about swimming matches in Port Phillip Bay touted the potential of swimming to strengthen both communities and physical bodies. “It is gratifying to see so many youngsters good swimmers,” the Melbourne Argus reported.

There was a significant racial element in all this, too, as the work of historians Marilyn Lake, Henry Reynolds and others explores. The colonies were anxious about their geographical isolation from Britain and obsessed with how their citizens might “measure up”.

At a time when ideas about bodily vigour and good health were growing, swimming was also viewed as a form of exercise acceptable for women. But swimming didn’t just promote physical fitness. Knowing how to swim was essential for public safety, especially for the Empire’s youngest subjects.

“The accidents that so often occur during the summer season would be reduced to a minimum, if women would but learn to swim,” one 1876 article from the Illustrated Sydney News insisted.

Swim safety and beach bodies

By the late 1890s, school swimming lessons had begun in Victoria and New South Wales. Amateur swimming associations were established around the country during this period. They advocated for the construction of public baths and the provision of lessons, along with that now famous rite of passage, the swimming carnival.

Bathing – once furtive and modest – was increasingly replaced with public swimming, for women and men. The more popular swimming became, the more people visited the beach.

In turn, people who visited the beach to swim, rather than stroll or splash up to their knees, further nibbled at 19th-century Victorian strictures of decorum. By the end of the 19th century, beach bodies were becoming markers of good health and virtue, rather than something to hide.

By the end of the 19th century, ‘beach bodies’ had become something to celebrate (like here, at this 1940s Bondi Beach carnival) rather than hide. State Library New South Wales

Surf life saving clubs

As the popularity of beach swimming grew, however, its physical dangers were thrown into ever sharper relief. Reports of tragic deaths were regular news right around the country.

Children were especially vulnerable. Newspapers reported stories like the drowning death of young Leslie Mitchell in December 1900. Seen wading knee-deep at St Kilda beach, he was found face down in the water only minutes later.

As accidents mounted, notes historian Caroline Ford, civic responses also grew. Many beachside communities established lifesaving clubs, like Bondi (formed in 1907), Cottesloe (in 1909) and Tweed Heads and Coolangatta (in 1911), and provided life-saving equipment like life-rings and surf-lines. There were also government inquiries into beach safety, which recommended funding for public education and surf lifesavers.

Many beachside communities, like Manly (pictured in 1900-1910) formed lifesaving clubs in the early 1900s. National Museum of Australia

The Surf Bathing Association of New South Wales, formed in 1907, soon became the Surf Life Saving Association of Australia, and quickly expanded as clubs around the country were created.

The shift from furtive bather to confident beach swimmer reflected changing social attitudes. It also occurred during a critical time of emerging national identity – and federation.

Beach bodies became idealised figures of strength: admirable and desirable, rather than something to be ashamed of. Australian swimmers like Mina WylieAndrew “Boy” CharltonFanny Durack, and Annette Kellerman, were national heroes and celebrities. They won international races, appeared in variety shows and drew enormous crowds.

Australian swimmers Fanny Durack (gold) and Mina Wylie (silver) and the UK’s Jennie Fletcher (bronze) after the 100 metres freestyle at the 1912 Olympic Games. Wikimedia Commons

While that freedom-loving, strong and capable beach figure celebrated in popular culture at the time might have been bronzed by the sun, it was invariably white. The Immigration Restriction Act was one of the first pieces of federal legislation passed by the new nation in 1901 and it enshrined the White Australia policy.

The beach was a national leveller, of sorts, but only if you were actually welcome to sit on the sand in the first place.

Throughout the 20th century, as swimming became a sign of Australian egalitarianism and physical health, it was also a site of exclusion, as the 1965 Freedom Ride and 2005 Cronulla race riots demonstrate.

Australia’s celebration of beach and swimming culture – in all its complexity – went on to become a defining feature of national identity. And significant efforts supported by governments, surf lifesaving and community groups have attempted to make the beach an inclusive, safe place for everyone.

Ensuring beach safety is an ongoing part of those efforts.The Conversation

Anna Clark, Professor in Public History, University of Technology Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

AvPals Term 1 2026 Short Courses at Newport

Avalon Computer Pals (AVPALS) helps seniors build and improve their computer and technology skills. AvPals is a not-for-profit organisation run by volunteers. Since 2000, we have helped thousands of seniors from complete beginners to people who just want to improve or update their skills. We offer one to one personal tuition or small group short courses.

Short courses are run at Newport Community Centre every Tuesday afternoon in school terms. Full details of this term’s courses are available at Newport Short Courses and bookings can be made on our Course Bookings webpage.

Find out more at: www.avpals.com

MWP Care Seeking Volunteers

Our business relies on the kindness of strangers...
Looking for a way to give back without giving up your lifestyle?

Become part of our Volunteer IMPACT Club and gain access to exercise classes, social events, Silver Surfers, tables at trivia as well as training and development workshops! Plus – have your petrol re-imbursed!!

Volunteering with MWP fits around your life and your schedule, letting you make a real impact in your local community. Enjoy meeting like-minded people, learning new skills, and knowing that your time is changing lives every day.
Your Time. Your Way. Your Impact. 

Find out more here: mwpcare.com.au/get-involved

Congratulations to 2026 Senior Australian of the Year: National Seniors

COTA Australia and National Seniors Australia (NSA) have congratulated 2026 Senior Australian of the Year, Professor Henry Brodaty AO, for his work transforming the diagnosis, care, and prevention of dementia.

Motivated by his father’s diagnosis with Alzheimer’s disease in 1972, Professor Brodaty embarked on a career that transformed psychiatry and the lives of people living with dementia and their families.

In 2012, Professor Brodaty co-founded the Centre for Healthy Brain Ageing and led research that enhanced the world’s understanding of risk and prevention. His Maintain Your Brain trial showed that cost-effective and targeted interventions can significantly delay onset and even prevent the now leading cause of death for Australians.

See:

NSA Chief Executive Officer, Chris Grice, said he was delighted 78-year-old Professor Brodaty’s lifetime work transforming the lives of people living with dementia – through advancing scientific knowledge to providing invaluable support and resources – has been recognised.

“Professor Brodaty’s well-deserved recognition demonstrates the importance of his experience and work, as evidenced through his international research that has enhanced the world’s understanding of the risk and prevention of dementia,” Mr Grice said. 

“Too often, older Australians, despite their experience, are portrayed as problems instead of solutions. The ageing population is seen as an impending cost as opposed to a potential opportunity. The number of people aged 65+ is expected to grow by 2.35 million by 2041, and those aged 85+ expected to grow by almost 750,000 over the same time.  

“Professor Brodaty, and the Senior Australian of the Year award, reinforce that older people contribute in ways that can’t be measured. Without these builders and their experience, Australia wouldn’t be what it is today.”  

It is a philosophy at the heart of NSA’s Experience Matters campaign designed to change the perception and portrayal of older Australians; to promote the importance and impart the benefits of knowledge, wisdom, and insight gained during a lifetime of experience. 

“A true pioneer and leader, Professor Brodaty embodies and exemplifies the very essence of experience and with it, the potential of an undervalued cohort,” Mr Grice said.  

“We congratulate Professor Brodaty for the difference he is making to people diagnosed with dementia in Australia and around the world, and the example he has set to all Australians that Experience Matters.”
COTA Australia – the leading advocacy organisation for older people – Chief Executive Officer Patricia Sparrow said Professor Brodaty’s life-long commitment to improving outcomes for people living with dementia and their families has changed countless lives.

“Professor Brodaty’s work has fundamentally reshaped how we understand, treat and prevent dementia,” Ms Sparrow said.

“His leadership has helped move dementia from something that was once poorly understood and often ignored, to an area of care grounded in evidence, dignity and hope.

“With dementia now the leading cause of death in Australia, continuing the work Professor Brodaty has championed is critical to saving lives and improving quality of life for future generations.

“His work reminds us that investing in brain health today is an investment in all our futures.”

Ms Sparrow also congratulated all Senior Australian of the Year finalists, acknowledging their remarkable contributions to communities across the country.

“Every finalist has made a profound difference in the lives of others,” she said.

“The Senior Australian of the Year awards highlight something COTA Australia knows well: there is no age limit on impact, leadership or the ability to create positive change.”

This year’s Senior Australian of the Year finalists included:
  • Senior Australian of the Year for the NT, Jenny Duggan OAM
  • Senior Australians of the Year for the ACT – Heather Reid AM
  • Senior Australian of the Year for Western Australia – Professor Kingsley Dixon AO
  • Senior Australian of the Year for Victoria – Bryan Lipmann AM
  • Senior Australian of the Year for South Australia – James Currie
  • Senior Australian of the Year for South Australia – Malcolm Benoy
  • Senior Australian of the Year for Tasmania – Julie Dunbabin
  • Senior Australian of the Year for Queensland – Cheryl Harris OAM
Our area also had a wonderful nomination for Senior Australian of the Year in the Founder of the Men's Kitchens.


Local Men's Kitchens

Forestville Kitchen
Forestville Community Hall: 28 Melwood Avenue, Forestville.
2nd Wednesday, 3rd Thursda,  3rd Friday and Last Friday each month apart from December 2025. Next sessions are 12th and 20th, 21st and 28th of November 2025

Warriewood Kitchen
Located at the Ted Blackwood Centre: Cnr. Jacksons and Boondah Roads.
1st Wednesday, 2nd Wednesday and 3rd Wednesday each month apart from December 2025. Next sessions are 12th and 19th of November 2025

Seaforth Kitchen
Our Seaforth Kitchen is located in the Seaforth Oval Pavilion and Community Centre, Wakehurst Parkway.
3rd Tuesday, 1st Thursday, 4th Friday each month apart from December 2025. Next sessions are 18th and 28th of November.


Men’s Kitchen at Warriewood - looks like a great bread and butter pudding.

2026 Resident Experience Survey has started

The 2026 Residents’ Experience Survey has started. The survey gives aged care residents an opportunity to share feedback on the care and services they receive.

The survey is conducted by Access Care Network Australia (ACNA). As an independent third party, ACNA ensures residents can speak freely and honestly.

To allow a fair representation at each home, at least 20% of residents will be randomly selected and invited to participate.

Survey results help aged care homes understand what is working well and where they might need to improve. The results also make up 33% of an aged care home’s overall Star Rating. Star Ratings help older people, their families and carers make informed choices about care. 

Small improvements in sleep, physical activity and diet are linked with a longer life

CandyRetriever/Shutterstock
Eef HogervorstLoughborough University

We may not need to completely overhaul our lives to live healthier for longer, according to a large UK-based study. This is welcome news, particularly as many people will already have abandoned their New Year’s resolutions.

The recent study followed around 590,000 people in the UK, with an average age of 64, over an eight-year period. The researchers confirmed earlier findings that healthier lifestyles are associated with lower risk of disease, including dementia, and with living longer in good health and independence.

The authors reported that even very small changes were associated with such benefits. These included around five additional minutes of sleep per night, two extra minutes per day of moderate to vigorous physical activity, and modest improvements in diet. Together, these changes were associated with roughly one additional year of healthy life. “Healthy life” here refers to years lived without major illness or disability that limits daily functioning.

More substantial changes were linked to larger gains. Almost half an hour of extra sleep per night, combined with four additional minutes of exercise per day, which adds up to nearly half an hour of extra activity per week, along with further dietary improvements, was associated with up to four additional healthy years of life.

This matters because, although women live longer on average than men, those extra years are often spent in poorer health, with significant personal and economic costs. Women face a higher risk of dementia, stroke and heart disease at older ages, as well as conditions that lead to vision loss and bone fractures. These illnesses can reduce quality of life and threaten independence.

Lifestyle change may also reduce the risk of early death. The same lifestyle factors examined in this cohort were analysed last year in a separate study, which focused on mortality (the risk of dying).

In that analysis, people who followed healthier lifestyle patterns over an eight-year period had a 10% lower risk of death in that period. The combination of 15 extra minutes of sleep per night, two additional minutes of moderate to vigorous physical activity per day and a healthy diet was linked to a modest reduction in the risk of dying. A much larger reduction of 64% was seen among people who slept between seven and eight hours per night, ate a healthy diet and engaged in between 42 and 103 additional minutes of moderate to vigorous physical activity per week. Importantly, this benefit was only seen when these behaviours occurred together. Diet alone had no measurable effect, for instance.

Strengths and limitations

One of the key strengths of these studies is that they show health benefits at very low thresholds of behaviour change. This reduces the likelihood that the results are driven only by people who are already healthier or more motivated, and makes the findings more applicable to older adults and those with limited capacity to change their routines.

Another strength is the use of objective measurements rather than self-reported data. Physical activity and sleep were measured using wearable devices, rather than relying on participants to estimate their own behaviour. Self-reporting can be unreliable, particularly for people with memory problems, such as those in the early stages of dementia.

However, there are important limitations. The objective measurements were only collected for three to seven days, which may not reflect people’s long-term habits. From personal experience, wearing activity trackers can lead people to exercise more while they are being monitored, but these changes are often short-lived.

In addition, wrist-worn accelerometers estimate sleep and activity based on movement. During deep sleep, people move very little, but lack of movement does not always mean someone is asleep. These devices may therefore not fully capture true sleep patterns or physical activity levels. Other methods, such as thigh-mounted sensors or mattress-based sensors that detect movement during sleep, may provide more accurate assessments.

Despite these issues, objective measurements are generally more reliable than self-report. Still, because behaviour was only measured once, it is unclear whether actual changes in behaviour over time influenced health outcomes. It is also not clear whether the recorded activity reflected leisure-time exercise or physical activity at work, which can have different effects on health.

Dietary information presents another challenge. Diet was self-reported and collected three to nine years before collection of sleep and activity data. Diets often change over time, particularly after diagnoses such as cardiovascular disease, where people may be advised to reduce their cholesterol intake, or in conditions such as dementia, where people may forget to eat. As a result, it is difficult to know whether diet influenced disease risk, or whether emerging disease altered diet, eventually contributing to poor health and earlier death.

There are also broader social factors to consider. Healthy behaviours tend to cluster together and are strongly linked to education and financial security. For example, smoking and having overweight and obesity are closely associated with deprivation and poverty.

Participants in the UK Biobank, a large long-term health research project that collects genetic, lifestyle and health data from hundreds of thousands of UK adults, are generally healthier than the average UK population.

Health research often attracts people who are healthier, better educated and more financially secure. This may reflect both interest in research and having the time and resources to take part in such studies.

Wealth also shapes exposure to risk. People with higher incomes are less likely to live in areas with high levels of pollution and are more likely to have control over their working conditions and finances. Financial stress can affect sleep quality, leading to fatigue and reducing the likelihood of exercising, shopping for fresh food, or preparing healthy meals. Over a lifetime, these factors contribute to poorer health and earlier death.

Although researchers attempted to account for these influences using statistical methods, these are deeply interconnected and difficult to separate. The widening health-wealth gap, with many people now living in severe poverty, highlights the limits of personal responsibility. These structural issues require action from policymakers, rather than placing the burden solely on people who may have very little control over the conditions that shape their health.The Conversation

Eef Hogervorst, Professor of Biological Psychology, Loughborough University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

People who survive cancers are less likely to develop Alzheimer’s – this might be why

Dragon Images/Shutterstock.com
Justin StebbingAnglia Ruskin University

Cancer and Alzheimer’s disease are two of the most feared diagnoses in medicine, but they rarely strike the same person. For years, epidemiologists have noticed that people with cancer seem less likely to develop Alzheimer’s, and those with Alzheimer’s are less likely to get cancer, but nobody could explain why.

new study in mice suggests a surprising possibility: certain cancers may actually send a protective signal to the brain that helps clear away the toxic protein clumps linked to Alzheimer’s disease.

Alzheimer’s is characterised by sticky deposits of a protein called amyloid beta that build up between nerve cells in the brain. These clumps, or plaques, interfere with communication between nerve cells and trigger inflammation and damage that slowly erodes memory and thinking.

In the new study, scientists implanted human lung, prostate and colon tumours under the skin of mice bred to develop Alzheimer‑like amyloid plaques. Left alone, these animals reliably develop dense clumps of amyloid beta in their brains as they age, mirroring a key feature of the human disease.

But when the mice carried tumours, their brains stopped accumulating the usual plaques. In some experiments, the animals’ memory also improved compared with Alzheimer‑model mice without tumours, suggesting that the change was not just visible under the microscope.

The team traced this effect to a protein called cystatin‑C that was being pumped out by the tumours into the bloodstream. The new study suggests that, at least in mice, cystatin‑C released by tumours can cross the blood–brain barrier – the usually tight border that shields the brain from many substances in the circulation.

Once inside the brain, cystatin‑C appears to latch on to small clusters of amyloid beta and mark them for destruction by the brain’s resident immune cells, called microglia. These cells act as the brain’s clean‑up crew, constantly patrolling for debris and misfolded proteins.

In Alzheimer’s, microglia seem to fall behind, allowing amyloid beta to accumulate and harden into plaques. In the tumour‑bearing mice, cystatin‑C activated a sensor on microglia known as Trem2, effectively switching them into a more aggressive, plaque‑clearing state.

Surprising trade-offs

At first glance, the idea that a cancer could “help” protect the brain from dementia sounds almost perverse. Yet biology often works through trade-offs, where a process that is harmful in one context can be beneficial in another.

In this case, the tumour’s secretion of cystatin‑C may be a side‑effect of its own biology that happens to have a useful consequence for the brain’s ability to handle misfolded proteins. It does not mean that having cancer is good, but it does reveal a pathway that scientists might be able to harness more safely.

The study slots into a growing body of research suggesting that the relationship between cancer and neurodegenerative diseases is more than a statistical quirk. Large population studies have reported that people with Alzheimer’s are significantly less likely to be diagnosed with cancer, and vice versa, even after accounting for age and other health factors.

An elderly lady and her carer, outside in a park.
People with Alzheimer’s are significantly less likely to get cancer, and vice versa. Halfpoint/Shutterstock.com

This has led to the idea of a biological seesaw, where mechanisms that drive cells towards survival and growth, as in cancer, may push them away from the pathways that lead to brain degeneration. The cystatin‑C story adds a physical mechanism to that picture.

However, the research is in mice, not humans, and that distinction matters. Mouse models of Alzheimer’s capture some features of the disease, particularly amyloid plaques, but they do not fully reproduce the complexity of human dementia.

We also do not yet know whether human cancers in real patients produce enough cystatin‑C, or send it to the brain in the same way, to have meaningful effects on Alzheimer’s disease risk. Still, the discovery opens intriguing possibilities for future treatment strategies.

One idea is to develop drugs or therapies that mimic the beneficial actions of cystatin‑C without involving a tumour at all. That could mean engineered versions of the protein designed to bind amyloid beta more effectively, or molecules that activate the same pathway in microglia to boost their clean‑up capacity.

The research also highlights how interconnected diseases can be, even when they affect very different organs. A tumour growing in the lung or colon might seem far removed from the slow build up of protein deposits in the brain, yet molecules released by that tumour can travel through the bloodstream, cross protective barriers and change the behaviour of brain cells.

For people living with cancer or caring for someone with Alzheimer’s today, this work will not change treatment immediately. But the study does offer a more hopeful message: by studying even grim diseases like cancer in depth, scientists can stumble on unexpected insights that point towards new ways to keep the brain healthy in later life.

Perhaps the most striking lesson is that the body’s defences and failures are rarely simple. A protein that contributes to disease in one organ may be used as a clean‑up tool in another, and by understanding these tricks, researchers may be able to use them safely to help protect the ageing human brain.The Conversation

Justin Stebbing, Professor of Biomedical Sciences, Anglia Ruskin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

NSW Seniors Festival Comedy Show serving up laughs in Sydney

A line-up of six comedians will deliver a barrel of laughs as the New South Wales Seniors Festival Comedy Show returns to Sydney in 2026.

The free show, which is an annual feature of the NSW Seniors Festival, will commence at 11am on Tuesday 3 March, at Sydney Town Hall, in partnership with City of Sydney.

Master of Ceremonies Cam Knight will join Jake Howie, Anisa Nandaula, Fiona Cox, Mick Meredith, Chris Wainhouse, and Peter Berner to headline entertainment for hundreds of New South Wales seniors.

For the first time, Shoalhaven City Council will also be hosting a Seniors Festival Comedy Show at Ulladulla Civic Centre at 11am and 1.30pm on Thursday 5 March. The line-up for the Ulladulla comedy show will feature Mat Wakefield alongside Jake Howie, Anisa Nandaula, Fiona Cox, Chris Wainhouse and Peter Berner.

Tickets will be available from 10am, Tuesday 3 February 2026 via the NSW Seniors Festival website: NSW Seniors Festival Comedy Show | NSW Government

Seniors are encouraged to get in early to secure a ticket before they run out.

Seniors Festival Comedy Show
Sydney Town Hall, in partnership with City of Sydney at 11am, Tuesday 3 March

Ulladulla Civic Centre, in partnership with Shoalhaven City Council at 11am and 1.30pm, on Thursday 5 March.

The NSW Seniors Festival runs from 2-15 March and showcases a variety of events, from entertainment to educational activities.

Highlights of the festival include the popular Premier’s Gala Concerts and NSW Seniors Festival Expo, held at Darling Harbour on Wednesday 11 March and Thursday 12 March.

Minister for Seniors Jodie Harrison said:
“The NSW Seniors Festival Comedy Show has a proud history of bringing together some of the nation’s best comedians to spread laughter and joy.

“The NSW Government is building more inclusive communities for older people through recreational, cultural and social participation, a key priority of the government’s Ageing Well in NSW Strategy.

“That’s why we are proud to support this popular event each year and urge our seniors to get together with friends and families to ‘live life in colour’.”

Member for Sydney Alex Greenwich said:
“The NSW Seniors Festival Comedy Show is an annual highlight for so many in our community as it’s a great way for people to come together, share a laugh and meet some friendly new faces.

“Not only is this a wonderful event for seniors, but it is another opportunity for them to stay socially connected. Sharing a laugh is a great way for everyone to boost their wellbeing and to bring people together.

“Laughter really is the best medicine, and a great way to brighten someone’s day. Not only are events like this fun, they help to keep people feeling connected to their community.”

Comedy show Master of Ceremonies Cam Knight said:
"I’m absolutely excited to be hosting this event for the NSW Seniors Festival.

“There’s something special about making people happy, and I can’t wait to share some laughs with our seniors.

“It’s going to be a fantastic time and I’m sure everyone will leave with a big smile on their faces."

Comedian Jake Howie said:

"I am thrilled to part of this year’s Comedy Show, sharing the stage with some of the country’s funniest people.

“We’ve got some hilarious material lined up which is sure to have the audience in stitches."

Establishing the Neale Daniher National MND Clinical Network

January 29, 2026
The Australian Government has announced it is investing $40.1 million to create the Neale Daniher National MND Clinical Network and give more people with motor neurone disease (MND) access to treatment.

FightMND will be funded to establish the network, which will accelerate research, expand clinical trials and improve outcomes for people with motor neurone disease.

Neale Daniher AO is the 2025 Australian of the Year in recognition of his leadership and advocacy for MND research. He was diagnosed with the condition in 2013.

Supported by Government investment, FightMND has already funded 17 clinical trials involving more than 700 people with motor neurone disease at sites across Australia. 

This new investment is expected to encourage pharmaceutical companies to bring more cutting-edge drug trials to Australians living with MND. 

It will also increase the number of sites for clinical trials and make it easier for people with motor neurone disease in regional, rural and remote areas to participate.

This investment will also fund research to drive improvements in care for people living with MND. 
 
Motor neurone disease is a progressive and fatal neurological condition affecting approximately 2,700 Australians. Every day in Australia 2 people are diagnosed with the condition and a further 2 people die of it. 

Motor neurone disease has no cure and limited treatments, so clinical trials are critical to increase knowledge, give access to new treatments and provide hope for Australians living with this disease.

The Hon Mark Butler MP, Minister for Health and Ageing and Minister for Disability and the National Disability Insurance Scheme, stated: 

“Neale Daniher has led a tireless fight for the MND community, accelerating research and giving hope to thousands of Australians. 

“Motor neurone disease is one of the most harrowing conditions we face. It is progressive, fatal, and there is no known cure.

“We want to accelerate the development and delivery of effective treatments – and ultimately a cure – for MND.

“With the establishment of the Neale Daniher National MND Clinical Network we hope to improve outcomes for those living with this devastating condition.”

Neale Daniher AO said: 

“When I was named Australian of the Year in 2025, I asked the community to imagine. Imagine unlocking the mysteries of the neurological frontier right here in Australia. 

“This funding commitment from the Albanese Government is a powerful step forward in this fight against the Beast.

“The science is advancing; the momentum is building and the establishment of the Neale Daniher National MND Clinical Network strengthens the foundations needed to drive real progress.

“This investment isn’t for my benefit. It’s about laying the foundations, so others don’t have to go through what I have.

“I’m deeply grateful for this support. It is going to help turn hope into action for future generations.”

Your experiences matter – please share them with us

National Seniors have stated, January 23, 2026:
''If you live in Australia and you’re aged 50 years and over, we are inviting you to participate in the new National Seniors Social Survey (NSSS).''

Every year the NSSS asks thousands of older people for their thoughts, feelings, and experiences on a range of important topics. 

A report summarising the survey outcomes goes straight to our primary funder, the Commonwealth Department of Health, Disability and Ageing, to inform government policy. 

The outcomes also inform NSA’s own advocacy and policy work and come back to you in the form of research reports, articles, infographics, and media coverage.  

This year’s NSSS includes modules on: 
  • Contributing to society 
  • Experiences as a carer
  • Hospital experiences.
The survey has been reviewed and approved by the Bellberry Human Research Ethics Committee. Your responses will be completely confidential. 

As well as making a valuable contribution to knowledge and social change by sharing your views, you will have a chance to win one of 10 Woolworths or Coles eGift Cards worth $50 each.  

Find the survey here. It is open until 6 February 2026.

Star power lineup confirmed for 2026 Premier's Gala Concerts: to be Live Streamed

Updated: January 27, 2026
A glittering lineup of performers are set to grace the stage for the NSW Seniors Festival Premier’s Gala Concerts at Darling Harbour.

Free tickets to the concerts, billed as a highlight of the Seniors Festival, were available to all New South Wales Seniors from Tuesday 27 January. The theme for the 2026 NSW Seniors Festival is ‘Live life in colour’. 

Tickets for the Premier's Gala Concerts 2026 are now sold out. If you were unable to secure tickets or simply can't make it in person, the concerts will also be live-streamed, so you can enjoy the performances from wherever you are. 

The Concert will be live-streamed on Thursday, 12 March, 2:45pm - 4:30pm AEDT


This year’s outstanding line-up features:
  • Dami Im – internationally acclaimed singer-songwriter
  • Nathan Foley – celebrated vocalist and performer
  • Jay Laga’aia – beloved entertainer and actor
  • Olivia Fox – rising star on the Australian music scene
  • Tarryn Stokes – powerhouse vocalist and winner of The Voice Australia 
Last year and again this year, the Premier’s Gala Concerts sold out with close to 32,000 tickets issued.

The NSW Seniors Festival Expo will also be returning in 2026 with exhibitors offering services and support to seniors, including interactive workshops, food and fitness tips.

Minister for Seniors Jodie Harrison said:
“The Premier’s Gala Concerts always generate significant excitement from seniors across New South Wales and this year’s event is shaping up to be unforgettable.

“Older people in New South Wales make an outstanding contribution to our communities and these concerts are about giving back and valuing them.

“The Seniors Festival expo is only a stone’s throw away from the concerts, with exhibitors offering everything from health and travel information to hands-on activities, technology support, and creative workshops.”

Dami Im, performer said:

“I’m absolutely thrilled to be part of this year’s Premier’s Gala Concerts. The NSW Seniors Festival is such a special occasion, and I’m excited to perform for this beautiful audience. It’s going to be a wonderful couple of days filled with music, fun, and celebration!”

Jay Laga’aia, performer said:

"What an exciting time of the year! Seniors are such a valuable part of our community and it's an honour to bring joy to so many at the Premier’s Gala Concerts. We’ve got amazing performers, a brilliant band, beautiful dancers, and more. I can’t wait to bring a little old school vibe to a beautiful gathering.”

‘Bold’. ‘Elegant’. ‘Introverted’? How words describing wine get lost in translation

karelnoppe/Getty
Allison CreedThe University of Melbourne

I recently watched a participant at a wine tasting freeze when asked for their opinion. “It’s … nice?” they ventured, clearly wanting to say more but lacking the specific vocabulary to do so.

The sommelier quickly intervened, noting the wine was “quite elegant, with beautiful structure.” The participant simply nodded, and the conversation ended.

Wine is a multi-billion-dollar export commodity, yet industry “winespeak” can actually stop people feeling they can join in conversations about wine. And often words can get lost in translation – or mean something very different – in fast-growing wine markets such as China, Vietnam and Thailand.

My new research systematically reviewed 77 studies on wine language and metaphor. Building on my earlier research tracking how wine metaphors evolve, it reveals a surprising disconnect: the language used to taste and talk about wine does not travel across cultures as smoothly as the industry assumes.

This matters for the wine industry, because wine descriptions directly influence purchasing decisions and overall enjoyment.

Images in English that don’t travel

The problem is not the use of metaphor itself. In their 1980 book, Metaphors We Live By, George Lakoff and Mark Johnson argue metaphors are essential cognitive tools we use every day, often without even noticing.

When we say a wine has “body” or “backbone,” we draw on our intimate knowledge of physical experience to make sense of taste and texture. This is how human language works.

The problem is when metaphors fail to travel. Consider “body,” a fundamental concept in English-speaking wine cultures when talking about weight and mouthfeel.

Research shows even native English speakers interpret “body” differently. Some believe it refers to flavour, others to texture, still others to alcohol content.

When translated where the word lacks the same associations, confusion multiplies. In Dutch, German, and Hungarian, literal translations (“lichaam”, “Körper”, “test”) trigger awkward anatomical associations. What sounds natural in English reads as bizarre in translation.

The enigma of ‘elegance’

“Elegance” presents a similar challenge. Wine experts across cultures share a core understanding – that a wine is smooth, balanced, refined, or complex. Yet cultural associations can vary.

In Chinese wine reviews, elegance is expressed through mírén (迷人), meaning “charming”, and nèiliǎn (內斂), meaning “introverted”. These are social-aesthetic metaphors that activate entirely different cultural scripts.

This is significant, because wine is what’s called an “experience good”. You cannot judge taste or quality until after you purchase. Consumers rely on descriptions to signal what they are buying.

When metaphors don’t align culturally, the industry is not just failing to communicate but actively eroding people’s trust.

Why some words affect wine ratings

The wine world’s most widespread linguistic habit is anthropomorphism – the attribution of human characteristics.

Industry reviews routinely characterise wines as “shy,” “honest,” or “aggressive”. This is not decorative language; it is cognitive scaffolding.

Describing wine as a person helps us communicate complex sensory perceptions by drawing on our personal experience of human behaviour and emotion.

However, these particular metaphors can carry cultural baggage. Research suggests that wines labelled with feminine terms (such as “delicate” or “elegant”) are perceived as hedonistic products meant for quick consumption, leading consumers to believe they decline at a younger age.

Conversely, wines with masculine descriptors (“powerful”, “bold”) are linked to ageing potential, and receive higher quality ratings.

Although these gendered metaphors might not always hit the price tag directly, they can fundamentally alter if and when a consumer decides to drink the bottle.

Creating better metaphors

As global wine trade increases, industry is eager to connect with new consumers in emerging markets. Yet they often do so using vocabulary rooted in European traditions and Western thinking that do not communicate clearly to international audiences.

Wine marketers find themselves caught between traditional wine language maintaining prestige and authority, and pressure to create new metaphors resonating globally.

The solution is not to stop using metaphors to describe wine – that would be impossible. The question is how metaphors can work inclusively across cultures, rather than carrying cultural baggage that can lead to bias and market undervaluation.

My research suggests a need to rethink how we communicate about wine. This could include writing tasting notes that incorporate more universally understood sensory cues and culturally consistent evaluative language, in addition to traditional expert vocabulary.

Without deliberate attention to how metaphors travel, or fail to travel, across cultures, the gap between expert “winespeak” and consumer understanding will only widen. The industry is not building a Tower of Babel through metaphor itself, but through the assumption that everyone speaks the same metaphorical language.The Conversation

Allison Creed, Lecturer and Curriculum Designer, Cognitive Linguistics, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How interwar fiction made sense of an increasingly noisy world

The logo of the Anti-Noise League. Quiet/Noise Abatement League Catalogue
Anna SnaithKing's College London

Noise was first considered a public health issue in interwar Britain – called the “age of noise” by the author and essayist Aldous Huxley. In this era, the proliferation of mechanical sounds, particularly the rumble of road and air traffic, the blare of loudspeakers and the rising decibels of industry, caused anxiety about the health of the nation’s minds and bodies.

Interwar writers, such as Virginia Woolf, George Orwell and Jean Rhys, tuned in to the din. Their fiction is not just an archive of past sound-worlds but also the place where sound became noise and vice versa. As sound historian James Mansell has argued: “Noise was not just representative of the modern; it was modernity manifested in audible form.”

We now have more data and scientific evidence on the effects of environmental noise. The World Health Organization recognises noise, particularly from road, rail and air traffic, as one of the top environmental health hazards, second only to air pollution.

In the interwar period, without comprehensive data on noise and health, early campaigners relied on narrative. They created a particular story about noise and nerves to galvanise the public into keeping it down.

A comic strip mocking the Anti-Noise League
A comic strip mocking the Anti-Noise League by Ernie Bushmiller (1941). Swann

In 1933, the first significant UK noise abatement organisation, the Anti-Noise League, was founded by physician Thomas Horder. The league consisted of doctors, psychologists, physicists, engineers and acousticians (physicists concerned with the properties of sound) who lobbied government for a legislative framework around noise.

They sought to educate the public on the dangers of needless noise through exhibitions, publications and their magazine, Quiet.

Their campaigns drew attention to the very real health effects of environmental noise. But they also saw noise as waste: something to be eliminated in the pursuit of a maximally productive and efficient citizenry.

They drew on ideas of Britishness associated with what they called “acoustic civilisation” (or teaching the nation to be quieter) and “intelligent” behaviour to enact a programme of noise reduction as sonic nationalism.

Noise in modernist fiction

This interwar preoccupation with unwanted sound is also a sonic legacy of the first world war. Exposure to the deafening din of artillery, exploding shells and grenades caused catastrophic auditory injury. So much so, that the din was associated with loss of life and the devastating effects of shell shock.

The extreme noise of warfare also pushed doctors and psychologists to study how sound affects health. This work continued into the 1930s through government-backed bodies such as the Industrial Health Research Board. As a result, people in the interwar years became much more aware that the everyday sounds of machines and traffic could also be harmful.

But it wasn’t only doctors and acousticians who wrote about noise. Authors such as Rebecca West and H.G. Wells worked with the Anti-Noise League, while others, like Winifred Holtby, publicly refuted their findings. But more broadly, in the pages of interwar fiction, modernist writers engaged deeply with the shifting noisescapes around them.

The unprecedented noise levels of the wars, together with the proliferation of sounds in urban and domestic spaces and the auditory training required by new forms of sound technology, caused an attentiveness to sound and hearing. This was harnessed both metaphorically and structurally in the period’s literature.

Modernist writers such as Woolf, Orwell and Rhys listened intently to machines and the sound worlds they created. Once we start to listen for it, noise is everywhere in fiction of the period.

Proletarian factory novels of the 1930s such as Walter Greenwood’s Love on the Dole (1933) or John Sommerfield’s May Day (1936) draw new attention to toxic and harmful high decibel industrial environments.

Interwar novels such as Virginia Woolf’s Mrs Dalloway (1925) or George Orwell’s Coming Up for Air (1939), each with first world war veteran protagonists, register urban noise via the auditory effects of the conflict zone, or a kind of communal noise sensitivity, as well as through the healing or connective properties of sound. In Dorothy Sayers’ Nine Tailors (1934) a character is (spoiler alert) killed by the sound of a church bell.

Rhys’ short story Let Them Call It Jazz (1962) is set in London in the years following the second world war. It depicts the hostile environment faced by immigrants, such as those arriving from the Caribbean on HMT Empire Windrush, as protagonist Selina Davis is imprisoned for noise disturbance. She has been singing Caribbean folk songs in a “genteel” suburban neighbourhood.

The tale is one of cultural identity, the resistant power of sound, and the politicisation of noise. Black music is a form of sonic resistance; noise is both a silencing strategy for bodies and practices deemed “aberrant” and a resistant practice that exceeds and disrupts exclusionary codes of value and hierarchy.

These works, and many more, demonstrate that modernist writers, if we listen carefully, are theorists of sound who responded in complex ways to their shifting soundscapes. They counter the association of noise with negative affect or “unwanted” excess, by finding aesthetic and political possibility in noise.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.The Conversation


Anna Snaith, Professor of Twentieth-Century Literature, King's College London

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The rise of the ‘Super-K’ flu: what you need to know

January 22, 2026: by CSIRO and Eliza Keck, Senior Communication Advisor, Health and Biosecurity and ACDP

A new H3N2 subclade is driving an unusually early flu season in Australia. Here is what makes it different, and what it means for you.  A fast-moving influenza strain nicknamed the ‘Super-K’ flu is catching the attention of scientists and health authorities.  

Subclade K, a branch of the H3N2 influenza family, has appeared much earlier than expected and is spreading quickly across Australia. Researchers are now working to understand how these mutations affect immunity, how well the current vaccine performs against it and what this might mean for the flu season ahead.  

CSIRO disease prevention and detection expert Dr Daniel Layton breaks down what we know so far, and answers some of the most common questions about the ‘Super-K’ flu. 

What makes subclade K of H3N2 — the so-called ‘Super-K’ flu — distinct from typical seasonal flu? 
Subclade K (previously known as J.2.4.1) is gaining attention because it appears to be spreading much earlier in the flu season than usual — and it’s spreading quickly. Neither of these are good signs for an influenza strain.  

It’s important to note that subclade K isn’t a brand-new kind of flu, it’s still a seasonal strain of influenza, however it has undergone a substantial number of mutations in one of its key proteins called Hemaglutinin. These changes can affect how the virus behaves and spreads. 

How effective is this season’s flu vaccine against subclade K? 
A big part of how our immune system prevents infection from influenza is by producing antibodies that bind to and block the Hemaglutinin protein. This protein helps the virus latch onto our cells, so when antibodies block it, infection is prevented.  
A person wearing a blue lab coat and gloves uses a pipette while seated at a biosafety cabinet in a modern laboratory, with equipment, containers and safety signage visible around the workspace.

Early data suggests that because subclade K has many mutations in this protein, there is a mismatch between the antibodies we develop from the flu vaccine and this strain of virus, leading to that reduced ability to prevent infection. The same is likely true of antibodies we have developed from previous infections. 

However, the vaccine can still reduce how severe the illness is. In fact, data from England has shown that the current flu vaccine was 72-75 per cent effective at preventing emergency department visits in adolescents (under 18) and 32-29 per cent effective in adults.

Those percentages are somewhat typical of vaccine effectiveness in preventing emergency department presentations and hospitalisations. So, it looks like in real world numbers, the vaccine effectiveness is about on par with previous years, despite the mismatch. 

What happens in the vaccine lab when a new strain is found? 
It’s not uncommon for new influenza strains to be identified each year. When a particular strain shows either a high level of circulation or an increase in disease severity, that’s when alarm bells start to ring.  

In the case of subclade K, the virus would go through a panel of tests to first determine its genetic sequence and subtype, to understand how similar or different it is from other strains. A next crucial step is ‘antigenic characterisation’. This means comparing the virus to antibodies created by previous vaccines to see if the new strain can slip past them and cause an infection. If it can, this is called a ‘mismatch’.  

Researchers also look at the new strain’s growth rate, how well it binds to human cells and whether it shows resistance to antiviral treatments. 

Why are we seeing an unusually early and large flu season, especially linked to ‘Super-K’? 
When a new viral variant emerges, it is likely that we see an unusually early and large influenza season because our preexisting immunity is challenged. The number and location of the new mutations on the subclade K Hemaglutinin protein mean our antibodies struggle to attach. In turn, that means the virus can grow and spread more rapidly, leading to more influenza cases. 

Will subclade K make me more sick than other seasonal influenza strains? 
Even though it has been shown to be spreading very quickly and there are a lot of cases, the current best evidence suggests subclade K does not cause more severe disease per infection. That being said, historically, flu seasons dominated by H3N2 strains of influenza (subclade K is a H3N2 strain) have been linked to more severe outcomes at the population level. 

I got my flu shot in winter 2025. Should I go and get the flu vaccine again now? What about if I missed last year’s vaccine?  
If you have any questions about vaccines, it’s always best to talk with your GP to ensure you get the best advice for your circumstance.  

If you had a flu shot in 2025, a routine extra dose now is not typically recommended, and protection is generally highest in the first 3-4 months after vaccination. The new seasonal vaccine will become available in Australia in coming months. 

However, if you are in a high-risk category and didn’t get vaccinated last year, it’s worth considering. Even though the last year's flu vaccine doesn’t include subclade K, research shows it can reduce severity of symptoms. Talk with your GP about whether getting the shot now is right for you.  

What could the emergence of subclade K indicate about future flu seasons? 
If we see continued circulation of subclade K and in increasing high numbers, it may prompt a change in the influenza vaccine composition to include a subclade K H3N2 component. This would then allow people to develop antibodies that bind strongly to the new strain and reduce infection. These decisions are complex and will require a thorough analysis of all of the available data. 

What is the process to decide what flu strains are covered each year?  
Scientists around the world continually test flu samples to see which strains are spreading and how fast they’re changing.  

Twice a year (once for northern hemisphere and one for southern), the World Health Organisation reviews this global data and recommends the strains most likely to be present in the upcoming flu season, so manufacturers have time to make the vaccine months in advance.  

I feel pretty sick. How do I know if it’s the flu?
The flu usually comes on suddenly, with fever or chills, body aches, headache, extreme tiredness, and a cough or sore throat.  
At-home COVID/flu combo rapid tests can be helpful, especially in the first few days, but a negative result doesn’t always rule out flu — so if you’re high risk or your symptoms are getting worse, seek advice and a confirmatory PCR test from your GP.  

Dr Daniel Layton is an expert immunologist working at CSIRO's Australian Centre for Disease Preparedness. Photo: CSIRO

Government announces public hospital funding deal with states

On Friday January 30, 2026 Prime Minister Albanese announced that National Cabinet had met in Sydney that day and reached a landmark agreement to deliver record funding to state and territory hospitals and secure the future of the NDIS.  

''As part of this deal, the Commonwealth will provide $25 billion in additional funding for public hospitals. This is three times more additional funding for public hospitals than under the last 5 year agreement. Commonwealth funding for state-run public hospitals will reach a record $219.6 billion from 2026-27 to 2030-31.'' Mr. Albanese said in a release

''The funding includes the Commonwealth share of estimated hospital activity from 2026-27 to 2030-31 of $24.4 billion through the National Health Reform Agreement hospital base funding and over $600 million in further Commonwealth investment in the public hospital system.''

Disability reforms
National Cabinet has acknowledged the need for continuing reforms to secure the future of the NDIS, ensuring it is sustainable and can continue to provide life changing support to future generations of Australians with disability.

Building on this momentum, National Cabinet has agreed to additional reforms including: 
  • Adjusting state and territory NDIS contribution escalation rates to be in line with actual scheme growth, capped at 8 per cent, from 1 July 2028 with a review point in 2030-31.
  • Working together to target annual cost increases to 5 to 6 per cent.
  • $2 billion, matched by states, to deliver Thriving Kids, the first phase of Foundational Supports, with the Commonwealth providing $1.4 billion of its contribution to support states to help their kids thrive.
''The national model of Thriving Kids has been informed by the Thriving Kids Advisory Group led by Minister Butler and Professor Oberklaid OAM, and the Parliamentary Inquiry led by Dr Mike Freelander and Dr Monique Ryan.'' the Prime Minister stated

''The Commonwealth has listened to stakeholders including parents, health professionals, disability advocates, educators and states. To ensure states and territories have enough time to implement Thriving Kids the roll out will now commence on 1 October 2026, with full implementation by 1 January 2028.

Children with permanent and significant disability, including those with developmental delay and/or autism with high support needs, will continue to be eligible for the NDIS. 

From 1 October 2026, children with developmental delay and/or autism with low to moderate support needs will start to access support through Thriving Kids. Thriving Kids will be fully rolled out by 1 January 2028.

Children aged 8 and under enrolled in the NDIS prior to 1 January 2028 with developmental delay and/or autism with low to moderate support needs will be subject to the usual reassessment criteria in place prior to 1 January 2028.

The Commonwealth, states and territories will continue to finalise the national and local services to be delivered to support children and their families in each jurisdiction.''

Asked if this agreement may solve New South Wales' terrible bed block situation and the shortage of aged care and disability spots in hospitals, NSW Premier Chris Minns stated:

''Look it'll go a long way to solving those problems. But those challenges have been in the system for a while, and it won't simply be a question of funding from the state or the Commonwealth. I mean, we have to run a system in New South Wales where we're paying people to stay in the system. We're using experienced nurses and paramedics and doctors and dealing with growth. 

One of the challenges that the Prime Minister is facing, as well as all the Premiers, is we've got an ageing cohort, so as much as the system is stretched today, we can expect even further problems in the future, but we're very grateful that we've got this agreement today. There's a recognition that it does look for potential growth in the health system, but also a combined effort from the states and the Commonwealth to deal with rising costs in the NDIS, which is important.''

Previously: Northern Beaches Hospital to Transition to  Northern Sydney Local Health District (NSLHD) on April 29 2026 - Dee Why Medicare Urgent Care Clinic Now open - Bed Block Surges in NSW Hospitals - ED performance improves but more to do: BHI reports 

Free 2026 street events make blockbuster events accessible to all

January 28, 2026
The state’s most popular events like the Deni Ute Muster and Bluesfest will now become even more accessible and affordable for everyone, with the State Government supporting councils to add free vibrant street parties to foundation events in NSW. 

This weekend the Tamworth Country Music Festival embraced the Open Streets program by expanding their offering with four days of free Fringe Zone programming, including line-dancing lessons, whip-cracking demonstrations and live entertainment – all free to attend. 

The NRL Grand Finals, Sydney Gay and Lesbian Mardi Gras, the Sydney Marathon and the Bathurst 1000 will also benefit through this round of funding. 

The latest $4 million grant from the Open Streets Program help major festivals and sporting events expand beyond ticketed models, recognising the cultural and economic impact these drawcard events, known as Foundation Events, have on NSW.  

The Open Streets program is designed to open public spaces for events that bring communities together without having to break the bank. Previous Council-run Open Streets events recorded local business revenue increasing by 60 percent, and almost all visitors said they would revisit the area as a direct result of the grants. 

In combination with supporting the free street events, the NSW Government’s Permit/Plug/Play program is supporting over 35 local councils to reduce the costs of activating their streets for community events. Local councils were reporting costs of around $100,000 per day for hosting street events. 

The results from the 2024 program showed councils were reducing those costs by 40% on average by installing permanent event

infrastructure including retractable bollards, and power and water facilities, as well as streamlining development applications and transport management plans. 

Upcoming Open Streets (Foundation Events)  
March 2026  
  • 28th - 29th Streets Alive Brunswick presented by Byron Bay Bluesfest  
June 2026  
  • 12th Closing Night at the 25th Biennale of Sydney  
August 2026   
  • 15th - 17th Mundi Mundi Lightfest by the Broken Hill Mundi Mundi Bash
  • 27th - 30th Garra (working title) by TCS Sydney Marathon
  • 29th - Official Opening Party at the Sydney Fringe Festival  
September 2026  
  • 29th - 30th Spirit of the Muster Street Festival by Deni Ute Muster  
October 2026   
  • 1st - 2nd NRL Fan Fest for the NRL Men’s & Women’s Grand Final
  • 6th - 11th Brock Heritage Festival by Bathurst 1000  
January 2027  
  • 6th - 10th Parkes Elvis Festival expansion
  • 20th - 23rd Fringe Zone Year 2 at Tamworth Country Music Festival  
February 2027  
  • 20th The Rainbow Mile Block Party at the Sydney Gay and Lesbian Mardi Gras   
For more information, visit the Open Streets Program website.  

Minister for Transport John Graham said:

“By supporting free street parties at these iconic events, we're making sure everyone can join in the fun, no matter their budget.  

“We’ve scrapped the lockout laws, cut red tape and boosted local street events to bring back fun to NSW in a way that supports local businesses and helps families face the cost-of-living challenge.   

“These street parties where everyone feels welcome, have proven that they increase revenue for local business, they also harness one of our most important public spaces – our streets.  

“If you were on the fence about coming to one of these events, cost will no longer be an excuse! Come on down!”  

NSW to name and shame property rule breakers

On January 25 2026 the Minns Labor Government launched a new tool allowing homeowners, purchasers and renters to check the track record of property agents before they sign on the dotted line.

The new ‘Name and Shame’ List run by NSW Fair Trading publishes enforcement actions such as fines, licence suspensions and cancellations against real estate agents, property managers and strata managing agents in one easy-to-search place. 

It is the latest in a range of tools and reforms the Government is pursuing to give consumers clarity and confidence when choosing a real estate agent, and to hold licence holders accountable for serious or repeated breaches of the law. 

To ensure NSW consumers have access to up-to-date information in one place, the List also includes public warnings issued to protect consumers from high-risk traders, enforceable undertakings and prosecution outcomes.  

Key information such as a trader’s name, ABN or ACN, licence number and suburb are listed, as well as a clear description of the type of action taken by NSW Fair Trading and the reason for doing so. 

Last financial year, NSW Fair Trading undertook nearly 500 investigations and more than 300 inspections in the property and rental sector. It issued over 300 penalty notices worth more than $430,000, and carried out significant licensing actions including cancellations, suspensions and disqualifications. 

Backed by an $8.4 million investment, the newly established Strata and Property Services Taskforce has also placed additional inspectors in the field. Together, they have completed more than 186 Anytime, Anywhere inspections with a focus on maintaining compliance standards across the property sector.  

Public warnings, licence cancellations, disqualifications, or suspensions appear on the List from the date they take effect, enforceable undertakings from their commencement date and fines and prosecution outcomes after relevant appeal periods have ended.  

This tool follows the Government’s proposed slate of reforms to the state’s underquoting laws. Subject to consultation, the legislative changes will significantly increase penalties for misleading price estimates to $110,000 or three times the agent’s commission (whichever is greater), mandate a price or price guide on all advertising, and require agents to publish a Statement of Information to help prospective buyers understand how the selling price was calculated.  

Together, these steps play an important role in the Government’s moves to lift professional standards across the real estate sector, improve transparency in property and boost buyer confidence.  

For more information and to view the Name and Shame List, visit the NSW Fair Trading website: www.nsw.gov.au/departments-and-agencies/fair-trading/how-we-regulate/name-and-shame-register

Minister for Better Regulation and Fair Trading Anoulack Chanthivong said: 

“Consumers deserve transparency and choice, and the Name and Shame List gives them the information they need to make confident decisions before engaging or dealing with an agent. 

“Misleading or deceptive conduct not only causes consumer detriment, but it also frustrates and harms other real estate agents who do the right thing when advising homeowners about their sales campaigns. 

“Publishing serious breaches and repeated non-compliance sends a clear message that accountability matters. This will help lift standards across the property sector and protect consumers from harm. 

“Consumers deserve to know who they’re dealing with and the Name and Shame List makes it simple to check a managing agent’s track record before they engage with the trader.” 

Strata and Property Services Commissioner Angus Abadee said: 

“While Fair Trading’s Strata and Property Services and Rental Taskforces are out there enforcing NSW’s strata, property and rental laws, the Name and Shame List ensures transparency of action taken against non-compliant traders.” 

“The list has been built with clear publication guidelines and timeframes and processes to correct errors and manage privacy where appropriate. It’s about transparency that’s fair to consumers and businesses.” 

CEO of the Consumer Policy Research Centre Erin Turner said:  

“This is a practical and helpful step for renters, buyers and homeowners. For renters in particular, choosing an agent isn’t a level playing field, and this kind of transparency helps people spot red flags early, instead of discovering problems once they’re locked into a lease.  

“CPRC's national research into consumer regulation has shown that NSW Fair Trading is already ahead in publishing enforcement and complaints data. Bringing this information into an easy-to-search list makes it an even more powerful regulatory tool.” 

$2.5m Lung Bus tour of NSW begins in Newcastle to protect workers against dust diseases

January 27, 2026
The Minns Labor Government has stated it maintains its commitment to protect workers from dust diseases with its $2.5 million state-of-the-art Lung Health Mobile Clinic which is providing lung health checks to thousands of people across New South Wales.

This year, the lung bus begins its journey in Newcastle to provide free lung screening checks. These lung health checks can be lifesaving by ensuring early detection and treatment of dust diseases like asbestosis, silicosis and mesothelioma.

The lung bus program provides free lung screening checks to more than 5,000 workers annually in regional NSW.

In collaboration with SafeWork, icare also supports the NSW Silica Worker Register (SWR), which helps identify and monitor workers who have been exposed to respirable crystalline silica across their working lives.

By linking registry data with services such as the mobile clinic, icare is helping ensure workers most at risk are prioritised for screening, follow-up care and specialist referral where needed.

Data from SafeWork NSW shows there have been 12,214 workers registered on the SWR from 597 businesses as at 31 December 2025, most of which are in the construction and manufacturing industries. Close to 3,850 workers are listed as working in tunnelling-related roles.

Launched on 1 October 2025, the SWR is used to help monitor and track the health of at-risk workers undertaking high-risk processing of crystalline silica substances (CSS).

In Newcastle, 44 workers are currently on the Register, and are being prioritised for screening due to potential occupational silica exposure. 

icare’s Mobile Clinic is equipped with advanced technology and features including:
  • Digital chest X-ray technology, providing precise and reliable first instance imaging.
  • Enhanced spirometry (lung function) testing equipment to evaluate breathing capacity and respiratory performance.
  • Digital monitoring systems to streamline diagnostics and care.
  • A backup power supply to ensure uninterrupted operation in remote locations.
  • Greater accessibility and comfort, with larger clinical space designed to support both staff and clients.
Lung health checks are painless and only take around 30 minutes. The process includes chest X-rays to detect abnormalities or damage, lung function testing to assess respiratory performance, consultation with a specialist doctor, who interprets results and provides tailored advice and referral for a CT scan, if required, to get a better image of the chest and lungs.

The Lung Health Mobile Clinic will be located at The Station, Corner of Watt st and Scott st, Newcastle on Tuesday 27 January.

The Lung Bus will return to the Hunter when it visits Singleton on 20 April and then Newcastle on 29 June and 26 October.

Eliminating the risks associated with silica is a high priority for the Minns Government and the Lung Bus is one of several measures which have been introduced to reduce the risks of working with CSS in NSW.

These include:
  • Strengthening workplace safety through a Silica Worker Register (SWR) which monitors and tracks the health of at-risk workers undertaking high-risk processing of crystalline silica substances (CSS).
  • Leading the ban on engineered stone benchtops, panels and slabs containing one per cent or greater crystalline silica. This included a national ban on its importation from January 1, 2025.
  • Establishing the Tunnelling Dust Safety Taskforce to help address silica related health risks for workers in tunnelling projects. The Taskforce is made up of Government, medical, industry and union representatives and provides expert guidance to prevent and manage silica and other dust related disease associated with tunnelling projects in NSW.
  • Establishing a dedicated silica unit within SafeWork NSW which includes a Silica Compliance Team to enforce strengthened regulations, including proactive visits to sites conducting high-risk CSS processing.
  • Allocating $5 million in critical funding for silicosis research and a patient support program for individuals and their families navigating the health risks associated with exposure to silica dust. The grant funding, administered collaboratively by icare and the Dust Diseases Board, will be provided over three years to the Asbestos and Dust Diseases Research Institute (ADDRI).
Workers can also arrange a free lung screening at icare’s Sydney Kent st clinic, or with local providers regionally when the lung bus is not in that part of the state. To book a free lung health check, contact icare on 1800 550 027.

Minister for Work Health and Safety Sophie Cotsis said:

“The icare Mobile Clinic underscores the Minns Labor Government’s commitment to removing barriers like cost and location, ensuring workers across NSW have access to the critical support and care they need to safeguard their health.

“The Lung Bus is another important step towards protecting workers from dust diseases and builds on the Government’s recent actions including the Silica Worker Register, the ban on engineered stone, the establishment of the Tunnelling Dust Safety Taskforce and a dedicated Silica unit within SafeWork NSW.

“Every worker has the right to go to work and return home safely.”

Minister for Regional NSW Tara Moriarty said:

“The $2.5 million icare Lung Bus plays an important role providing thousands of health checks for people living in regional NSW.

“Our regional communities remain front and centre when it comes to ensuring early detection and treatment of dust diseases like asbestosis, silicosis, and mesothelioma.”

Icare Group Executive of General Insurance and Care Sarah Johnson said:

“A lung health check could save your life.

“Early detection is critical to effective treatment, and we’re here to make sure every worker, no matter where they live, has access to world-class care.”

Member for Newcastle Tim Crakanthorp said:

“I welcome the launch of the 2026 icare Lung Bus tour of NSW in Newcastle. This is a terrific initiative that plays a vital role in keeping workers safe and healthy.

“These health checks can be lifesaving by enabling the early detection and treatment of dust-related diseases.

“By bringing these essential services directly to the communities that need them most, the icare Lung Bus is helping to protect the health and futures of our workers.”

Parliamentary Secretary for Work Health and Safety Mark Buttigieg said:

“The Minns Labor Government is committed to protecting workers from deadly dust diseases, and the $2.5 million state-of-the-art Lung Health Mobile Clinic is a powerful example of that commitment in action.

“By bringing free, lifesaving lung health checks directly to communities across New South Wales, starting in Newcastle, we are making early detection and treatment more accessible than ever.

“These screenings save lives, particularly for regional workers who may otherwise miss out, and ensure thousands of people each year get the care they need before it’s too late.”

Scientists once thought the brain couldn’t be changed. Now we know different

Master1305/Shutterstock
Laura Elin PigottLondon South Bank University and Siobhan MclernonLondon South Bank University

For much of the 20th century, scientists believed that the adult human brain was largely fixed. According to this view, the brain developed during childhood, settled into a stable form in early adulthood, and then resisted meaningful change for the rest of life.

Today, the concept of neuroplasticity, the brain’s ability to change its structure and function in response to experience, is a central principle of brain science. The brain can change throughout life, but not without limits, not instantly and not effortlessly.

Neuroplasticity therefore reframes the brain as neither rigid nor infinitely malleable, but as a living system shaped by experience, effort and time.

The roots of neuroplasticity can be traced to the mid-20th century. In 1949, psychologist Donald Hebb proposed that connections between neurons, the brain’s nerve cells, become stronger when they are repeatedly activated together.

This principle later became known as “Hebbian learning”. At the time, Hebb’s idea was considered relevant mainly to childhood development. Adult brains were still thought to be relatively unchangeable.

That assumption has since been overturned. From the late 20th century onward, studies showed that adult brains can reorganise in response to learning, changes in sensory input, or physical injury. Sensory changes include alterations in vision, hearing or touch due to training, loss of input or environmental change.

More recently, advances in brain imaging have allowed researchers to observe these changes directly in living people. These studies show that learning alters patterns of brain activity and connectivity across the lifespan.

Neuroplasticity is now understood not as a rare exception, but as a basic property of the nervous system. It operates continuously, within biological limits shaped by age, genetics, prior experience and overall brain health.

How the brain changes

Neuroplasticity involves changes in how existing brain cells communicate with one another.

When you learn a new skill, specific synapses, the tiny junctions where neurons pass signals to each other, become stronger and more efficient. Neural networks, which are groups of neurons that work together, become better organised. Communication between brain regions involved in that skill improves.

At the cellular level, plasticity involves changes in synaptic structure, the release of chemical messengers called neurotransmitters, and the sensitivity of receptors that receive those signals. So, it changes how neurons communicate with each other.

In a few areas of the adult brain, particularly the hippocampus, which plays a key role in memory, limited adult neurogenesis, the creation of new neurons, also occurs. Although influenced by factors such as stress, sleep and physical activity, its significance in humans is still debated.

Hand with a blue pen points to the right hippocampus on a MRI scan
The hippocampus is constantly rewiring to store new information. FocalFinder/Shutterstock

Crucially, neuroplasticity is experience-dependent. The brain changes most reliably in response to repeated, focused and meaningful engagement that requires attention, effort and feedback. Passive exposure to information has far less impact.

What strengthens and weakens plasticity

Over the past decade, research has identified several factors that strongly influence how plastic the brain can be.

1. Practice and challenge are essential.

Repeatedly engaging in tasks that stretch your abilities leads to changes in both brain activity and brain structure, even in older adults.

2. Physical exercise is one of the most powerful enhancers of plasticity.

Aerobic activity increases levels of brain-derived neurotrophic factor, or BDNF, which supports neuron survival and strengthens synaptic connections. Regular exercise is consistently linked to better learning, memory and overall brain health.

3. Sleep plays a critical role in consolidating brain changes.

During deep sleep, important neural connections are strengthened while less useful ones are weakened, supporting learning and emotional regulation, as shown in neuroscience research.

Woman asleep in bed
Sleep is essential for brain health. Prostock-studio/Shutterstock

4. Chronic stress can seriously impair plasticity.

Long-term exposure to stress hormones is associated with reduced complexity of neural connections in memory-related brain regions and heightened sensitivity in threat-processing systems, undermining learning and flexibility.

When plasticity works against us

One of the most important and often misunderstood aspects of neuroplasticity is that it is value-neutral. The brain adapts to repeated experiences whether those experiences are helpful or harmful.

This helps explain why conditions such as chronic pain, anxiety disorders and addiction can become self-reinforcing. Through repeated patterns of thought, feeling or behaviour, the brain learns responses that are unhelpful but deeply ingrained, a process known as maladaptive plasticity.

The hopeful side of this insight is that plasticity can also be deliberately directed toward recovery. Psychological therapies such as cognitive behavioural therapy are associated with measurable changes in brain activity and connectivity, particularly in networks involved in emotional regulation. Rehabilitation after stroke or brain injury relies on the same principles, using repeated, task-specific practice to compensate for damaged areas.

Clearing up common myths

Perhaps the most persistent myth is that neuroplasticity means the brain can change rapidly or without limits. In reality, meaningful neural change takes time, repetition and sustained effort, within biological constraints.

Another misconception is that plasticity disappears after childhood. While children’s brains are especially flexible, strong evidence shows that plasticity continues throughout adulthood and into older age.

Claims that brief brain-training programmes dramatically increase intelligence or prevent dementia are not supported by solid scientific evidence. The issue is that meaningful brain change happens most when learning is challenging, varied, and connected to real life.

Activities such as learning a language, exercising regularly, playing a musical instrument, or engaging in complex social interaction are far more effective at strengthening the brain than tapping through app-based puzzles.

In short, brain-training games can be fun and mildly useful, but they train you to play games well, not to think better overall.

Our understanding of neuroplasticity has come a long way since Hebb’s early ideas. What was once thought impossible is now accepted scientific fact. Embracing neuroplasticity means recognising that brains can change, while remaining realistic about how slowly and selectively that change occurs.

More than a century ago, Spanish neuroscientist Santiago Ramón y Cajal wrote that every person can become the sculptor of their own brain. Modern science shows that this sculpting never truly ends. It simply requires effort, patience and persistence.The Conversation

Laura Elin Pigott, Senior Lecturer in Neurosciences and Neurorehabilitation, Course Leader in the College of Health and Life Sciences, London South Bank University and Siobhan Mclernon, Senior Nurse Lecturer, London South Bank University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

A new company tax mix has been proposed. We need to be careful how we assess it

Steven Wei/Unsplash
Janine DixonVictoria University and Jason NassiosVictoria University

Australia has a problem. Across the economy, business investment has been sluggish for the past decade, leaving policymakers reaching for solutions.

Weak business investment can leave the economy stuck in low gear, operating without enough equipment or technology and failing to meet its potential. It’s tempting to think that if investment could be revived, higher living standards would follow. But it is not that simple.

In a recent report on creating a more dynamic and resilient economy, Australia’s Productivity Commission proposed some big changes to the way businesses are taxed in Australia, including lowering the corporate tax rate for most businesses and introducing a unique new cash flow tax.

So, what exactly is the Productivity Commission proposing – and would it help boost business investment? And crucially, would it improve living standards for Australian people?

Lower tax rates – with a catch

Right now, there are two rates of company tax. Businesses with turnover of less than A$50 million a year are taxed at 25%. Larger businesses, with turnover of more than $50 million, face a 30% tax rate.

The proposed reform of the corporate tax system has two key elements. First, almost all businesses would be taxed at 20%. Very large corporations, with turnover above $1 billion, would face a rate of 28%.

Second, all businesses would pay a new 5% tax on their “net cash flow”. The government would collect less revenue through company tax, but it would get some of it back through the net cash flow tax. More on this later.

The profitability problem

The Productivity Commission is concerned about potentially profitable business ideas that become unprofitable when company taxes are taken into account.

For example, $1 million invested in building a restaurant might generate profits of $1.3 million over its lifetime, making it a profitable activity. But after paying 25% in corporate tax, or $325,000, the restaurant only generates $975,000 for the investor.

Knowing she will make a loss, the investor will decide not to make the investment.

A waiter working in a restaurant
Tax obligations may erode the profitability of certain investments. Louis Hansel/Unsplash

Now, suppose the corporate tax rate was cut to 20%. Corporate tax paid by the restaurant would be $260,000, leaving $1.04 million for the investor. The investor sees she will make a positive return and decides to finance the restaurant. This argument is at the heart of the Productivity Commission’s recommendation to cut the rate of company tax.

In reality, the picture isn’t quite this simple. The investor must also account for the time value of money, various risks and opportunity cost, and the returns she could be making if she invested the money in other ways.

When calculating profits, the tax office includes depreciation as a cost. This deduction reduces the corporate tax bill significantly compared to our hypothetical example. Depreciation deductions are spread over many years so they are worth less than if the deduction on the whole investment was allowed up front. This is important when we talk about a cash flow tax later.

Foreign and domestic investors

Another complication is Australia’s unique dividend imputation system. If the investor lives in Australia, the tax the company has already paid on its profits is treated as if she paid it herself.

When she does her tax return, that company tax counts as a franking credit towards the income tax she owes on all her income. This means the investor is indifferent to the company tax rate because it works like an advance payment towards the personal tax she has to pay anyway.

If dividend imputation was available to everybody, the corporate tax system would be a very leaky bucket indeed – all the revenue it collected would be lost again when credited to the personal income tax paid by investors.

But a lot of the money invested in Australia comes from foreign investors. They don’t pay personal income taxes to the Australian government, so the company tax we collect from them stays in the bucket.

This is the key to making corporate income tax cuts have an impact. But it is also the reason we need to be careful about how we assess the success of the proposed policy.

With lower corporate taxes, foreign investors will likely invest more in Australia, leading to a larger economy. Our economic modelling at the Centre of Policy Studies, published in the Productivity Commission’s interim report, finds the economy (or GDP) will be larger by 0.2% in the long run. This sounds good – but there’s a catch.

When the Australian government collects less tax from foreign investors, Australia’s income falls. Our modelling finds gross national income will be smaller by 0.3% in the long run. The economy will be larger, but less of it will belong to us.

A new tax on cash flow

Alongside recommendations to cut the corporate tax rate, the Productivity Commission has proposed introducing a cash flow tax.

This is a relatively rare form of taxation used in only a few countries. Like corporate tax, a cash flow tax is levied on profits.

But the big difference is that a cash flow tax treats investment costs as an immediate tax deduction, rather than gradually depreciating the investment.

This is attractive because it does not change the incentive to invest. By treating the investment as one big tax deduction at the beginning of its life, an investment that is profitable in a tax-free world will also be profitable under a cash flow tax.

This means the government can collect tax revenue from companies without having a negative impact on investment.

Under a cash flow tax, highly profitable businesses will pay a relatively large amount of tax, while businesses that are just breaking even will pay very little. Unsurprisingly, lobbyists for big business have urged Treasurer Jim Chalmers to ignore the recommendation.

A company tax cut results in lower income for Australians, but adding a cash flow tax reverses these losses by collecting more revenue from foreign investors and multinational corporations. Our modelling finds this package would lead to gains in Australia’s gross national income of 0.4% in the long run. The Productivity Commission’s report now rests with the treasurer for consideration.The Conversation

Janine Dixon, Director, Centre of Policy Studies, Victoria University and Jason Nassios, Deputy Director and Associate Professor, Centre of Policy Studies, Victoria University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How this ‘dirtbag’ billionaire chose to do capitalism differently

Budrul Chukrut/SOPA Images/LightRocket via Getty Images
Wendy ScaifeQueensland University of Technology

Few people globally have influenced business, sport, the environment and philanthropy like Patagonia founder Yvon Chouinard.

Chouinard’s inventive approach across these spheres makes the recent biography Dirtbag Billionaire by The New York Times journalist David Gelles an intriguing read.


Review: Dirtbag Billionaire: How Yvon Chouinard Built Patagonia, Made a Fortune, and Gave It All Away – David Gelles (Text Publishing)


The anti-authoritarian entrepreneur started out making basic rock-climbing equipment. He then built a business reputation based on ethical commerce, and eventually gave away his company, promising all profits to fighting the climate crisis.

From an Australian perspective, there are lessons to learn given growing environmental and climate concerns, while both corporate giving and corporate distrust have surged in the past decade.

The wild early years

Chouinard prefers the “dirtbag” label to that of businessman or billionaire. It’s a reference from his 1960s lifestyle, a term for someone who sleeps rough, roams widely and disdains material possessions.

As a young climber chasing adventures with friends on rock faces, rivers and waves, Chouinard lived frugally. He ate cat food, squirrels and porcupines.

In these years, inventive Chouinard revolutionised climbing. Using a junkyard forge, he hand-crafted innovative, reusable, softer metal spikes to drive into rock faces. At first selling from his car boot, he built up a US and international customer base.

But, faithful to his environmental values, Chouinard then risked the company by ditching his original top-selling metal spike that damaged rock faces for one that did less harm to the cliff face.

An old man with a round face and silver hair holds a microphone while speaking at an event.
Yvon Chouinard at an event in 2023. Patagonia built customer trust with the company’s environmental values. Ilya S. Savenok/Getty Images

Along the way he employed many fellow climbing, surfing and kayaking enthusiasts, prioritising employee wellbeing and engagement in the business. This was decades before employees were seen as a stakeholder, or internal culture was considered important in a business.

A clash of values

However, with the success of his Patagonia clothing business formed in 1973, Chouinard the conservationist had entered a highly capitalistic sector. The retail market was based on trend-driven overconsumption and exploitative labour and environmental practices.

His quest to do capitalism differently is instructive.

Despite higher costs, Chouinard moved the company into organic cotton use and encouraged regenerative topsoil practices. The principled actions built customer trust and loyalty.

His approach also inspired others who saw decisions that put environmental considerations above profit were good business all round.

As Patagonia grew into a billion-dollar company, he maintained a policy of donating 1% of sales (not just profit) to the environment, no matter how tight the times.

Chouinard co-established 1% for the Planet in 2001 as an accrediting body to encourage companies worldwide to donate 1% of their sales to environmental organisations. Since founding, over 11,000 companies in 110 countries have donated a total of US$823 million (A$1.2 billion).

Chouinard also actively called out corporate greenwashing, and Patagonia was a corporate activist on multiple issues. This included suing US President Donald Trump in 2017 to keep wilderness reserves safe from oil and gas exploration and land development.

Man climbing during summer.
Chouinard started out supplying basic rock climbing equipment. Yente van Eynde/Unsplash

One of the first B Corps

In another leadership move, Patagonia in 2012 became the first California company to become a certified Benefit Corporation, better known as a B Corp.

This is a legally binding, transparently measured commitment to act sustainably, live up to independent performance standards and consider worker, society and environmental interests.

Then, aged 83 in 2022, Chouinard established a pioneering succession trust structure and nonprofit collective for the business. This would see Patagonia continue as an independent, environment-led activist company rather than be floated or sold and have its values and foundations diluted.

This organisational restructure supercharged Chouinard’s philanthropy.

The family retains a voice, while giving away 100% of their estimated US$3 billion and all of Patagonia’s future profits that are not reinvested in the business. (US$100 million in 2022).

Even the legendary industrialist and philanthropist Andrew Carnegie only gave away 90% of his fortune.

Lessons for future philanthropists

My previous research records the top five motivations for Australian philanthropists as:

  • making a difference
  • giving back to the community
  • personal satisfaction
  • aligning with moral or philosophical beliefs, and
  • setting an example.

Chouinard’s philanthropy touches on all of these.

US philanthropy researcher Paul Schervish uses the phrase “hyperagency” to capture the character and capacity that some individuals have to achieve the outcomes they deem important for society.

Schervish suggests such changemakers build their own world rather than staying within the constraints of traditional approaches.

Chouinard built his own version of capitalism. He continues to argue the Earth is the only resource base for business, and is therefore the prime business stakeholder. Without it, there are no customers, shareholders, employees or business.

Patagonia’s core mission became: “We’re in business to save our home planet”. The company established Earth as its major shareholder.

A message in Dirtbag Billionaire for givers small and large, individual and corporate, is that authentic giving is about values.

Such authentic giving across a lifetime using money, time, voice, networks, workplaces and ethical principles is rarely so well on display as in the life of Yvon Chouinard.The Conversation

Wendy Scaife, Adjunct Associate Professor and Director, Australian Centre for Philanthropy and Nonprofit Studies, Queensland University of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Back to school: what are the money lessons to teach your kids at every age?

Atlantic Ambience/Pexels
Angel ZhongRMIT University

As parents prepare for another school year, there’s one subject that often gets overlooked: money.

Financial literacy isn’t just about numbers. It’s about building skills that will shape your child’s future decisions, from buying their first car to planning for retirement.

The good news? You don’t need to be a finance expert to teach these lessons. Start with age-appropriate concepts and build from there. Here’s what to focus on at each stage.

Primary school (ages 6–12): Making money real

Young children understand money better when they can see it and touch it. This is the perfect time to introduce pocket money – a regular allowance that teaches them money doesn’t appear magically. And once it’s gone, it’s gone.

Start small. Five dollars a week gives a seven-year-old enough to make choices without overwhelming them. Should they buy that chocolate bar now, or save for three weeks to get the Lego set they really want?

A child putting coins in a glass jar
Making saving visible can help young kids. cottonbro studio/pexels

This waiting game is crucial. It teaches delayed gratification, which research shows is linked to better financial outcomes later in life. When your child saves for weeks to buy something they’ve been eyeing, they’re learning that big goals require patience and planning.

Use clear jars or piggy banks so kids can literally watch their money grow. It makes saving visible and satisfying. Some families use a three-jar system: spending, saving, and sharing (for charity or gifts). This introduces the idea that money serves multiple purposes.

Let them make small mistakes too. If your eight-year-old blows their entire allowance on stickers and regrets it by Wednesday, that’s a five-dollar lesson that could save them thousands later.

Secondary school (ages 12–18): Real-world money management

Teenagers are ready for more complex financial concepts. This is when you shift from teaching about money to teaching with money.

Open a bank account together. Walk them through how banks work. Tell them that banks are not just storing money, they’re businesses that pay you interest to keep your money there and charge interest when you borrow. Explain that the interest you earn on savings is usually tiny, while the interest you pay on debts is much higher.

Introduce the concept of debit cards, but explain how they differ from credit. A debit card only spends money you already have. This is a good time to show them how to check their account balance and track spending through banking apps.

Talk about wants versus needs. Your teenager needs school shoes. They want the $200 branded pair. This isn’t about saying no. It’s about showing them trade-offs. “If you want those shoes, you’ll need to contribute $100 from your savings. Are they worth it?”

If your teenager gets a part-time job, teach them to check they’re being paid correctly. The Fair Work Ombudsman website has easy tools to calculate award rates, the minimum pay rates set for different industries and age groups. A 16-year-old working in retail should know what they’re entitled to earn.

This is also the time to introduce the concept of paying yourself first. When money comes in, savings come out first. Even putting aside 10% teaches the habit of treating savings as non-negotiable – it’s not whatever is left over.

Young person working in a cafe
Many young people get their first part-time job in hospitality. Frazao Studio Latino/Getty

School leavers (ages 18+): Building wealth basics

Young adults entering work face a new financial landscape. They’re earning more, but expenses grow too, such as transport, social life, and maybe rent.

Start with superannuation. This is money an employer must put aside for an employee’s retirement. It may seem irrelevant when your child is 18, but a young person who understands super early has a massive advantage.

Here’s why: compound growth. Money invested at 18 has 40+ years to grow. Even small amounts become significant. If you put an extra $20 a week into super from age 18, you could have at least an extra $300,000 by retirement, thanks to compound returns. That’s the snowball effect, when the investment gains on your contributions start earning returns as well.

Introduce investing apps, but with caution. Digital investing apps such as CommSec Pocket and Stake make investing accessible with small amounts. They let young people buy into diversified funds, which are collections of many different investments, rather than trying to pick individual shares.

Explain the fundamental trade-off: higher potential returns come with higher risk. Shares can grow more than savings accounts, but they can also fall in value quickly.

Teach them about the share market without jargon. When you buy shares, you own a tiny piece of a company. If the company does well, your share becomes more valuable. If it doesn’t, your share can lose value.

Diversification – spreading money across many companies – reduces the risk of losing everything if one company fails.

The lessons that matter most

Financial education isn’t really just about money. It’s about decision-making, delayed gratification, and understanding that every choice has trade-offs. It’s a life skill you build over time, one conversation and one decision at a time.

The most valuable lesson you can teach at any age? Money is a tool, not a goal. It gives you choices and security. Teaching your children to use that tool wisely is one of the greatest gifts you can give them.

Start these conversations early. Make them normal. And remember, you’re teaching as much by how you handle money as by what you say about it. Children notice when you compare prices, when you talk about saving for holidays, when you decide something isn’t worth the price.The Conversation

Angel Zhong, Professor of Finance, RMIT University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Swap muesli bars for homemade popcorn: 5 ways to pack a lower-waste lunch box

Antoni Shkraba Studio/ Pexels
Neha LalchandaniDeakin University

If you pack school lunchboxes for your children, you’ll know it can sometimes feel like a real slog.

It needs to be easy to prepare, nutritious and something children will actually eat. On top of this, there is increasing awareness it should be friendly for the environment and not generate food and plastic waste.

As a 2021 OzHarvest report noted, Australian students throw away an estimated 5 million uneaten sandwiches, 3 million pieces of whole fruit and 3 million items of packaged foods each year.

As students return to school, here’s what schools and families can do to pack lower-waste lunches.

Our research

My colleagues and I have been researching what South Australian families put in lunchboxes and why.

In our 2025 study of 673 preschool and primary school lunchboxes, we found 53% of all packaged items in lunchboxes were single-use plastics, mostly from snacks. The most common packaged snack types were chips and muesli bars.

We found families tend to let children’s preferences drive what they pack – because if food comes home untouched, kids can go hungry or food may end up in the bin.

Parents also told us they tend to rely on packaged foods because they are busy and have little time to prepare school lunches.

It’s not that they don’t care about sustainability, but choosing familiar packaged items they know their children will definitely eat take priority.

How schools can make eating easier

Our research also found primary school eating times can be short – only around ten minutes at lunch – as children are keen to get out and play.

So schools should consider extending eating time to allow children to be more settled and eat more of what’s packed. This can mean less waste and fewer hungry moments later in the day. Other research shows longer seated time for eating means children are more likely to eat fruits and vegetables.

Schools could also consider scheduling eating times after play. While teachers and parents may worry children will get too hungry, research suggests scheduling play before lunch can help children eat more of their meal, and more nutritious items too. This is because they arrive at lunch with a healthy appetite and less urgency to rush through eating.

Schools can also incorporate food and sustainability literacy into the curriculum, to help kids embrace healthier and less-packaged foods. Schools can also encourage more “nude food” (packaging-free) days, provide families with healthy, low-waste lunchbox suggestions and have recycling and compost bins handy in the playground.

How can you pack a low-waste lunchbox?

1. Talk to your child about what they like to eat at school and how much

This allows them to tell you what works for them at school – which may be different from at home. Invite them to pack the lunchboxes with you the night before school when there is more time.

This can build independence and encourages children to take more responsibility for what they eat at school. Perhaps if they have packed it and understand the work involved, they are more likely to eat it.

2. Substitute packaged snacks for alternatives

Try packing fruits that need no preparation. Also consider vegetable sticks and boiled eggs (you can prep them in a batch and store in the fridge).

You can make a batch of savoury muffins, home-made popcorn (chuck kernels in a brown paper bag and microwave) or your own portions of low-sugar yoghurt in reusable containers.

3. Stock up on reusable containers

There are lots of options to consider, including:

  • bento-style, compartmentalised lunchboxes are great for packing a variety of items and they can keep foods separate, preventing soggy snacks

  • small stackable tubs can be used for yoghurt, fruit chunks, boiled eggs and veggie sticks. Look for clear containers (so kids know what’s inside) with leak-resistant lids

  • reusable and washable fabric or silicone snack bags for sandwiches, crackers and other dry snacks like popcorn and mini muffins.

4. Avoid these items

Avoid cling film, plastic bags and foil. Also avoid supermarket snacks in individual plastic wrappers – such as popcorn or bars.

5. Make it manageable

We know preparing school lunchboxes can be demanding for families. So if you are going to make some changes, it’s OK to start small. You don’t need to prepare everything from scratch everyday. A starting point could be using more reusable containers and portioning bulk-bought foods.The Conversation

Neha Lalchandani, Research Fellow, Global Centre for Preventive Health and Nutrition, Deakin University, Deakin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Did the kids stay up late in the holidays? 3 ways to get sleep routines back

Catherine Falls Commercial/ Getty Images
Yaqoot FatimaUniversity of the Sunshine CoastDanielle WilsonUniversity of the Sunshine CoastJasneek Chawla, and Nisreen AouiraUniversity of the Sunshine Coast

For many families, the holidays mean sleep routines go out the window. Bedtimes drift later, screens stay on into the late evening, sleep-ins become the norm.

But as term time rolls around, parents start to dread what’s coming – getting overtired, half-asleep kids up, dressed and out the door on time.

We are experts in sleep health. With a little planning and patience, you can bring sleep back into your routine without turning bedtime into a nightmare.

The science behind holiday sleep drift

During the school term, children’s sleep–wake cycles are usually regulated by fixed daily schedules and predictable bedtimes. These play an important role in stabilising circadian rhythms (the internal body clock). On school days, children are typically exposed to morning daylight and structured indoor lighting, both of which help set the body clock.

During holidays, children are more likely to have increased evening exposure to screens and artificial lighting, which can delay melatonin release – the hormone that promotes sleep.

Understandably, sleep also becomes less regular. This in turn can weaken daily signals which help regulate sleep timing, making it harder to maintain a stable sleep–wake pattern.

What are the signs my child’s sleep is ‘out of whack’?

A child’s sleep schedule may be considered “out of whack” when their sleep timing becomes inconsistent and starts to affect how they function during the day.

Common signs include frequent late bedtimes, difficulty falling asleep, difficulty waking in the morning, and feeling groggy or tired during the day.

You may also notice changes in mood and behaviour, such as irritability, emotional outbursts, reduced concentration or increased restlessness and hyperactivity.

Large day-to-day shifts in sleep and wake times (especially during school holidays) can also be a sign their body clock is out of sync and their sleep schedule needs attention.

Why is it important to have a healthy sleep routine?

If you think about how you feel after a bad or broken night’s sleep, it’s probably not hard to understand why we need a healthy sleep routine.

For children, the stakes are even higher. Sleep supports brain development, consolidates learning, processes emotions and allows the body to recover.

When sleep routines are disrupted children may struggle with concentration and memory, have mood swings and behavioural difficulties, and find it harder to regulate emotions. All these factors can affect school performance and social relationships.

Here’s how to get back into a sleep routine.

1. Have regular bed and wake times

Start by setting a regular bedtime and wake time every day, including weekends, to ensure children get the right amount of sleep for their age. For primary school children, this means around nine to eleven hours a night.

If your child has been staying up later over the holidays, gradually bring bedtime earlier by 15-30 minutes every few nights until it’s back in line with their regular schedule. Do the same for wake time if your child has been sleeping in. Earlier wakings can be encouraged with exposure to daylight in the bedroom and a healthy breakfast to help realign their bodily rhythms.

Napping during the day should be avoided, as naps can interfere with nighttime sleep.

2. Have a wind-down routine

Going to bed earlier may be challenging for some children. A calming bedtime routine of relaxing activities may help some children sleep more easily. A warm bath or shower, soft music, reading a book or cuddling with a caregiver may provide comfort.

If they find it difficult to fall asleep, suggest they come out of their bedroom for a short time (such as 15 to 20 minutes) to do a quiet activity (such as reading or drawing – no screens!). This may help them feel sleepy before returning to bed.

3. Make bedrooms quiet and dark

The sleep environment matters too. A quiet, dark, comfortable space where children feel safe helps tell the brain it’s time to sleep.

Simple reward systems, such as sticker charts, can reinforce routines for younger children. This can show kids sleep is a positive and predictable part of their day.

Do the same things yourself

And don’t forget the role of parents. Good sleep habits also need to be modelled by parents. When older children see their parents maintaining consistent bedtimes and calm wind-down routines, they’re more likely to follow suit.

It won’t be perfect overnight.

Re-establishing healthy sleep patterns may take a week or two.

So start, and stay consistent, and you’ll make back-to-school mornings calmer and easier for everyone.The Conversation

Yaqoot Fatima, Professor of Sleep Health, University of the Sunshine CoastDanielle Wilson, Research Fellow and Sleep Scientist at the Thompson Institute, University of the Sunshine CoastJasneek Chawla, Leader, Kids Sleep Research Group at the Child Health Research Centre, University of Queensland, Paediatric Respiratory and Sleep Medicine Specialist, and Nisreen Aouira, Research Program Manager, Let's Yarn About Sleep, Thompson Institute, University of the Sunshine Coast

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Should I take a fish oil supplement for my heart, joints or mood?

Mary BushellUniversity of Canberra

Fish oil, also known as omega-3, is one of the most popular dietary supplements. It’s often promoted to protect the heart, boost mood, reduce inflammation and support overall health.

But how much of this is backed by science, and when might fish oil supplements actually be worth taking?

A long history

People have been taking oils from fish for centuries.

Modern interest surged in the 1970s when scientists studying Inuit diets discovered omega-3 fatty acids and their heart-protective effects.

By the 1980s, fish oil capsules were being marketed as an easy way to get these healthy fats.

What’s in fish oil?

Fish oil comes from oily fish such as salmon, sardines, tuna, herring and mackerel. It’s rich in a special type of fat called omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFAs), mainly EPA (eicosapentaenoic acid) and DHA (docosahexaenoic acid).

These omega-3s play an important role in how our cells function. Every cell in the body is surrounded by a thin, flexible layer called a cell membrane. This membrane works like a protective skin: it keeps the cell’s contents safe, controls what moves in and out, and helps cells communicate with one another.

Omega-3s don’t build the membrane itself, but they slot into it, becoming part of its structure. This helps the membrane stay fluid and flexible, allowing it to work more efficiently, especially in tissue that relies on fast, precise signalling, such as in the brain and eyes.

Because we can’t make enough omega-3s on our own, we need to get them from food or, sometimes, supplements.

How are fish oil supplements made?

After fish are caught, their tissues are cooked and pressed to release oil. This crude oil is purified and refined to remove impurities including heavy metals such as copper, iron and mercury.

During processing, the oil may be concentrated to boost its EPA and DHA content.

The purified oil is then encapsulated in soft gels or bottled as liquid oil.

Some supplements are further treated to reduce odour or the familiar “fishy” aftertaste.

Fish oil and heart health

Omega-3 fatty acids are best known for their role in heart health, particularly for lowering triglycerides, a type of fat in the blood that, when elevated, can increase the risk of heart disease.

A 2023 paper pooled 90 clinical trials with more than 72,000 participants and found a near linear relationship between dose and effect. That doesn’t mean “more is always better”, but higher doses tended to produce bigger improvements in heart-related risk factors.

It found you need more than 2 grams per day of EPA and DHA combined to meaningfully lower triglycerides (by 15 to 30%). This is most relevant for people with existing heart disease, high triglycerides, or obesity.

But it’s important to read the label. A “1,000 mg” fish oil capsule usually refers to the total oil weight of the oil, not the active omega-3 content. Most standard capsules contain only about 300 mg of combined EPA and DHA the rest is other fats.

At lower doses, changes in blood fats were modest. The same analysis suggested low-dose fish oil may even nudge LDL or “bad” cholesterol up slightly, while having only a small effect on triglycerides.

Fish oil capsules
At lower doses, any changes to heart health are modest. Pixabay/Pixels

2018 trial tested a high-strength purified EPA product (4 grams per day) in people already taking statins to lower their cholesterol. Over five years, it prevented one major heart event (heart attack, stroke or urgent procedure) for every 21 people treated. However this was a prescription-only pharmaceutical-grade EPA, not a standard fish-oil capsule.

In Australia, fish oils are sold in pharmacies, health food stores and supermarkets. Some concentrated products are available as “practitioner-only” supplements via health professionals.

The same purified EPA used in the 2018 trial is now available in Australia as Vazkepa, a prescription-only medicine. It was added to the Pharmaceutical Benefits Scheme (PBS) in October 2024, making it more accessible for high-risk patients.

For otherwise healthy people, the evidence that standard fish oil supplements prevent heart attacks or strokes is much less convincing.

What about arthritis and joint pain?

Fish oil has mild anti-inflammatory effects.

In people with inflammatory arthritis (such as rheumatoid arthritis), omega-3s can reduce joint tenderness and morning stiffness.

These benefits, however, require higher consistent doses, usually around 2.7g of EPA and DHA per day. This is the equivalent of around nine standard 1,000mg fish oil capsules (containing 300 mg of EPA and DHA) daily for at least eight to 12 weeks.

Can fish oil improve mood?

Some studies suggest omega-3s, particularly those higher in EPA, can modestly reduce symptoms of clinical depression when taken alongside antidepressants.

A 2019 review of 26 trials (involving more than 2,000 people) found a small overall benefit, mainly for EPA-rich formulations at doses up to about 1 gram per day. DHA-only products didn’t show clear effects.

That doesn’t mean fish oil is a mood booster for everyone. For people without diagnosed depression, omega-3 supplements haven’t been shown to reliably lift mood or prevent depression.

How much can you take?

For most people, fish oil is safe.

Common side effects include a fishy aftertaste, mild nausea and diarrhoea. Taking capsules with food or choosing odourless or “de-fishified” products can help.

Prescription strength products such as Vazkepa (high-dose EPA) are also well tolerated, but they can slightly increase the risk of irregular heartbeat (atrial fibrillation) and bleeding.

Up to 3 grams per day of combined EPA and DHA from supplements is generally considered safe for most adults.

Higher doses for specific medical conditions should be taken under medical supervision.

So, should you take it?

The Heart Foundation recommends Australians eat two to three serves of oily fish a week. This would provide 250–500 mg of EPA and DHA per day.

If you don’t eat fish, a fish oil supplement (or algal oil if you’re vegetarian or vegan) can help you meet your omega-3 needs.

If you have heart disease (with high triglycerides) or inflammatory arthritis, fish oil may offer extra benefits. But dose and product type matter, so speak with a health professional.

For most people, though, two or three serves of oily fish each week remain the simplest, safest and most nutritious way to get omega-3s.The Conversation

Mary Bushell, Clinical Associate Professor in Pharmacy, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

ChatGPT Health promises to personalise health information. It comes with many risks

Julie AyreUniversity of SydneyAdam DunnUniversity of Sydney, and Kirsten McCafferyUniversity of Sydney

Many of us already use generative artificial intelligence (AI) tools such as ChatGPT for health advice. They give quick, confident and personalised answers, and the experience can feel more private than speaking to a human.

Now, several AI companies have unveiled dedicated “health and wellness” tools. The most prominent is ChatGPT Health, launched by OpenAI earlier this month.

ChatGPT Health promises to generate more personalised answers, by allowing users to link medical records and wellness apps, upload diagnostic imaging and interpret test results.

But how does it really work? And is it safe?

Most of what we know about this new tool comes from the company that launched it, and questions remain about how ChatGPT Health would work in Australia. Currently, users in Australia can sign up for a waitlist to request access.

Let’s take a look.

AI health advice is booming

Data from 2024 shows 46% of Australians had recently used an AI tool.

Health queries are popular. According to OpenAI, one in four regular ChatGPT users worldwide submit a health-related prompt each week.

Our 2024 study estimated almost one in ten Australians had asked ChatGPT a health query in the previous six months.

This was more common for groups that face challenges finding accessible health information, including:

  • people born in a non-English speaking country
  • those who spoke another language at home
  • people with limited health literacy.

Among those who hadn’t recently used ChatGPT for health, 39% were considering using it soon.

How accurate is the advice?

Independent research consistently shows generative AI tools do sometimes give unsafe health advice, even when they have access to a medical record.

There are several high-profile examples of AI tools giving unsafe health advice, including when ChatGPT allegedly encouraged suicidal thoughts.

Recently, Google removed several AI Overviews on health topics – summaries which appear at the top of search results – after a Guardian investigation found the advice about blood tests results was dangerous and misleading.

This was just one health prompt they studied. There could be much more advice the AI is getting wrong we don’t know about yet.

So, what’s new about ChatGPT Health?

The AI tool has several new features aimed to personalise its answers.

According to OpenAI, users will be able to connect their ChatGPT Health account with medical records and smartphone apps such as MyFitnessPal. This would allow the tool to use personal data about diagnoses, blood tests, and monitoring, as well as relevant context from the user’s general ChatGPT conversations.

OpenAI emphasises information doesn’t flow the other way: conversations in ChatGPT Health are kept separate from general ChatGPT, with stronger security and privacy. The company also says ChatGPT Health data won’t be used to train foundation models.

OpenAI says it has worked with more than 260 clinicians in 60 countries (including Australia), to give feedback on and improve the quality of ChatGPT Health outputs.

In theory, all of this means ChatGPT Health could give more personalised answers compared to general ChatGPT, with greater privacy.

But are there still risks?

Yes. OpenAI openly states ChatGPT Health is not designed to replace medical care and is not intended for diagnosis or treatment.

It can still make mistakes. Even if ChatGPT Health has access to your health data, there is very little information about how accurate and safe the tool is, and how well it has summarised the sources it has used.

The tool has not been independently tested. It’s also unclear whether ChatGPT Health would be considered a medical device and regulated as one in Australia.

The tool’s responses may not reflect Australian clinical guidelines, our health systems and services, and may not meet the needs of our priority populations. These include First Nations people, those from culturally and linguistically diverse backgrounds, people with disability and chronic conditions, and older adults.

We don’t know yet if ChatGPT Health will meet data privacy and security standards we typically expect for medical records in Australia.

Currently, many Australians’ medical records are incomplete due to patchy uptake of MyHealthRecord, meaning even if you upload your medical record, the AI may not have the full picture of your medical history.

For now, OpenAI says medical record and some app integrations are only available in the United States.

So, what’s the best way to use ChatGPT for health questions?

In our research, we have worked with community members to create short educational materials that help people think about the risks that come with relying on AI for health advice, and to consider other options.

Higher risk

Health questions that would usually require clinical expertise to answer carry more risk of serious consequences. This could include:

  • finding out what symptoms mean
  • asking for advice about treatment
  • interpreting test results.

AI responses can often seem sensible – and increasingly personalised – but that doesn’t necessarily mean they are correct or safe. So, for these higher-risk questions, the best option is always to speak with a health professional.

Lower risk

Other health questions are less risky. These tend to be more general, such as:

  • learning about a health condition or treatment option
  • understanding medical terms
  • brainstorming what questions to ask during a medical appointment.

Ideally, AI is just one of the information sources you use.

Where else can I get free advice?

In Australia we have a free 24/7 national phone service, where anyone can speak with a registered nurse about their symptoms: 1800 MEDICARE (1800 633 422).

Symptom Checker, operated by HealthDirect, is another publicly funded, evidence-based tool that will help you understand your next steps and connect you with local services.

AI tools are here to stay

For now, we need clear, reliable, independent, and publicly available information about how well the current tools work and the limits of what they can do. This information must be kept up-to-date as the tools evolve.

Purpose-built AI health tools could transform how people gain knowledge, skills and confidence to manage their health. But these need to be designed with communities and clinicians, and prioritise accuracy, equity and transparency.

It is also essential to equip our diverse communities with the knowledge and skills to navigate this new technology safely.The Conversation

Julie Ayre, Post Doctoral Research Fellow, Sydney Health Literacy Lab, University of SydneyAdam Dunn, Professor of Biomedical Informatics, University of Sydney, and Kirsten McCaffery, NHMRC Principal Research Fellow, Sydney School of Health, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Does your child want a part-time job? Here’s what the law says about kids at work

Boston Public Library/Unsplash
Kerry BrownEdith Cowan University

For teens, a holiday or weekend job is a good way to earn pocket money and learn a new range of skills.

But given the historical and ongoing exploitation of child labour across the globe, strict laws are set out to protect children.

Australia follows the 1973 International Labour Organisation (ILO) convention on a minimum working age. Under this convention, the standard age for employing young people is 15 years old.

But people can start work before that, subject to additional legal protections. Even if young people are volunteers and undertaking unpaid work, there are similar restrictions on their activities to the limits in paid employment.

So if you have a young person in your life who’s thinking about getting a job, it’s worth knowing what the laws and rules are.

What are the rules for kids under 15?

Every state in Australia has specific requirements for employing workers who are under 15 years old. These specifications differ from state to state, but most principles are broadly similar.

For employers, they need to hold a child employment licence to employ children under 15.

There are set limits on how many hours young people can work, depending on their age. Generally, they can do up to ten hours each week.

There are also restrictions on doing heavy work. Young workers under 15 years can only undertake light duties. In Victoria, for example, a child cannot work on a building site or on a fishing boat.

There are also rules for when children can work. Working during school hours is generally not allowed because state laws require children to attend school. Legislation about children in the workplace is built around ensuring they access education.

A teenage girl cuts a slice of cake in a cafe
The law limits where children and teenagers can work. Nick David/Getty

Some jurisdictions have special provisions around times of day children under 15 can work.

In Western Australia, young workers aged 10–12 cannot start work earlier than 6.00am or finish their work after 7.00pm. Children aged 13–14 cannot start before 6.00am but can finish work at 10.00pm.

In Tasmania, children between the ages of 11 and 14 aren’t allowed to work between 9.00pm and 5.00am of the following day, unless it’s for charity or school.

There are similar laws in New South WalesVictoria and Queensland.

What sorts of jobs can kids under 15 do?

While laws are in place to protect children from exploitation, there are many opportunities for children to be part of the workforce, starting as young as ten or 11 years in the delivery services industry or as child models in the advertising industry.

Children from ages 10–12 can work in a limited capacity delivering newspapers, pamphlets or advertising material.

Children aged 13–14 can extend this work to a variety of roles in the retail and hospitality sectors, including in cafes and restaurants, the fast food industry and shops.

While they can be employed in the hospitality sector, young workers under 18 generally can’t serve alcohol or sell cigarettes.

In some sectors, there are fewer requirements for employing children of any age.

Working in a family business, for a charity or not-for-profit organisation or in the entertainment industry is not subject to many restrictions, apart from the need to attend school.

Parental supervision is needed under some circumstances. For example, photographic work with children up to three years old needs a parent involved, as does letterbox delivery, door-to-door sales and charity work by kids under 12.

In some instances the requirement to undertake work outside school hours can be waived, such as when a child is home schooled.

What if a child is 15 or older?

Children older than 15 years are still subject to different conditions than 18-year-old or adult workers. Child workers up to the age of 18 years still require their parent’s consent or hold a right to work “special circumstances certificate” to be employed.

Workers under 18 years are exempt from holding a Working with Children Check, required when working in close contact with children such as in child care centres and schools, or involved in sports coaching.

The adult hourly wage rate starts at 21 years. Younger workers are paid a percentage of the adult rate, so the wages of young people are differentiated by age.

The exceptions to the rules

The entertainment and advertising industries are high profile and highly sought after sectors employing children. But they’re not subject to many of the rules above.

Laws allow children in the entertainment industry to “take the stage” at any age, provided their schooling is not interrupted. Children can work as an actor, musician, entertainer or a model in advertising under these conditions, but all need parental consent.

The entertainment industry has requirements for employers to be licensed to employ children and adult employees may need to undergo a Working with Children Check if they are working alongside those under 18 years in a role such as a coach or an actor.

Parents of child workers have the right to be informed about all aspects of their child’s job, including extensive briefings about the things their child will see, hear and do in their role.

The child cannot be exposed to anything that is inappropriate for their age, maturity and level of development, or be put in situations to cause them distress or embarrassment.

But even when entirely lawful, things can get messy. Signing kids up to record deals or modelling contracts can be hard for parents to navigate and many may not understand the potential long-term ramifications. It may be helpful to consult a lawyer when looking at legal paperwork like this.

Overall, labour laws emphasise the importance of education, adequate rest and access to leisure time. Any job a child can get must adhere to these standards.The Conversation

Kerry Brown, Professor of Employment and Industry, School of Business and Law, Edith Cowan University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

View from The Hill: Dysfunctional federal opposition is in gridlock

Michelle GrattanUniversity of Canberra

A week out from the resumption of parliament, the federal opposition is in a state of paralysis.

The Liberals have a full-blown leadership crisis. A majority of the party believe Sussan Ley can’t survive for long.

But leadership contenders Angus Taylor and Andrew Hastie, both from the right of the party, don’t want to run against each other, dividing their factional support. They’re in a wrestle, each wanting the other to pull back.

Taylor trails his coat while keeping formally within the rules. He won’t confirm he is after Ley’s job, pleading shadow cabinet discipline when pressed. But he won’t rule anything out either.

The Hastie camp had a story in The Australian saying he had discussed with his wife the implications of becoming leader, and she was “fully supportive”. This was to clear away Hastie’s position of some time ago that he was not pitching for leadership for a while because of having a young family.

Hastie seems raring to go, Taylor is preferring to delay. Moderates argue the Nationals should not be rewarded for last week’s behaviour by the Liberals rushing into a change.

The stand-off lessens the chance of a vote next week, though the situation is febrile and so it is not impossible it comes to a head then. The Liberal Party will have its regular meeting on Tuesday morning.

Many in the Liberals and some in the Nationals think the most urgent issue is to have the split in the former Coalition repaired.

But Nationals leader David Littleproud says this won’t happen unless the three Nationals frontbenchers whom Ley forced to resign last week (after they broke shadow cabinet solidity over the government’s anti-hate legislation) are reinstated. Ley has refused to contemplate meeting that condition.

Liberals continue to lash out at Littleproud’s behaviour last week, leading to the fracture. Victorian Liberal Tim Wilson told Sky on Tuesday the Nationals leader “basically replicated the political consequences of Barnaby Joyce on a Braddon pavement [when an intoxicated Joyce was pictured lying flat out talking on the phone]. They’ve hit a flat. It hasn’t worked. What we need is leadership. We need responsible people standing up for the national interest and doing what’s right by Australia and Australians.”

Meanwhile Ley needs to reshuffle her frontbench by the time parliament resumes next week, to fill the positions vacated by the Nationals. She has stayed her hand to give some time for a possible rethink by the Nationals about re-forming the Coalition. But it would be odd to go into the sitting with multiple vacancies, and especially difficult when Senate estimates hearings loom the following week.

Littleproud has yet to nominate spokespeople for a “shadow” shadow ministry. Once he does that, it becomes harder to get the Coalition back together, even under a new Liberal leader.

On Thursday many Liberals will gather in Melbourne for a memorial service for Katie Allen, who was Liberal MP for Higgins in 2019–22. It’s a sad reality that during leadership crises, such gatherings can provide the opportunity for very political conversations. This occasion is likely to be no exception.The Conversation

Michelle Grattan, Professorial Fellow, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.